SIPROTEC 4
Overcurrent Time Protec-
tion 7SJ80
V4.7
Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8
Preface
Open Source Software
Table of Contents
Introduction 1
Functions 2
Mounting and Commissioning 3
Technical Data 4
Ordering Information and Accessories A
Terminal Assignments B
Connection Examples C
Current Transformer Requirements D
Default Settings and Protocol-dependent
Functions E
Functions, Settings, Information F
Literature
Glossary
Index
i
i
NOTE
For your own safety, observe the warnings and safety instructions contained in this document, if available.
Disclaimer of Liability
This document has been subjected to rigorous technical
review before being published. It is revised at regular inter-
vals, and any modifications and amendments are included
in the subsequent issues. The content of this document has
been compiled for information purposes only. Although
Siemens AG has made best efforts to keep the document as
precise and up-to-date as possible, Siemens AG shall not
assume any liability for defects and damage which result
through use of the information contained herein.
This content does not form part of a contract or of business
relations; nor does it change these. All obligations of
Siemens AG are stated in the relevant contractual agree-
ments.
Siemens AG reserves the right to revise this document from
time to time.
Document version: E50417-G1140-C343-A8.00
Edition: 12.2017
Version of the product described: V4.7
Copyright
Copyright © Siemens AG 2017. All rights reserved.
The disclosure, duplication, distribution and editing of this
document, or utilization and communication of the content
are not permitted, unless authorized in writing. All rights,
including rights created by patent grant or registration of a
utility model or a design, are reserved.
Registered Trademarks
SIPROTEC®, DIGSI®, SIGUARD®, SIMEAS®, and SICAM® are
registered trademarks of Siemens AG. Any unauthorized
use is illegal. All other designations in this document can
be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own
purposes can infringe the rights of the owner.
Preface
Purpose of the Manual
This manual describes the functions, operation, installation, and commissioning of devices 7SJ80. In partic-
ular, one will find:
•Information regarding the configuration of the scope of the device and a description of the device func-
tions and settings → Chapter 2;
•Instructions for Installation and Commissioning → Chapter 3;
•Compilation of the Technical Data → Chapter 4;
•As well as a compilation of the most significant data for advanced users → Appendix.
General information with regard to design, configuration, and operation of SIPROTEC 4 devices are set out in
the SIPROTEC 4 System Description /1/ SIPROTEC 4 System Description.
Target Audience
Protection-system engineers, commissioning engineers, persons entrusted with the setting, testing and main-
tenance of selective protection, automation and control equipment, and operating personnel in electrical
installations and power plants.
Scope
This manual applies to: SIPROTEC 4 Overcurrent Time Protection 7SJ80; Firmware-Version V4.7.
Indication of Conformity
This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the
approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility
(EMC Council Directive 2004/108/EC) and concerning electrical equipment for use within
specified voltage limits (Low-voltage Directive 2006/95 EC).
This conformity is proved by tests conducted by Siemens AG in accordance with the Council
Directive in agreement with the generic standards EN 61000-6-2 and EN 61000-6-4 for EMC
directive, and with the standard EN 60255-27 for the low-voltage directive.
The device has been designed and produced for industrial use.
The product conforms with the international standards of the series IEC 60255 and the
German standard VDE 0435.
Additional Standards IEEE Std C37.90 (see Chapter 4 "Technical Data")
This product is UL-certified according to the Technical Data. file E194016
[ul-schutz-7sx80-100310, 1, --_--]
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 3
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Additional Support
For questions about the system, please contact your Siemens sales partner.
Support
Our Customer Support Center provides a 24-hour service.
Phone: +49 (180) 524-7000
Fax: +49 (180) 524-2471
E-Mail: support.energy@siemens.com
Training Courses
Inquiries regarding individual training courses should be addressed to our Training Center:
Siemens AG
Siemens Power Academy TD
Humboldtstraße 59
90459 Nürnberg
Germany
Phone: +49 (911) 433-7415
Fax: +49 (911) 433-7929
E-Mail: poweracademy@siemens.com
Internet: www.siemens.com/poweracademy
Notes on Safety
This document is not a complete index of all safety measures required for operation of the equipment (module
or device). However, it comprises important information that must be followed for personal safety, as well as
to avoid material damage. Information is highlighted and illustrated as follows according to the degree of
danger:
!
DANGER
DANGER means that death or severe injury will result if the measures specified are not taken.
²Comply with all instructions, in order to avoid death or severe injuries.
!
WARNING
WARNING means that death or severe injury may result if the measures specified are not taken.
²Comply with all instructions, in order to avoid death or severe injuries.
!
CAUTION
CAUTION means that medium-severe or slight injuries can occur if the specified measures are not taken.
²Comply with all instructions, in order to avoid moderate or minor injuries.
Preface
4 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
NOTICE
NOTICE means that property damage can result if the measures specified are not taken.
²Comply with all instructions, in order to avoid property damage.
i
i
NOTE
Important information about the product, product handling or a certain section of the documentation
which must be given particular attention.
Qualified Electrical Engineering Personnel
Only qualified electrical engineering personnel may commission and operate the equipment (module, device)
described in this document. Qualified electrical engineering personnel in the sense of this manual are people
who can demonstrate technical qualifications as electrical technicians. These persons may commission,
isolate, ground and label devices, systems and circuits according to the standards of safety engineering.
Proper Use
The equipment (device, module) may be used only for such applications as set out in the catalogs and the
technical description, and only in combination with third-party equipment recommended and approved by
Siemens.
Problem-free and safe operation of the product depends on the following:
•Proper transport
•Proper storage, setup and installation
•Proper operation and maintenance
When electrical equipment is operated, hazardous voltages are inevitably present in certain parts. If proper
action is not taken, death, severe injury or property damage can result:
•The equipment must be grounded at the grounding terminal before any connections are made.
•All circuit components connected to the power supply may be subject to dangerous voltage.
•Hazardous voltages may be present in equipment even after the supply voltage has been disconnected
(capacitors can still be charged).
•Operation of equipment with exposed current-transformer circuits is prohibited. Before disconnecting the
equipment, ensure that the current-transformer circuits are short-circuited.
•The limiting values stated in the document must not be exceeded. This must also be considered during
testing and commissioning.
Typographic and Symbol Conventions
The following text formats are used when literal information from the device or to the device appear in the
text flow:
Parameter Names
Designators of configuration or function parameters which may appear word-for-word in the display of the
device or on the screen of a personal computer (with operation software DIGSI), are marked in bold letters in
monospace type style. The same applies to titles of menus.
1234A
Parameter addresses have the same character style as parameter names. Parameter addresses contain the
suffix A in the overview tables if the parameter can only be set in DIGSI via the option Display additional
settings.
Parameter Options
Possible settings of text parameters, which may appear word-for-word in the display of the device or on the
screen of a personal computer (with operation software DIGSI), are additionally written in italics. The same
applies to the options of the menus.
Preface
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 5
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Indications
Designators for information, which may be output by the relay or required from other devices or from the
switch gear, are marked in a monospace type style in quotation marks.
Deviations may be permitted in drawings and tables when the type of designator can be obviously derived
from the illustration.
The following symbols are used in drawings:
Device-internal logical input signal
Device-internal logical output signal
Internal input signal of an analog quantity
External binary input signal with number (binary input,
input indication)
External binary output signal with number
(example of a value indication)
External binary output signal with number (device indication) used as
input signal
Example of a parameter switch designated FUNCTION with address
1234 and the possible settings ON and OFF
Besides these, graphical symbols are used in accordance with IEC 60617-12 and IEC 60617-13 or similar.
Some of the most frequently used are listed below:
Analog input variable
AND-gate operation of input values
OR-gate operation of input values
Exclusive OR gate (antivalence): output is active, if only one of the
inputs is active
Coincidence gate: output is active, if both inputs are active or inactive
at the same time
Dynamic inputs (edge-triggered) above with positive, below with
negative edge
Formation of one analog output signal from a number of analog input
signals
Limit stage with setting address and parameter designator (name)
Timer (pickup delay T, example adjustable) with setting address and
parameter designator (name)
Preface
6 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Timer (dropout delay T, example non-adjustable)
Dynamic triggered pulse timer T (monoflop)
Static memory (SR flipflop) with setting input (S), resetting input (R),
output (Q) and inverted output (Q), setting input dominant
Static memory (RS-flipflop) with setting input (S), resetting input (R),
output (Q) and inverted output (Q), resetting input dominant
Preface
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 7
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
8 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Open Source Software
The product contains, among other things, Open Source Software developed by third parties. The Open
Source Software used in the product and the license agreements concerning this software can be found in the
Readme_OSS. These Open Source Software files are protected by copyright. Your compliance with those
license conditions will entitle you to use the Open Source Software as foreseen in the relevant license. In the
event of conflicts between Siemens license conditions and the Open Source Software license conditions, the
Open Source Software conditions shall prevail with respect to the Open Source Software portions of the soft-
ware. The Open Source Software is licensed royalty-free. Insofar as the applicable Open Source Software
License Conditions provide for it you can order the source code of the Open Source Software from your
Siemens sales contact - against payment of the shipping and handling charges - for a period of at least 3 years
since purchase of the Product. We are liable for the Product including the Open Source Software contained in
it pursuant to the license conditions applicable to the Product. Any liability for the Open Source Software
beyond the program flow intended for the Product is explicitly excluded. Furthermore any liability for defects
resulting from modifications to the Open Source Software by you or third parties is excluded. We do not
provide any technical support for the Product if it has been modified.
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 9
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
10 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Table of Contents
Preface..........................................................................................................................................................3
Open Source Software..................................................................................................................................9
1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................19
1.1 Overall Operation..............................................................................................................20
1.2 Application Scope............................................................................................................. 22
1.3 Characteristics.................................................................................................................. 24
2 Functions.................................................................................................................................................... 29
2.1 General.............................................................................................................................30
2.1.1 Functional Scope......................................................................................................... 30
2.1.1.1 Functional Description........................................................................................... 30
2.1.1.2 Setting Notes......................................................................................................... 30
2.1.1.3 Settings................................................................................................................. 32
2.1.2 Device, General Settings.............................................................................................. 34
2.1.2.1 Functional Description........................................................................................... 34
2.1.2.2 Setting Notes......................................................................................................... 34
2.1.2.3 Settings................................................................................................................. 35
2.1.2.4 Information List..................................................................................................... 36
2.1.3 Power System Data 1...................................................................................................37
2.1.3.1 Functional Description........................................................................................... 37
2.1.3.2 Setting Notes......................................................................................................... 38
2.1.3.3 Settings................................................................................................................. 43
2.1.3.4 Information List..................................................................................................... 46
2.1.4 Oscillographic Fault Records........................................................................................ 46
2.1.4.1 Functional Description........................................................................................... 47
2.1.4.2 Setting Notes......................................................................................................... 48
2.1.4.3 Settings................................................................................................................. 48
2.1.4.4 Information List..................................................................................................... 48
2.1.5 Settings Groups........................................................................................................... 49
2.1.5.1 Functional Description........................................................................................... 49
2.1.5.2 Setting Notes......................................................................................................... 49
2.1.5.3 Settings................................................................................................................. 49
2.1.5.4 Information List..................................................................................................... 49
2.1.6 Power System Data 2...................................................................................................50
2.1.6.1 Functional Description........................................................................................... 50
2.1.6.2 Setting Notes......................................................................................................... 50
2.1.6.3 Settings................................................................................................................. 53
2.1.6.4 Information List..................................................................................................... 54
2.1.7 EN100-Module............................................................................................................ 55
2.1.7.1 Functional Description........................................................................................... 55
2.1.7.2 Setting Notes......................................................................................................... 55
2.1.7.3 Information List..................................................................................................... 55
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 11
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
2.2 Overcurrent Protection 50, 51, 50N, 51N.......................................................................... 56
2.2.1 General ...................................................................................................................... 56
2.2.2 Definite Time, High-set Elements 50-3, 50-2, 50N-3, 50N-2..........................................57
2.2.3 Definite Time Overcurrent Elements 50-1, 50N-1......................................................... 59
2.2.4 Inverse Time Overcurrent Elements 51, 51N ................................................................62
2.2.5 Inverse Time Overcurrent Protection 51V (Voltage-controlled / Voltagerestraint)...........65
2.2.6 Dynamic Cold Load Pickup Function.............................................................................67
2.2.7 Inrush Restraint .......................................................................................................... 68
2.2.8 Pickup Logic and Tripping Logic................................................................................... 69
2.2.9 Two-phase Overcurrent Protection (Only Non-Directional) ...........................................70
2.2.10 Fast Busbar Protection Using Reverse Interlocking ....................................................... 71
2.2.11 Setting Notes...............................................................................................................72
2.2.12 Settings.......................................................................................................................77
2.2.13 Information List...........................................................................................................79
2.3 Directional Overcurrent Protection 67, 67N....................................................................... 82
2.3.1 General....................................................................................................................... 82
2.3.2 Definite Time Directional High-set Elements 67-2, 67N-2, 67-3, 67N-3......................... 84
2.3.3 Definite Time, Directional Time Overcurrent Elements 67-1, 67N-1...............................85
2.3.4 Inverse Time, Directional Overcurrent Elements 67-TOC, 67N-TOC............................... 88
2.3.5 Interaction with Fuse Failure Monitor (FFM).................................................................89
2.3.6 Dynamic Cold Load Pickup Function.............................................................................90
2.3.7 Inrush Restraint........................................................................................................... 90
2.3.8 Determination of Direction.......................................................................................... 90
2.3.9 Reverse Interlocking for Double End Fed Lines..............................................................94
2.3.10 Setting Notes...............................................................................................................95
2.3.11 Settings.....................................................................................................................101
2.3.12 Information List.........................................................................................................104
2.4 Dynamic Cold Load Pickup...............................................................................................106
2.4.1 Functional Description...............................................................................................106
2.4.2 Setting Notes.............................................................................................................108
2.4.3 Settings.....................................................................................................................109
2.4.4 Information List.........................................................................................................111
2.5 Single-Phase Overcurrent Protection................................................................................112
2.5.1 Functional Description...............................................................................................112
2.5.2 High-impedance Ground Fault Unit Protection........................................................... 113
2.5.3 Tank Leakage Protection............................................................................................115
2.5.4 Setting Notes.............................................................................................................116
2.5.5 Settings.....................................................................................................................121
2.5.6 Information List.........................................................................................................121
2.6 Voltage Protection 27, 59................................................................................................122
2.6.1 Measurement Principle.............................................................................................. 122
2.6.2 Overvoltage Protection 59......................................................................................... 123
2.6.3 Undervoltage Protection 27....................................................................................... 124
2.6.4 Setting Notes.............................................................................................................127
2.6.5 Settings.....................................................................................................................130
2.6.6 Information List.........................................................................................................131
Table of Contents
12 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
2.7 Negative Sequence Protection 46....................................................................................132
2.7.1 Definite Time characteristic .......................................................................................132
2.7.2 Inverse Time characteristic.........................................................................................132
2.7.3 Setting Notes.............................................................................................................135
2.7.4 Settings.....................................................................................................................136
2.7.5 Information List.........................................................................................................137
2.8 Frequency Protection 81 O/U...........................................................................................138
2.8.1 Functional Description...............................................................................................138
2.8.2 Setting Notes.............................................................................................................139
2.8.3 Settings.....................................................................................................................140
2.8.4 Information List.........................................................................................................141
2.9 Undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection (27/Q)...............................................142
2.9.1 Functional Description...............................................................................................142
2.9.2 Setting Notes.............................................................................................................144
2.9.3 Settings.....................................................................................................................145
2.9.4 Information List.........................................................................................................146
2.10 Thermal Overload Protection 49...................................................................................... 147
2.10.1 Functional Description...............................................................................................147
2.10.2 Setting Notes.............................................................................................................149
2.10.3 Settings.....................................................................................................................152
2.10.4 Information List.........................................................................................................152
2.11 Monitoring Functions......................................................................................................154
2.11.1 Measurement Supervision......................................................................................... 154
2.11.1.1 General................................................................................................................154
2.11.1.2 Hardware Monitoring .......................................................................................... 154
2.11.1.3 Software Monitoring ........................................................................................... 156
2.11.1.4 Monitoring of the Transformer Circuits................................................................. 157
2.11.1.5 Measurement Voltage Failure Detection............................................................... 158
2.11.1.6 Broken Wire Monitoring of Voltage Transformer Circuits....................................... 162
2.11.1.7 Setting Notes....................................................................................................... 163
2.11.1.8 Settings............................................................................................................... 164
2.11.1.9 Information List................................................................................................... 165
2.11.2 Trip Circuit Supervision 74TC..................................................................................... 166
2.11.2.1 Functional Description......................................................................................... 166
2.11.2.2 Setting Notes....................................................................................................... 169
2.11.2.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 169
2.11.2.4 Information List................................................................................................... 170
2.11.3 Malfunction Responses of the Monitoring Functions.................................................. 170
2.11.3.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 170
2.12 Ground Fault Protection 64, 67N(s), 50N(s), 51N(s).........................................................172
2.12.1 Ground Fault Detection for cos-ϕ / sin-ϕ Measurement (Standard Method)..................172
2.12.2 Ground Fault Detection for V0/I0-ϕ Measurement.......................................................178
2.12.3 Extended Ground Fault Protection EPTR/TNP.............................................................. 182
2.12.3.1 General Information.............................................................................................182
2.12.3.2 Ground-Fault Protection EPTR - B.......................................................................... 183
2.12.3.3 Transformer Neutral-Point Protection TNP.............................................................184
2.12.4 Ground Fault Location............................................................................................... 184
2.12.5 Setting Notes.............................................................................................................185
2.12.6 Settings.....................................................................................................................193
2.12.7 Settings EPTR, TNP.....................................................................................................195
Table of Contents
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 13
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
2.12.8 Information List.........................................................................................................195
2.12.9 Information List EPTR, TNP......................................................................................... 196
2.13 Intermittent Ground Fault Protection...............................................................................198
2.13.1 Functional Description...............................................................................................198
2.13.2 Setting Notes.............................................................................................................201
2.13.3 Settings.....................................................................................................................202
2.13.4 Information List.........................................................................................................203
2.14 Dir. Intermittent earth fault protection............................................................................ 204
2.14.1 Functional Description...............................................................................................204
2.14.2 Setting Notes.............................................................................................................207
2.14.3 Settings.....................................................................................................................208
2.14.4 Information List.........................................................................................................208
2.15 Automatic Reclosing System 79.......................................................................................209
2.15.1 Program Execution.................................................................................................... 209
2.15.2 Blocking.................................................................................................................... 213
2.15.3 Status Recognition and Monitoring of the Circuit Breaker........................................... 215
2.15.4 Controlling Protection Elements.................................................................................216
2.15.5 Zone Sequencing / Fuse Saving Scheme..................................................................... 218
2.15.6 Setting Notes.............................................................................................................219
2.15.7 Settings.....................................................................................................................224
2.15.8 Information List.........................................................................................................230
2.16 Fault Locator...................................................................................................................232
2.16.1 Functional Description...............................................................................................232
2.16.2 Setting Notes.............................................................................................................233
2.16.3 Settings.....................................................................................................................234
2.16.4 Information List.........................................................................................................234
2.17 Breaker Failure Protection 50BF.......................................................................................235
2.17.1 Functional Description...............................................................................................235
2.17.2 Setting Notes.............................................................................................................238
2.17.3 Settings.....................................................................................................................240
2.17.4 Information List.........................................................................................................241
2.18 Flexible Protection Functions...........................................................................................242
2.18.1 Functional Description...............................................................................................242
2.18.2 Setting Notes.............................................................................................................246
2.18.3 Settings.....................................................................................................................250
2.18.4 Information List.........................................................................................................252
2.19 Reverse-Power Protection Application with Flexible Protection Function...........................253
2.19.1 Functional Description...............................................................................................253
2.19.2 Implementation of the Reverse Power Protection....................................................... 256
2.19.3 Configuring the Reverse Power Protection in DIGSI.....................................................258
2.20 Synchrocheck................................................................................................................. 261
2.20.1 General..................................................................................................................... 261
2.20.2 Functional Sequence................................................................................................. 263
2.20.3 De-energized Switching.............................................................................................264
2.20.4 Direct Command / Blocking........................................................................................265
2.20.5 Interaction with Control, Automatic Reclosing and External Control............................265
Table of Contents
14 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
2.20.6 Setting Notes.............................................................................................................267
2.20.7 Settings.....................................................................................................................271
2.20.8 Information List.........................................................................................................272
2.21 Phase Rotation................................................................................................................ 274
2.21.1 Functional Description...............................................................................................274
2.21.2 Setting Notes.............................................................................................................274
2.22 Function Logic................................................................................................................ 275
2.22.1 Pickup Logic of the Entire Device................................................................................275
2.22.2 Tripping Logic of the Entire Device.............................................................................275
2.22.3 Setting Notes.............................................................................................................276
2.23 Auxiliary Functions..........................................................................................................277
2.23.1 Message Processing...................................................................................................277
2.23.1.1 LED Displays and Binary Outputs (Output Relays)..................................................277
2.23.1.2 Information on the Integrated Display (LCD) or Personal Computer....................... 277
2.23.1.3 Information to a Control Center............................................................................279
2.23.2 Statistics....................................................................................................................279
2.23.2.1 Functional Description......................................................................................... 279
2.23.2.2 Circuit Breaker Maintenance.................................................................................280
2.23.2.3 Setting Notes....................................................................................................... 286
2.23.2.4 Information List................................................................................................... 288
2.23.3 Measurement............................................................................................................288
2.23.3.1 Display of Measured Values.................................................................................. 289
2.23.3.2 Transfer of Measured Values................................................................................ 290
2.23.3.3 Information List................................................................................................... 291
2.23.4 Average Measurements............................................................................................. 292
2.23.4.1 Functional Description......................................................................................... 292
2.23.4.2 Setting Notes....................................................................................................... 292
2.23.4.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 293
2.23.4.4 Information List................................................................................................... 293
2.23.5 Min/Max Measurement Setup.................................................................................... 293
2.23.5.1 Functional Description......................................................................................... 293
2.23.5.2 Setting Notes....................................................................................................... 293
2.23.5.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 294
2.23.5.4 Information List................................................................................................... 294
2.23.6 Set Points for Measured Values.................................................................................. 295
2.23.6.1 Setting Notes....................................................................................................... 296
2.23.7 Set Points for Statistic................................................................................................ 296
2.23.7.1 Functional Description......................................................................................... 296
2.23.7.2 Setting Notes....................................................................................................... 296
2.23.7.3 Information List................................................................................................... 296
2.23.8 Energy Metering........................................................................................................296
2.23.8.1 Functional Description......................................................................................... 297
2.23.8.2 Setting Notes....................................................................................................... 297
2.23.8.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 297
2.23.8.4 Information List................................................................................................... 297
2.23.9 Commissioning Aids.................................................................................................. 297
2.23.9.1 Functional Description......................................................................................... 298
2.24 Breaker Control...............................................................................................................299
2.24.1 Control Device...........................................................................................................299
2.24.1.1 Functional Description......................................................................................... 299
2.24.1.2 Information List................................................................................................... 300
Table of Contents
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 15
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
2.24.2 Types of Commands.................................................................................................. 300
2.24.2.1 Functional Description......................................................................................... 300
2.24.3 Command Sequence..................................................................................................300
2.24.3.1 Functional Description......................................................................................... 301
2.24.4 Interlocking............................................................................................................... 301
2.24.4.1 Functional Description......................................................................................... 301
2.24.5 Command Logging.................................................................................................... 308
2.24.5.1 Functional Description......................................................................................... 308
2.25 Notes on Device Operation..............................................................................................309
2.25.1 Different operation....................................................................................................309
3 Mounting and Commissioning................................................................................................................. 311
3.1 Mounting and Connections............................................................................................. 312
3.1.1 Configuration Information......................................................................................... 312
3.1.2 Hardware Modifications.............................................................................................315
3.1.2.1 Disassembly.........................................................................................................315
3.1.2.2 Connections of the Current Terminals...................................................................318
3.1.2.3 Connections of the Voltage Terminals...................................................................319
3.1.2.4 Interface Modules................................................................................................ 320
3.1.2.5 Reassembly..........................................................................................................322
3.1.3 Installation................................................................................................................ 323
3.1.3.1 General................................................................................................................323
3.1.3.2 Panel Flush Mounting...........................................................................................324
3.1.3.3 Cubicle Mounting.................................................................................................325
3.1.3.4 Panel Surface Mounting....................................................................................... 326
3.2 Checking Connections.....................................................................................................328
3.2.1 Checking the Data Connections of the Interfaces........................................................328
3.2.2 Checking the System Connections............................................................................. 330
3.3 Commissioning............................................................................................................... 332
3.3.1 Test Mode and Transmission Block.............................................................................333
3.3.2 Testing the System Interface (at Port B) .....................................................................333
3.3.3 Configuring Communication Modules........................................................................334
3.3.4 Checking the Status of Binary Inputs and Outputs...................................................... 338
3.3.5 Tests for Breaker Failure Protection............................................................................ 340
3.3.6 Testing User-Defined Functions..................................................................................342
3.3.7 Current, Voltage, and Phase Rotation Testing............................................................. 342
3.3.8 Test for High Impedance Protection........................................................................... 343
3.3.9 Testing the Reverse Interlocking Scheme....................................................................343
3.3.10 Direction Check with Load Current.............................................................................344
3.3.11 Polarity Check for Voltage Input V3.............................................................................345
3.3.12 Ground Fault Check................................................................................................... 347
3.3.13 Polarity Check for Current Input ΙE..............................................................................347
3.3.14 Trip/Close Tests for the Configured Operating Devices................................................ 350
3.3.15 Creating Oscillographic Recordings for Tests.............................................................. 350
3.4 Final Preparation of the Device........................................................................................352
4 Technical Data.......................................................................................................................................... 353
4.1 General Device Data........................................................................................................354
4.1.1 Analog Inputs............................................................................................................354
4.1.2 Auxiliary voltage........................................................................................................354
Table of Contents
16 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
4.1.3 Binary Inputs and Outputs......................................................................................... 355
4.1.4 Communication Interfaces.........................................................................................356
4.1.5 Electrical Tests...........................................................................................................358
4.1.6 Mechanical Tests....................................................................................................... 360
4.1.7 Climatic Stress Tests.................................................................................................. 360
4.1.8 Service Conditions..................................................................................................... 361
4.1.9 Constructive Design...................................................................................................361
4.1.10 UL certification conditions......................................................................................... 362
4.2 Definite-time Overcurrent Protection...............................................................................363
4.3 Inverse-time Overcurrent Protection................................................................................365
4.4 Directional Overcurrent Protection.................................................................................. 376
4.5 Inrush Restraint...............................................................................................................378
4.6 Dynamic Cold Load Pickup...............................................................................................379
4.7 1-phase Overcurrent Protection.......................................................................................380
4.8 Voltage Protection.......................................................................................................... 381
4.9 Negative Sequence Protection (definite-time characteristic).............................................383
4.10 Negative Sequence Protection (inverse-time characteristics)............................................384
4.11 Frequency Protection 81 O/U...........................................................................................390
4.12 Undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection (27/Q)...............................................391
4.13 Thermal Overload Protection...........................................................................................393
4.14 Ground Fault Detection (Sensitive/Insensitive).................................................................395
4.15 Intermittent Ground Fault Protection...............................................................................401
4.16 Directional intermittent ground fault protection.............................................................. 402
4.17 Automatic Reclosing....................................................................................................... 403
4.18 Fault Locator...................................................................................................................404
4.19 Breaker Failure Protection 50BF ...................................................................................... 405
4.20 Flexible Protection Functions ..........................................................................................406
4.21 Synchrocheck 25 ............................................................................................................409
4.22 User-defined Functions (CFC).......................................................................................... 411
4.23 Auxiliary Functions..........................................................................................................416
4.24 Switching Device Control................................................................................................ 421
4.25 Dimensions.....................................................................................................................422
4.25.1 Panel Flush and Cubicle Mounting (Housing Size 1/6) ................................................422
4.25.2 Panel Surface Mounting (Housing Size 1/6) ............................................................... 423
4.25.3 Bottom view..............................................................................................................423
4.25.4 Varistor..................................................................................................................... 424
A Ordering Information and Accessories.....................................................................................................425
A.1 Ordering Information 7SJ80 ........................................................................................... 426
A.2 Accessories..................................................................................................................... 431
B Terminal Assignments..............................................................................................................................433
B.1 7SJ80 — Housing for panel flush mounting and cubicle installation and for panel
surface mounting ...........................................................................................................434
C Connection Examples............................................................................................................................... 441
C.1 Connection Examples for Current and Voltage Transformers............................................442
Table of Contents
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 17
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
C.2 Connection Examples for SICAM I/O Units........................................................................454
D Current Transformer Requirements......................................................................................................... 455
D.1 Accuracy limiting factors................................................................................................. 456
D.2 Class conversion............................................................................................................. 457
D.3 Cable core balance current transformer........................................................................... 458
E Default Settings and Protocol-dependent Functions............................................................................... 459
E.1 LEDs............................................................................................................................... 460
E.2 Binary Input.................................................................................................................... 462
E.3 Binary Output................................................................................................................. 463
E.4 Function Keys................................................................................................................. 464
E.5 Default Display................................................................................................................465
E.6 Protocol-dependent Functions.........................................................................................468
F Functions, Settings, Information..............................................................................................................469
F.1 Functional Scope............................................................................................................ 470
F.2 Settings.......................................................................................................................... 472
F.3 Information List.............................................................................................................. 501
F.4 Group Alarms..................................................................................................................539
F.5 Measured Values.............................................................................................................541
Literature.................................................................................................................................................. 547
Glossary.................................................................................................................................................... 549
Index.........................................................................................................................................................559
Table of Contents
18 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Introduction
The device family SIPROTEC 7SJ80 devices is introduced in this section. An overview of the devices is
presented in their application, characteristics, and scope of functions.
1.1 Overall Operation 20
1.2 Application Scope 22
1.3 Characteristics 24
1
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 19
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Overall Operation
The digital SIPROTEC 7SJ80 overcurrent protection is equipped with a powerful microprocessor. It allows all
tasks to be processed digitally, from the acquisition of measured quantities to sending commands to circuit
breakers. Figure 1-1 shows the basic structure of the 7SJ80.
Analog Inputs
The measuring inputs (MI) convert the currents and voltages coming from the measuring transformers and
adapt them to the level appropriate for the internal processing of the device. The device provides 4 current
transformers and - depending on the model - additionally 3 voltage transformers. Three current inputs serve
for the input of the phase currents, another current input (ΙN) may be used for measuring the ground fault
current ΙN (current transformer neutral point) or for a separate ground current transformer (for sensitive
ground fault detection ΙNs and directional determination of ground faults ) - depending on the model.
[hw-struktur-7sj80-060606, 1, en_US]
Figure 1-1 Hardware structure of the digital multi-functional protective relay 7SJ80
The optional voltage transformers can either be used to input 3 phase-to-ground voltages or 2 phase-to-phase
voltages and the displacement voltage (open delta voltage) or any other voltages. It is also possible to connect
two phase-to-phase voltages in open delta connection.
The analog input quantities are passed on to the input amplifiers (IA). The input amplifier IA element provides
a high-resistance termination for the input quantities. It consists of filters that are optimized for measured-
value processing with regard to bandwidth and processing speed.
The analog-to-digital (AD) transformer group consists of an analog-to-digital converter and memory compo-
nents for the transmission of data to the microcomputer.
1.1
Introduction
1.1 Overall Operation
20 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Microcomputer System
Apart from processing the measured values, the microcomputer system (μC) also executes the actual protec-
tion and control functions. They especially include:
•Filtering and preparation of the measured quantities
•Continuous monitoring of the measured quantities
•Monitoring of the pickup conditions for the individual protective functions
•Interrogation of limit values and sequences in time
•Control of signals for the logic functions
•Output of control commands for switching devices
•Recording of messages, fault data and fault values for analysis
•Management of the operating system and the associated functions such as data recording, real-time
clock, communication, interfaces, etc.
•The information is distributed via output amplifiers (OA).
Binary Inputs and Outputs
The computer system obtains external information through the binary input/output boards (inputs and
outputs). The computer system obtains information from the system (e.g remote resetting) or from external
equipment (e.g. blocking commands). These outputs include, in particular, trip commands to circuit breakers
and signals for the remote indication of important events and conditions.
Front Panel
Information such as messages related to events, states, measured values and the functional status of the
device are visualized by light-emitting diodes (LEDs) and a display screen (LCD) on the front panel.
Integrated control and numeric keys in conjunction with the LCD enable interaction with the remote device.
These elements can be used to access the device for information such as configuration and setting parame-
ters. Similarly, setting parameters can be accessed and changed if needed.
In addition, control of circuit breakers and other equipment is possible from the front panel of the device.
Interfaces
Communication with a PC can be implemented via the USB DIGSI interface using the DIGSI software, allowing
all device functions to be easily executed.
Communication with a PC is also possible via port A (Ethernet interface) and port B (System/Service interface)
using DIGSI.
In addition to the device communication via DIGSI, port B can also be used to transmit all device data to a
central evaluator or a control center. This interface may be provided with various protocols and physical trans-
mission schemes to suit the particular application.
Power Supply
A power supply unit (Vaux or PS) delivers power to the functional units using the different voltage levels.
Voltage dips may occur if the voltage supply system (substation battery) becomes short-circuited. Usually,
they are bridged by a capacitor (see also Technical Data).
A buffer battery is located under the flap at the lower end of the front cover.
Introduction
1.1 Overall Operation
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 21
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Application Scope
The multi-function numerical overcurrent protection SIPROTEC 4 7SJ80 is used as protection, control and
monitoring unit for busbar feeders. For line protection, the device can be used in networks with grounded,
lowresistance grounded, isolated or a compensated neutral point structure. It is suited for networks that are
radial and supplied from a single source, open or closed looped networks and for lines with sources at both
ends.
The device includes the functions that are usually necessary for protection, monitoring of circuit breaker posi-
tions and control of circuit breakers in single and double busbars; therefore, the device can be employed
universally. The device provides excellent backup protection of differential protective schemes of any kind for
lines, transformers and busbars of all voltage levels.
Protective Functions
Non-directional overcurrent protection (50, 50N, 51, 51N) is the basic function of the device. There are three
definite time elements and one inverse time element for the phase currents and the ground current. For the
inverse time elements, several characteristics of different standards are provided. Alternatively, a user-defined
characteristic can be used for the sensitive ground fault detection.
Further protection functions included are the negative sequence protection, overload protection, circuit
breaker failure protection and ground fault protection.
Depending on the ordered variant, further protection functions are included, such as frequency protection,
overvoltage and undervoltage protection, and ground fault protection for high-resistance ground faults (direc-
tional or non-directional).
Apart from the short circuit protection functions mentioned before, there are further protection functions
possible as order variants. The overcurrent protection can, for example, be supplemented by a directional
overcurrent protection.
The automatic reclosing function enables several different reclosing cycles for overhead lines. An external
automatic reclosing system can also be connected. To ensure quick detection of the fault location after a short
circuit, the device is equipped with a fault locator.
Before reclosing after a three-pole tripping, the device can verify the validity of the reclosure via a voltage
check and/or a synchrocheck. The synchrocheck function can also be controlled externally.
Control Functions
The device provides a control function which can be accomplished for activating and deactivating the switch-
gear via operator buttons, port B, binary inputs and - using a PC and the DIGSI software - via the front inter-
face.
The status of the primary equipment can be transmitted to the device via auxiliary contacts connected to
binary inputs. The present status (or position) of the primary equipment can be displayed on the device, and
used for interlocking or alarm condition monitoring. The number of operating equipments to be switched is
limited by the binary inputs and outputs available in the device or the binary inputs and outputs allocated for
the switch position indications. Depending on the primary equipment being controlled, one binary input
(single point indication) or two binary inputs (double point indication) may be used for this process.
The capability of switching primary equipment can be restricted by a setting associated with switching
authority (Remote or Local), and by the operating mode (interlocked/non-interlocked, with or without pass-
word request).
Processing of interlocking conditions for switching (e.g. switchgear interlocking) can be established with the
aid of integrated, user-configurable logic functions.
Messages and Measured Values; Recording of Event and Fault Data
The operational indications provide information about conditions in the power system and the device. Meas-
urement quantities and values that are calculated can be displayed locally and communicated via the serial
interfaces.
Device messages can be assigned to a number of LEDs on the front cover (allocatable), can be externally
processed via output contacts (allocatable), linked with user-definable logic functions and/or issued via serial
interfaces.
1.2
Introduction
1.2 Application Scope
22 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
During a fault (system fault) important events and changes in conditions are saved in fault protocols (Event
Log or Trip Log). Instantaneous fault values are also saved in the device and may be analyzed subsequently.
Communication
The following interfaces are available for communication with external operating, control and memory
systems.
The USB DIGSI interface on the front cover serves for local communication with a PC. By means of the
SIPROTEC 4 operating software DIGSI, all operational and evaluation tasks can be executed via this operator
interface, such as specifying and modifying configuration parameters and settings, configuring user-specific
logic functions, retrieving operational messages and measured values, inquiring device conditions and meas-
ured values, issuing control commands.
Depending on the ordered variant, additional interfaces are located at the bottom of the device. They serve for
establishing extensive communication with other digital operating, control and memory components:
Port A serves for DIGSI communication directly on the device or via network. Furthermore, 2 SICAM I/O units
7XV5673 can be connected to this port. Port A can also be used for time synchronization using the NTP
protocol.
Port B serves for central communication between the device and a control center. It can be operated via data
lines or fiber optic cables. For the data transfer, there are standard protocols in accordance with IEC 60870-5-
103 available. The integration of the devices into the SINAUT LSA and SICAM automation systems can also be
implemented with this profile.
Alternatively, additional connection options are available with PROFIBUS DP and the DNP3.0 and MODBUS
protocols. If an EN100 module is available, you can use the protocols IEC61850, PROFINET or DNP3 TCP.
Furthermore, connecting a SICAM I/O unit is possible via IEC651850 GOOSE.
Introduction
1.2 Application Scope
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 23
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Characteristics
General Characteristics
•Powerful 32-bit microprocessor system
•Complete digital processing and control of measured values, from the sampling of the analog input quan-
tities to the initiation of outputs, for example, tripping or closing circuit breakers or other switchgear
devices
•Total electrical separation between the internal processing stages of the device and the external trans-
former, control, and DC supply circuits of the system because of the design of the binary inputs, outputs,
and the DC or AC converters
•Complete set of functions necessary for the proper protection of lines, feeders, motors, and busbars
•Easy device operation through an integrated operator panel or by means of a connected personal
computer running DIGSI
•Continuous calculation and display of measured and metered values on the front of the device
•Storage of min./max. measured values (slave pointer function) and storage of long-term mean values
•Recording of event and fault data for the last 8 system faults (fault in a network) with real-time informa-
tion as well as instantaneous values for fault recording for a maximum time range of 20 s
•Constant monitoring of the measured quantities, as well as continuous self-diagnostics covering the
hardware and software
•Communication with SCADA or substation controller equipment via serial interfaces through the choice
of data cable, modem, or optical fibers
•Battery-buffered clock which can be synchronized via a synchronization signal at the binary input or via a
protocol
•Switching statistics: Counting the number of trip commands initiated by the device, logging the currents
of the last switch-off operation initiated by the device, and accumulating the eliminated short-circuit
currents of each breaker pole
•Operating hours counter: Counting the operating hours of the protected object under load
•Commissioning aids such as connection and direction check, status indication of all binary inputs and
outputs, easy testing of port B, and influencing of information at port B during test operation.
Time Overcurrent Protection 50, 51, 50N, 51N
•Three definite time overcurrent protective elements and one inverse time overcurrent protective element
for phase current and ground current ΙN or summation current 3Ι0
•Two-phase operation of the overcurrent protection (ΙA, ΙC) is possible
•For inverse-time overcurrent protection, selection from various characteristics of different standards
possible
•Blocking is possible, e.g. for reverse interlocking with any element
•Instantaneous tripping by any element is possible when switching onto a fault
•In-rush restraint with second harmonic current quantities.
Ground Fault Protection 50N, 51N
•Three definite time overcurrent protective elements and one inverse time overcurrent protective element
applicable for grounded or high-resistance grounded systems
•For inverse-time overcurrent protection, selection from various characteristics of different standards
1.3
Introduction
1.3 Characteristics
24 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
•In-rush restraint with second harmonic current quantities
•Instantaneous tripping by any overcurrent element upon switch onto fault is possible.
Directional Time Overcurrent Protection 67, 67N
•Three definite time overcurrent protection elements and one inverse time overcurrent protection
element for the phase operate in parallel to the non-directional overcurrent elements. Their pickup values
and time delays can be set independently of these.
•Direction determination with cross-polarized voltages and voltage memory and dynamically unlimited
direction sensitivity
•Fault direction is calculated phase-selectively and separately for phase faults, ground faults and summa-
tion current faults.
Dynamic Cold Load Pick-up Function 50C, 50NC, 51C, 51NC, 67C, 67NC
•Dynamic changeover of time overcurrent protection settings, e.g. when cold load conditions are recog-
nized
•Detection of cold load condition via circuit breaker position or current threshold
•Activation via automatic reclosure (AR) is possible
•Activation also possible via binary input.
Single-Phase Overcurrent Protection
•Evaluation of the measured current via the sensitive or insensitive ground current transformer
•Suitable as differential protection that includes the neutral point current on transformer side, generator
side or motor side or for a grounded reactor set
•As tank leakage protection against abnormal leakage currents between transformer tanks and ground.
Voltage Protection 27, 59
•Two element undervoltage detection via the positive-sequence system of the voltages, phase-to-phase or
phase-to-ground voltages
•Choice of current supervision for 27-1 and 27-2
•Separate two-element overvoltage detection of the largest voltages applied or detection of the positive or
negative sequence component of the voltages
•Settable dropout ratio for all elements of the undervoltage and overvoltage protection.
Negative Sequence Protection 46
•Evaluation of the negative sequence component of the currents
•Two definite-time elements 46-1 and 46-2 and one inverse-time element 46-TOC; curves of common
standards are available for 46-TOC.
Frequency Protection 81 O/U
•Monitoring of falling below (f<) and/or exceeding (f>) with 4 frequency limits and time delays that are
independently adjustable
•Insensitive to harmonics and abrupt phase angle changes
•Adjustable undervoltage threshold.
Introduction
1.3 Characteristics
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 25
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection (27/Q)
•Detection of critical power system situations
•Disconnection of power supply facilities from the grid
•Reconnection under stable power system conditions
Thermal Overload Protection 49
•Thermal profile of energy losses (overload protection has full memory capability)
•True r.m.s. calculation
•Adjustable thermal warning element
•Adjustable alarm level based on current magnitude
Monitoring Functions
•Increased reliability due to monitoring of the internal measurement circuits as well as the hardware and
software
•Fuse failure monitor with protection function blocking
•Monitoring of the current transformer and voltage transformer secondary circuits using sum and
symmetry supervision with optional protection function blocking
•Trip circuit monitoring possible
•Phase rotation check.
Ground Fault Detection 50N(s), 51N(s), 67N(s), 59N/64
•Displacement voltage is measured or calculated from the three phase voltages
•Determination of a faulty phase on ungrounded or grounded systems
•Two-element Ground Fault Detection: 50Ns-1 and 50Ns-2
•High sensitivity (as low as 1 mA)
•Overcurrent element with definite time or inverse time delay
•For inverse-time overcurrent protection, a user-defined characteristic is available
•Direction determination with zero sequence quantities(Ι0, V0), wattmetric ground fault direction determi-
nation
•Any element can be set as directional or non-directional — forward sensing directional, or reverse
sensing directional
•Optionally applicable as additional ground fault protection.
Intermittent Ground Fault Protection
•Detects and accumulates intermittent ground faults
•Tripping after configurable total time.
Directional intermittent ground fault protection
•Detects intermittent ground faults
•Direction determination
•Tripping after settable number of intermittent re-ignitions
Introduction
1.3 Characteristics
26 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Automatic Reclosing 79
•Single-shot or multi-shot
•With separate dead times for the first and all succeeding shots
•Protective elements that initiate automatic reclosing are selectable. The choices can be different for
phase faults and ground faults
•Separate programs for phase and ground faults
•Interaction to time overcurrent protection element and ground fault elements. They can be blocked in
dependence of the reclosing cycle or released instantaneously
•Synchronous reconnection is possible .
Fault Location
•Initiation by trip command, external command or dropout of pickup
•Calculation of the fault distance and output of the fault location in ohms (primary and secondary) and in
kilometers or miles
•Up to three line sections can be configured.
Breaker Failure Protection 50 BF
•By checking the current and/or evaluating the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts
•Started by any integrated protection function that trips
•Initiation possible via a binary input from an external protective device.
Flexible Protective Functions
•Up to 20 customizable protection functions with three-phase or single-phase operation
•Any calculated or directly measured quantity can be evaluated on principle
•Standard protection logic with definite time characteristic
•Internal and configurable pickup and dropout delay
•Modifiable message texts.
Synchrocheck
•Verification of the synchronous conditions before reclosing after three-pole tripping
•Fast measurement of the voltage difference ΔV, the phase angle difference Δϕ and the frequency differ-
ence Δf
•Alternatively, check of the de-energized state before reclosing
•Setable minimum and maximum voltage
•Verification of the synchronous conditions or de-energized state also possible before the manual closing
of the circuit breaker, with separate limit values
•Measurement also possible via transformer without external intermediate matching transformer
•Measuring voltages optionally phase–to–phase or phase–to–ground.
Phase Rotation
•Selectable ABC or ACB by setting (static) or binary input (dynamic).
Introduction
1.3 Characteristics
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 27
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Circuit-Breaker Maintenance
•Statistical methods to help adjust maintenance intervals for CB contacts according to their actual wear
•several independent subfunctions have been implemented(ΣΙ-procedure, ΣΙx-procedure, 2P-procedure
and Ι2t-procedure)
•Acquisition and conditioning of measured values for all subfunctions operates phase-selective using one
procedure-specific threshold per subfunction.
User Defined Functions
•Freely programmable linking of internal and external signals in order to implement user-defined logic
functions
•All standard logic functions (AND, OR, NOT, EXCLUSIVE-OR, etc.)
•Time delays and limit value interrogations
•Processing of measured values, including zero suppression, adding a knee curve for a transducer input,
and live-zero monitoring.
Breaker Control
•Switching devices can be opened and closed manually using control keys, programmable function keys,
via port B (e.g. of SICAM or LSA), or via the user interface (using a personal computer and the DIGSI oper-
ating software)
•Feedback of switching states via the switch auxiliary contacts
•Plausibility monitoring of the circuit breaker position and check of interlocking conditions.
Introduction
1.3 Characteristics
28 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Functions
This chapter describes the numerous functions available on the SIPROTEC 4 device 7SJ80. It shows the setting
possibilities for each function in maximum configuration. Information with regard to the determination of
setting values as well as formulas, if required, are also provided.
Based on the following information, it can also be determined which of the provided functions should be
used.
2.1 General 30
2.2 Overcurrent Protection 50, 51, 50N, 51N 56
2.3 Directional Overcurrent Protection 67, 67N 82
2.4 Dynamic Cold Load Pickup 106
2.5 Single-Phase Overcurrent Protection 112
2.6 Voltage Protection 27, 59 122
2.7 Negative Sequence Protection 46 132
2.8 Frequency Protection 81 O/U 138
2.9 Undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection (27/Q) 142
2.10 Thermal Overload Protection 49 147
2.11 Monitoring Functions 154
2.12 Ground Fault Protection 64, 67N(s), 50N(s), 51N(s) 172
2.13 Intermittent Ground Fault Protection 198
2.14 Dir. Intermittent earth fault protection 204
2.15 Automatic Reclosing System 79 209
2.16 Fault Locator 232
2.17 Breaker Failure Protection 50BF 235
2.18 Flexible Protection Functions 242
2.19 Reverse-Power Protection Application with Flexible Protection Function 253
2.20 Synchrocheck 261
2.21 Phase Rotation 274
2.22 Function Logic 275
2.23 Auxiliary Functions 277
2.24 Breaker Control 299
2.25 Notes on Device Operation 309
2
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 29
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
General
The settings associated with the various device functions can be modified using the operating or service inter-
face in DIGSI in conjunction with a personal computer. Some parameters can also be changed using the
controls on the front panel of the device. The procedure is described in detail in the SIPROTEC System Descrip-
tion /1/ SIPROTEC 4 System Description.
Functional Scope
The 7SJ80 relay contains protection functions as well as auxiliary functions. The hardware and firmware is
designed for this scope of functions. Additionally, the control functions can be matched to the system require-
ments. Individual functions can be enabled or disabled during the configuration procedure. The interaction of
functions may also be modified.
Functional Description
Setting the Functional Scope
Example for the configuration of the functional scope:
A protected system consists of overhead lines and underground cables. Since automatic reclosing is only
needed for the overhead lines, the automatic reclosing function is not configured or “disabled” for the relays
protecting the underground cables.
The available protection and additional functions can be configured as Enabled or Disabled. For individual
functions, a choice between several alternatives may be possible, as described below.
Functions configured as Disabled are not processed by the 7SJ80. There are no messages and corresponding
settings (functions, limit values) queried during configuration.
i
i
NOTE
Available functions and default settings are depending on the order variant of the relay (see A Ordering
Information and Accessories).
Setting Notes
Setting the Functional Scope
Your protection device is configured using the DIGSI software. Connect your personal computer either to the
USB port on the device front or to port A or port B on the bottom side of the device depending on the device
version (ordering code). The operation via DIGSI is explained in the SIPROTEC 4 System Description.
The Device Configuration dialog box allows you to adjust your device to the specific system conditions.
Password no. 7 is required (for parameter set) for changing configuration parameters in the device. Without
the password the settings can only be read but not edited and transmitted to the device.
Special Features
Most settings are self-explanatory. The special cases are described in the following.
If you want to use the setting group change function, set address 103 Grp Chge OPTION to Enabled. In
this case, you can select up to four different groups of function parameters between which you can switch
quickly and conveniently during operation. Only one setting group can be used when selecting the option
Disabled.
For the elements associated with non-directional overcurrent protection 50(N), 51(N) (phase and ground),
various tripping characteristics can be selected at addresses 112 Charac. Phase and 113 Charac.
Ground. If only the definite time characteristic is desired, select Definite Time. Alternatively, you can
select between inverse-time curves according to IEC standard (TOC IEC) or ANSI standard (TOC ANSI). The
dropout behavior of the IEC and ANSI curves is specified at address 1210 or 1310 when configuring the time
overcurrent protection.
2.1
2.1.1
2.1.1.1
2.1.1.2
Functions
2.1 General
30 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Set to Disabled to disable the entire time overcurrent protection.
The directional overcurrent protection 67(N) is set at address 115 67/67-TOC and 116 67N/67N-TOC. Here,
the same options are available as for non-directional overcurrent protection (except the 50-3 element).
For (sensitive) ground fault detection address 130 S.Gnd.F.Dir.Ch lets you specify the directional charac-
teristic of the sensitive ground fault detection. You can select between cos φ / sin φ and V0/I0 φ mea.
as the measurement procedure. The cos φ / sin φ procedure (via residual wattmetric current detection) is
set by default.
If the measuring method cos φ / sin φ is set, select between a definite time characteristic (Definite
Time) and an inverse time characteristic User Defined PU at address 131 Sens. Gnd Fault. V0/I0 φ
mea. provides the definite time characteristic Definite Time, inverse time characteristics TOC IEC or TOC
ANSI. When selecting the setting Disabled, the entire function is disabled.
For the intermittent ground fault protection, you can specify the measured quantity (with Ignd, with 3I0
or with Ignd,sens.) to be used by this protection function at address 133 INTERM.EF.
At address 134 Dir. Interm. EF you can set the directional intermittent ground fault protection to
Enabled or Disabled.
For unbalanced load protection, address 140 46 allows you to specify which tripping characteristics to use.
You can select between Definite Time, TOC ANSI or TOC IEC. If this function is not required, select
Disabled.
The overload protection is activated in address 142 49 by selecting the setting without ambient temperature
No ambient temp or it is set to Disabled.
At address 155 27/Q-Protection you can set the QU protection to Enabled or Disabled.
The synchronization function is activated in address 161 25 Function 1 by the setting SYNCHROCHECK or it
is set to Disabled.
In address 170 you can set the breaker failure protection to Enabled or Disabled. The setting option
enabled w/ 3I0> subjects the ground current and the negative sequence current to a plausibility check.
For the CB maintenance functions, several options are available under address 172 52 B.WEAR MONIT. Irre-
spective of this, the basic functionality of the summation current formation (ΣΙ procedure) is always active. It
requires no further configurations and adds up the tripping currents of the trips initiated by the protection
functions.
When selecting the ΣIx-Procedure, the sum of all tripping current powers is formed and output as reference
value. The 2P Procedure continuously calculates the remaining lifespan of the circuit breaker.
With the Ι2t Procedure the square fault current integrals are formed via arc time and output as a reference
value.
Further information concerning the individual procedures of the CB maintenance are given in
Section2.23.2 Statistics. You can also disable this function by setting it to Disabled.
In address 181, you can enter how many line sections (maximum of three) are taken into account by the fault
locator.
Under address 182 74 Trip Ct Supv it can be selected whether the trip-circuit supervision works with two
(2 Binary Inputs) or only one binary input (1 Binary Input), or whether the function is configured
Disabled.
In address 617 ServiProt (CM) you can specify for which purpose port B is used. T103 means that the
device is connected to a control and protection facility via serial port, DIGSI means that you are using the
port to connect DIGSI or you are not using port B (Disabled).
The flexible protection functions can be configured via parameter FLEXIBLE FUNC.. You can create up to 20
flexible functions by setting a checkmark in front of the desired function (an example is given in the Section
2.19 Reverse-Power Protection Application with Flexible Protection Function). If the checkmark of a function is
removed, all settings and configurations made previously will be lost. After re-selecting the function, all
settings and configurations are in default setting. Setting of the flexible function is done in DIGSI under
“Parameters”, “Additional Functions” and “Settings”. The configuration is done, as usual, under “Parameters”
and “Masking I/O (Configuration Matrix)”.
Functions
2.1 General
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 31
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Settings
Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments
103 Grp Chge OPTION Disabled
Enabled
Disabled Setting Group Change Option
104 OSC. FAULT REC. Disabled
Enabled
Enabled Oscillographic Fault Records
112 Charac. Phase Disabled
Definite Time
TOC IEC
TOC ANSI
Definite Time 50/51
113 Charac. Ground Disabled
Definite Time
TOC IEC
TOC ANSI
Definite Time 50N/51N
115 67/67-TOC Disabled
Definite Time
TOC IEC
TOC ANSI
Definite Time 67, 67-TOC
116 67N/67N-TOC Disabled
Definite Time
TOC IEC
TOC ANSI
Definite Time 67N, 67N-TOC
117 Coldload Pickup Disabled
Enabled
Disabled Cold Load Pickup
122 InrushRestraint Disabled
Enabled
Disabled 2nd Harmonic Inrush Restraint
127 50 1Ph Disabled
Enabled
Disabled 50 1Ph
130 S.Gnd.F.Dir.Ch cos φ / sin φ
V0/I0 φ mea.
cos φ / sin φ (sens.) Ground fault dir. character-
istic
131 Sens. Gnd Fault Disabled
Definite Time
User Defined PU
Disabled (sensitive) Ground fault
133 INTERM.EF Disabled
with Ignd
with 3I0
with Ignd,sens.
Disabled Intermittent earth fault protection
134 Dir. Interm. EF Disabled
Enabled
Disabled Dir. Intermittent earth fault
protection
135 E Flt(ext) Disabled
EPTR
Trans. Neutral
Disabled Earth Fault(extend)
140 46 Disabled
TOC ANSI
TOC IEC
Definite Time
Disabled 46 Negative Sequence Protection
142 49 Disabled
No ambient temp
No ambient temp 49 Thermal Overload Protection
2.1.1.3
Functions
2.1 General
32 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments
150 27/59 Disabled
Enabled
Disabled 27, 59 Under/Overvoltage Protec-
tion
154 81 O/U Disabled
Enabled
Disabled 81 Over/Underfrequency Protec-
tion
155 27/Q-Protection Disabled
Enabled
Disabled 27 / Q dir. con. Protection
161 25 Function 1 Disabled
SYNCHROCHECK
Disabled 25 Function group 1
170 50BF Disabled
Enabled
enabled w/ 3I0>
Disabled 50BF Breaker Failure Protection
171 79 Auto Recl. Disabled
Enabled
Disabled 79 Auto-Reclose Function
172 52 B.WEAR MONIT Disabled
Ix-Method
2P-Method
I2t-Method
Disabled 52 Breaker Wear Monitoring
180 Fault Locator Disabled
Enabled
Disabled Fault Locator
181 L-sections FL 1 Section
2 Sections
3 Sections
1 Section Line sections for fault locator
182 74 Trip Ct Supv Disabled
2 Binary Inputs
1 Binary Input
Disabled 74TC Trip Circuit Supervision
617 ServiProt (CM) Disabled
T103
DIGSI
T103 Port B usage
- FLEXIBLE FCT. 1...20 Flexible Function 01
Flexible Function 02
Flexible Function 03
Flexible Function 04
Flexible Function 05
Flexible Function 06
Flexible Function 07
Flexible Function 08
Flexible Function 09
Flexible Function 10
Flexible Function 11
Flexible Function 12
Flexible Function 13
Flexible Function 14
Flexible Function 15
Flexible Function 16
Flexible Function 17
Flexible Function 18
Flexible Function 19
Flexible Function 20
Please select Flexible Functions 1...20
Functions
2.1 General
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 33
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Device, General Settings
The device requires some general information. This may be, for example, the type of annunciation to be
issued in the event of an occurrence of a power system fault.
Functional Description
Command-Dependent Messages "No Trip – No Flag"
The storage of indications assigned to local LEDs and the availability of spontaneous indications can be made
dependent on whether the device has issued a trip command. This information is then not issued if during a
system disturbance one or more protection functions have picked up but the 7SJ80 did not trip because the
fault was cleared by another device (e.g. on another line). These messages are then limited to faults in the line
to be protected.
The following figure illustrates the generation of the reset command for stored indications. The instant the
device drops out, the presetting of parameter 610 FltDisp.LED/LCD decides whether the new fault
remains stored or is reset.
[ruecksetzbefehl-fuer-n-speicher-led-lcd-meld-260602-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-1 Creation of the reset command for the latched LED and LCD messages
Spontaneous Messages on the Display
You can determine whether or not the most important data of a fault event is displayed automatically after
the fault has occurred (see also Subsection "Fault Messages" in Section "Auxiliary Functions").
Setting Notes
Fault Messages
A new pickup of a protection function generally turns off any previously set light displays so that only the
latest fault is displayed at any one time. It can be selected whether the stored LED displays and the sponta-
neous messages on the display appear after the new pickup or only after a new trip signal is issued. In order to
select the desired mode of display, select the Device submenu in the SETTINGS menu. Under address 610
FltDisp.LED/LCD the two options Target on PU and Target on TRIP ("No trip – no flag") can be
selected.
Use parameter 611 Spont. FltDisp. to specify whether or not a spontaneous fault message should appear
automatically on the display (YES) or not (NO).
Selection of Default Display
The start page of the default display appearing after startup of the device can be selected in the device data
via parameter640 Start image DD. The pages available for each device version are listed in the Appendix
E Default Settings and Protocol-dependent Functions.
Time Synchronization via Port A
If you want the time synchronization of the device to be performed via port A, set the parameters required for
this purpose at the following addresses:
Address 660 IP adr[0](Prim) to 663 IP adr[3]
(Prim)
IP-Addresses 0 to 3, NTP primary
2.1.2
2.1.2.1
2.1.2.2
Functions
2.1 General
34 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Address 664 IP adr[0] (Sec) to 667 IP adr[3]
(Sec)
IP-Addresses 0 to 3, NTP secondary
Address 668 Client activ client for primary and secondary addresses switched
on or off.
Address 669 Daylight Set daylight saving time switched on or off.
Address 670 Offset TZ/min offset for the time zone in minutes
Address 671 Offset DayT/min offset for daylight saving time in minutes
Address 672 W2S month to 675 W2S hour month, week (of the month), day of the week, hour
of switching to daylight saving time
Address 676 S2W month to 679 S2W hour month, week (of the month), day of the week, hour
of switching to winter time
Access authorization for port A
At address 651 ParEN100(LC)blk you can parameterize a read access option via the EN100 module at port
A. If the parameter is set to ON, you can read out the device parameters using DIGSI or fetch fault records.
IEC 61850 GOOSE Function
At address 700 GOOSE-Stop you can set the GOOSE function of the IEC 61850 protocol to active or not. If
GOOSE-Stop is set to YES, you can release the GOOSE function again via a binary input during operation.
Settings
Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments
610 FltDisp.LED/LCD Target on PU
Target on TRIP
Target on PU Fault Display on LED / LCD
611 Spont. FltDisp. YES
NO
NO Spontaneous display of flt.annun-
ciations
640 Start image DD image 1
image 2
image 3
image 4
image 5
image 6
image 1 Start image Default Display
651 ParEN100(LC)blk OFF
ON
OFF DIGSI-config. over EN100 (LC)
blocked
660 IP adr[0](Prim) 0 .. 255 0 IP address [0] (NTP-Primary)
661 IP adr[1](Prim) 0 .. 255 0 IP address [1] (NTP-Primary)
662 IP adr[2](Prim) 0 .. 255 0 IP address [2] (NTP-Primary)
663 IP adr[3](Prim) 0 .. 255 0 IP address [3] (NTP-Primary)
664 IP adr[0] (Sec) 0 .. 255 0 IP address [0] (NTP-Sekundary)
665 IP adr[1] (Sec) 0 .. 255 0 IP address [1] (NTP-Sekundary)
666 IP adr[2] (Sec) 0 .. 255 0 IP address [2] (NTP-Sekundary)
667 IP adr[3] (Sec) 0 .. 255 0 IP address [3] (NTP-Sekundary)
668 Client activ OFF
ON
OFF Client activ
669 Daylight Set OFF
ON
OFF Daylight Set
670 Offset TZ/min -1440 .. 1440 min 60 min Offset for time zone in minutes
671 Offset DayT/min -1440 .. 1440 min 60 min Offset for daylight in minutes
2.1.2.3
Functions
2.1 General
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 35
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments
672 W2S month 1 .. 12 3 month of time set winter to
summer
673 W2S week 1 .. 5 5 week of time set winter to
summer
674 W2S day Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
Sunday
Sunday day of time set winter to summer
675 W2S hour 1 .. 24 2 hour of time set winter to summer
676 S2W month 1 .. 12 10 month of time set summer to
winter
677 S2W week 1 .. 5 5 week of time set summer to
winter
678 S2W day Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
Sunday
Sunday day of time set summer to winter
679 S2W hour 1 .. 24 3 hour of time set summer to winter
700 GOOSE-Stop YES
NO
NO GOOSE-Stop
Information List
No. Information Type of
Informa-
tion
Comments
- >Light on SP >Back Light on
- Reset LED IntSP Reset LED
- DataStop IntSP Stop data transmission
- Test mode IntSP Test mode
- Feeder gnd IntSP Feeder GROUNDED
- Brk OPENED IntSP Breaker OPENED
- HWTestMod IntSP Hardware Test Mode
- SynchClock IntSP_Ev Clock Synchronization
- Distur.CFC OUT Disturbance CFC
1 Not configured SP No Function configured
2 Non Existent SP Function Not Available
3 >Time Synch SP_Ev >Synchronize Internal Real Time Clock
5 >Reset LED SP >Reset LED
15 >Test mode SP >Test mode
16 >DataStop SP >Stop data transmission
51 Device OK OUT Device is Operational and Protecting
52 ProtActive IntSP At Least 1 Protection Funct. is Active
2.1.2.4
Functions
2.1 General
36 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
No. Information Type of
Informa-
tion
Comments
55 Reset Device OUT Reset Device
56 Initial Start OUT Initial Start of Device
67 Resume OUT Resume
68 Clock SyncError OUT Clock Synchronization Error
69 DayLightSavTime OUT Daylight Saving Time
70 Settings Calc. OUT Setting calculation is running
71 Settings Check OUT Settings Check
72 Level-2 change OUT Level-2 change
73 Local change OUT Local setting change
110 Event Lost OUT_Ev Event lost
113 Flag Lost OUT Flag Lost
125 Chatter ON OUT Chatter ON
140 Error Sum Alarm OUT Error with a summary alarm
160 Alarm Sum Event OUT Alarm Summary Event
177 Fail Battery OUT Failure: Battery empty
178 I/O-Board error OUT I/O-Board Error
181 Error A/D-conv. OUT Error: A/D converter
191 Error Offset OUT Error: Offset
193 Alarm NO calibr OUT Alarm: NO calibration data available
194 Error neutralCT OUT Error: Neutral CT different from MLFB
232 CT ph mismatch OUT LPCT phase Current Transf. mismatching
233 CT gnd mismatch OUT LPCT ground Current Transf. mismatching
301 Pow.Sys.Flt. OUT Power System fault
302 Fault Event OUT Fault Event
303 sens Gnd flt OUT sensitive Ground fault
320 Warn Mem. Data OUT Warn: Limit of Memory Data exceeded
321 Warn Mem. Para. OUT Warn: Limit of Memory Parameter exceeded
322 Warn Mem. Oper. OUT Warn: Limit of Memory Operation exceeded
323 Warn Mem. New OUT Warn: Limit of Memory New exceeded
335 >GOOSE-Stop SP >GOOSE-Stop
502 Relay Drop Out SP Relay Drop Out
510 Relay CLOSE SP General CLOSE of relay
545 PU Time VI Time from Pickup to drop out
546 TRIP Time VI Time from Pickup to TRIP
10080 Error Ext I/O OUT Error Extension I/O
10081 Error Ethernet OUT Error Ethernet
10082 Error Terminal OUT Error Current Terminal
10083 Error Basic I/O OUT Error Basic I/O
Power System Data 1
Functional Description
The device requires certain basic data regarding the protected equipment so that the device can adapt to its
desired application. These may be, for instance, nominal power system and transformer data, measured quan-
tity polarities and their physical connections, breaker properties (where applicable) etc. There are also certain
2.1.3
2.1.3.1
Functions
2.1 General
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 37
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
parameters that are common to all functions, i.e. not associated with a specific protection, control or moni-
toring function. The following section discusses these parameters.
Setting Notes
General
Some P.System Data 1 can be entered directly at the device. See Section 2.25 Notes on Device Operation
for more information regarding this topic.
In DIGSI double-click Settings to open the corresponding dialog box. In doing so, a dialog box with tabs will
open under P.System Data 1 where individual parameters can be configured. The following descriptions
are therefore structured according to these tabs.
Rated Frequency (Power System)
The nominal frequency of the system is set under the Address 214 Rated Frequency. The factory pre-
setting in accordance with the model need only be changed if the device will be employed for a purpose other
than that which was planned when ordering.
In the US device versions (ordering data position 10= C), parameter 214 is preset to 60 Hz. 214.
Phase Rotation (Power System)
Address 209 PHASE SEQ. is used to change the default phase sequence (A B C for clockwise rotation) if
your power system permanently has an anti-clockwise phase sequence (A C B. A temporary reversal of rota-
tion is also possible using binary inputs (see Section 2.21.2 Setting Notes).
Polarity of Current Transformers (Power System)
At address 201 CT Starpoint, the polarity of the wye-connected current transformers is specified (the
following figure applies accordingly to two current transformers). This setting determines the measuring
direction of the device (forward = line direction). Changing this parameter also results in a polarity reversal of
the ground current inputs ΙN or ΙNS.
[polung-stromwandler-020313-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-2 Polarity of current transformers
Current Connection Ι4 (Power System)
Here, it is communicated to the device whether the ground current of the current transformer neutral point is
connected to the fourth current input (Ι4). This corresponds to the Holmgreen connection, (see connection
example in C Connection Examples). In this case, parameter 280 Holmgr. for Σi is set to YES. In all other
cases, even if the ground current of the own line is measured via a separate ground current transformer, enter
the setting NO. This setting exclusively affects the function “Current Sum Monitoring” (see Section
2.11.1 Measurement Supervision).
2.1.3.2
Functions
2.1 General
38 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Current Connection (Power System)
Via parameter 251 CT Connect. a special connection of the current transformers can be determined.
The standard connection is A, B, C, (Gnd). It may only be changed if the device is set to measure one or
more ground currents via two current inputs. The standard connection has to be used in all other cases.
The following picture illustrates such a special connection.
[7sj80-mess-2erdstroeme-20070301, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-3 Measurement of two ground currents, example
The phase currents ΙA and ΙC must be connected to the first current input (terminals F1, F2) and to the third
(terminals F5, F6) The ground current ΙN or ΙNs is connected to the fourth input (terminals F7, F8) as usual, in
this case the ground current of the line. A second ground current, in this case the transformer starpoint
current, is connected to the second current input ΙN2 (terminals F3, F4).
The settings A,G2,C,G; G->B or A,G2,C,G; G2->B are used here. They both define the connection of a
ground current ΙN2 to the second current input (terminals F3, F4). The settings only differ in the calculation of
ΙB. In the case of A,G2,C,G; G2->B, the phase current ΙB is determined from the phase currents ΙA and ΙC and
from the measured ground current ΙN or ΙNs at the fourth current input. In the case of A,G2,C,G; G2->B, the
phase current ΙB is determined from the phase currents ΙA and ΙC and from the measured ground current ΙN2 at
the second current input. This setting is only possible for devices with sensitive ground current transformer.
Therefore, the current ΙN2 at the second current input is referred to ΙN in the flexible protection functions and
in the operational measured values. The sensitive ground current at the fourth current input is referred to ΙNs.
The setting must be selected according to the system requirements.
The following table gives an overview of how the protection functions are assigned to the ground current
inputs for the special connection.
Functions
2.1 General
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 39
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Function Current
input 2
(ΙN2)
Current
input 4
(ΙN/ ΙNs)
Time overcurrent protection ground 50N/51N (Section 2.2 Overcurrent Protection 50, 51, 50N,
51N)
x
Directional time overcurrent protection ground 67N (Section 2.3 Directional Overcurrent Protec-
tion 67, 67N).
x
Ground fault detection 64, 67N(s), 50N(s), 51N(s) (Section 2.12 Ground Fault Protection 64,
67N(s), 50N(s), 51N(s))
x
Single-phase Time Overcurrent Protection (Section2.5 Single-Phase Overcurrent Protection) x
Operational Measured Values Display ΙNΙNs
Track in disturbance record ΙNΙNs
Important! The function “Directional Time Overcurrent Protection Ground 67N” may only be enabled if the
ground current of the protected line is measured via ΙN2. This is not the case in the example shown in
Figure 2-3. Here, the ground current of the protected line is measured via ΙN. The function must be deacti-
vated. A connection in which the function can be enabled is illustrated in the Appendix C Connection Exam-
ples Figure C-11
The settings for address 251 are only possible with DIGSI at Display Additional Settings-
The Appendix provides some connection examples at C Connection Examples.
i
i
NOTE
The settings in address 2251 CT Connect. for evaluating the phase currents are only effective if address
250 50/51 2-ph prot was set to OFF.
Voltage Connection (Power System)
Address 213 specifies how the voltage transformers are connected.
VT Connect. 3ph = Van, Vbn, Vcn means that the three phase voltages are wye connected, i.e. the
three phase-to-ground voltages are measured.ground.
VT Connect. 3ph = Vab, Vbc, VGnd means that two phase-to-phase voltages (open delta voltage) and
the displacement voltage VGND are connected.
VT Connect. 3ph = Vab, Vbc means that two phase-to-phase voltages (open delta voltage) are
connected. The third voltage transformer of the device is not used.
VT Connect. 3ph = Vab, Vbc, Vx means that two phase-to-phase voltages (open delta voltage) are
connected. Furthermore, any third voltage Vx is connected that is used exclusively for the flexible protection
functions. The transformer nominal voltages for Vx are set at address 232 and 233.
VT Connect. 3ph = Vab, Vbc, VSyn means that two phase-to-phase voltages (open delta voltage) and
the reference voltage for VSYN are connected. This setting is enabled if the synchronization function of the
device is used.
VT Connect. 3ph = Vph-g, VSyn is used if the synchronization function of the device is used and only
phase-to-ground voltages are available for the protected object to be synchronized. One of these voltages is
connected to the first voltage transformer; the reference voltage VSYN is connected to the third voltage trans-
former.
The selection of the voltage transformer connection affects the operation of all device functions that require
voltage input.
The settings Vab, Vbc or Vab, Vbc, Vx or Vab, Vbc, VSyn or Vph-g, VSyn do not allow determining
the zero sequence voltage. The associated protection functions are inactive in this case.
The table gives an overview of the functions that can be activated for the corresponding connection type
(depends also on the ordering number). The functions which are not shown are available for all connection
types.
Functions
2.1 General
40 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Table 2-1 Connection Types of the Voltage Transformers
Connection
type
Functions
Directional
definite
time/
inverse time
overcurrent
protection
phase
Directional
definite-
time/ inver-
setime over-
current
protection
ground
Sensitive
ground fault
protection
50Ns, 51Ns,
67Ns
Synchroni-
zation
Fault
locator
QU
protec-
tion
Direc-
tional
intermit-
tent
ground
fault
Fuse
failure
monitor
Van, Vbn,
Vcn
yes yes yes no yes yes yes yes
Vab, Vbc,
VGnd
yes yes yes no yes yes yes yes
Vab, Vbc yes yes1) yes2) no no yes no no
Vab, Vbc, Vx yes yes1) yes2) no no yes no no
Vab, Vbc,
VSyn
yes no yes2) yes no yes no no
Vph-g, VSyn no no yes2) yes no no no no
1) Determination of the direction is only possible by evaluating the negative sequence system (otherwise select zero
sequence system or negative sequence system).
2) With this type of voltage transformer connection the current elements operate only non-directional, the voltage
elements do not work.
With voltage connections Vab, Vbc, Vab, Vbc, Vx and Vab, Vbc, VSyn the power values are only
available if you have symmetrical voltage conditions within the network. In this case, address 207 Vol.
Symmetry (Power System Data 1) is set to YES. The power values are not available with setting NO.
Measured values, which due to the chosen voltage connection cannot be calculated, will be displayed as dots.
The Appendix provides some connection examples for all connection types atC Connection Examples.
Distance Unit (Power System)
Address 215 Distance Unit allows you to specify the distance unit (km or Miles) for the fault locator. In
the absence of a fault locator or if this function has been removed, this parameter is of no importance.
Changing the distance unit does not imply an automatic conversion of the setting values that are dependent
on the distance unit. These have to be re-entered at the respective addresses.
ATEX100 (Power System)
Parameter 235 ATEX100 enables meeting the requirements for protecting explosion-protected motors for
thermal replicas. Set this parameter to YES to save all thermal replicas of the 7SJ80 devices in the event of a
power supply failure. After the supply voltage is restored, the thermal replicas will resume operation using the
stored values. Set the parameter to NO, to reset the calculated overtemperature values of all thermal replicas
to zero if the power supply fails.
Nominal Values of Current Transformers (CTs)
At addresses 204 CT PRIMARY and 205 CT SECONDARY, information is entered regarding the primary and
secondary ampere ratings of the current transformers. It is important to ensure that the rated secondary
current of the current transformer matches the rated current of the device, otherwise the device will calculate
incorrect primary data. At addresses 217 Ignd-CT PRIM and 218 Ignd-CT SEC, information is entered
regarding the primary and secondary ampere rating of the current transformer. In case of a normal connection
(neutral point current connected to ΙN transformer), 217 Ignd-CT PRIM and 204 CT PRIMARY must be set
to the same value.
If the device features a sensitive ground current input, parameter 218 Ignd-CT SEC is set to 1 A by default.
In this case, the setting cannot be changed.
Functions
2.1 General
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 41
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
For US device models (order item 10= C) parameters 205 and 218 are set by default to 5 A..
If address 251 has been set so that ground currents are measured by two inputs (setting options A,G2,C,G;
G->B or A,G2,C,G; G2->B), you have to set the primary rated current of the second ground transformer
connected to ΙN2 at address 238. secondary ampere rating must conform with the phase current transformer.
To calculated the phase current ΙB correctly, the primary rated current of the ground current transformer,
which is used to calculate ΙB (address 217 or address 238), must be smaller than the primary rated current of
the phase current transformer (address 204).
Nominal Values of Voltage Transformers (VTs)
At addresses 202 Vnom PRIMARY and 203 Vnom SECONDARY, information is entered regarding the primary
nominal voltage and secondary nominal voltage (phase-to-phase) of the connected voltage transformers.
Transformation Ratio of Voltage Transformers (VTs)
Address 206 Vph / Vdelta informs the device of the adjustment factor between the phase voltage and the
displacement voltage. This information is relevant for the processing of ground faults (in grounded systems
and ungrounded systems), for the operational measured value VN and measured-variable monitoring.
If the voltage transformer set provides open delta windings and if these windings are connected to the device,
this must be specified accordingly in address 213 (see above margin heading “Voltage Connection”). Since the
voltage transformer ratio is normally as follows:
[uebersetzung-spannungswandler-020313-kn, 1, en_US]
the factor Vph/VN (secondary voltage, address 206 Vph / Vdelta) must be set to 3/ √3 = √3 = 1.73 which
must be used if the VN voltage is connected. For other transformation ratios, i.e. the formation of the
displacement voltage via an interconnected transformer set, the factor must be corrected accordingly.
Please take into consideration that also the calculated secondary V0-voltage is divided by the value set in
address 206. Thus, even if the V0-voltage is not connected, address 206 has an impact on the secondary
operational measured value VN.
If Vab, Vbc, VGnd is selected as voltage connection type, parameter Vph / Vdelta is used to calculate
the phase-to-ground voltages and is therefore important for the protection function. With voltage connection
type Van, Vbn, Vcn, this parameter is used only to calculate the operational measured value of the secon-
dary voltage VN.
Trip and Close Command Duration (Breaker)
In address 210 the minimum trip command duration TMin TRIP CMD is set. This setting applies to all protec-
tion functions that can initiate tripping.
In address 211 the maximum close command duration TMax CLOSE CMD is set. It applies to the integrated
reclosing function. It must be set long enough to ensure that the circuit breaker has securely closed. An exces-
sive duration causes no problem since the closing command is interrupted in the event another trip is initiated
by a protection function.
Current Flow Monitoring (Breaker)
In address 212 BkrClosed I MIN the pickup threshold of the integrated current flow monitoring function
can be set. This parameter is used by several protection functions (e.g. voltage protection with current crite-
rion, overload protection and circuit breaker maintenance). If the set current value is exceeded, the circuit
breaker is considered closed.
The threshold value setting applies to all three phases, and must take into consideration all used protection
functions.
The pickup threshold for the breaker failure protection is set separately (see 2.17.2 Setting Notes).
Functions
2.1 General
42 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Circuit-breaker Maintenance (Breaker)
Parameters 260 to 267 are assigned to CB maintenance. The parameters and the different procedures are
explained in the setting notes of this function (see Section 2.23.2 Statistics).
Pickup Thresholds of the Binary Inputs (Thresholds BI)
At address 220 Threshold BI 1 to 226 Threshold BI 7 you can set the pickup thresholds of the binary
inputs of the device. The settings Thresh. BI 176V, Thresh. BI 88V or Thresh. BI 19V are possible.
Two-phase Time Overcurrent Protection (Protection Operating Quantities)
The two-phase overcurrent protection functionality is used in grounded or compensated systems where inter-
action of three-phase devices with existing two-phase protection equipment is required. Via parameter 250
50/51 2-ph prot the time overcurrent protection can be configured to two or three-phase operation. If the
parameter is set to ON, the value 0 A instead of the measured value for ΙB is used permanently for the
threshold comparison so that no pickup is possible in phase B. All other functions, however, operate in three
phases.
Ground Fault Protection (Protection Operating Quantities)
Parameter 613 50N/51N/67N w. defines whether ground fault protection, breaker failure protection or Fuse
Failure Monitor is either to operate using measured values (Ignd (measured))) or the quantities calculated
from the three phase currents (3I0 (calcul.)). In the first case, the measured quantity at the fourth
current input is evaluated. In the latter case, the summation current is calculated from the three phase current
inputs. If the device features a sensitive ground current input (measuring range starts at 1 mA), the ground
fault protection always uses the calculated variable 3I0. In this case, parameter 613 50N/51N/67N w. is not
available.
Voltage Protection (Protection Operating Quantities)
In a three-phase connection, the fundamental harmonic of the largest of the three phase-to-phase voltages
(Vphph) or phase-ground voltages (Vph-n) or the positive sequence voltage (V1) or the negative sequence
voltage (V2) is supplied to the overvoltage protection elements. In three-phase connection, undervoltage
protection relies either on the positive sequence voltage (V1) or the smallest of the phase-to-phase voltages
(Vphph) or the phase-to-ground voltages (Vph-n). This is configured by setting the parameter value in
address 614 OP. QUANTITY 59 and 615 OP. QUANTITY 27.
With single-phase voltage transformers, a direct comparison of the measured quantities with the threshold
values is carried out and the parameterization of the characteristic quantity switchover is ignored.
i
i
NOTE
If parameter 213 VT Connect. 3ph is set to Vph-g, VSyn, the voltage measured by voltage trans-
former 1 is always used for voltage protection. Then parameters 614 and 615 are not available.
i
i
NOTE
If parameter 213 VT Connect. 3ph is set to Vab, Vbc, VSyn or Vab, Vbc or Vab, Vbc, Vx, the
setting option Vph-n for parameter 614 and 615 is not available.
Settings
Addresses which have an appended “A” can only be changed with DIGSI, under “Additional Settings”.
The table indicates region-specific default settings. Column C (configuration) indicates the corresponding
secondary nominal current of the current transformer.
Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting Comments
201 CT Starpoint towards Line
towards Busbar
towards Line CT Starpoint
2.1.3.3
Functions
2.1 General
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 43
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting Comments
202 Vnom PRIMARY 0.10 .. 800.00 kV 20.00 kV Rated Primary Voltage
203 Vnom SECONDARY 34 .. 225 V 100 V Rated Secondary Voltage
(L-L)
204 CT PRIMARY 10 .. 50000 A 400 A CT Rated Primary Current
205 CT SECONDARY 1A
5A
1A CT Rated Secondary
Current
206A Vph / Vdelta 1.00 .. 3.00 1.73 Matching ratio Phase-VT To
Open-Delta-VT
207 Vol. Symmetry NO
YES
NO Assumption voltage
symmetry
209 PHASE SEQ. A B C
A C B
A B C Phase Sequence
210A TMin TRIP CMD 0.01 .. 32.00 sec 0.15 sec Minimum TRIP Command
Duration
211A TMax CLOSE CMD 0.01 .. 32.00 sec 1.00 sec Maximum Close Command
Duration
212 BkrClosed I MIN 1A 0.04 .. 1.00 A 0.04 A Closed Breaker Min.
Current Threshold
5A 0.20 .. 5.00 A 0.20 A
213 VT Connect. 3ph Van, Vbn, Vcn
Vab, Vbc, VGnd
Vab, Vbc, VSyn
Vab, Vbc
Vph-g, VSyn
Vab, Vbc, Vx
Van, Vbn, Vcn VT Connection, three-
phase
214 Rated Frequency 50 Hz
60 Hz
50 Hz Rated Frequency
215 Distance Unit km
Miles
km Distance measurement
unit
217 Ignd-CT PRIM 1 .. 50000 A 60 A Ignd-CT rated primary
current
218 Ignd-CT SEC 1A
5A
1A Ignd-CT rated secondary
current
220 Threshold BI 1 Thresh. BI 176V
Thresh. BI 88V
Thresh. BI 19V
Thresh. BI 176V Threshold for Binary Input
1
221 Threshold BI 2 Thresh. BI 176V
Thresh. BI 88V
Thresh. BI 19V
Thresh. BI 176V Threshold for Binary Input
2
222 Threshold BI 3 Thresh. BI 176V
Thresh. BI 88V
Thresh. BI 19V
Thresh. BI 176V Threshold for Binary Input
3
223 Threshold BI 4 Thresh. BI 176V
Thresh. BI 88V
Thresh. BI 19V
Thresh. BI 176V Threshold for Binary Input
4
224 Threshold BI 5 Thresh. BI 176V
Thresh. BI 88V
Thresh. BI 19V
Thresh. BI 176V Threshold for Binary Input
5
Functions
2.1 General
44 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting Comments
225 Threshold BI 6 Thresh. BI 176V
Thresh. BI 88V
Thresh. BI 19V
Thresh. BI 176V Threshold for Binary Input
6
226 Threshold BI 7 Thresh. BI 176V
Thresh. BI 88V
Thresh. BI 19V
Thresh. BI 176V Threshold for Binary Input
7
227 Threshold BI 8 Thresh. BI 176V
Thresh. BI 88V
Thresh. BI 19V
Thresh. BI 176V Threshold for Binary Input
8
228 Threshold BI 9 Thresh. BI 176V
Thresh. BI 88V
Thresh. BI 19V
Thresh. BI 176V Threshold for Binary Input
9
229 Threshold BI 10 Thresh. BI 176V
Thresh. BI 88V
Thresh. BI 19V
Thresh. BI 176V Threshold for Binary Input
10
230 Threshold BI 11 Thresh. BI 176V
Thresh. BI 88V
Thresh. BI 19V
Thresh. BI 176V Threshold for Binary Input
11
232 VXnom PRIMARY 0.10 .. 800.00 kV 20.00 kV Rated Primary Voltage X
233 VXnom SECONDARY 100 .. 225 V 100 V Rated Secondary Voltage X
235A ATEX100 NO
YES
YES Storage of th. Replicas w/o
Power Supply
238 Ignd2-CT PRIM. 1 .. 50000 A 400 A Ignd2-CT rated primary c.
(conn. to I2)
239 Ignd2-CT SEC. 1A
5A
1A Ignd2-CT rated secondary
current (I2)
250A 50/51 2-ph prot OFF
ON
OFF 50, 51 Time Overcurrent
with 2ph. prot.
251A CT Connect. A, B, C, (Gnd)
A,G2,C,G; G->B
A,G2,C,G; G2->B
A, B, C, (Gnd) CT Connection
252 Ph LPCT pol. not reversed
reversed
not reversed Phase LPCT orientation /
polarity
260 Ir-52 10 .. 50000 A 125 A Rated Normal Current (52
Breaker)
261 OP.CYCLES AT Ir 100 .. 1000000 10000 Switching Cycles at Rated
Normal Current
262 Isc-52 10 .. 100000 A 25000 A Rated Short-Circuit
Breaking Current
263 OP.CYCLES Isc 1 .. 1000 50 Switch. Cycles at Rated
Short-Cir. Curr.
264 Ix EXPONENT 1.0 .. 3.0 2.0 Exponent for the Ix-
Method
265 Cmd.via control (Setting options depend on
configuration)
none 52 B.Wear: Open Cmd. via
Control Device
266 T 52 BREAKTIME 1 .. 600 ms 80 ms Breaktime (52 Breaker)
267 T 52 OPENING 1 .. 500 ms 65 ms Opening Time (52 Breaker)
280 Holmgr. for Σi NO
YES
NO Holmgreen-conn. (for fast
sum-i-monit.)
Functions
2.1 General
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 45
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting Comments
310 Iph-PRIM ref. 10 .. 50000 A 400 A Primary refer. phase
current for prot.
311 Iph-LPCT PRIM 1 .. 5000 A 400 A Rated primary phase
current LPCT
312 Ignd-PRIM ref. 1 .. 50000 A 60 A Primary refer. ground
current for prot.
313 Ignd-LPCT PRIM 0.01 .. 5000.00 A 2.00 A Rated primary ground
current LPCT
314 Vph-LPCT SEC 10.0 .. 1000.0 mV 225.0 mV Rated secondary phase
voltage LPCT
315 Vgnd-LPCT SEC 10.0 .. 1000.0 mV 225.0 mV Rated secondary ground
voltage LPCT
320A Corr.factor IL1 0.9000 .. 1.1000 1.0000 Correction factor for
magnitude IL1
321A Corr.factor IL2 0.9000 .. 1.1000 1.0000 Correction factor for
magnitude IL2
322A Corr.factor IL3 0.9000 .. 1.1000 1.0000 Correction factor for
magnitude IL3
323A Corr.factor IE 0.9000 .. 1.1000 1.0000 Correction factor for
magnitude IE
324A Corr.factor IEE 0.9000 .. 1.1000 1.0000 Correction factor for
magnitude IEE
330 V-LPVT SEC 3.00 .. 17.00 V 3.25 V rated secondary voltage
LPVT
332A V-LPVT PHA -10.00 .. 10.00 ° 0.00 ° phase angle LPVT
613A Gnd O/Cprot. w. Ignd (measured)
3I0 (calcul.)
Ignd (measured) Ground Overcurrent
protection with
614A OP. QUANTITY 59 Vphph
Vph-n
V1
V2
Vphph Opera. Quantity for 59
Overvolt. Prot.
615A OP. QUANTITY 27 V1
Vphph
Vph-n
V1 Opera. Quantity for 27
Undervolt. Prot.
616 STATIC GEN. YES
NO
NO Static or non self-exc. Asyn.
Generator
Information List
No. Information Type of
Informa-
tion
Comments
5145 >Reverse Rot. SP >Reverse Phase Rotation
5147 Rotation ABC OUT Phase rotation ABC
5148 Rotation ACB OUT Phase rotation ACB
Oscillographic Fault Records
The Multifunctional Protection with Control 7SJ80 is equipped with a fault record memory. The instantaneous
values of the measured values
2.1.3.4
2.1.4
Functions
2.1 General
46 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
iA, iB, iC, iN, iNs and vA, vB, vC, vA2, vB3, vC1, vN, vX, vph-n, vSYN
(voltages depending on connection) are sampled at intervals of 1.0 ms (at 50 Hz) and stored in a revolving
buffer (20 samples per cycle). In the event of a fault, the data are recorded for a set period of time, but not for
more than 5 seconds. A maximum of 8 faults can be recorded in this buffer. The fault record memory is auto-
matically updated with every new fault, so no acknowledgment for previously recorded faults is required. In
addition to protection pickup, the recording of the fault data can also be started via a binary input or via the
serial interface.
Functional Description
The data of a fault event can be read out via the device interface and evaluated with the help of the SIGRA 4
graphic analysis software. SIGRA 4 graphically represents the data recorded during the fault event and also
calculates additional information from the measured values. Currents and voltages can be presented either as
primary or as secondary values. Signals are additionally recorded as binary tracks (marks), e.g. "pickup", "trip".
If port B of the device has been configured correspondingly, the fault record data can be imported by a central
controller via this interface and evaluated. Currents and voltages are prepared for a graphic representation.
Signals are additionally recorded as binary tracks (marks), e.g. "pickup", "trip".
The retrieval of the fault data by the central controller takes place automatically either after each protection
pickup or after a tipping.
If device parameter 651 ParEN100(LC)blk is set to ON, you can also read out fault records via port A (see
Section 2.1.2.2 Setting Notes).
Depending on the selected type of connection of the voltage transformers (address 213 VT Connect. 3ph),
the following measured values are recorded in the fault record:
Voltage connection
Van, Vbn, Vcn Vab, Vbc,
VGnd
Vab, Vbc Vab, Vbc, Vx Vab, Vbc, VSyn Vph-g, VSyn
vAB yes yes yes yes yes
vBC yes yes yes yes yes
vCA yes yes yes yes yes
vAyes yes
vByes yes
vCyes yes
v yes
ven yes yes
vSYN yes yes
vxyes
i
i
NOTE
The signals used for the binary tracks can be allocated in DIGSI.
i
i
NOTE
If one of the current transformer connection types A,G2,C,G; G->B or A,G2,C,G; G2->B has been
selected via parameter 251 CT Connect., the ground current ΙN2 measured with the second current trans-
former is indicated under track ΙN. The ground current detected by the fourth current transformer is indi-
cated under track ΙNs.
2.1.4.1
Functions
2.1 General
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 47
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Setting Notes
Configuration
Fault recording (waveform capture) will only take place if address 104 OSC. FAULT REC. is set to Enabled.
Other settings pertaining to fault recording (waveform capture) are found in the Osc. Fault Rec.
submenu of the SETTINGS menu. Waveform capture makes a distinction between the trigger instant for an
oscillographic record and the criterion to save the record (address 401 WAVEFORMTRIGGER). Normally, the
trigger is the pickup of a protection element, i.e. the time 0 is defined as the instant the first protection func-
tion picks up. The criterion for saving may be both the device pickup (Save w. Pickup) or the device trip
(Save w. TRIP). A trip command issued by the device can also be used as trigger instant (Start w.
TRIP), in this case it is also the saving criterion.
A fault event starts with the pickup by any protection function and ends when the last pickup of a protection
function has dropped out. Usually this is also the extent of a fault recording (address 402 WAVEFORM DATA =
Fault event). If automatic reclosing is performed, the entire system fault — with several reclosing attempts
if necessary — can be recorded until the fault has been cleared for good (address 402 WAVEFORM DATA =
Pow.Sys.Flt.). This facilitates the representation of the entire system fault history, but also consumes
storage capacity during the automatic reclosing dead time(s).
The actual storage time begins at the pre-fault time PRE. TRIG. TIME (address 404) ahead of the reference
instant, and ends at the post-fault time POST REC. TIME (address 405) after the storage criterion has reset.
The maximum storage duration of each fault record (MAX. LENGTH) is entered at address 403. Recording per
fault must not exceed 5 seconds. In maximum 8 records can be saved altogether with a maximum total time
of 18 s .
An oscillographic record can be triggered by a status change of a binary input, or from a PC via the operator
interface. Storage is then triggered dynamically. The length of the fault recording is set in address 406 BinIn
CAPT.TIME (but not longer than MAX. LENGTH, address 403). Pre-fault and post-fault times will add to this.
If the binary input time is set to ∞, the length of the record equals the time that the binary input is activated
(static), but not longer than the MAX. LENGTH (address 403).
Settings
Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments
401 WAVEFORMTRIGGER Save w. Pickup
Save w. TRIP
Start w. TRIP
Save w. Pickup Waveform Capture
402 WAVEFORM DATA Fault event
Pow.Sys.Flt.
Fault event Scope of Waveform Data
403 MAX. LENGTH 0.30 .. 5.00 sec 2.00 sec Max. length of a Waveform
Capture Record
404 PRE. TRIG. TIME 0.05 .. 0.50 sec 0.25 sec Captured Waveform Prior to
Trigger
405 POST REC. TIME 0.05 .. 0.50 sec 0.10 sec Captured Waveform after Event
406 BinIn CAPT.TIME 0.10 .. 5.00 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec Capture Time via Binary Input
Information List
No. Information Type of
Informa-
tion
Comments
- FltRecSta IntSP Fault Recording Start
4 >Trig.Wave.Cap. SP >Trigger Waveform Capture
203 Wave. deleted OUT_Ev Waveform data deleted
30053 Fault rec. run. OUT Fault recording is running
2.1.4.2
2.1.4.3
2.1.4.4
Functions
2.1 General
48 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Settings Groups
Up to four different setting groups can be created for establishing the device's function settings.
Applications
•Setting groups enable the user to save the corresponding settings for each application so that they can
be quickly called up when required. All setting groups are stored in the device. Only one setting group
may be active at a time.
Functional Description
Changing Setting Groups
During operation the user can switch back and forth setting groups locally, via the operator panel, binary
inputs (if so configured), the service interface using a personal computer, or via the system interface. For
reasons of safety it is not possible to change between setting groups during a power system fault.
A setting group includes the setting values for all functions that have been selected as Enabled during
configuration (see Section 2.1.1.2 Setting Notes). In 7SJ80 relays, four independent setting groups (A to D)
are available. While setting values may vary, the selected functions of each setting group remain the same.
Setting Notes
General
If setting group change option is not required, Group A is the default selection. Then, the rest of this section is
not applicable.
If the changeover option is desired, group changeover must be set to Grp Chge OPTION = Enabled
(address 103) when the function extent is configured. For the setting of the function parameters, each of the
required setting groups A to D (a maximum of 4) must be configured in sequence. The SIPROTEC 4 System
Description gives further information on how to copy setting groups or reset them to their status at delivery
and also how to change from one setting group to another.
Section 3.1 Mounting and Connections of this manual tells you how to change between several setting groups
externally via binary inputs.
Settings
Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments
302 CHANGE Group A
Group B
Group C
Group D
Binary Input
Protocol
Group A Change to Another Setting Group
Information List
No. Information Type of
Informa-
tion
Comments
- P-GrpA act IntSP Setting Group A is active
- P-GrpB act IntSP Setting Group B is active
- P-GrpC act IntSP Setting Group C is active
- P-GrpD act IntSP Setting Group D is active
7 >Set Group Bit0 SP >Setting Group Select Bit 0
8 >Set Group Bit1 SP >Setting Group Select Bit 1
2.1.5
2.1.5.1
2.1.5.2
2.1.5.3
2.1.5.4
Functions
2.1 General
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 49
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Power System Data 2
Functional Description
The general protection data (P.System Data 2) include settings associated with all functions rather than a
specific protection or monitoring function. In contrast to the P.System Data 1 as discussed before, they
can be changed with the setting group.
Applications
When the primary reference voltage and the primary reference current of the protected object are set, the
device is able to calculate and output the operational measured value percentage.
For purposes of fault location, a maximum of three different line sections can be considered.
Setting Notes
Definition of Nominal Rated Values
At addresses 1101 FullScaleVolt. and 1102 FullScaleCurr., the primary reference voltage (phaseto-
phase) and reference current (phase) of the protected equipment is entered. If these reference sizes match
the primary nominal values of the VTs and CTs, they correspond to the settings in address 202 and 204
(Section 2.1.3.2 Setting Notes). They are generally used to show values referenced to full scale.
Ground Impedance Ratios (only for Fault Location)
The adjustment of the ground impedance ratio is only important for the utilization of the line fault location
function. This is done by entering the resistance ratio RE/RL and the reactance ratio XE/XL.
The values under addresses 1103 and 1104 apply if only one line section is available and to all faults that
occur outside the defined line sections.
If several line sections are set, the following shall apply:
•for line section 1, addresses 6001 and 6002
•for line section 1, addresses 6011 and 6012
•for line section 1, addresses 6021 and 6022.
Resistance ratio RE/RL and reactance ratio XE/XL are calculated formally and do not correspond to the real
and imaginary components of ZE/ZL. No complex calculation is required! The ratios can be obtained from the
line data using the following formulas:
[formelfehlerorter-260602-kn, 1, en_US]
Where
R0– Zero sequence resistance of the line
X0– Zero sequence reactance of the line
R1– Positive sequence resistance of the line
X1– Positive sequence reactance of the line
This data can be used for the entire line or line section, or as distance-related values, since the quotients are
independent of the distance.
Calculation example:
20 kV free line 120 mm2 with the following data:
R0/s = 0.88 Ω/km (1.42 Ω/mile) Zero sequence resistance
X0/s = 1.26 Ω/km (2.03 Ω/mile) Zero sequence reactance
R1/s = 0.24 Ω/km (0.39 Ω/mile) Positive sequence resistance
2.1.6
2.1.6.1
2.1.6.2
Functions
2.1 General
50 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
X1/s = 0.34 Ω/km (0.55 Ω/mile) Positive sequence reactance
For ground impedance ratios, the following results:
[formfehl-260602-kn, 1, en_US]
Reactance per Unit Length (only for Fault Location)
The setting of the reactance per unit length is only important for the utilization of the line fault location func-
tion. The reactance setting enables the protective relay to indicate the fault location in terms of distance.
The reactance value X' is entered as a reference value x', i.e. in Ω/mile if set to distance unit Miles (address
215, see Section 2.1.3.2 Setting Notes under "Distance Unit") or in Ω/km if set to distance unit km. If, after
having entered the reactance per unit length, the distance unit is changed under address 215, the reactance
per unit length must be reconfigured in accordance with the new distance unit.
The values under address 1106 (km) or 1105 (Miles) apply if only one line section is available and to all faults
that occur outside the defined line sections.
If several line sections are set, the following shall apply:
•for line section 1, addresses 6004(km) or 6003 (Miles)
•for line section 2, addresses 6014 (km) or 6013 (Miles),
•for line section 3, addresses 6024 (km) or 6023 (Miles).
When setting the parameters in DIGSI, the values can also be entered as primary values. In that case the
following conversion to secondary values is not required.
For the conversion of primary values to secondary values the following applies in general:
[zsekundaer-260602-kn, 1, en_US]
Likewise, the following applies to the reactance per unit length of a line:
[xsekundaer-260602-kn, 1, en_US]
with
NCTR — Transformation ratio of the current transformer
NVTR — Transformation ratio of the voltage transformer
Calculation example:
In the following, the same line as illustrated in the example for ground impedance ratios (above) and addi-
tional data on the voltage transformers will be used:
Current Transformers 500 A/5 A
Voltage Transformers 20 kV/0.1 kV
The secondary reactance per unit length is calculated as follows:
[xsekund-beispiel-260602-kn, 1, en_US]
Functions
2.1 General
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 51
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Line Angle (only for Fault Location)
The setting of the line angle is only important for the utilization of the line fault location function. The line
angle can be derived from the line constants. The following applies:
[formel-allg-ltgdaten-1-oz-310702, 1, en_US]
with RL being the ohmic resistance and XL being the reactance of the line.
The value under address 1109 applies if only one line section is available and to all faults that occur outside
the defined line sections.
If several line sections are set, the following shall apply:
•for line section 1, address 6005
•for line section 2, address 6015
•for line section 3, address 6025
This data can be used for the entire line or line section, or as distance-related values, since the quotients are
independent of the distance. It is also irrelevant whether the quotients were derived from primary or secon-
dary values.
Calculation Example::
110 kV free line 150 mm2 with the following data:
R'1 = 0.19 Ω/km (0.31 Ω/mile)
X'1 = 0.42 Ω/km (0.69 Ω/mile)
The line angle is calculated as follows:
[formel-allg-ltgdaten-2-oz-310702, 1, en_US]
The respective address must be set to Line angle = 66°.
Line Length (only for Fault Location)
The setting of the line length is only important for the utilization of the line fault location function. The line
length is required so that the fault location can be given as a reference value (in %). Furthermore, when using
several line sections, the respective length of the individual sections is defined.
The values under address 1110 (km) or 1111 (Miles apply if only one line section is available and to all faults
that occur outside the defined line sections.
If several line sections are set, the following shall apply:
•for line section 1, addresses 6006 (km) or 6007 (Miles)
•for line section 2, addresses 6016 (km) or 6017 (Miles)
•for line section 3, addresses 6026 (km) or 6027 (Miles)
The length set for the entire line must correspond to the sum of lengths configured for the line sections. A
deviation of 10% max. is admissible.
Operating Range of the Overload Protection
The current threshold entered in address 1107 I MOTOR START limits the operating range of the overload
protection to larger current values. The thermal replica is kept constant for as long as this threshold is
exceeded.
Functions
2.1 General
52 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Inverting Power Measured Values/Metered Values
The directional values (power, power factor, work and related min., max., mean and setpoint values), calcu-
lated in the operational measured values, are usually defined a positive in the direction of the protected
object. This requires that the connection polarity for the entire device was configured accordingly in the
P.System Data 1 (compare also "Polarity of the Current Transformers", address 201). But it is also possible
to make different settings for the "forward" direction" for the protection functions and the positive direction
for the power etc., e.g. to have the active power supply (from the line to the busbar) displayed positively. To
do so, set address 1108 P,Q sign to reversed. If the setting is not reversed (default), the positive
direction for the power etc. corresponds to the "forward" direction for the protection functions. Section
4 Technical Data provides a detailed list of the values in question.
Settings
The table indicates region-specific presettings. Column C (configuration) indicates the corresponding secon-
dary nominal current of the current transformer.
Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting Comments
1101 FullScaleVolt. 0.10 .. 800.00 kV 20.00 kV Measurem:FullScale-
Voltage(Equipm.rating)
1102 FullScaleCurr. 10 .. 50000 A 400 A Measurem:FullScaleCur-
rent(Equipm.rating)
1103 RE/RL -0.33 .. 7.00 1.00 Zero seq. compensating
factor RE/RL
1104 XE/XL -0.33 .. 7.00 1.00 Zero seq. compensating
factor XE/XL
1105 x' 1A 0.0050 .. 15.0000 Ω/mi 0.2420 Ω/mi feeder reactance per mile:
x'
5A 0.0010 .. 3.0000 Ω/mi 0.0484 Ω/mi
1106 x' 1A 0.0050 .. 9.5000 Ω/km 0.1500 Ω/km feeder reactance per km: x'
5A 0.0010 .. 1.9000 Ω/km 0.0300 Ω/km
1107 I MOTOR START 1A 0.40 .. 10.00 A 2.50 A Motor Start Current (Block
49, Start 48)
5A 2.00 .. 50.00 A 12.50 A
1108 P,Q sign not reversed
reversed
not reversed P,Q operational measured
values sign
1109 Line angle 10 .. 89 ° 85 ° Line angle
1110 Line length 0.1 .. 1000.0 km 100.0 km Line length in kilometer
1111 Line length 0.1 .. 650.0 Miles 62.1 Miles Line length in miles
6001 S1: RE/RL -0.33 .. 7.00 1.00 S1: Zero seq. compen-
sating factor RE/RL
6002 S1: XE/XL -0.33 .. 7.00 1.00 S1: Zero seq. compen-
sating factor XE/XL
6003 S1: x' 1A 0.0050 .. 15.0000 Ω/mi 0.2420 Ω/mi S1: feeder reactance per
mile: x'
5A 0.0010 .. 3.0000 Ω/mi 0.0484 Ω/mi
6004 S1: x' 1A 0.0050 .. 9.5000 Ω/km 0.1500 Ω/km S1: feeder reactance per
km: x'
5A 0.0010 .. 1.9000 Ω/km 0.0300 Ω/km
6005 S1: Line angle 10 .. 89 ° 85 ° S1: Line angle
6006 S1: Line length 0.1 .. 650.0 Miles 62.1 Miles S1: Line length in miles
6007 S1: Line length 0.1 .. 1000.0 km 100.0 km S1: Line length in kilometer
6011 S2: RE/RL -0.33 .. 7.00 1.00 S2: Zero seq. compen-
sating factor RE/RL
6012 S2: XE/XL -0.33 .. 7.00 1.00 S2: Zero seq. compen-
sating factor XE/XL
6013 S2: x' 1A 0.0050 .. 15.0000 Ω/mi 0.2420 Ω/mi S2: feeder reactance per
mile: x'
5A 0.0010 .. 3.0000 Ω/mi 0.0484 Ω/mi
2.1.6.3
Functions
2.1 General
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 53
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting Comments
6014 S2: x' 1A 0.0050 .. 9.5000 Ω/km 0.1500 Ω/km S2: feeder reactance per
km: x'
5A 0.0010 .. 1.9000 Ω/km 0.0300 Ω/km
6015 S2: Line angle 10 .. 89 ° 85 ° S2: Line angle
6016 S2: Line length 0.1 .. 650.0 Miles 62.1 Miles S2: Line length in miles
6017 S2: Line length 0.1 .. 1000.0 km 100.0 km S2: Line length in kilometer
6021 S3: RE/RL -0.33 .. 7.00 1.00 S3: Zero seq. compen-
sating factor RE/RL
6022 S3: XE/XL -0.33 .. 7.00 1.00 S3: Zero seq. compen-
sating factor XE/XL
6023 S3: x' 1A 0.0050 .. 15.0000 Ω/mi 0.2420 Ω/mi S3: feeder reactance per
mile: x'
5A 0.0010 .. 3.0000 Ω/mi 0.0484 Ω/mi
6024 S3: x' 1A 0.0050 .. 9.5000 Ω/km 0.1500 Ω/km S3: feeder reactance per
km: x'
5A 0.0010 .. 1.9000 Ω/km 0.0300 Ω/km
6025 S3: Line angle 10 .. 89 ° 85 ° S3: Line angle
6026 S3: Line length 0.1 .. 650.0 Miles 62.1 Miles S3: Line length in miles
6027 S3: Line length 0.1 .. 1000.0 km 100.0 km S3: Line length in kilometer
Information List
No. Information Type of
Informa-
tion
Comments
126 ProtON/OFF IntSP Protection ON/OFF (via system port)
356 >Manual Close SP >Manual close signal
466.4010 Cmd Trip IntSP Trip via control command
501 Relay PICKUP OUT Relay PICKUP
511 Relay TRIP OUT Relay GENERAL TRIP command
533 Ia = VI Primary fault current Ia
534 Ib = VI Primary fault current Ib
535 Ic = VI Primary fault current Ic
561 Man.Clos.Detect OUT Manual close signal detected
2720 >Enable ANSI#-2 SP >Enable 50/67-(N)-2 (override 79 blk)
4601 >52-a SP >52-a contact (OPEN, if bkr is open)
4602 >52-b SP >52-b contact (OPEN, if bkr is closed)
16019 >52 Wear start SP >52 Breaker Wear Start Criteria
16020 52 WearSet.fail OUT 52 Wear blocked by Time Setting Failure
16027 52WL.blk I PErr OUT 52 Breaker Wear Logic blk Ir-CB>=Isc-CB
16028 52WL.blk n PErr OUT 52 Breaker W.Log.blk SwCyc.Isc>=SwCyc.Ir
18420 >Trip via BI SP >Trip via Binary Input
18421 Trip via GOOSE ExSP Trip via GOOSE
18423 Direct Trip OUT Direct Trip
18424 PI Trip NC OUT PI Trip NC(ON,if Device ok & No Trip)
18425 >DDI Open SP >DDI Open status
2.1.6.4
Functions
2.1 General
54 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
EN100-Module
Functional Description
The Ethernet EN100-Modul enables integration of the 7SJ80 in 100-Mbit communication networks in control
and automation systems with the protocols according to IEC 61850 standard. This standard permits uniform
communication of the devices without gateways and protocol converters. Even when installed in heteroge-
neous environments, SIPROTEC 4 relays therefore provide for open and interoperable operation. Parallel to the
process control integration of the device, this interface can also be used for communication with DIGSI and for
inter-relay communication via GOOSE.
Setting Notes
Interface Selection
No special settings are required for operating the Ethernet system interface module (IEC 1850, Ethernet
EN100-Modul). If the ordered version of the device is equipped with such a module, it is automatically allo-
cated to the interface available for it, namely Port B.
IEC 61850 GOOSE Function
The GOOSE function can be disabled via a device parameter. For more information, please refer to Section
2.1.2.2 Setting Notes.
Information List
No. Information Type of
Informa-
tion
Comments
009.0100 Failure Modul IntSP Failure EN100 Modul
009.0101 Fail Ch1 IntSP Failure EN100 Link Channel 1 (Ch1)
009.0102 Fail Ch2 IntSP Failure EN100 Link Channel 2 (Ch2)
2.1.7
2.1.7.1
2.1.7.2
2.1.7.3
Functions
2.1 General
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 55
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Overcurrent Protection 50, 51, 50N, 51N
The overcurrent protection is provided with a total of four elements each for the phase currents and the
ground current. All elements are independent from each other and can be combined as desired.
If it is desired in isolated or resonant-grounded systems that three-phase devices should work together with
two-phase protection equipment, the overcurrent protection can be configured in such a way that it allows
twophase operation besides the three-phase mode (see Section 2.1.3.2 Setting Notes).
The high-set elements 50-2, 50-3, 50N-2, 50N-3 as well as the overcurrent elements 50-1 and 50N-1 always
operate with a definite tripping time (51), the elements 51 and 51N always with an inverse tripping time (50).
Applications
•The non-directional overcurrent protection is applicable for networks that are radial and supplied from a
single source or open looped networks, for backup protection of differential protective schemes of all
types of lines, transformers, generators and busbars.
General
The overcurrent protection for the ground current can either operate with measured values ΙN or with the
quantities 3Ι0 calculated from the three phase currents. Which values are used depends on the setting of
parameter 613 Gnd O/Cprot. w. and the selected type of connection of the current transformers. Informa-
tion on this can be found in Chapter 2.1.3.2 Setting Notes, connection examples in Appendix C Connection
Examples. Devices featuring a sensitive ground current input, however, generally use the calculated quantity
3Ι0.
All overcurrent elements enabled in the device may be blocked via the automatic reclosing function
(depending on the cycle) or via an external signal to the binary inputs of the device. Removal of blocking
during pickup will restart time delays. The Manual Close signal is an exception in this case. If a circuit breaker
is manually closed onto a fault, it can be re-opened immediately. For overcurrent elements or high-set
elements the delay may be bypassed via a Manual Close pulse, thus resulting in high speed tripping. This pulse
is extended up to at least 300 ms.
The automatic reclosure function 79 may also initiate immediate tripping for the overcurrent and high-set
elements depending on the cycle.
Pickup of the definite-time elements can be stabilized by setting the dropout times. This protection is used in
systems where intermittent faults occur. Combined with electromechanical relays, it allows different dropout
responses to be adjusted and a time grading of digital and electromechanical relays to be implemented.
Pickup and delay settings may be quickly adapted to system requirements via dynamic setting changeover
(see Section 2.4 Dynamic Cold Load Pickup).
Tripping by the 50-1 and 51 elements (in phases), 50N-1 and 51N elements (in ground path) may be blocked
for inrush conditions by utilizing the inrush restraint feature.
The following table gives an overview of the interconnections to other functions of the devices 7SJ80.
Table 2-2 Interconnection to other functions
Overcurrent
Protection
Elements
Connection to
Automatic
Reclosing
Manual
CLOSE
Dynamic Cold Load
Pickup
Inrush Restraint
50-1 • • • •
50-2 • • •
50-3 • • •
51 • • • •
50N-1 • • • •
50N-2 • • •
50N-3 • • •
2.2
2.2.1
Functions
2.2 Overcurrent Protection 50, 51, 50N, 51N
56 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Overcurrent
Protection
Elements
Connection to
Automatic
Reclosing
Manual
CLOSE
Dynamic Cold Load
Pickup
Inrush Restraint
51N • • • •
Definite Time, High-set Elements 50-3, 50-2, 50N-3, 50N-2
For each element, an individual pickup value 50-3 PICKUP, 50-2 PICKUP or 50N-3 PICKUP, 50N-2
PICKUP is set. For 50-3 PICKUP and 50N-3 PICKUP, it is possible to measure the Instantaneous in
addition to Fundamental and True RMS. If set to Instantaneous, the element picks up at 2 · √2 · setting
value (rms). Each phase and ground current is compared separately per element with the common pickup
values 50-3 PICKUP, 50-2 PICKUP or 50N-3 PICKUP, 50N-2 PICKUP. If the respective pickup value is
exceeded, this is signaled. After the user-defined time delays 50-3 DELAY, 50-2 DELAY or 50N-3 DELAY,
50N-2 DELAY have elapsed, trip commands are issued which are available for each element. The dropout
value is roughly equal to 95% of the pickup value for currents > 0.3 ΙNom. If the measurement of the instanta-
neous values has been parameterized for the 50-3 or 50N-3 element, the dropout ratio is set to 90 %.
Pickup can be stabilized by setting dropout times 1215 50 T DROP-OUT or 1315 50N T DROP-OUT. This
time is started and maintains the pickup condition if the current falls below the threshold. Therefore, the func-
tion does not drop out at high speed. The trip delay time 50-3 DELAY, 50-2 DELAY or 50N-3 DELAY,
50N-2 DELAY continues running in the meantime. After the dropout delay time has elapsed, the pickup is
reported OFF and the trip delay time is reset unless the threshold 50-3 PICKUP, 50-2 PICKUP or 50N-3
PICKUP, 50N-2 PICKUP has been exceeded again. If the threshold is exceeded again during the dropout
delay time, the time is canceled. The trip delay time 50-3 DELAY, 50-2 DELAY or 50N-3 DELAY, 50N-2
DELAY continues running in the meantime. If the threshold value is exceeded after this time has elapsed, the
trip command is issued immediately. If the threshold value is not exceeded at this time, there is no reaction. If
the threshold value is exceeded again after expiry of the trip command delay time while the dropout delay
time is still running, tripping is initiated immediately.
These elements can be blocked by the automatic reclosing function (79 AR).
The pickup values of each 50-2, 50-3 Element for phase currents and 50N-2, 50N-3 Element for the ground
current and the element-specific time delays can be set individually.
The following figures give an example of logic diagrams for the high-set elements 50-2 PICKUP or 50N-2
PICKUP. They also apply analogously to the high-set elements 50-3 PICKUP and 50N-3 PICKUP.
2.2.2
Functions
2.2 Overcurrent Protection 50, 51, 50N, 51N
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 57
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[7sj6x-hochstromst-i-fuer-ph-20061212, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-4 Logic diagram for 50-2 high-set element for phases
If parameter MANUAL CLOSE is set to 50-2 instant. or 50-3 instant. and manual close detection is
used, a pickup causes instantaneous tripping, even if the element is blocked via binary input.
The same applies to 79 AR 50-2 inst. or 79 AR 50-3 inst.
Functions
2.2 Overcurrent Protection 50, 51, 50N, 51N
58 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[7sj6x-hochstromst-ie-20061212, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-5 Logic diagram for 50N-2 high-set element
If parameter MANUAL CLOSE is set to 50N-2 instant. or 50N-3 instant. and manual close detection is
used, a pickup causes instantaneous tripping, even if the element is blocked via binary input. The same applies
to AR 50N-2 inst.
The same applies to 79 AR 50N-2 inst. or 79 AR 50N-3 inst.
Definite Time Overcurrent Elements 50-1, 50N-1
For each element an individual pickup value 50-1 PICKUP or 50N-1 PICKUP is set. Apart from Funda-
mental, the True RMS can also be measured. Each phase and ground current is compared separately with
the setting value 50-1 or 50N-1 for each element. If the respective value is exceeded, this is signaled. If the
inrush restraint feature (see below) is applied, either the normal pickup signals or the corresponding inrush
signals are output as long as inrush current is detected. After user-configured time delays 50-1 DELAY or
50N-1 DELAY have elapsed, a trip signal is issued if no inrush current is detected or inrush restraint is disa-
bled. If the inrush restraint feature is enabled and an inrush condition exists, no tripping takes place but a
message is recorded and displayed indicating when the overcurrent element time delay elapses. Trip signals
and signals on the expiration of time delay are available separately for each element. The dropout value is
approximately 95% of the pickup value for currents > 0.3 INom.
Pickup can be stabilized by setting dropout times 1215 50 T DROP-OUT or1315 50N T DROP-OUT. This
time is started and maintains the pickup condition if the current falls below the threshold. Therefore, the func-
tion does not drop out at high speed. The trip-command delay time 50-1 DELAY or 50N-1 DELAY continues
running in the meantime. After the dropout delay time has elapsed, the pickup is reported OFF and the trip
delay time is reset unless the threshold 50-1 or 50N-1 has been exceeded again. If the threshold is exceeded
again during the dropout delay time, the time is canceled. However, the trip-command delay time 50-1
2.2.3
Functions
2.2 Overcurrent Protection 50, 51, 50N, 51N
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 59
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
DELAY or 50N-1 DELAY continues running. If the threshold value is exceeded after its expiry, the trip
command is issued immediately. If the threshold value is not exceeded at this time, there is no reaction. If the
threshold value is exceeded again after expiry of the trip-command delay time, while the dropout delay time is
still running, tripping occurs immediately.
Pickup stabilization of the overcurrent elements 50-1 or 50N-1 by means of settable dropout time is deacti-
vated if an inrush pickup is present since an inrush does not represent an intermittent fault.
These elements can be blocked by the automatic reclosing function (79 AR).
The pickup values of each 50-1 element for phase currents and 50N-1 element for the ground current and the
element-specific time delays can be set individually.
The following figures show the logic diagrams for the current elements 50-1 and 50N-1.
[7sj6x-ueberstromst-i-fuer-ph-20061212, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-6 Logic diagram for the 50-1 overcurrent element for phases
If parameter MANUAL CLOSE is set to 50 -1 instant. and manual close detection is used, a pickup causes
instantaneous tripping, even if blocking of the element via binary input is present.
The same applies to 79 AR 50-1 inst.
The dropout delay only operates if no inrush was detected. An incoming inrush will reset a running dropout
delay time.
Functions
2.2 Overcurrent Protection 50, 51, 50N, 51N
60 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[7sj6x_rueckfallverzoegerung_i_gr_ph_260803_he, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-7 Logic diagram of the dropout delay for 50-1
[7sj6x-ueberstromst-ie-20061212, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-8 Logic diagram for the 50N-1 overcurrent current element
If parameter MANUAL CLOSE is set to 50N-1 instant. and manual close detection applies, the trip is initi-
ated as soon as the pickup conditions arrive, even if the element is blocked via a binary input.
The same applies to 79 AR 50N-1 inst.
The pickup values of each 50-1, 50-2 element for the phase currents and 50N-1, 50N-2 element for the
ground current and the valid delay times for each element can be set individually.
The dropout delay only functions if no inrush was detected. An incoming inrush will reset a running dropout
time delay.
Functions
2.2 Overcurrent Protection 50, 51, 50N, 51N
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 61
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[7sj6x_rueckfallverzoegerung_i_gr_erde_260803_he, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-9 Logic of the dropout delay for 50N-1
Inverse Time Overcurrent Elements 51, 51N
Inverse time overcurrent elements are dependent on the ordering version. They always operate with an
inverse time Curve in accordance with IEC or ANSI standards. The characteristics and associated formulas are
given in the Technical Data.
When configuring one of the inverse-time characteristics, the definite-time elements 50-3, 50-2,and 50-1 are
also active (see Section "Definite-time High-set Current Elements 50-3, 50-2, 50N-3, 50N-2 " and "Definite-
time Overcurrent Elements 50-1, 50N-1 ").
A voltage restraint can optionally be set (see Section “Inverse Time Overcurrent Protection (Voltage-
controlled / Voltage-restraint”).
Pickup Behavior
For each element, an individual pickup value 51 PICKUP or 51N PICKUP is set. Apart from Fundamental,
the True RMS can also be measured. Each phase and ground current is separately compared with the setting
value 51 or 51N per element. If a current exceeds 1.1 times the setting value, the corresponding element picks
up and is signaled individually. If the inrush restraint function is used, either the normal pickup signals or the
corresponding inrush signals are issued as long as inrush current is detected. If the 51 element picks up, the
tripping time is calculated from the actual fault current flowing, using an integrating method of measurement.
The calculated tripping time depends on the selected tripping curve. Once this time has elapsed, a trip signal is
issued provided that no inrush current is detected or inrush restraint is disabled. If the inrush restraint function
is enabled and an inrush condition exists, no tripping takes place but a message is issued indicating when the
overcurrent element time delay elapses.
These elements can be blocked by the automatic reclosing feature (79 AR).
For ground current element 51N, the characteristic may be selected independently of the characteristic used
for phase currents.
Pickup values of elements 51 (phase currents) and 51N (ground current) and the relevant time multiplicators
may be set individually.
The following two figures show the logic diagrams for the inverse time overcurrent protection.
2.2.4
Functions
2.2 Overcurrent Protection 50, 51, 50N, 51N
62 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[7sj6x-abhueberstromzeit-phase-20061212, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-10 Logic diagram of the inverse-time overcurrent protection element for phases
If an ANSI characteristic is configured, parameter 1209 51 TIME DIAL is used instead of parameter 1208 51
TIME DIAL.
If parameter MANUAL CLOSE is set to 51 instant. and manual close detection applies, the trip is initiated
as soon as the pickup conditions arrive, even if the element is blocked via a binary input.
The same applies to 79 AR 51N inst.
Functions
2.2 Overcurrent Protection 50, 51, 50N, 51N
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 63
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[7sj6x-abhueberstromzeit-erde-20061212, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-11 Logic diagram of the inverse-time overcurrent protection element for ground
If an ANSI characteristic is configured, parameter 1309 51N TIME DIAL is used instead of parameter 1308
51N TIME DIAL.
If parameter MANUAL CLOSE is set to 51N instant. and manual close detection applies, the trip is initiated
as soon as the pickup conditions arrive, even if the element is blocked via binary input.
The same applies to 79 AR 51N inst.
Dropout Behavior
For the ANSI or IEC characteristics, you can select whether an element drops out instantaneously after a
threshold has been undershot or whether dropout is performed by means of disk emulation. "Instantaneous"
means that the picked-up element drops out when 95 % of the pickup value is undershot. For a new pickup,
the time delay starts at zero.
The disk emulation evokes a dropout process (timer counter is decrementing) which begins after de-energiza-
tion. This process corresponds to the reset of a Ferraris disk (explaining its denomination "disk emulation"). In
case several faults occur in succession, the "history" is taken into consideration due to the inertia of the
Ferraris disk and the time response is adapted. Reset begins as soon as 90 % of the setting value is undershot,
in accordance to the dropout curve of the selected characteristic. In the range between the dropout value
(95 % of the pickup value) and 90 % of the setting value, the incrementing and the decrementing processes
are in idle state.
Disk emulation offers advantages when the overcurrent relay elements must be coordinated with conven-
tional electromechanical overcurrent relays located towards the source.
Functions
2.2 Overcurrent Protection 50, 51, 50N, 51N
64 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Inverse Time Overcurrent Protection 51V (Voltage-controlled /
Voltagerestraint)
Undervoltage Consideration
The inverse time overcurrent protection is provided with an undervoltage detection that can be disabled
(address 1223 VOLT. INFLUENCE). This function can influence overcurrent detection by means of two
different methods:
•Voltage-controlled: If a set voltage threshold is undershot, the overcurrent element is released.
•Voltage-restraint: The pickup threshold of the overcurrent element depends on the voltage magnitude.
A lower voltage decreases the current pickup value (see Figure 2-13). In the range between V/VNom = 1.00
to 0.25 a linear, directly proportional dependence is realized, and therefore the following applies:
[spannungsabhaengigkeit-des-anregewertes, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-12 Voltage influence of the pickup value
The 51 PICKUP value is decreased proportional to the voltage decrease. Consequently, for constant current Ι
the Ι/ 51 PICKUP ratio is increased and the tripping time is reduced. Compared with the standard curves repre-
sented in Section “Technical Data” the tripping curve shifts to the left side as the voltage decreases.
Switching to the lower pickup value or decreasing the pickup threshold is carried out phase-selectively. The
assignment of voltages to current-carrying phases is shown in the following table.
Table 2-3 Controlling voltages in relation to the fault currents
Strom Spannung
ΙAVA – VB
ΙBVB – VC
ΙCVC – VA
In order to avoid an unwanted operation in case of a voltage transformer fault, a function blocking is imple-
mented via a binary input controlled by the voltage transformer protection breaker as well as via the device-
internal measuring voltage failure detection ("Fuse Failure Monitor").
The following two figures show the logic diagrams for the inverse time overcurrent protection with under-
voltage consideration.
2.2.5
Functions
2.2 Overcurrent Protection 50, 51, 50N, 51N
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 65
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[7sjx_logic_51-phase-schleife-aktiv, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-13 Logic diagram of the voltage-controlled inverse time overcurrent protection
Functions
2.2 Overcurrent Protection 50, 51, 50N, 51N
66 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[7sjx_logic_51-phase, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-14 Logic diagram of the voltage-restraint inverse-time overcurrent protection
Dynamic Cold Load Pickup Function
It may be necessary to dynamically increase the pickup thresholds of the overcurrent protection if certain
system components exhibit an increased power consumption when they are switched on after a long period
of zero voltage (e.g. air-conditioning systems, heating installations, motors). Thus, a general increase of
pickup thresholds can be avoided taking into consideration such starting conditions.
This dynamic pickup value changeover fuction is common to all overcurrent elements and is described in
Section 2.4 Dynamic Cold Load Pickup. The alternative pickup values can be set individually for each element
of the time overcurrent protection.
2.2.6
Functions
2.2 Overcurrent Protection 50, 51, 50N, 51N
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 67
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Inrush Restraint
When the multi-functional protective relay with local control 7SJ80 is installed, for instance, to protect a
power transformer, large magnetizing inrush currents will flow when the transformer is energized. These
inrush currents may be several times the nominal transformer current, and, depending on the transformer size
and design, may last from several tens of milliseconds to several seconds.
Although pickup of the relay elements is based only on the fundamental harmonic component of the meas-
ured currents, false device pickup due to inrush is still a potential problem since, depending on the trans-
former size and design, the inrush current also comprises a large component of the fundamental.
The 7SJ80 features an integrated inrush restraint function. It prevents the “normal” pickup of 50-1 or 51 relay
elements (not 50-2 and 50-3) in the phases and the ground path of all directional and non-directional overcur-
rent relay elements. The same is true for the alternative pickup thresholds of the dynamic cold load pickup
function. After detection of inrush currents above a pickup value, special inrush signals are generated. These
signals also initiate fault annunciations and start the associated trip delay time. If inrush conditions are still
present after the tripping time delay has elapsed, a corresponding message (
„....Timeout.“
) is output,
but the overcurrent tripping is blocked (see also logic diagrams of time overcurrent elements, Figure 2-6 to
Figure 2-11).
Inrush current contains a relatively large second harmonic component (twice the nominal frequency) which is
nearly absent during a fault current. The inrush restraint is based on the evaluation of the 2nd harmonic
present in the inrush current. For frequency analysis, digital filters are used to conduct a Fourier analysis of all
three phase currents and the ground current.
Inrush current is recognized if the following conditions are fulfilled at the same time:
•The harmonic content is larger than the setting value 2202 2nd HARMONIC (minimum 0.125 * ΙNom,sec);
•the currents do not exceed an upper limit value 2205 I Max;
•an exceeding of a threshold value via an inrush restraint of the blocked element takes place.
In this case an inrush in the affected phase is recognized (annunciations 1840 to 1842 and 7558
InRush
Gnd Det
„InRush Gnd Det“, see Figure 2-15) and its blocking being carried out.
Since quantitative analysis of the harmonic components cannot be completed until a full line period has been
measured, pickup will generally be blocked by then. Therefore, assuming the inrush restraint feature is
enabled, a pickup message will be delayed by a full line period if no closing process is present. On the other
hand, trip delay times of the time overcurrent protection feature are started immediately even with the inrush
restraint being enabled. Time delays continue running with inrush currents present. If inrush blocking drops
out after the time delay has elapsed, tripping will occur immediately. Therefore, utilization of the inrush
restraint feature will not result in any additional tripping delays. If a relay element drops out during inrush
blocking, the associated time delay will reset.
Cross Blocking
Since inrush restraint operates individually for each phase, protection is ideal where a power transformer is
energized into a single-phase fault and inrush currents are detected on a different healthy phase. However,
the protection feature can be configured to allow that not only this phase element but also the remaining
elements (including ground) are blocked (the so-called CROSS BLOCK function, address 2203) if the permis-
sible harmonic component of the current is exceeded for only one phase.
Please take into consideration that inrush currents flowing in the ground path will not cross-block tripping by
the phase elements.
Cross blocking is reset if there is no more inrush in any phase. Furthermore, the cross blocking function may
also be limited to a particular time interval (address 2204 CROSS BLK TIMER). After expiry of this time
interval, the cross blocking function will be disabled, even if inrush current is still present.
The inrush restraint has an upper limit: Above this (via adjustable parameter 2205 I Max) current blocking is
suppressed since a high-current fault is assumed in this case.
The following figure shows the inrush restraint influence on the time overcurrent elements including cross-
blocking.
2.2.7
Functions
2.2 Overcurrent Protection 50, 51, 50N, 51N
68 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[7sj6x_einschaltstabilisierung-150502-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-15 Logic diagram for inrush restraint
Pickup Logic and Tripping Logic
The pickup annunciations of the individual phases (or ground) and the individual element are combined with
each other in such a way that the phase information and the element that has picked up are issued.
2.2.8
Functions
2.2 Overcurrent Protection 50, 51, 50N, 51N
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 69
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Table 2-4 Pickup Indications of Overcurrent Protection
Internal indication Figure Output indication FNo.
50-3 A PU
50-2 A PU
50-1 A PU
51 A PU
Figure 2-4
Figure 2-6
Figure 2-10
50/51 Ph A PU
1762
50-3 B PU
50-2 B PU
50-1 B PU
51 B PU
Figure 2-4
Figure 2-6
Figure 2-10
50/51 Ph B PU
1763
50-3 C PU
50-2 C PU
50-1 C PU
51 C PU
Figure 2-4
Figure 2-6
Figure 2-10
50/51 Ph C PU
1764
50N-3 PU
50N-2 PU
50N-1 PU
51N PU
Figure 2-5
Figure 2-8
Figure 2-11
50N/51NPickedup
1765
50-3 A PU
50-3 B PU
50-3 C PU
50-3 picked up
1767
50N-3 PU
50N-3 picked up
1768
50-2 A PU
50-2 B PU
50-2 C PU
Figure 2-4
Figure 2-4
Figure 2-4
50-2 picked up
1800
50N-2 PU Figure 2-5
50N-2 picked up
1831
50-1 A PU
50-1 B PU
50-1 C PU
Figure 2-6
Figure 2-6
Figure 2-6
50-1 picked up
1810
50N-1 PU Figure 2-5
50N-1 picked up
1834
51 A PU
51 B PU
51 C PU
Figure 2-10
Figure 2-10
Figure 2-10
51 picked up
1820
51N PU Figure 2-11
51N picked up
1837
(All pickups)
50(N)/51(N) PU
1761
In the trip signals, the element which initiated the tripping is also indicated.
Two-phase Overcurrent Protection (Only Non-Directional)
The 2-phase overcurrent protection functionality is used in isolated or grounded systems where interaction
with existing 2-phase protection equipment is required. As an isolated or grounded system remains opera-
tional with a 1-phase ground fault, this protection serves to detect double ground faults with high ground
fault currents. The respective feeder must be switched off only in this case. A 2-phase measurement is suffi-
cient for this purpose. In order to ensure selectivity of the protection in this section of the system, only phases
A and C are monitored.
If 250 50/51 2-ph prot (settable in P.System Data 1) is set to ON, ΙB is not used for threshold compar-
ison. If the fault is a simple ground fault in B, the element will not pick up. A double ground fault is assumed
only after pickup on A or C, causing the element to pick up and trip after the delay time has elapsed.
2.2.9
Functions
2.2 Overcurrent Protection 50, 51, 50N, 51N
70 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
i
i
NOTE
With inrush detection activated and inrush only on B, no cross blocking will take place in the other phases.
On the other hand, if inrush with cross blocking is activated on A or C, B will also be blocked.
Fast Busbar Protection Using Reverse Interlocking
Application Example
Each of the current elements can be blocked via binary inputs. A setting parameter determines whether the
binary input operates in the normally open (i.e. actuated when energized) or the normally closed (i.e. actu-
ated when de-energized) mode. This allows fast busbar protection to be applied in star systems or open ring
systems by applying "reverse interlocking". This principle is often used, for example, in distribution systems,
auxiliary systems of power plants and similar systems, where a station supply transformer supplied from the
transmission grid serves internal loads of the generation station via a medium voltage bus with multiple
feeders (Figure 2-16).
The reverse interlocking principle is based on the following: Time overcurrent protection of the busbar feeder
trips with a short time delay T 50-2 independent of the grading times of the feeders, unless the pickup of the
next load-side overcurrent protection element blocks the busbar protection (Figure 2-16). Always the protec-
tion element nearest to the fault will trip with the short time delay since this element cannot be blocked by a
protection element located behind the fault. Time elements T 50-1 or T51 are still effective as backup
element. Pickup signals output by the load-side protective relay are used as input message
>BLOCK 50-2
via
a binary input at the feeder-side protective relay.
[rueckwverr-150502-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-16 Reverse interlocking protection scheme
2.2.10
Functions
2.2 Overcurrent Protection 50, 51, 50N, 51N
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 71
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Setting Notes
General
When selecting the time overcurrent protection in DIGSI, a dialog box appears with several tabs for setting the
individual parameters. Depending on the functional scope specified during configuration of the protection
functions under addresses 112 Charac. Phase and 113 Charac. Ground, the number of tabs can vary. If
address FCT 50/51 was set to Definite Time, or Charac. Ground was set to Definite Time, then
only the settings for the definite time elements are available. The selection of TOC IEC or TOC ANSI makes
available additional inverse time characteristics. The superimposed high-set elements 50-2, 50-3 or 50N-2,
50N-3 are available in all these cases.
Parameter 250 50/51 2-ph prot can also be set to activate two-phase overcurrent protection.
Under address 1201 FCT 50/51, overcurrent protection for phases and under address 1301 FCT 50N/51N,
the ground overcurrent protection can be switched ON or OFF.
Pickup values, time delays, and characteristics for ground protection are set separately from the pickup values,
time delays and characteristic curves associated with phase protection. Because of this, relay coordination for
ground faults is independent of relay coordination for phase faults, and more sensitive settings can often be
applied to directional ground protection.
Depending on the setting of parameter 251 CT Connect., the device can also be used in specific system
configuration with regard to current connections. Further information can be found under Section
2.1.3.2 Setting Notes, “Current Connections”.
Measurement Methods
The comparison values to be used for the respective element can be set in the setting sheets for the elements.
•Measurement of the fundamental harmonic (standard method):
This measurement method processes the sampled values of the current and filters in numerical order the
fundamental harmonic so that the higher harmonics or transient peak currents remain largely unconsid-
ered.
•Measurement of the true RMS value
The current amplitude is derived from the sampled values in accordance with the definition equation of
the true RMS value. This measurement method should be selected when higher harmonics are to be
considered by the function (e.g. in capacitor banks).
•Measurement with instantaneous values
This procedure compares the instantaneous values to the set threshold. The element picks up at 2 · √2 ·
setting value (rms). It does not perform a mean-value calculation and is thus sensitive with regard to
disturbances. This measurement method should only be selected if an especially short pickup time of the
element is required. In this measurement procedure, the operating time of the element is reduced
compared to the measurement of effective values or fundamental harmonics (see “Technical Data”).
The type of the comparison values can be set under the following addresses:
50-3 element Address 1219 50-3 measurem.
50-2element Address 1220 50-2 measurem.
50-1 element Address 1221 50-1 measurem.
51 element Address 1222 51 measurem.
50N-3 element Address 1319 50N-3 measurem.
50N-2 element Address 1320 50N-2 measurem.
50N-1 element Address 1321 50N-1 measurem.
51Nelement Address 1322 51N measurem.
High-set Current Elements 50-2, 50-3 (phases)
The pickup current of the high-set element 50-2 PICKUP or50-3 PICKUP can be set at address 1202 or
1217. The corresponding delay time 50-2 DELAY or 50-3 DELAY can be configured under address 1203 or
2.2.11
Functions
2.2 Overcurrent Protection 50, 51, 50N, 51N
72 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
1218. It is usually used for purposes of current grading intended for large impedances that are prevalent in
transformers or generators. It is specified in such manner that it picks up faults up to this impedance.
Example of the high-set current element 50-2 PICKUP: Transformer used for busbar supply with the
following data:
Rated apparent power SNomT = 16 MVA
Transformer impedance ZT = 10 %
Primary nominal voltage VNom1 = 110 kV
Secondary nominal voltage VNom2 = 20 kV
Vector groups Dy 5
Neutral point Grounded
Fault power on 110 kV-side 1 GVA
Based on the data above, the following fault currents are calculated:
Three-Phase High Voltage Side Fault Current at 110 kV = 5250 A
Three-Phase Low Voltage Side Fault Current at 20 kV = 3928 A
On the High Voltage Side Flowing at 110 kV = 714 A
The nominal current of the transformer is:
ΙNomT, 110 = 84 A (High Voltage Side) ΙNomT, 20 = 462 A (Low Voltage
Side)
Current Transformer (High Voltage Side) 100 A/1 A
Current Transformer (Low Voltage Side) 500 A/1 A
Due to the following definition
[hochstrom-260602-kn, 1, en_US]
the following setting applies to the protection device: The 50-2 high-set current element must be set higher
than the maximum fault current which is detected during a low side fault on the high side. To reduce fault
probability as much as possible even when fault power varies, the following setting is selected in primary
values: 50-2 /ΙNom = 10, i.e. 50-2 = 1000 A. The same applies analogously when using the high-set element
50-3.
Increased inrush currents, if their fundamental component exceeds the setting value, are rendered harmless
by delay times (address 1203 50-2 DELAY or 1218 50-3 DELAY).
The principle of the "reverse interlocking" utilizes the multi-element function of the time overcurrent protec-
tion: Element 50-2 PICKUP is applied as a fast busbar protection with a shorter safety delay time 50-2
DELAY (e.g. 100 ms). For faults at the outgoing feeders, element 50-2 is blocked. The elements 50-1 or 51
serve as backup protection. The pickup values of both elements (50-1 PICKUP or 51 PICKUP and 50-2 PICKUP)
are set equal. The delay time 50-1 DELAY or 51 TIME DIAL is set in such manner that it overgrades the
delay for the outgoing feeders.
The selected time is an additional delay time and does not include the operating time (measuring time,
dropout time). The delay can also be set to ∞. In this case, the element will not trip after pickup. However,
pickup, will be signaled. If the 50-2 element or the 50-3 element is not required at all, the pickup threshold
50-2 or 50-3 is set to ∞. This setting prevents tripping and the generation of a pickup message.
High-set Current Elements 50N-2, 50N-3 (ground)
The pickup current of the high-set element 50N-2 PICKUP or 50N-3 PICKUP can be set at address 1302 or
1317. The corresponding delay time 50N-2 DELAY or 50N-3 DELAY can be configured under address 1303
or 1318. The same considerations apply to these settings as they did for phase currents discussed earlier.
The selected time is an additional delay time and does not include the operating time (measuring time,
dropout time). The delay can also be set to ∞. In this case, the element will not trip after pickup. However,
Functions
2.2 Overcurrent Protection 50, 51, 50N, 51N
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 73
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
pickup, will be signaled. If the 50N-2 element or 50N-3 element is not required at all, the pickup threshold
50N-2 or 50N-3 should be set to ∞. This setting prevents tripping and the generation of a pickup message.
50-1 Element (phases)
For setting the 50-1 element, it is the maximum anticipated load current that must be considered above all.
Pickup due to overload should never occur since in this mode the device operates as fault protection with
correspondingly short tripping times and not as overload protection. For this reason, a setting equal to 20% of
the expected peak load is recommended for line protection, and a setting equal to 40% is recommended for
transformers and motors.
The settable time delay (address 1205 50-1 DELAY) results from the grading coordination chart defined for
the system.
The selected time is an additional delay time and does not include the operating time (measuring time,
dropout time). The delay can also be set to ∞. In this case, the element will not trip after pickup. However,
pickup, will be signaled. If the 50-1 element is not required at all, then the pickup threshold 50-1 should be set
to ∞. This setting prevents tripping and the generation of a pickup message.
50N-1 Element (ground)
The 50N-1 element is normally set based on minimum ground fault current.
If the relay is used to protect transformers or motors with large inrush currents, the inrush restraint feature of
7SJ80 may be used for the 50N–1 relay element. It can be enabled or disabled for both the phase current and
the ground current in address 2201 INRUSH REST.. The characteristic values of the inrush restraint are listed
in Subsection "Inrush Restraint".
The settable delay time (address 1305 50N-1 DELAY) results from the time coordination chart defined for the
system. For ground currents in a grounded system a separate coordination timer with short time delays can be
applied.
The selected time is an additional delay time and does not include the operating time (measuring time,
dropout time). The delay can also be set to ∞. In this case, the element will not trip after pickup. However,
pickup, will be signaled. If the 50N-1 element is not required at all, the pickup threshold 50N-1 PICKUP should
be set to ∞. This setting prevents tripping and the generation of a pickup message.
Pickup Stabilization (Definite Time)
The configurable dropout times 1215 50 T DROP-OUT or 1315 50N T DROP-OUT can be set to implement a
uniform dropout behavior when using electromechanical relays. This is necessary for a time grading. The
dropout time of the electromechanical relay must be known to this end. Subtract the dropout time of the
device (see Technical Data) from this value and enter the result in the parameters.
51 Element (phases) with IEC or ANSI characteristics
Having set address 112 Charac. Phase = TOC IEC or TOC ANSI when configuring the protection func-
tions (Section 2.1.1.2 Setting Notes), the parameters for the inverse time characteristics will also be available.
If address 112 Charac. Phase was set to TOC IEC, you can select the desired IEC characteristic (Normal
Inverse, Very Inverse, Extremely Inv. or Long Inverse) at address 1211 51 IEC CURVE. If
address 112 Charac. Phase was set to TOC ANSI, you can select the desired ANSI characteristic (Very
Inverse, Inverse, Short Inverse, Long Inverse, Moderately Inv., Extremely Inv. or Defi-
nite Inv.) at address 1212 51 ANSI CURVE.
If the inverse time trip characteristic is selected, it must be noted that a safety factor of about 1.1 has already
been included between the pickup value and the setting value. This means that a pickup will only occur if a
current of about 1.1 times the setting value is present. If Disk Emulation was selected at address 1210 51
Drop-out, reset will occur in accordance with the reset curve as described before.
The current value is set in address 1207 51 PICKUP. The setting is mainly determined by the maximum
anticipated operating current. Pickup due to overload should never occur since in this mode, the device oper-
ates as fault protection with correspondingly short tripping times and not as overload protection.
The corresponding time multiplier for an IEC characteristic is set at address 1208 51 TIME DIAL and in
address 1209 51 TIME DIAL for an ANSI characteristic. It must be coordinated with the time coordination
chart of the system.
Functions
2.2 Overcurrent Protection 50, 51, 50N, 51N
74 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
The time multiplier can also be set to ∞. In this case, the element will not trip after pickup. However, pickup
will be signaled. If the 51 element is not required at all, address 112 Charac. Phase should be set to Defi-
nite Time during protection function configuration (see Section 2.1.1.2 Setting Notes).
If highly sensitive settings close to the load current are required in weak power systems or transformers, the
element can be stabilized via the undervoltage as an additional criterion for the power system fault. The oper-
ating modes can be set in address 1223 VOLT. INFLUENCE. In a voltage-controlled operation, the voltage
threshold is defined via parameter 1224 51V V< below which the current element is released
51N Element (ground) with IEC or ANSI Characteristics
Having set address 113 Charac. Ground = TOC IEC when configuring the protection functions (Section
2.1.1 Functional Scope), the parameters for the inverse time characteristics will also be available. Specify in
address 113 Charac. Ground = TOC IEC the desired IEC characteristic (Normal Inverse, Very
Inverse, Extremely Inv. or Long Inverse). If address 113 Charac. Ground = TOC ANSI, you can
select the desired ANSI characteristic (Very Inverse, Inverse, Short Inverse, Long Inverse,
Moderately Inv., Extremely Inv. or Definite Inv.) in address 1312 51N ANSI CURVE.
If the inverse time trip characteristic is selected, it must be noted that a safety factor of about 1.1 has already
been included between the pickup value and the setting value. This means that a pickup will only occur if a
current of about 1.1 times the setting value is present. If Disk Emulation was selected at address 1310 51
Drop-out, reset will occur in accordance with the reset curve as described before.
The current value is set in address 1307 51N PICKUP. The setting is mainly determined by the minimum
anticipated ground fault current.
The corresponding time multiplier for an IEC characteristic is set at address 1308 51N TIME DIAL and at
address 1309 51N TIME DIAL for an ANSI characteristic. This has to be coordinated with the grading coordi-
nation chart of the network. For ground currents with grounded network, you can often set up a separate
grading coordination chart with shorter delay times.
The time multiplier can also be set to ∞. In this case, the element will not trip after pickup. However, pickup
will be signaled. If the 51N-TOC elementt is not required at all, address 113 Charac. Ground should be set
to Definite Time during configuration of the protection functions (see Section 2.1.1 Functional Scope).
Inrush Restraint
When applying the protection device to transformers where high inrush currents are to be expected, the
7SJ80 can make use of an inrush restraint function for the overcurrent elements 50-1, 51, 50N-1 and 51N.
Inrush restraint is only effective and accessible if address 122 InrushRestraint was set to Enabled. If this
function is not required, then Disabled is set. In address 2201 INRUSH REST., the function is switched ON
or OFF jointly for the overcurrent elements 50-1 PICKUP,51 PICKUP, 50N-1 PICKUP and 51N PICKUP
The inrush restraint is based on the evaluation of the 2nd harmonic present in the inrush current. Upon
delivery from the factory, a ratio Ι2f/Ιf of 15 % is set. Under normal circumstances, this setting will not need to
be changed. The setting value is identical for all phases and ground. However, the component required for
restraint may be adjusted to system conditions in address 2202 2nd HARMONIC. To provide more restraint in
exceptional cases, where energizing conditions are particularly unfavorable, a smaller value can be set in the
aforementioned address, e.g. 12 %. Irrespective of parameter 2202 2nd HARMONIC, rush blocking will only
occur if the absolute value of the 2nd harmonic is at least 0.125 * INom,sec.
The effective duration of the cross-blocking 2203 CROSS BLK TIMER can be set to a value between 0 s
(harmonic restraint active for each phase individually) and a maximum of 180 s (harmonic restraint of a phase
blocks also the other phases for the specified duration).
If the current exceeds the value set in address 2205 I Max, no further restraint will take place for the 2nd
harmonic.
Manual Close Mode (phases ground)
When a circuit breaker is closed onto a faulted line, a high-speed trip by the circuit breaker is usually desired.
For overcurrent or high-set element the delay may be bypassed via a Manual Close pulse, thus resulting in
instantaneous tripping. The internal "Manual close" signal is built from the binary input signal >Manual Close
(no.
356
). The internal "Manual close" signal remains active as long as the binary input signal >Manual Close is
active, but at least for 300 ms (see the following logic diagram). To enable the device to react properly on
Functions
2.2 Overcurrent Protection 50, 51, 50N, 51N
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 75
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
occurrence of a fault in the phase element, address 1213 MANUAL CLOSE has to be set accordingly. Corre-
spondingly, address 1313 MANUAL CLOSE is considered for the ground path address. Thus, the user deter-
mines for both elements, the phase and the ground element, what pickup value is active with what delay
when the circuit breaker is closed manually.
[lo_7sj6-hand-ein, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-17 Manual close feature
External Control Command
If the manual close signal is not sent from 7SJ80 device, i.e. neither via the built-in operator interface nor via a
serial interface, but directly from a control acknowledgment switch, this signal must be passed to a 7SJ80
binary input, and configured accordingly (
>Manual Close
), so that the element selected for MANUAL
CLOSE can become effective. The alternative Inactive means that all elements operate as per configuration
even with manual close and do not get special treatment.
Internal Control Function
If the manual close signal is sent via the internal control function of the device, an internal connection of
information has to be established via CFC (interlocking task level) using the CMD_Information block (see
Figure 2-18).
[handein-260602-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-18 Example for the generation of a manual close signal using the internal control function
i
i
NOTE
For an interaction between the automatic reclosing function (79 AR) and the control function, an extended
CFC logic is necessary. See margin heading “Close command: Directly or via Control” in the Setting Notes of
the automatic reclosing function (Section 2.15.6 Setting Notes).
Interaction with the Automatic Reclosing Function (phases)
If reclosing follows, high-speed and simultaneous protection against faults with 50-2 or 50-3 is usually
desired. If the fault still exists after the first reclosing, the 50-1 or the 51 element will be initiated with graded
tripping times, that is, element 50-2 or 50-3 will be blocked. You can use the parameters 1214 50-2 active
or 1216 50-3 active active for this purpose to define whether or not the 50-2 or the 50-3 element is
impacted by a release signal of the internal or an external automatic reclosing system. The setting with 79
active means that the 50-2 or the 50-3 element will only be released if automatic reclosing is not blocked. If
this is not desired, the setting Always is selected so that the 50-2 or the 50-3 element is always active.
The integrated automatic reclosing function of 7SJ80 also provides the option to individually determine for
each overcurrent element whether tripping or blocking is to be carried out instantaneously or unaffected by
the AR with the set time delay (see Section 2.15 Automatic Reclosing System 79).
Interaction with the Automatic Reclosing Function (ground)
When reclosing occurs, it is desirable to have high-speed protection against faults with 50N-2 or 50N-3. If the
fault still exists after the first reclosing, the 50N-1 or the 51N element will be initiated with coordinated trip-
ping times, that is, element 50N-2 or 50N-3 will be blocked. At address 1314 50N-2 active or 1316 50N-3
active active it can be specified whether the 50N-2 or the 50N-3 element should be influenced by the
Functions
2.2 Overcurrent Protection 50, 51, 50N, 51N
76 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
release signal of an internal or external automatic reclosing system. Address with 79 active determines
that the 50N-2 or the 50N-3 element will only operate if automatic reclosing is not blocked. If not desired,
select the setting Always so that the 50N-2 or the 50N-3 element will always operate, as configured.
The integrated automatic reclosing function of 7SJ62/64 also provides the option to individually determine for
each overcurrent element whether tripping or blocking is to be carried out instantaneously or unaffected by
the AR with the set time delay (see Section 2.15 Automatic Reclosing System 79).
Settings
Addresses which have an appended “A” can only be changed with DIGSI, under “Additional Settings”.
The table indicates region-specific default settings. Column C (configuration) indicates the corresponding
secondary nominal current of the current transformer.
Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting Comments
1201 FCT 50/51 ON
OFF
ON 50, 51 Phase Time Overcur-
rent
1202 50-2 PICKUP 1A 0.10 .. 35.00 A; ∞ 4.00 A 50-2 Pickup
5A 0.50 .. 175.00 A; ∞ 20.00 A
1203 50-2 DELAY 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.00 sec 50-2 Time Delay
1204 50-1 PICKUP 1A 0.10 .. 35.00 A; ∞ 1.00 A 50-1 Pickup
5A 0.50 .. 175.00 A; ∞ 5.00 A
1205 50-1 DELAY 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec 50-1 Time Delay
1207 51 PICKUP 1A 0.10 .. 4.00 A 1.00 A 51 Pickup
5A 0.50 .. 20.00 A 5.00 A
1208 51 TIME DIAL 0.05 .. 3.20 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec 51 Time Dial
1209 51 TIME DIAL 0.50 .. 15.00 ; ∞ 5.00 51 Time Dial
1210 51 Drop-out Instantaneous
Disk Emulation
Disk Emulation Drop-out characteristic
1211 51 IEC CURVE Normal Inverse
Very Inverse
Extremely Inv.
Long Inverse
Normal Inverse IEC Curve
1212 51 ANSI CURVE Very Inverse
Inverse
Short Inverse
Long Inverse
Moderately Inv.
Extremely Inv.
Definite Inv.
Very Inverse ANSI Curve
1213A MANUAL CLOSE 50-3 instant.
50-2 instant.
50 -1 instant.
51 instant.
Inactive
50-2 instant. Manual Close Mode
1214A 50-2 active Always
with 79 active
Always 50-2 active
1215A 50 T DROP-OUT 0.00 .. 60.00 sec 0.00 sec 50 Drop-Out Time Delay
1216A 50-3 active Always
with 79 active
Always 50-3 active
2.2.12
Functions
2.2 Overcurrent Protection 50, 51, 50N, 51N
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 77
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting Comments
1217 50-3 PICKUP 1A 1.00 .. 35.00 A; ∞ ∞ A 50-3 Pickup
5A 5.00 .. 175.00 A; ∞ ∞ A
1218 50-3 DELAY 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.00 sec 50-3 Time Delay
1219A 50-3 measurem. Fundamental
True RMS
Instantaneous
Fundamental 50-3 measurement of
1220A 50-2 measurem. Fundamental
True RMS
Fundamental 50-2 measurement of
1221A 50-1 measurem. Fundamental
True RMS
Fundamental 50-1 measurement of
1222A 51 measurem. Fundamental
True RMS
Fundamental 51 measurement of
1223 VOLT. INFLUENCE NO
Volt. controll.
Volt. restraint
NO 51V Voltage Influence
1224 51V V< 10.0 .. 125.0 V 75.0 V 51V V< Threshold for
Release Ip
1301 FCT 50N/51N ON
OFF
ON 50N, 51N Ground Time
Overcurrent
1302 50N-2 PICKUP 1A 0.05 .. 35.00 A; ∞ 0.50 A 50N-2 Pickup
5A 0.25 .. 175.00 A; ∞ 2.50 A
1303 50N-2 DELAY 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.10 sec 50N-2 Time Delay
1304 50N-1 PICKUP 1A 0.05 .. 35.00 A; ∞ 0.20 A 50N-1 Pickup
5A 0.25 .. 175.00 A; ∞ 1.00 A
1305 50N-1 DELAY 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec 50N-1 Time Delay
1307 51N PICKUP 1A 0.05 .. 4.00 A 0.20 A 51N Pickup
5A 0.25 .. 20.00 A 1.00 A
1308 51N TIME DIAL 0.05 .. 3.20 sec; ∞ 0.20 sec 51N Time Dial
1309 51N TIME DIAL 0.50 .. 15.00 ; ∞ 5.00 51N Time Dial
1310 51N Drop-out Instantaneous
Disk Emulation
Disk Emulation Drop-Out Characteristic
1311 51N IEC CURVE Normal Inverse
Very Inverse
Extremely Inv.
Long Inverse
Normal Inverse IEC Curve
1312 51N ANSI CURVE Very Inverse
Inverse
Short Inverse
Long Inverse
Moderately Inv.
Extremely Inv.
Definite Inv.
Very Inverse ANSI Curve
1313A MANUAL CLOSE 50N-3 instant.
50N-2 instant.
50N-1 instant.
51N instant.
Inactive
50N-2 instant. Manual Close Mode
Functions
2.2 Overcurrent Protection 50, 51, 50N, 51N
78 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting Comments
1314A 50N-2 active Always
With 79 Active
Always 50N-2 active
1315A 50N T DROP-OUT 0.00 .. 60.00 sec 0.00 sec 50N Drop-Out Time Delay
1316A 50N-3 active Always
with 79 active
Always 50N-3 active
1317 50N-3 PICKUP 1A 0.25 .. 35.00 A; ∞ ∞ A 50N-3 Pickup
1318 50N-3 DELAY 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.05 sec 50N-3 Time Delay
1319A 50N-3 measurem. Fundamental
True RMS
Instantaneous
Fundamental 50N-3 measurement of
1320A 50N-2 measurem. Fundamental
True RMS
Fundamental 50N-2 measurement of
1321A 50N-1 measurem. Fundamental
True RMS
Fundamental 50N-1 measurement of
1322A 51N measurem. Fundamental
True RMS
Fundamental 51N measurement of
2201 INRUSH REST. OFF
ON
OFF Inrush Restraint
2202 2nd HARMONIC 10 .. 45 % 15 % 2nd. harmonic in % of
fundamental
2203 CROSS BLOCK NO
YES
NO Cross Block
2204 CROSS BLK TIMER 0.00 .. 180.00 sec 0.00 sec Cross Block Time
2205 I Max 1A 0.30 .. 25.00 A 7.50 A Maximum Current for
Inrush Restraint
5A 1.50 .. 125.00 A 37.50 A
Information List
No. Information Type of
Informa-
tion
Comments
1704 >BLK 50/51 SP >BLOCK 50/51
1714 >BLK 50N/51N SP >BLOCK 50N/51N
1718 >BLOCK 50-3 SP >BLOCK 50-3
1719 >BLOCK 50N-3 SP >BLOCK 50N-3
1721 >BLOCK 50-2 SP >BLOCK 50-2
1722 >BLOCK 50-1 SP >BLOCK 50-1
1723 >BLOCK 51 SP >BLOCK 51
1724 >BLOCK 50N-2 SP >BLOCK 50N-2
1725 >BLOCK 50N-1 SP >BLOCK 50N-1
1726 >BLOCK 51N SP >BLOCK 51N
1751 50/51 PH OFF OUT 50/51 O/C switched OFF
1752 50/51 PH BLK OUT 50/51 O/C is BLOCKED
1753 50/51 PH ACT OUT 50/51 O/C is ACTIVE
1756 50N/51N OFF OUT 50N/51N is OFF
1757 50N/51N BLK OUT 50N/51N is BLOCKED
1758 50N/51N ACT OUT 50N/51N is ACTIVE
2.2.13
Functions
2.2 Overcurrent Protection 50, 51, 50N, 51N
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 79
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
No. Information Type of
Informa-
tion
Comments
1761 50(N)/51(N) PU OUT 50(N)/51(N) O/C PICKUP
1762 50/51 Ph A PU OUT 50/51 Phase A picked up
1763 50/51 Ph B PU OUT 50/51 Phase B picked up
1764 50/51 Ph C PU OUT 50/51 Phase C picked up
1765 50N/51NPickedup OUT 50N/51N picked up
1767 50-3 picked up OUT 50-3 picked up
1768 50N-3 picked up OUT 50N-3 picked up
1769 50-3 TRIP OUT 50-3 TRIP
1770 50N-3 TRIP OUT 50N-3 TRIP
1787 50-3 TimeOut OUT 50-3 TimeOut
1788 50N-3 TimeOut OUT 50N-3 TimeOut
1791 50(N)/51(N)TRIP OUT 50(N)/51(N) TRIP
1800 50-2 picked up OUT 50-2 picked up
1804 50-2 TimeOut OUT 50-2 Time Out
1805 50-2 TRIP OUT 50-2 TRIP
1810 50-1 picked up OUT 50-1 picked up
1814 50-1 TimeOut OUT 50-1 Time Out
1815 50-1 TRIP OUT 50-1 TRIP
1820 51 picked up OUT 51 picked up
1824 51 Time Out OUT 51 Time Out
1825 51 TRIP OUT 51 TRIP
1831 50N-2 picked up OUT 50N-2 picked up
1832 50N-2 TimeOut OUT 50N-2 Time Out
1833 50N-2 TRIP OUT 50N-2 TRIP
1834 50N-1 picked up OUT 50N-1 picked up
1835 50N-1 TimeOut OUT 50N-1 Time Out
1836 50N-1 TRIP OUT 50N-1 TRIP
1837 51N picked up OUT 51N picked up
1838 51N TimeOut OUT 51N Time Out
1839 51N TRIP OUT 51N TRIP
1840 PhA InrushDet OUT Phase A inrush detection
1841 PhB InrushDet OUT Phase B inrush detection
1842 PhC InrushDet OUT Phase C inrush detection
1843 INRUSH X-BLK OUT Cross blk: PhX blocked PhY
1851 50-1 BLOCKED OUT 50-1 BLOCKED
1852 50-2 BLOCKED OUT 50-2 BLOCKED
1853 50N-1 BLOCKED OUT 50N-1 BLOCKED
1854 50N-2 BLOCKED OUT 50N-2 BLOCKED
1855 51 BLOCKED OUT 51 BLOCKED
1856 51N BLOCKED OUT 51N BLOCKED
1866 51 Disk Pickup OUT 51 Disk emulation Pickup
1867 51N Disk Pickup OUT 51N Disk emulation picked up
7551 50-1 InRushPU OUT 50-1 InRush picked up
7552 50N-1 InRushPU OUT 50N-1 InRush picked up
7553 51 InRushPU OUT 51 InRush picked up
Functions
2.2 Overcurrent Protection 50, 51, 50N, 51N
80 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
No. Information Type of
Informa-
tion
Comments
7554 51N InRushPU OUT 51N InRush picked up
7556 InRush OFF OUT InRush OFF
7557 InRush BLK OUT InRush BLOCKED
7558 InRush Gnd Det OUT InRush Ground detected
7559 67-1 InRushPU OUT 67-1 InRush picked up
7560 67N-1 InRushPU OUT 67N-1 InRush picked up
7561 67-TOC InRushPU OUT 67-TOC InRush picked up
7562 67N-TOCInRushPU OUT 67N-TOC InRush picked up
7563 >BLOCK InRush SP >BLOCK InRush
7564 Gnd InRush PU OUT Ground InRush picked up
7565 Ia InRush PU OUT Phase A InRush picked up
7566 Ib InRush PU OUT Phase B InRush picked up
7567 Ic InRush PU OUT Phase C InRush picked up
10034 50-3 BLOCKED OUT 50-3 BLOCKED
10035 50N-3 BLOCKED OUT 50N-3 BLOCKED
Functions
2.2 Overcurrent Protection 50, 51, 50N, 51N
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 81
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Directional Overcurrent Protection 67, 67N
The directional time overcurrent protection comprises three elements each for phase currents and the ground
current that can operate directional or non-directional. All elements are independent of each other and can be
combined as desired.
High current element 67-2 and overcurrent element 67-1 always operate with a definite tripping time, the
third element 67-TOC always operates with inverse tripping time.
Applications
•The directional overcurrent protection allows the application of multifunctional protection devices 7SJ80
also in systems where protection coordination depends on knowing both the magnitude of the fault
current and the direction of power flow to the fault location.
•The non-directional overcurrent protection described in Section 2.2 Overcurrent Protection 50, 51, 50N,
51N may operate as overlapping backup protection or may be disabled. Additionally, individual elements
(e.g. 67-2 and/or 67N-2) may be interconnected with the directional overcurrent protection.
•For parallel lines or transformers supplied from a single source, only directional overcurrent protection
allows selective fault detection.
•For line sections supplied from two sources or in ring-operated lines, the overcurrent protection has to be
supplemented by the element-specific directional criterion.
General
For parallel lines or transformers supplied from a single source (see Figure 2-19), the second feeder (II) is
opened on occurrence of a fault in the first feeder (I) if tripping of the breaker in the parallel feeder is not
prevented by a directional measuring element (at B). Therefore, where indicated with an arrow (Figure 2-19),
directional overcurrent protection is applied. Please ensure that the "forward" direction of the protection
element is in the direction of the line (or object to be protected). This is not necessarily identical with the
direction of the normal load flow, as shown in Figure 2-19.
[ueberstromzeitschutz-bei-paralleltransformatoren-020626-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-19 Overcurrent protection for parallel transformers
2.3
2.3.1
Functions
2.3 Directional Overcurrent Protection 67, 67N
82 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
For line sections supplied from two sources or in ring-operated lines, the overcurrent protection has to be
supplemented by the directional criterion. Figure 2-20 shows a ring system where both energy sources are
merged to one single source.
[zweiseitig-gespeister-leitungszug-260602-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-20 Transmission lines with sources at both ends
Depending on the setting of parameter 613 50N/51N/67N w., the ground current element can operate
either with measured values IN or with the values 3I0 calculated from the three phase currents. Devices
featuring a sensitive ground current input, however, use the calculated quantity 3I0.
The directional orientation Forward, Reverse or Non-Directional can be set individually for each
element (Non-Directional from V4.7 on).
For each element the time can be blocked via binary input or automatic reclosing (cycle-dependent), thus
suppressing the trip command. Removal of blocking during pickup will restart time delays. The Manual Close
signal is an exception. If a circuit breaker is manually closed onto a fault, it can be re-opened immediately. For
overcurrent elements or high-set elements the delay may be bypassed via a Manual Close pulse, thus resulting
in high-speed tripping.
Furthermore, immediate tripping may be initiated in conjunction with the automatic reclosing function (cycle
dependant).
Pickup stabilization for the 67/67N elements of the directional overcurrent protection can be accomplished by
means of settable dropout times. This protection comes into use in systems where intermittent faults occur.
Combined with electromechanical relays, it allows different dropout responses to be adjusted and a time
grading of digital and electromechanical relays to be implemented.
Pickup and delay settings may be quickly adjusted to system requirements via dynamic setting switching (see
Section 2.4 Dynamic Cold Load Pickup).
Utilizing the inrush restraint feature tripping may be blocked by the 67-1, 67-TOC, 67N-1, and 67N-TOC
elements in phases and ground path when inrush current is detected.
The following table gives an overview of these interconnections to other functions of the 7SJ80 devices.
Table 2-5 Interconnection to other functions
Directional Time
Overcurrent Protec-
tion Elements
Connection to Auto-
matic Reclosing
Manual CLOSE Dynamic Cold
Load Pickup
Inrush Restraint
67-1 • • • •
67-2 • • •
67-3 • • •
67-TOC • • • •
67N-1 • • • •
67N-2 • • •
Functions
2.3 Directional Overcurrent Protection 67, 67N
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 83
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Directional Time
Overcurrent Protec-
tion Elements
Connection to Auto-
matic Reclosing
Manual CLOSE Dynamic Cold
Load Pickup
Inrush Restraint
67N-3 • • •
67N-TOC • • • •
Definite Time Directional High-set Elements 67-2, 67N-2, 67-3, 67N-3
For each element an individual pickup value 67-2 PICKUP, 67-3 PICKUP or 67N-2 PICKUP, 67N-3
PICKUP is set which can be measured as Fundamental or True RMS. Each phase current and the ground
current is compared with the common pickup value for each element 67-2 PICKUP, 67-3 PICKUP or
67N-2 PICKUP, 67N-3 PICKUP, and it is signaled when the value is exceeded provided that the fault direc-
tion is the same as the parameterized direction. After the associated delay times 67-2 DELAY, 67-3 DELAY
or 67N-2 DELAY, 67N-3 DELAY have expired, the tripping commands are initiated which are equally avail-
able separately for each element. The dropout value is approximately 95% of the pickup value for currents >
0.3 ΙNom.
Pickup can be stabilized by setting dropout times 1518 67 T DROP-OUT or 1618 67N T DROP-OUT. This
time is started and maintains the pickup condition if the current falls below the threshold. Therefore, the func-
tion does not drop out instantaneously. The trip delay times 50-2 DELAY, 67-3 DELAY or 50N-2 DELAY,
67N-3 DELAY continue during that time. After the dropout delay time has elapsed, the pickup is reported
OFF and the trip delay time is reset unless the threshold 50-2 PICKUP, 67-3 PICKUP or 50N-2 PICKUP,
67N-3 PICKUP has been exceeded again. If the threshold is exceeded again during the dropout delay time,
the time is canceled. The trip delay time 50-2 DELAY, 67-3 DELAY or 50N-2 DELAY, 67N-3 DELAY
continues. If the threshold value is exceeded after this time has elapsed, the trip command is issued immedi-
ately. If the threshold value is not exceeded at this time, there is no reaction. If the threshold value is
exceeded again after expiry of the trip command delay time, while the dropout delay time is still running, trip-
ping is initiated immediately.
Each of these elements can be directional or non-directional (non-directional from V4.7 on).
These elements can be blocked by the automatic reclosing function (79 AR).
The following figure gives an example of the logic diagram for the high-set elements 67-2 of the phase
currents. The high-set element 67-3 is structured identically.
2.3.2
Functions
2.3 Directional Overcurrent Protection 67, 67N
84 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[7sj6x_gerueberstromzeit_hochstromst-030903-he, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-21 Logic diagram for directional high-set element 67-2 for phases
If parameter MANUAL CLOSE is set to 67-2 instant. or 67-3 instant. and manual close detection is
present, a pickup causes instantaneous tripping even if the element is blocked via binary input.
The same applies to 79 AR 67-2 or 79 AR 67-3 instantaneous.
Definite Time, Directional Time Overcurrent Elements 67-1, 67N-1
For each element, an individual pickup value 67-1 PICKUP or 67N-1 PICKUP is set which can be measured
as Fundamental or True RMS. Phase and ground currents are compared separately with the common
setting value 67-1 PICKUP or 67N-1 PICKUP. Currents above the setting values are recognized separately
when fault direction is equal to the configured direction. If the inrush restraint function is used, either the
normal pickup signals or the corresponding inrush signals are issued as long as inrush current is detected.
When the relevant delay times 67-1 DELAY, 67N-1 DELAY have expired, a tripping command is issued
2.3.3
Functions
2.3 Directional Overcurrent Protection 67, 67N
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 85
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
unless an inrush has been recognized or inrush restraint is active. If the inrush restraint feature is enabled, and
an inrush condition exists, no tripping takes place, but a message is recorded and displayed indicating when
the overcurrent element time delay elapses. Trip signals and other flags for each element are issued when the
element times out. The dropout value is roughly equal to 95% of the pickup value for currents > 0.3 ΙNom.
Pickup can be stabilized by setting dropout times 1518 67 T DROP-OUT or 1618 67N T DROP-OUT. This
time is started and maintains the pickup condition if the current falls below the threshold. Therefore, the func-
tion does not drop out at high speed. The trip-command delay time 50-1 DELAY or 50N-1 DELAY continues
in the meantime. After the dropout delay time has elapsed, the pickup is reported OFF and the trip delay time
is reset unless the threshold 50-1 PICKUP or 50N-1 PICKUP has been exceeded again. If the threshold is
exceeded again during the dropout delay time, the time is canceled. The trip-command delay time 50-1
DELAY or 50N-1 DELAY continues in the meantime. Should the threshold value be exceeded after its expiry,
the trip command is issued immediately. If the threshold value is not exceeded at this time, there will be no
reaction. If the threshold value is exceeded again after expiry of the trip-command delay time, while the
dropout delay time is still running, tripping occurs immediately.
The inrush restraint of the overcurrent elements 50-1 PICKUP or 50N-1 PICKUP is disabled via configu-
rable dropout times if an inrush pickup occurs, because the occurrence of an inrush does not constitute an
intermittent fault.
Each of these elements can be directional or non-directional (non-directional from V4.7 on).
These elements can be blocked by the automatic reclosure function (AR).
The following figure shows by way of an example the logic diagram for the directional overcurrent element
67-1.
Functions
2.3 Directional Overcurrent Protection 67, 67N
86 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[7sj6x_gerueberstromzeit_ueberstromst-030903-he, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-22 Logic diagram for the directional relay element 67-1 for phases
If parameter MANUAL CLOSE is set to 67-1 instant. and manual close detection is present, a pickup
causes instantaneous tripping even if the element is blocked via binary input.
The same applies to 79 AR 67-1 instantaneous.
The dropout delay does only function if no inrush was detected. An approaching inrush resets an already
running dropout time delay.
Functions
2.3 Directional Overcurrent Protection 67, 67N
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 87
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[7sj6x_gerrueckfallverzoegerung_i_gr_ph, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-23 Logic of the dropout delay for 67-1
Inverse Time, Directional Overcurrent Elements 67-TOC, 67N-TOC
Inverse time elements are dependent on the variant ordered. They operate either according to the IEC- or the
ANSI-standard. The characteristics and associated formulas are identical with those of the non-directional
overcurrent protection and are given in the Technical Data. When the inverse time curves are configured, the
definite time elements (67-2, 67-1) are also available.
Pickup Behavior
For each element, an individual pickup value 67-TOC PICKUP or 67N-TOC PICKUP is set which can be
measured as Fundamental or True RMS. Each phase and ground current is separately compared with the
common pickup value 67-TOC PICKUP or 67N-TOC PICKUP of each element. When a current value
exceeds the corresponding setting value by a factor of 1.1, the corresponding phase picks up and a message is
generated phase-selectively assuming that the fault direction is equal to the direction configured. If the inrush
restraint feature is used, either the normal pickup signals or the corresponding inrush signals are issued as
long as inrush current is detected. If the 67-TOC element picks up, the tripping time is calculated from the
actual fault current flowing, using an integrating method of measurement. The calculated tripping time
depends on the selected tripping curve. Once this time has elapsed, a trip signal is issued provided that no
inrush current is detected or inrush restraint is disabled. If the inrush restraint feature is enabled and an inrush
condition exists, no tripping takes place, but a message is recorded and displayed indicating when the overcur-
rent element time delay elapses.
For ground current element 67N-TOC PICKUP, the characteristic may be selected independently of the char-
acteristic used for phase currents.
Pickup values of the 67-TOC (phases) and 67N-TOC (ground current) and the associated time multipliers may
be set individually.
Each of these elements can be directional or non-directional (non-directional from V4.7 on).
Dropout Behavior
When using an ANSI or IEC curve, it can be selected whether the dropout of an element is to occur instantane-
ously or whether dropout is to be performed by means of the disk emulation mechanism. "Instantaneously"
means that pickup drops out when the pickup value of approx. 95 % of the set pickup value is undershot. For a
new pickup, the time counter starts at zero.
The disk emulation evokes a dropout process (time counter is decrementing) which begins after de-energiza-
tion. This process corresponds to the reset of a Ferraris disk (explaining its denomination "disk emulation"). In
case several faults occur in succession the "history" is taken into consideration due to the inertia of the Ferraris
disk and the time response is adapted. Reset begins as soon as 90 % of the setting value is undershot, in
accordance to the dropout curve of the selected characteristic. In the range between the dropout value (95 %
of the pickup value) and 90 % of the setting value, the incrementing and the decrementing processes are in
idle state.
Disk emulation offers advantages when the overcurrent relay elements must be coordinated with conven-
tional electromechanical overcurrent relays located towards the source.
The following figure shows by way of an example the logic diagram for the 67-TOC relay element of the direc-
tional inverse time overcurrent protection of the phase currents.
2.3.4
Functions
2.3 Directional Overcurrent Protection 67, 67N
88 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[7sj6x_gerueberstromzeit_abh_ueberstrom_ip-150502-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-24 Logic diagram for the directional overcurrent protection: 67-TOC relay element
Interaction with Fuse Failure Monitor (FFM)
False or undesired tripping can be caused by a measuring voltage that can be caused by either short-circuit or
broken wire in the voltage transformer's secondary system or an operation of the voltage transformer fuse.
Failure of the measuring voltage in one or two phases can be detected, and the directional time overcurrent
elements (Dir Phase and Dir Ground) can be blocked, see logic diagrams.
Undervoltage protection, sensitive ground fault detection and synchronization are also blocked in this case.
For additional information on the operation of the fuse failure monitor, see Section 2.11.1 Measurement
Supervision.
2.3.5
Functions
2.3 Directional Overcurrent Protection 67, 67N
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 89
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Dynamic Cold Load Pickup Function
It may be necessary to dynamically increase the pickup values of the directional time overcurrent protection if,
at starting, certain elements of the system show an increased power consumption after a long period of zero
voltage (e.g. air-conditioning systems, heating installations, motors). Thus, a general raise of pickup thresh-
olds can be avoided taking into consideration such starting conditions.
This dynamic pickup value changeover is common to all overcurrent elements and is described in Section
2.4 Dynamic Cold Load Pickup. The alternative pickup values can be set individually for each element of the
directional and non-directional time overcurrent protection.
Inrush Restraint
7SJ80 features an integrated inrush restraint function. It prevents "normal" pickup of the 67-1 or 67-TOC
elements (not 67-2 and 67-3) in the phases and in the ground path of the non-directional and directional
overcurrent protection functions. The same is true for the alternative pickup thresholds of the dynamic cold
load pickup function. If inrush currents are detected, special inrush pickup signals are generated. These signals
also initiate fault recording and start the associated trip delay time. If inrush conditions are still present after
the tripping time delay has elapsed, a corresponding message ("....TimeOut ") is output, but tripping is
blocked (for further information see "Inrush Restraint" in Section 2.2 Overcurrent Protection 50, 51, 50N,
51N).
Determination of Direction
The determination of the fault direction for the phase directional element and the ground directional element
is performed independently.
Basically, the direction determination is performed by determining the phase angle between the fault current
and a reference voltage.
Method of Directional Measurement
For the phase directional element the fault current of the corresponding phase and the unfaulted phase-
tophase voltage are used as reference voltage. The unfaulted voltage also allows for a correct direction deter-
mination even if the fault voltage has collapsed entirely (short-line fault). In phase-to-ground voltage connec-
tions, the phase-to-phase voltages are calculated. In a connection of two phase-to-phase voltages and VN, the
third phase-to-phase voltage is also calculated.
With three-phase short-line faults, memory voltage values are used to clearly determine the direction if the
measurement voltages are not sufficient.Upon the expiration of the storage time period (2 s), the detected
direction is saved, as long as no sufficient measuring voltage is available. When closing onto a fault, if no
memory voltage values exist in the buffer, the relay element will trip. In all other cases the voltage magnitude
will be sufficient for determining the direction.
For each directional ground element there are two possibilities of direction determination.
Direction Determination with Zero-sequence System or Ground Quantities
For the directional ground fault elements, the direction can be determined from the zero-sequence system
quantities. In the current path, the ΙN current is valid, when the transformer neutral current is connected to the
device. Otherwise, the device calculates the ground current from the sum of the three phase currents. In the
voltage path, the displacement voltage VN is used as reference voltage if connected. Otherwise the device
calculates as reference voltage the zero-sequence voltage 3 · V0 from the sum of the three phase voltages. If
the magnitude of V0 or 3 · V0 is not sufficient to determine the direction, the direction is undefined. Then the
directional ground element will not initiate a trip signal. The directional ground element cannot be applied
when only two current transformers are used.
2.3.6
2.3.7
2.3.8
Functions
2.3 Directional Overcurrent Protection 67, 67N
90 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Direction Determination with Negative Sequence System
Here, the negative sequence current and as reference voltage the negative sequence voltage are used for the
direction determination. This is advantageous if the zero sequence is influenced via a parallel line or if the zero
voltage becomes very small due to unfavorable zero impedances. The negative sequence system is calculated
from the individual voltages and currents. As with the use of the zero sequence values, a direction determina-
tion is carried out if the values necessary for the direction determination have exceeded a minimum threshold.
Otherwise the direction is undetermined.
When voltage transformers are open-delta-connected, direction determination is always based on the nega-
tive- sequence quantities.
Cross-Polarized Reference Voltages for Direction Determination
The direction of a phase-directional element is detected by means of a cross-polarized voltage. In a phase-to-
ground fault, the cross-polarized voltage (reference voltage) is 90° out of phase with the fault voltages (see
Figure 2-25). With phase-to-phase faults, the position of the reference voltages changes, depending on the
degree of collapse of the fault voltages, up to 30°.
[kurzschlussfremde-spannungen-fuer-richtungsbestimmung-260602-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-25 Cross-polarized voltages for direction determination
Measured Values for the Determination of Fault Direction
Each phase has its own phase measuring element. The fourth measuring element is used as ground measuring
element. If the current exceeds the pickup threshold of a phase or that of the ground path, direction determi-
nation is started by the associated measuring element. In case of a multiphase fault, all phase measuring
elements involved perform their own direction determination. If one of the calculated directions differs from
the set direction, the function picks up.
The following table shows the allocation of measured values for the determination of fault direction for
various causes of pickup.
Table 2-6 Measured Values for the Determination of Fault Direction
Pickup Measuring element
A B C ground
Current Voltage Current Voltage Current Voltage Current Voltage
AΙAVB - VC— — — — — —
B — — ΙBVC - VA— — — —
C ————ΙCVA - VB— —
N — — — — — — ΙNVN 1)
A, N VB - VC— — — — ΙNVN 1)
B, N — — ΙBVC - VA——ΙNVN 1)
C, N — — — — ΙCVA - VBΙNVN 1)
Functions
2.3 Directional Overcurrent Protection 67, 67N
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 91
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Pickup Measuring element
A B C ground
Current Voltage Current Voltage Current Voltage Current Voltage
A, B ΙAVB - VCΙBVC - VA— — — —
B, C — — ΙBVC - VAΙCVA - VB— —
AC ΙAVB - VC——ΙCVA - VB— —
A, B, N ΙAVB - VCΙBVC - VA——ΙNVN 1)
B, C, N — — ΙBVC - VAΙCVA - VBΙNVN 1)
A, C, N ΙAVB - VC——ΙCVA - VBΙNVN 1)
A, B, C ΙAVB - VCΙBVC - VAΙCVA - VB— —
A, B, C, N ΙAVB - VCΙBVC - VAΙCVA - VBΙNVN 1)
1) or 3 · V0 = |VA + VB + VC|, depending on the connection type of voltages
Direction Determination of Directional Phase Elements
As already mentioned, the direction determination is performed by determining the phase angle between the
fault current and the reference voltage. In order to satisfy different network conditions and applications, the
reference voltage can be rotated by an adjustable angle. In this way, the vector of the rotated reference
voltage can be closely adjusted to the vector of the fault current in order to provide the best possible result for
the direction determination. Figure 2-26 clearly shows the relationship for the directional phase element
based on a single-phase ground fault in Phase A. The fault current ΙscA follows the fault voltage by fault angle
ϕsc. The reference voltage, in this case VBC for the directional phase element A, is rotated by the setting value
1519 ROTATION ANGLE, positively counter-clockwise. In this case, a rotation by +45°.
[7sj6x_drehung-referenzspannung-phase-200904-he, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-26 Rotation of the reference voltage, directional phase element
The rotated reference voltage defines the forward and reverse area, see Figure 2-27. The forward area is a
range of ±86° around the rotated reference voltage Vref,rot If the vector of the fault current is in this area, the
device detects forward direction. In the mirrored area, the device detects reverse direction. In the intermediate
area, the direction result is undefined.
In a network, the vector of the fault current is usually in the forward or reverse area. If the vector moves out of
one these areas, e.g. the forward area, in direction of the undefined area, it leaves the forward area at Vref,rot
±86° and reaches the undefined area. If the vector leaves the undefined area in direction of the forward area
Functions
2.3 Directional Overcurrent Protection 67, 67N
92 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
(or reverse area), a hysteresis of 2° is added. This hysteresis prevents chattering of the directional result. The
current vector reaches the forward area at ±84° (= 86°-2° hysteresis).
[7sj6x_vorwaertscharakteristik-gumz-phase-220904-he, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-27 Forward characteristic of the directional function, directional phase element
Direction Determination of Directional Ground Element with Ground Values
Figure 2-28 shows the treatment of the reference voltage for the directional ground element, also based on a
single-phase ground fault in phase A. Contrary to the directional phase elements, which work with the
unfaulted voltage as reference voltage, the fault voltage itself is the reference voltage for the directional
ground element. Depending on the connection of the voltage transformer, this is the voltage 3V0 (as shown in
Figure 2-28) or VN. The fault current -3Ι0 is phase offset by 180° to the fault current ΙscA and follows the fault
voltage 3V0 by fault angle ϕsc. The reference voltage is rotated by the setting value 1619 ROTATION ANGLE.
In this case, a rotation by -45°.
[7sj6x_drehung-referenzspannung-erde-nullsys-220904-he, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-28 Rotation of the reference voltage, directional ground element with zero sequence values
The forward area is also a range of ±86° around the rotated reference voltage Vref, rot. If the vector of the fault
current -Ι0 (or ΙN) is in this area, the device detects forward direction.
Direction Determination of Directional Ground Element with Negative Sequence Values
Figure 2-29 shows the treatment of the reference voltage for the directional ground element using the nega-
tive sequence values based on a single-phase ground fault in phase A. As reference voltage, the negative
Functions
2.3 Directional Overcurrent Protection 67, 67N
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 93
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
sequence voltage is used, as current for the direction determination, the negative sequence system in which
the fault current is displayed. The fault current -3Ι2 is in phase opposition to the fault current ΙscA and follows
the voltage 3V2 by the fault angle ϕsc. The reference voltage is rotated through the setting value 1619 ROTA-
TION ANGLE. In this case, a rotation of -45°.
[7sj6x_drehung-referenzspannung-erde-gegensys-220904-he, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-29 Rotation of the reference voltage, directional ground element with negative sequence values
The forward area is a range of ±86° around the rotated reference voltage Vref, rot. If the vector of the negative
sequence system current -3Ι2 is in this area, the device detects forward direction.
Reverse Interlocking for Double End Fed Lines
Application Example
The directionality feature of the directional overcurrent protection enables the user to perform reverse inter-
locking also on double end fed lines using relay element 67-1. It is designed to selectively isolate a faulty line
section (e.g. sections of rings) in high speed, i.e. no long graded times will slow down the process. This
scheme is feasible when the distance between protective relays is not too great and when pilot wires are avail-
able for signal transfer via an auxiliary voltage loop.
For each line, a separate data transfer path is required to facilitate signal transmission in each direction. When
implemented in a closed-circuit connection, disturbances in the communication line are detected and
signalled with time delay. The local system requires a local interlocking bus wire similar to the one described
in Subsection "Reverse Interlocking Bus Protection" for the directional overcurrent protection (Section
2.2 Overcurrent Protection 50, 51, 50N, 51N).
During a line fault, the device that detects faults in forward (line) direction using the directional relay element
67-1 will block one of the non-directional overcurrent elements (50-1, 50-TOC) of devices in the reverse direc-
tion (at the same busbar) since they should not trip (Figure 2-30). In addition, a message is generated
regarding the fault direction. "Forward" messages are issued when the current threshold of the directional
relay element 67-1 is exceeded and directional determination is done. Subsequently, "forward" messages are
transmitted to the device located in reverse direction.
During a busbar fault, the device that detects faults in reverse (busbar) direction using the directional relay
element 67-1 will block one of the non-directional overcurrent elements (50-1, 50-TOC) of devices at the
opposite end of the same feeder. In addition, a "Reverse" message is generated and transmitted via the auxil-
iary voltage loop to the relay located at the opposite end of the line.
2.3.9
Functions
2.3 Directional Overcurrent Protection 67, 67N
94 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[selektivitaetdurchrueckwverr-260602-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-30 Reverse interlocking using directional elements
The directional overcurrent element providing normal time grading operates as selective backup protection.
The following figure shows the logic diagram for the generation of fault direction signals.
[7sj6x-meld-gener-fehlerricht-20060118, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-31 Logic diagram for the generation of fault direction signals
Setting Notes
General
When selecting the directional time overcurrent protection in DIGSI, a dialog box appears with several tabs for
setting the associated parameters. Depending on the functional scope specified during configuration of the
protective functions in addresses 115 67/67-TOC and 116 67N/67N-TOC, the number of tabs can vary.
If 67/67-TOC or 67N/67N-TOC is set equal to Definite Time, only the parameters for definite time over-
current protection are accessible here. If you select TOC IEC or TOC ANSI, the inverse time characteristics is
available, too. The superimposed directional elements 67-3, 67-2 and 67-1or 67N-3, 67N-2 and 67N-1apply in
all these cases.
At address 1501 FCT 67/67-TOC, directional phase overcurrent protection may be switched ON or OFF.
Pickup values, time delays, and characteristic are set separately for phase protection and ground protection.
Because of this, relay coordination for ground faults is independent of relay coordination for phase faults, and
more sensitive settings can often be applied to directional ground protection. Thus, at address 1601 FCT
67N/67N-TOC, directional ground time overcurrent protection may be switched ON or OFF independent of
the directional phase time overcurrent protection.
2.3.10
Functions
2.3 Directional Overcurrent Protection 67, 67N
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 95
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Depending on the parameter 613 50N/51N/67N w., the device can either operate using measured values IN
or the quantities 3I0 calculated from the three phase currents. Devices featuring a sensitive ground current
input generally use the calculated quantity 3Ι0.
The directional orientation of the function is influenced by parameter 201 CT Starpoint (see Section
2.1.3 Power System Data 1).
Measurement Methods
The comparison values to be used for the respective element can be set in the setting sheets for the elements.
•Measurement of the Fundamental Harmonic (standard method):
This measurement method processes the sampled values of the current and filters in numerical order the
fundamental harmonic so that the higher harmonics or transient peak currents are rejected.
•Measurement of the True RMS Value
The current amplitude is derived from the sampled value in accordance with the definition equation of
the true RMS value. This measurement method should be selected when higher harmonics are to be
considered by the function (e.g. in capacitor bank).
The type of the comparison values can be set under the following addresses:
67-3 element Address 1527 67-3 MEASUREM.
67-2 element Address 1520 67-2 MEASUREM.
67-1 element Address 1521 67-1 MEASUREM.
67-TOC element Address 1522 67-TOC MEASUR.
67N-3 element Address 1627 67N-3 MEASUREM.
67N-2 element Address 1620 67N-2 MEASUREM.
67N-1 element Address 1621 67N-1 MEASUREM.
67N-TOC element Address 1622 67N-TOC MEASUR.
Direction Characteristic
The direction characteristic, i.e. the position of the ranges “forward”and “reverse” is set for the phase direc-
tional elements under address 1519 ROTATION ANGLE and for the ground directional element under address
1619 ROTATION ANGLE. The short-circuit angle is generally inductive in a range of 30° to 60°. This means
that usually the default settings of +45° for the phase directional elements and -45° for the ground directional
element can be maintained for the adjustment of the reference voltage, as they guarantee a safe direction
result.
Nevertheless, the following contains some setting examples for special applications (Table 2-7). The following
must be observed: With the phase directional elements, the reference voltage (fault-free voltage) for phase-
ground- faults is vertical on the short-circuit voltage. For this reason, the resulting setting of the angle of rota-
tion is (see also Section 2.3.8 Determination of Direction):
Ref. volt. angle of rotation = 90 - φsc Phase directional element (phase-
to-ground fault)
With the ground directional element, the reference voltage is the short-circuit voltage itself. The resulting
setting of the angle of rotation is then:
Ref. volt. angle of rotation = -φsc Directional ground element (phase-
to-ground fault).
It should also be noted for phase directional elements that with phase-to-phase faults, the reference voltage is
rotated between 0° (remote fault) and 30° (close-up fault) depending on the collapse of the faulty voltage.
This can be taken into account with a mean value of 15°:
Ref. volt. angle of rotation = 90 - φsc -15° Phase directional element (phase-
to-phase fault)
Functions
2.3 Directional Overcurrent Protection 67, 67N
96 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Table 2-7 Setting examples
Application φk
typical
Setting
Directional Phase
Element
1519 ROTATION
ANGLE
Setting
Directional Ground
Element
1619 ROTATION
ANGLE
60° Bereich 30°...0°
→ 15°
–60°
30° Bereich 60°...30°
→ 45°
–30°
30° Bereich 60°...30°
→ 45°
–30°
1) Power flow direction
2) With the assumption that these are cable lines
Directional Orientation
Directional overcurrent protection normally operates in the direction of the protected object (line, trans-
former, etc.). If the protection device is properly connected in accordance with one of the circuit diagrams in
Appendix C Connection Examples, this is the “forward” direction.
The directional orientation Forward or Reverse can be set separately for each element. Moreover, each
element can also be operated Non-Directional.
•Address 1526 67-3 Direction
•Address 1523 67-2 Direction
•Address 1524 67-1 Direction
•Address 1525 67-TOC Direct.
•Address 1626 67N-3 Direction
•Address 1623 67N-2 Direction
•Address 1624 67N-1 Direction
•Address 1625 67N-TOC Direct.
i
i
NOTE
If the threshold value of the 67-1 or 67N-1 element is exceeded, the phase-specific directional indications
“forward” or “reverse” are output (indications 2628 to 2636), independent of whether the fault direction is
the same as the configured direction.
These indications are used for directional comparison protection.
Quantity Selection for Direction Determination for the Directional Ground Element
Parameter 1617 67N POLARIZAT.can be set to specify whether direction determination is accomplished
from the zero sequence quantities or ground quantities (with VN and IN) or from the negative sequence
Functions
2.3 Directional Overcurrent Protection 67, 67N
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 97
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
quantities (with V2 and I2) in the ground directional element. The first option is the preferential setting;
the latter is to be selected in case of danger that the zero voltage be too small due to unfavourable zero impe-
dance or that a parallel line influences the zero system.
i
i
NOTE
If parameter 213 VT Connect. 3ph is set to Vab, Vbc, Vab, Vbc, VSyn or Vab, Vbc, Vx, the
direction is always determined using the negative sequence values V2/Ι2. For these voltage connection
types the zero sequence voltage (VN or 3V0) is not available.
Directional High-set Elements 67-2, 67-3 (phases)
The high-current element 67-2 PICKUP or 67-3 PICKUP is set at address 1502 or 1528. The associated
delay 67-2 DELAY or 67-3 DELAY at 1503 or 1529. For setting, the same considerations apply as did for the
non-directional time overcurrent protection in Section 2.2.11 Setting Notes.
The selected time is only an additional time delay and does not include the operating time (measuring time,
dropout time). The delay can be set to ∞. After pickup the element will then not trip. Pickup, however, will be
signaled. If the 67-2 element or 67–3 element is not required at all, the pickup value 67-2 PICKUP or 67-3
PICKUP should be set to ∞. For this setting, there is neither a pickup signal generated nor a trip.
Directional High-set Elements 67-2, 67-3 (ground)
The high-current element 67N-2 PICKUP or 67N-3 PICKUP is set at address 1602 or 1628. The associated
delay 67N-2 DELAY or 67N-3 DELAY at 1603 or 1629. The same considerations apply for these settings as
for the phase currents.
The selected time is an additional delay time and does not include the operating time (measuring time,
dropout time). If the delay time is set to ∞, the element does not trip after the pickup, but the pickup condi-
tion is signaled. If the directional 67N-2 element or 67N-3 element is not required, set the pickup threshold
67N-2 PICKUP or 67N-3 PICKUP to ∞. This setting prevents tripping and the generation of a pickup indica-
tion.
Directional Overcurrent Element 67-1 (phases)
The pickup value of the 67-1 element (67-1 PICKUP) address1504 should be set above the maximum antici-
pated load current. Pickup due to overload should never occur since in this mode the device operates as fault
protection with correspondingly short tripping times and not as overload protection. For this reason, lines are
set to approx. 20% above the maximum expected (over)load and transformers and motors to approx. 40%.
If the relay is used to protect transformers or motors with large inrush currents, the inrush restraint feature of
7SJ80 may be used for the 67-1 element (for more information see margin heading "Inrush Restraint").
The delay for directional elements (address 1505 67-1 DELAY) is usually set shorter than the delay for
nondirectional elements (address 1205) since the non-directional elements overlap the directional elements
as backup protection. It should be based on the system coordination requirements for directional tripping.
For parallel transformers supplied from a single source (see "Applications"), the delay of element 67-1 DELAY
located on the load side of the transformers may be set to 0 without provoking negative impacts on selec-
tivity.
The selected time is only an additional time delay and does not include the operating time (measuring time,
dropout time). The delay can be set to ∞. After pickup the element will then not trip. Pickup, however, will be
signaled. If the 67-1 element is not required at all, the pickup value 67-1 PICKUP should be set to ∞. This
setting prevents from tripping and the generation of a pickup message.
Directional Overcurrent Element 67N-1 (ground)
The pickup value of the 67N-1 overcurrent element(1604 67N-1 PICKUP)should be set below the minimum
anticipated ground fault current.
If the relay is used to protect transformers or motors with large inrush currents, the inrush restraint feature of
7SJ80 may be used for the 67N-1 relay element (67N-1 PICKUP) (for more information see margin heading
"Inrush Restraint").
Functions
2.3 Directional Overcurrent Protection 67, 67N
98 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
The delay is set at address 1605 67N-1 DELAY and should be based on system coordination requirements for
directional tripping. For ground currents in a grounded system a separate coordination chart with short time
delay is often used.
The selected time is only an additional time delay and does not include the operating time (measuring time,
dropout time). The delay can be set to ∞. After pickup the element will then not trip. Pickup, however, will be
signaled. If the 67N-1 element is not required at all, the pickup value 67N-1 PICKUP should be set to ∞. This
setting prevents from tripping and the generation of a pickup message.
Pickup Stabilization (67/67N Directional)
The pickups can also be stabilized via parameterizable dropout times under address 1518 67 T DROP-OUT or
1618 67N T DROP-OUT.
Directional Element 67-TOC with IEC or ANSI Curves (phases)
Having set address 115 67/67-TOC = TOC IEC or TOC ANSI when configuring the protection functions
(Section 2.1.1 Functional Scope), the parameters for the inverse time characteristics will also be available.
If the relay is used to protect transformers or motors with large inrush currents, the inrush restraint function of
7SJ80 may be used for the 67-TOC element (67-TOC PICKUP) (for more information see margin heading
"Inrush Restraint").
If the inverse time trip characteristic is selected, it must be noted that a safety factor of about 1.1 has already
been included between the pickup value and the setting value. This means that a pickup will only occur if a
current of about 1.1 times the setting value is present. If Address 1510 67-TOC Drop-out is set to Disk
Emulation, reset will occur in accordance with the reset curve as described in Section 2.2 Overcurrent
Protection 50, 51, 50N, 51N.
The current value is set in address 1507 67-TOC PICKUP. The setting is mainly determined by the maximum
operating current. Pickup due to overload should never occur, since the device in this operating mode oper-
ates as fault protection with correspondingly short tripping times and not as overload protection.
The corresponding element time multiplication factor for an IEC characteristic is set at address 1508 67 TIME
DIAL and in address 1509 67 TIME DIAL for an ANSI characteristic. It must be coordinated with the time
grading of the network.
The time multiplier can also be set to ∞. After pickup the element will then not trip. Pickup, however, will be
signaled. If the 67-TOC element is not required at all, address 115 67/67-TOC should be set to Definite
Time during protective function configuration (see Section 2.1.1 Functional Scope).
If address 115 67/67-TOC = TOC IEC, you can specify the desired IEC–characteristic (Normal Inverse,
Very Inverse, Extremely Inv. or Long Inverse) in address 1511 67- IEC CURVE. If address 115
67/67-TOC = TOC ANSI you can specify the desired ANSI–characteristic (Very Inverse, Inverse, Short
Inverse, Long Inverse, Moderately Inv., Extremely Inv. oder Definite Inv.) in address 1512
67- ANSI CURVE.
Directional Element 67N-TOC with IEC or ANSI Curves (ground)
Having set address 116 67N/67N-TOC = TOC IEC when configuring the protection functions (Section
2.1.1 Functional Scope), the parameters for the inverse time characteristics will also be available. Specify in
address 1611 67N-TOC IEC the desired IEC characteristic (Normal Inverse, Very Inverse, Extremely
Inv. or Long Inverse). If address 116 67N/67N-TOC was set to TOC ANSI, you can select the desired
ANSI characteristic (Very Inverse, Inverse, Short Inverse, Long Inverse, Moderately Inv.,
Extremely Inv. or Definite Inv.) in address 1612 67N-TOC ANSI.
If the relay is used to protect transformers or motors with large inrush currents, the inrush restraint feature of
7SJ80 may be used for the 67N-TOC element (67N-TOC PICKUP) (for more information see margin heading
"Inrush Restraint").
If the inverse time trip characteristic is selected, it must be noted that a safety factor of about 1.1 has already
been included between the pickup value and the setting value 67N-TOC PICKUP. This means that a pickup
will only occur if a current of about 1.1 times the setting value is present. If Disk Emulation was selected at
address 1610 67N-TOC DropOut, reset will occur in accordance with the reset curve as for the existing
nondirectional time overcurrent protection described in Section 2.2 Overcurrent Protection 50, 51, 50N, 51N.
Functions
2.3 Directional Overcurrent Protection 67, 67N
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 99
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
The current value is set at address 1607 67N-TOC PICKUP. The minimum appearing ground fault current is
most relevant for this setting.
The corresponding element time multiplication factor for an IEC characteristic is set at address 1608 67N-TOC
T-DIAL and in address 1609 67N-TOC T-DIAL for an ANSI characteristic. This has to be coordinated with
the system grading coordination chart for directional tripping. For ground currents with grounded network,
you can mostly set up a separate grading coordination chart with shorter delay times.
The time multiplier can also be set to ∞. After pickup the element will then not trip. Pickup, however, will be
signaled. If the 67N-TOC element is not required at all, address 116 67N/67N-TOC should be set to Defi-
nite Time during protection function configuration (see Section 2.1.1).
Inrush Restraint
When applying the protection device to transformers where high inrush currents are to be expected, the
7SJ80 can make use of an inrush restraint function for the directional overcurrent elements 67-1 PICKUP,
67-TOC PICKUP, 67N-1 PICKUP and 67N-TOC PICKUP as well as the non-directional overcurrent
elements. The inrush restraint option is enabled or disabled in 2201 INRUSH REST. (in the settings option
non-directional time overcurrent protection). The characteristic values of the inrush restraint are already listed
in the section discussing the non-directional time overcurrent (Section 2.2.11 Setting Notes).
Manual Close Mode (phases, ground)
When a circuit breaker is closed onto a faulted line, a high speed trip by the circuit breaker is often desired. For
overcurrent or high-set element the delay may be bypassed via a Manual Close pulse, thus resulting in instan-
taneous tripping. The internal "Manual close" signal is built from the binary input signal
>Manual Close
(no.
356). The internal "Manual close" signal remains active as long as the binary input signal
>Manual Close
is
active, but at least for 300 ms (see the following logic diagram). To enable the device to react properly on
occurrence of a fault in the phase elements after manual close, address 1513 MANUAL CLOSE has to be set
accordingly. Accordingly, address 1613 MANUAL CLOSE is considered for the ground path address. Thus, the
user determines for both elements, the phase and the ground element, what pickup value is active with what
delay when the circuit breaker is closed manually.
[lo_7sj6-hand-ein, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-32 Manual close feature
External Control Switch
If the manual close signal is not from the 7SJ80 device, that is, neither sent via the built-in operator interface
nor via a serial port but directly from a control acknowledgment switch, this signal must be passed to a 7SJ80
binary input, and configured accordingly (
>Manual Close
), so that the element selected for MANUAL
CLOSE can become effective. Inactive means that all elements (phase and ground) operate with the config-
ured trip times even with manual close.
Internal Control Function
The manual closing information must be allocated via CFC (interlocking task-level) using the CMD_Information
block, if the internal control function is used.
[handein-260602-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-33 Example for the generation of a manual close signal using the internal control function
Functions
2.3 Directional Overcurrent Protection 67, 67N
100 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
i
i
NOTE
For an interaction between the automatic reclosing function (79 AR) and the control function, an extended
CFC logic is necessary. See margin heading “Close command: Directly or via Control” in the Setting Notes of
the automatic reclosing function (Section 2.15.6 Setting Notes).
Interaction with Automatic Reclosure Function (phases)
When reclosing follows, high-speed protection against faults with 67-2 or 67-3 is usually desired. If the fault
still exists after reclosing, the 67-1 or 67-TOC element will be initiated with graded tripping times, that is, the
67-2 or 67-3 element will be blocked. You can use parameter 1514 67-2 active or 1532 67-3 active
active to define whether the 67-2 or 67-3 element is influenced by a release signal of the internal or an
external automatic reclosing device or not. The setting with 79 active means that the 67-2 or 67-3
element is only released if the automatic reclosing function is not blocked. If this is not desired, the setting
always is selected so that the 67-2 or 67-3 element is always active as configured.
The integrated automatic reclosing function of 7SJ80 also provides the option to individually determine for
each overcurrent element whether tripping or blocking is to be carried out instantaneously, unaffected by the
AR with time delay (see Section 2.15 Automatic Reclosing System 79).
Interaction with Automatic Reclosing Function (ground)
If reclosing follows, high-speed and simultaneous closing in the event of a fault with 67N-2 is usually desired.
If the fault still exists after reclosing, the 67N-1 or 67N-TOC element is initiated with graded tripping times,
that is, the 67N-2 or 67N-3 element is blocked. For this purpose, parameter 1614 67N-2 active or 1632
67N-3 active is used to determine whether the 67N-2 or 67N-3 element is influenced by the release signal
of the internal or an external automatic reclosing device or not. The setting with 79 active means that the
67N- 2 or 67N-3 element is only released if the automatic reclosing function is not blocked. If this is not
desired, the setting always is selected so that the 67N-2 or 67N-3 element is always active as configured.
The integrated automatic reclosing function of 7SJ80 also provides the option to individually determine for
each overcurrent element whether tripping or blocking is to be carried out instantaneously, unaffected by the
AR with time delay (see Section 2.15 Automatic Reclosing System 79).
Settings
Addresses which have an appended “A” can only be changed with DIGSI, under “Additional Settings”.
The table indicates region-specific default settings. Column C (configuration) indicates the corresponding
secondary nominal current of the current transformer.
Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting Comments
1501 FCT 67/67-TOC OFF
ON
OFF 67, 67-TOC Phase Time
Overcurrent
1502 67-2 PICKUP 1A 0.10 .. 35.00 A; ∞ 2.00 A 67-2 Pickup
5A 0.50 .. 175.00 A; ∞ 10.00 A
1503 67-2 DELAY 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.10 sec 67-2 Time Delay
1504 67-1 PICKUP 1A 0.10 .. 35.00 A; ∞ 1.00 A 67-1 Pickup
5A 0.50 .. 175.00 A; ∞ 5.00 A
1505 67-1 DELAY 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec 67-1Time Delay
1507 67-TOC PICKUP 1A 0.10 .. 4.00 A 1.00 A 67-TOC Pickup
5A 0.50 .. 20.00 A 5.00 A
1508 67 TIME DIAL 0.05 .. 3.20 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec 67-TOC Time Dial
1509 67 TIME DIAL 0.50 .. 15.00 ; ∞ 5.00 67-TOC Time Dial
1510 67-TOC Drop-out Instantaneous
Disk Emulation
Disk Emulation Drop-Out Characteristic
2.3.11
Functions
2.3 Directional Overcurrent Protection 67, 67N
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 101
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting Comments
1511 67- IEC CURVE Normal Inverse
Very Inverse
Extremely Inv.
Long Inverse
Normal Inverse IEC Curve
1512 67- ANSI CURVE Very Inverse
Inverse
Short Inverse
Long Inverse
Moderately Inv.
Extremely Inv.
Definite Inv.
Very Inverse ANSI Curve
1513A MANUAL CLOSE 67-3 instant.
67-2 instant.
67-1 instant.
67-TOC instant.
Inactive
67-2 instant. Manual Close Mode
1514A 67-2 active with 79 active
always
always 67-2 active
1518A 67 T DROP-OUT 0.00 .. 60.00 sec 0.00 sec 67 Drop-Out Time Delay
1519A ROTATION ANGLE -180 .. 180 ° 45 ° Rotation Angle of Refer-
ence Voltage
1520A 67-2 MEASUREM. Fundamental
True RMS
Fundamental 67-2 measurement of
1521A 67-1 MEASUREM. Fundamental
True RMS
Fundamental 67-1 measurement of
1522A 67-TOC MEASUR. Fundamental
True RMS
Fundamental 67-TOC measurement of
1523 67-2 Direction Forward
Reverse
Non-Directional
Forward 67-2 Direction
1524 67-1 Direction Forward
Reverse
Non-Directional
Forward 67-1 Direction
1525 67-TOC Direct. Forward
Reverse
Non-Directional
Forward 67-TOC Direction
1526 67-3 Direction Forward
Reverse
Non-Directional
Forward 67-3 Direction
1527A 67-3 MEASUREM. Fundamental
True RMS
Fundamental 67-3 measurement of
1528 67-3 PICKUP 1A 1.00 .. 35.00 A; ∞ ∞ A 67-3 Pickup
5A 5.00 .. 175.00 A; ∞ ∞ A
1529 67-3 DELAY 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.00 sec 67-3 Time Delay
1530 67 1.00 .. 20.00 I/Ip; ∞
0.01 .. 999.00 TD
67
1531 MofPU Res T/Tp 0.05 .. 0.95 I/Ip; ∞
0.01 .. 999.00 TD
Multiple of Pickup <-> T/Tp
Functions
2.3 Directional Overcurrent Protection 67, 67N
102 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting Comments
1532A 67-3 active always
with 79 active
always 67-3 active
1601 FCT 67N/67N-TOC OFF
ON
OFF 67N, 67N-TOC Ground
Time Overcurrent
1602 67N-2 PICKUP 1A 0.05 .. 35.00 A; ∞ 0.50 A 67N-2 Pickup
5A 0.25 .. 175.00 A; ∞ 2.50 A
1603 67N-2 DELAY 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.10 sec 67N-2 Time Delay
1604 67N-1 PICKUP 1A 0.05 .. 35.00 A; ∞ 0.20 A 67N-1 Pickup
5A 0.25 .. 175.00 A; ∞ 1.00 A
1605 67N-1 DELAY 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec 67N-1 Time Delay
1607 67N-TOC PICKUP 1A 0.05 .. 4.00 A 0.20 A 67N-TOC Pickup
5A 0.25 .. 20.00 A 1.00 A
1608 67N-TOC T-DIAL 0.05 .. 3.20 sec; ∞ 0.20 sec 67N-TOC Time Dial
1609 67N-TOC T-DIAL 0.50 .. 15.00 ; ∞ 5.00 67N-TOC Time Dial
1610 67N-TOC DropOut Instantaneous
Disk Emulation
Disk Emulation Drop-Out Characteristic
1611 67N-TOC IEC Normal Inverse
Very Inverse
Extremely Inv.
Long Inverse
Normal Inverse IEC Curve
1612 67N-TOC ANSI Very Inverse
Inverse
Short Inverse
Long Inverse
Moderately Inv.
Extremely Inv.
Definite Inv.
Very Inverse ANSI Curve
1613A MANUAL CLOSE 67N-3 instant.
67N-2 instant.
67N-1 instant.
67N-TOC instant
Inactive
67N-2 instant. Manual Close Mode
1614A 67N-2 active always
with 79 active
always 67N-2 active
1617 67N POLARIZAT. with VN and IN
with V2 and I2
with VN and IN Ground Polarization
1618A 67N T DROP-OUT 0.00 .. 60.00 sec 0.00 sec 67N Drop-Out Time Delay
1619A ROTATION ANGLE -180 .. 180 ° -45 ° Rotation Angle of Refer-
ence Voltage
1620A 67N-2 MEASUREM. Fundamental
True RMS
Fundamental 67N-2 measurement of
1621A 67N-1 MEASUREM. Fundamental
True RMS
Fundamental 67N-1 measurement of
1622A 67N-TOC MEASUR. Fundamental
True RMS
Fundamental 67N-TOC measurement of
1623 67N-2 Direction Forward
Reverse
Non-Directional
Forward 67N-2 Direction
Functions
2.3 Directional Overcurrent Protection 67, 67N
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 103
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting Comments
1624 67N-1 Direction Forward
Reverse
Non-Directional
Forward 67N-1 Direction
1625 67N-TOC Direct. Forward
Reverse
Non-Directional
Forward 67N-TOC Direction
1626 67N-3 Direction Forward
Reverse
Non-Directional
Forward 67N-3 Direction
1627A 67N-3 MEASUREM. Fundamental
True RMS
Fundamental 67N-3 measurement of
1628 67N-3 PICKUP 0.50 .. 35.00 A; ∞ ∞ A 67N-3 Pickup
1629 67N-3 DELAY 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.00 sec 67N-3 Time Delay
1630 M.of PU TD 1.00 .. 20.00 I/Ip; ∞
0.01 .. 999.00 TD
Multiples of PU Time-Dial
1631 I/IEp Rf T/TEp 0.05 .. 0.95 I/Ip; ∞
0.01 .. 999.00 TD
67N TOC
1632A 67N-3 active always
with 79 active
always 67N-3 active
Information List
No. Information Type of
Informa-
tion
Comments
2603 67N-3 TRIP OUT 67N-3 TRIP
2604 >BLK 67/67-TOC SP >BLOCK 67/67-TOC
2605 67N-3 BLOCKED OUT 67N-3 is BLOCKED
2606 67-3 BLOCKED OUT 67-3 is BLOCKED
2614 >BLK 67N/67NTOC SP >BLOCK 67N/67N-TOC
2615 >BLOCK 67-2 SP >BLOCK 67-2
2616 >BLOCK 67N-2 SP >BLOCK 67N-2
2617 >BLOCK 67-3 SP >BLOCK 67-3
2618 >BLOCK 67N-3 SP >BLOCK 67N-3
2621 >BLOCK 67-1 SP >BLOCK 67-1
2622 >BLOCK 67-TOC SP >BLOCK 67-TOC
2623 >BLOCK 67N-1 SP >BLOCK 67N-1
2624 >BLOCK 67N-TOC SP >BLOCK 67N-TOC
2628 Phase A forward OUT Phase A forward
2629 Phase B forward OUT Phase B forward
2630 Phase C forward OUT Phase C forward
2632 Phase A reverse OUT Phase A reverse
2633 Phase B reverse OUT Phase B reverse
2634 Phase C reverse OUT Phase C reverse
2635 Ground forward OUT Ground forward
2636 Ground reverse OUT Ground reverse
2637 67-1 BLOCKED OUT 67-1 is BLOCKED
2.3.12
Functions
2.3 Directional Overcurrent Protection 67, 67N
104 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
No. Information Type of
Informa-
tion
Comments
2642 67-2 picked up OUT 67-2 picked up
2646 67N-2 picked up OUT 67N-2 picked up
2647 67-2 Time Out OUT 67-2 Time Out
2648 67N-2 Time Out OUT 67N-2 Time Out
2649 67-2 TRIP OUT 67-2 TRIP
2651 67/67-TOC OFF OUT 67/67-TOC switched OFF
2652 67 BLOCKED OUT 67/67-TOC is BLOCKED
2653 67 ACTIVE OUT 67/67-TOC is ACTIVE
2655 67-2 BLOCKED OUT 67-2 is BLOCKED
2656 67N OFF OUT 67N/67N-TOC switched OFF
2657 67N BLOCKED OUT 67N/67N-TOC is BLOCKED
2658 67N ACTIVE OUT 67N/67N-TOC is ACTIVE
2659 67N-1 BLOCKED OUT 67N-1 is BLOCKED
2660 67-1 picked up OUT 67-1 picked up
2664 67-1 Time Out OUT 67-1 Time Out
2665 67-1 TRIP OUT 67-1 TRIP
2668 67N-2 BLOCKED OUT 67N-2 is BLOCKED
2669 67-TOC BLOCKED OUT 67-TOC is BLOCKED
2670 67-TOC pickedup OUT 67-TOC picked up
2674 67-TOC Time Out OUT 67-TOC Time Out
2675 67-TOC TRIP OUT 67-TOC TRIP
2676 67-TOC DiskPU OUT 67-TOC disk emulation is ACTIVE
2677 67N-TOC BLOCKED OUT 67N-TOC is BLOCKED
2678 67-3 TRIP OUT 67-3 TRIP
2679 67N-2 TRIP OUT 67N-2 TRIP
2681 67N-1 picked up OUT 67N-1 picked up
2682 67N-1 Time Out OUT 67N-1 Time Out
2683 67N-1 TRIP OUT 67N-1 TRIP
2684 67N-TOCPickedup OUT 67N-TOC picked up
2685 67N-TOC TimeOut OUT 67N-TOC Time Out
2686 67N-TOC TRIP OUT 67N-TOC TRIP
2687 67N-TOC Disk PU OUT 67N-TOC disk emulation is ACTIVE
2691 67/67N pickedup OUT 67/67N picked up
2692 67 A picked up OUT 67/67-TOC Phase A picked up
2693 67 B picked up OUT 67/67-TOC Phase B picked up
2694 67 C picked up OUT 67/67-TOC Phase C picked up
2695 67N picked up OUT 67N/67N-TOC picked up
2696 67/67N TRIP OUT 67/67N TRIP
2697 67-3 picked up OUT 67-3 picked up
2698 67N-3 picked up OUT 67N-3 picked up
2699 67-3 Time Out OUT 67-3 Time Out
2700 67N-3 Time Out OUT 67N-3 Time Out
Functions
2.3 Directional Overcurrent Protection 67, 67N
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 105
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Dynamic Cold Load Pickup
With the cold load pickup function, pickup and delay settings of directional and non-directional time overcur-
rent protection can be changed over dynamically.
Applications
•It may be necessary to dynamically increase the pickup values if, during starting and for a short time
thereafter, certain elements of the system have an increased power consumption after a long period of
zero voltage (e.g. air-conditioning systems, heating installations). Thus a raise of pickup thresholds can
be avoided by taking into consideration such starting conditions.
•As a further option, the pickup thresholds may be modified by an automatic reclosure function in accord-
ance with its ready or not ready state.
i
i
NOTE
Dynamic cold load pickup must not be confused with the changeover option of the 4 setting groups (A to
D). It is an additional feature.
It is possible to change pickup thresholds and delay times.
Functional Description
Effect
There are two methods by which the device can determine if the protected equipment is de-energized:
•Via binary inputs, the device is informed of the position of the circuit breaker (address 1702 Start
Condition = Breaker Contact).
•As a criterion a set current threshold is undershot (address 1702 Start Condition = No Current).
If the device determines that the protected equipment is de-energized via one of the above methods, a time,
CB Open Time, is started and after its expiration the increased thresholds take effect.
In addition, switching between parameters can be triggered by two other events:
•By signal "79M Auto Reclosing ready" of the internal automatic reclosure function (address 1702 Start
Condition = 79 ready). Thus the protection thresholds and the tripping times can be changed if auto-
matic reclosure is ready for reclosing (see also Section 2.15 Automatic Reclosing System 79).
•Irrespective of the setting of parameter 1702 Start Condition, the release of cold load pickup may
always be selected via the binary input
>ACTIVATE CLP
.
Figure 2-35 shows the logic diagram for dynamic cold load pickup function.
If it is detected via the auxiliary contact or the current criterion that the system is de-energized, i.e. the circuit
breaker is open, the CB Open Time is started. As soon as it has elapsed, the greater thresholds are enabled.
When the protected equipment is re-energized (the device receives this information via the binary inputs or
when threshold BkrClosed I MIN is exceeded), a second time delay referred to as the Active Time is
initiated. Once it elapses, the pickup values of the relay elements return to their normal settings. This time
may be reduced when current values fall below all normal pickup values for a set Stop Time after startup,
i.e. after the circuit breaker has been closed. The starting condition of the fast reset time is made up of an OR-
combination of the configured dropout conditions of all directional and non-directional overcurrent elements.
When Stop Time is set to ∞ or when binary input
>BLK CLP stpTim
is active, no comparison is made with
the "normal" thresholds. The function is inactive and the fast reset time, if applied, is reset.
If overcurrent elements are picked up while time Active Time is running, the fault generally prevails until
pickup drops out, using the dynamic settings. Only then the parameters are set back to "normal".
If the dynamic setting values were activated via the binary input
>ACTIVATE CLP
or the signal "79M Auto
Reclosing ready" and this cause drops out, the "normal" settings are restored immediately, even if a pickup is
the result.
2.4
2.4.1
Functions
2.4 Dynamic Cold Load Pickup
106 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
If the binary input
>BLOCK CLP
is enabled, all triggered timers are reset and, as a consequence, all "normal"
settings are immediately restored. If blocking occurs during an on-going fault with dynamic cold load pickup
functions enabled, the timers of all overcurrent relay elements are stopped and may then be restarted based
on their "normal" duration.
During power up of the protective relay with an open circuit breaker, the time delay CB Open Time is
started, and is processed using the "normal" settings. Therefore, when the circuit breaker is closed, the
"normal" settings are effective.
The following figures show the timing sequenceand the logic diagram of the dynamic cold load pickup
feature.
[zeitablaeufe-der-dynamischen-parameterumschaltung-260602-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-34 Timing charts of the dynamic cold load pickup function
Functions
2.4 Dynamic Cold Load Pickup
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 107
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[7sj6x_dyn_parumschaltung-150502-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-35 Logic diagram of the dynamic cold load pickup function (50c, 50Nc, 51c, 51Nc, 67c, 67Nc)
Setting Notes
General
The dynamic cold load pickup function can only be enabled if address 117 Coldload Pickup was set to
Enabled during configuration of the protection functions. If not required, this function is set to Disabled.
The function can be turned ON or OFF under address 1701 Coldload Pickup.
Depending on the condition that should initiate the cold load pickup function address 1702 Start Condi-
tion is set to either No Current, Breaker Contact or to 79 ready. Naturally, the option Breaker
Contact can only be selected if the device receives information regarding the switching state of the circuit
breaker via at least one binary input. The option 79 ready modifies dynamically the pickup thresholds of the
directional and non-directional time overcurrent protection when the automatic reclosing function is ready. To
2.4.2
Functions
2.4 Dynamic Cold Load Pickup
108 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
initiate the cold load pickup, the automatic reclosing function provides the internal signal "79M Auto
Reclosing ready". It is always active when the automatic reclosing function is available, activated, unblocked,
and ready for a further cycle (see also margin heading "Controlling Directional/Non-Directional Overcurrent
Protection Elements via Cold Load Pickup" in Section 2.15.6 Setting Notes).
Time Delays
There are no specific procedures on how to set the time delays at addresses 1703 CB Open Time, 1704
Active Time and 1705 Stop Time. These time delays must be based on the specific loading characteristics
of the equipment being protected, and should be set to allow for brief overloads associated with dynamic cold
load conditions.
Non-Directional 50/51 Elements (phases)
The dynamic pickup values and tripping times associated with the time overcurrent protection functions are
set at address block 18 for the phase currents:
The dynamic pickup and delay settings for the high-set elements are set at addresses 1801 50c-2 PICKUP or
1808 50c-3 PICKUP and 1802 50c-2 DELAY or 1809 50c-3 DELAY respectively; the dynamic pickup and
delay settings for the 67N-1 element are set at addresses 1803 50c-1 PICKUP and 1804 50c-1 DELAY
respectively; and the pickup, time multiplier (for IEC curves), and time dial (for ANSI curves) settings for the
67N-TOC element are set at addresses 1805 51c PICKUP, 1806 51c TIME DIAL and 1807 51c TIME
DIAL respectively.
Non-Directional 50N/51N Elements (ground)
The dynamic pickup values and time delays associated with non-directional time overcurrent ground protec-
tion are set at address block 19:
The dynamic pickup and delay settings for the high-set elements are set at addresses 1901 50Nc-2 PICKUP
or 1908 50Nc-3 PICKUP and 1902 50Nc-2 DELAY or 1909 50Nc-3 DELAY respectively; the dynamic
pickup and delay settings for the 67N-1 element are set at addresses 1903 50Nc-1 PICKUP and 1904
50Nc-1 DELAY respectively; and the pickup, time multiplier (for IEC curves), and time dial (for ANSI curves)
settings for the 67N-TOC element are set at addresses 1905 51Nc PICKUP, 1906 51Nc T-DIAL and 1907
51Nc T-DIAL respectively.
Directional 67/67–TOC Elements (phases)
The dynamic pickup values and time delays associated with directional overcurrent phase protection are set at
address block 20
Addresses 2001 67c-2 PICKUP or 2008 67c-3 PICKUP and 2002 67c-2 DELAY or 2009 67c-3 DELAY
define the dynamic parameters for the high-current elements, 2003 67c-1 PICKUP and 2004 67c-1
DELAY for the directional definite time overcurrent element and 2005 67c-TOC PICKUP in combination with
2006 67c-TOC T-DIAL (for IEC characteristics) or 2006 67c-TOC T-DIAL (for ANSI characteristics) for the
directional inverse time overcurrent protection element.
Directional 67/67N Elements (ground)
The dynamic pickup values and time delays associated with directional overcurrent ground protection are set
at address block 21:
Addresses 2101 67Nc-2 PICKUP or 2108 67Nc-3 PICKUP and 2102 67Nc-2 DELAY or 2109 67Nc-3
DELAY define the dynamic parameters for the high-current elements, 2103 67Nc-1 PICKUP and 2104
67Nc-1 DELAY for the directional definite time overcurrent element and 2105 67Nc-TOC PICKUP in combi-
nation with 2106 67Nc-TOC T-DIAL (for IEC characteristics) or 2107 67Nc-TOC T-DIAL (for ANSI charac-
teristics) for the directional inverse time overcurrent protection element.
Settings
The table indicates region-specific presettings. Column C (configuration) indicates the corresponding secon-
dary nominal current of the current transformer.
2.4.3
Functions
2.4 Dynamic Cold Load Pickup
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 109
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting Comments
1701 COLDLOAD PICKUP OFF
ON
OFF Cold-Load-Pickup Function
1702 Start Condition No Current
Breaker Contact
79 ready
No Current Start Condition
1703 CB Open Time 0 .. 21600 sec 3600 sec Circuit Breaker OPEN Time
1704 Active Time 0 .. 21600 sec 3600 sec Active Time
1705 Stop Time 1 .. 600 sec; ∞ 600 sec Stop Time
1801 50c-2 PICKUP 1A 0.10 .. 35.00 A; ∞ 10.00 A 50c-2 Pickup
5A 0.50 .. 175.00 A; ∞ 50.00 A
1802 50c-2 DELAY 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.00 sec 50c-2 Time Delay
1803 50c-1 PICKUP 1A 0.10 .. 35.00 A; ∞ 2.00 A 50c-1 Pickup
5A 0.50 .. 175.00 A; ∞ 10.00 A
1804 50c-1 DELAY 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.30 sec 50c-1 Time Delay
1805 51c PICKUP 1A 0.10 .. 4.00 A 1.50 A 51c Pickup
5A 0.50 .. 20.00 A 7.50 A
1806 51c TIME DIAL 0.05 .. 3.20 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec 51c Time dial
1807 51c TIME DIAL 0.50 .. 15.00 ; ∞ 5.00 51c Time dial
1808 50c-3 PICKUP 1A 1.00 .. 35.00 A; ∞ ∞ A 50c-3 Pickup
5A 5.00 .. 175.00 A; ∞ ∞ A
1809 50c-3 DELAY 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.00 sec 50c-3 Time Delay
1901 50Nc-2 PICKUP 1A 0.05 .. 35.00 A; ∞ 7.00 A 50Nc-2 Pickup
5A 0.25 .. 175.00 A; ∞ 35.00 A
1902 50Nc-2 DELAY 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.00 sec 50Nc-2 Time Delay
1903 50Nc-1 PICKUP 1A 0.05 .. 35.00 A; ∞ 1.50 A 50Nc-1 Pickup
5A 0.25 .. 175.00 A; ∞ 7.50 A
1904 50Nc-1 DELAY 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.30 sec 50Nc-1 Time Delay
1905 51Nc PICKUP 1A 0.05 .. 4.00 A 1.00 A 51Nc Pickup
5A 0.25 .. 20.00 A 5.00 A
1906 51Nc T-DIAL 0.05 .. 3.20 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec 51Nc Time Dial
1907 51Nc T-DIAL 0.50 .. 15.00 ; ∞ 5.00 51Nc Time Dial
1908 50Nc-3 PICKUP 1A 0.05 .. 35.00 A; ∞ ∞ A 50Nc-3 Pickup
1909 50Nc-3 DELAY 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.00 sec 50Nc-3 Time Delay
2001 67c-2 PICKUP 1A 0.10 .. 35.00 A; ∞ 10.00 A 67c-2 Pickup
5A 0.50 .. 175.00 A; ∞ 50.00 A
2002 67c-2 DELAY 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.00 sec 67c-2 Time Delay
2003 67c-1 PICKUP 1A 0.10 .. 35.00 A; ∞ 2.00 A 67c-1 Pickup
5A 0.50 .. 175.00 A; ∞ 10.00 A
2004 67c-1 DELAY 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.30 sec 67c-1 Time Delay
2005 67c-TOC PICKUP 1A 0.10 .. 4.00 A 1.50 A 67c Pickup
5A 0.50 .. 20.00 A 7.50 A
2006 67c-TOC T-DIAL 0.05 .. 3.20 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec 67c Time Dial
2007 67c-TOC T-DIAL 0.50 .. 15.00 ; ∞ 5.00 67c Time Dial
2008 67c-3 PICKUP 1A 1.00 .. 35.00 A; ∞ ∞ A 67c-3 Pickup
5A 5.00 .. 175.00 A; ∞ ∞ A
2009 67c-3 DELAY 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.00 sec 67c-3 Time Delay
Functions
2.4 Dynamic Cold Load Pickup
110 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting Comments
2101 67Nc-2 PICKUP 1A 0.05 .. 35.00 A; ∞ 7.00 A 67Nc-2 Pickup
5A 0.25 .. 175.00 A; ∞ 35.00 A
2102 67Nc-2 DELAY 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.00 sec 67Nc-2 Time Delay
2103 67Nc-1 PICKUP 1A 0.05 .. 35.00 A; ∞ 1.50 A 67Nc-1 Pickup
5A 0.25 .. 175.00 A; ∞ 7.50 A
2104 67Nc-1 DELAY 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.30 sec 67Nc-1 Time Delay
2105 67Nc-TOC PICKUP 1A 0.05 .. 4.00 A 1.00 A 67Nc-TOC Pickup
5A 0.25 .. 20.00 A 5.00 A
2106 67Nc-TOC T-DIAL 0.05 .. 3.20 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec 67Nc-TOC Time Dial
2107 67Nc-TOC T-DIAL 0.50 .. 15.00 ; ∞ 5.00 67Nc-TOC Time Dial
2108 67Nc-3 PICKUP 0.25 .. 35.00 A; ∞ ∞ A 67Nc-3 Pickup
2109 67Nc-3 DELAY 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.00 sec 67Nc-3 Time Delay
Information List
No. Information Type of
Informa-
tion
Comments
1730 >BLOCK CLP SP >BLOCK Cold-Load-Pickup
1731 >BLK CLP stpTim SP >BLOCK Cold-Load-Pickup stop timer
1732 >ACTIVATE CLP SP >ACTIVATE Cold-Load-Pickup
1994 CLP OFF OUT Cold-Load-Pickup switched OFF
1995 CLP BLOCKED OUT Cold-Load-Pickup is BLOCKED
1996 CLP running OUT Cold-Load-Pickup is RUNNING
1997 Dyn set. ACTIVE OUT Dynamic settings are ACTIVE
2.4.4
Functions
2.4 Dynamic Cold Load Pickup
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 111
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Single-Phase Overcurrent Protection
The single-phase overcurrent protection evaluates the current that is measured by the sensitive ΙNS- or the
normal ΙN input. Which input is used depends on the device version according to the order number.
Applications
•Plain ground fault protection at a power transformer
•Sensitive tank leakage protection.
Functional Description
The single-phase definite time overcurrent ground protection is illustrated by the tripping characteristic as
shown in Figure 2-36. The current to be measured is filtered by numerical algorithms. Because of the high
sensitivity a particularly narrow band filter is used. The current pickup thresholds and tripping times can be
set. The detected current is compared to the pickup value 50 1Ph-1 PICKUP or 50 1Ph-2 PICKUP and
reported if this is violated. After expiry of the respective delay time 50 1Ph-1 DELAY or 50 1Ph-2 DELAY,
the trip command is issued. The two elements together form a two-stage protection. The dropout value is
approximately 95% of the pickup value for currents greater than I > 0.3 · INom.
The current filter is bypassed if currents are extremely high in order to achieve a short tripping time. This
occurs automatically as soon as the instantaneous value of the current exceeds the set value of the 50 1Ph-2
PICKUP element by at least factor 2 · √2.
[ueb-einph-kennlinie-020926-rei, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-36 Two-stage characteristic of the single-phase time-overcurrent protection
The following figure shows the logic diagram of the single-phase overcurrent protection function.
2.5
2.5.1
Functions
2.5 Single-Phase Overcurrent Protection
112 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[logikdia-umz-1ph-strom-141103-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-37 Logic diagram of the single-phase time overcurrent protection
High-impedance Ground Fault Unit Protection
Application Examples
The high impedance protection concept is based on measuring the voltage across the paralleled CT's to a
common high-resistive resistor.
The CTs must be of the same design and feature at least a separate core for high-impedance protection. In
particular, they must have the same transformer ratios and approximately identical knee-point voltage.
With 7SJ80, the high-impedance principle is particularly well suited for detecting ground faults in grounded
networks at transformers, generators and shunt reactors.
Figure 2-38 shows an application example for a grounded transformer winding or a grounded motor/gener-
ator. The right-hand example depicts an ungrounded transformer winding or an ungrounded motor/generator
where the grounding of the system is assumed somewhere else.
2.5.2
Functions
2.5 Single-Phase Overcurrent Protection
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 113
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[ueb-einph-hochimpedanz-020926-rei, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-38 Ground fault protection according to the high-impedance principle
Function of the High-Impedance Principle
The high-impedance principle is explained on the basis of a grounded transformer winding.
No zero sequence current will flow during normal operation, i.e. the neutral point current is ΙSP = 0 and the
phase currents are 3 Ι0 = ΙA + ΙB + ΙC = 0.
In case of an external ground fault (left in Figure 2-39), whose fault current is supplied via the grounded
neutral point, the same current flows through the transformer neutral point and the phases. The corre-
sponding secondary currents (all current transformers have the same transformation ratio) compensate each
other; they are connected in series. Across resistor R only a small voltage is generated. It originates from the
inner resistance of the transformers and the connecting cables of the transformers. Even if any current trans-
former experiences a partial saturation, it will become low-ohmic for the period of saturation and creates a
low-ohmic shunt to the high-ohmic resistor R. Thus, the high resistance of the resistor also has a stabilizing
effect (the so-called resistance stabilization).
[ueb-einph-hochimpedanz2-020926-rei, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-39 Principle of ground fault protection according to the high-impedance principle
When a ground fault occurs in the protected zone Figure 2-39 right), there is always a neutral point current ΙSP.
The grounding conditions in the rest of the network determine how strong a zero sequence current from the
system is. A secondary current which is equal to the total fault current tries to pass through the resistor R.
Since the latter is high-resistive, a high voltage emerges immediately. Therefore, the current transformers get
saturated. The RMS voltage across the resistor approximately corresponds to the knee-point voltage of the
current transformers.
Resistance R is sized such that, even with the very lowest ground fault current to be detected, it generates a
secondary voltage, which is equal to half the saturation voltage of current transformers (see also notes on
"Dimensioning" in Subsection 2.5.4 Setting Notes).
Functions
2.5 Single-Phase Overcurrent Protection
114 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
High-impedance Protection with 7SJ80
With 7SJ80 the sensitive measuring input ΙNS or the measuring input ΙN is used for high-impedance protection.
As this is a current input, the protection detects current through the resistor instead of the voltage across the
resistor R.
Das Figure 2-40 illustrates the connection scheme. The protection device is connected in series to resistor R
and measures its current.
Varistor B limits the voltage when internal faults occur. High voltage peaks emerging with transformer satura-
tion are cut by the varistor. At the same time, voltage is smoothed without reduction of the mean value.
[sj6x-ueb-einph-hochimpedanz3-141103, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-40 Connection diagram of the ground fault differential protection according to the high-impe-
dance principle
For protection against overvoltages it is also important that the device is directly connected to the grounded
side of the current transformers so that the high voltage at the resistor can be kept away from the device.
For generators, motors and shunt reactors, the high-impedance differential protection can be used analo-
gously. All current transformers at the overvoltage side, the undervoltage side and the current transformer at
the neutral point have to be connected in parallel when using auto-transformers.
In principle, this procedure can be applied to every protected object. When applied as busbar protection, for
example, the device is connected to the parallel connection of all feeder current transformers via the resistor.
Tank Leakage Protection
Application Example
The tank leakage protection has the task to detect ground leakage — even high-ohmic — between a phase
and the frame of a power transformer. The tank must be isolated from ground. A conductor links the tank to
ground, and the current through this conductor is fed to a current input of the relay. When tank leakage
occurs, a fault current (tank leakage current) will flow through the grounding conductor to ground. This tank
leakage current is detected by the single-phase overcurrent protection as an overcurrent; an instantaneous or
delayed trip command is issued in order to disconnect all sides of the transformer.
A high-sensitivity single-phase current input is used for tank leakage protection.
2.5.3
Functions
2.5 Single-Phase Overcurrent Protection
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 115
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[sj6x-ueb-einph-kesselschut-020926-rei, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-41 Principle of tank-leakage protection
Setting Notes
General
Single-phase time overcurrent protection can be set ON or OFF at address 2701 50 1Ph.
The settings are based on the particular application.
The pickup value for 50 1Ph-2 PICKUP is set in address2703, the pickup value for 50 1Ph-1 PICKUP at
address 2706. If only one element is required, set the one not required to ∞.
A trip time delay can be set in address 2704 50 1Ph-2 DELAY for the 50-2 element and for the 50-1 element
in address 2707 50 1Ph-1 DELAY. With setting 0 s no delay takes place.
The selected times are additional time delays and do not include the operating time (measuring time, etc.) of
the elements. The delay can also be set to ∞; the corresponding element will then not trip after pickup, but
the pickup is reported.
Special notes are given in the following for the use as high-impedance unit protection and tank leakage
protection.
Application as High-impedance Protection
The application as high-impedance protection requires that neutral point current detection is possible in the
system in addition to phase current detection (see example in Figure 2-40). Furthermore, a sensitive input
transformer must be available at device input ΙNS. In this case, only the pickup value for single-phase overcur-
rent protection is set at the 7SJ80 device for the current at input ΙNS.
The entire function of high-impedance protection is, however, dependent on the interaction of current trans-
former characteristics, external resistor R and voltage across R. The following section gives information on this
topic.
Current Transformer Data for High-impedance Protection
All current transformers must have an identical transformation ratio and nearly equal knee-point voltage. This
is usually the case if they are of equal design and identical rated data. The knee-point voltage can be approxi-
mately calculated from the rated data of a CT as follows:
[ueb-einph-saetigungsspannung-021026-rei, 1, en_US]
VKVP Knee-point voltage
2.5.4
Functions
2.5 Single-Phase Overcurrent Protection
116 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
RiInternal burden of the CT
PNom Nominal power of the CT
INom Secondary nominal current of CT
ALF Rated accuracy limit factor of the CT
The nominal current, nominal power and accuracy limit factor are normally stated on the rating plate of the
current transformer, e.g.
Current transformer 800/5; 5P10; 30 VA
That means
ΙNom = 5 A (from 800/5)
ALF = 10 (from 5P10)
PNom = 30 VA
The internal burden is often stated in the test report of the current transformer. If not, it can be derived from a
DC measurement on the secondary winding.
Calculation Example:
CT 800/5; 5P10; 30 VA with Ri = 0.3 Ω
[ueb-einph-saettigungssp-beisp1-021026-rei, 1, en_US]
or
CT 800/1; 5P10; 30 VA with Ri = 5 Ω
[ueb-einph-saettigungssp-beisp2-021026-rei, 1, en_US]
Besides the CT data, the resistance of the longest connection lead between the CTs and the 7SJ80 device must
be known.
Stability with High-impedance Protection
The stability condition is based on the following simplified assumption: If there is an external fault, one of the
current transformers gets totally saturated. The other ones will continue transmitting their (partial) currents.
In theory, this is the most unfavorable case. Since, in practice, it is also the saturated transformer which
supplies current, an automatic safety margin is guaranteed.
Figure 2-42 shows a simplified equivalent circuit. CT1 and CT2 are assumed as ideal transformers with their
inner resistances Ri1 and Ri2. Ra are the resistances of the connecting cables between current transformers and
resistor R. They are multiplied by 2 as they have a forward and a return line. Ra2 is the resistance of the longest
connecting cable.
CT1 transmits current Ι1. CT2 shall be saturated. Because of saturation the transformer represents a low-resis-
tance shunt which is illustrated by a dashed short-circuit line.
R >> (2Ra2 + Ri2) is a further prerequisite..
Functions
2.5 Single-Phase Overcurrent Protection
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 117
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[ueb-einph-anordnung-020926-rei, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-42 Simplified equivalent circuit of a circulating current system for high-impedance protection
The voltage across R is then
VR = Ι1 · ( 2Ra2 + Ri2 )
It is assumed that the pickup value of the 7SJ80 corresponds to half the knee-point voltage of the current
transformers. In the balanced case results
VR = VS / 2
This results in a stability limit ΙSL, i.e. the maximum through-fault current below which the scheme remains
stable:
[ueb-einph-stabilitaetslimit-021026-rei, 1, en_US]
Calculation Example:
For the 5 A CT as above with VS = 75 V and Ri = 0.3 Ω
longest CT connection lead 22 m (24.06 yd) with 4 mm2 cross-section, this corresponds to Ra = 0.1 Ω
[ueb-einph-stabilitaetslimit-5a-021026-rei, 1, en_US]
that is 15 × rated current or 12 kA primary.
For the 1 A CT as above with VS = 350 V and Ri = 5 Ω
longest CT connection lead 107 m (117.02 yd) with 2.5 mm2 cross-section, this corresponds Ra = 0.75 Ω
[ueb-einph-stabilitaetslimit-1a-021026-rei, 1, en_US]
that is 27 × rated current or 21.6 kA primary.
Sensitivity with High-impedance Protection
The voltage present at the CT set is forwarded to the protective relay across a series resistor R as proportional
current for evaluation. The following considerations are relevant for dimensioning the resistor:
As already mentioned, it is desired that the high-impedance protection should pick up at half the knee-point
voltage of the CT's. The resistor R can calculated on this basis.
Since the device measures the current flowing through the resistor, resistor and measuring input of the device
must be connected in series. Since, furthermore, the resistance shall be high-resistance (condition: R >> 2Ra2 +
Ri2, as mentioned above), the inherent resistance of the measuring input can be neglected. The resistance is
then calculated from the pickup current Ιpu and half the knee-point voltage:
Functions
2.5 Single-Phase Overcurrent Protection
118 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[ueb-einph-widerstand-021026-rei, 1, en_US]
Calculation Example:
For the 5 A CT as above
desired pickup value Ιpu = 0.1 A (equivalent to 16 A primary)
[ueb-einph-widerstand-5a-021026-rei, 1, en_US]
For the 1 A CT as above
desired pickup valueΙpu = 0.05 A (equivalent to 40 A primary)
[ueb-einph-widerstand-1a-021026-rei, 1, en_US]
Series resistor R must be rated for a minimum permanent load Ppermanent:
[fohochimppcont5a-20120514, 1, en_US]
[fohochimppcont1a-20120514, 1, en_US]
Furthermore, series resistor R must be rated for a fault current applying for approx. 0.5 s. This time is usually
sufficient for the backup protection to clear the fault.
The thermal load of the series resistor depends on the voltage Vrms,stab applying during an internal fault. It is
calculated according to the following formulas:
[fohochimpvrmsstab5a-20120514, 1, en_US]
[fohochimpvrmsstab1a-20120514, 1, en_US]
where Ik,max,int corresponds to the maximum fault current during an internal fault.
For the 5 A current transformer 800/5 with 40 kA primary, Ιk,max,int equals 250 A secondary.
For the 1 A current transformer 800/1 with 40 kA primary Ιk,max,int 50 A secondary.
This yields a short-time load over 0.5 s for the series resistor of:
[fohochimpp-5a-20120514, 1, en_US]
Functions
2.5 Single-Phase Overcurrent Protection
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 119
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[fohochimpp-1a-20120514, 1, en_US]
Please bear in mind that when choosing a higher pickup value Ιpu, the resistance must be decreased and, in
doing so, power loss will increase significantly.
The varistor B (see following figure) must be dimensioned such that it remains high-resistive until reaching
knee-point voltage, e.g.
approx. 100 V for 5 A CT,
approx. 500 V for 1 A CT.
[sj6x-ueb-einph-hochimpedanz3-141103, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-43 Connection diagram of the ground fault differential protection according to the high-impe-
dance principle
Even with an unfavorable external circuit, the maximum voltage peaks should not exceed 2 kV for safety
reasons
If performance makes it necessary to switch several varistors in parallel, preference should by given to types
with a flat characteristic to avoid asymmetrical loading. therefore recommend the following types from
METROSIL:
600A/S1/S256 (k = 450, β = 0.25)
600A/S1/S1088 (k = 900, β = 0.25)
The pickup value (0.1 A or 0.05 A in the example) is set in address 2706 50 1Ph-1 PICKUP in the device.
The 50-2 element is not required (address 2703 50 1Ph-2 PICKUP = ∞ ).
The trip command of the protection can be delayed via address 2707 50 1Ph-1 DELAY. Normally, such
delay is set to 0.
If a higher number of CTs is connected in parallel, e.g. as busbar protection with several feeders, the magnet-
izing currents of the transformers connected in parallel cannot be neglected anymore. In this case, the
magnetizing currents at half the knee-point voltage (corresponds to the setting value) have to be summed up.
These magnetizing currents reduce the current through the resistor R. Therefore the actual pickup value will
be correspondingly higher.
Application as Tank Leakage Protection
The use as tank leakage protection requires that a sensitive input transformer is available at the device input
ΙNS. In this case, only the pickup value for single phase overcurrent protection is set at the 7SJ80 device for the
current at input ΙNS.
The tank leakage protection is a sensitive overcurrent protection which detects the leakage current between
the isolated transformer tank and ground. Its sensitivity is set in address 2706 50 1Ph-1 PICKUP. The 50-2
element is not required (address 2703 50 1Ph-2 PICKUP = ∞ ).
The trip command of the element can be delayed in address 2707 50 1Ph-1 DELAY. It is normally set to 0.
Functions
2.5 Single-Phase Overcurrent Protection
120 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Settings
The table indicates region-specific presettings. Column C (configuration) indicates the corresponding secon-
dary nominal current of the current transformer.
Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting Comments
2701 50 1Ph OFF
ON
OFF 50 1Ph
2703 50 1Ph-2 PICKUP 1A 0.001 .. 1.600 A; ∞ 0.300 A 50 1Ph-2 Pickup
5A 0.005 .. 8.000 A; ∞ 1.500 A
2704 50 1Ph-2 DELAY 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.10 sec 50 1Ph-2 Time Delay
2706 50 1Ph-1 PICKUP 1A 0.001 .. 1.600 A; ∞ 0.100 A 50 1Ph-1 Pickup
5A 0.005 .. 8.000 A; ∞ 0.500 A
2707 50 1Ph-1 DELAY 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec 50 1Ph-1 Time Delay
Information List
No. Information Type of
Informa-
tion
Comments
5951 >BLK 50 1Ph SP >BLOCK 50 1Ph
5952 >BLK 50 1Ph-1 SP >BLOCK 50 1Ph-1
5953 >BLK 50 1Ph-2 SP >BLOCK 50 1Ph-2
5961 50 1Ph OFF OUT 50 1Ph is OFF
5962 50 1Ph BLOCKED OUT 50 1Ph is BLOCKED
5963 50 1Ph ACTIVE OUT 50 1Ph is ACTIVE
5966 50 1Ph-1 BLK OUT 50 1Ph-1 is BLOCKED
5967 50 1Ph-2 BLK OUT 50 1Ph-2 is BLOCKED
5971 50 1Ph Pickup OUT 50 1Ph picked up
5972 50 1Ph TRIP OUT 50 1Ph TRIP
5974 50 1Ph-1 PU OUT 50 1Ph-1 picked up
5975 50 1Ph-1 TRIP OUT 50 1Ph-1 TRIP
5977 50 1Ph-2 PU OUT 50 1Ph-2 picked up
5979 50 1Ph-2 TRIP OUT 50 1Ph-2 TRIP
5980 50 1Ph I: VI 50 1Ph: I at pick up
2.5.5
2.5.6
Functions
2.5 Single-Phase Overcurrent Protection
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 121
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Voltage Protection 27, 59
Voltage protection has the task to protect electrical equipment against undervoltage and overvoltage. Both
operational states are abnormal as overvoltage may cause for example insulation problems or undervoltage
may cause stability problems.
There are two elements each available for overvoltage protection and undervoltage protection.
Applications
•Abnormally high voltages often occur e.g. in low loaded, long distance transmission lines, in islanded
systems when generator voltage regulation fails, or after full load rejection of a generator from the
system.
•The undervoltage protection function detects voltage collapses on transmission lines and electrical
machines and prevents inadmissible operating states and a possible loss of stability.
Measurement Principle
Connection/Measured Values
The voltages supplied to the device may correspond to the three phase-to-ground voltages VA-N, VB-N, VC-N or
the two phase-to-phase voltages (VA-B, VB-C) and the displacement voltage (ground voltage VN) or - in the case
of a single-phase connection - any phase-to-ground voltage. The connection type has been specified during
the configuration in parameter 213 VT Connect. 3ph (see Section ).
The following table indicates which voltages can be evaluated by the function. The settings for this are made
in the P.System Data 1 (see Section ). Furthermore, it is indicated to which value the threshold must be
set. All voltages are fundamental frequency values.
Table 2-8 Voltage protection, selectable voltages
Connection, threephase
(parameter213)
Selectable voltage
parameter 614/ 615
Threshold to be set as
Overvoltage
Van, Vbn, Vcn Vphph (largest phase-to-phase voltage) Phase-to-phase voltage
Vph-n ((largest phase-to-ground voltage) Phase-to-ground voltage
V1(positive sequence voltage) Positive sequence voltage calculated
from
phase-to-groundvoltage or
phase-tophase voltage / √3
V2 (negative sequence voltage) Negative sequence voltage
Vab, Vbc, VGnd
Vab, Vbc
Vab, Vbc, VSyn
Vab, Vbc, Vx
Vphph (largest phase-to-phase voltage) Leiter-Leiter-Spannung
V1(positive sequence voltage) Positive sequence voltage
V2 (negative sequence voltage) Negative sequence voltage
Vph-g, VSyn None (direct evaluation of the voltage connected to
voltage input 1)
Direct voltage value
Undervoltage
Van, Vbn, Vcn Vphph (smallest phase-to-phase voltage) Phase-to-phase voltage
Vph-n (smallest phase-to-ground voltage) Phase-to-ground voltage
V1 (positive sequence voltage) Positive sequence voltage· √3
2.6
2.6.1
Functions
2.6 Voltage Protection 27, 59
122 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Connection, threephase
(parameter213)
Selectable voltage
parameter 614/ 615
Threshold to be set as
Vab, Vbc, VGnd
Vab, Vbc
Vab, Vbc, VSyn
Vab, Vbc, Vx
Vphph (smallest phase-to-phase voltage) Phase-to-phase voltage
V1 ((positive sequence voltage) Positive sequence voltage· √3
Vph-g, VSyn None (direct evaluation of the voltage connected to
voltage input 1)
Direct voltage value
The positive and negative sequence voltages stated in the table are calculated from the phase-to-ground
voltages.
Current Criterion
Depending on the system, the primary voltage transformers are arranged either on the supply side or the load
side of the associated circuit breaker. These different arrangements lead to different behaviour of the voltage
protection function when a fault occurs. When a tripping command is issued and a circuit breaker is opened,
full voltage remains on the supply side while the load side voltage becomes zero. When voltage supply is
suppressed, undervoltage protection, for instance, will remain picked up. If pickup is to drop out, the current
can be used as an additional criterion for pickup of undervoltage protection (current supervision CS). Under-
voltage pickup can only be maintained when the undervoltage criterion satisfied and a settable minimum
current level (BkrClosed I MIN) are exceeded. Here, the largest of the three phase currents is used. When
the current decreases below the minimum current setting after the circuit breaker has opened, undervoltage
protection drops out.
i
i
NOTE
If parameter CURRENT SUPERV. is set to disabled in address 5120, the device picks up immediately
without measurement voltage and the undervoltage protection function in pickup. Apply measuring
voltage or block the voltage protection to continue with configuration. Moreover you have the option of
setting a flag via device operation for blocking the voltage protection. This initiates the reset of the pickup
and device configuration can be resumed.
Overvoltage Protection 59
Function
The overvoltage protection has two elements. In case of a high overvoltage, tripping switch off is performed
with a short-time delay, whereas in case of less severe overvoltages, the tripping is performed with a longer
time delay. When one of the adjustable settings is exceeded, the 59 element picks up and trips after an adjust-
able time delay has elapsed. The time delay is not dependent on the magnitude of the overvoltage.
The dropout ratio for the two overvoltage elements (= Vdropout value/Vpickup value) can be set.
The following figure shows the logic diagram of the overvoltage protection function.
2.6.2
Functions
2.6 Voltage Protection 27, 59
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 123
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[7sj80-ueberspgs-schutz-20061219, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-44 Logic diagram of the overvoltage protection
Undervoltage Protection 27
Function
Undervoltage protection consists of two definite time elements (27-1 PICKUP and 27-2 PICKUP). There-
fore, tripping can be time-coordinated depending on how severe voltage collapses are. Voltage thresholds and
time delays can be set individually for both elements.
The dropout ratio for the two undervoltage elements (= Vdropout value/Vpickup value) can be set.
Like the other protection functions, the undervoltage protection operates in an extended frequency range.
This ensures that the protection function is ensured even for the protection of decelerating motors, for
instance. However, the r.m.s. value of the positive voltage component is considered too small when the
frequency deviates considerably so that the device will tend to overfunction.
Figure 2-45 shows a typical voltage profile during a fault for source side connection of the voltage trans-
formers. Because full voltage is present after the circuit breaker has been opened, current supervision CS
described above is not necessary in this case. After the voltage has dropped below the pickup setting, tripping
is initiated after time delay 27-1 DELAY. As long as the voltage remains below the dropout setting, reclosing
is blocked. Only after the fault has been cleared, i.e. when the voltage increases above the dropout level, the
element drops out and allows reclosing of the circuit breaker.
2.6.3
Functions
2.6 Voltage Protection 27, 59
124 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[stoerfallverlauf-ohne-stromkriterium-260602-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-45 Typical fault profile for source side connection of the voltage transformer (without current
supervision)
Figure 2-46shows a fault profile for a load side connection of the voltage transformers. When the circuit
breaker is open, the voltage disappears (the voltage remains below the pickup setting), and current supervi-
sion is used to ensure that pickup drops out after the circuit breaker has opened (BkrClosed I MIN).
After the voltage has dropped below the pickup setting, tripping is initiated after time delay 27-1 DELAY.
When the circuit breaker opens, voltage decreases to zero and undervoltage pickup is maintained. The current
value also decreases to zero so that current criterion is reset as soon as the release threshold (BkrClosed I
MIN) is exceeded. Pickup of the protection function is also reset by the action of the AND-combination of
voltage and current. As a consequence, energization is admitted anew when the minimum command time
elapsed.
Functions
2.6 Voltage Protection 27, 59
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 125
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[stoerfallverlauf-mit-stromkriterium-260602-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-46 Typical fault profile for load side connection of the voltage transformers (with current supervi-
sion)
Upon the closing of the circuit breaker, current criterion is delayed for a short period of time. If the voltage
criterion drops out during this time period (about 60 ms), the protection function does not pick up. Therefore
no fault record is created when voltage protection is activated in a healthy system. It is important to under-
stand, however, that if a low voltage condition exists on the load after the circuit breaker is closed (unlike
Figure 2-46), the desired pickup of the element will be delayed by 60 ms.
The following figure shows the logic diagram of the undervoltage protection function.
Functions
2.6 Voltage Protection 27, 59
126 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[7sj80-unterspgs-schutz-20061219, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-47 Logic diagram of the undervoltage protection
Setting Notes
General
Voltage protection is only effective and accessible if address 150 27/59 is set to Enabled during configura-
tion of protection functions. If this function is not required, then Disabled is set.
2.6.4
Functions
2.6 Voltage Protection 27, 59
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 127
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
The voltage to be evaluated is selected in Power System Data 1 (see Chapter 2.6 Voltage Protection 27, 59,
Table 2-8).
Overvoltage protection can be turned ON or OFF, or set to Alarm Only at address 5001 FCT 59.
Undervoltage protection can be turned ON or OFF or set to Alarm Only at address 5101 FCT 27.
With the protection function ON, tripping, the clearing of a fault and fault recording are initiated when the
thresholds are exceeded and the set time delays have expired.
With setting Alarm Only no trip command is given, no fault is recorded and no immediate fault annuncia-
tion is shown on the display
Overvoltage Protection with Phase-to-phase or Phase-to-ground Voltages
The largest of the applied voltages is evaluated for the phase-to-phase or phase-to-ground overvoltage protec-
tion.
The threshold values are set in the value to be evaluated (see Chapter 2.6 Voltage Protection 27, 59,
Table 2-8).
The overvoltage protection has two elements. The pickup value of the lower threshold (address 5002 or 5003,
59-1 PICKUP, depending on the phase-to-ground or the phase-to-phase voltages, can be assigned a longer
time delay (address 5004, 59-1 DELAY) and the upper threshold element (address 5005 or 5006, 59-2
PICKUP) a shorter (address 5007, 59-2 DELAY) time delay. There are no specific procedures on how the
pickup values are set. However, as the function is mainly used to prevent high insulation damage to system
components and users, the threshold value 5002 , 5003 59-1 PICKUP lies generally between 110 % and
115 % of the nominal voltage and setting value 5005 , 5006 59-2 PICKUP at approximately 130 %.
The time delays of the overvoltage elements are entered at addresses 5004 59-1 DELAY and 5007 59-2
DELAY, and should be selected in such manner that they make allowance for brief voltage peaks that are
generated during switching operations and also enable clearance of stationary overvoltages in due time.
The choice between phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase voltage allows voltage asymmetries (e.g. caused by
a ground fault) to be taken into account (phase-to-ground) or to remain unconsidered (phase-to-phase)
during evaluation.
Overvoltage Protection - Positive Sequence System V1
In a three-phase voltage transformer connection the positive sequence system can be evaluated for the over-
voltage protection by means of configuring parameter 614 OP. QUANTITY 59 to V1. In this case, the
threshold values of the overvoltage protection must be set in parameters 5019 59-1 PICKUP V1 or 5020
59-2 PICKUP V1.
Overvoltage Protection - Negative Sequence System V2
In a three-phase transformer connection, parameter 614 OP. QUANTITY 59 can determine that the negative
sequence system V2 can be evaluated as a measured value for the overvoltage protection. The negative
sequence system detects voltage unbalance and can be used for the stabilization of the time overcurrent
protection. In backup protection of transformers or generators, the fault currents lie, in some cases, only
slightly above the load currents. In order to obtain a pickup threshold of the time overcurrent protection that
is as sensitive as possible, its stabilization via the voltage protection is necessary to avoid false tripping.
Overvoltage protection comprises two elements. Thus, with configuration of the negative system, a longer
time delay (address 5004, 59-1 DELAY) may be assigned to the lower element (address 5015, 59-1-V2
PICKUP and a shorter time delay (address 5007, 59-2 DELAY) may be assigned to the upper element
(address 5016, 59-2-V2 PICKUP). There are not clear cut procedures on how to set the pickup values
59-1-V2 PICKUP or 59-2-V2 PICKUP as they depend on the respective station configuration.
The time delays of the overvoltage elements are entered at addresses 5004 59-1 DELAY and 5007 59-2
DELAY, and should be selected in such manner that they make allowance for brief voltage peaks that are
generated during switching operations and also enable clearance of stationary overvoltages in due time.
Functions
2.6 Voltage Protection 27, 59
128 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Dropout Threshold of the Overvoltage Protection
The dropout thresholds of the 59-1 element and the 59-2 element can be configured via the dropout ratio r =
VDropout/VPickup at addresses 5017 59-1 DOUT RATIO or 5018 59-2 DOUT RATIO. The following marginal
condition applies to r:
r · (configured pickup threshold) ≤ 150 V with connection of phase-to-phase voltages and phase-to-ground
voltages or
r · (configured pickup threshold) ≤ 260 V with calculation of the measured values from the connected voltages
(e.g. phase-to-phase voltages calculated from the connected phase-to-ground voltages).
The minimum hysteresis is 0.6 V.
Undervoltage Protection - Positive Sequence System V1
The positive sequence component (V1) can be evaluated for the undervoltage protection. Especially in case of
stability problems, their acquisition is advantageous because the positive sequence system is relevant for the
limit of the stable energy transmission. Concerning the pickup values there are no specific notes on how to set
them. However, because the undervoltage protection function is primarily intended to protect induction
machines from voltage dips and to prevent stability problems, the pickup values will usually be between 60 %
and 85 % of the nominal voltage.
The threshold value is multiplied as positive sequence voltage and set to √3, thus realizing the reference to the
nominal voltage.
Undervoltage protection comprises two elements. The pickup value of the lower threshold is set at address
5110 or 5111, 27-2 PICKUP (depending on the voltage transformer connection, phase-to-ground or phase-
to-phase), while time delay is set at address 5112, 27-2 DELAY (short time delay). The pickup value of the
upper element is set at address 5102 or 5103, 27-1 PICKUP, while the time delay is set at address 5106,
27-1 DELAY (a somewhat longer time delay). Setting these elements in this way allows the undervoltage
protection function to closely follow the stability behavior of the system.
The time settings should be selected such that tripping occurs in response to voltage dips that lead to unstable
operating conditions. On the other hand, the time delay should be long enough to avoid tripping on short-
term voltage dips.
Undervoltage Protection with Phase-to-phase or Phase-to-ground Voltages
In parameter 615 OP. QUANTITY 27 you can determine for undervoltage protection in a three-phase
connection that instead of the positive-sequence system V1, the smallest of the phase-to-phase voltages
Vphph or the smallest phase-to-ground voltage Vph-n is configured as a measured quantity. The threshold
values are set in the quantity to be evaluated (see Section 2.6 Voltage Protection 27, 59, Table 2-8).
Undervoltage protection comprises two elements. The pickup value of the lower threshold is set at address
5110 or 5111, 27-2 PICKUP (depending on the voltage transformer connection, phase-to-ground or
phaseto- phase), while time delay is set at address 5112, 27-2 DELAY (short time delay). The pickup value of
the upper element is set at address 5102 or 5103, 27-1 PICKUP, while the time delay is set at address 5106,
27-1 DELAY (a somewhat longer time delay). Setting these elements in this way allows the undervoltage
protection function to closely follow the stability behavior of the system.
The time settings should be selected such that tripping occurs in response to voltage dips that lead to unstable
operating conditions. On the other hand, the time delay should be long enough to avoid tripping on short-
term voltage dips.
Dropout Threshold of the Undervoltage Protection
The dropout thresholds of the 59-1 element and the 59-2 element can be parameterized via the dropout ratio
r = Vdropout/Vpickup (5113 27-1 DOUT RATIO or 5114 27-2 DOUT RATIO). The following marginal condition
applies to r:
r · (configured pickup threshold) ≤ 130 V with connection of phase-to-phase voltages and phase-to-ground
voltages) or
r· (configured pickup threshold) ≤ 225 V with calculation of the measured values from the connected voltages
(e.g. calculated phase-to-phase voltages from the connected phase-to-ground voltages).
The minimum hysteresis is 0.6 V.
Functions
2.6 Voltage Protection 27, 59
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 129
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
i
i
NOTE
If a setting is selected such that the dropout threshold (= pickup threshold · dropout ratio) results in a
greater value than 130 V/225 V, it will be limited automatically. No error message occurs.
Current Criterion for Undervoltage Protection
The 27-1 element and the 27-2 element can be supervised by the current flow monitoring setting. If the
CURRENT SUPERV. is switched ON at address 5120 (factory setting), the release condition of the current
criterion must be fulfilled in addition to the corresponding undervoltage condition, which means that a config-
ured minimum current (BkrClosed I MIN, address 212) must be present to make sure that this protective
function can pick up. Thus it can be achieved that pickup of the undervoltage protection drops out when the
line is disconnected from voltage supply. Furthermore, this feature prevents an immediate general pickup of
the device when the device is powered-up without measurement voltage being present.
i
i
NOTE
If parameter CURRENT SUPERV.is set to disabled at address 5120, the device picks up immediately if the
measuring-circuit voltage fails and the undervoltage protection is enabled. Furthermore, configuration can
be performed by pickup of measuring-circuit voltage or blocking of the voltage protection. The latter can be
initiated via device operation in DIGSI and via communication from the control center by means of a
tagging command for blocking the voltage protection. This causes the dropout of the pickup and parame-
terization can be resumed.
Please note that the pickup threshold BkrClosed I MIN (address 212) also affects the overload protection,
the cold load pickup function and the CB maintenance.
Settings
Addresses which have an appended “A” can only be changed with DIGSI, under “Additional Settings”.
Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments
5001 FCT 59 OFF
ON
Alarm Only
OFF 59 Overvoltage Protection
5002 59-1 PICKUP 20 .. 260 V 110 V 59-1 Pickup
5003 59-1 PICKUP 20 .. 150 V 110 V 59-1 Pickup
5004 59-1 DELAY 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec 59-1 Time Delay
5005 59-2 PICKUP 20 .. 260 V 120 V 59-2 Pickup
5006 59-2 PICKUP 20 .. 150 V 120 V 59-2 Pickup
5007 59-2 DELAY 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec 59-2 Time Delay
5015 59-1 PICKUP V2 2 .. 150 V 30 V 59-1 Pickup V2
5016 59-2 PICKUP V2 2 .. 150 V 50 V 59-2 Pickup V2
5017A 59-1 DOUT RATIO 0.90 .. 0.99 0.95 59-1 Dropout Ratio
5018A 59-2 DOUT RATIO 0.90 .. 0.99 0.95 59-2 Dropout Ratio
5019 59-1 PICKUP V1 20 .. 150 V 110 V 59-1 Pickup V1
5020 59-2 PICKUP V1 20 .. 150 V 120 V 59-2 Pickup V1
5101 FCT 27 OFF
ON
Alarm Only
OFF 27 Undervoltage Protection
5102 27-1 PICKUP 10 .. 210 V 75 V 27-1 Pickup
5103 27-1 PICKUP 10 .. 120 V 45 V 27-1 Pickup
5106 27-1 DELAY 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; ∞ 1.50 sec 27-1 Time Delay
2.6.5
Functions
2.6 Voltage Protection 27, 59
130 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments
5110 27-2 PICKUP 10 .. 210 V 70 V 27-2 Pickup
5111 27-2 PICKUP 10 .. 120 V 40 V 27-2 Pickup
5112 27-2 DELAY 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec 27-2 Time Delay
5113A 27-1 DOUT RATIO 1.01 .. 3.00 1.20 27-1 Dropout Ratio
5114A 27-2 DOUT RATIO 1.01 .. 3.00 1.20 27-2 Dropout Ratio
5120A CURRENT SUPERV. OFF
ON
ON Current Supervision
Information List
No. Information Type of
Informa-
tion
Comments
234.2100 27, 59 blk IntSP 27, 59 blocked via operation
6503 >BLOCK 27 SP >BLOCK 27 undervoltage protection
6505 >27 I SUPRVSN SP >27-Switch current supervision ON
6506 >BLOCK 27-1 SP >BLOCK 27-1 Undervoltage protection
6508 >BLOCK 27-2 SP >BLOCK 27-2 Undervoltage protection
6513 >BLOCK 59 SP >BLOCK 59 overvoltage protection
6530 27 OFF OUT 27 Undervoltage protection switched OFF
6531 27 BLOCKED OUT 27 Undervoltage protection is BLOCKED
6532 27 ACTIVE OUT 27 Undervoltage protection is ACTIVE
6533 27-1 picked up OUT 27-1 Undervoltage picked up
6534 27-1 PU CS OUT 27-1 Undervoltage PICKUP w/curr. superv
6537 27-2 picked up OUT 27-2 Undervoltage picked up
6538 27-2 PU CS OUT 27-2 Undervoltage PICKUP w/curr. superv
6539 27-1 TRIP OUT 27-1 Undervoltage TRIP
6540 27-2 TRIP OUT 27-2 Undervoltage TRIP
6565 59 OFF OUT 59-Overvoltage protection switched OFF
6566 59 BLOCKED OUT 59-Overvoltage protection is BLOCKED
6567 59 ACTIVE OUT 59-Overvoltage protection is ACTIVE
6568 59-1 picked up OUT 59-1 Overvoltage V> picked up
6570 59-1 TRIP OUT 59-1 Overvoltage V> TRIP
6571 59-2 picked up OUT 59-2 Overvoltage V>> picked up
6573 59-2 TRIP OUT 59-2 Overvoltage V>> TRIP
2.6.6
Functions
2.6 Voltage Protection 27, 59
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 131
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Negative Sequence Protection 46
Negative sequence protection detects unbalanced loads on the system.
Applications
•This protection function can be used to detect interruptions, short-circuits and polarity problems in the
connections to the current transformers.
•It is also useful in detecting single-phase and two-phase faults with fault currents lower than the
maximum load currents.
Prerequisites
The unbalanced load protection becomes effective when:
at least one phase current is greater than 0.1 x ΙNom and
all phase currents are smaller than 10 x ΙNom.
Definite Time characteristic
The definite time characteristic consists of two elements. As soon as the first settable threshold 46-1 PICKUP
is reached, a pickup message is output and time element 46-1 DELAY is started. When the second element
46-2 PICKUP is started, another message is output and time element 46-2 DELAY is initiated. Once either
time delay elapses, a trip signal is initiated.
[unabhaeng-ausl_charakt-des-schieflastschutzes-260602-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-48 Definite time characteristic for negative sequence protection
Settable Dropout Times
Pickup stabilization for the definite-time tripping characteristic 46-1, 46-2 can be accomplished by means of
settable dropout times. This facility is used in power systems with possible intermittent faults. Used together
with electromechanical relays, it allows different dropout responses to be adjusted and a time grading of
numerical and electromechanical relays to be implemented.
Inverse Time characteristic
The inverse time element is dependent on the ordered device version. It operates with IEC or ANSI character-
istic tripping curves. The curves and associated formulas are given in the Technical Data. When programming
2.7
2.7.1
2.7.2
Functions
2.7 Negative Sequence Protection 46
132 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
the inverse time characteristic also definite time elements 46-2 PICKUP and 46-1 PICKUP are available
(see a foregoing paragraph).
Pickup and Tripping
The negative sequence current Ι is compared to the setting value 46-TOC PICKUP. When the negative
sequence current exceeds 1.1 times the setting value, a pickup annunciation is generated. The tripping time is
calculated from the negative sequence current according to the characteristic selected. When tripping time is
reached, a tripping command is issued. The characteristic curve is illustrated in the following Figure.
[abhaeng-ausl_charakt-des-schieflastschutzes-260602-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-49 Inverse time characteristic for negative sequence protection
Dropout for IEC Curves
The element drops out when the negative sequence current decreases to approx. 95% of the pickup setting.
The time delay resets immediately to be ready for another pickup operation.
Dropout for ANSI Curves
When using an ANSI curve it can be selected whether the dropout of the element is to occur instantaneously
or whether dropout is to be performed by means of the disk emulation mechanism. „Instantaneous“ means
that the drop out will occur when a 95 % of the pickup value is reached. For a new pickup the time counter
starts at zero.
The disk emulation evokes a dropout process (timer counter is decrementing) which begins after de-energiza-
tion. This process corresponds to the reset of a Ferraris-disk (explaining its denomination "disk emulation"). In
case several faults occur in succession, the "history" is taken into consideration due to the inertia of the
Ferraris-disk, and the time response is adapted. This ensures a proper simulation of the temperature rise of the
protected object even for extremely fluctuating unbalanced load values. Reset begins as soon as 90 % of the
setting value is reached, in accordance with the dropout curve of the selected characteristic. In the range
between the dropout value (95 % of the pickup value) and 90 % of the setting value, the incrementing and
decrementing process is in idle state.
Disk emulation offers advantages when the behavior of the negative sequence protection must be coordi-
nated with other relays in the system based on electromagnetic measuring principles.
Logic
The following figure shows the logic diagram for the negative sequence protection function. The protection
may be blocked via a binary input. This resets pickup and time elements and clears measured values.
Functions
2.7 Negative Sequence Protection 46
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 133
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
When the negative sequence protection criteria are no longer satisfied (i.e. all phase currents below 0.1 x ΙN or
at least one phase current is greater than 10 x ΙNom) all pickups issued by the negative sequence protection
function are reset.
[7sj80-schieflastschutz-20060109, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-50 Logic diagram of the unbalanced load protection
The pickup of the definite time overcurrent protection can be stabilized by the configured dropout time 4012
46 T DROP-OUT. This time is started and maintains the pickup condition if the current falls below the
threshold. Therefore, the function does not drop out at high speed. The trip command delay time continues
running. After the dropout delay time has elapsed, the pickup is reported OFF and the trip delay time is reset
unless the threshold has been exceeded again. If the threshold is exceeded again during the dropout delay
time, the time is canceled. The trip command delay time continues running. Should the threshold value be
exceeded after its expiry, the trip command is issued immediately. If the threshold value is not exceeded at
this time, there will be no reaction. If the threshold value is exceeded again after expiry of the trip-command
delay time, while the dropout delay time is still running, tripping occurs immediately.
The configured dropout times do not influence the tripping times of the inverse time elements as these
depend dynamically on the measured current value. For purposes of dropout coordination, disc emulation is
used with electro-mechanical relays.
Functions
2.7 Negative Sequence Protection 46
134 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Setting Notes
General
The function type has been specified during configuration of the protection functions (see Section
2.1.1.2 Setting Notes, address 140, 46). If only the definite time elements are desired, the address 46 should
be set to Definite Time. Selecting 46 = TOC IEC or TOC ANSI in address 140 will additionally make all
parameters available that are relevant for the inverse time characteristics. If this function is not required, then
Disabled is set.
The function can be turned ON or OFF in address 4001 FCT 46.
The default pickup settings and delay settings are generally sufficient for most applications.
Definite Time Elements
The unbalanced load protection function comprises two elements. Therefore, the upper element (address
4004 46-2 PICKUP) can be set to a short time delay 4005 46-2 DELAY) and the lower element (address
4002 46- 1 PICKUP) can be set to a somewhat longer time delay (address 4003 46-1 DELAY). This allows the
lower element to act, e.g. as an alarm, while the upper element will cut the inverse time characteristic as soon
as high inverse currents are present. If 46-2 PICKUP is set to about 60%, tripping is always performed with
the thermal characteristic. On the other hand, with more than 60% of unbalanced load, a two-phase fault can
be assumed. The delay time 46-2 DELAY must be coordinated with the system grading of phase-to-phase
faults. If power supply with current I is provided via just two phases, the following applies to the inverse
current:
[formel-i2-058-260602-kn, 1, en_US]
Examples:
When protecting feeder or cable systems, unbalanced load protection may serve to identify low magnitude
unsymmetrical faults below the pickup values of the directional and non-directional overcurrent elements.
Here, the following must be observed:
[formel-i2-058-260602-kn, 1, en_US]
A phase-to-ground fault with current Ι corresponds to the following negative sequence current:
[formel-i2-033-260602-kn, 1, en_US]
On the other hand, with more than 60% of unbalanced load, a phase-to-phase fault can be assumed. The
delay time 46-2 DELAY must be coordinated with the system grading of phase-to-phase faults.
For a power transformer, unbalanced load protection may be used as sensitive protection for low magnitude
phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase faults. In particular, this application is well suited for delta-wye trans-
formers where low side phase-to-ground faults do not generate high side zero sequence currents (e.g. vector
group Dy).
Since transformers transform symmetrical currents according to the transformation ratio "CTR", the relation-
ship between negative sequence currents and total fault current for phase-to-phase faults and phase-to-
ground faults are valid for the transformer as long as the turns ratio "CTR" is taken into consideration.
Consider a transformer with the following data:
Base Transformer Rating SNomT = 16 MVA
Primary Nominal Voltage VNom = 110 kV
(TRV = 110/20)
Secondary Nominal Voltage VNom = 20 kV
2.7.3
Functions
2.7 Negative Sequence Protection 46
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 135
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Vector Groups Dy5
High Side CT 100 A/1 A (CTΙ = 100)
The following fault currents may be detected at the low side:
If 46-1 PICKUP on the high side of the devices is set to = 0.1, then a fault current of Ι = 3 · TRV · TRΙ · 46-1
PICKUP = 3 · 110/20 · 100 · 0.1 A = 165 A for single-phase faults and √3 · TRV · TRΙ · 46-1 PICKUP = 95 A can
be detected for two-phase faults at the low side. This corresponds to 36% and 20% of the transformer nominal
current respectively. It is important to note that load current is not taken into account in this simplified
example.
As it cannot be recognized reliably on which side the thus detected fault is located, the delay time 46-1
DELAY must be coordinated with other downstream relays in the system.
Pickup Stabilization (definite-time overcurrent protection)
Pickup of the definite time elements can be stabilized by means of a configurable dropout time. This dropout
time is set in 4012 46 T DROP-OUT.
Inverse Time Tripping Curve
Several IEC and ANSI curves are available if your operational equipment requires the use of a curve-dependent
tripping characteristic. They are selected at address 4006 46 IEC CURVE or at address 4007 46 ANSI
CURVE
It must be noted that a safety factor of about 1.1 has already been included between the pickup value and the
setting value when an inverse time characteristic is selected. This means that a pickup will only occur if an
unbalanced load of about 1.1 times the setting value 46-TOC PICKUP is present (address 4008). Dropout
occurs as soon as the value falls below 95 % of the pickup value. When selecting the ANSI curve in address
401146-TOC RESET the Disk Emulation, dropout will be performed according to the dropout curve as
explained in the function description.
The associated time multiplier is specified at address 4010, 46-TOC TIMEDIAL or address 400946-TOC
TIMEDIAL.
The time multiplier can also be set to ∞. After pickup the element will then not trip. Pickup, however, will be
signaled. If the inverse time element is not required at all, address 140 46 should be set to Definite Time
during the configuration of protection functions (Section 2.1.1.2 Setting Notes).
Settings
Addresses which have an appended “A” can only be changed with DIGSI, under “Additional Settings”.
The table indicates region-specific default settings. Column C (configuration) indicates the corresponding
secondary nominal current of the current transformer.
Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting Comments
4001 FCT 46 OFF
ON
OFF 46 Negative Sequence
Protection
4002 46-1 PICKUP 1A 0.05 .. 3.00 A 0.10 A 46-1 Pickup
5A 0.25 .. 15.00 A 0.50 A
4003 46-1 DELAY 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 1.50 sec 46-1 Time Delay
4004 46-2 PICKUP 1A 0.05 .. 3.00 A 0.50 A 46-2 Pickup
5A 0.25 .. 15.00 A 2.50 A
4005 46-2 DELAY 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 1.50 sec 46-2 Time Delay
4006 46 IEC CURVE Normal Inverse
Very Inverse
Extremely Inv.
Extremely Inv. IEC Curve
2.7.4
Functions
2.7 Negative Sequence Protection 46
136 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting Comments
4007 46 ANSI CURVE Extremely Inv.
Inverse
Moderately Inv.
Very Inverse
Extremely Inv. ANSI Curve
4008 46-TOC PICKUP 1A 0.05 .. 2.00 A 0.90 A 46-TOC Pickup
5A 0.25 .. 10.00 A 4.50 A
4009 46-TOC TIMEDIAL 0.50 .. 15.00 ; ∞ 5.00 46-TOC Time Dial
4010 46-TOC TIMEDIAL 0.05 .. 3.20 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec 46-TOC Time Dial
4011 46-TOC RESET Instantaneous
Disk Emulation
Instantaneous 46-TOC Drop Out
4012A 46 T DROP-OUT 0.00 .. 60.00 sec 0.00 sec 46 Drop-Out Time Delay
Information List
No. Information Type of
Informa-
tion
Comments
5143 >BLOCK 46 SP >BLOCK 46
5151 46 OFF OUT 46 switched OFF
5152 46 BLOCKED OUT 46 is BLOCKED
5153 46 ACTIVE OUT 46 is ACTIVE
5159 46-2 picked up OUT 46-2 picked up
5165 46-1 picked up OUT 46-1 picked up
5166 46-TOC pickedup OUT 46-TOC picked up
5170 46 TRIP OUT 46 TRIP
5171 46 Dsk pickedup OUT 46 Disk emulation picked up
2.7.5
Functions
2.7 Negative Sequence Protection 46
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 137
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Frequency Protection 81 O/U
The frequency protection function detects abnormally high and low frequencies in the system or in electrical
machines. If the frequency lies outside the allowable range, appropriate actions are initiated, such as load
shedding or separating a generator from the system.
Applications
•Decrease in system frequency occurs when the system experiences an increase in the real power
demand, or when a malfunction occurs with a generator governor or automatic generation control (AGC)
system. The frequency protection function is also used for generators which (for a certain time) operate
to an island network. This is due to the fact that the reverse power protection cannot operate in case of a
drive power failure. The generator can be disconnected from the power system by means of the
frequency decrease protection.
•Increase in system frequency occurs e.g. when large blocks of load (island network) are removed from
the system, or again when a malfunction occurs with a generator governor. This entails risk of self-excita-
tion for generators feeding long lines under no-load conditions.
Functional Description
Detection of Frequency
The frequency is detected preferably from the positive sequence voltage. If this voltage is too low, the phase-
to-phase voltage VA-B at the device is used. If the amplitude of this voltage is too small, one of the other phase-
to-phase voltages is used instead.
Through the use of filters and repeated measurements, the frequency evaluation is free from harmonic influ-
ences and very accurate.
Overfrequency/Underfrequency
Frequency protection consists of four frequency elements. To make protection flexible for different power
system conditions, theses elements can be used alternatively for frequency decrease or increase separately,
and can be independently set to perform different control functions.
Operating Range
The frequency can be determined as long as in a three-phase voltage transformer connection the positive-
sequence system of the voltages, or alternatively, in a single-phase voltage transformer connection, the
respective voltage is present and of sufficient magnitude. If the measured voltage drops below a settable
value Vmin, the frequency protection is blocked because no precise frequency values can be calculated from
the signal.
Time Delays / Logic
Each frequency element has an associated settable time delay. When the time delay elapses, a trip signal is
generated. When a frequency element drops out, the tripping command is immediately terminated, but not
before the minimum command duration has elapsed.
Each of the four frequency elements can be blocked individually via binary inputs.
The following figure shows the logic diagram for the frequency protection function.
2.8
2.8.1
Functions
2.8 Frequency Protection 81 O/U
138 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[7sj6x_frequenzschutz-070906-he, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-51 Logic diagram of the frequency protection
Setting Notes
General
Frequency protection is only in effect and accessible if address 154 81 O/U is set to Enabled during configu-
ration of protective functions. If the function is not required Disabled is set. The function can be turned ON
or OFF under address 5401 FCT 81 O/U.
By setting the parameters 5421 to 5424, the function of each of the elements 81-1 PICKUP to 81-4
PICKUP is set individually as overfrequency or underfrequency protection or set to OFF, if the element is not
required.
Minimum Voltage
Address 5402 Vmin is used to set the minimum voltage. Frequency protection is blocked as soon as the
minimum voltage is undershot.
2.8.2
Functions
2.8 Frequency Protection 81 O/U
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 139
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
The threshold value has to be set as phase-to-phase quantity if the connection is three-phase. With a single-
phase phase-to-ground connection the threshold is set as phase voltage.
Pickup Values
The setting as overfrequency or underfrequency element does not depend on the parameter threshold values
of the respective element. An element can also function, for example, as an overfrequency element if its
threshold value is set below the nominal frequency and vice versa.
If frequency protection is used for load shedding purposes, the setting values depend on the actual power
system conditions. Normally, a time coordinated load shedding is required that takes into account the impor-
tance of the consumers or consumer groups.
Further application examples exist in the field of power stations. Here too, the frequency values to be set
mainly depend on the specifications of the power system / power station operator. The underfrequency
protection safeguards the power station's own demand by disconnecting it from the power system on time.
The turbo governor regulates the machine set to the nominal speed. Consequently, the station's own
demands can be continuously supplied at nominal frequency.
Under the assumption that the apparent power is reduced by the same degree, turbine-driven generators can,
as a rule, be continuously operated down to 95% of the nominal frequency. However, for inductive
consumers, the frequency reduction not only means an increased current input, but also endangers stable
operation. For this reason, only a short-term frequency reduction down to about 48 Hz (for fN = 50 Hz) or 58
Hz (for fN = 60 Hz) is permissible.
A frequency increase can, for example, occur due to a load shedding or malfunction of the speed regulation
(e.g. in an island network). In this way, the frequency increase protection can, for example, be used as over-
speed protection.
Dropout Thresholds
The dropout threshold is defined via the adjustable dropout-difference address 5415 DO differential. It
can thus be adjusted to the network conditions. The dropout difference is the absolute-value difference
between pickup threshold and dropout threshold. The default value of 0.02 Hz can usually remain. Should,
however, frequent minor frequency fluctuations be expected, this value should be increased.
Time Delays
The delay times 81-1 DELAY to 81-4 DELAY (addresses 5405, 5408, 5411 and 5414) allow the frequency
elements to be time coordinated, e.g. for load shedding equipment. The set times are additional delay times
not including the operating times (measuring time, dropout time) of the protection function.
Settings
Addresses which have an appended “A” can only be changed with DIGSI, under “Additional Settings”.
Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments
5401 FCT 81 O/U OFF
ON
OFF 81 Over/Under Frequency Protec-
tion
5402 Vmin 10 .. 150 V 65 V Minimum required voltage for
operation
5402 Vmin 20 .. 150 V 35 V Minimum required voltage for
operation
5403 81-1 PICKUP 40.00 .. 60.00 Hz 49.50 Hz 81-1 Pickup
5404 81-1 PICKUP 50.00 .. 70.00 Hz 59.50 Hz 81-1 Pickup
5405 81-1 DELAY 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; ∞ 60.00 sec 81-1 Time Delay
5406 81-2 PICKUP 40.00 .. 60.00 Hz 49.00 Hz 81-2 Pickup
5407 81-2 PICKUP 50.00 .. 70.00 Hz 59.00 Hz 81-2 Pickup
5408 81-2 DELAY 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; ∞ 30.00 sec 81-2 Time Delay
5409 81-3 PICKUP 40.00 .. 60.00 Hz 47.50 Hz 81-3 Pickup
2.8.3
Functions
2.8 Frequency Protection 81 O/U
140 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments
5410 81-3 PICKUP 50.00 .. 70.00 Hz 57.50 Hz 81-3 Pickup
5411 81-3 DELAY 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; ∞ 3.00 sec 81-3 Time delay
5412 81-4 PICKUP 40.00 .. 60.00 Hz 51.00 Hz 81-4 Pickup
5413 81-4 PICKUP 50.00 .. 70.00 Hz 61.00 Hz 81-4 Pickup
5414 81-4 DELAY 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; ∞ 30.00 sec 81-4 Time delay
5415A DO differential 0.02 .. 1.00 Hz 0.02 Hz Dropout differential
5421 FCT 81-1 O/U OFF
ON f>
ON f<
OFF 81-1 Over/Under Frequency
Protection
5422 FCT 81-2 O/U OFF
ON f>
ON f<
OFF 81-2 Over/Under Frequency
Protection
5423 FCT 81-3 O/U OFF
ON f>
ON f<
OFF 81-3 Over/Under Frequency
Protection
5424 FCT 81-4 O/U OFF
ON f>
ON f<
OFF 81-4 Over/Under Frequency
Protection
Information List
No. Information Type of
Informa-
tion
Comments
5203 >BLOCK 81O/U SP >BLOCK 81O/U
5206 >BLOCK 81-1 SP >BLOCK 81-1
5207 >BLOCK 81-2 SP >BLOCK 81-2
5208 >BLOCK 81-3 SP >BLOCK 81-3
5209 >BLOCK 81-4 SP >BLOCK 81-4
5211 81 OFF OUT 81 OFF
5212 81 BLOCKED OUT 81 BLOCKED
5213 81 ACTIVE OUT 81 ACTIVE
5214 81 Under V Blk OUT 81 Under Voltage Block
5232 81-1 picked up OUT 81-1 picked up
5233 81-2 picked up OUT 81-2 picked up
5234 81-3 picked up OUT 81-3 picked up
5235 81-4 picked up OUT 81-4 picked up
5236 81-1 TRIP OUT 81-1 TRIP
5237 81-2 TRIP OUT 81-2 TRIP
5238 81-3 TRIP OUT 81-3 TRIP
5239 81-4 TRIP OUT 81-4 TRIP
2.8.4
Functions
2.8 Frequency Protection 81 O/U
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 141
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection (27/Q)
The undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection protects the system for mains decoupling purposes. To
prevent a voltage collapse in energy systems, the generating side, e.g. a generator, must be equipped with
voltage and frequency protection devices. An undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection is required at
the supply system connection point. It detects critical power system situations and ensures that the power
generation facility is disconnected from the mains. Furthermore, it ensures that reconnection only takes place
under stable power system conditions. The associated criteria can be parameterized.
Applications
•High-voltage and extra-high voltage power systems
•Medium-voltage power systems
•Regenerative infeed types such as wind power stations, photovoltaics, cogeneration plants or hydro-
power
Functional Description
General
To detect critical power system situations, the QU protection uses the phase-to-phase voltage, the positive-
sequence current and the reactive power.
To release the reconnection, the results of voltage protection and frequency protection are additionally
analyzed on the generating side.
If the frequency and voltage values are outside the operating range, the QU protection does not work.
It can also be blocked by the fuse-failure monitor or via a binary input.
Pickup of the QU protection causes the device to pick up. Simultaneously, fault recording is activated. But trip-
ping of the QU protection does not cause the device to trip and should be routed to a separate binary output.
No other fault record is started.
The QU protection can be used for all voltage connection types that enable detection of the displacement
voltage (measured or calculated). The Appendix provides connection examples.
Signal transmission in the high-voltage power system requires the power system connection point and the
generating facility to be connected via telecommunication cables (optical fiber or copper cable). Radio links,
GPRS or satellite transmission with signal transit times <3 s can alternatively be used in medium-voltage
systems.
Protection Function
The QU protection trips under the following conditions:
•All 3 phase-to-phase voltages are below the parameterized threshold value.
•The positive-sequence current Ι1 is above the parameterized threshold value.
•The facility requires more than the set reactive power.
The pickup thresholds for undervoltage U< Pickup, the reactive power Q> Pickup and the release current
I-Release can be set.
After detection of the tripping criteria, time-delayed trip signals are sent to the circuit breaker of the power
system connection point and to the circuit breaker of the generating facility. The time delay can be set sepa-
rately for both circuit breakers. Time-graded tripping is thus possible. The tripping of the circuit breaker at the
power system connection point ultimately de-energizes the entire generating facility.
To prevent tripping of the QU protection during starting operations, parameterize and activate the inrush
current detection. The inrush blocking of the QU protection can then be activated via parameter Inrush
blk. The overcurrent protection detects the inrush. The QU protection evaluates the inrush indications of the
overcurrent protection (see Figure 2-15).
The following figure shows the logic diagram of the QU protection.
2.9
2.9.1
Functions
2.9 Undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection (27/Q)
142 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[7sj80_prot-lo-qvp, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-52 Logic diagram of the QU protection
Reconnection
The release for reconnecting the generating facility is given under the following conditions:
•All 3 phase-to-phase voltages are above the parameterized threshold value.
•The power system frequency is within the parameterized range.
•The delay time of the protection function has elapsed. The delay time is started by the first trip signal of
any stage of the voltage or frequency protection.
The release criteria for reconnection can be set. The following parameters are used:
•Threshold for the release voltage at the power system connection point
•Frequency deviation in positive and negative direction
•Reconnection release can be delayed by a settable time.
You also define whether the tripping of the circuit breaker at the power system connection point is included in
the formation of the release signal. The tripping of the protection stages of voltage and frequency protection
is always included.
The following figure shows the logic diagram of the QU protection for reconnection.
Functions
2.9 Undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection (27/Q)
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 143
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[lo-recl-rel-qvp-20120319, 2, en_US]
Figure 2-53 Logic diagram of QU protection restarting
Setting Notes
General
Configuration of the protection functions at address 155 27/Q-Protection defines whether the QU protec-
tion is Enabled or Disabled.
At address 5501 27/Q-Protection the QU protection function can be switched ON or OFF.
The release current is entered at address 5502 I-Release. The default setting is at 10 % of the rated current.
The threshold is one of the pickup criteria for tripping.
At address 5503 Inrush blk you can activate the blocking when inrush has been detected.
2.9.2
Functions
2.9 Undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection (27/Q)
144 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Pickup Values
You can set the pickup value for the reactive power stage at address 5511 Q> Pickup.
Example:
Q > 5 % of the supply system rating
VNomsec = 100 V
INomsec = 1 A
this yields the (default) setting value Q> Pickup for Q> Pickup
100 V · 1 A · √3 · 0.05 = 8.7 VAR
At address 5512 U< Pickup, you can enter the pickup value for the voltage stage.
Delays
Address 5513 Delay Gen. CB is used to set the time delay for tripping the circuit breaker of the generation
facility, e.g. at the generator.
Enter the time delay for tripping the circuit breaker at the supply system connection point at address 5514
Delay Grid CB. Always set the delay time longer than delay time Delay Gen. CB.
Close Release
At address 5521 Recl. release the close release is switched ON or OFF.
At address 5522 U> Reclose you can specify the release voltage. Set the value to approx. 95 % of the rated
voltage value (default).
Specify the delay time for releasing the generator reconnection at address 5523 T Reclose.
Furthermore, enter the admitted deviation from the rated frequency. At address 5524 Pos. f-diff enter
the frequency deviation in positive direction and at address 5525 Neg. f-diff in negative direction. If the
measured frequency is within this range, this reconnection condition is satisfied.
Address 5526 Incl. 27/Q Trip determines whether the tripping indication of the QU protection is taken
into account for the reconnection release.
Settings
Addresses which have an appended “A” can only be changed with DIGSI, under “Additional Settings”.
The table indicates region-specific default settings. Column C (configuration) indicates the corresponding
secondary nominal current of the current transformer.
Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting Comments
5501 27/Q-Protection OFF
ON
OFF 27 / Q dir. con. Protection
5502 I-Release 1A 0.02 .. 0.20 A; 0 0.10 A Current-Rel. for Trip and
Reclose
5A 0.10 .. 1.00 A; 0 0.50 A
5503 Inrush blk NO
YES
NO blocking with inrush
5504 Q> Direction Forward
Reverse
Forward Reactive power direction
5511 Q> Pickup 1A 1.70 .. 10000.00 VAR 8.70 VAR Reactive power threshold
for pickup
5A 8.50 .. 50000.00 VAR 43.50 VAR
5512 U< Pickup 10.00 .. 210.00 V 85.00 V Undervoltage threshold for
pickup
5513 Delay Gen. CB 0.00 .. 60.00 sec 0.50 sec Trip time delay generator
CB
5514 Delay Grid CB 0.00 .. 60.00 sec 1.50 sec Trip time delay grid CB
2.9.3
Functions
2.9 Undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection (27/Q)
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 145
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting Comments
5521 Recl. release OFF
ON
OFF Reclosure release
5522 U> Reclose 10.00 .. 210.00 V 95.00 V Voltage threshold for reclo-
sure rel.
5523 T Reclose 0.00 .. 3600.00 sec 0.00 sec Reclosure Delay Time
5524 Pos. f-diff 0.01 .. 5.00 Hz 0.05 Hz Pos. f-diff threshold for
reclosure rel.
5525 Neg. f-diff -5.00 .. -0.01 Hz -2.50 Hz Neg. f-diff threshold for
reclosure rel.
5526A Incl. 27/Q Trip NO
YES
NO Include 27/Q Trip for reclo-
sure rel.
Information List
No. Information Type of
Informa-
tion
Comments
6401 >27/Q Block SP >QV-Protection Blocked
6411 27/Q OFF OUT 27/Q -Protection off
6412 27/Q block OUT 27/Q -Protection blocked
6413 27/Q ACT OUT 27/Q -Protection active
6421 27/Q Gen TRIP OUT 27/Q -Protection Gen TRIP
6422 27/Q Grid TRIP OUT 27/Q -Protection Grid TRIP
6423 27/Q PICKUP OUT 27/Q-Protection PICKUP
6424 Reclosure rel. OUT Reclosure release
6425 27/Q blk.b.Inr. OUT 27/Q pickup blocked by Inrush
2.9.4
Functions
2.9 Undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection (27/Q)
146 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Thermal Overload Protection 49
The thermal overload protection is designed to prevent thermal overloads from damaging the protected
equipment. The protection function represents a thermal replica of the equipment to be protected (overload
protection with memory capability). Both the previous history of an overload and the heat loss to the environ-
ment are taken into account.
Applications
•The thermal condition particularly of generators and transformers can be monitored in this way.
Functional Description
Thermal Replica
The device calculates the overtemperature in accordance with a single-body thermal replica, based on the
following differential equation:
[thermdifferentialgleichung-260602-kn, 1, en_US]
with
ΘPresent overtemperature related to the final overtemperature at maximum allowed phase
current k · ΙNom Obj.
τth Thermal time constant of the protected object's heating
ΙPresent true r.m.s value of phase current
k k–factor indicating the maximum permissible constant phase current referred to the
nominal current of the protected object
ΙNom Obj. Nominal current of protected object
The protection function provides a thermal replica of the protected object (overload protection with memory
capability). The history of an overload is taken into consideration.
When the calculated overtemperature reaches the first settable threshold 49 Θ ALARM, an alarm annuncia-
tion is issued, e.g. to allow time for the load reduction measures to take place. When the calculated overtem-
perature reaches the second threshold, the protected equipment may be disconnected from the system. The
highest overtemperature calculated from the three phase currents is used as the criterion.
The maximum thermally permissible continuous current Ιmax is described as a multiple of the object nominal
currentΙNom Obj.:
Ιmax = k · ΙNom Obj.
In addition to the k factor (parameter 49 K-FACTOR) the TIME CONSTANT τth and the alarm temperature 49
Θ ALARM (in percent of the trip temperature ΘTRIP) must be specified.
Since the 7SJ80 does not offer a connection option for an RTD box, the current temperature Θ is always equal
to zero.
Overload protection also features a current warning element (I ALARM) in addition to the temperature
warning element. The current warning element may report an overload current prematurely, even if the calcu-
lated operating temperature has not yet attained the warning or tripping levels.
Extension of Time Constants
When using the device to protect motors, the varying thermal response at standstill or during rotation may be
correctly evaluated. When running down or at standstill, a motor without external cooling looses heat more
slowly, and a longer thermal time constant must be used for calculation. For a motor that is switched off, the
7SJ80 increases the time constant τ th by a programmable factor (kτ factor). The motor is considered to be off
2.10
2.10.1
Functions
2.10 Thermal Overload Protection 49
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 147
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
when the motor currents drop below a programmable minimum current setting BkrClosed I MIN (refer to
"Current Flow Monitoring" in Section 2.1.3 Power System Data 1). For externally-cooled motors, cables and
transformers, the Kτ-FACTOR = 1.
Blocking
The thermal memory may be reset via a binary input (
>RES 49 Image
) and the current-related overtempera-
ture value is thus reset to zero. The same is accomplished via the binary input (
>BLOCK 49 O/L
); in this case,
the entire overload protection is blocked completely, including the current warning element.
When motors must be started for emergency reasons, temperatures above the maximum permissible over-
temperatures can be allowed by blocking the trip signal via a binary input (
>EmergencyStart
). Since the
thermal replica may have exceeded the tripping temperature after initiation and dropout of the binary input,
the protection function features a programmable run-on time interval (T EMERGENCY) which is started when
the binary input drops out and continues suppressing a trip signal. Tripping via the overload protection is
suppressed until this time interval has elapsed. The binary input affects only the trip command. There is no
effect on the trip log nor does the thermal replica reset.
Behavior in Case of Power Supply Failure
Depending on the setting in address 235 ATEX100 of Power System Data 1 (see Section 2.1.3 Power System
Data 1) the value of the thermal replica is either reset to zero (ATEX100 = NO) if the power supply voltage
fails, or cyclically buffered in a non-volatile memory (ATEX100 = YES) so that it is maintained in the event of
auxiliary supply voltage failure. In the latter case, the thermal replica uses the stored value for calculation and
matches it to the operating conditions. The first option is the default setting (see /5/ Additional description for
the protection of explosion-protected motors of protection type increased safety “e”).
The following figure shows the logic diagram for the overload protection function.
Functions
2.10 Thermal Overload Protection 49
148 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[7sj80_ueberlastschutz-061116, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-54 Logic diagram of the overload protection
Setting Notes
General
Overload protection is only in effect if address 142 49 is set to No ambient temp during configuration. If
this function is not required, select Disabled.
2.10.2
Functions
2.10 Thermal Overload Protection 49
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 149
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Transformers and cable are prone to damage by overloads that last for an extended period of time. Overloads
cannot and should not be detected by fault protection. Time overcurrent protection should be set high
enough to only detect faults since these must be cleared in a short time. Short time delays, however, do
neither allow measures to discharge overloaded equipment nor do they permit to take advantage of its
(limited) overload capacity.
The 7SJ80 devices feature an overload protection function with thermal tripping characteristic adaptable to
the overload capability of the equipment being protected (overload protection with memory function).
Overload protection can be switched ON or OFF or set to Alarm Only at address 4201 FCT 49. If overload
protection is ON, tripping, trip log and fault recording is possible.
When setting Alarm Only no trip command is given, no trip log is initiated and no spontaneous fault annun-
ciation is shown on the display.
Since the 7SJ80 does not offer a connection option for an RTD box, the current temperature Θ is always equal
to zero.
The overload protection is intended to protect lines and cables against thermal overload.
i
i
NOTE
Changing the function parameters resets the thermal replica. The thermal model is frozen (kept constant),
as soon as the current exceeds the setting value 1107 I MOTOR START.
Overload Parameter k-factor
The overload protection is set in reference values. The nominal current ΙNom Obj. of the protected object (motor,
transformer, cable) is used as the basic current for overload protection. By means of the thermal consistently
permissible current Ιmax, a factor kprim can be calculated:
[formel-kfaktor-260602-kn, 1, en_US]
The thermally admissible continuous current for the equipment being protected is generally obtainable from
manufacturers specifications. For cables, the permissible continuous current is dependent on the cross-
section, insulating material, design, and the cable routing, among other things. It can be taken from pertinent
tables, or is specified by the cable manufacturer. If no specifications are available, select 1.1 times the nominal
current. There are usually no specifications for overhead lines but we can also assume an admissible overload
of 10% here.
For the 49 K-FACTOR to be set in the device the following applies (address 4202)
[fo_einstellwert-kfaktor-allg, 2, en_US]
with
Ιmax prim Permissible thermal primary current of the motor
ΙNom Obj. Nominal current of the protected object
ΙNomCT prim Nominal primary CT current
i
i
NOTE
The setting for 49 K-FACTOR (address 4202) has always to be made as a secondary value.
Example: Belted cable 10 kV, 150 mm2:
Permissible continuous current Ιmax = 322 A
Functions
2.10 Thermal Overload Protection 49
150 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Nominal current with k-factor 1.1 ΙNom Obj. = 293 A
Current Transformer 600 A/1 A
Setting value FACTOR K:
[fo_einstellwert-k-faktor_02, 1, en_US]
Time Constant τ
In lines and cables it is only the thermal time constant that is decisive for reaching the temperature rise limit.
For cable protection, the heat-gain time constant τ is determined by cable specifications and by the cable envi-
ronment. If no time-constant specification is available, it may be determined from the short-term load capa-
bility of the cable. The 1-sec current, i.e. the maximum current permissible for a one-second period of time, is
often known or available from tables. Then, the time constant may be calculated with the formula:
[einstellwert-tau-260602-kn, 1, en_US]
If the short-term load capability is given for an interval other than one second, the corresponding short-term
current is used in the above formula instead of the 1-second current, and the result is multiplied by the given
duration. For example, if the 0.5-second current rating is known:
[einstellwert-tau-05s-260602-kn, 1, en_US]
It is important to note, however, that the longer the effective duration, the less accurate the result.
Example: Cable and current transformer with the following data:
Permissible continuous current Ιmax = 500 A at Θu = 40 °C
Maximum current for 1 s Ι1s = 45 · Ιmax = 22.5 kA
Current transformer 600 A/1 A
Thus results:
[fo_faktor-k, 1, en_US]
[formel-tau-3375-260602-kn, 1, en_US]
The settings are: 49 K-FACTOR = 0.54; TIME CONSTANT = 33.75 min
Current Limitation
To ensure that the overload protection, on occurrence of high fault currents (and with small time constants),
does not result in extremely short trip times thereby perhaps affecting time grading of the fault protection, the
thermal model is frozen (kept constant) as soon as the current exceeds the threshold value 1107 I MOTOR
START.
Functions
2.10 Thermal Overload Protection 49
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 151
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Warning Elements
By setting the thermal warning element 49 Θ ALARM (address 4204), a warning message can be issued
before reaching the tripping temperature. Tripping can thus be avoided by initiating early load reduction
measures. This warning element simultaneously represents the dropout level for the trip signal. Only when
this threshold is undershot, the tripping command will be reset and the protected equipment can be switched
on again.
The thermal element level is given in % of the tripping overtemperature.
A current warning level is also available (parameter 4205 I ALARM). The setting is set as the secondary
current in A (mperes) and should be equal to or slightly less than the permissible current k · ΙNom sec . It can be
used instead of the thermal warning element by setting the thermal warning element to 100 % thus virtually
disabling it.
Dropout Time after Emergency Starting
This function is not required for protection of lines and cables. Since it is activated by a binary input message,
parameter T EMERGENCY (address 4208) is not in effect. The factory setting can be retained.
Settings
Addresses which have an appended “A” can only be changed with DIGSI, under “Additional Settings”.
The table indicates region-specific default settings. Column C (configuration) indicates the corresponding
secondary nominal current of the current transformer.
Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting Comments
4201 FCT 49 OFF
ON
Alarm Only
OFF 49 Thermal overload
protection
4202 49 K-FACTOR 0.10 .. 4.00 1.10 49 K-Factor
4203 TIME CONSTANT 1.0 .. 999.9 min 100.0 min Time Constant
4204 49 Θ ALARM 50 .. 100 % 90 % 49 Thermal Alarm Stage
4205 I ALARM 1A 0.10 .. 4.00 A 1.00 A Current Overload Alarm
Setpoint
5A 0.50 .. 20.00 A 5.00 A
4207A Kτ-FACTOR 1.0 .. 10.0 1.0 Kt-FACTOR when motor
stops
4208A T EMERGENCY 10 .. 15000 sec 100 sec Emergency time
Information List
No. Information Type of
Informa-
tion
Comments
1503 >BLOCK 49 O/L SP >BLOCK 49 Overload Protection
1507 >EmergencyStart SP >Emergency start of motors
1511 49 O / L OFF OUT 49 Overload Protection is OFF
1512 49 O/L BLOCK OUT 49 Overload Protection is BLOCKED
1513 49 O/L ACTIVE OUT 49 Overload Protection is ACTIVE
1515 49 O/L I Alarm OUT 49 Overload Current Alarm (I alarm)
1516 49 O/L Θ Alarm OUT 49 Overload Alarm! Near Thermal Trip
1517 49 Winding O/L OUT 49 Winding Overload
1521 49 Th O/L TRIP OUT 49 Thermal Overload TRIP
1580 >RES 49 Image SP >49 Reset of Thermal Overload Image
2.10.3
2.10.4
Functions
2.10 Thermal Overload Protection 49
152 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
No. Information Type of
Informa-
tion
Comments
1581 49 Image res. OUT 49 Thermal Overload Image reset
Functions
2.10 Thermal Overload Protection 49
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 153
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Monitoring Functions
The device is equipped with extensive monitoring capabilities - both for hardware and software. In addition,
the measured values are also constantly monitored for plausibility, therefore, the current transformer and
voltage transformer circuits are largely integrated into the monitoring.
Measurement Supervision
General
The device monitoring extends from the measuring inputs to the binary outputs. Monitoring checks the hard-
ware for malfunctions and abnormal conditions.
Hardware and software monitoring described in the following are enabled continuously. Settings (including
the possibility to activate and deactivate the monitoring function) refer to the monitoring of external trans-
former circuits or the measurement voltage failure detection.
Hardware Monitoring
Auxiliary and Reference Voltages
Failure of or switching off the supply voltage removes the device from operation and a message is immedi-
ately generated by a normally closed contact. Brief auxiliary voltage interruptions of less than 50 ms do not
disturb the readiness of the device (for nominal auxiliary voltage > 110 VDC).
Buffer Battery
The buffer battery, which ensures operation of the internal clock and storage of counters and messages if the
auxiliary voltage fails, is periodically checked for charge status. If it is less than an allowed minimum voltage,
then the
Fail Battery
message is issued.
Memory Components
All working memories (RAMs) are checked during startup. If a malfunction occurs then, the starting sequence
is interrupted and an LED blinks. During operation the memories are checked with the help of their checksum.
For the program memory, the cross sum is formed cyclically and compared to the stored program cross sum.
For the settings memory, the cross sum is formed cyclically and compared to the cross sum that is freshly
generated each time a setting process takes place.
If a fault occurs the processor system is restarted.
Scanning
Scanning and the synchronization between the internal buffer components are constantly monitored. If any
deviations cannot be removed by renewed synchronization, then the processor system is restarted.
Measurement Value Acquisition – Currents
The monitoring of the device-internal measured-value acquisition of the currents can be effected via the
current sum monitoring.
Up to four input currents are measured by the device. If the three phase currents and the ground current from
the current transformer neutral point are connected with the device, the sum of the four digitized currents
must be zero. This also applies in the event of a possible transformer saturation. For that reason – in order to
eliminate pickup upon transformer saturation – this function is only available in a Holmgreen-connection (see
also Section 2.1.3.2). Faults in the current circuits are recognized if
ΙF = | iA + iB + iC + iE | > Σ I THRESHOLD + Σ I FACTOR · Σ | Ι |
Σ I THRESHOLD (address 8106) and Σ I FACTOR (address 8107) are setting parameters. The component Σ
I FACTOR · Σ | Ι | takes into account the permissible current proportional ratio errors of the input transducers
2.11
2.11.1
2.11.1.1
2.11.1.2
Functions
2.11 Monitoring Functions
154 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
which are particularly prevalent during large short-circuit currents (Figure 2-55). The dropout ratio is about
97 %.
[stromsummenueberwachung-020313-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-55 Current sum monitoring
An error in the current sum results in the message
Failure Σ I
(No. 162) and blocking of the protection
function. Furthermore, a fault log is initiated for a period of 100 ms.
The monitoring can be switched off.
The monitoring is available subject to the following conditions:
•The three phase currents are connected to the device (address 251 A, B, C, (Gnd))
•The ground current of the current transformer neutral point is connected to the fourth current input (Ι4)
(Holmgreen-connection). This is communicated to the device in the Power System Data 1 via address 280
YES.
•The fourth current input is normally designed for a Ι4–transformer. In case of a sensitive transformer
type, this monitoring is not available.
•The settings CT PRIMARY (address 204) and Ignd-CT PRIM (address 217) must be the same.
•The settings CT SECONDARY (address 205) and Ignd-CT SEC (address 218) must be the same.
The following logic diagram illustrates the operational mode of the current sum monitoring.
Functions
2.11 Monitoring Functions
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 155
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[7sj6x-stromsummenueberw-20070315, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-56 Logic Diagram of the fast current sum monitoring
i
i
NOTE
If the current input IN is configured as a sensitive transformer or if the connection mode A,G2,C,G; G-
>B or A,G2,C,G; G2->B was set for the current transformers at parameter 251 CT Connect., current
sum monitoring is not possible.
AD Transformer Monitoring
The digitized sampled values are being monitored in respect of their plausibility. If the result is not plausible,
message 181
Error A/D-conv.
is issued. The protection is blocked, thus preventing unwanted operation.
Furthermore, a fault record is generated for recording of the internal fault.
Software Monitoring
Watchdog
For continuous monitoring of the program sequences, a time monitor is provided in the hardware (hardware
watchdog) that expires upon failure of the processor or an internal program, and causes a complete restart of
the processor system.
An additional software watchdog ensures that malfunctions during the processing of programs are discov-
ered. This also initiates a restart of the processor system.
If such a malfunction is not cleared by the restart, an additional restart attempt is begun. After three unsuc-
cessful restarts within a 30 second window of time, the device automatically removes itself from service and
the red “Error” LED lights up. The readiness relay drops out and indicates „device malfunction“ with its normally
closed contact.
Offset Monitoring
This monitoring function checks all ring buffer data channels for corrupt offset replication of the analog/digital
transformers and the analog input paths using offset filters. Possible offset errors are detected using DC filters,
and the associated sampled values are corrected up to a specific limit. If this limit is exceeded, an indication is
generated (191
Error Offset
) and integrated into the warning group indication (160). As increased offset
values impair the measurements, we recommend sending the device to the OEM plant for corrective action
should this indication persist.
2.11.1.3
Functions
2.11 Monitoring Functions
156 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Monitoring of the Transformer Circuits
Open circuits or short circuits in the secondary circuits of the current and voltage transformers, as well as
faults in the connections (important during commissioning!), are detected and reported by the device. The
measured quantities are periodically checked in the background for this purpose, as long as no system fault is
present.
Current Symmetry
During normal system operation, symmetry among the input currents is expected. The monitoring of the
measured values in the device checks this balance. The smallest phase current is compared to the largest
phase current. Asymmetry is detected if | Ιmin | / | Ιmax | < BAL. FACTOR I as long as Ιmax > BALANCE I
LIMIT is valid.
Thereby Ιmax is the largest of the three phase currents and Imin the smallest. The symmetry factor BAL.
FACTOR I (address 8105) represents the allowable asymmetry of the phase currents while the limit value
BALANCE I LIMIT (address 8104) is the lower limit of the operating range of this monitoring (see
Figure 2-57). Both parameters can be set. The dropout ratio is about 97 %.
This fault is signalled after settable delay time with
Fail I balance
.
[stromsymmetrieueberwachung-020313-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-57 Current symmetry monitoring
Voltage Symmetry
During normal system operation, balance among the voltages is expected. Since the phase-to-phase voltages
are insensitive to ground faults, the phase-to-phase voltages are used for balance monitoring. If the device is
connected to the phase-to-ground voltages, then the phase-to-phase voltages are calculated accordingly,
whereas, if the device is connected to phase-to-phase voltages and the displacement voltage V0, then the third
phase-to-phase voltage is calculated accordingly. From the phase-to-phase voltages, the device generates the
rectified average values and checks the balance of their absolute values. The smallest phase voltage is
compared with the largest phase voltage.
Asymmetry is recognized if
| Vmin | / | Vmax | < BAL. FACTOR V as long as | Vmax | > BALANCE V-LIMIT. Where Vmax is the highest of the
three voltages and Vmin the smallest. The symmetry factor BAL. FACTOR V (address 8103) represents the
allowable asymmetry of the conductor voltages while the limit value BALANCE V-LIMIT (address 8102) is
the lower limit of the operating range of this monitoring (see Figure 2-70). Both parameters can be set. The
dropout ratio is about 97%.
This fault is signalled after settable delay time with
Fail V balance
.
2.11.1.4
Functions
2.11 Monitoring Functions
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 157
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[spannungssymmetrieueberwachung-020313-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-58 Voltage symmetry monitoring
i
i
NOTE
If the connection mode Vph-g, VSyn was set for the voltage transformers at parameter 213 VT
Connect. 3ph, voltage symmetry monitoring is not possible.
Phase Sequence of Voltage and Current
To detect swapped phase connections in the voltage and current input circuits, the phase sequence of the
phase-to-phase measured voltages and the phase currents are checked by monitoring the sequence of same
polarity zero crossing of the voltages.
Direction measurement with normal voltages, path selection for fault location, and negative sequence detec-
tion all assume a phase sequence of "abc". Phase rotation of measurement quantities is checked by verifying
the phase sequences. For that purpose, the phase-sequence monitoring uses the phase-to-phase voltages VA2,
VB3, VC1.
Voltages: VA2 before VB3 vor VC1 and
Currents: ΙA before ΙB before ΙC.
Verification of the voltage phase rotation is done when each measured voltage is at least
|VA2|, |VB3|, |VC1| > 40 V
Verification of the current phase rotation is done when each measured current is at least:
|ΙA|, |ΙB|, |ΙC| > 0.5 ΙN.
For abnormal phase sequences, the messages
Fail Ph. Seq. V
or
Fail Ph. Seq. I
are issued, along
with the switching of this message
Fail Ph. Seq.
.
For applications in which an opposite phase sequence is expected, the protective relay should be adjusted via
a binary input or the respective parameter PHASE SEQ. (address 209). If the phase sequence is changed in
the relay, phases B and C internal to the relay are reversed, and the positive and negative sequence currents
are thereby exchanged (see also Section 2.21.2 Setting Notes). The phase-related messages, malfunction
values, and measured values are not affected by this.
Measurement Voltage Failure Detection
Requirements
The measuring voltage failure detection function - referred to as “Fuse Failure Monitor” (FFM) - only operates if
parameter 213 VT Connect. 3ph is set to Van, Vbn, Vcn or Vab, Vbc, VGnd. With all other voltage
transformer connection modes, FFM is not operative.
2.11.1.5
Functions
2.11 Monitoring Functions
158 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Purpose of the Fuse Failure Monitor
In case of a measuring voltage failure caused by a fault or a broken wire in the voltage transformer secondary
system, a zero voltage can be simulated to individual measuring loops.
The displacement voltage element of the (sensitive) ground fault detection, the directional overcurrent protec-
tion and the undervoltage protection can thereby acquire incorrect measuring results.
The blocking of this function by the FFM is configurable.
The FFM can become effective in grounded as well as in isolated systems provided that the connection mode
Van, Vbn, Vcn or Vab, Vbc, VGnd was set. Of course, the miniature circuit breaker and FFM can also be
used for the detection of a measuring voltage failure at the same time.
The displacement voltage element of the (sensitive) ground fault detection, the time overcurrent protection
ground and the undervoltage protection can thereby obtain incorrect measuring results.
Mode of Operation – Grounded System
The device is informed of the application of the FFM in a grounded system via address 5301 FUSE FAIL
MON. Solid grounded.
i
i
NOTE
On systems where the ground fault current is very small or absent (e.g. ungrounded supply transformers),
fuse failure monitoring must be disabled or set to Coil.gnd./isol..
The logic diagram on the operating mode in a grounded system is illustrated in Figure 2-59. Depending on the
configuration and MLFB, the FFM operates with measured or calculated values VN or ΙN. If zero sequence
voltage occurs without a ground fault current being registered simultaneously, then there is an asymmetrical
fault in the secondary circuit of the voltage transformer.
The displacement voltage element of the (sensitive) ground fault detection, the directional overcurrent protec-
tion (phase and ground function) and the undervoltage protection are blocked if parameter 5310 BLOCK
PROT. is set to YES.
The FFM picks up if the ground voltage VN is higher than the set limit value under address5302 FUSE FAIL
3Vo and if the ground current IN lies below the set limit value under address 5303 FUSE FAIL RESID.
Pickup occurs in accordance with the configured values. A hysteresis of 105% for the dropout is integrated for
ΙN or 95% for VN. In case of low-current asymmetrical faults in systems with week infeed, the ground current
caused by the fault could lie below the pickup threshold of the Fuse Failure Monitor. Overfunctioning of the
Fuse Failure Monitor can, however, cause the feeder protection device to underfunction since all protection
functions that use voltage signals are blocked. In order to prevent overfunctioning of the FFM, the phase
currents are also checked. If at least one phase current lies above the pickup threshold of 5303 FUSE FAIL
RESID, it can be assumed that the zero current created by a fault will equally exceed this threshold.
In order to immediately detect an existing fault after switching in, the following applies: If a ground current ΙN
is detected within 10 seconds after recognition of the Fuse Failure criterion, the protection assumes a fault
and removes the blocking by the Fuse Failure Monitor for the duration of the fault. If, on the other hand, the
voltage failure criterion is present for longer than approx. 10 s, the blocking is permanently activated. After
this time has elapsed, it can be assumed that a fuse failure has actually occurred. Only 10 s after the voltage
criterion has been removed by correction of the secondary circuit failure, will the blocking automatically reset,
thereby releasing the blocked protection functions.
The generation of the internal signal “Alarm FFM” for the operation in isolated systems is shown in
Figure 2-60.
Functions
2.11 Monitoring Functions
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 159
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[7sj80-fuse-failure-monitor-20061215, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-59 Logic diagram of the Fuse Failure Monitor for grounded networks only
Mode of Operation – Isolated System and 3-phase Fuse Failure
The FFM can also function in isolated and compensated (grounded) systems where only low ground currents
are expected. This is indicated to the device via address 5301 FUSE FAIL MON..
The logic diagram on the functioning in an isolated system and for 3-phase fuse failure is shown in
Figure 2-60. The following is a description of the principles for 1-phase, 2-phase and 3-phase faults in a secon-
dary voltage transformer system. If this part of the FFM logic picks up, the internal signal “Alarm FFM” is gener-
ated. The processing of this signal is shown in Figure 2-59.
i
i
NOTE
In isolated systems, only the following logic is used.
Functions
2.11 Monitoring Functions
160 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[7sj80-ffm-messspg-ausfall-20120611, 2, en_US]
Figure 2-60 Logic diagram of the Fuse Failure Monitor for isolated and grounded systems
Single- and Two-phase Failures in Voltage Transformer Circuits
The measuring voltage failure detection is based on the fact that a significant negative sequence system is
formed in the voltage during single- or two-phase voltage failure, however without influencing the current.
This enables a clear distinction from asymmetries impressed by the power system. If the negative sequence
system is related to the current positive sequence system, the following rules apply to the Fault-free Case:
[u2-u1-fehlerfreier-fall-020828-ho, 1, en_US]
If a fault occurs in the voltage transformer secondary system, the following rules apply to the Single-phase
Failure:
Functions
2.11 Monitoring Functions
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 161
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[u2-u1-einpoliger-ausfall-020828-ho, 1, en_US]
If a fault occurs in the voltage transformer secondary system, the following rules apply to the Two-phase
Failure:
[u2-u1-zweipoliger-ausfall-020828-ho, 1, en_US]
In case of a failure of one or two phases of the primary system, the current also shows a negative sequence
system of 0.5 or 1. Consequently, the voltage monitoring does not respond since no voltage transformer fault
can be present. In order to avoid occurrence of an overfunctioning of the measuring voltage failure detection
due to inaccuracy, the function is blocked below a minimum threshold of the positive sequence systems of
voltage (V1 < 0.1 VNom) and current (Ι1 < 0.1 ΙNom).
If the absolute values of the positive or negative sequence voltage are below 20 % of VNom /√3, the 1-pole or 2-
pole FFM detection is blocked.
Three-phase Failures in Voltage Transformer Circuits
A 3-phase failure in the voltage transformer secondary system cannot be detected via the positive- and nega-
tive- sequence system as described above. The monitoring of the progress of current and voltage over time is
required here. If a voltage dip to almost zero occurs (or if the voltage is zero), and the current remains
unchanged, a 3-phase failure in the voltage transformer secondary system can be concluded. The jump detec-
tion is used for this purpose. The sensitivity of the jump detection for current can be increased via parameter
FFM Idiff (3ph).
Broken Wire Monitoring of Voltage Transformer Circuits
Requirements
This function is only available in device version “World” or “Chinese” Ordering Information Pos. 10 = B or K), as
it is only used in certain regions.
Furthermore, the measurement of all three phase-to-ground voltages (Van, Vbn, Vcn) is a requirement.
If only two phase-to-phase voltages were measured, it would not be possible to evaluate two of the required
criteria.
Task
The “Broken Wire” monitoring function monitors the voltage transformer circuits of the secondary system with
regard to failure. One distinguishes between single-phase, two-phase and three-phase failures.
Mode of Operation / Logic
All three phase-to-ground voltages, the displacement voltage and the three phase currents are measured. The
required values are calculated for the respective criteria and eventually a decision is made. The resulting alarm
message may be delayed. A blocking of the protection functions is however not effected. This is done by the
measuring voltage failure detection.
The “Broken Wire” monitoring is also active during a fault. The function may be enabled or disabled.
The following logic diagram shows how “Broken Wire” monitoring functions.
2.11.1.6
Functions
2.11 Monitoring Functions
162 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[logik-broken-wire-070502-st, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-61 Logic diagram for broken wire monitoring
Setting Notes
Measured Value Monitoring
The sensitivity of measured value monitor can be modified. Default values which are sufficient in most cases
are preset. If especially high operating asymmetries in the currents and/or voltages are to be expected during
operation, or if it becomes apparent during operation that certain monitoring functions activate sporadically,
then the setting should be less sensitive.
Address 8102 BALANCE V-LIMIT determines the limit voltage (phase-to-phase) above which the voltage
symmetry monitor is effective. Address 8103 BAL. FACTOR V is the associated symmetry factor; that is, the
slope of the symmetry characteristic curve. In address 8110 T BAL. V LIMIT you set the delay time of fault
message no. 167
Fail V balance
.
Address 8104 BALANCE I LIMIT determines the limit current above which the current symmetry monitor is
effective. Address 8105 BAL. FACTOR I is the associated symmetry factor; that is, the slope of the
symmetry characteristic curve. In address 8111 T BAL. I LIMIT you set the delay time for fault message
no. 163
Fail I balance
.
2.11.1.7
Functions
2.11 Monitoring Functions
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 163
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Address 8106 Σ I THRESHOLD determines the limit current above which the current sum monitoring is acti-
vated (absolute portion, only relative to ΙNom). The relative portion (relative to the maximum conductor
current) for activating the current sum monitor is set at address 8107 Σ I FACTOR.
i
i
NOTE
Current sum monitoring can operate properly only when the residual current of the protected line is fed to
the fourth current input (ΙN) of the relay (see Power System Data 1). Furthermore, the fourth current input
(ΙN) may not be sensitive.
i
i
NOTE
The connections of the ground paths and their adaption factors were set when configuring the general
Power System Data. These settings must be correct for the measured values monitoring to function prop-
erly.
Measured value monitoring can be set to ON or OFF at address 8101 MEASURE. SUPERV.
Fuse Failure Monitor (FFM)
Via address 5301 FUSE FAIL MON. you select under which system conditions the FFM works. Depending on
that, make the required settings in the grounded system via the parameters 5302, 5303 and 5308. In a
grounded/isolated system, only the parameter 5308 is relevant.
The settings for the fuse failure monitor must be selected in such manner that reliable activation occurs if a
phase voltage fails, but that false activation does not occur during ground faults in a grounded network.
Address 5303 FUSE FAIL RESID must be set as sensitive as required (with ground faults, below the smallest
fault current).
The FFM picks up if the ground voltage VN is higher than the set limit value under address 5302 FUSE FAIL
3Vo and if the ground current IN lies below the set limit value under address 5303 FUSE FAIL RESID.
In order to detect a three-phase failure, the progress in time of current and voltage is monitored. If the voltage
sinks below the threshold value without a change in the current value, a three-phase failure is detected. This
threshold value of the current element must be set under address 5308 FFM Idiff (3ph). The threshold value
should be identical with the definite time overcurrent protection.
Under address 5310 BLOCK PROT. it can be determined whether the protection functions should be blocked
upon pickup by the FFM.
i
i
NOTE
The setting under address 5310 BLOCK PROT. has no effect on the flexible protection functions. A sepa-
rate blocking can be selected for that purpose.
The function may be disabled in address 5301 FUSE FAIL MON., e.g. when performing asymmetrical tests.
Settings
Addresses which have an appended “A” can only be changed with DIGSI, under “Additional Settings”.
The table indicates region-specific default settings. Column C (configuration) indicates the corresponding
secondary nominal current of the current transformer.
Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting Comments
5201 VT BROKEN WIRE ON
OFF
OFF VT broken wire supervision
5202 Σ V> 1.0 .. 100.0 V 8.0 V Threshold voltage sum
5203 Vph-ph max< 1.0 .. 100.0 V 16.0 V Maximum phase to phase
voltage
2.11.1.8
Functions
2.11 Monitoring Functions
164 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting Comments
5204 Vph-ph min< 1.0 .. 100.0 V 16.0 V Minimum phase to phase
voltage
5205 Vph-ph max-min> 10.0 .. 200.0 V 16.0 V Symmetry phase to phase
voltages
5206 I min> 1A 0.04 .. 1.00 A 0.04 A Minimum line current
5A 0.20 .. 5.00 A 0.20 A
5208 T DELAY ALARM 0.00 .. 32.00 sec 1.25 sec Alarm delay time
5301 FUSE FAIL MON. OFF
Solid grounded
Coil.gnd./isol.
OFF Fuse Fail Monitor
5302 FUSE FAIL 3Vo 10 .. 100 V 30 V Zero Sequence Voltage
5303 FUSE FAIL RESID 1A 0.10 .. 1.00 A 0.10 A Residual Current
5A 0.50 .. 5.00 A 0.50 A
5308A FFM Idiff (3ph) 1A 0.05 .. 1.00 A 0.10 A Differential Current
Threshold (3phase)
5A 0.25 .. 5.00 A 0.50 A
5310 BLOCK PROT. NO
YES
YES Block protection by FFM
8101 MEASURE. SUPERV OFF
ON
ON Measurement Supervision
8102 BALANCE V-LIMIT 10 .. 100 V 50 V Voltage Threshold for
Balance Monitoring
8103 BAL. FACTOR V 0.58 .. 0.90 0.75 Balance Factor for Voltage
Monitor
8104 BALANCE I LIMIT 1A 0.10 .. 1.00 A 0.50 A Current Threshold for
Balance Monitoring
5A 0.50 .. 5.00 A 2.50 A
8105 BAL. FACTOR I 0.10 .. 0.90 0.50 Balance Factor for Current
Monitor
8106 Σ I THRESHOLD 1A 0.05 .. 2.00 A; ∞ 0.10 A Summated Current Moni-
toring Threshold
5A 0.25 .. 10.00 A; ∞ 0.50 A
8107 Σ I FACTOR 0.00 .. 0.95 0.10 Summated Current Moni-
toring Factor
8109 FAST Σ i MONIT OFF
ON
ON Fast Summated Current
Monitoring
8110A T BAL. V LIMIT 0 .. 100 sec 5 sec T Balance Factor for
Voltage Monitor
8111A T BAL. I LIMIT 0 .. 100 sec 5 sec T Current Balance Monitor
Information List
No. Information Type of
Informa-
tion
Comments
161 Fail I Superv. OUT Failure: General Current Supervision
162 Failure Σ I OUT Failure: Current Summation
163 Fail I balance OUT Failure: Current Balance
167 Fail V balance OUT Failure: Voltage Balance
169 VT FuseFail>10s OUT VT Fuse Failure (alarm >10s)
170 VT FuseFail OUT VT Fuse Failure (alarm instantaneous)
171 Fail Ph. Seq. OUT Failure: Phase Sequence
2.11.1.9
Functions
2.11 Monitoring Functions
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 165
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
No. Information Type of
Informa-
tion
Comments
175 Fail Ph. Seq. I OUT Failure: Phase Sequence Current
176 Fail Ph. Seq. V OUT Failure: Phase Sequence Voltage
197 MeasSup OFF OUT Measurement Supervision is switched OFF
253 VT brk. wire OUT Failure VT circuit: broken wire
255 Fail VT circuit OUT Failure VT circuit
256 VT b.w. 1 pole OUT Failure VT circuit: 1 pole broken wire
257 VT b.w. 2 pole OUT Failure VT circuit: 2 pole broken wire
258 VT b.w. 3 pole OUT Failure VT circuit: 3 pole broken wire
6509 >FAIL:FEEDER VT SP >Failure: Feeder VT
6510 >FAIL: BUS VT SP >Failure: Busbar VT
Trip Circuit Supervision 74TC
Devices 7SJ80 are equipped with an integrated trip circuit supervision. Depending on the number of available
binary inputs (not connected to a common potential), supervision with one or two binary inputs can be
selected. If the allocation of the required binary inputs does not match the selected supervision type, then a
message to this effect is generated (
74TC ProgFail
).
Applications
•When using two binary inputs, malfunctions in the trip circuit can be detected under all circuit breaker
conditions.
•When only one binary input is used, malfunctions in the circuit breaker itself cannot be detected.
Prerequisites
A requirement for the use of trip circuit supervision is that the control voltage for the circuit breaker is at least
twice the voltage drop across the binary input (VCt > 2 · VBImin).
Since at least 19 V are needed for the binary input, the supervision can only be used with a system control
voltage of over 38 V.
Functional Description
Supervision with Two Binary Inputs
When using two binary inputs, these are connected according to Figure 2-62, parallel to the associated trip
contact on one side, and parallel to the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts on the other.
2.11.2
2.11.2.1
Functions
2.11 Monitoring Functions
166 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[prinzip-ausloesekreisueberwachung-2-binein-150502-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-62 Principle of the trip circuit supervision with two binary inputs
Supervision with two binary inputs not only detects interruptions in the trip circuit and loss of control voltage,
it also supervises the response of the circuit breaker using the position of the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts.
Depending on the conditions of the trip contact and the circuit breaker, the binary inputs are activated (logical
condition "H" in Table 2-9), or not activated (logical condition "L").
In healthy trip circuits the condition that both binary inputs are not actuated (”L") is only possible during a
short transition period (trip contact is closed but the circuit breaker has not yet opened). A continuous state of
this condition is only possible when the trip circuit has been interrupted, a short-circuit exists in the trip circuit,
a loss of battery voltage occurs, or malfunctions occur with the circuit breaker mechanism. Therefore, it is
used as supervision criterion.
Table 2-9 Condition table for binary inputs, depending on RTC and CB position
No. Trip contact Circuit breaker 52a Contact 52b Contact BI 1 BI 2
1 Open Closed Closed Open H L
2 Open Open Open Closed H H
3 Closed Closed Closed Open L L
4 Closed Open Open Closed L H
The conditions of the two binary inputs are checked periodically. A check takes place about every 600 ms. If
three consecutive conditional checks detect an abnormality (after 1.8 s), an annunciation is reported (see
Figure 2-63). The repeated measurements determine the delay of the alarm message and avoid that an alarm
is output during short transition periods. After the malfunction in the trip circuit is cleared, the fault annuncia-
tion is reset automatically after the same time period.
Functions
2.11 Monitoring Functions
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 167
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[7sj6x_ausloesekreis_2_binaerein-150502-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-63 Logic diagram of the trip circuit supervision with two binary inputs
Supervision with One Binary Input
The binary input is connected according to the following figure in parallel with the associated trip contact of
the protection relay. The circuit breaker auxiliary contact is bridged with a bypass resistor R.
[prinzip-ausloesekreisueberwachung-1-binein-150502-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-64 Trip circuit supervision with one binary input
During normal operation, the binary input is activated (logical condition "H") when the trip contact is open and
the trip circuit is intact, because the monitoring circuit is closed by either the 52a circuit breaker auxiliary
contact (if the circuit breaker is closed) or through the bypass resistor R by the 52b circuit breaker auxiliary
contact. Only as long as the trip contact is closed, the binary input is short circuited and thereby deactivated
(logical condition "L").
If the binary input is continuously deactivated during operation, this leads to the conclusion that there is an
interruption in the trip circuit or loss of control voltage.
As the trip circuit supervision does not operate during system faults, the closed trip contact does not lead to a
fault message. If, however, tripping contacts from other devices operate in parallel with the trip circuit, then
the fault message must be delayed (see also Figure 2-65). The delay time can be set via parameter 8202
Alarm Delay. A message is only released after expiry of this time. After clearance of the fault in the trip
circuit, the fault message is automatically reset.
[7sj6x_ausloesekreis_1_binaerein-050906-he, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-65 Logic diagram of trip circuit supervision with one binary input
Functions
2.11 Monitoring Functions
168 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
The following figure shows the logic diagram for the message that can be generated by the trip circuit
monitor, depending on the control settings and binary inputs.
[7sj6x_ausloesekreis_meldelogik-150502-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-66 Message logic for trip circuit supervision
Setting Notes
General
The function is only effective and accessible if address 182 (Section 2.1.1.2 Setting Notes) was set to either 2
Binary Inputs or 1 Binary Input during configuration, the appropriate number of binary inputs has
been configured accordingly for this purpose and the function FCT 74TC is ON at address 8201. If the alloca-
tion of the required binary inputs does not match the selected supervision type, a message to this effect is
generated (
74TC ProgFail
). If the trip circuit monitor is not to be used at all, then Disabled is set at
address 182.
In order to ensure that the longest possible duration of a trip command can be reliably bridged, and an indica-
tion is generated in case of an actual fault in the trip circuit, the indication regarding a trip circuit interruption
is delayed. The time delay is set under address 8202 Alarm Delay.
Supervision with One Binary Input
Note: When using only one binary input (BI) for the trip circuit monitor, malfunctions, such as interruption of
the trip circuit or loss of battery voltage are detected in general, but trip circuit failures while a trip command
is active cannot be detected. Therefore, the measurement must take place over a period of time that bridges
the longest possible duration of a closed trip contact. This is ensured by the fixed number of measurement
repetitions and the time between the state checks.
When using only one binary input, a resistor R is inserted into the circuit on the system side, instead of the
missing second binary input. Through appropriate sizing of the resistor and depending on the system condi-
tions, a lower control voltage is mostly sufficient.
Information for dimensioning resistor R is given in the Chapter "Installation and Commissioning" under Config-
uration Notes in the Section "Trip Circuit Supervision".
Settings
Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments
8201 FCT 74TC ON
OFF
ON 74TC TRIP Circuit Supervision
2.11.2.2
2.11.2.3
Functions
2.11 Monitoring Functions
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 169
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments
8202 Alarm Delay 1 .. 30 sec 2 sec Delay Time for alarm
Information List
No. Information Type of
Informa-
tion
Comments
6851 >BLOCK 74TC SP >BLOCK 74TC
6852 >74TC trip rel. SP >74TC Trip circuit superv.: trip relay
6853 >74TC brk rel. SP >74TC Trip circuit superv.: bkr relay
6861 74TC OFF OUT 74TC Trip circuit supervision OFF
6862 74TC BLOCKED OUT 74TC Trip circuit supervision is BLOCKED
6863 74TC ACTIVE OUT 74TC Trip circuit supervision is ACTIVE
6864 74TC ProgFail OUT 74TC blocked. Bin. input is not set
6865 74TC Trip cir. OUT 74TC Failure Trip Circuit
Malfunction Responses of the Monitoring Functions
In the following malfunction responses of monitoring equipment are clearly listed.
Description
Malfunction Responses
Depending on the type of malfunction discovered, an annunciation is sent, a restart of the processor system is
initiated, or the device is taken out of service. After three unsuccessful restart attempts, the device is taken out
of service. The operational readiness NC contact operates to indicate the device is malfunctioning. Also, the
red LED ”ERROR" lights up on the front cover, if the internal auxiliary voltage is present, and the green ”RUN"
LED goes out. If the internal auxiliary voltage fails, all LEDs are dark. Table 2-10 provides a summary of the
monitoring functions and the malfunction responses of the relay.
Table 2-10 Summary of malfunction responses by the protection relay
Monitoring Possible Causes Malfunction
Response
Message (No.) Output
AC/DC supply voltage loss External
(Nominal voltage)
internal (power
supply)
Device shutdown All LEDs dark DOK2) drops
out
Buffer battery Internal (buffer
battery)
Message
Fail Battery
(177)
Hardware watchdog Internal
(processor failure)
Device shutdown1) LED "ERROR" DOK2) drops
out
Software watchdog Internal
(processor failure)
Restart attempt 1) LED "ERROR" DOK2) drops
out
Working memory ROM Internal (hardware) Relay aborts restart,
device shutdown
LED blinkt DOK2) drops
out
Program memory RAM Internal (hardware) During boot sequence LED "ERROR" DOK2) drops
out
Detection during oper-
ation:
Restart attempt1)
LED "ERROR"
2.11.2.4
2.11.3
2.11.3.1
Functions
2.11 Monitoring Functions
170 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Monitoring Possible Causes Malfunction
Response
Message (No.) Output
Settings memory Internal (hardware) Restart attempt 1) LED "ERROR" DOK2) drops
out
Sampling frequency Internal (hardware) Device shutdown LED "ERROR" DOK2) drops
out
Measured value acquisition External (hardware) Blocking by the protec-
tion function
Error A/D-conv.
(181),
LED "ERROR"
DOK2) drops
out
Error in the I/O-board Internal (hardware) Device shutdown
I/O-Board error
(178),
LED "ERROR"
DOK2) drops
out
Offset monitoring Internal (hardware) Device shutdown
Error Offset
(191) DOK2) drops
out
Current sum Internal
(measured value
acquisition)
Device shutdown
Failure Σ I
(162) DOK2) drops
out
Current symmetry External (power
system or current
transformer)
Message
Fail I balance
(163)
As allocated
Voltage symmetry External (power
system or voltage
transformer)
Message
Fail V balance
(167)
As allocated
Voltage phase sequence External (power
system or connec-
tion)
Message
Fail Ph. Seq. V
176)
As allocated
Current phase sequence External (power
system or connec-
tion)
Message
Fail Ph. Seq. I
(175)
As allocated
Fuse Failure Monitor External
(voltage transformer)
Message
VT FuseFail>10s
(169)
VT FuseFail
(170)
As allocated
Trip circuit monitoring External (trip circuit
or control voltage)
Message
74TC Trip cir.
(6865)
As allocated
Secondary voltage transformer
circuit monitoring
External (voltage
transformer circuit
interruption)
Message
VT brk. wire
(253) As allocated
Calibration data fault Internal (hardware) Message
Alarm NO calibr
(193)
As allocated
1) After three unsuccessful restart attempts, the device is shut down.
2) DOK = "Device Okay" = Ready for service relay drops off, protection and control functions are blocked.
Group Alarms
Certain messages of the monitoring functions are already combined to group alarms. A listing of the group
alarms and their composition is given in the Appendix F.4 Group Alarms. In this case, it must be noted that
message 160
Alarm Sum Event
is only issued when the measured value monitoring functions (8101
MEASURE. SUPERV) are activated.
Functions
2.11 Monitoring Functions
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 171
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Ground Fault Protection 64, 67N(s), 50N(s), 51N(s)
Depending on the variant, the fourth current input of the multi-functional protection relays Depending on the
variant, the fourth current input of the multi-functional protection relays 7SJ62/64 is equipped either with a
sensitive input transformer or a standard transformer for 1/5 A. is equipped either with a sensitive input trans-
former or a standard transformer for 1/5 A.
In the first case, the protective function is designed for ground fault detection in isolated or compensated
systems due to its high sensitivity. It is not really suited for ground fault detection with large ground currents
since the linear range is transcended at about 1.6 A at the sensitive ground fault detection relay terminals.
If the relay is equipped with a standard transformer for 1/5 A currents, large currents can also be detected
correctly.
This function can operate in two modes. The standard procedure, the “cos-φ– / sin-φ measurement”, evaluates
the part of the ground current perpendicular to the settable directional characteristic.
The second procedure, the “U0/I0-φ measurement”, calculates the angle between ground current and
displacement voltage. For this procedure, two different directional characteristics can be set.
Applications
•Sensitive ground fault detection may be used in isolated or compensated systems to detect ground faults,
to determine phases affected by ground faults, and to specify the direction of ground faults.
•In solidly or low-resistance grounded systems, sensitive ground fault detection is used to detect high
impedance ground faults.
•This function can also be used as supplementary ground fault protection.
Ground Fault Detection for cos-ϕ / sin-ϕ Measurement (Standard Method)
Voltage Element
The voltage element relies on a pickup initiated by the displacement voltage V0 or 3 · V0. Additionally, the
faulty phase is determined. The displacement voltage V0 can be directly applied to the device, or the summa-
tion voltage 3 · V0 can be calculated according to the connection type of the voltage transformer (see also
Parameter 213 VT Connect. 3ph in Section 2.1.3 Power System Data 1). When setting Van, Vbn, Vcn,
the calculation of the summation voltage 3 · V0 is based on the three phase-to–ground voltages. The three
voltage inputs must therefore be connected to the voltage transformers in a grounded-wye configuration.
When setting Vab, Vbc, VGnd, the three phase-to-ground voltages of both connected phase-to-phase
voltages and the connected displacement voltage are calculated. If the device is only provided with phase-to-
phase voltages, it is not possible to calculate a displacement voltage from them. In this case the direction
cannot be determined.
If the displacement voltage is calculated, then:
3 · V0 = VA + VB + VC
If the displacement voltage is directly applied to the device, then V0 is the voltage at the device terminals. It is
not affected by parameter Vph / Vdelta (address 206).
The displacement voltage is used both to detect a ground fault and to determine direction. When the voltage
element picks up, a preset time delay must elapse before detection of the displacement voltage is reported to
be able to record stable measurement quantities. The time delay can be configured (T-DELAY Pickup) and
its factory setting is 1 s.
Pickup performed by the displacement voltage can be delayed (64-1 DELAY) for tripping.
It is important to note that the total tripping time then consists of the displacement voltage measurement
time (about 50 ms) plus the pickup time delay T-DELAY Pickup Pickup plus the tripping delay 64-1
DELAY.
After the voltage element picks up due to detection of a displacement voltage, the grounded phase is identi-
fied, if possible. For this purpose, the individual phase-to-ground voltages are measured or calculated, irre-
spective of the connection type of the voltage transformers. If the voltage magnitude for any given phase falls
2.12
2.12.1
Functions
2.12 Ground Fault Protection 64, 67N(s), 50N(s), 51N(s)
172 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
below the set threshold VPH MIN, that phase is detected as the grounded phase as long as the remaining
phase-to- ground voltages exceed the set threshold VPH MAX.
[7sj6x_erdschlussbehaftete_phase-150502-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-67 Determination of Grounded Phase
Current Elements
The current elements for ground faults operate with the magnitudes of the ground current. It is sensible to
employ them only where the magnitude of the ground current can be used to specify the ground fault. This
may be the case on grounded systems (solid or low-resistance) or on electrical machines which are directly
connected to the busbar of an isolated power system, when in case of a network ground fault the machine
supplies only a negligible ground fault current across the measurement location, which must be situated
between the machine terminals and the network, whereas in case of a machine ground fault the higher
ground fault current produced by the total network is available. Ground current protection is mostly used as
backup protection for high resistance ground faults in solid or low resistance grounded systems when the
main fault protection does not pickup.
For ground current detection,a two-element current/time characteristic can be set. Analogeous to the time
overcurrent protection, the high-set current stage is designated as 50Ns-2 PICKUP and 50Ns-2 DELAY and
is provided with a definite time characteristic. The overcurrent element may be operated with either a definite
time delay (50Ns-1 PICKUP and 50Ns-1 DELAY) or with a user-defined Curve (51Ns PICKUP and
51NsTIME DIAL). The characteristics of these current elements can be configured. Each of these elements
may be directional or non-directional.
The pickup of the definite time overcurrent protection can be stabilized by the configured dropout delay time
(address 3121 50Ns T DROP-OUT).
The dropout delay only works if the current stage is operated independently of the voltage stage. Parameter
3130 PU CRITERIA is set to Vgnd OR INs.
Determination of Direction
When determining the sensitive ground fault direction it is not the current value that is crucial, but the part of
the current which is perpendicular to a settable directional characteristic (axis of symmetry). As a prerequisite
for determining the direction, the displacement voltage V0 must be exceeded as well as a configurable current
part influencing the direction (active or reactive component).
The following figure illustrates an example using a complex vector diagram in which the displacement voltage
V0 is the reference magnitude of the real axis. The active part 3Ι0real of current 3Ι0 is calculated with reference
Functions
2.12 Ground Fault Protection 64, 67N(s), 50N(s), 51N(s)
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 173
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
to the displacement voltage V0 and compared with setting value RELEASE DIRECT.. The example is there-
fore suitable for ground fault direction in resonant grounded systems where quantity 3Ι0 · cos ϕ is relevant.
The directional limit lines are perpendicular to axis 3Ι0real.
[7sj6-richtungskennlinie-bei-cos-messung-101210, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-68 Directional characteristic for cos–ϕ–measurement
The directional limit lines may be rotated by a correction angle (address PHI CORRECTION) up to ± 45°.
Therefore, in grounded systems it is possible e.g. to increase sensitivity in the resistive-inductive range with a
rotation of –45°, or in case of electric machines connected to the busbar of an ungrounded power system in
the resistive- capacitive range with a rotation of +45° (see the following Figure). Furthermore the directional
limit lines may be rotated by 90° to determine ground faults and their direction in isolated systems.
Functions
2.12 Ground Fault Protection 64, 67N(s), 50N(s), 51N(s)
174 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[richtungskennlinien-260602-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-69 Directional characteristic for cos–ϕ–measurement
Fault direction is calculated with the zero sequence values from the ground current 3Ι0 and displacement
voltage V0 or 3 · V0. With these quantities ground active power and ground reactive power is calculated.
The calculation algorithm used filters the measured values so that it is highly accurate and insensitive to
higher harmonics (particularly the 3rd and 5th harmonics – which are often present in zero sequence
currents). Direction determination relies on the sign of active and reactive power.
Since active and reactive components of the current - not the power - are relevant for pickup, current compo-
nents are calculated from the power components. When determining the ground fault direction the active or
reactive components of the ground current in reference to the displacement voltage as well as the direction of
the active and reactive power are evaluated.
For measurements of sin ϕ (for ungrounded systems) the following applies
•Ground fault (forward direction), if Q0 < 0 and ΙEb > setting value (RELEASE DIRECT.),
•Ground fault (reverse direction), if Q0 >0 and ΙEb > setting value (RELEASE DIRECT.).
For measurements cos ϕ (for resonant grounded systems) the following applies
•Ground fault (forward direction), if P0 > 0 and ΙEEw > setting value (RELEASE DIRECT.),
•Ground fault (reverse direction), if P0 < 0 and ΙEEw > setting value (RELEASE DIRECT.).
If PHI CORRECTION is unequal 0°, the angle of the directional limit lines is calculated by adding up active and
reactive power components.
The forward and reverse zone can be reduced at its boundaries at address 3160 α1 red.dir.area and
address 3161 α2 red.dir.area (see Figure 2-68).
Logic
The following figure illustrates the activation criteria of the sensitive ground fault protection. The operational
mode of the ground fault detection can be set under address 3101.
If set to ON, tripping is possible and a fault log is generated.
If set to Alarm Only, tripping is not possible and only a ground fault log is generated.
The pickup of the displacement voltage element V0 starts the ground fault recording. As the pickup of the V0
element drops out, fault recording is terminated (see logic diagrams Figure 2-71 and Figure 2-72).
Functions
2.12 Ground Fault Protection 64, 67N(s), 50N(s), 51N(s)
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 175
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
The entire function can be blocked under the following conditions:
•A binary input is set,
•the Fuse Failure Monitor or the voltage transformer protection breaker pick up and parameter 3130 PU
CRITERIA is set to Vgnd AND INs,
•the Fuse Failure Monitor or the voltage transformer protection breaker pick up and parameter 3130 PU
CRITERIA is set to Vgnd OR INs, and both current elements are in directional operation mode.
Switching off or blocking means that measurement is deactivated. Therefore, time delays and pickup
messages are reset.
All elements can be blocked individually via binary inputs. In this case pickup and, if possible, direction and
grounded phase will still be reported, however, tripping does not take place since the time elements are
blocked.
[7sj80-aktiv-cos-sin-empf-ef-070309, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-70 Activation of the sensitive ground-fault detection for cos-ϕ -/sin-ϕ measurement
Generation of a pickup message, for both current elements, is dependent on the direction selection for each
element and the setting of parameters 3130 PU CRITERIA. If the element is set to Non-Directional and
parameter PU CRITERIA = Vgnd OR INs, a pickup message is generated as soon as the current threshold is
exceeded, irrespective of the status of the V0 element. If, however, the setting of parameter PU CRITERIA is
Vgnd AND INs, the V0–element must have picked up also for non-directional mode.
However, if a direction is programmed, the current element must be picked up and the direction determina-
tion results must be present to generate a message. Once again, a condition for valid direction determination
is that the voltage element V0 be picked up.
Parameter PU CRITERIA specifies, whether a fault is generated by means of the AND-function or the ORcom-
bination of displacement voltage and pickup of the ground current. The former may be advantageous if the
pickup setting of displacement voltage element V0 was chosen to be very low.
Functions
2.12 Ground Fault Protection 64, 67N(s), 50N(s), 51N(s)
176 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[7sj80-erdfehler-ue-cos-sin-20061206, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-71 Logic diagram of the V0> element for cos-φ -/sin-φ measurement
Functions
2.12 Ground Fault Protection 64, 67N(s), 50N(s), 51N(s)
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 177
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[7sj80-erdfehler-iee-cos-sin-20061206, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-72 Logic diagram of the ΙNs elements for cos-ϕ -/sin-ϕ measurement
Ground Fault Detection for V0/I0-ϕ Measurement
Voltage Element
The voltage element relies on a pickup initiated by the displacement voltage V0 or 3 · V0. Additionally, the
faulty phase is determined. The displacement voltage V0 can be directly applied to the device, or the summa-
tion voltage 3 · V0 can be calculated according to the connection type of the voltage transformer (see also
Parameter 213 VT Connect. 3ph in Section 2.1.3 Power System Data 1). When setting Van, Vbn, Vcn,
the calculation of the summation voltage 3 · V0 is based on the three phase-to–Ground voltages. The three
voltage inputs must therefore be connected to the voltage transformers in a grounded-wye configuration.
When setting Vab, Vbc, VGnd, the three phase-to-Ground voltages of both connected phase-to-phase
voltages and the connected displacement voltage are calculated. If the device is only provided with phase-to-
phase voltages, it is not possible to calculate a displacement voltage from them. In this case, the direction
cannot be determined.
2.12.2
Functions
2.12 Ground Fault Protection 64, 67N(s), 50N(s), 51N(s)
178 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
If the displacement voltage is calculated, then:
3 · V0 = VA + VB + VC
If the displacement voltage is directly applied to the device, then V0 is the voltage at the device terminals. It is
not affected by parameter Vph / Vdelta (address 206).
Pickup performed by the displacement voltage can be delayed (64-1 DELAY) for tripping.
It is important to note that the total trip-command time then consists of the displacement voltage measure-
ment time (about 50 ms) plus the pickup delay time 64-1 DELAY.
After the voltage element picks up due to detection of a displacement voltage, the grounded phase is identi-
fied, if possible. To do this, the individual phase-to-ground voltages are measured. Of course, this is only
possible if three phase-to-ground voltages are obtained from voltage transformers connected in a grounded
wye configuration. If the voltage magnitude for any given phase is below the setting value VPh min, that phase
is detected as the grounded phase as long as the remaining phase-to-ground voltages are simultaneously
above the setting value VPh max.
[7sj6x_erdschlussbehaftete_phase-150502-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-73 Determination of Ground-faulted Phase
Current Elements
There are two current elements. Both elements operate directionally, whereby the tripping zones can be set
individually for each element (see margin heading “Tripping Area”). Both current elements are provided with a
definite time characteristic. Two current/time elements are used for ground fault protection. Analog to the
time overcurrent protection function, the overcurrent element is named 50Ns-1 PICKUP and 50Ns-1
DELAY and the high-set element 50Ns-2 PICKUP and 50Ns-2 DELAY.
The pickup of the definite time overcurrent protection can be stabilized by the configured dropout delay time
(address 3121 50Ns T DROP-OUT).
Tripping Area
The U0/I0-ϕ characteristic is illustrated as a sector in the U0/I0 phasor diagram (see Figure 2-74). This sector
corresponds to the tripping area. If the cursor of the ground current is in this sector, the function picks up.
The tripping area is defined via several parameters: Via the angle ϕ (parameter 3154 50Ns-1 Phi or 3151
50Ns-2 Phi), the center of the zone with reference to the displacement voltage V0 is set. Via the angle Δϕ
(parameter 3155 50Ns-1 DeltaPhi or 3152 50Ns-2 DeltaPhi), the zone is extended to both sides of the
center.
Functions
2.12 Ground Fault Protection 64, 67N(s), 50N(s), 51N(s)
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 179
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
The zone is further limited downwards by minimum values of the displacement voltage and ground current.
These settable threshold values must be exceeded in order to be picked up.
Negative angle settings turn the tripping area in the “inductiv” direction, i.e. ground current inductive
compared to ground voltage.
[enel-character, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-74 Tripping range of V0-Ι0-φ characteristic
Logic
The following figure illustrates the activation criteria of the sensitive ground fault protection. The operational
mode of the ground fault detection can be set under address 3101.
If set to ON, tripping is possible and a fault log is generated.
If set to ON with GF log, tripping is possible, a fault log and a ground fault log are generated.
If set to Alarm Only, tripping is not possible and only a ground fault log is generated.
The pickup of the displacement voltage V0 or pickup of the 50Ns-2 element or pickup of the 50Ns-1 or 51Ns
element start the ground fault recording. As the pickup of the element drops out, fault recording is terminated
(see the following logic diagrams).
The entire function can be blocked under the following conditions:
•A binary input is set,
•the Fuse Failure Monitor or the voltage transformer protection breaker pick up.
Switching off or blocking means that measurement is deactivated. Therefore, time delays and pickup
messages are reset.
All elements can be blocked individually via binary inputs. In this case pickup and, if possible, direction and
grounded phase will still be reported, however, tripping does not take place since the time elements are
blocked.
To support the commissioning, a message is issued if the current and voltage threshold of an element is
exceeded but the ground fault phasor is not inside of the trip range.
Functions
2.12 Ground Fault Protection 64, 67N(s), 50N(s), 51N(s)
180 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[7sj80-aktiv-empf-erdfehler-20061218, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-75 Activation of the sensitive ground fault detection for V0/I0-ϕ measurement
[7sj80-erdfehler-ue-u0-i0-messung-20061206, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-76 Logic diagram during V0-/Ι0 -φ measurement, part 1
Functions
2.12 Ground Fault Protection 64, 67N(s), 50N(s), 51N(s)
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 181
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[7sj80-erdfehler-iee-u0-i0-messung-20061206, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-77 Logic diagram for V0-/I0 -ϕ measurement, part 2
Extended Ground Fault Protection EPTR/TNP
General Information
Additionally to the sensitive and non-sensitive ground-fault detection, the 7SJ80 device offers further func-
tions for detecting ground faults in the 20-kV power system.
•Protection against ground faults in grounded feeders (EPTR)
•Protection against thermal overload of transformers with grounded neutral point (TNP)
The functions can only be used as an alternative. They work independently from the setting of address 130
S.Gnd.F.Dir.Ch.
The following figure shows the used input variables and the activation criteria of the functions.
2.12.3
2.12.3.1
Functions
2.12 Ground Fault Protection 64, 67N(s), 50N(s), 51N(s)
182 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[7sj80-eptr-tss, 2, en_US]
Figure 2-78 Activation of the Functions EPTR or Transformer Neutral Point (TNP)
Ground-Fault Protection EPTR - B
For low fault currents (< 0.95 * 1.4 Ιn),the function works with the ground current measured on the 4th
current input. For higher fault currents (≥ 1.4 Ιn), ), the current 3I0 built from the phase currents is used. You
can find a connection example in the Appendix (C.1 Connection Examples for Current and Voltage Trans-
formers).
If you use the function EPTR, you must set the connection type (CT Connect., address 251 ) to A, B, C,
(Gnd).
If you use the function EPTR, you must set the connection type (). The pickup current of the function and the
course of the characteristic curve can be set. You can find information on the setting values in Section
2.12.5 Setting Notes.
Logic
The following figure shows the logic diagram of the function EPTR.
[7sj80-lo-eptr, 2, en_US]
Figure 2-79 Logic of the Ground-Fault Detection EPTR
2.12.3.2
Functions
2.12 Ground Fault Protection 64, 67N(s), 50N(s), 51N(s)
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 183
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Transformer Neutral-Point Protection TNP
General Information
The function analyzes low fault currents. The transformer neutral-point current ΙE2 measured on the 4th
current input is used as an input variable. You can find a connection example in the Appendix (C.1 Connection
Examples for Current and Voltage Transformers, Figure C-12).
If you use the function TNP, you must set the connection type (CT Connect., address 251 ) to A,G2,C,G;
G->B or A,G2,C,G; G2->B.
The Transformer neutral-point protection works in a non-directional way with an inverse-time logarithmic-
inverse knee-point characteristic curve (). The pickup current of the function and the course of the character-
istic curve can be set. You can find information on the setting values in Section 2.12.5 Setting Notes.
Logic
The following figure shows the logic diagram of the function TNP.
[7sj80-lo-tss, 2, en_US]
Figure 2-80 Logic of the Ground-Fault Detection for a Transformer with Grounded Neutral Point
Ground Fault Location
Application Example
Directional determination may often be used to locate ground faults. In radial systems, locating the ground
fault is relatively simple. Since all feeders from a common bus (Figure 2-81) deliver a capacitive charging
current, nearly the total ground fault current of the system is available at the measuring point of the faulty line
in the ungrounded system. In the resonant grounded system it is the residual wattmetric current of the
Petersen coil that flows via the measuring point. Therefore, on the faulty cables a clear "forward" decision is
made whereas in other feeders either "reverse" direction is sent back or no measurement is carried out in case
ground current is too low. Definitely the faulty line can be determined clearly.
2.12.3.3
2.12.4
Functions
2.12 Ground Fault Protection 64, 67N(s), 50N(s), 51N(s)
184 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[erdschlussortung-im-strahlennetz-260602-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-81 Location of ground faults in a radial network
In meshed or looped systems, the measuring points of the faulty line also receive the maximum ground fault
current (residual current). Only in this line, "forward" direction is signaled at both ends (Figure 2-82). The rest
of the direction indications in the system may also be useful for ground fault detection. However, some indica-
tions may not be given when the ground current is too low.
[ortung-des-erdschlusses-260602-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-82 Determination of the ground fault location basing on directional indicators in the meshed
system
Setting Notes
General Settings
During configuration of the protection functions (Section 2.1.1 Functional Scope, under address 131 Sens.
Gnd Fault it was determined with which parameters the ground fault detection is functioning.
If address Sens. Gnd Fault = Definite Time is selected, then the settings for the definite-time
elements are available here.
If Sens. Gnd Fault = User Defined PU is selected, a user-specified characteristic can be used for the
overcurrent protection elements 50Ns-1 or 51Ns.
The superimposed high-current element 50Ns-1 is available in all these cases.
If this function is not required, then Disabled is set.
The user characteristics are only available, if the standard measurement procedure cos φ / sin φ has been
set at address 130.
The characteristic for determining the direction is set at address 130 S.Gnd.F.Dir.Ch. It is optional to select
either the standard measurement method cos φ / sin φ or the V0/I0 φ mea. with one sector charac-
teristic.
At address 3101 Sens. Gnd Fault, the function ON or OFF can be set to either ON with GF log or
Alarm Only. If settings ON and ON with GF log are applied, tripping is also possible, otherwise a fault log
2.12.5
Functions
2.12 Ground Fault Protection 64, 67N(s), 50N(s), 51N(s)
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 185
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
is created. A ground fault log is created for ON with GF log and Alarm Only. Setting ON with GF log
is only available if characteristic V0/I0 φ mea. has been selected at address 130 S.Gnd.F.Dir.Ch.
The parameters 3111 T-DELAY Pickup and 3130 PU CRITERIA are only visible if the standard measure-
ment method cos φ / sin φ has been selected when setting the direction characteristic. The ground fault
is detected and reported when the displacement voltage was sustained a certain time T-DELAY Pickup).
Address 3130 PU CRITERIA specifies whether ground fault detection is enabled only for pickups of VN and
ΙNS (Vgnd AND INs) or as soon as one of the two has picked up (Vgnd OR INs).
The pickup can be stabilized for ground fault protection with definite time curve by a settable dropout time
delay (address 3121 50Ns T DROP-OUT). This facility is used in power systems with intermittent faults. Used
together with electro-mechanical relays, it allows different dropout responses to be adjusted and time grading
of digital and electro-magnetic relays to be implemented. The setting depends on the dropout time delay of
the electro-magnetic relay. If no coordination is required, the preset value (zero = no dropout time delay)
remains.
i
i
NOTE
Please not that under address 213 VT Connect. 3ph the connection type of the voltage transformer
Van, Vbn, Vcn or Vab, Vbc, VGnd must be set. Additionally, adjustment factor Vph/Vdelta for the
displacement voltage must be set correctly under address 206. Depending on the type of connection of the
current transformer, the primary and secondary rated current in the ground path must be set under address
217 and 218, and, if required, the primary and secondary rated current of the second ground current trans-
former must be set under address 238 and 239.
Overcurrent Elements Definite Time/Inverse Time
A two-element current/time characteristic can be set at addresses 3113 to 3120. These elements operate with
the amounts of the ground current. They are therefore only useful where the magnitude of the ground
current and maybe its direction can be used to specify the ground fault. This may be the case for grounded
systems (solid or low-resistant) or on electrical machines connected to the busbar of an ungrounded power
system, when in case of a network ground fault the machine supplies only a negligible ground fault current
across the measurement location, which must be situated between the machine terminals and the network,
whereas in case of a machine ground fault the total ground fault current produced by the total network is
available.
User-defined characteristic (Inverse Time)
User-defined characteristics are only used for the standard measurement method cos φ / sin φ (address
130 S.Gnd.F.Dir.Ch). During configuration of a user-defined characteristic, it should be noted that there is
a safety factor of approx. 1.1 between pickup and setting value - as is standard for inverse curves. This means
that pickup will only be initiated when current of 1.1 times the setting value flows.
The value pairs (current and time) are entered as multiples of the values at addresses 3119 51Ns PICKUP
and 3120 51NsTIME DIAL. Therefore, it is recommended that these addresses are initially set to 1.00 for
simplicity reasons. Once the curve has been entered, the settings at addresses 3119 and/or 3120 can be modi-
fied if necessary.
The default setting of current values is ∞. They are, therefore, not enabled — and no pickup or tripping of
these protective functions will occur.
Up to 20 value pairs (current and time) may be entered at address 3131 M.of PU TD. The device then
approximates the characteristic, using linear interpolation.
Functions
2.12 Ground Fault Protection 64, 67N(s), 50N(s), 51N(s)
186 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
The following must be observed:
•The value pairs should be entered in increasing sequence. If desired, fewer than 20 pairs can be entered.
In most cases, about 10 pairs is sufficient to define the characteristic accurately. A value pair which will
not be used has to be made invalid by entering "∞” for the threshold! The user must ensure that the value
pairs produce a clear and constant characteristic
The current values entered should be those from Table 2-11, along with the matching times. Deviating
values Ι/Ιp are rounded. This, however, will not be indicated.
Current below the current value of the smallest curve point will not lead to an extension of the tripping
time. The pickup curve (see Figure 2-83) continues, from the smallest current point parallel to the current
axis.
Current flows greater than the highest current value entered will not result in a reduced tripping time.
The pickup curve (see Figure 2-83) continues, from the highest current point parallel to the current axis.
Table 2-11 Preferential Values of Standardized Currents for User-specific Tripping Curves
MofPU = 1 bis 1.94 MofPU = 2 bis 4.75 MofPU = 5 bis 7.75 MofPU = 8 bis 20
1.00 1.50 2.00 3.50 5.00 6.50 8.00 15.00
1.06 1.56 2.25 3.75 5.25 6.75 9.00 16.00
1.13 1.63 2.50 4.00 5.50 7.00 10.00 17.00
1.19 1.69 2.75 4.25 5.75 7.25 11.00 18.00
1.25 1.75 3.00 4.50 6.00 7.50 12.00 19.00
1.31 1.81 3.25 4.75 6.25 7.75 13.00 20.00
1.38 1.88 14.00
1.44 1.94
[verwendung-einer-anwenderspezifizierbaren-kennlinie-260602-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-83 Use of a user-defined characteristic
Determination of Ground-Faulted Phase
The ground-faulted phase may be identified in an ungrounded or resonant-grounded system, if the device is
supplied by three voltage transformers connected in a grounded-wye configuration. The phase in which the
voltage lies below setting VPH MIN at address 3106 is identified as the faulty phase as long as the other two
phase voltages simultaneously exceed the setting VPH MAX at address 3107. The setting VPH MIN must be
set less than the minimum expected operational phase-to-ground voltage. A typical setting for this address
would be 40 V. Setting VPH MAX must be greater than the maximum expected operational phase-to-ground
voltage, but less than the minimum expected operational phase-to-phase voltage. For VNom = 100 V, approxi-
mately 75 V is a typical setting. These settings have no significance in a grounded system.
Functions
2.12 Ground Fault Protection 64, 67N(s), 50N(s), 51N(s)
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 187
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Displacement Voltage Element Vo
The displacement voltage 64-1 VGND (address 3109) or 64-1 VGND (address 3110) is used to pick up
ground fault detection. At the same time, pickup of the voltage element is a condition for initiation of direc-
tion determination (when setting the direction characteristic to cos φ / sin φ). If the direction character-
istic is set toV0/I0 φ mea., the displacement voltage element is not relying on the current elements at all.
Depending on the configuration at address 213 VT Connect. 3ph, only the applicable limit value at address
3109 64-1 VGND or 3110 64-1 VGND is accessible.
If two phase-to-phase voltages and the displacement voltage V0 are supplied to the device, the measured
displacement voltage is used directly for ground fault recognition. The threshold for V0 is set at address 3109
64-1 VGND, where a more sensitive setting can be made than with a calculated displacement voltage.
Please note that when the V0 voltage is connected, the factor (normally = 1.73; see also Section
2.1.3.2 Setting Notes) specified with parameter 206 Vph/Vdelta is used. For display of parameter 3109
64-1 VGND in primary values, the following conversion formula applies:
[formel-uenprim-uensek-120503-kn, 1, en_US]
If three phase-to-ground voltages are connected to the device, the displacement voltage 3 · V0 is calculated
from the momentary values of phase-to-ground voltages, and address 3110 is where the threshold is to be
set. For the display of parameter 3110 in primary values, the following applies:
[formel-3u0prim-3u0sek-120503-kn, 1, en_US]
If the secondary values of (for example) parameters 3109 and 3110 are set equally, then their primary values
differ by adjustment value Vph/Vdelta.
Example:
Parameter 202 Vnom PRIMARY = 12 kV
Parameter 203 Vnom SECONDARY = 100 V
Parameter 206 Vph/Vdelta = 1.73
Parameter 213 VT Connect. 3ph = Vab, Vbc,
VGnd
Parameter 3109 64-1 VGND = 40 V
The following applies when switching to primary values:
[beispiel-uen-83kv-130503-kn, 1, en_US]
With the following configuration
Parameter 213 VT Connect. 3ph = Van, Vbn, Vcn
Parameter 3110 64-1 VGND = 40 V
the following applies when switching to primary values:
[beispiel-3u0-48kv-130503-kn, 1, en_US]
With regard to a ground fault in a ungrounded or resonant-grounded system, nearly the entire displacement
voltage appears at the device terminals, therefore the pickup setting is not critical, and typically lies between
Functions
2.12 Ground Fault Protection 64, 67N(s), 50N(s), 51N(s)
188 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
30 V and 60 V (for 64-1 VGND with a standard V0-connection) or 50 V and 100 V (for 64-1 VGND). Large
fault resistances may require higher sensitivity (i.e. a lower pickup setting).
With regard to a grounded system, a more sensitive (lower) pickup value may be set, but it must be above the
maximum anticipated displacement voltage during normal (unbalanced) system operation.
Pickup of just the voltage element may initiate time delayed tripping assumed that ground fault detection is
configured to perform tripping (address 3101 Sens. Gnd Fault = ON or ON with GF log) and moreover
address 3130 PU CRITERIA is configured Vgnd OR INs. The tripping delay is then set at address 3112
64-1 DELAY. It is important to note that the total tripping time consists of the displacement voltage meas-
urement time (about 50 ms) plus the pickup time delay (address 3111 T-DELAY Pickup) plus the tripping
time delay (address 3112 64-1 DELAY).
Direction Determination for cos-ϕ/ sin-ϕ
Addresses 3115 to 3126 are important for direction determination.
Address 3115 67Ns-2 DIRECT determines the direction of the definite high-set current element 50Ns-2 and
can be set to either Forward or Reverse or Non-Directional, i.e. to both directions. The direction of the
current element 50Ns-1 or or 51Ns can be set to Forward or Reverse or Non-Directional, i.e. to both
directions, at address 3122 67Ns-1 DIRECT..
Current value RELEASE DIRECT. (address 3123) is the release threshold for directional determination. It is
based on the current components which are perpendicular to the directional limit lines. The position of the
directional limit lines themselves are based on the settings entered at addresses 3124 and 3125.
The following applies to the determination of direction during ground faults: The pickup current 3Ι0 DIR.
(=RELEASE DIRECT. address 3123) must be set as high as possible to avoid false pickup of the device
provoked by asymmetrical currents in the system and by current transformers (especially in the Holmgreen-
connection).
If direction determination is used in conjunction with one of the current elements discussed above (50Ns-1
PICKUP, addresses 3117 or 51Ns PICKUP, addresses 3119 ff), it is sensible to select a value for address
RELEASE DIRECT. that is lower than or equal to the above pickup value.
A corresponding message (reverse, forward, or undefined) is issued upon direction determination. To avoid
chatter for this message resulting from extremely varying ground connection currents, a dropout delay RESET
DELAY, entered at address 3126, is initiated when directional determination drops out, and the message is
held for this period of time.
When address 3124 PHI CORRECTION is set to 0.0°, in address 3125 the following signifies
•MEAS. METHOD = COS φ
the resistive component of the ground current with respect to the displacement voltage is most relevant
for the current value RELEASE DIRECT. (3Ι0 DIR.),
MEAS. METHOD = SIN φ
the reactive (capacitive) component of the ground current with respect to the displacement voltage is
most relevant for the current value RELEASE DIRECT. (3Ι0 DIR.) (Figure 2-84).
Functions
2.12 Ground Fault Protection 64, 67N(s), 50N(s), 51N(s)
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 189
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[7sj6-richtkennl-bei-sin-mess-20110113, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-84 Directional characteristic for sin–ϕ–measurement
•In address 3124 PHI CORRECTION the directional line, in this respect, may be rotated within the range
± 45°. Figure 2-69 "Directional characteristic for cos-ϕ-measurement" in the functional description of the
sensitive ground fault detection gives an example regarding this topic.
The forward and reverse zone can be reduced at its boundaries at address 3160 α1 red.dir.area and
address 3161 α2 red.dir.area (see Figure 2-84). Siemens recommends using the default setting of 2°
(this corresponds to the behavior of versions without this setting option). In a grounded system in feeders
with very high capacitive current, it can be reasonable to set a slightly larger angle α1 to prevent erroneous
pickup due to transformer and algorithm tolerances.
Direction Determination for V0/I0 ϕ Measurement
With the minimum voltage 50Ns-2 Vmin, address 3150 and the level of the pickup current 50Ns-2
PICKUP, address 3113, the lower limit of the circuit segment of element 50Ns-2 is set. The thresholds of the
tripping range in respect of the displacement voltage is set by means of the matching phase angle 50Ns-2
Functions
2.12 Ground Fault Protection 64, 67N(s), 50N(s), 51N(s)
190 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Phi, address 3151 and angle 50Ns-2 DeltaPhi, address 3152. The trip delay time is set under address
3114 50Ns-2 DELAY. The actual settings are based on the respective application.
The minimum voltage 50Ns-1 Vmin of the high-current element 50Ns-1 is set under address 3153, the
pickup current 50Ns-1 PICKUP under 3117. The respective phase angle 50Ns-1 Phi is set under address
3154, the angle 50Ns-1 DeltaPhi is entered under address 3155. The angle should be set to 180° so that
the element functions non-directionally. The trip delay time is set under address 3118 50Ns-1 DELAY.
Positive angle settings (address 3151 and 3154) turn the tripping area in the „capacitive“ direction, i.e. ground
current capacitive compared to ground voltage.
Negative angle settings turn the tripping area in the “inductiv” direction, i.e. ground current inductive
compared to ground voltage.
Angular Error Compensation (Ι Transformer)
The high reactive component in a resonant grounded system and the inevitable air gap of the toroidal current
transformer often require the angle error of the toroidal current transformer to be compensated. In addresses
3102 to 3105 the maximum angle error CT Err. F1 and the associated secondary current CT Err. I1 as
well as another operating point CT Err. F2/CT Err. I2 are set for the actually connected burden. The
device thus approximates the transformation characteristic of the transformer with considerable accuracy. In
ungrounded or grounded systems angle compensation is not required.
Ungrounded System
In an ungrounded system with a ground fault on a cable, capacitive ground currents of the galvanically
connected system flow via the measuring point, except for the ground current generated in the grounded
cable, since the current last-mentioned will flow directly to the fault location (i.e. not via the measuring point).
A setting equal to about half the ground current is to be selected. The measurement method should be SIN
φ, since capacitive ground current is most relevant here.
Resonant-Grounded System
In resonant-grounded systems, directional determination on the occurrence of a ground fault is more difficult
since the low residual wattmetric current for measurement is usually dwarfed by a reactive current (be it
capacitive or inductive) which is much higher. Therefore, depending on the system configuration and the posi-
tion of the arc-compensating coil, the total ground current supplied to the device may vary considerably in its
values with regard to magnitude and phase angle. The relay, however, must evaluate only the active compo-
nent of the ground fault current, that is, ΙNs cos ϕ. This demands extremely high accuracy, particularly with
regard to phase angle measurement of all instrument transformers. Furthermore, the device must not be set
to operate too sensitive. When applying this function in resonant-grounded systems, a reliable direction deter-
mination can only be achieved when toroidal current transformers are connected. Here the following rule of
thumb applies: Set pickup values to about half of the expected measured current, thereby considering only the
residual wattmetric current. Residual wattmetric current predominantly derives from losses of the Petersen
coil. Here, the COS φ measurement method is used since the resistive residual wattmetric current is most rele-
vant.
Grounded System
In grounded systems, a value is set below the minimum anticipated ground fault current. It is important to
note that 3I0 DIR (current value RELEASE DIRECT.) only detects the current components that are perpendic-
ular to the directional limit lines defined at addresses 3124 and 3125. COS φ is the method of measurement
used, and the correction angle is set to –45°, since the ground fault current is typically resistive-inductive
(right section of Figure 2-81 "Directional curve for cos-ϕ-measurement" in the functional description of the
sensitive ground fault detection).
Electrical Machines
One may set the value COS φ for the measurement method and use a correction angle of +45° for electrical
motors supplied from a busbar in an ungrounded system, since the ground current is often composed of an
overlap of the capacitive ground current from the system and the resistive current of the load resistance (left
Functions
2.12 Ground Fault Protection 64, 67N(s), 50N(s), 51N(s)
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 191
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
part of Figure "Directional characteristic for cos-ϕ-measurement" in the functional description of the sensitive
ground fault detection).
Information on the Configuration of the Current Threshold
With devices with sensitive ground fault input, generally settings may be entered in primary values with
consideration given to the ratio of the applicable current transformer. However, problems related to the reso-
lution of the pickup currents can occur when very small settings and small nominal primary currents are
involved. The user is therefore encouraged to enter settings for the sensitive ground fault detection in secon-
dary values.
EPTR, TNP - General Information
The function EPTR is switched on or off at address 3501 EPTR.
The function TNP is switched on or off at address 3502 Trans. Neutral.
You can switch between the functions using the connection-type setting CT Connect., address 251). If A,
B, C, (Gnd) is set, EPTR works. If A,G2,C,G; G->B or A,G2,C,G; G2->B is set, TNP works.
EPTR, TNP - Logarithmic-Inverse Knee-Point Characteristic Curve (AMZ)
The logarithmic-inverse characteristic curve for EPTR is set at the following addresses:
3503 Pickup current
3505 EPTR I Tmax, pickup current with maximum delay
3507 EPTR I Tmin, pickup current with minimum delay
3509 EPTR I Tknee, current at the knee-point
3511 T knee, tripping time for the knee-point, the transition of the 2 characteristic-curve sections with
different slope.
3512 T min, minimum delay when the current threshold EPTR I Tmin picks up.
3513 T max, picks up EPTR I Tmax picks up
T min and T max determine the range of the tripping time.
The logarithmic-inverse characteristic curve for TNP is set at the following addresses:
3504 Pickup current
3506 TNP I Tmax, pickup current with maximum delay
3508 TNP I Tmin, pickup current with minimum delay
3510 TNP I Tknee, Strom an Kniepunkt
3511 T knee, tripping time for the knee-point, the transition of the 2 characteristic-curve sections with
different slope.
3512 T min, minimum delay when the current threshold TNP I Tmin picks up.
3513 T max, maximum delay when the current threshold TNP I Tmax picks up.
T min and T max determine the range of the tripping time.
With address 3514 T Function you set the time delay for the complete function.
Functions
2.12 Ground Fault Protection 64, 67N(s), 50N(s), 51N(s)
192 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[7SJ80_knickpkt-kennlinie, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-85 Tripping Time Characteristic Curves of the Inverse-Time Ground-Fault Protection with Loga-
rithmic-Inverse Knee-Point Characteristic Curve, Example EPTR
Settings
Addresses which have an appended “A” can only be changed with DIGSI, under “Additional Settings”.
The table indicates region-specific default settings. Column C (configuration) indicates the corresponding
secondary nominal current of the current transformer.
Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting Comments
3101 Sens. Gnd Fault OFF
ON
ON with GF log
Alarm Only
OFF (Sensitive) Ground Fault
3102 CT Err. I1 1A 0.001 .. 1.600 A 0.050 A Current I1 for CT Angle
Error
5A 0.005 .. 8.000 A 0.250 A
3102 CT Err. I1 1A 0.05 .. 35.00 A 1.00 A Current I1 for CT Angle
Error
5A 0.25 .. 175.00 A 5.00 A
3103 CT Err. F1 0.0 .. 5.0 ° 0.0 ° CT Angle Error at I1
3104 CT Err. I2 1A 0.001 .. 1.600 A 1.000 A Current I2 for CT Angle
Error
5A 0.005 .. 8.000 A 5.000 A
3104 CT Err. I2 1A 0.05 .. 35.00 A 10.00 A Current I2 for CT Angle
Error
5A 0.25 .. 175.00 A 50.00 A
3105 CT Err. F2 0.0 .. 5.0 ° 0.0 ° CT Angle Error at I2
3106 VPH MIN 10 .. 100 V 40 V L-Gnd Voltage of Faulted
Phase Vph Min
3107 VPH MAX 10 .. 100 V 75 V L-Gnd Voltage of Unfaulted
Phase Vph Max
3109 64-1 VGND 1.8 .. 200.0 V; ∞ 40.0 V 64-1 Ground Displacement
Voltage
2.12.6
Functions
2.12 Ground Fault Protection 64, 67N(s), 50N(s), 51N(s)
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 193
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting Comments
3110 64-1 VGND 10.0 .. 225.0 V; ∞ 70.0 V 64-1 Ground Displacement
Voltage
3111 T-DELAY Pickup 0.04 .. 320.00 sec; ∞ 1.00 sec Time-DELAY Pickup
3112 64-1 DELAY 0.10 .. 40000.00 sec; ∞ 10.00 sec 64-1 Time Delay
3113 50Ns-2 PICKUP 1A 0.001 .. 1.600 A 0.300 A 50Ns-2 Pickup
5A 0.005 .. 8.000 A 1.500 A
3113 50Ns-2 PICKUP 1A 0.05 .. 35.00 A 10.00 A 50Ns-2 Pickup
5A 0.25 .. 175.00 A 50.00 A
3114 50Ns-2 DELAY 0.00 .. 320.00 sec; ∞ 1.00 sec 50Ns-2 Time Delay
3115 67Ns-2 DIRECT Forward
Reverse
Non-Directional
Forward 67Ns-2 Direction
3117 50Ns-1 PICKUP 1A 0.001 .. 1.600 A 0.100 A 50Ns-1 Pickup
5A 0.005 .. 8.000 A 0.500 A
3117 50Ns-1 PICKUP 1A 0.05 .. 35.00 A 2.00 A 50Ns-1 Pickup
5A 0.25 .. 175.00 A 10.00 A
3118 50Ns-1 DELAY 0.00 .. 320.00 sec; ∞ 2.00 sec 50Ns-1 Time delay
3119 51Ns PICKUP 1A 0.001 .. 1.400 A 0.100 A 51Ns Pickup
5A 0.005 .. 7.000 A 0.500 A
3119 51Ns PICKUP 1A 0.05 .. 4.00 A 1.00 A 51Ns Pickup
5A 0.25 .. 20.00 A 5.00 A
3120 51NsTIME DIAL 0.10 .. 4.00 sec; ∞ 1.00 sec 51Ns Time Dial
3121A 50Ns T DROP-OUT 0.00 .. 60.00 sec 0.00 sec 50Ns Drop-Out Time Delay
3122 67Ns-1 DIRECT. Forward
Reverse
Non-Directional
Forward 67Ns-1 Direction
3123 RELEASE DIRECT. 1A 0.001 .. 1.200 A 0.010 A Release directional element
5A 0.005 .. 6.000 A 0.050 A
3123 RELEASE DIRECT. 1A 0.05 .. 30.00 A 0.50 A Release directional element
5A 0.25 .. 150.00 A 2.50 A
3124 PHI CORRECTION -45.0 .. 45.0 ° 0.0 ° Correction Angle for Dir.
Determination
3125 MEAS. METHOD COS φ
SIN φ
COS φ Measurement method for
Direction
3126 RESET DELAY 0 .. 60 sec 1 sec Reset Delay
3130 PU CRITERIA Vgnd OR INs
Vgnd AND INs
Vgnd OR INs Sensitive Ground Fault
PICKUP criteria
3131 M.of PU TD 1.00 .. 20.00 MofPU; ∞
0.01 .. 999.00 TD
Multiples of PU Time-Dial
3150 50Ns-2 Vmin 10.0 .. 90.0 V 10.0 V 50Ns-2 minimum voltage
3150 50Ns-2 Vmin 0.4 .. 50.0 V 2.0 V 50Ns-2 minimum voltage
3151 50Ns-2 Phi -180.0 .. 180.0 ° -90.0 ° 50Ns-2 angle phi
3152 50Ns-2 DeltaPhi 0.0 .. 180.0 ° 30.0 ° 50Ns-2 angle delta phi
3153 50Ns-1 Vmin 10.0 .. 90.0 V 15.0 V 50Ns-1 minimum voltage
3153 50Ns-1 Vmin 0.4 .. 50.0 V 6.0 V 50Ns-1 minimum voltage
3154 50Ns-1 Phi -180.0 .. 180.0 ° -160.0 ° 50Ns-1 angle phi
3155 50Ns-1 DeltaPhi 0.0 .. 180.0 ° 100.0 ° 50Ns-1 angle delta phi
Functions
2.12 Ground Fault Protection 64, 67N(s), 50N(s), 51N(s)
194 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting Comments
3160 α1 red.dir.area 1 .. 15 ° 2 ° Alpha1 (reduction direc-
tional area)
3161 α2 red.dir.area 1 .. 15 ° 2 ° Alpha2 (reduction direc-
tional area)
Settings EPTR, TNP
Addresses which have an appended “A” can only be changed with DIGSI, under “Additional Settings”.
The table indicates region-specific default settings. Column C (configuration) indicates the corresponding
secondary nominal current of the current transformer.
Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting Comments
3501 EPTR OFF
ON
OFF EPTR
3502 Trans. Neutral OFF
ON
OFF Transformer Neutral
protection(TNP)
3503 Pickup current 1A 0.001 .. 1.400 A 0.008 A Pickup current
5A 0.005 .. 7.000 A 0.040 A
3504 Pickup current 0.05 .. 4.00 A 0.12 A Pickup current
3505 EPTR I Tmax 1A 0.001 .. 1.400 A 0.008 A Current at Maximum Time
Delay
5A 0.005 .. 7.000 A 0.040 A
3506 TNP I Tmax 0.05 .. 4.00 A 0.12 A Current at Maximum Time
Delay
3507 EPTR I Tmin 1A 0.003 .. 4.000 A 3.333 A Current at Minimum Time
Delay
5A 0.015 .. 20.000 A 16.665 A
3508 TNP I Tmin 0.05 .. 20.00 A 1.00 A Current at Minimum Time
Delay
3509 EPTR I Tknee 1A 0.003 .. 1.400 A 0.100 A Current at Knee Point
5A 0.015 .. 7.000 A 0.500 A
3510 TNP I Tknee 0.05 .. 17.00 A 0.20 A Current at Knee Point
3511 T knee 0.20 .. 100.00 sec 26.70 sec Time Delay at Knee Point
3512 T min 0.10 .. 30.00 sec 0.80 sec Minimum Time Delay
3513 T max 0.50 .. 300.00 sec 139.90 sec Maximum Time Delay
3514 T Function -0.50 .. 30.00 sec 0.00 sec Delay time T of the whole
function
Information List
No. Information Type of
Informa-
tion
Comments
1201 >BLOCK 64 SP >BLOCK 64
1202 >BLOCK 50Ns-2 SP >BLOCK 50Ns-2
1203 >BLOCK 50Ns-1 SP >BLOCK 50Ns-1
1204 >BLOCK 51Ns SP >BLOCK 51Ns
1207 >BLK 50Ns/67Ns SP >BLOCK 50Ns/67Ns
1211 50Ns/67Ns OFF OUT 50Ns/67Ns is OFF
1212 50Ns/67Ns ACT OUT 50Ns/67Ns is ACTIVE
1215 64 Pickup OUT 64 displacement voltage pick up
2.12.7
2.12.8
Functions
2.12 Ground Fault Protection 64, 67N(s), 50N(s), 51N(s)
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 195
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
No. Information Type of
Informa-
tion
Comments
1217 64 TRIP OUT 64 displacement voltage element TRIP
1221 50Ns-2 Pickup OUT 50Ns-2 Pickup
1223 50Ns-2 TRIP OUT 50Ns-2 TRIP
1224 50Ns-1 Pickup OUT 50Ns-1 Pickup
1226 50Ns-1 TRIP OUT 50Ns-1 TRIP
1227 51Ns Pickup OUT 51Ns picked up
1229 51Ns TRIP OUT 51Ns TRIP
1230 Sens. Gnd block OUT Sensitive ground fault detection BLOCKED
1264 IEEa = VI Corr. Resistive Earth current
1265 IEEr = VI Corr. Reactive Earth current
1266 IEE = VI Earth current, absolute Value
1267 VGND, 3Vo VI Displacement Voltage VGND, 3Vo
1271 Sens.Gnd Pickup OUT Sensitive Ground fault pick up
1272 Sens. Gnd Ph A OUT Sensitive Ground fault picked up in Ph A
1273 Sens. Gnd Ph B OUT Sensitive Ground fault picked up in Ph B
1274 Sens. Gnd Ph C OUT Sensitive Ground fault picked up in Ph C
1276 SensGnd Forward OUT Sensitive Gnd fault in forward direction
1277 SensGnd Reverse OUT Sensitive Gnd fault in reverse direction
1278 SensGnd undef. OUT Sensitive Gnd fault direction undefined
16029 51Ns BLK PaErr OUT Sens.gnd.flt. 51Ns BLOCKED Setting Error
16030 φ(3Vo,INs) = VI Angle between 3Vo and INsens.
Information List EPTR, TNP
No. Information Type of
Informa-
tion
Comments
18901 >BLK E Flt(ext) SP >BLOCK Earth fault (extend)
18902 >BLOCK EPTR SP >BLOCK EPTR
18903 >BLOCK TNP SP >BLOCK Transformer Neutral (TNP)
18904 E Flt(ext) OFF OUT Earth fault (extend) is OFF
18905 E Flt(ext) ACT OUT Earth fault (extend) is ACTIVE
18906 EPTR OFF OUT EPTR is OFF
18907 EPTR ACT OUT EPTR is ACTIVE
18908 TNP OFF OUT Transformer Neutral(TNP) is OFF
18909 TNP ACT OUT Transformer Neutral(TNP) is ACTIVE
18910 EPTR picked up OUT EPTR picked up
18911 EPTR TRIP OUT EPTR TRIP
18912 TNP picked up OUT Transformer Neutral (TNP) picked up
18913 TNP TRIP OUT Transformer Neutral (TNP) TRIP
18914 E Flt(ext) PU OUT Earth fault (extend) picked up
18915 E Flt(ext) Trip OUT Earth fault (extend) TRIP
18916 E Flt(ext) BLK OUT Earth fault (extend) is BLOCKED
18917 EPTR BLOCKED OUT EPTR is BLOCKED
18918 TNP BLOCKED OUT Transformer Neutral(TNP) is BLOCKED
2.12.9
Functions
2.12 Ground Fault Protection 64, 67N(s), 50N(s), 51N(s)
196 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
No. Information Type of
Informa-
tion
Comments
18919 EF BLK PaErr OUT Earth fault (extend) BLOCK Setting Error
Functions
2.12 Ground Fault Protection 64, 67N(s), 50N(s), 51N(s)
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 197
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Intermittent Ground Fault Protection
A typical characteristic of intermittent ground faults is that they often disappear automatically to strike again
after some time. They can last between a few milliseconds and several seconds. This is why such faults are not
detected at all or not selectively by the ordinary time overcurrent protection. If pulse durations are extremely
short, not all protection devices in a short-circuit path may pick up; selective tripping is thus not ensured.
Due to the time delay of the overcurrent protection function such faults are too short to initiate shutdown of
the faulted cable. Only when they have become permanent such ground faults can be removed selectively by
the short-circuit protection.
But such intermittent ground faults already bear the risk of causing thermal damage to equipment. This is why
devices 7SJ80 feature a protective function that is able to detect such intermittent ground faults and accumu-
lates their duration. If the sum reaches a configurable value within a certain time, the limit of the thermal load
capacity has been reached. If the ground faults are distributed over a long period of time or if the ground fault
goes off and does not re-ignite after some time, the equipment under load is expected to cool down. Tripping
is not necessary in this case.
Applications
•Protection from intermittent ground faults which occur, e.g. in cables due to poor insulation or water
ingress in cable joints.
Functional Description
Acquisition of Measured Quantities
The intermittent ground fault can either be detected via the ordinary ground current input (ΙN), the sensitive
ground current input (ΙN), or it is calculated from the sum of the three phase currents (3Ι0). Unlike the over-
current protection which uses the fundamental wave, the intermittent ground fault sprotection creates the
r.m.s. value of this current and compares it to a settable threshold Iie>. This method accounts for higher
order harmonics contents (up to 400 Hz) and for the direct component since both factors contribute to the
thermal load.
Pickup/Tripping
If the pickup value Iie> is exceeded, the pickup indication
IIE Fault det
(see Figure 2-86) is generated.
The pickups are also counted; when the counter content reaches the value of parameter Nos.det., the indi-
cation
Intermitt.EF
is output. A stabilized pickup is obtained by prolonging the pickup indication
IIE
Fault det
by a settable time T-det.ext.. This stabilization is especially important for the coordination
with existing static or electromechanical overcurrent relays.
The duration of the stabilized pickups
IIE stab.Flt
is summated with an integrator T-sum det.. If the
accumulated pickup time reaches a settable threshold value, a corresponding message is generated (
IEF
Tsum exp.
). Tripping takes place, however, only while a ground fault is present (message
IEF Trip
). The
trip command is maintained during the entire minimum tripping time specified for the device, even if the
ground fault is of short duration. After completion of the tripping command all memories are reset and the
protection resumes normal condition.
The (much longer) resetting time T-reset (message
IEF Tres run.
) is launched simultaneously with T-
sum det. when a ground fault occurs. Unlike T-sum det., each new ground fault resets this time to its
initial value and it expires anew. If T-reset expires and no new ground fault is recorded during that time, all
memories are reset and the protection resumes normal position. T-reset thus determines the time during
which the next ground fault must occur to be processed yet as intermittent ground fault in connection with
the previous fault. A ground fault that occurs later will be considered a new fault event.
The message
IIE Fault det
will be entered in the fault log and reported to the system interface only until
the message
Intermitt.EF
is issued. This prevents a burst of messages. If the message is allocated to an
LED or a relay, this limitation does not apply. This is accomplished by doubling the message (message
numbers 6924, 6926).
2.13
2.13.1
Functions
2.13 Intermittent Ground Fault Protection
198 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Interaction with the Automatic Reclosure Function
Automatic reclosure is not an effective measure against intermittent ground faults as the function only trips
after repeated detection of a fault or after expiration of the summation monitoring time T-sum det. and
besides this, its basic design is to prevent thermal overload. For these reasons, the intermittent ground fault
protection is not implemented as starting feature of the automatic reclosing function.
Interaction with Breaker Failure Protection
A pickup that is present when the time delay TRIP-Timer has expired is interpreted by the breaker failure
protection as a criterion for a tripping failure. Since permanent pickup is not ensured after a tripping command
by the intermittent ground fault protection, cooperation with the breaker failure protection is not sensible.
Therefore, this function is not activated by the intermittent ground fault protection.
Logic Diagram
The following figure shows the logic diagram for the intermittent ground fault protection function.
[7sj6x_intermit_erdfehler-150502-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-86 Logic diagram of the intermittent ground fault protection – principle
Fault Logging
A fault event and thus fault logging is initiated when the non-stabilized ΙΙE element picks up for the first time.
A message
IIE Fault det
is produced. The message
IIE Fault det
is issued and entered in the fault
log (and reported to the system interface) so often until the number of pickups
IIE Fault det
has reached
the value set for parameter Nos.det.. When this happens, the message
Intermitt.EF
is issued and
IIE
Functions
2.13 Intermittent Ground Fault Protection
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 199
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Fault det
is blocked for the fault log and the system interface. This method accounts for the fact that the
ΙΙE element may also pick up for a normal short-circuit. In this case the pickup does not launch the alarm
Intermitt.EF
.
Intermittent ground faults may cause other overcurrent elements to pick up (e.g. 50-1, 50N-1, 50Ns-1), which
may result in a burst of messages. In order to avoid an overflow of the fault log, its messages are no longer
entered in the fault log after detection of intermittent ground faults (indication
Intermitt.EF
), unless they
cause a trip command. If an intermittent ground fault has been detected, the following pickup messages of
the time overcurrent protection will still be reported without restraint (see
Intermitt.EF
):
Table 2-12 Unrestricted Messages
FNo. Message Description
1800
50-2 picked up
50-2 picked up
2642
67-2 picked up
67-2 picked up
7551
50-1 InRushPU
50-1 InRush picked up
7552
50N-1 InRushPU
50N-1 InRush picked up
7553
51 InRushPU
51 InRush picked up
7554
51N InRushPU
51N InRush picked up
7559
67-1 InRushPU
67-1 InRush picked up
7560
67N-1 InRushPU
67N-1 InRush picked up
7561
67-TOC InRushPU
67-TOC InRush picked up
7562
67N-TOCInRushPU
67N-TOC InRush picked up
7565
Ia InRush PU
Phase A InRush picked up
7566
Ib InRush PU
Phase B InRush picked up
7567
Ic InRush PU
Phase C InRush picked up
7564
Gnd InRush PU
ground InRush picked up
Table 2-13 shows all messages subject to a restraint mechanism avoiding a message burst during an intermit-
tent ground fault:
Table 2-13 Buffered Messages
FNo. Message Description
1761
50(N)/51(N) PU
50(N)/51(N) picked up
1762
50/51 Ph A PU
50/51 Phase A picked up
1763
50/51 Ph B PU
50/51 Phase B picked up
1764
50/51 Ph C PU
50/51 Phase C picked up
1767
50-3 picked up
50-3 element picked up
1810
50-1 picked up
50-1 element picked up
1820
51 picked up
51 element picked up
1765
50N/51NPickedup
50N element picked up
1768
50N-3 picked up
50N-3 element picked up
1831
50N-2 picked up
50N-2 element picked up
1834
50N-1 picked up
50N-1 element picked up
1837
51N picked up
51N element picked up
2691
67/67N pickedup
67/67N picked up
2697
67-3 picked up
67-3 element picked up
2660
67-1 picked up
67-1 element picked up
2670
67-TOC pickedup
67-TOC element picked up
2692
67 A picked up
67/67-TOC Phase A picked up
2693
67 B picked up
67/67-TOC Phase B picked up
2694
67 C picked up
67/67-TOC Phase C picked up
Functions
2.13 Intermittent Ground Fault Protection
200 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
FNo. Message Description
2698
67N-3 picked up
67N-3 element picked up
2646
67N-2 picked up
67N-2 element picked up
2681
67N-1 picked up
67N-1 element picked up
2684
67N-TOCPickedup
67N-TOC element picked up
2695
67N picked up
67N/67N-TOC element picked up
5159
46-2 picked up
46-2 picked up
5165
46-1 picked up
46-1 picked up
5166
46-TOC pickedup
46-TOC picked up
1215
64 Pickup
64 displacement voltage pick up
1221
50Ns-2 Pickup
50Ns-2 elementpicked up
1224
50Ns-1 Pickup
50Ns-1 elementpicked up
1227
51Ns Pickup
51Ns elementpicked up
6823
48 pickup
48 Startup supervision Pickup
Before they are entered in the fault log (event buffer) and transmitted to the system interface or CFC, the indi-
cations of Table 2-13 are buffered (starting with the incoming indication
Intermitt.EF
). The buffering does
not apply to signaling to relays and LEDs as it is required by time-graded protection systems for reverse inter-
locking. The buffer can store a maximum of two status changes (the most recent ones) for each indication.
Buffered messages are signaled to the fault log, CFC and to the system interface with the original time flag
only when a TRIP command is initiated by a protection function other than the intermittent ground fault
protection. This ascertains that a pickup, although delayed, is always signaled in association with each TRIP
command.
All pickup messages which usually do not occur during an intermittent ground fault are not affected by this
mechanism. Among others this includes the pickup and TRIP commands of the following protective functions:
•Breaker failure protection,
•Overload protection,
•Frequency protection
•Voltage protection
•QU protection.
The pickup signals of these functions will still be logged immediately. A TRIP command of one of these protec-
tive functions will cause the buffered messages to be cleared since no connection exists between tripping
function and buffered message.
A fault event is cleared when the time T-reset has expired or the TRIP command
IEF Trip
has been termi-
nated.
Terminating a fault event for the intermittent ground fault protection thus is a special case. It is the time T-
reset that keeps the fault event opened and not the pickup.
Setting Notes
General
The protection function for intermittent ground faults can only take effect and is only accessible if the current
to be evaluated was configured in address 133, INTERM.EF (with Ignd or with with 3I0 or with
Ignd,sens.). If not required, this function is set to Disabled.
The function can be turned ON or OFF under address 3301 INTERM.EF.
The pickup threshold (r.m.s. value) is set in address 3302 Iie>. A rather sensitive setting is possible to
respond also to short ground faults since the pickup time shortens as the current in excess of the setting
increases. The setting range depends on the selection of the current to be evaluated at address 133
INTERM.EF.
2.13.2
Functions
2.13 Intermittent Ground Fault Protection
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 201
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
The pickup time can be prolonged at address 3303 T-det.ext.. This pickup stabilization is especially impor-
tant for the coordination with existing analog or electromechanical overcurrent relays. The time T-det.ext.
can also be disabled (T-det.ext. = 0).
The stabilized pickup starts the counter T-sum det.. This counter is stopped but not reset when the picked
up function drops out. Based on the last counter content the counter resumes counting when the stabilized
function picks up next. This sum of individual pickup times, which are to initiate tripping, is set at address
3304 T-sum det.. It represents one of the four selectivity criteria (pickup value Iie>, detection extension
time T-det.ext., counter T-sum det. and reset time T-reset) for coordinating the relays on adjacent
feeders and is comparable to the time grading of the time overcurrent protection. The relay in the radial
network which is closest to the intermittent fault and picks up, will have the shortest summation time T-sum
det..
The reset time, after which the summation is reset in healthy operation and the protection resumes normal
status, is configured to T-reset at address 3305.
[selektivitaetskrit-intermitt-erdfehler-120902-oz, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-87 Example of selectivity criteria of the intermittent ground fault protection
Address 3306 Nos.det. specifies the number of pickups after which a ground fault is considered intermit-
tent.
Settings
The table indicates region-specific presettings. Column C (configuration) indicates the corresponding secon-
dary nominal current of the current transformer.
Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting Comments
3301 INTERM.EF OFF
ON
OFF Intermittent earth fault
protection
3302 Iie> 1A 0.05 .. 35.00 A 1.00 A Pick-up value of interm. E/F
stage
5A 0.25 .. 175.00 A 5.00 A
3302 Iie> 1A 0.05 .. 35.00 A 1.00 A Pick-up value of interm. E/F
stage
5A 0.25 .. 175.00 A 5.00 A
3302 Iie> 0.005 .. 1.500 A 1.000 A Pick-up value of interm. E/F
stage
3303 T-det.ext. 0.00 .. 10.00 sec 0.10 sec Detection extension time
3304 T-sum det. 0.00 .. 100.00 sec 20.00 sec Sum of detection times
3305 T-reset 1 .. 600 sec 300 sec Reset time
3306 Nos.det. 2 .. 10 3 No. of det. for start of int.
E/F prot
2.13.3
Functions
2.13 Intermittent Ground Fault Protection
202 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Information List
No. Information Type of
Informa-
tion
Comments
6903 >IEF block SP >block interm. E/F prot.
6921 IEF OFF OUT Interm. E/F prot. is switched off
6922 IEF blocked OUT Interm. E/F prot. is blocked
6923 IEF enabled OUT Interm. E/F prot. is active
6924 IIE Fault det OUT Interm. E/F detection stage Iie>
6925 IIE stab.Flt OUT Interm. E/F stab detection
6926 IIE Flt.det FE OUT Interm.E/F det.stage Iie> f.Flt. ev.Prot
6927 Intermitt.EF OUT Interm. E/F detected
6928 IEF Tsum exp. OUT Counter of det. times elapsed
6929 IEF Tres run. OUT Interm. E/F: reset time running
6930 IEF Trip OUT Interm. E/F: trip
6931 Iie/In= VI Max RMS current value of fault =
6932 Nos.IIE= VI No. of detections by stage Iie>=
2.13.4
Functions
2.13 Intermittent Ground Fault Protection
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 203
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Dir. Intermittent earth fault protection
The directional intermittent ground fault protection is designed to selectively detect intermittent ground faults
in compensated or grounded cable systems.
Intermittent ground faults are usually characterized by the following properties:
- Very short high ground current pulses (up to several hundred amperes) with a duration of less than 1 ms;
- They are self-extinguishing and re-ignite within one half period up to several periods, depending on the
power system conditions and the fault characteristic.
- They can persist over longer periods (many seconds to minutes) and develop into static faults.
Such intermittent ground faults are frequently caused by weak insulation, e.g. due to decreased water resis-
tance of old cables.
Ground fault functions based on fundamental component measured values are primarily designed to detect
static ground faults and do not always operate correctly in the event of intermittent ground faults. The func-
tion described here evaluates specifically the ground current pulses and puts them into relation with the
displacement voltage to determine the direction.
Applications
•Directional protection against intermittent ground faults which occur, e.g. in cables due to poor insula-
tion or water ingress in cable joints.
Functional Description
Activating the Function
The function is only available if the device is equipped with a sensitive ground current input.
For voltage connection 213 VT Connect. 3ph = Vab, Vbc oder Vab, Vbc, Vx or Vab, Vbc, VSyn
oder Vph-g, VSyn and for 250 50/51 2-ph prot = ON, the directional intermittent ground fault protec-
tion is ineffective. V0 cannot be formed for these connection types.
The function is blocked in case of a measuring voltage failure under the condition that the fuse-failure monitor
is configured for the functioning in a grounded system (see Section 2.11.1 Measurement Supervision, Fuse-
Failure Monitor).
Furthermore, the function can be blocked externally using the binary input signal
>dIEF block
.
2.14
2.14.1
Functions
2.14 Dir. Intermittent earth fault protection
204 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[7sx8-iefger-aktiv-20120611, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-88 Activation of the directional intermittent ground fault protection
Measurand Acquisition
The intermittent ground fault current 3I0 is measured exclusively via the sensitive ground current input INs
(4th current transformer input) of the device.
Also the displacement voltage V0 or 3 · V0 is required to determine the direction. The displacement voltage V0
can be applied directly to the device, or the summation voltage 3 · V0 can be calculated from the three phase-
to-ground voltages.
If the displacement voltage is calculated, then:
3 · V0 = VA + VB + VC
If the displacement voltage is directly applied to the device, then V0 is the voltage at the device terminals. It is
not affected by parameter Vph / Vdelta (address 206).
Fault Log, Ground Fault Log, Fault Recording
Parameter Dir. Interm. EF allows you to define the type of fault handling and fault logging. If set to ON,
tripping is possible and a fault log is generated. If set to ON with ON with GF log, tripping is possible, a
fault log and a ground fault log are generated. If set to Alarm Only, no tripping is possible. Only an alarm is
generated. Furthermore, only a ground fault log is created.
The raising pickup of the function (indication 6972
dIEF pick up
) is the criterion for opening the ground
fault log.
Logic Diagram
The following figure shows the logic diagram of the directional intermittent ground fault protection function.
Functions
2.14 Dir. Intermittent earth fault protection
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 205
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[7sj62-64-iefger-logik-20120611, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-89 Logic diagram of the directional intermittent ground fault protection
Direction Determination
The ground fault is detected by evaluating the fundamental component of the displacement voltage. The
sensitivity is determined using the settable threshold value Vgnd> / 3V0>. Direction determination is started
after the ground fault has been detected. For this purpose, the igniting current pulses are extracted from the
ground current signal. The igniting current pulse and the associated maximum displacement voltage over time
are compared with regard to their phase relationship. The fault direction forward or reverse is derived from
this comparison. Each detected ignition pulse receives a direction information. If no clear direction determina-
tion is possible, the direction information pertaining to the pulse is undefined. The direction results of the
recurring ignition pulses are counted and are available as value indication if their value is different than zero.
Pickup
The setting of parameter Pickup defines under which conditions pickup is detected and fault recording
started. For with with Vgnd/3V0>, pickup is initiated once the threshold Vgnd> / 3V0> has been
exceeded. For with oper. dir., pickup is initiated when a pulse is detected in the direction specified at
Functions
2.14 Dir. Intermittent earth fault protection
206 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
address 3402. The pickup disappears when the displacement voltage has fallen below the threshold Vgnd> /
3V0> and the time Monitoring time has expired.
Alarm/Trip
The setting of parameter Direction defines whether the function operates in forward or in reverse direc-
tion. The pulses in the specified direction are counted. If the pulse counter reaches the threshold value set in
parameter No. of pulses, the function trips or generates an alarm. It is possible that not every ignition
pulse is recognized as such. If two ignition pulses are very close to one another in respect of time, they may
not be detected separately. This is not relevant from the protection perspective, because during an intermit-
tent fault many ignition pulses occur and the counter threshold is certainly reached.
The directional pulse counter is reset under the following conditions:
•A different direction than the set Direction is detected. An undefined direction result does not reset
the counter.
•The monitoring time Monitoring time has elapsed. No other pulse in the set direction was detected
during that time. This time can be understood as a criterion for the disappearing of the intermittent fault.
The function thus also drops out if the intermittent fault develops into a static fault.
•V0 is lower than the set threshold Vgnd> / 3V0> and the time Monitoring time has expired.
Interaction with other Functions
The directional intermittent ground fault protection does not interact with the automatic reclosing function.
The function cannot start the automatic reclosing function.
The directional intermittent ground fault protection interacts with the circuit-breaker failure protection. The
function starts the circuit-breaker failure protection.
Setting Notes
General
Configuration of the protection functions at address 134 Dir. Interm. EF defines whether the directional
intermittent ground fault protection is Enabled Disabled.
At address 3401 Dir. Interm. EF the directional ground fault protection is switched on or off. The
following setting options are available:
•ON enables the function with tripping and fault record log.
•ON with GF log enables the function with tripping, fault record log and ground fault log.
•Alarm Only generates the ground fault log only. Tripping and fault record log are not possible.
•OFF disables the function.
The pickup threshold for the displacement voltage is set at address 3405 Vgnd> / 3V0>. Exceeding this
threshold is the criterion for detecting the intermittent ground fault.
The direction to be protected Forward or Reverse is set in address 3402 Direction.
Address 3403 No. of pulses allows you to specify how many pulses must be detected in the set direction
before the alarm or tripping is initiated. It is possible that not every ignition pulse is recognized as such. If two
ignition pulses are very close to one another in respect of time, they may not be detected separately. This is
not relevant from the protection perspective, because during an intermittent fault many ignition pulses occur
and the counter threshold is certainly reached.
At address 3404 Monitoring time you set the monitoring time after detection of the direction pulse in the
direction parameterized at 3402. If the time has expired before the number set at 3403 No. of pulses has
been reached, the associated counter is reset. This time is a criterion for the disappearing of the intermittent
fault.
At address 3406 Pickup you can set the criterion for the pickup of the function. For with with Vgnd/3V0>
pickup takes place as soon as the threshold Vgnd> / 3V0> has been exceeded, regardless of whether a real
2.14.2
Functions
2.14 Dir. Intermittent earth fault protection
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 207
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
intermittent ground fault is present or not. For with oper. dir., recording starts when a direction pulse in
the direction parameterized at 3402 has been detected.
Settings
Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments
3401 Dir. Interm. EF OFF
ON
ON with GF log
Alarm Only
OFF Dir. Intermittent earth fault
protection
3402 Direction Forward
Reverse
Forward Direction to be protected
3403 No. of pulses 2 .. 50 5 Pulse no. for detecting the interm.
E/F
3404 Monitoring time 0.04 .. 10.00 sec 2.00 sec Monitoring time after pickup
detected
3405 Vgnd> / 3V0> 2.0 .. 100.0 V 20.0 V Vgnd> measured / 3V0> calcu-
lated
3406 Pickup with Vgnd/3V0>
with oper. dir.
with Vgnd/3V0> Pickup of the function
Information List
No. Information Type of
Informa-
tion
Comments
6951 >dIEF block SP >Block directional interm. E/F prot.
6961 dIEF OFF OUT Dir. Interm. E/F prot. is switched off
6962 dIEF blocked OUT Dir. Interm. E/F prot. is blocked
6963 dIEF active OUT Dir. Interm. E/F prot. is active
6972 dIEF pick up OUT dIEF: pick up
6973 dIEF TRIP OUT dIEF: Trip
6974 No.forward= VI dIEF: No. of detected forward pulses =
6975 No.reverse= VI dIEF: No. of detected reverse pulses =
6976 No.undef.= VI dIEF: No. of detected undefined pulses =
6979 dIEF ALARM OUT dIEF: Alarm
2.14.3
2.14.4
Functions
2.14 Dir. Intermittent earth fault protection
208 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Automatic Reclosing System 79
From experience, about 85 % of insulation faults associated with overhead lines are arc short circuits which
are temporary in nature and disappear when protection takes effect. This means that the line can be
connected again. The reconnection is accomplished after a dead time via the automatic reclosure function.
If the fault still exists after automatic reclosure (arc has not disappeared, there is a metallic fault), then the
protective elements will re-trip the circuit breaker. In some systems, several reclosing attempts are performed.
Applications
•The automatic reclosure system integrated in the 7SJ80 can also be controlled by an external protection
device (e.g. backup protection). For this application, a signal exchange must occur between 7SJ80 and
the external protection device via binary inputs and outputs.
•It is also possible to allow the relay 7SJ80 to work in conjunction with an external reclosing device.
•The automatic reclosure system can also operate in interaction with the integrated synchronization func-
tion or with an external synchrocheck.
•Since the automatic reclosing function is not applied when the 7SJ80 is used to protect generators,
motors, transformers, cables and reactors etc., it should be disabled for this application.
Program Execution
The 7SJ80 is equipped with an integrated three-pole, single-shot and multi-shot automatic reclosure (AR).
Figure 2-100 shows an example of a timing diagram for a successful second reclosure.
2.15
2.15.1
Functions
2.15 Automatic Reclosing System 79
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 209
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[ablaufdiagramm-2-malige-wiedereinschaltung-erfolgreich-260602-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-90 Timing diagram showing two reclosing shots, first cycle unsuccessful, second cycle successful
The following figure shows an example of a timing diagram showing for two unsuccessful reclosing shots,
with no additional reclosing of the circuit breaker.
The number of reclose commands initiated by the automatic reclosure function are counted. A statistical
counter is available for this purpose for the first and all subsequent reclosing commands.
Functions
2.15 Automatic Reclosing System 79
210 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[ablaufdiagramm-2-malige-wiedereinschaltung-erfolglos-260602-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-91 Timing diagram showing two unsuccessful reclosing shots
Initiation
Initiation of the automatic reclosing function can be caused by internal protection functions or externally via
binary inputs. The automatic reclosing function can be programmed in such manner that any of the elements
of the following Table can initiate (Starts 79), not initiate (No influence), or block reclosing (Stops
79):
Table 2-14 Anwurf AWE
Non-directional start Directional start Start other
50-1 67-1 Senitive Ground Fault Protection
(50Ns, 51Ns)
50N-1 67N-1 Negative Sequence Protection 46
50-2 67-2 BINARY INPUT
50-3 67-3
50N-2 67N-2
50N-3 67N-3
51 67-TOC
51N 67N-TOC
On initiation, the automatic reclosure function is informed that a trip command was issued and the respective
reclosing program is now being executed.
The binary input messages 2715
>Start 79 Gnd
and 2716
>Start 79 Ph
for starting an automatic reclo-
sure program can also be activated via CFC (fast PLC task processing). Automatic reclosure can thus be initi-
ated via any messages (e.g. protective pickup) if address 7164 BINARY INPUTis set to Starts 79.
Functions
2.15 Automatic Reclosing System 79
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 211
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Action Time
The action time (address 7117) monitors the time between a device pickup and the trip command of a protec-
tion function configured as starter. The action time is launched when pickup of any function is detected,
which is set as source of the automatic reclosure program. Protection functions which are set to Alarm Only
or which in principle should not start a reclosing program do not trigger the action time.
If a protection function configured as starter initiates a trip command during the action time, the automatic
reclosure program is started. Trip commands of a protection function configured as starter occurring in the
time between expiration of the action time and dropout of the device pickup cause the dynamic blocking of
the automatic reclosing program. Trip commands of protection functions which are not configured as starter
do not affect the action time.
If the automatic reclosure program interacts with an external protection device, the general device pickup for
starting the operating time is communicated to the automatic reclosing program via binary input 2711
>79
Start
.
Delay of Dead Time Start
After start of the automatic reclosure function, the dead time start can be delayed by pickup of the binary
input message 2754
>79 DT St.Delay
. The dead time is not initiated as long as the binary input is active.
Start occurs only on cleared binary input. The delay of the dead time start can be monitored via parameter
7118 T DEAD DELAY. If the time elapses and the binary input is still active, the Automatic Reclosing System
79 changes to the status of the dynamic blocking via (2785
79 DynBlock
). The maximum time delay of the
dead time start is logged by message 2753
79 DT delay ex.
.
Reclosing Programs
Depending on the type of fault, two different reclosing programs can be used. Here the following applies:
•The single phase fault (ground fault) reclosing program applies if all fault protection functions that
initiate automatic reclosure detected a phase-to-ground fault. The following conditions must apply: only
one phase, only one phase and ground or only ground have picked up. This program can also be started
via a binary input.
•The multiple phase fault (phase fault) reclosing program applies to all other cases. That is, when
elements associated with two or more phases pick up, with or without the pickup of ground elements,
such as negative sequence elements. This program can be started via a binary input as well.
The reclosure program evaluates only elements during pickup as elements dropping out may corrupt the result
if they drop out at different times when opening the circuit breaker. Therefore, the ground fault reclosure
program is executed only when the elements associated with one particular phase pick up until the circuit
breaker is opened; all others conditions will initiate the phase fault program.
For each of the programs, up to 9 reclosing attempts can be separately programmed. The first four reclosing
attempts can be set differently for each of the two reclosing programs. The fifth and each of the following
automatic reclosures will correspond to the fourth dead time.
Reclosing Before Selectivity
For the automatic reclosure sequence to be successful, faults on any part of the line must be cleared from the
feeding line end(s) within the same – shortest possible – time. Usually, therefore, an instantaneous protection
element is set to operate before an automatic reclosure. Fast fault termination has thus priority over selectivity
aspects as the reclosing action aims at maintaining normal system operation. For this purpose, all protection
functions which can initiate the automatic reclosure function are set in such manner that they may trip instan-
taneously or with a very small time delay before automatic reclosure.
With the final reclosing attempt, i.e. when no automatic reclosing is expected, protection is to trip with delay
according to the grading coordination chart of the system, since selectivity has priority.For details see also
information at margin heading "Interaction with the Automatic Reclosing Function" which can be found with
the setting notes of the overcurrent protection functions and the functional description of the intermittent
ground fault protection.
Functions
2.15 Automatic Reclosing System 79
212 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Single-Shot Reclosing
When a trip signal is programmed to initiate the automatic reclosure, the appropriate automatic reclosing
program will be executed. Once the circuit breaker has opened, a dead time interval in accordance with the
type of fault is started (see also margin heading "Reclosing Programs"). Once the dead time interval has
elapsed, a closing signal is issued to reclose the circuit breaker. A blocking time interval TIME RESTRAINT is
started at the same time. Within this restraint time it is checked whether the automatic reclosure was
performed successfully. If a new fault occurs before the restraint time elapses, the automatic reclosing func-
tion is dynamically blocked causing the final tripping of the circuit breaker. The dead time can be set individu-
ally for each of the two reclosing programs.
Criteria for opening the circuit breaker may either be the auxiliary contacts of the circuit breaker or the
dropout of the general device pickup if auxiliary contacts are not configured.
If the fault is cleared (successful reclosing attempt), the blocking time expires and automatic reclosing is reset
in anticipation of a future fault. The fault is terminated.
If the fault has not been cleared (unsuccessful reclosing attempt), then a final trip signal is initiated by one or
more protective elements.
Multi-shot Reclosing
7SJ80 permits up to 9 reclosings. The number can be set differently for the phase fault reclosing program and
the ground fault reclosing program.
The first reclose cycle is, in principle, the same as the single-shot auto-reclosing. If the first reclosing attempt is
unsuccessful, this does not result in a final trip, but in a reset of the restraint time interval and start of the next
reclose cycle with the next dead time. This can be repeated until the set number of reclosing attempts for the
corresponding reclose program has been reached.
The dead time intervals preceding the first four reclosing attempts can be set differently for each of the two
reclosing programs. The dead time intervals preceding the fifth reclosing attempts will be equal to the dead
time interval that precedes the fourth reclosing attempt.
If one of the reclosing attempts is successful, i.e. the fault disappeared after reclosure, the restraint time
expires and the automatic reclosing function is reset. The fault is cleared.
If none of the reclosing attempts is successful, then a final circuit breaker trip (according to the grading coordi-
nation chart) will take place after the last allowable reclosing attempt has been performed by the protection
function. All reclosing attempts were unsuccessful.
After the final circuit breaker tripping, the automatic reclosing function is dynamically blocked (see below).
Blocking Time
The function of the blocking time has already been described under section "Single-/Multi-Shot Reclosing". The
blocking time can be prolonged if the following conditions have been fulfilled.
The time 211 TMax CLOSE CMD defines the maximum time during which a close command can apply. If a
new trip command occurs before this time has run out, the close command will be canceled. If the time TMax
CLOSE CMD is set longer than the restraint time TIME RESTRAINT, the restraint time will be extended to the
remaining close command duration after expiry!
A pickup from a protection function that is set to initiate the automatic reclosing function will also lead to an
extension of the blocking time should it occur during this time!
Blocking
Static Blocking
Static blocking means that the automatic reclosing function is not ready to initiate reclosing, and cannot
initiate reclosing as long as the blocking signal is present. A corresponding message
79 is NOT ready
(FNo. 2784) is generated. The static blocking signal is also used internally to block the protection elements
that are only supposed to work when reclosing is enabled (see also side title "Reclosing Before Selectivity"
further above).
The automatic reclosing function is statically blocked if:
2.15.2
Functions
2.15 Automatic Reclosing System 79
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 213
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
•The signal
>BLOCK 79
FNo. 2703) is present at a binary input, as long as the automatic reclosing func-
tion is not initiated (associated message:
>BLOCK 79
),
•The signal
>CB Ready
(FNo. 2730) indicates that the circuit breaker disappears via the binary input, if
the automatic reclosing function is not initiated (associated message:
>CB Ready
),
•The number of allowable reclosing attempts set for both reclosing programs is zero (associated message:
79 no cycle
),
•No protection functions (parameters 7150 to 7163) or binary inputs are set to initiate the automatic
reclosing function (associated message:
79 no starter
),
•The circuit breaker position is reported as being "open" and no trip command applies (associated
message:
79 BLK: CB open
). This presumes that 7SJ80 is informed of the circuit breaker position via
the auxiliary contacts of the circuit breaker.
Dynamic Blocking
Dynamic blocking of the automatic reclosing function occurs in those cases where the reclosing program is
active and one of the conditions for blocking is fulfilled. The dynamic blocking is signaled by the message
79
DynBlock
. The dynamic blocking is associated with the configurable blocking time SAFETY 79 ready. This
blocking time is usually started by a blocking condition that has been fulfilled. After the blocking time has
elapsed, the device checks whether or not the blocking condition can be reset. If the blocking condition is still
present or if a new blocking condition is fulfilled, the blocking time is restarted. If, however, the blocking
condition no longer exists after the blocking time has elapsed, the dynamic blocking will be reset.
Dynamic blocking is initiated if:
•The maximum number of reclosure attempts has been achieved. If a trip command now occurs within
the dynamic blocking time, the automatic reclosure program will be blocked dynamically (indicated by
79
Max. No. Cyc
).
•The protection function has detected a three-phase fault and the device is programmed not to reclose
after three-phase faults (indicated by
79 BLK:3ph p.u.
).
•if the maximum waiting period T DEAD DELAY for the delay of the dead time initiation by binary inputs
expires without binary input
>79 DT St.Delay
having been disabled during this time period.
•The action time has elapsed without a TRIP command being issued. Each TRIP command that occurs after
the action time has expired and before the picked-up element drops out, will initiate the dynamic
blocking (indicated by
79 Tact expired
).
•A protection function trips which is to block the automatic reclosure function (as configured). This applies
irrespective of the status of the automatic reclosure system (started / not started) if a TRIP command of a
blocking element occurs (indicated by
79 BLK by trip
).
•The circuit breaker failure function is initiated.
•The circuit breaker does not trip within the configured time T-Start MONITOR after a trip command
was issued, thus leading to the assumption that the circuit breaker has failed. (The breaker failure moni-
toring is primarily intended for commissioning purposes. Commissioning safety checks are often
conducted with the circuit breaker disconnected. The breaker failure monitoring prevents unexpected
reclosing after the circuit breaker has been reconnected, indicated by
79 T-Start Exp
).
•wenn der Leistungsschalter nach Ablauf der Leistungsschalterüberwachungszeit nicht schaltbereit ist,
vorausgesetzt die Leistungsschalterabfrage ist wirksam gestellt (Adresse 7113 CHECK CB? = Chk each
cycle, signalisiert durch die Meldung
79 T-CBreadyExp
),
•The circuit breaker is not ready after maximum extension of the dead time Max. DEAD EXT.. The moni-
toring of the circuit breaker status and the synchrocheck may cause undesired extension of the dead
time. To prevent the automatic reclosure system from assuming an undefined state, the extension of the
dead time is monitored. The extension time is started when the regular dead time has elapsed. When it
has elapsed, the automatic reclosure function is blocked dynamically and the lock-out time launched. The
automatic reclosure system resumes normal state when the lock-out time has elapsed and new blocking
conditions do not apply (indicated by
79 TdeadMax Exp
) .
Functions
2.15 Automatic Reclosing System 79
214 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
•Manual closing has been detected (externally) and parameter BLOCK MC Dur. (T ≠ 0) was set so that
the automatic reclosing function responds to manual closing,
•Via a correspondingly routed binary input (FNo. 2703
>BLOCK 79
). If the blocking takes places while the
automatic recloser is in normal state, the latter will be blocked statically (
79 is NOT ready
). The
blocking is terminated immediately when the binary input has been cleared and the automatic reclosure
function resumes normal state. If the automatic reclosure function is already running when the blocking
arrives, the dynamic blocking takes effect (
79 DynBlock
). In this case, the activation of the binary input
starts the dynamic blocking time SAFETY 79 ready. Upon its expiration, the device checks if the binary
input is still activated. If this is the case, the automatic reclosure program changes from dynamic blocking
to static blocking. If the binary input is no longer active when the time has elapsed and if no new
blocking conditions apply, the automatic reclosure system resumes normal state.
Status Recognition and Monitoring of the Circuit Breaker
Circuit Breaker Status
The detection of the actual circuit breaker status is necessary for the correct functionality of the automatic
reclosure function. The circuit breaker status is detected by the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts and is
communicated to the device via binary inputs 4602
>52-b
and 4601
>52-a
.
Here the following applies:
•If binary input 4601
>52-a
and binary input 4602
>52-b
are used, the automatic reclosure function can
detect whether the circuit breaker is open, closed or in intermediate position. If both auxiliary contacts
detect that the circuit breaker is open, the dead time is started. If the circuit breaker is open or in inter-
mediate position without a trip command being present, the automatic reclosure function is blocked
dynamically if it is already running. If the automatic reclosure system is in normal state, it will be blocked
statically. When checking whether a trip command applies, all trip commands of the device are taken into
account irrespective of whether the function acts as starting or blocking element on behalf of the auto-
matic reclosure program.
•If only the binary input 4601
>52-a
is allocated, the circuit breaker is considered open if the binary input
is not active. If the binary input gets inactive while no trip command of (any) function applies, the auto-
matic reclosure function is blocked. The blocking will be of static nature if the automatic reclosure func-
tion is in normal state at this time. If the automatic reclosing function is already running, there will be a
dynamic blocking. The dead time is started if the binary input gets inactive following the trip command of
a starting element (4601
>52-a
= inactive). An intermediate position of the circuit breaker cannot be
detected for this type of allocation.
•If binary input 4602
>52-b
alone is allocated, the circuit breaker is considered open while the binary
input is active. If the binary input gets active while no trip command of (any) function applies, the auto-
matic reclosure function is blocked dynamically provided it is already running. Otherwise, there will be a
static blocking. The dead time is started if the binary input gets active following the trip command of a
starting element. An intermediate position of the circuit breaker cannot be detected for this type of allo-
cation.
•If neither binary input 4602
>52-b
nor 4601
>52-a
are allocated, the automatic reclosure program
cannot detect the position of the circuit breaker. In this case, the automatic reclosure function will be
controlled exclusively via pickups and trip commands. Monitoring for "52-b without TRIP" and starting the
dead time in dependence of the circuit breaker feedback is not possible in this case.
Circuit Breaker Monitoring
The time needed by the circuit breaker to perform a complete reclose cycle can be monitored by the 7SJ80.
Breaker failure is detected:
A precondition for a reclosing attempt, following a trip command initiated by a protective relay element and
subsequent initiation of the automatic reclosing function, is that the circuit breaker is ready for at least one
TRIP-CLOSE-TRIP cycle. The readiness of the circuit breaker is monitored by the device using a binary input
>CB
Ready
. In the case where this signal from the breaker is not available, the circuit breaker monitoring feature
should be disabled, otherwise reclosing attempts will remain blocked.
2.15.3
Functions
2.15 Automatic Reclosing System 79
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 215
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
•Especially when multiple reclosing attempts are programmed, it is a good idea to monitor the circuit
breaker condition not only prior to the first but also to each reclosing attempt. A reclosing attempt will be
blocked until the binary input indicates that the circuit breaker is ready to complete another CLOSE-TRIP
cycle.
•The time needed by the circuit-breaker to regain the ready state can be monitored by the 7SJ80. The
monitoring time CB TIME OUT expires for as long as the circuit breaker does not indicate that it is ready
via binary input
>CB Ready
(FNo. 2730). That means if the binary input
>CB Ready
is cleared, the
monitoring time CB TIME OUT is started. If the binary input returns before the monitoring time has
elapsed, the monitoring time will be canceled and the reclosure process is continued. If the monitoring
time runs longer than the dead time, the dead time will be extended accordingly. If the monitoring time
elapses before the circuit breaker signals its readiness, the automatic reclosure function will be blocked
dynamically.
Interaction with the synchronism check may cause the dead time to extend inadmissibly. To prevent the auto-
matic reclosure function from remaining in an undefined state, dead time extension is monitored. The
maximum extension of the dead time can be set at Max. DEAD EXT.. The monitoring time Max. DEAD
EXT. is started when the regular dead time has elapsed. If the synchronism check responds before the time
has elapsed, the monitoring time will be stopped and the close command generated. If the time expires before
the synchronism check reacts, the automatic reclosure function will be blocked dynamically.
Please make sure that the above mentioned time is not shorter than the monitoring time CB TIME OUT.
The time 7114 T-Start MONITOR serves for monitoring the response of the automatic reclosure function to
a breaker failure. It is activated by a trip command arriving before or during a reclosing operation and marks
the time that passes between tripping and opening of the circuit breaker. If the time elapses, the device
assumes a breaker failure and the automatic reclosure function is blocked dynamically. If parameter T-Start
MONITOR is set to ∞, the start monitoring is disabled.
Controlling Protection Elements
Depending on the reclosing cycle it is possible to control elements of the directional and non-directional over-
current protection by means of the automatic reclosure system (Protective Elements Control). There are three
mechanisms:
•Time overcurrent protection and the sensitive ground fault protection elements may trip instantaneously
depending on the automatic reclosure cycle (T = 0), they may remain unaffected by the auto reclosing
function AR (T = T) or may be blocked (T = ∞). For further information see side title "Cyclic Control".
•The automatic reclosing states "Auto Reclosing ready" and "Auto Reclosing not ready" can activate or
deactivate the dynamic cold load pickup function. This function is designed to influence overcurrent
stages (see also Section 2.16.6 and Section 2.15.6 Setting Notes) regarding thresholds and tripping time
delays.
•The time overcurrent protection parameter 1X14A 50(N)-2 ACTIVE or 1X16A 50(N)-3 ACTIVE defines
whether the elements 50(N)-2 or 50(N)-3 are to operate always or only with "79M Auto Reclosing
ready"(see Section 2.2 Overcurrent Protection 50, 51, 50N, 51N).
Cyclic Control
Control of the time overcurrent protection and sensitive ground fault protection elements takes effect by
releasing the cycle marked by the corresponding parameter. The cycle zone release is indicated by the
messages
79 1.CycZoneRel
to
79 4.CycZoneRel
. If the automatic reclosure function is in normal state,
the settings for the starting cycle apply. These settings always take effect when the automatic reclosure func-
tion assumes normal state.
The settings are released for each following cycle when issuing the close command and starting the blocking
time. Following a successful reclosure (blocking time expired) or after returning from the blocking, the auto-
matic reclosure function goes into normal state. Control of the protection is again assumed by the parameters
for the starting cycle.
The following figure illustrates the control of the protection elements 50-2 and 50N-2.
2.15.4
Functions
2.15 Automatic Reclosing System 79
216 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[schutzstufensteuerung-bei-zweimaliger-erfolgreicher-awe-260602-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-92 Control of protection elements for two-fold, successful automatic reclosure
Example
Before the first reclosing, faults are to be eliminated quickly applying elements 50-2 or 50N-2. Fast fault termi-
nation thus has priority over selectivity aspects as the reclosing action aims at maintaining normal system
operation. If the fault prevails, a second tripping is to take place instantaneously and subsequently, a second
reclosing.
After the second reclosing, however, elements 50-2 or 50N-2 are to be blocked so the fault can be eliminated
by applying elements 50-1 or 50N-1 according to the grading coordination chart of the system giving priority
to selectivity concerns.
Addresses 7202 bef.1.Cy:50-2, 7214 bef.2.Cy:50-2 and 7203 bef.1.Cy:50N-2 und 7215 bef.
2.Cy:50N-2 are set to instant. T=0 to enable the elements after the first reclosing. Addresses 7226 bef.
3.Cy:50-2 and 7227 bef.3.Cy:50N-2, however, are set to blocked T=∞, to ensure that elements 50-2
and 50N-2 are blocked when the second reclosing applies. The back-up elements, e.g. 50-1 and 50N-1, must
obviously not be blocked (addresses 7200, 7201, 7212, 7213, 7224 and 7225).
The blocking applies only after reclosure in accordance with the set address. Hence, it is possible to specify
again other conditions for a third reclosure.
Functions
2.15 Automatic Reclosing System 79
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 217
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
The blocking conditions are also valid for the zone sequence coordination, provided it is available and acti-
vated (address 7140, see also margin heading "Zone Sequencing").
Zone Sequencing / Fuse Saving Scheme
Zone Sequencing / Fuse Saving Scheme is not available for models 7SJ6***-**A**-.
It is the task of the zone sequence coordination to harmonize the automatic reclosure function of this device
with that of another device that forms part of the same power system. It is a complementary function to the
automatic reclosure function and allows, for example, to perform group reclosing operations in radial systems.
In case of multiple reclosures, groups may also be in nested arrangement and further high-voltage fuses can
be overgraded or undergraded.
Zone sequencing works by blocking certain protection functions depending on the reclosing cycle. This is
implemented by the protection elements control (see margin heading "Controlling Protection Elements").
As a special feature, changing from one reclosing cycle to the next is possible without trip command only via
pickup/dropout of 50-1 or 50N-1.
The following figure shows an example of a group reclosure at feeder 3. It is assumed that reclosure is
performed twice.
With fault F1 on feeder 5, protection devices in the infeed and on feeder 3 pick up. The time delay of the 50-2
element at protecting feeder 3 is set in such a way that the feeder 3 circuit breaker will clear the fault before
the fuse at feeder 5 is damaged. If the fault is cleared, all functions are reset after the restraint time has
expired and the fault is terminated. The fuse has therefore also been protected.
If the fault continues to exist, a second reclosing cycle is performed in the same way.
High speed element 50-2 is now blocked at relay protecting Feeder 3. If the fault still remains, only the 50-1
element continues to be active in Feeder 3 which, however, overgrades the fuse with a time delay of 0.4 s.
After the fuse operated to clear the fault, the series-connected devices drop out. If the fuse fails to clear the
fault, then the 50-1 element protecting Feeder 3 will operate as backup protection.
The 50-2 element at the busbar relay is set with a delay of 0.4 seconds, since it supposed to trip the 50-2
elements and the fuses as well. For the second reclosing, the 50-2 element also has to be blocked to give pref-
erence to the feeder relay (50-1 element with 0.4 s). For this purpose, the device has to "know" that two
reclosing attempts have already been performed.
In this device, zone sequence coordination must be switched on: When pickup of 50-1 or 50N-1 drops out,
zone sequence coordination provokes that the reclosing attempts are counted as well. If the fault still persists
after the second reclosure, the 50-1 element, which is set to 0.9 seconds, would serve as backup protection.
For the busbar fault F2, the 50-2 element at the bus would have cleared the fault in 0.4 seconds. Zone
sequencing enables the user to set a relatively short time period for the 50-2 elements. The 50-1 element is
only used as backup protection. If zone sequencing is not applied, the 50-1 element is to be used only with its
relatively long time period (0.9 s).
[ablaufkoordinierung-fehler-am-abgang-5-ss-260602-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-93 Zone sequencing with a fault occurring at Tap Line 5 and at the busbar
2.15.5
Functions
2.15 Automatic Reclosing System 79
218 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Setting Notes
General Settings
The internal automatic reclosure function will only be effective and accessible if address 171 79 Auto Recl.
is set Enabled during configuration. If not required, this function is set to Disabled. The function can be
turned ON or OFF under address 7101 FCT 79.
If no automatic reclosures are performed on the feeder for which the 7SJ80 is used (e.g. cables, transformers,
motors, etc.), the automatic reclosure function is disabled by configuration. The automatic reclosure function
is then completely disabled, i.e. the automatic reclosure function is not processed in the 7SJ80. No messages
exist for this purpose and binary inputs for the automatic reclosure function are ignored. All parameters of
block 71 are inaccessible and of no significance.
Blocking Duration for Manual-CLOSE Detection
Parameter 7103 BLOCK MC Dur. defines the reaction of the automatic reclosure function when a manual
closing signal is detected. The parameter can be set to specify how long the auto reclosure function will be
blocked dynamically in case of an external Manual close-command being detected via binary input (356
>Manual Close
). If the setting is 0, the automatic reclosure function will not respond to a Manual close
signal.
Restraint Time and Dynamic Blocking
The blocking time TIME RESTRAINT(address 7105) defines the time that must elapse, after a successful
reclosing attempt, before the automatic reclosing function is reset. If a protective function configured for
initiation of the automatic reclosure function provokes a new trip before this time elapses, the next reclosing
cycle is started in case of multiple reclosures. If no further reclosure is allowed, the last reclosure will be
classed as unsuccessful.
In general, a few seconds are sufficient. In areas with frequent thunderstorms or storms, a shorter blocking
time may be necessary to avoid feeder lockout due to sequential lightning strikes or flashovers.
A longer restraint time should be chosen if there is no possibility to monitor the circuit breaker (see below)
during multiple reclosing (e.g. because of missing auxiliary contacts and information on the circuit breaker
ready status). In this case, the restraint time should be longer than the time required for the circuit breaker
mechanism to be ready.
If a dynamic blocking of the automatic reclosing function was initiated, then reclosing functions remain
blocked until the cause of the blocking has been cleared. The functional description gives further information
on this topic, see side title "Dynamic Blocking". The dynamic blocking is associated with the configurable
blocking time SAFETY 79 ready. Blocking time is usually started by a blocking condition that has picked up.
Circuit Breaker Monitoring
Reclosing after a fault clearance presupposes that the circuit breaker is ready for at least one TRIP-CLOSE-TRIP
cycle at the time when the reclosing function is initiated (i.e. at the beginning of a trip command):
The readiness of the circuit breaker is monitored by the device using a binary input
>CB Ready
(FNo. 2730).
•It is possible to check the status of the circuit breaker before each reclosure or to disable this option
(address 7113, CHECK CB?):
CHECK CB? = No check, deactivates the circuit breaker check,
CHECK CB? = Chk each cycle, to verify the circuit breaker status before each reclosing command.
Checking the status of the circuit breaker is usually recommended. Should the breaker not provide such a
signal, you can disable the circuit breaker check at address 7113 CHECK CB? (No check), as otherwise
auto-reclosure would be impossible.
The status monitoring time CB TIME OUT can be configured at address 7115 if the circuit breaker check
was enabled at address 7113. This time is set slightly higher than the maximum recovery time of the
circuit breaker following reclosure. If the circuit breaker is not ready after the time has expired, reclosing
is omitted and dynamic blocking is initiated. Automatic reclosure thus is blocked.
Time Max. DEAD EXT. serves for monitoring the dead time extension. The extension can be initiated by the
circuit breaker monitoring time CB TIME OUT and by an external synchronism check.
2.15.6
Functions
2.15 Automatic Reclosing System 79
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 219
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
The monitoring time Max. DEAD EXT. is started after the configured dead time has elapsed.
This time must not be shorter than CB TIME OUT. When using the monitoring time CB TIME OUT, the time
Max. DEAD EXT. should be set to a value ≥ CB TIME OUT.
Since the synchronization is used as synchrocheck, the monitoring time can be set quite short, for example to
a few seconds. The synchronization function merely "checks" the synchronism of the power systems. If
synchronism is detected, it will be connected instantaneously, otherwise it will not.
Generally, the monitoring time should be longer than the maximum duration of the synchronization process
(parameter 6112).
The breaker failure monitoring time 7114 T-Start MONITOR determines the time between tripping (closing
the trip contact) and opening the circuit breaker (checkback of the CB auxiliary contacts or disappearing device
pickup if no auxiliary contacts are allocated). This time is started each time a tripping operation takes place.
When time has elapsed, the device assumes breaker failure and blocks the automatic reclosure function
dynamically.
Action Time
The action time monitors the time between pickup of the device and trip command of a protective function
configured as starter while the automatic reclosure function is ready but not yet running. A trip command
issued by a protective function configured as starter occurring within the action time will start the automatic
reclosing function. If this time differs from the setting value of T-ACTION (address 7117), the automatic
reclosure function will be blocked dynamically. The trip time of inverse tripping characteristics is considerably
determined by the fault location or fault resistance. The action time prevents reclosing in case of far remote or
high-resistance faults with long tripping time. Trip commands of protective functions which are not config-
ured as starter do not affect the action time.
Delay of Dead Time Start
The dead time start can be delayed by pickup of the binary input message 2754
>79 DT St.Delay
. The
maximum time for this can be parameterized under 7118 T DEAD DELAY. The binary input message must be
deactivated again within this time in order to start the dead time. The exact sequence is described in the func-
tional description at margin heading "Delay of Dead Time Start".
Number of Reclosing Attempts
The number of reclosing attempts can be set separately for the "phase program" (address7136, # OF RECL.
PH) and "ground program" (address 7135 # OF RECL. GND). The exact definition of the programs is
described in the functional description at margin heading "Reclosing Programs".
Close Command: Direct or via Control
Address 7137 Cmd.via control can be set to either generate directly the close command via the automatic
reclosing function (setting Cmd.via control = none) or have the closing initiated by the control function.
If the automatic reclosure function is to be closed via the control function, the manual closing command has
to be suppressed during an automatic reclose command. The example in the Section 2.2.11 Setting Notes of a
MANUAL CLOSE for commands via the integrated control function has to be extended in this case (see
Figure 2-94). The messages 2878
79 L-N Sequence
and 2879
79 L-L Sequence
indicate that the AR has
been started and wants to carry out a reclosure after the dead time. The annunciations set the flipflop and
suspend the manual signal until the AR has finished the reclosure attempts. The flipflop is reset via the OR-
combination of the annunciations 2784
79 is NOT ready
, 2785
79 DynBlock
and 2862
79
Successful
. Manual closing is initiated if a CLOSE command comes from the control function.
Functions
2.15 Automatic Reclosing System 79
220 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[cfc-logik-handein-awe-steuerung-140503-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-94 CFC logic for Manual Close with automatic reclosing via control
The selection list for parameter 7137 is created dynamically depending on the allocated switchgear compo-
nents. If one of the switchgear components is selected, usually the circuit breaker
52Breaker
, reclosure is
accomplished via control. In this case, the automatic reclosure function does not create a close command but
issues a close request. It is forwarded to the control which then takes over the switching. Thus, the properties
defined for the switchgear component such as interlocking and command times apply. Hence, it is possible
that the close command will not be carried out due to an applying interlocking condition.
If this behavior is not desired, the auto-reclose function can also generate the close command
79 Close
directly which must be allocated to the associated contact. The CFC chart as in Figure 2-94 is not needed in
this case.
Connection to the Internal Synchronism Check
The auto-reclose function can interact with the internal synchronization function of the device. If this is
desired as well as the Manual Close functionality, the CFC chart illustrated in Figure 2-94 is a definite prerequi-
site since the synchronization function always interacts with the control function. Additionally, one of the four
synchronization groups must be selected via parameter 7138 Internal SYNC. The synchronization condi-
tions for automatic reclosure are are thereby specified. In that case the selected synchronization group defines
the switchgear component to be used (usually the circuit breaker
52Breaker
). The defined switchgear
component and the one specified at 7137 Cmd.via control must be identical. Synchronous reclosing via
the close command
79 Close
is not possible.
If interaction with the internal synchronization is not desired, the CFC Chart, as in Figure 2-94, is not required
and the parameter 7138 is set to none.
Automatic Reclosure with External Synchronism Check
Parameter 7139 External SYNC can be set to determine that the automatic reclosure function operates
with external synchrocheck. An external synchronization is possible if the parameter is set to YES and the
device is connected to the external synchronization check via indication 2865
79 Sync.Request
and the
binary input
>Sync.release
.
Note: The automatic reclosure function cannot be connected to the internal and external synchrocheck at the
same time !
Initiation and Blocking of Automatic Reclosure by Protective Elements (configuration)
At addresses 7150 through 7164, and 7166 through 7174, reclosing can be started or blocked for various
types of protection functions. Together they constitute the wiring between protection elements and auto-
Functions
2.15 Automatic Reclosing System 79
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 221
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
matic reclosing function. Each address designates a protection element or protection function together with
its ANSI synonym, for example 50-2 for the high-set element 50-2 of the non-directional time overcurrent
protection (address 7152).
The setting options have the following meaning:
•Starts 79 the protective element initiates the automatic reclosure via its trip command;
No influence the protective element does not start the automatic reclosure, it may however be initi-
ated by other functions;
Stops 79 the protective element blocks the automatic reclosure, it cannot be started by other func-
tions; a dynamic blocking is initiated.
Dead Times (1st AR)
Addresses 7127 and 7128 are used to determine the duration of the dead times of the 1st cycle. The time
defined by this parameter is started when the circuit breaker opens (if auxiliary contacts are allocated) or
when the pickup drops out following the trip command of a starter. Dead time before first automatic reclosure
for reclosing program "Phase" is set in address 7127 DEADTIME 1: PH, for reclosing program "ground" in
address 7128 DEADTIME 1: G. The exact definition of the programs is described in the functional description
at margin heading "Reclosing Programs". The length of the dead time should relate to the type of application.
With longer lines, they should be long enough to make sure that the fault arc disappears and that the air
surrounding it is de-ionized and auto-reclosure can successfully take place (usually 0.9 s to 1.5 s). For lines
supplied by more than one side, mostly system stability has priority. Since the de-energized line cannot
transfer synchronizing energy, only short dead times are allowed. Standard values are 0.3 s to 0.6 s. In radial
systems, longer dead times are allowed.
Cyclic Control of Protective Functions via Automatic Reclosure
The addresses 7200 to 7211, 7248, 7249, 7256 and 7257 allow the different protection functions to be
controlled cyclically by the AR. This enables protection elements to be blocked selectively, set to operate
instantaneously or according to the configured delay times. The following settings are available:
The following options are available:
•Set value T=T The protection element is delayed as configured, i.e. the automatic reclosing function
does not effect this element;
instant. T=0 The protection element becomes instantaneous if the automatic reclosing function is
ready to perform the mentioned cycle;
blocked T=∞ The protection element is blocked if the auto-reclose function reaches the cycle defined
in the parameter. The element picks up, however, time expiry of the element is blocked by this setting.
Dead Times (2nd to 4th AR)
If more than one reclosing cycle was set, you can now configure the individual reclosing settings for the 2nd
to 4th cycle. The same options are available as for the first cycle.
For the 2nd cycle:
Adsress 7129 DEADTIME 2: PH Dead time for the 2nd reclosing attempt phase
Asdress 7130 DEADTIME 2: G Dead time for the 2nd reclosing attempt ground
Addresses 7212 to 7223,
7250, 7251, 7258, 7259
Cyclic control of the various protection functions by the 2nd reclosing
attempt
For the 3rd cycle:
Address 7131 DEADTIME 3: PH Dead time for the 3rd reclosing attempt phase
Address 7132 DEADTIME 3: G Dead time for the 3rd reclosing attempt ground
Addresses 7224 to 7235,
7252, 7253, 7260, 7261
Cyclic control of the various protection functions by the 3rd reclosing
attempt
For the 4th cycle:
Address 7133 DEADTIME 4: PH Dead time for the 4th reclosing attempt phase
Functions
2.15 Automatic Reclosing System 79
222 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Address 7134 DEADTIME 4: G Dead time for the 4th reclosing attempt ground
Addresses 7236 to 7247,
7254, 7255, 7262, 7263
Cyclic control of the various protection functions by the 4th reclosing
attempt
Fifth to Ninth Reclosing Attempt
If more than four cycles are configured, the dead times set for the fourth cycle also apply to the fifth to ninth
cycle.
Blocking Three-Phase Faults
Regardless of which reclosing program is executed, automatic reclosing can be blocked for trips following
three-phase faults (address 7165 3Pol.PICKUP BLK). The pickup of all three phases for a overcurrent
element is the criterion required.
Blocking of Automatic Rreclosure via Internal Control
The automatic reclosure function can be blocked, if control commands are issued via the integrated control
function of the device. The information must be routed via CFC (interlocking task-level) using the CMD_Infor-
mation function block (see the following figure).
[blockierung-der-wiedereinschaltautomatik-26-06-02-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-95 Blocking of the automatic reclose function using the internal control function
Zone Sequencing / Fuse Saving Scheme
At address 7140 ZONE SEQ.COORD., the zone sequencing feature can be turned ON or OFF.
If multiple reclosing operations are performed and the zone sequencing function is deactivated, only those
reclosing cycles are counted which the device has conducted after a trip command. If the zone sequencing
function is switched on, an additional sequence counter also counts such automatic reclosures which (in radial
systems) are carried out by relays connected on load side. This presupposes that the pickup of the 50-1/50N-1
elements drops out without a trip command being issued by a protection function starting the automatic
reclosing function. The parameters at addresses 7200 to 7263 (see paragraphs below at "Start and Blocking of
Automatic Reclosing by Protection Functions" and "Controlling Directional/Non-Directional Overcurrent Protec-
tion Elements via Cold Load Pickup") can thus be set to determine which protection elements are active or
blocked during what dead time cycles (for multiple reclosing attempts carried out by relays on the load side).
In the example shown in Figure "Zone sequencing with a fault occurring at Tap Line 5 and the busbar" (see
Figure 2-93) in the functional description, the zone sequencing was applied in the bus relay. Furthermore, as
from the second automatic reclosure, the 50-2 elements (also applicable to the 50-3 elements) must be
blocked, i.e. address 7214 bef.2.Cy:50-2 must be set to blocked T=∞. The zone sequencing of the
feeder relays is switched off but the 50-2 elements must also be blocked after the second reclosing attempt.
Moreover, it must be ensured that the 50-2 elements start the automatic reclosing function: Set address 7152
50-2 to Starts 79.
All settings of the 50-2 and 50-3 elements apply analogously to the 50N-2 and 50N-3 elements.
Controlling Overcurrent Protection Stages via Cold Load Pickup
The dynamic cold load pickup function provides a further alternative to control the protection via the auto-
matic reclosing function (see also Section 2.4 Dynamic Cold Load Pickup). This function contains the param-
eter 1702 Start Condition. It determines the starting conditions for the increased setting values of
current and time of the dynamic cold load pickup that must apply for directional and non-directional overcur-
rent protection.
If address 1702 Start Condition = 79 ready, the overcurrent protection always employs the increased
setting values if the automatic reclosing system is ready. The auto-reclosure function provides the signal 79
ready for controlling the cold load pickup. The signal 79 ready is always active if the auto-reclosing system
Functions
2.15 Automatic Reclosing System 79
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 223
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
is available, active, unblocked and ready for another cycle. Control via the cold load pickup function is not
ARcycle- related.
Since control via cold load pickup and cyclic control via auto-reclosing system can run simultaneously, the
overcurrent protection must coordinate the input values of the two interfaces. In this context the cyclic auto-
reclosing control has the priority and thus overwrites the release of the cold load pickup function.
If the protective elements are controlled via the automatic reclosure function, changing the control variables
(e.g. by blocking) has no effect on elements that are already running. The elements in question are continued.
Note Regarding Settings List for Automatic Reclosure Function
The setting options of address 7137 Cmd.via control are generated dynamically according to the current
configuration.
Settings
Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments
7101 FCT 79 OFF
ON
OFF 79 Auto-Reclose Function
7103 BLOCK MC Dur. 0.50 .. 320.00 sec; 0 1.00 sec AR blocking duration after manual
close
7105 TIME RESTRAINT 0.50 .. 320.00 sec 3.00 sec 79 Auto Reclosing reset time
7108 SAFETY 79 ready 0.01 .. 320.00 sec 0.50 sec Safety Time until 79 is ready
7113 CHECK CB? No check
Chk each cycle
No check Check circuit breaker before AR?
7114 T-Start MONITOR 0.01 .. 320.00 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec AR start-signal monitoring time
7115 CB TIME OUT 0.10 .. 320.00 sec 3.00 sec Circuit Breaker (CB) Supervision
Time
7116 Max. DEAD EXT. 0.50 .. 1800.00 sec; ∞ 100.00 sec Maximum dead time extension
7117 T-ACTION 0.01 .. 320.00 sec; ∞ ∞ sec Action time
7118 T DEAD DELAY 0.0 .. 1800.0 sec; ∞ 1.0 sec Maximum Time Delay of Dead-
Time Start
7127 DEADTIME 1: PH 0.01 .. 320.00 sec 0.50 sec Dead Time 1: Phase Fault
7128 DEADTIME 1: G 0.01 .. 320.00 sec 0.50 sec Dead Time 1: Ground Fault
7129 DEADTIME 2: PH 0.01 .. 320.00 sec 0.50 sec Dead Time 2: Phase Fault
7130 DEADTIME 2: G 0.01 .. 320.00 sec 0.50 sec Dead Time 2: Ground Fault
7131 DEADTIME 3: PH 0.01 .. 320.00 sec 0.50 sec Dead Time 3: Phase Fault
7132 DEADTIME 3: G 0.01 .. 320.00 sec 0.50 sec Dead Time 3: Ground Fault
7133 DEADTIME 4: PH 0.01 .. 320.00 sec 0.50 sec Dead Time 4: Phase Fault
7134 DEADTIME 4: G 0.01 .. 320.00 sec 0.50 sec Dead Time 4: Ground Fault
7135 # OF RECL. GND 0 .. 9 1 Number of Reclosing Cycles
Ground
7136 # OF RECL. PH 0 .. 9 1 Number of Reclosing Cycles Phase
7137 Cmd.via control (Einstellmöglichkeiten
anwendungsabhängig)
none Close command via control device
7138 Internal SYNC (Einstellmöglichkeiten
anwendungsabhängig)
none Internal 25 synchronisation
7139 External SYNC YES
NO
NO External 25 synchronisation
7140 ZONE SEQ.COORD. OFF
ON
OFF ZSC - Zone sequence coordination
2.15.7
Functions
2.15 Automatic Reclosing System 79
224 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments
7150 50-1 No influence
Starts 79
Stops 79
No influence 50-1
7151 50N-1 No influence
Starts 79
Stops 79
No influence 50N-1
7152 50-2 No influence
Starts 79
Stops 79
No influence 50-2
7153 50N-2 No influence
Starts 79
Stops 79
No influence 50N-2
7154 51 No influence
Starts 79
Stops 79
No influence 51
7155 51N No influence
Starts 79
Stops 79
No influence 51N
7156 67-1 No influence
Starts 79
Stops 79
No influence 67-1
7157 67N-1 No influence
Starts 79
Stops 79
No influence 67N-1
7158 67-2 No influence
Starts 79
Stops 79
No influence 67-2
7159 67N-2 No influence
Starts 79
Stops 79
No influence 67N-2
7160 67 TOC No influence
Starts 79
Stops 79
No influence 67 TOC
7161 67N TOC No influence
Starts 79
Stops 79
No influence 67N TOC
7162 sens Ground Flt No influence
Starts 79
Stops 79
No influence (Sensitive) Ground Fault
7163 46 No influence
Starts 79
Stops 79
No influence 46
7164 BINARY INPUT No influence
Starts 79
Stops 79
No influence Binary Input
7165 3Pol.PICKUP BLK YES
NO
NO 3 Pole Pickup blocks 79
Functions
2.15 Automatic Reclosing System 79
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 225
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments
7166 50-3 No influence
Starts 79
Stops 79
No influence 50-3
7167 50N-3 No influence
Starts 79
Stops 79
No influence 50N-3
7168 67-3 No influence
Starts 79
Stops 79
No influence 67-3
7169 67N-3 No influence
Starts 79
Stops 79
No influence 67N-3
7200 bef.1.Cy:50-1 Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 1. Cycle: 50-1
7201 bef.1.Cy:50N-1 Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 1. Cycle: 50N-1
7202 bef.1.Cy:50-2 Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 1. Cycle: 50-2
7203 bef.1.Cy:50N-2 Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 1. Cycle: 50N-2
7204 bef.1.Cy:51 Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 1. Cycle: 51
7205 bef.1.Cy:51N Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 1. Cycle: 51N
7206 bef.1.Cy:67-1 Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 1. Cycle: 67-1
7207 bef.1.Cy:67N-1 Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 1. Cycle: 67N-1
7208 bef.1.Cy:67-2 Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 1. Cycle: 67-2
7209 bef.1.Cy:67N-2 Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 1. Cycle: 67N-2
7210 bef.1.Cy:67 TOC Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 1. Cycle: 67 TOC
7211 bef.1.Cy:67NTOC Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 1. Cycle: 67N TOC
Functions
2.15 Automatic Reclosing System 79
226 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments
7212 bef.2.Cy:50-1 Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 2. Cycle: 50-1
7213 bef.2.Cy:50N-1 Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 2. Cycle: 50N-1
7214 bef.2.Cy:50-2 Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 2. Cycle: 50-2
7215 bef.2.Cy:50N-2 Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 2. Cycle: 50N-2
7216 bef.2.Cy:51 Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 2. Cycle: 51
7217 bef.2.Cy:51N Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 2. Cycle: 51N
7218 bef.2.Cy:67-1 Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 2. Cycle: 67-1
7219 bef.2.Cy:67N-1 Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 2. Cycle: 67N-1
7220 bef.2.Cy:67-2 Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 2. Cycle: 67-2
7221 bef.2.Cy:67N-2 Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 2. Cycle: 67N-2
7222 bef.2.Cy:67 TOC Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 2. Cycle: 67 TOC
7223 bef.2.Cy:67NTOC Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 2. Cycle: 67N TOC
7224 bef.3.Cy:50-1 Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 3. Cycle: 50-1
7225 bef.3.Cy:50N-1 Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 3. Cycle: 50N-1
7226 bef.3.Cy:50-2 Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 3. Cycle: 50-2
7227 bef.3.Cy:50N-2 Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 3. Cycle: 50N-2
Functions
2.15 Automatic Reclosing System 79
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 227
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments
7228 bef.3.Cy:51 Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 3. Cycle: 51
7229 bef.3.Cy:51N Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 3. Cycle: 51N
7230 bef.3.Cy:67-1 Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 3. Cycle: 67-1
7231 bef.3.Cy:67N-1 Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 3. Cycle: 67N-1
7232 bef.3.Cy:67-2 Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 3. Cycle: 67-2
7233 bef.3.Cy:67N-2 Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 3. Cycle: 67N-2
7234 bef.3.Cy:67 TOC Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 3. Cycle: 67 TOC
7235 bef.3.Cy:67NTOC Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 3. Cycle: 67N TOC
7236 bef.4.Cy:50-1 Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 4. Cycle: 50-1
7237 bef.4.Cy:50N-1 Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 4. Cycle: 50N-1
7238 bef.4.Cy:50-2 Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 4. Cycle: 50-2
7239 bef.4.Cy:50N-2 Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 4. Cycle: 50N-2
7240 bef.4.Cy:51 Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 4. Cycle: 51
7241 bef.4.Cy:51N Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 4. Cycle: 51N
7242 bef.4.Cy:67-1 Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 4. Cycle: 67-1
7243 bef.4.Cy:67N-1 Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 4. Cycle: 67N-1
Functions
2.15 Automatic Reclosing System 79
228 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments
7244 bef.4.Cy:67-2 Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 4. Cycle: 67-2
7245 bef.4.Cy:67N-2 Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 4. Cycle: 67N-2
7246 bef.4.Cy:67 TOC Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 4. Cycle: 67 TOC
7247 bef.4.Cy:67NTOC Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 4. Cycle: 67N TOC
7248 bef.1.Cy:50-3 Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 1. Cycle: 50-3
7249 bef.1.Cy:50N-3 Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 1. Cycle: 50N-3
7250 bef.2.Cy:50-3 Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 2. Cycle: 50-3
7251 bef.2.Cy:50N-3 Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 2. Cycle: 50N-3
7252 bef.3.Cy:50-3 Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 3. Cycle: 50-3
7253 bef.3.Cy:50N-3 Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 3. Cycle: 50N-3
7254 bef.4.Cy:50-3 Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 4. Cycle: 50-3
7255 bef.4.Cy:50N-3 Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 4. Cycle: 50N-3
7256 bef.1.Cy:67-3 Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 1. Cycle: 67-3
7257 bef.1.Cy:67N-3 Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 1. Cycle: IE>>> directional
7258 bef.2.Cy:67-3 Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 2. Cycle: 67-3
7259 bef.2.Cy:67N-3 Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 2. Cycle: IE>>> directional
Functions
2.15 Automatic Reclosing System 79
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 229
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments
7260 bef.3.Cy:67-3 Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 3. Cycle: 67-3
7261 bef.3.Cy:67N-3 Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 3. Cycle: IE>>> directional
7262 bef.4.Cy:67-3 Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 4. Cycle: 67-3
7263 bef.4.Cy:67N-3 Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 4. Cycle: 67N-3
Information List
No. Information Type of
Informa-
tion
Comments
127 79 ON/OFF IntSP 79 ON/OFF (via system port)
2701 >79 ON SP >79 ON
2702 >79 OFF SP >79 OFF
2703 >BLOCK 79 SP >BLOCK 79
2711 >79 Start SP >79 External start of internal A/R
2715 >Start 79 Gnd SP >Start 79 Ground program
2716 >Start 79 Ph SP >Start 79 Phase program
2722 >ZSC ON SP >Switch zone sequence coordination ON
2723 >ZSC OFF SP >Switch zone sequence coordination OFF
2730 >CB Ready SP >Circuit breaker READY for reclosing
2731 >Sync.release SP >79: Sync. release from ext. sync.-check
2753 79 DT delay ex. OUT 79: Max. Dead Time Start Delay expired
2754 >79 DT St.Delay SP >79: Dead Time Start Delay
2781 79 OFF OUT 79 Auto recloser is switched OFF
2782 79 ON IntSP 79 Auto recloser is switched ON
2784 79 is NOT ready OUT 79 Auto recloser is NOT ready
2785 79 DynBlock OUT 79 - Auto-reclose is dynamically BLOCKED
2788 79 T-CBreadyExp OUT 79: CB ready monitoring window expired
2801 79 in progress OUT 79 - in progress
2808 79 BLK: CB open OUT 79: CB open with no trip
2809 79 T-Start Exp OUT 79: Start-signal monitoring time expired
2810 79 TdeadMax Exp OUT 79: Maximum dead time expired
2823 79 no starter OUT 79: no starter configured
2824 79 no cycle OUT 79: no cycle configured
2827 79 BLK by trip OUT 79: blocking due to trip
2828 79 BLK:3ph p.u. OUT 79: blocking due to 3-phase pickup
2829 79 Tact expired OUT 79: action time expired before trip
2830 79 Max. No. Cyc OUT 79: max. no. of cycles exceeded
2844 79 1stCyc. run. OUT 79 1st cycle running
2.15.8
Functions
2.15 Automatic Reclosing System 79
230 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
No. Information Type of
Informa-
tion
Comments
2845 79 2ndCyc. run. OUT 79 2nd cycle running
2846 79 3rdCyc. run. OUT 79 3rd cycle running
2847 79 4thCyc. run. OUT 79 4th or higher cycle running
2851 79 Close OUT 79 - Close command
2862 79 Successful OUT 79 - cycle successful
2863 79 Lockout OUT 79 - Lockout
2865 79 Sync.Request OUT 79: Synchro-check request
2878 79 L-N Sequence OUT 79-A/R single phase reclosing sequence
2879 79 L-L Sequence OUT 79-A/R multi-phase reclosing sequence
2883 ZSC active OUT Zone Sequencing is active
2884 ZSC ON OUT Zone sequence coordination switched ON
2885 ZSC OFF OUT Zone sequence coordination switched OFF
2889 79 1.CycZoneRel OUT 79 1st cycle zone extension release
2890 79 2.CycZoneRel OUT 79 2nd cycle zone extension release
2891 79 3.CycZoneRel OUT 79 3rd cycle zone extension release
2892 79 4.CycZoneRel OUT 79 4th cycle zone extension release
2899 79 CloseRequest OUT 79: Close request to Control Function
Functions
2.15 Automatic Reclosing System 79
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 231
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Fault Locator
The measurement of the distance to a short-circuit fault is a supplement to the protection functions. Power
transmission within the system can be increased when the fault is located and cleared faster.
Functional Description
General
The fault locator is a stand-alone and independent function which uses the line and power system parameters
set in other functions. In the event of a fault, it is addressed by the protection functions provided in the 7SJ80
device.
The protected object can e.g. be an inhomogeneous line. For calculation purposes, the line can be divided into
different sections, for example, a short cable followed by an overhead line. In such protected objects, you can
configure each section individually. Without this information, the fault locator uses the general line data (see
Section 2.1.6.2 Setting Notes).
The fault locator also calculates double ground faults with different base points, reverse faults and faults that
are located behind the configured sections. For faults that are not located within the configured sections, the
fault locator uses the general line data.
The fault locator can be triggered by the trip command of the non-directional or directional time overcurrent
protection, or by each fault detection. In the latter case, fault location calculations is even possible if another
protection relay cleared the fault. Additionally, the fault location can be initiated via a binary input. However,
it is a prerequisite that pickup of the time overcurrent protection is performed at the same time (directional or
nondirectional).
Fault Location Determination
The measurement principle of the fault locator is based on the calculation of impedances.
Sampled value pairs of short-circuit current and short-circuit voltage are stored in a buffer (at a sampling rate
of 1/16 cycle) shortly after the trip command. At that time, even with very fast circuit breakers, no errors in the
measured values have occurred during the shutdown procedure. Measured value filtering and the number of
impedance calculations are adjusted automatically to the number of stable measured value pairs in the deter-
mined data window. If no sufficient data windows with reliable values could be determined for fault location,
message
Flt.Loc.invalid
is issued.
The fault locator evaluates the short-circuit loops and uses the loops with the lowest fault impedance (see
margin heading “Loop Selection”).
Loop Selection
Using the pickup of the time overcurrent protection (directional or non-directional), the valid measurement
loops for the calculation of fault impedance are selected.
The following table shows the assignment of the evaluated loops to the possible pickup scenarios of the
protection elements.
Pickup by Fault Type Measured Loop Signaled Loop
A B C N
x A A-N A-N
x B B-N B-N
x C C-N C-N
x N A-N, B-N, C-N signaled loop
x x A-N A-N A-N
x x B-N B-N B-N
x x C-N C-N C-N
x x A-B A-B A-B
x x A-C A-C A-C
2.16
2.16.1
Functions
2.16 Fault Locator
232 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Pickup by Fault Type Measured Loop Signaled Loop
A B C N
x x B-C B-C B-C
x x x A-B-N A-B, A-N, B-N signaled loop
x x x A-C-N C-A, A-N, B-N signaled loop
x x x B-C-N B-C, B-N, C-N signaled loop
x x x A-B-C A-B, B-C, C-A signaled loop
x x x x A-B-C-N A-B, B-C, C-A, A-N, B-N, C-N signaled loop
Output of Fault Location
The following information is output as result of the fault location:
•the short-circuit loop from which the fault reactance was determined,
•the fault reactance X in Ω primary and Ω secondary,
•the fault resistance R in Ω primary and Ω secondary,
•the distance to fault d in kilometers or miles of the line proportional to the reactance, converted on the
basis of the set line reactance per unit line length,
•the distance to fault d in % of the line length, calculated on the basis of the set reactance per unit length
and the set line length.
Line Sections
The line type is determined by the line section settings. If, for instance, the line includes a cable and an over-
head line, two different sections must be configured. The system can distinguish between up to three
different line types. When configuring this line data, please note that the different tabs for setting the line
sections will only be displayed if more than one line section has been configured under the functional scope
(address 181). The parameters for a line section are entered in the Setting tab .
.
Setting Notes
General
The fault location is only enabled if address 180 was set to Enabled during configuration of the function
extent.
Under address 181 L-sections FL the number of line section must be selected, which is required for the
accurate description of the line. If the number is set to 2 Sections or 3 Sections, further setting sheets
appear in the Power System Data 2 in DIGSI. Default setting is 1 Section.
Line Data
To calculate the fault distance in kilometers or miles, the device needs the per distance reactance of the line in
Ω/kilometer or Ω/mile. Furthermore, the line length in km or miles, the angle of the line impedance, and resis-
tance and reactance ratios are required. These parameters have already been set in the Power System Data 2
for a maximum of 3 line sections (see Section 2.1.6.2 Setting Notes under “Ground Impedance Ratios” and
“Reactance per Unit Length”).
Initiation of Measurement
Normally the fault location calculation is started when a directional or non-directional time overcurrent protec-
tion initiates a trip signal (address 8001 START = TRIP). However, it may also be initiated when pickup drops
out (address 8001 START = Pickup), e.g. when another protection element clears the fault. Irrespective of
this fact, calculation of the fault location can be triggered externally via a binary input. (FNo. 1106
>Start
Flt. Loc
) provided the device has picked up.
2.16.2
Functions
2.16 Fault Locator
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 233
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Settings
Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments
8001 START Pickup
TRIP
Pickup Start fault locator with
Information List
No. Information Type of
Informa-
tion
Comments
1106 >Start Flt. Loc SP >Start Fault Locator
1114 Rpri = VI Flt Locator: primary RESISTANCE
1115 Xpri = VI Flt Locator: primary REACTANCE
1117 Rsec = VI Flt Locator: secondary RESISTANCE
1118 Xsec = VI Flt Locator: secondary REACTANCE
1119 dist = VI Flt Locator: Distance to fault
1120 d[%] = VI Flt Locator: Distance [%] to fault
1122 dist = VI Flt Locator: Distance to fault
1123 FL Loop AG OUT Fault Locator Loop AG
1124 FL Loop BG OUT Fault Locator Loop BG
1125 FL Loop CG OUT Fault Locator Loop CG
1126 FL Loop AB OUT Fault Locator Loop AB
1127 FL Loop BC OUT Fault Locator Loop BC
1128 FL Loop CA OUT Fault Locator Loop CA
1132 Flt.Loc.invalid OUT Fault location invalid
2.16.3
2.16.4
Functions
2.16 Fault Locator
234 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Breaker Failure Protection 50BF
The breaker failure protection function monitors proper tripping of the relevant circuit breaker..
Functional Description
General
If after a programmable time delay, the circuit breaker has not opened, breaker failure protection issues a trip
signal to isolate the failure breaker by tripping other surrounding backup circuit breaker (see example in the
figure below).
[funktionsprinzip-svs-20061219, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-96 Function principle of the breaker failure protection
Initiation
The breaker failure protection function can be initiated by two different sources:
•Trip signals of internal protective functions of the 7SJ80,
•external trip signals via binary inputs (
>50BF ext SRC
).
For each of the two sources, a unique pickup message is generated, a unique time delay is initiated, and a
unique trip signal is generated. The setting values of current threshold and delay time apply to both sources.
Criteria
There are two criteria for breaker failure detection:
•Check whether the current flow has effectively disappeared after a tripping command was issued,
•Evaluate the circuit breaker's auxiliary contacts.
The criteria used to determine if the circuit breaker has operated are selectable and also depend on the protec-
tion function that initiated the breaker failure function. On tripping without fault current, e.g. via voltage
protection, the current below the threshold 50BF PICKUP is not a reliable indication of the proper func-
tioning of the circuit breaker. In such cases, pickup exclusively depends on the auxiliary contact criterion. In
protection functions based on the measurement of currents (including all short-circuit protection functions),
the current flow is a preferential criterion, i.e. it is given priority, as opposed to the auxiliary contacts. If
current flows above the set threshold or thresholds (enabled w/ 3I0>) are detected, the breaker failure
protection trips even if the auxiliary criterion indicates “Breaker Open”.
2.17
2.17.1
Functions
2.17 Breaker Failure Protection 50BF
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 235
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Monitoring of the Current Flow
Address 170 50BF can be set in such a way that either the current criterion can already be met by a single
phase current (setting Enabled) or that another current is taken into consideration in order to check the plau-
sibility (setting enabled w/ 3I0>), see Figure 2-97.
The currents are filtered through numerical filters to evaluate only the fundamental harmonic. They are moni-
tored and compared to the set threshold values. Besides the three phase currents, two additional currents are
provided to enable a plausibility check. Separate threshold values can be used for this plausibility check if this
is configured accordingly. To detect ground faults more quickly, the threshold value for the ground current
can also be used for checking the plausibility of the phase currents. This function is activated via binary input
>50BFactiv.3I0>
(see Figure 2-97).
The ground current IN (3·Ι0) is preferably used as plausibility current. Via the parameters 613 you decide
whether the measured (Ignd (measured)) or the calculated (3I0 (calcul.)) values are to be used. In
case of system faults not involving ground currents, no increased ground currents/residual currents are
flowing, and therefore the calculated triple negative sequence current 3·I2Ι2 or a second phase current is used
as plausibility current.
[7sj80-plausibilitaet-i-sv-20061218, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-97 Monitoring of the current flow
Functions
2.17 Breaker Failure Protection 50BF
236 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Monitoring of the Circuit Breaker Auxiliary Contacts
Evaluation of the circuit breaker's auxiliary contacts depends on the type of contacts, and how they are
connected to the binary inputs:
•the auxiliary contacts for circuit breaker "open" (4602
>52-b
) and "closed" (4601
>52-a
) are configured,
•only the auxiliary contact for circuit breaker "open" is configured (4602
>52-b
),
•only the auxiliary contact for circuit breaker "closed" is configured (4601
>52-a
),
•none of the two auxiliary contacts is configured.
Feedback information of the auxiliary status of the circuit breaker is evaluated, depending on the allocation of
binary inputs and auxiliary contacts. After a trip command has been issued it is the aim to detect — if possible
— by means of the feedback of the circuit breaker's auxiliary contacts whether the breaker is open or in inter-
mediate position. If valid, this information can be used for a proper initiation of the breaker failure protection
function.
The logic diagram illustrates the monitoring of the circuit breaker's auxiliary contacts.
[7sj80-erzeug-svs-int-sign, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-98 Logic diagram for breaker failure protection, monitoring of the circuit-breaker auxiliary
contacts
Logic
The entire breaker failure protection function may be turned on or off, or it can be blocked dynamically via
binary inputs. If breaker failure protection is initiated, an alarm message is generated. With the initiation, two
setable delay times are started. One delay time can be used to repeat the trip command to the local circuit
breaker. The other is used to trip the higher-level circuit breaker. If criteria for a pickup are still met once the
time delays have elapsed, the trip signals are issued successively
If the criteria that led to the pickup are no longer met, after the time delays have elapsed, then the pickup will
drop out and no trip signal is issued by the breaker failure protection function.
To protect against nuisance tripping due to excessive contact bounce, a stabilization of the binary inputs for
external trip signals takes place. This external signal must be present during the entire period of the delay
times, otherwise the timer is reset and no tripping signal is issued.
The following figure shows the logic diagram for the breaker failure protection function.
Functions
2.17 Breaker Failure Protection 50BF
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 237
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[7sj62-64-svs-20081110, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-99 Logic diagram of the breaker failure protection
Setting Notes
General
Breaker failure protection is only effective and accessible if address 170 50BF is set to Enabled or enabled
w/ 3I0>. Setting Enabled considers the three phase currents for total current monitoring. Setting enabled
w/ 3I0> additionally evaluates the ground current or the negative sequence system when only one phase
current occurs.
If this function is not required, then Disabled is set. The function can be set to ON or OFF under address
7001 FCT 50BF.
2.17.2
Functions
2.17 Breaker Failure Protection 50BF
238 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Criteria
Address 7004 Chk BRK CONTACT establishes whether or not the breaker auxiliary contacts connected via
binary inputs are to be used as a criterion for pickup. If this address is set to ON, then current criterion and/or
the auxiliary contact criterion apply. This setting must be selected if the breaker failure protection is started by
functions, which do not always have a certain criterion for detection of an open circuit breaker, e.g. voltage
protection.
Single-Element Breaker Failure Protection
In single-element breaker failure protection, the adjacent circuit breakers, i.e. the breakers of the busbar or the
busbar section affected, and where applicable also the breaker at the remote end, are tripped after the time
delay TRIP-Timer (address 7005) has elapsed. The time 50BF-2 Delay (address 7008) is in this case set to
infinite because it is not needed.
The time delay to be set should be based on the maximum circuit breaker operating time plus the dropout
time of the current flow monitoring element plus a safety margin which takes into consideration the tolerance
of the time delay. In case of an external start, the set time delay is reduced automatically by 10 ms in order to
compensate the residual time of the external start. Figure 2-100 illustrates the time sequences in an example.
[abl-bei-norm-fehlerkllaer-u-bei-lsvs-20061220, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-100 Time sequence example for normal clearance of a fault, and for circuit breaker failure with
single-element breaker failure protection
Two-Element Breaker Failure Protection
In two-element breaker failure protection, the trip command is output again to the local feeder circuit breaker,
normally to a separate set of trip coils of the feeder breaker, after the time delay TRIP-Timer (address 7005)
has elapsed.
If the circuit breaker does not respond to the repeated trip, the adjacent circuit breakers, i.e. the breakers of
the busbar or the busbar section affected, and where applicable also the breaker at the remote end, are
tripped after the time delay 50BF-2 Delay (Adresse 7008) has elapsed and the fault still exists.
The time delays to be set should be based on the maximum circuit breaker operating time plus the dropout
time of the current flow monitoring element plus a safety margin which takes into consideration the tolerance
of the time delay. In case of an external start, the set time delay is reduced automatically by 10 ms in order to
compensate the residual time of the external start. Figure 2-101 illustrates the time sequences in an example.
Functions
2.17 Breaker Failure Protection 50BF
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 239
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[abl-bei-norm-fehlerkllaer-u-bei-lsvs-2stufig-090116, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-101 Time sequence example for normal clearance of a fault, and for circuit breaker failure with
two-element breaker failure protection
Pickup Values
The pickup value of the current flow monitoring is set under address 7006 50BF PICKUP, and the pickup
value of the ground current monitoring under address 7007 50BF PICKUP IE>. The threshold values must
be set at a level below the minimum fault current for which the total current monitoring must operate. A
setting of 10 % below the minimum fault current for which breaker failure protection must operate is recom-
mended. The pickup value should not be set too low since otherwise there is a risk that transients in the
current transformer secondary circuit may lead to extended dropout times if extremely high currents are
switched off.
Via binary input 1404
>50BFactiv.3I0>
you can activate the threshold value 50BF PICKUP IE> also for
checking the plausibility of the phase currents.
Settings
The table indicates region-specific presettings. Column C (configuration) indicates the corresponding secon-
dary nominal current of the current transformer.
Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting Comments
7001 FCT 50BF OFF
ON
OFF 50BF Breaker Failure
Protection
7004 Chk BRK CONTACT OFF
ON
OFF Check Breaker contacts
7005 TRIP-Timer 0.06 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.25 sec TRIP-Timer
7006 50BF PICKUP 1A 0.05 .. 20.00 A 0.10 A 50BF Pickup current
threshold
5A 0.25 .. 100.00 A 0.50 A
7007 50BF PICKUP IE> 1A 0.05 .. 20.00 A 0.10 A 50BF Pickup earth current
threshold
5A 0.25 .. 100.00 A 0.50 A
7008 50BF-2 Delay 0.06 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec Delay of 2nd stage for
busbar trip
2.17.3
Functions
2.17 Breaker Failure Protection 50BF
240 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Information List
No. Information Type of
Informa-
tion
Comments
1403 >BLOCK 50BF SP >BLOCK 50BF
1404 >50BFactiv.3I0> SP >50BF Activate 3I0> threshold
1431 >50BF ext SRC SP >50BF initiated externally
1451 50BF OFF OUT 50BF is switched OFF
1452 50BF BLOCK OUT 50BF is BLOCKED
1453 50BF ACTIVE OUT 50BF is ACTIVE
1456 50BF int Pickup OUT 50BF (internal) PICKUP
1457 50BF ext Pickup OUT 50BF (external) PICKUP
1471 50BF TRIP OUT 50BF TRIP
1480 50BF int TRIP OUT 50BF (internal) TRIP
1481 50BF ext TRIP OUT 50BF (external) TRIP
1494 50BF TRIP 2 OUT 50BF TRIP 2
2.17.4
Functions
2.17 Breaker Failure Protection 50BF
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 241
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Flexible Protection Functions
The flexible protection function is applicable for a variety of protection principles. The user can create up to 20
flexible protection functions and configure them according to their function. Each function can be used either
as an autonomous protection function, as an additional protective element of an existing protection function
or as a universal logic, e.g. for monitoring tasks.
Functional Description
General
The function is a combination of a standard protection logic and a characteristic (measured quantity or derived
quantity) that is adjustable via parameters. The characteristics listed in table 2-20 and the derived protection
functions are available.
Please note that with voltage connection type Vab, Vbc or Vab, Vbc, VSyn or Vab, Vbc, Vx (address
213 VT Connect. 3ph) the power values are only available if you have symmetrical voltage conditions
within the network and address 207 Vol. Symmetry is set to YES (Power System Data 1).
Table 2-15 Possible Protection Functions
Characteristic
Group
Characteristic / Measured Quantity Protective Function ANSI-No. Mode of Operation
3–phase 1–phase
Current ΙRMS value of fundamental
component
Time overcurrent protec-
tion
50, 50G X X
Ιrms True RMS (r.m.s. value) Time overcurrent protec-
tion
Thermal overload protec-
tion
50, 50G X X
3Ι0Zero sequence system Time overcurrent protec-
tion, ground
50N X
Ι1Positive-sequence component X
Ι2Negative-sequence component Negative sequence protec-
tion
46 X
Ι2/Ι1Positive/negative sequence
component ratio
X
Frequency f Frequency Frequency protection 81U/O without phase
reference
df/dt Frequency change Frequency change protec-
tion
81R
Voltage V RMS value of fundamental
component
Voltage protection
Displacement voltage
27, 59,
59G, 59N,
59NC
X X
Vrms True RMS (r.m.s. value) Voltage protection
Displacement voltage
27, 59,
59G, 59N,
59NC
X X
3V0Zero sequence system Displacement voltage 59N X
V1Positive-sequence component Voltage protection 27, 59 X
V2Negative-sequence component Voltage asymmetry 47 X
dV/dt Voltage change Voltage change protection X
Power P Real power Reverse power protection
Power protection
32R, 32, 37 X X
Q Reactive power Power protection 32 X X
cos φ Power factor Power factor 55 X X
2.18
2.18.1
Functions
2.18 Flexible Protection Functions
242 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Characteristic
Group
Characteristic / Measured Quantity Protective Function ANSI-No. Mode of Operation
3–phase 1–phase
Binary input – Binary input Direct coupling without phase
reference
Section 2.19 Reverse-Power Protection Application with Flexible Protection Function gives an application
example of the function “reverse power protection”.
The maximum 20 configurable protection functions operate independently of each other. The following
description concerns one function; it can be applied accordingly to all other flexible functions. The logic
diagram Figure 2-102 illustrates the description.
Functional Logic
The function can be switched OFF and ON or, it can be set to Alarm Only. In this status, a pickup condition
will neither initiate fault recording nor start the trip time delay. Tripping is thus not possible.
Changing the Power System Data 1 after flexible functions have been configured may cause these functions to
be set incorrectly. Message (FNo.235.2128
$00 inval.set
) reports this condition. The function is inactive
in this case and function's setting has to be modified.
Blocking Functions
The function can be blocked via binary input (FNo. 235.2110
>BLOCK $00
) or via local operating terminal
(“Control”->“Tagging”->“Set”). Blocking will reset the function's entire measurement logic as well as all running
times and indications. Blocking via the local operating terminal may be useful if the function is in a status of
permanent pickup which does not allow the function to be reset.
In context with voltage-based characteristics, the function can be blocked if one of the measuring voltages
fails. Recognition of this status is either accomplished by the relay's internal „Fuse-Failure-Monitor“ (FNo. 170
VT FuseFail
; see section 2.11.1 Measurement Supervision) or via auxiliary contacts of the voltage trans-
former CB (FNo. 6509
>FAIL:FEEDER VT
and FNo. 6510
>FAIL: BUS VT
). This blocking mechanism can
be enabled or disabled in the according parameters. The associated parameter BLK.by Vol.Loss is only
available if the characteristic is based on a voltage measurement.
When using the flexible function for power protection or power monitoring, it will be blocked if currents fall
below 0.03 · ΙNom.
Parameter BLK f out of r allows you to specify whether the protection function is blocked if the meas-
ured power frequency is outside the operating range of the function (25 Hz to 70 Hz).
Operating Mode, Measured Quantity, Measurement Method
The flexible function can be tailored to assume a specific protective function for a concrete application in
parameters OPERRAT. MODE, MEAS. QUANTITY, MEAS. METHOD and PICKUP WITH. Parameter
OPERRAT. MODE can be set to specify whether the function works 3-phase, 1-phase oder no refer-
ence, i.e. without a fixed phase reference. The three-phase method evaluates all three phases in parallel. This
implies that threshold evaluation, pickup indications and trip time delay are accomplished selectively for each
phase and parallel to each other. This may be for example the typical operating principle of a three-phase time
overcurrent protection.
When operating single-phase, the function employs either a phase's measured quantity, which must be stated
explicitly, (e.g. evaluating only the current in phase Ib), or the measured ground current In or the measured
displacement voltage Vn.
If the characteristic relates to the frequency or if external trip commands are used, the operating principle is
without (fixed) phase reference. Additional parameters can be set to specify the used MEAS. QUANTITY and
the MEAS. METHOD. The MEAS. METHOD determines for current and voltage measured values whether the
function uses the RMS value of the fundamental component or the normal RMS value (true RMS) that evalu-
ates also harmonics. All other characteristics use always the rms value of the fundamental component. Param-
eter PICKUP WITH moreover specifies whether the function picks up on exceeding the threshold (>-element)
or on falling below the threshold (<-element).
Functions
2.18 Flexible Protection Functions
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 243
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Characteristic Curve
The function's characteristic curve is always “definite time”; this means that the time delay is not affected by
the measured quantity.
Function Logic
The following figure shows the logic diagram of a three-phase function. If the function operates on one phase
or without phase reference, phase selectivity and phase-specific indications are not relevant.
[logik-flexstz-100504-st, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-102 Logic diagram of the flexible protection functions
Functions
2.18 Flexible Protection Functions
244 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
The parameters can be set to monitor either exceeding or dropping below of the threshold. The configurable
pickup time delay will be started once the threshold (>-element) has been exceeded. When the time delay has
elapsed and the threshold is still violated, the pickup of the phase (e.g. no. 235.2122
$00 pickup A
)and of
the function (no. 235.2121
$00 picked up
) is reported. If the pickup delay is set to zero, the pickup will
occur simultaneously with the detection of the threshold violation. If the function is enabled, the pickup will
start the trip time delay and the fault log. This is not the case if set to "Alarm only". If the threshold violation
persists after the trip time delay has elapsed, the trip will be initiated upon its expiration (no. 235.2126
$00
TRIP
). The timeout is reported via (no. 235.2125
$00 Time Out
). Expiry of the trip time delay can be
blocked via binary input (no. 235.2113
>$00 BLK.TDly
). The time delay will not be started as long as the
binary input is active; a trip can thus be initiated. The time delay is started after the binary input has dropped
out and the pickup is still present. It is also possible to bypass the expiration of the time delay by activating
binary input (no. 235.2111
>$00 instant.
). The trip will be launched immediately when the pickup is
present and the binary input has been activated. The trip command can be blocked via binary inputs (no.
235.2115
>$00 BL.TripA
) and (no. 235.2114
>$00 BLK.TRIP
). The phase-selective blocking of the trip
command is required for interaction with the inrush restraint (see “Interaction with other functions”). The
function's dropout ratio can be set. If the threshold (>-element) is undershot after the pickup, the dropout
time delay will be started. The pickup is maintained during that time, a started trip delay time continues to
count down. If the trip time delay has elapsed while the dropout time delay is still during, the trip command
will only be given if the current threshold is exceeded. The element will only drop out when the dropout time
delay has elapsed. If the time is set to zero, the dropout will be initiated immediately once the threshold is
undershot.
External Trip Commands
The logic diagram does not explicitly depict the external trip commands since their functionality is analogous.
If the binary input is activated for external trip commands (no. 235.2112
>$00 Dir.TRIP
), it will be logically
treated as threshold overshooting, i.e. once it has been activated, the pickup time delay is started. If the
pickup time delay is set to zero, the pickup condition will be reported immediately starting the trip time delay.
Otherwise, the logic is the same as depicted in Figure 2-102.
Interaction with Other Functions
The flexible protection functions interact with a number of other functions such as the
•Breaker failure protection:
The breaker failure protection is started automatically if the function initiates a trip. The trip will,
however, only take place if the current criterion is met at this time, i.e. the set minimum current
threshold 7006 50BF PICKUP (Power System Data 1) has been exceeded.
•Automatic reclosing (AR):
The AR cannot be started directly. In order to interact with the AR, the trip command of the flexible func-
tion needs be linked in CFC to binary input no. 2716
>Start 79 Ph
or no. 2715
>Start 79 Gnd
.
Using an operating time requires the pickup of the flexible function to be linked to binary input no. 2711
>79 Start
.
•Fuse-Failure-Monitor (see description at “Blocking Functions”).
•Inrush restraint:
Direct interaction with the inrush restraint is not possible. In order to block a flexible function by the
inrush restraint, the blocking must be carried out in CFC. The flexible function provides three binary
inputs for blocking trip commands selectively for each phase (no. 235.2115 to 235.2117). They have to
be linked with the phase-selective indications for detecting the inrush (no. 1840 to 1842). Activating a
crossblock function requires the phase-selective inrush indications to be logically combined with the
binary input for blocking the function trip command (no. 235.2114
>$00 BLK.TRIP
). The flexible func-
tion also needs to be delayed by at least 20 ms to make sure that the inrush restraint picks up before the
flexible function.
Functions
2.18 Flexible Protection Functions
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 245
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
•Entire relay logic:
The pickup signal of the flexible function is added to the general device pickup, the trip signal is added to
the general device trip (see also Section 2.22 Function Logic). All functions associated with general
device pickup and tripping are thus also applied to the flexible function.
After the picked up element has dropped out, the trip signals of the flexible protection functions are held
up at least for the specified minimum trip command time 210 TMin TRIP CMD.
Setting Notes
The setting of the functional scope determines the number of flexible protection functions to be used (see
Section 2.1.1 Functional Scope). If a flexible function in the functional scope is disabled (by removing the
checkmark), this will result in losing all settings and configurations of this function or its settings will be reset
to their default settings.
General
In the DIGSI setting dialog “General”, parameter In the DIGSI setting dialog „General“, parameter FLEXIBLE
FUNC. can be set to OFF, ON or Alarm Only. If the function is enabled in operational mode Alarm Only, no
faults are recorded, no „Effective“-indication is generated, no trip command issued and neither will the circuit-
breaker protection be affected. Therefore, this operational mode is preferred when a flexible function is not
required to operate as a protection function. Furthermore, the OPERRAT. MODE can be configured.
Three-phase – functions evaluate the three-phase measuring system, i.e. all three phases are processed
simultaneously. A typical example is the three-phase operating time overcurrent protection.
Single-phase – functions evaluate only the individual measuring value. This can be an individual phase value
(e.g. VB) or Vx or a ground variable (VN, ΙN or ΙN2 ).
Setting no reference determines the evaluation of measured variables irrespective of a single or threep-
hase connection of current and voltage. Table 2-20 provides an overview regarding which variables can be
used in which mode of operation.
Parameter BLK f out of r allows you to specify whether the protection function is blocked if the meas-
ured power frequency is outside the operating range of the function (25 Hz to 70 Hz). SIEMENS recommends
using the default setting (YES). A release beyond the normal operating range is only required for special appli-
cations.
Measured Variable
In the setting dialog “Measured Variable” the measured variables to be evaluated by the flexible protection
functions can be selected, which may be a calculated or a directly measured variable. The setting options that
can be selected here are dependent on the mode of measured-value processing as predefined in parameter
OPERRAT. MODE (see the following table).
Table 2-16 Parameter “Operating Mode” and “Measured Quantity”
Parameter OPERRAT. MODE
Setting
Parameter MEAS. QUANTITY
Setting Options
Single-phase,
Three-phase
Current
Voltage
P forward
P reverse
Q forward
Q reverse
Power factor
3-phase dV/dt rising
dV/dt falling
2.18.2
Functions
2.18 Flexible Protection Functions
246 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Without Reference Frequency
df/dt rising
df/dt falling
Binary Input
Please note that with voltage connection type Vab, Vbc or Vab, Vbc, VSyn or Vab, Vbc, Vx (address
213 VT Connect. 3ph) the power values are only available if you have symmetrical voltage conditions
within the network and address 207 Vol. Symmetry is set to YES (Power System Data 1).
Measurement Procedures
The measurement procedures as set out in the following table can be configured for the measured variables -
current, voltage and power. The dependencies of the available measurement procedures of configurable
modes of operation and the measured variable are also indicated.
Table 2-17 Parameter in the Setting Dialog "Measurement Procedure", Mode of Operation 3-phase
Parameter OPERRAT. MODE = 3-phase
Parameter MEAS. QUANTITY = Current or Voltage
Parameter MEAS. METHOD
Fundamental Only the fundamental harmonic is evaluated, higher harmonics are suppressed. This is
the standard measurement procedure of the protection functions.
Important: The voltage threshold value is always parameterized as phase-to-phase
voltage. If parameter VOLTAGE SYSTEM is selected as phase-to-ground, the voltage
threshold will be devided by √3.
True RMS The "true" RMS value is determined, i.e. higher harmonics are evaluated. This procedure is
applied, for example, if an overload protection element must be realized on the basis of a
current measurement, as the higher harmonics contribute to thermal heating.
Important: The voltage threshold value is always parameterized as phase-to-phase
voltage. If parameter VOLTAGE SYSTEM is selected as phase-to-ground, the voltage
threshold will be devided by √3.
Positive seq.,
Negative seq.,
Zero sequence
In order to realize certain applications, the positive sequence system or negative
sequence system can be configured as measurement procedure. Examples are:
- I2 (tripping monitoring system)
- U2 (voltage asymmetry)
Via the selection zero sequence system, additional zero sequence current or zero
sequence voltage functions can be realized that operate independent of the ground varia-
bles IN and VN, which are measured directly via transformers.
Important: The voltage threshold is always parameterized according to the definition of
the balanced components independently of parameter VOLTAGE SYSTEM.
Parameter MEAS. QUANTITY = Current
Parameter MEAS. METHOD
Ratio I2/I1 The ratio of the negative-sequence current to the positive-sequence current is evaluated.
Please note that the function only operates ifΙ2 or Ι1 has exceeded the threshold value
0.1 · ΙN.
Parameter MEAS. QUANTITY = Voltage
Parameter VOLTAGE
SYSTEM
Functions
2.18 Flexible Protection Functions
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 247
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Parameter OPERRAT. MODE = 3-phase
Phase-Phase
Phase-Ground
If you have configured address 213 VT Connect. 3ph to Van, Vbn, Vcn or Vab,
Vbc, VGnd, you can select whether a threephase voltage function will evaluate the
phase-to-ground voltage or the phase-to-phase voltages.
When selecting phase-to-phase, these variables are derived from the phase-to-ground
voltages. The selection is, for example, important for single-pole faults. If the faulty
voltage drops to zero, the affected phase-to-ground voltage is thus zero, and the respec-
tive phase-to-phase voltages drop to the variable of a phase-to-ground voltage.
With phase-to-phase voltage connection the parameter is hidden.
i
i
NOTE
With regard to the phase-selective pickup messages, a special behavior is observed in the three-phase
voltage protection with phase-to-phase variables, because the phase-selective pickup message "Flx01
Pickup Lx" is allocated to the respective measured-value channel "Lx".
Single-phase faults:
If, for example, voltage VA drops to such degree that voltages VAB and VA exceed their threshold values, the
device indicates pickups “Flx01 Pickup A” and “Flx01 Pickup C”, because the undershooting was detected in
the first and third measured-value channel.
Two-phase faults:
If, for example, voltage VAB drops to such degree that its threshold value is reached, the device then indi-
cates pickup "Flx01 Pickup A", because the undershooting was detected in the first measured-value
channel.
Table 2-18 Parameter in the Setting Dialog "Measurement Procedure", Mode of Operation 1-phase
Parameter OPERRAT. MODE = 1-phase
Parameter MEAS. QUANTITY = Current or Voltage
Parameter
MEAS. METHOD
Fundamental Only the fundamental harmonic is evaluated, higher harmonics are suppressed. This is
the standard measurement procedure of the protection functions.
True RMS The “True” RMS value is determined, i.e. higher harmonics are evaluated. This procedure
is applied, for example, if an overload protection element must be realized on the basis of
a current measurement, as the higher harmonics contribute to thermal heating.
Parameter MEAS. QUANTITY = Current
Parameter CURRENT
Ia
Ib
Ic
In
In sensitive
In2
It is determined which current-measuring channel must be evaluated by the function.
Depending on the device version, either IN (normal-sensitive ground current input), INS
(sensitive ground current input) or IN2 (second ground current connected to the device)
can be selected.
If parameter 251 is set to A,G2,C,G; G2->B, the setting ΙN refers to the current at the
second current (ΙN2). The setting ΙNS refers to the sensitive ground current at the fourth
current input.
If parameter 251 is set to A,G2,C,G; G->B, the setting ΙN2 refers to the current at the
second current (ΙN2). The setting ΙNS or ΙNS refers to the sensitive or highly sensitive
ground current at the fourth current input.
Parameter MEAS. QUANTITY = Voltage
Parameter VOLTAGE
Functions
2.18 Flexible Protection Functions
248 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Parameter OPERRAT. MODE = 1-phase
Va-n
Vb-n
Vc-n
Va-b
Vb-c
Vc-a
Vn
Vx
It is determined which voltage-measuring channel must be evaluated by the function.
When selecting phase-to-phase voltage, the threshold value must be set as a phase-to-
phase value, when selecting a phase-to-ground variable as phase-toground voltage. The
extent of the setting texts depends on the connection of the voltage transformer (see
address 213VT Connect. 3ph).
Parameter MEAS. QUANTITY = P forward or P reverse or Q forward or Q reverse
Parameter POWER
Ia Va-n
Ib Vb-n
Ic Vc-n
It is determined which power-measuring channel (current and voltage) must be evaluated
by the function. With phase-tophase voltage connections the parameter is hidden (see
address 213 VT Connect. 3ph).
When selecting Vab, Vbc, VGnd, the phase-to-ground voltages will be calculated if
“phase-to-ground“ is configured. When selecting “phase-to-phase”, the connected phase-
to-phase voltages are used and VCA is calculated from VAB and VBC.
i
i
NOTE
Warning!
If the 3-phase voltage connection is established at a motor or generator feeder and the Ux input is operated
at the busbar or at another voltage measuring point other than the feeder, you must select "True RMS" as
the measurement procedure. Otherwise, there is a risk of overfunction or underfunction in a situation
where the feeder voltage and the Ux voltage exhibit significantly different frequencies.
i
i
NOTE
If you have selected Vph-g, VSyn in VT Connect. 3ph, the connected phase-to-Ground voltage can be
processed. If you select VOLTAGE as measured quantity, this connected voltage is used automatically.
The forward direction of power (P forward, Q reverse) is the direction of the line. Parameter (1108 P,Q sign)
for sign inversion of the power display in the operating measured values is ignored by the flexible functions.
Via parameter PICKUP WITH it is determined whether the function must be triggered on exceeding or under-
shooting of the set threshold value.
Settings
The pickup thresholds, time delays and dropout ratios of the flexible protection function are set in the
“Settings” dialog box in DIGSI.
The pickup threshold of the function is configured via parameter P.U. THRESHOLD. The OFF-command time
delay is set via parameter T TRIP DELAY. Both setting values must be selected according to the required
application.
The pickup can be delayed via parameter T PICKUP DELAY. This parameter is usually set to zero (default
setting) in protection applications, because a protection function should pick up as quickly as possible. A
setting deviating from zero may be appropriate if a trip log is not desired to be started upon each short-term
exceeding of the pickup threshold, for example, with power protection or when a function is not used as a
protection, but as a monitoring function.
When setting the power threshold values, it is important to take into consideration that a minimum current of
0.03 ΙN is required for power calculation. The power calculation is blocked for lower currents.
The dropout of pickup can be delayed via parameter T DROPOUT DELAY. This setting is also set to zero by
default (standard setting) A setting deviating from zero may be required if the device is utilized together with
electro-magnetic devices with considerably longer dropout ratios than the digital protection device (see
Functions
2.18 Flexible Protection Functions
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 249
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Section 2.2 for more information). When utilizing the dropout time delay, it is recommended to set it to a
shorter time than the OFF-command time delay in order to avoid both times to "race".
The dropout ratio of the function can be selected in parameter DROPOUT RATIO. The standard dropout ratio
of protection functions is 0.95 (default setting). If the function is used as power protection, a dropout ratio of
at least 0.9 should be set. The same applies to the utilization of the symmetrical components of current and
voltage. If the dropout ratio is decreased, it would be sensible to test the pickup of the function regarding
possible "chatter".
The dropout difference of the frequency elements is set under parameter DO differential. Usually, the
default setting of 0.02 Hz can be retained. A higher dropout difference should be set in weak systems with
larger, short-term frequency fluctuations to avoid chattering of the message.
A fixed dropout difference of 0.1 Hz/s is used for the frequency change (df/dt) measurand. The same applies to
the voltage change (dU/dt) measurand. The permanent dropout difference here is 3 V/s.
Parameter BLK.by Vol.Loss determines whether a function whose measured variable is based on a voltage
measurement (measured quantities voltage, P forward, P reverse, Q forward, Q reverse and power factor),
should be blocked in case of a measured voltage failure (set to YES) or not (set to NO).
Renaming Messages, Checking Configurations
After parameterization of a flexible function, the following steps should be noted:
•Open matrix in DIGSI
•Rename the neutral message texts in accordance with the application.
•Check configurations on contacts and in operation and fault buffer, or set them according to the require-
ments.
Further Information
The following instruction should be noted:
•As the power factor does not differentiate between capacitive and inductive, the sign of the reactive
power may be used with CFC-help as an additional criterion.
Settings
Addresses which have an appended “A” can only be changed with DIGSI, under “Additional Settings”.
The table indicates region-specific default settings. Column C (configuration) indicates the corresponding
secondary nominal current of the current transformer.
Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting Comments
0 FLEXIBLE FUNC. OFF
ON
Alarm Only
OFF Flexible Function
0 OPERRAT. MODE 3-phase
1-phase
no reference
3-phase Mode of Operation
0 BLK f out of r YES
NO
YES Block while Freq. is out of
range
2.18.3
Functions
2.18 Flexible Protection Functions
250 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting Comments
0 MEAS. QUANTITY Please select
Current
Voltage
P forward
P reverse
Q forward
Q reverse
Power factor
dV/dt rising
dV/dt falling
Frequency
df/dt rising
df/dt falling
Binray Input
Please select Selection of Measured
Quantity
0 MEAS. METHOD Fundamental
True RMS
Positive seq.
Negative seq.
Zero sequence
Ratio I2/I1
Fundamental Selection of Measurement
Method
0 PICKUP WITH Exceeding
Dropping below
Exceeding Pickup with
0 CURRENT Ia
Ib
Ic
In
In sensitive
In2
Ia Current
0 VOLTAGE Please select
Va-n
Vb-n
Vc-n
Va-b
Vb-c
Vc-a
Vn
Vx
Please select Voltage
0 POWER Ia Va-n
Ib Vb-n
Ic Vc-n
Ia Va-n Power
0 VOLTAGE SYSTEM Phase-Phase
Phase-Ground
Phase-Phase Voltage System
0 P.U. THRESHOLD 0.05 .. 40.00 A 2.00 A Pickup Threshold
0 P.U. THRESHOLD 1A 0.05 .. 40.00 A 2.00 A Pickup Threshold
5A 0.25 .. 200.00 A 10.00 A
0 P.U. THRESHOLD 1A 0.001 .. 1.500 A 0.100 A Pickup Threshold
5A 0.005 .. 7.500 A 0.500 A
0 P.U. THRESHOLD 2.0 .. 260.0 V 110.0 V Pickup Threshold
Functions
2.18 Flexible Protection Functions
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 251
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting Comments
0 P.U. THRESHOLD 2.0 .. 200.0 V 110.0 V Pickup Threshold
0 P.U. THRESHOLD 2.0 .. 260.0 V 110.0 V Pickup Threshold
0 P.U. THRESHOLD 40.00 .. 60.00 Hz 51.00 Hz Pickup Threshold
0 P.U. THRESHOLD 50.00 .. 70.00 Hz 61.00 Hz Pickup Threshold
0 P.U. THRESHOLD 0.10 .. 20.00 Hz/s 5.00 Hz/s Pickup Threshold
0 P.U. THRESHOLD 1A 2.0 .. 10000.0 W 200.0 W Pickup Threshold
5A 10.0 .. 50000.0 W 1000.0 W
0 P.U. THRESHOLD 1A 2.0 .. 10000.0 VAR 200.0 VAR Pickup Threshold
5A 10.0 .. 50000.0 VAR 1000.0 VAR
0 P.U. THRESHOLD -0.99 .. 0.99 0.50 Pickup Threshold
0 P.U. THRESHOLD 15 .. 100 % 20 % Pickup Threshold
0 P.U. THRESHOLD 4 .. 100 V/s 60 V/s Pickup Threshold
0 T TRIP DELAY 0.00 .. 3600.00 sec 1.00 sec Trip Time Delay
0A T PICKUP DELAY 0.00 .. 60.00 sec 0.00 sec Pickup Time Delay
0 T PICKUP DELAY 0.00 .. 28800.00 sec 0.00 sec Pickup Time Delay
0A T DROPOUT DELAY 0.00 .. 60.00 sec 0.00 sec Dropout Time Delay
0A BLK.by Vol.Loss NO
YES
YES Block in case of Meas.-
Voltage Loss
0A DROPOUT RATIO 0.70 .. 0.99 0.95 Dropout Ratio
0A DROPOUT RATIO 1.01 .. 3.00 1.05 Dropout Ratio
0 DO differential 0.02 .. 1.00 Hz 0.03 Hz Dropout differential
Information List
No. Information Type of
Informa-
tion
Comments
235.2110 >BLOCK $00 SP >BLOCK Function $00
235.2111 >$00 instant. SP >Function $00 instantaneous TRIP
235.2112 >$00 Dir.TRIP SP >Function $00 Direct TRIP
235.2113 >$00 BLK.TDly SP >Function $00 BLOCK TRIP Time Delay
235.2114 >$00 BLK.TRIP SP >Function $00 BLOCK TRIP
235.2115 >$00 BL.TripA SP >Function $00 BLOCK TRIP Phase A
235.2116 >$00 BL.TripB SP >Function $00 BLOCK TRIP Phase B
235.2117 >$00 BL.TripC SP >Function $00 BLOCK TRIP Phase C
235.2118 $00 BLOCKED OUT Function $00 is BLOCKED
235.2119 $00 OFF OUT Function $00 is switched OFF
235.2120 $00 ACTIVE OUT Function $00 is ACTIVE
235.2121 $00 picked up OUT Function $00 picked up
235.2122 $00 pickup A OUT Function $00 Pickup Phase A
235.2123 $00 pickup B OUT Function $00 Pickup Phase B
235.2124 $00 pickup C OUT Function $00 Pickup Phase C
235.2125 $00 Time Out OUT Function $00 TRIP Delay Time Out
235.2126 $00 TRIP OUT Function $00 TRIP
235.2128 $00 inval.set OUT Function $00 has invalid settings
236.2127 BLK. Flex.Fct. IntSP BLOCK Flexible Function
2.18.4
Functions
2.18 Flexible Protection Functions
252 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Reverse-Power Protection Application with Flexible Protection
Function
Functional Description
General
General By means of the flexible protection functions a single-element or multi-element reverse power protec-
tion can be realized. Each reverse power element can be operated in single-phase or three-phase. Depending
on the chosen option, the elements can evaluate active power forward, active power reverse, reactive power
forward or reactive power reverse as measured value. The pickup by the protection elements can occur on
exceeding or undershooting of the threshold. Possible applications for reverse power protection are set out in
Table 2-19.
Table 2-19 Overview of reverse power protection applications
Type of Evaluation
Direction Overshooting Undershooting
P forward Monitoring of the forward power limits of operational equipment Detection of idling
motors
reverse Protection of a local industrial network against reversed feeding into
the energy supply network
Detection of reversed feeding by motors
Q forward Monitoring of the reactive power limits of operational equipment
(transformers, lines)
Connection of a capacitor bank for reactive power compensation
reverse Monitoring of the reactive power limits of operational equipment
(transformers, lines)
Connection of a capacitor bank
The following example depicts a typical application where the flexible function acts as reverse power protec-
tion.
Disconnection Facility
The following fugure gives an example of an industrial control system with internal supply by the illustrated
generator. All illustrated lines and the busbar are indicated in three-phase (excluding the ground connections
and the connection to the voltage measurement at the generator). Both feeders 1 and 2 supply the consumers
of the customer. Usually the industrial customer receives his current from the energy supplier. The generator
runs in synchronism, without feeding power. If the power supply company can no longer guarantee the
required supply, the control system is separated from the system of the power supply company and the gener-
ator is taking over the internal supply. In this example the control system is disconnected from the system of
the power supply company as soon as the frequency leaves the nominal range (e.g. 1 - 2% deviation from the
nominal frequency), the voltage exceeds or undershoots a set value, or the generator's active power is fed to
the system of the power supply company. Depending on the user's philosophy, some of these criteria may be
combined. This would be realized via the CFC.
The example illustrates how a reverse power protection is implemented by means of the flexible protection
functions. Frequency protection and voltage protection are described in Sections 2.8 Frequency Protection 81
O/U and 2.6 Voltage Protection 27, 59.
2.19
2.19.1
Functions
2.19 Reverse-Power Protection Application with Flexible Protection Function
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 253
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[bsb-schaltanl-gen-eigenvers-20061205, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-103 Example of a substation with autonomous generator supply
Substation Layout
The control system is on the high-voltage side linked via a 110 kV line to the power system of the power
supply company. The circuit breaker CB1 is part of the power system of the power supply company. Discon-
nection from the control system of the power supply company's power system is effected by the load-isolator.
The transformer with a transformation ratio of 10:1 transforms the voltage level to 11 kV. The transformer,
the generator and the two feeders are linked via a busbar at the low-voltage side. Circuit breakers CB2 to CB5
separate consumer and operational equipment from the busbar.
Functions
2.19 Reverse-Power Protection Application with Flexible Protection Function
254 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Table 2-20 System data for the application example
Power System Data
Generator nominal power SNom,Gen = 38.1 MVA
Transformer nominal power SNom,Trafo = 38.1 MVA
Nominal voltage of high-voltage side UNom = 110 kV
Nominal voltage of busbar side UNom = 11 kV
Nominal primary CT current on busbar side ΙNom,prim = 2000 A
Nominal secondary CT current on busbar side ΙNom,sek = 1 A
Nominal primary VT voltage on busbar side UNom,prim = 11 kV
Nominal secondary VT voltage on busbar side UNom,sek = 100 V
Protective Functionality
With protection device 7SJ80, the control system is disconnected from the generator upon the generator's
reversed feeding into the power supply company's power system (protection function P reverse>). This func-
tionality is realized by means of a flexible protection function. Additionally, the disconnection is effected by
fluctuations in frequency or voltage in the power supply company's power system (protection function f<, f>,
27-1 PICKUP, 59-1 PICKUP, 67-1 PICKUP, , 67N-1 PICKUP).
The protection receives the measured values via a three-phase current and voltage transformer set.
In case of disconnection, the circuit breaker CB2 is triggered.
The transformer is protected by a differential protection and inverse or definite time overcurrent protection
functions for the phase-to-phase currents. In the event of a fault, the circuit-breaker CB1 in the power supply
company's system is activated via a remote link. In addition, the circuit breaker CB2 is activated.
Overcurrent protection functions protect the feeders 1 and 2 against short circuits and overload caused by the
connected consumers. The phase-to-phase currents and the zero currents of the feeders can be protected by
inverse and definite time overcurrent protection elements. In the event of a fault, the circuit breakers CB4 and
CB5 are activated.
In addition, the busbar could be equipped with the 7UT635 differential protective relay for multiple ends. The
current transformers required to this end are already included in the example above.
Wiring Diagram, Power Direction
The following figure shows the wiring of the device for reverse power protection. The power flow in positive
or forward direction occurs from the high-voltage busbar (not shown) via the transformer to the lowvoltage
busbar.
Functions
2.19 Reverse-Power Protection Application with Flexible Protection Function
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 255
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[7sj80-anschl-rueckleist-schutz-20061205, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-104 Wiring diagram for a 7SJ80 as reverse power protection
Implementation of the Reverse Power Protection
General
The names of messages can be edited in DIGSI and adjusted accordingly for this example. The names of the
parameters are fixed.
Determination of the Reverse Power
The reverse power protection evaluates the active power from the symmetrical components of the funda-
mental harmonics of the voltages and currents. The evaluation of the positive sequence systems causes
reverse power determination to be independent of the asymmetries in currents and voltages and reflects the
real load of the driving end. The calculated active power value corresponds to the total active power. The
connection in the example illustrates positive measurement of power in the direction extending from the
busbar to the transformer of the device.
Functional Logic
The following logic diagram depicts the functional logic of the reverse power protection.
2.19.2
Functions
2.19 Reverse-Power Protection Application with Flexible Protection Function
256 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[flexfkn-p-rueckwaerts-040104-st, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-105 Logic diagram of the reverse power determination with flexible protection function
The reverse power protection picks up once the configured pickup threshold has been exceeded. If the pickup
condition persists during the equally settable pickup delay, the pickup message P.rev.PU is generated and
starts the trip delay time. If the pickup condition does not drop out while the trip delay time is counting down,
the trip indication P. rev. TRIP and the timeout indication P. rev. timeout (not shown) are generated. The
picked up element drops out when the value falls below the dropout threshold. The blocking input >P rev.
block blocks the entire function, i.e. pickup, trip and running times are reset. After the blocking has been
released, the reverse power must exceed the pickup threshold and both times must run out before the protec-
tion function trips.
Pickup Value, Dropout Ratio
The pickup value of the reverse power protection is set to 10% of the nominal generator output. In this
example, the setting value is configured as secondary power in watts. The following relationship exists
between the primary and the secondary power:
[flexfkn-ansprechwert-250204-he, 1, en_US]
On the basis of the indicated data, the pickup values are calculated considering P prim = 3.81 MW (10% of 38.1
MW) on the primary level to
[flexfkn-ansprechwert-numer-250204-he, 1, en_US]
on the secondary level. The dropout ratio is set to 0.9. This yields a secondary dropout threshold of Psec, dropout
= 15.6 W. If the pickup threshold is reduced to a value near the lower setting limit of 10 W, the dropout ratio
should equally be reduced to approximately 0.7.
Delay for Pickup, Dropout and Trip
The reverse power protection does not require short tripping times as protection from undesired power feed-
back. In the present example, it is useful to delay pickup and dropout by about 0.5 s and the trip by approx. 1
s. Delaying the pickup will minimize the number of fault logs which are opened when the reverse power oscil-
lates around the threshold.
When using the reverse power protection to disconnect the substation quickly from the power supply compa-
ny's system if faults occur, it is useful to select a larger pickup value (e.g. 50% of nominal power) and shorter
time delays.
Functions
2.19 Reverse-Power Protection Application with Flexible Protection Function
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 257
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Configuring the Reverse Power Protection in DIGSI
First create and open a 7SJ64x (e.g. 7SJ642) device in DIGSI Manager. Configure a flexible protection function
(flexible function 01) for the present example in the Device Configuration.
[funktionsumfang-flexfkn01-030204-he, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-106 Configuration of a flexible protection function
Select “Additional functions” in the „Parameters“ menu to view the flexible function
The parameter selection options for the flexible protection functions primarily depend on the settings made in
the Power System Data 1 for the connection of the voltage and current transformers (Addresses 213 and 251).
[flexfkn-weitere-funktionen-030204-he, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-107 The flexible function appears in the function selection.
First activate the function at “Settings --> General” and select the operating mode “3-phase”
2.19.3
Functions
2.19 Reverse-Power Protection Application with Flexible Protection Function
258 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[flexfkn-einstellungen-allgemein-3phasig-030204-he, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-108 Selection of the three-phase operating mode
In menu items “Measured Value” and “Measurement Procedures” “Active Power reverse”“ or “Exceeding” must
be set. If in menu item „Settings“ the box „Additional Parameters display“ is enabled, threshold value, pickup
delay time and trip delay time can be configured. As the power direction cannot be determined in case of
measured voltage failure, protection blocking would be sensible in this case.
[flexfkn-einstellungen-5-watt-030204-he, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-109 Setting options of the flexible function
Allocating the Reverse-Power Protection in DIGSI Configuration Matrix
The DIGSI configuration matrix initially shows the following indications (after selecting “Indications and
commands only” and “No filter”.
Functions
2.19 Reverse-Power Protection Application with Flexible Protection Function
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 259
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[flexfkn-rangierung-vor-dem-editieren-030204-he, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-110 Indications prior to editing
Clicking the texts allows for editing short text and long text as required by the application.
[flexfkn-rangierung-nach-dem-editieren-030204-he, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-111 Indications after editing
The indications are allocated in the same way as the indications of other protective functions.
Functions
2.19 Reverse-Power Protection Application with Flexible Protection Function
260 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Synchrocheck
When connecting two sections of a power system, the synchrocheck function verifies that the switching does
not endanger the stability of the power system
Applications
•Typical applications are, for example, the synchronization of a feeder and a busbar or the synchronization
of two busbars via tie-breaker.
General
Synchronous power systems exhibit small differences regarding frequency and voltage values. Before connec-
tion it is to be checked whether the conditions are synchronous or not. If the conditions are synchronous, the
system is energized; if they are asynchronous, it is not. The circuit breaker operating time is not taken into
consideration. The synchrocheck function is activated via address 161 SYNCHROCHECK.
For comparing the two voltages of the sections of the power system to be synchronized, the synchrocheck
function uses the reference voltage V1 and an additional voltage to be connected V2.
If a transformer is connected between the two voltage transformers as shown in the following example, its
vector group can be adapted in the 7SJ80 relay so that there is no external adjustment required.
[synchro-fkt-einspeis-061115, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-112 Infeed
2.20
2.20.1
Functions
2.20 Synchrocheck
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 261
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[synchro-fkt-querkuppl-061115, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-113 Cross coupling
The synchrocheck function of the 7SJ80 usually coordinates with the integrated automatic reclosing system
and the control function. Nevertheless, it is also possible to employ an external automatic reclosing system. In
such a case, the signal exchange between the devices is to be accomplished via binary inputs and outputs.
The configuration determines whether the synchrocheck is to be carried out only in the case of automatic
reclosing or only in the case of circuit breaker control or in both cases. It is also possible to configure different
release criteria for automatic reclosing or control closing. Synchronous connection is always accomplished via
the integrated control.
The release command for closing under satisfied synchronism conditions can be deactivated via parameter
6113 25 Synchron. For special applications, the deactivated closing release can, however, be activated via a
binary input (
>25 synchr.
) (see “De-energized Switching”).
Connection, Multi-phase
For comparing the two voltages, the synchrocheck function uses the reference voltage V1 and an additional
voltage to be connected V2. For the multi-phase connection, set the P.System Data 1 at 213 Vab, Vbc,
VSyn. With this setting, the device is connected as open-delta connection and the phase-to-phase voltages VAB
and VBC are used as reference voltage V1. The voltage to be synchronized V2 is assigned to the single-phase
connection and may be any phase-to-phase voltage. The connected voltage is set at address 6123.
Furthermore, it should be noted that in the case of an open-delta connection, no zero voltage can be deter-
mined. In this case, the functions “Directional Ground Fault Detection” and “Fuse Failure Monitor (FFM)” must
be hidden or disabled. The function „Directional Overcurrent Protection Ground“ then works with the negative
sequence system values. Notes on the effects of the current transformer connection can be found in Section
2.1.3.2 Setting Notes, Table 2-1.
Connection, Single-phase
If there is only one phase-to-ground voltage available for the reference voltage V1, the device can be informed
of this fact via the P.System Data 1, address 213 Vph-g, VSyn. Also in this case the synchrocheck func-
tion can be fully applied. For the voltage to be synchronized V2, the same phase-to-ground voltage as for V1
has to be connected.
Please note that some of the protection functions are restricted or do not work at all with this kind of connec-
tion. Notes on the effects of the current transformer connection can be found in Section 2.1.3.2 Setting Notes,
Table 2-1.
Functions
2.20 Synchrocheck
262 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Functional Sequence
Validity Check of the Configuration
Already during startup of the device, a validation check of the configuration is performed. If there is a fault,
the message
25 Set-Error
is output. after a measurement request there is a condition which is not plau-
sible, the message
25 Set-Error
is output. The measurement is then not started.
Concerning the configuration, it is also checked if the substation parameter 213 is set to Vab, Vbc, VSyn or
Vph-g, VSyn. Furthermore, specific thresholds and settings of the function group are checked. If there is a
condition which is not plausible, the error message
25 Set-Error
is output additionally. Please ensure in
this case that address 6106 (threshold V1, V2 energized) is smaller than address 6103 (lower voltage limit
Vmin). The synchrocheck function cannot be controlled via a binary input.
SYNC Error
The synchronization is not started if a voltage transformer failure (m.c.b. tripping) is communicated to the
device via the binary input 6509
>FAIL:FEEDER VT
or 6510
>FAIL: BUS VT
. The message
25 Sync.
Error
is output. In this case, the synchronization can be controlled directly via a binary input.
In case of a protection pickup, the complete synchronization process is reset instantaneously.
Release
The synchrocheck function only operates if it receives a measurement request. This request may be issued by
the internal control function, the automatic reclosing function or externally via a binary input, e.g. from an
external automatic reclosing system.
Before a release for closing is granted, the following conditions are checked:
•Is the reference voltage V1 above the setting value Vmin but below the maximum voltage Vmax?
•Is the voltage V2 to be synchronized above the setting value Vmin, but below the maximum voltage
Vmax?
•Is the voltage difference V2 – V1 within the permissible limit dV SYNCHK V2>V1?
•Is the voltage difference V1 – V2 within the permissible limit dV SYNCHK V2<V1?
•Are the two frequencies f1 and f2 within the permissible operating range fNom ± 3 Hz?
•Is the frequency difference f2 – f1 within the permissible limit df SYNCHK f2>f1?
•Is the frequency difference f1 – f2 within the permissible limit df SYNCHK f2<f1?
•Is the angle difference α2 – α1 within the permissible limit dα SYNCHK α2>α1?
•Is the angle difference α1 – α2 within the permissible limit dα SYNCHK α2<α1?
If there is a condition which is not plausible, the message
25 Sync. Error
is output and the measurement
is not started. the conditions are plausible, the measurement is started (message
25-1 meas.
) and the
configured release conditions are checked.
Each condition which is met is indicated explicitly (messages
25 Vdiff ok
,
25 fdiff ok
,
25 αdiff ok
).
Conditions which are not met are also indicated explicitly, e.g. when the voltage difference (messages
25
V2>V1
,
25 V2<V1
), frequency difference (messages „25 f2>f1“, „25 f2<f1“) or angle difference (messages
25
α2>α1
,
25 α2<α1
) is outside the limit values. The precondition for these messages is that both voltages are
within the operating range of the synchrocheck function (see “Operating Range”).
If the conditions are met, the synchrocheck function issues a release signal for closing the relay (
25 CloseR-
elease
). This release signal is only available for the configured duration of the CLOSE command and is
processed by the device's function control as CLOSE command to the circuit breaker (see also margin heading
“Interaction with Control”). However, the message
25 Synchron
is applied as long as the synchronous condi-
tions are met.
2.20.2
Functions
2.20 Synchrocheck
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 263
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
The measurement of the the synchronism conditions can be confined to the a maximum monitoring time T-
SYN. DURATION. If the conditions are not met within T-SYN. DURATION, the release is cancelled (message
25 MonTimeExc
). A new synchronization can only be performed if a new measurement request is received.
Operating Range
The operating range of the synchrocheck function is defined by the configured voltage limits Vmin and Vmax
as well as the fixed frequency band fNom ± 3 Hz
If the measurement is started and one of or both voltages are outside the operating range or one of the
voltages leaves the operating range, this is indicated by corresponding messages (
25 f1>>, 25 f1<<, 25
V1>>, 25 V1<<
).
Measured Values
The measured values of the synchrocheck function are displayed in separate windows for primary, secondary
and percentaged measured values. The measured values are displayed and updated only while the synchro-
check function is requested.
The following is displayed:
•Value of the reference voltage V1
•Value of the voltage to be synchronized V2
•Frequency values f1 and f2
•Differences of voltage, frequency and angle.
De-energized Switching
Connecting two components of a power system is also possible if at least one of the components is de-ener-
gized and if the measured voltage is greater than the threshold 6106 V>. With a multi-phase connection on
the side V1, all connected voltages must have a higher value than the threshold V> so that the side V1 is
considered as being energized. With a single-phase connection, of course, only the one voltage has to exceed
the threshold value.
Besides the release under synchronous conditions, the following additional release conditions can be selected
for the check:
SYNC V1>V2< = Release on the condition that component V1 is energized and component V2 is de-
energized.
SYNC V1<V2> = Release on the condition that component V1 is de-energized and component V2 is
energized.
SYNC V1<V2< = Release on the condition that component V1 and component V2 are de-energized.
Each of these conditions can be enabled or disabled individually via parameters or binary inputs; combinations
are thus also possible (e.g. release if SYNC V1>V2< or SYNC V1<V2> are fulfilled).
For that reason synchronization with the use of the additional parameter 6113 25 Synchron (configured to
NO) can also be used for the connection of a ground electrode. In such a case, connection is only permissible
when there is no voltage on the load side.
The threshold below which a power system component is considered as being de-energized is defined by
parameter V<. If the measured voltage exceeds the threshold V>, a power system component is considered as
being energized. With a multi-phase connection on the side V1, all connected voltages must have a higher
value than the threshold V> so that the side V1 is considered as being energized. With a single-phase connec-
tion, of course, only the one voltage has to exceed the threshold value.
Before granting a release for connecting the energized component V1 and the de-energized component V2,
the following conditions are checked:
2.20.3
Functions
2.20 Synchrocheck
264 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
•Is the reference voltage V1 above the setting value Vmin and V> but below the maximum voltage Vmax?
•Is the voltage to be synchronized V2 below the setting value V<?
•Is the frequency f1 within the permissible operating range fNom ± 3 Hz?
After successful completion of the checks, the release is granted.
For connecting the de-energized component 1 to the energized component 2 or the de-energized component
1 to the de-energized component 2, the conditions to be fulfilled correspond to those stated above.
The associated messages indicating the release via the corresponding condition are as follows:
25 V1> V2<
,
25 V1< V2>
and
25 V1< V2<
.
Via the binary inputs
>25 V1>V2<
,
>25 V1<V2>
and
>25 V1<V2<
, the release conditions can also be issued
externally, provided the synchronization is controlled externally.
The parameter TSUP VOLTAGE (address 6111) can be set to configure a monitoring time which requires the
additional release conditions stated above to be present for de-energized connection before connection is
allowed.
Direct Command / Blocking
Parameter 6110 Direct CO can be set to grant a release without performing any checks. In this case,
connection is allowed immediately when initiating the synchrocheck function. It is obviously not reasonable to
combine Direct CO with other release conditions.
If the synchrocheck function fails, a direct command may be issued or not, depending on the type of failure
(also see “Plausibility Check” and “SYNC Error”).
Via the binary input
>25direct CO
, this release can also be granted externally.
Blocking the entire synchrocheck function is possible via the binary input
>BLK 25-1
. The message signaling
this condition is output via
25-1 BLOCK
. With the blocking, the measurement is terminated and the entire
function is reset. A new measurement can only be performed with a new measurement request.
Via the binary input
>BLK 25 CLOSE
it is possible to block only the release signal for closing (
25 CloseRe-
lease
). When the blocking is active, measurement continues. The blocking is indicated by the message
25
CLOSE BLK
. When the blocking is reset and the release conditions are still fulfilled, the release signal for
closing is issued.
Interaction with Control, Automatic Reclosing and External Control
With Control
Basically, the synchrocheck function interacts with the device control. The switchgear component to be
synchronized is selected via a parameter. If a CLOSE command is issued, the control takes into account that
the switchgear component requires synchronization. The control sends a measurement request (
25 Measu.
req.
) to the synchrocheck function which is then started. Having completed the check, the synchrocheck
function issues the release message (
25 CloseRelease
) to which the control responds by terminating the
switching operation either positively or negatively.
2.20.4
2.20.5
Functions
2.20 Synchrocheck
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 265
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[zusam-wirk-steuer-synchro-fkt-061115, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-114 Interaction of control and synchrocheck function
With Automatic Reclosing
The automatic reclosing (AR) function can also interact with the synchrocheck function. They are linked via the
device control. The selection is made via configuration in the automatic reclosing and synchrocheck function.
The AR parameters (7138 Internal SYNC) determine whether working with SYNC function group 1 or - in
the case of external synchronization - without SYNC function group. The switch to be used is defined in func-
tion group 1. The switchgear component indicated in the AR parameters (7137 Cmd.via control) and the
SYNC function group must be identical. If no SYNC function group is entered in the AR parameters, the close
command of the AR function is carried out asynchronously via the switchgear component indicated in the AR
parameters. Equally, the CLOSE command
79 Close
(message 2851) allows only asynchronous switching. If,
for example, circuit breaker Q0 is configured as object to be switched synchronously, a CLOSE command of
the AR function will address this breaker and assign it a CLOSE command which will be processed by the
control. As this breaker requires synchronization, the control launches the synchrocheck function and awaits
release. If the configured conditions of the SYNC function group are fulfilled, the release is granted and the
control issues the CLOSE command.
[anbind-awe-an-synchro-fkt-061115, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-115 Connection of the automatic reclosing function to the synchrocheck function
Functions
2.20 Synchrocheck
266 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
With External Control
As another option, the synchrocheck function can be activated via external measurement requests via binary
inputs. If the start is effected via the pulse start signal
>25 Start
, the corresponding stop signal
>25 Stop
must always be generated, too. Having completed the check, the synchrocheck function issues the release
message (see the following figure). Measurement is terminated as soon as the measurement request is reset
via the binary input. In this case, there is no need to configure a control device to be synchronized.
[zusam-wirk-synchro-fkt-mit-ext-anst-061115, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-116 Interaction of synchrocheck function and external control
Setting Notes
General
The synchronization function can only operate if 25 Function 1 with SYNCHROCHECK was enabled at
address 161 during configuration of the functional scope (see Section 2.1.1.2 Setting Notes). If this function is
not required, then Disabled is set.
While setting the Power System Data 1 (see Section Voltage Connection (Power System), Page 40) the device
was already provided with data relevant for the measured values and the operating principle of the synchroni-
zation function. This concerns the following parameters:
202 Vnom PRIMARY primary nominal voltage of the voltage transformers V1 (phase-to-phase) in kV;
203 Vnom SECONDARY secondary nominal voltage of the voltage transformers V1 phase-to-phase) in V;
213 VT Connect. 3ph specifies how the voltage transformers are connected.
When using the synchronization function the setting Vab, Vbc, VSyn is used if two phase-to-phase
voltages are open delta-connected to the device. You can use any phase-to-phase voltage as the reference
voltage VSYN
Use the setting Vph-g, VSyn if only phase-to-ground voltages are available. One of these voltages is
connected to the first voltage transformer; the reference voltage VSYN is connected to the third voltage trans-
former. V1 at the first voltage transformer and V2 at the third voltage transformer must belong to the same
voltage type (VAN or VBN or VCN).
Connection examples are given under side heading “Voltage Connections” and in the Appendix C Connection
Examples).
If you have set Vab, Vbc, VSyn or Vph-g, VSyn, the zero sequence voltage can not be determined. The
functions “Directional Ground Fault Detection”, “Directional Time Overcurrent Protection Ground” and “Fuse
Failure Monitor (FFM)” are disabled in this case. Table 2-1 in the Section provides information about the
consequences of the different voltage connection types.
The operating range of the synchronization function (fNom ± 3 Hz) refers to the nominal frequency of the
power system, address 214 Rated Frequency.
The corresponding messages of the SYNC function group are pre-allocated for IEC 60870–5–103 (VDEW).
Selecting the SYNC function group in DIGSI opens a dialog box with tabs in which the individual parameters
for synchronization can be set.
General Settings
The general thresholds for the synchronizing function are set at addresses 6101 to 6112.
2.20.6
Functions
2.20 Synchrocheck
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 267
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Address 6101 Synchronizing allows you to switch the entire SYNC function group ON or OFF. If switched
off, the synchrocheck does not verify the synchronization conditions and release is not granted.
Parameter 6102 SyncCB is used to select the switchgear component to which the synchronization settings are
applied. Select the option none to use the function as external synchronizing feature. It will then be triggered
via binary input messages.
Addresses 6103 Vmin and 6104 Vmax set the upper and lower limits for the operating voltage range for V1 or
V2 and thus determine the operating range for the synchronization function. Values outside this range will be
signaled.
Address 6105 V< indicates the voltage threshold below which the feeder or the busbar can safely be consid-
ered switched off (for checking a de-energized feeder or busbar).
Address 6106 V> indicates the voltage threshold above which the feeder or busbar can safely be considered
energized (for checking an energized feeder or busbar). It must be set below the anticipated operational
undervoltage.
The setting for the mentioned voltage values is made in secondary volts. When using DIGSI for configuration,
these values can also be entered as primary values. Depending on the connection of the voltages these are
phase-to-earth voltages or phase-to-phase voltages.
Addresses 6107 to 6110 are set to specify the release conditions for the voltage check: Where
6107 SYNC V1<V2> = component V1 must be de-energized, component V2 must be energized (connection
when reference is de-energized, dead line);
6108 SYNC V1>V2< = component V1 must be energized, component V2 must be de-energized (connection
when feeder is de-energized, dead bus);
6109 SYNC V1<V2< = component V1 and component V2 must both be de-energized (connection when refer-
ence and feeder are de-energized, dead bus / dead line);
6110 Direct CO = connection released without checks.
The possible release conditions are independent of each other and can be combined. It is not recommended to
combine Direct CO with other release conditions.
Parameter TSUP VOLTAGE (address 6111) can be set to configure a monitoring time which requires above
stated release conditions to be present for at least de-energized switching before connection is allowed. The
preset value of 0.1 s accounts for transient responses and can be applied without modification.
Release via synchrocheck can be limited to a configurable synchronous monitoring time SYN. DURATION
(address 6112). The configured conditions must be fulfilled within this time period. Otherwise release is not
granted and the synchronizing function is terminated. If this time is set to ∞, the conditions will be checked
until they are fulfilled.
For special applications (e.g. connecting a ground switch) parameter 6113 25 Synchron allows enabling/
disabling the connection release when the conditions for synchronism are satisfied.
Power System Data
The system related data for the synchronization function are set at addresses 6121 to 6125.
The parameter Balancing V1/V2 (address 6121) can be set to account for different VT ratios of the two
parts of the power system (see example in Figure 2-117).
If a transformer is located between the system parts to be synchronized, its vector group can be accounted for
by angle adjustment so that no external adjusting measures are required. Parameter ANGLE ADJUSTM.
(address 6122) is used to this end.
The phase angle from V1 to V2 is evaluated positively.
Example:
Busbar 400 kV primary; 100 V secondary
Feeder 220 kV primary; 110 V secondary
Transformer 400 kV/220 kV; vector group Dy(n)5
The transformer vector group is defined from the high side to the low side. In the example, the reference
voltage transformers (V1) are the ones of the transformer high side, i.e. the setting angle is 5 x 30° (according
to vector group), that is 150°:
Functions
2.20 Synchrocheck
268 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Address 6122 ANGLE ADJUSTM. = 150°.
The reference voltage transformers supply 100 V secondary for primary operation at nominal value while the
feeder transformer supplies 110 V secondary. Therefore, this difference must be balanced:
Address 6121 Balancing V1/V2 = 100 V/110 V = 0.91.
[ss-spg-ueber-trafo-gemess-061115, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-117 Busbar voltage measured across the transformer
Voltage Connections
The 7SJ80 provides two voltage inputs for connecting the voltage V1 and one voltage input for connecting the
voltage V2 (see the following examples).
If two phase-to-phase voltages are open delta-connected to side V1 as reference voltage, a phase-to-phase
voltage must be connected and configured for the additional voltage V2 to be synchronized.
To correctly compare the phase-to-phase reference voltage V1 with the additional voltage V2, the device needs
to know the connection type of voltage V2. That is the task of parameter CONNECTIONof V2 (parameter
6123).
For the device to perform the internal conversion to primary values, the primary rated transformer voltage of
the measured quantity V2 must be entered via parameter 6125 VT Vn2, primary, primary if a transformer
is located between the system parts to be synchronized.
Functions
2.20 Synchrocheck
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 269
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[sync-mehrphasig-anschl-061116, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-118 Phase-to-phase voltage connection (open-delta connection)
If only phase-to-ground voltages are available, the reference voltage V1 is connected to the first voltage trans-
former and the additional voltage V2 to the third voltage transformer.
[sync-1phasig-anschl-le-061116, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-119 Phase-to-ground voltage connection
Functions
2.20 Synchrocheck
270 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Voltage Difference
The parameters 6150 dV SYNCHK V2>V1 and 6151 dV SYNCHK V2<V1 can be set to adjust the permissible
voltage differences asymmetrically. The availability of two parameters enables an asymmetrical release to be
set.
Settings
Addresses which have an appended “A” can only be changed with DIGSI, under “Additional Settings”.
Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments
6101 Synchronizing ON
OFF
OFF Synchronizing Function
6102 SyncCB (Setting options depend on
configuration)
none Synchronizable circuit breaker
6103 Vmin 20 .. 125 V 90 V Minimum voltage limit: Vmin
6104 Vmax 20 .. 140 V 110 V Maximum voltage limit: Vmax
6105 V< 1 .. 60 V 5 V Threshold V1, V2 without voltage
6106 V> 20 .. 140 V 80 V Threshold V1, V2 with voltage
6107 SYNC V1<V2> YES
NO
NO ON-Command at V1< and V2>
6108 SYNC V1>V2< YES
NO
NO ON-Command at V1> and V2<
6109 SYNC V1<V2< YES
NO
NO ON-Command at V1< and V2<
6110A Direct CO YES
NO
NO Direct ON-Command
6111A TSUP VOLTAGE 0.00 .. 60.00 sec 0.10 sec Supervision time of V1>;V2> or
V1<;V2<
6112 T-SYN. DURATION 0.01 .. 1200.00 sec; ∞ 30.00 sec Maximum duration of Synchroni-
zation
6113A 25 Synchron YES
NO
YES Switching at synchronous condi-
tion
6121 Balancing V1/V2 0.50 .. 2.00 1.00 Balancing factor V1/V2
6122A ANGLE ADJUSTM. 0 .. 360 ° 0 ° Angle adjustment (transformer)
6123 CONNECTIONof V2 A-B
B-C
C-A
A-B Connection of V2
6125 VT Vn2, primary 0.10 .. 800.00 kV 20.00 kV VT nominal voltage V2, primary
6150 dV SYNCHK V2>V1 0.5 .. 50.0 V 5.0 V Maximum voltage difference
V2>V1
6151 dV SYNCHK V2<V1 0.5 .. 50.0 V 5.0 V Maximum voltage difference
V2<V1
6152 df SYNCHK f2>f1 0.01 .. 2.00 Hz 0.10 Hz Maximum frequency difference
f2>f1
6153 df SYNCHK f2<f1 0.01 .. 2.00 Hz 0.10 Hz Maximum frequency difference
f2<f1
6154 dα SYNCHK α2>α1 2 .. 80 ° 10 ° Maximum angle difference
alpha2>alpha1
6155 dα SYNCHK α2<α1 2 .. 80 ° 10 ° Maximum angle difference
alpha2<alpha1
2.20.7
Functions
2.20 Synchrocheck
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 271
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Information List
No. Information Type of
Informa-
tion
Comments
170.0001 >25-1 act SP >25-group 1 activate
170.0043 >25 Sync requ. SP >25 Synchronization request
170.0049 25 CloseRelease OUT 25 Sync. Release of CLOSE Command
170.0050 25 Sync. Error OUT 25 Synchronization Error
170.0051 25-1 BLOCK OUT 25-group 1 is BLOCKED
170.2007 25 Measu. req. SP 25 Sync. Measuring request of Control
170.2008 >BLK 25-1 SP >BLOCK 25-group 1
170.2009 >25direct CO SP >25 Direct Command output
170.2011 >25 Start SP >25 Start of synchronization
170.2012 >25 Stop SP >25 Stop of synchronization
170.2013 >25 V1>V2< SP >25 Switch to V1> and V2<
170.2014 >25 V1<V2> SP >25 Switch to V1< and V2>
170.2015 >25 V1<V2< SP >25 Switch to V1< and V2<
170.2016 >25 synchr. SP >25 Switch to Sync
170.2022 25-1 meas. OUT 25-group 1: measurement in progress
170.2025 25 MonTimeExc OUT 25 Monitoring time exceeded
170.2026 25 Synchron OUT 25 Synchronization conditions okay
170.2027 25 V1> V2< OUT 25 Condition V1>V2< fulfilled
170.2028 25 V1< V2> OUT 25 Condition V1<V2> fulfilled
170.2029 25 V1< V2< OUT 25 Condition V1<V2< fulfilled
170.2030 25 Vdiff ok OUT 25 Voltage difference (Vdiff) okay
170.2031 25 fdiff ok OUT 25 Frequency difference (fdiff) okay
170.2032 25 αdiff ok OUT 25 Angle difference (alphadiff) okay
170.2033 25 f1>> OUT 25 Frequency f1 > fmax permissible
170.2034 25 f1<< OUT 25 Frequency f1 < fmin permissible
170.2035 25 f2>> OUT 25 Frequency f2 > fmax permissible
170.2036 25 f2<< OUT 25 Frequency f2 < fmin permissible
170.2037 25 V1>> OUT 25 Voltage V1 > Vmax permissible
170.2038 25 V1<< OUT 25 Voltage V1 < Vmin permissible
170.2039 25 V2>> OUT 25 Voltage V2 > Vmax permissible
170.2040 25 V2<< OUT 25 Voltage V2 < Vmin permissible
170.2050 V1 = MV V1 =
170.2051 f1 = MV f1 =
170.2052 V2 = MV V2 =
170.2053 f2 = MV f2 =
170.2054 dV = MV dV =
170.2055 df = MV df =
170.2056 dα = MV dalpha =
170.2090 25 V2>V1 OUT 25 Vdiff too large (V2>V1)
170.2091 25 V2<V1 OUT 25 Vdiff too large (V2<V1)
170.2092 25 f2>f1 OUT 25 fdiff too large (f2>f1)
170.2093 25 f2<f1 OUT 25 fdiff too large (f2<f1)
170.2094 25 α2>α1 OUT 25 alphadiff too large (a2>a1)
2.20.8
Functions
2.20 Synchrocheck
272 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
No. Information Type of
Informa-
tion
Comments
170.2095 25 α2<α1 OUT 25 alphadiff too large (a2<a1)
170.2096 25 FG-Error OUT 25 Multiple selection of func-groups
170.2097 25 Set-Error OUT 25 Setting error
170.2101 25-1 OFF OUT Sync-group 1 is switched OFF
170.2102 >BLK 25 CLOSE SP >BLOCK 25 CLOSE command
170.2103 25 CLOSE BLK OUT 25 CLOSE command is BLOCKED
Functions
2.20 Synchrocheck
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 273
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Phase Rotation
A phase rotation function via binary input and parameter is implemented in 7SJ80 devices.
Applications
•Phase rotation ensures that all protective and monitoring functions operate correctly even with anti-
clockwise rotation, without the need for two phases to be reversed.
Functional Description
General
Various functions of the 7SJ80 only operate correctly if the phase rotation of the voltages and currents is
known. Among these functions are negative sequence protection, undervoltage protection (based only on
positive sequence voltages), directional overcurrent protection (direction with cross-polarized voltages), and
measured value monitors.
If an "acb" phase rotation is normal, the appropriate setting is made during configuration of the Power System
Data.
If the phase rotation can change during operation (e.g. the direction of a motor must be routinely changed),
then a changeover signal at the routed binary input for this purpose is sufficient to inform the protective relay
of the phase rotation reversal.
Logic
Phase rotation is permanently established at address 209 PHASE SEQ. (Power System Data). Via the exclu-
sive- OR gate the binary input
>Reverse Rot.
inverts the sense of the phase rotation applied with setting.
[meldelogikdrehfeldumschaltung-090902-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-120 Message logic of the phase rotation reversal
Influence on Protective and Monitoring Functions
The swapping of phases directly impacts the calculation of positive and negative sequence quantities, as well
as phase-to-phase voltages via the subtraction of one phase-to-ground voltage from another and vice versa.
Therefore, this function is vital so that phase detection messages, fault values, and operating measurement
values are not correct. As stated before, this function influences the negative sequence protection function,
directional overcurrent protection function, voltage protection function, flexible protection functions and
some of the monitoring functions that issue messages if the defined and calculated phase rotations do not
match.
Setting Notes
Setting the Function Parameter
The normal phase sequence is set at 209 (see Section 2.1.3 Power System Data 1). If, on the system side,
phase rotation is reversed temporarily, then this is communicated to the protection device using the binary
input
>Reverse Rot.
(5145).
2.21
2.21.1
2.21.2
Functions
2.21 Phase Rotation
274 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Function Logic
The function logic coordinates the execution of protection and auxiliary functions, it processes the resulting
decisions and information received from the system. This includes in particular:
Fault Detection / Pickup Logic
Processing Tripping Logic
Pickup Logic of the Entire Device
General Device Pickup
The pickup signals for all protection functions in the device are connected via an OR logic and lead to the
general device pickup. 4 It is initiated by the first function to pick up and drop out when the last function
drops out. As a consequence, the following message is reported: 501
Relay PICKUP
.
The general pickup is a prerequisite for a number of internal and external consequential functions. The
following are among the internal functions controlled by general device pickup:
•Start of a trip log: From general device pickup to general device dropout, all fault messages are entered in
the trip log.
•Initialization of Oscillographic Records: The storage and maintenance of oscillographic values can also be
made dependent on the general device pickup.
Exception: Apart from the settings ON or OFF, some protection functions can also be set to Alarm Only. With
setting Alarm Only no trip command is given, no trip log is created, fault recording is not initiated and no
spontaneous fault annunciations are shown on the display.
External functions may be controlled via an output contact. Examples are:
•Automatic reclosing devices,
•Starting of additional devices, or similar.
Tripping Logic of the Entire Device
General Tripping
The trip signals for all protective functions are connected by OR and generate the message 511
Relay TRIP
.
This message can be configured to an LED or binary output, just as the individual tripping messages can.
Terminating the Trip Signal
Once the trip command is output by the protection function, it is recorded as message
Relay TRIP
(see
Figure 2-121). At the same time, the minimum trip command duration TMin TRIP CMD is started. This
ensures that the command is transmitted to the circuit breaker for a sufficient amount of time, even if the
function which issued the trip signal drops out quickly. The trip commands can be terminated first when the
last protection function has dropped out (no function is in pickup mode) AND the minimum trip signal dura-
tion has expired.
Finally, it is possible to latch the trip signal until it is manually reset (lockout function). This allows the circuit-
breaker to be locked against reclosing until the cause of the fault has been clarified and the lockout has been
manually reset. The reset takes place either by pressing the LED reset key or by activating an appropriately
allocated binary input (
>Reset LED
). A precondition, of course, is that the circuit-breaker close coil – as usual
– remains blocked as long as the trip signal is present, and that the trip coil current is interrupted by the auxil-
iary contact of the circuit breaker.
2.22
2.22.1
2.22.2
Functions
2.22 Function Logic
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 275
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[7sj6x-abst-ausloesekommando-150502-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-121 Terminating the Trip Signal
Setting Notes
Trip Signal Duration
The minimum trip command duration TMin TRIP CMD was described already in Section 2.1.3 Power System
Data 1. This setting applies to all protective functions that initiate tripping.
2.22.3
Functions
2.22 Function Logic
276 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Auxiliary Functions
The general functions of the device are described in chapter "Auxililary Functions".
Message Processing
After the occurrence of a system fault, data regarding the response of the protective relay and the measured
values are saved for future analysis. For this reason the device is designed to perform message processing.
Applications
•LED Display and Binary Outputs (Output Relays)
•Information via Display Field or Personal Computer
•Information to a Control Center
Prerequisites
The SIPROTEC 4 System Description provides a detailed description of the configuration procedure
(see /1/ SIPROTEC 4 System Description).
LED Displays and Binary Outputs (Output Relays)
Important events and conditions are displayed, using LEDs at the front panel of the relay. The device further-
more has output relays for remote indication. All LEDs and binary outputs indicating specific messages can be
freely configured. The relay is delivered with a default setting. The Appendix of this manual deals in detail with
the delivery status and the allocation options.
The output relays and the LEDs may be operated in a latched or unlatched mode (each may be individually
set).
The latched conditions are protected against loss of the auxiliary voltage. They are reset:
•On site by pressing the LED key on the relay,
•Remotely using a binary input configured for that purpose,
•Using one of the serial interfaces,
•Automatically at the beginning of a new pickup.
State indication messages should not be latched. Also, they cannot be reset until the criterion to be reported
has reset. This applies to messages from monitoring functions, or similar.
A green LED displays operational readiness of the relay ("RUN“), and cannot be reset. It goes out if the self-
check feature of the microprocessor recognizes an abnormal occurrence, or if the auxiliary voltage is lost.
When auxiliary voltage is present, but the relay has an internal malfunction, then the red LED ("ERROR") lights
up and the processor blocks the relay.
Information on the Integrated Display (LCD) or Personal Computer
Events and conditions can be read out on the display at the front cover of the relay. Using the front PC inter-
face or the port B at the botton, a personal computer can be connected, to which the information can be sent.
The relay is equipped with several event buffers, for operational messages, circuit breaker statistics, etc.,
which are protected against loss of the auxiliary voltage by a buffer battery. These messages can be displayed
on the LCD at any time by selection via the keypad or transferred to a personal computer via the serial service
or PC interface. Readout of messages during operation is described in detail in the SIPROTEC 4 System Descrip-
tion.
Classification of Messages
The messages are categorized as follows:
2.23
2.23.1
2.23.1.1
2.23.1.2
Functions
2.23 Auxiliary Functions
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 277
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
•Operational messages (event log); messages generated while the device is operating: Information
regarding the status of device functions, measured data, power system data, control command logs etc.
•Fault indications; these are indications of the last 25 network faults that were processed by the device.
•Ground fault messages (when the device has sensitive ground fault detection).
•Messages of "statistics"; they include a counter for the trip commands initiated by the device and possibly
reclose commands as well as values of interrupted currents and accumulated fault currents.
A complete list of all message and output functions that can be generated by the device with the maximum
functional scope can be found in the appendix. All functions are associated with an information number
(FNo). There is also an indication of where each message can be sent to. If functions are not present in a not
fully equipped version of the device, or are configured to Disabled, then the associated indications cannot
appear.
Operational Messages (Buffer: Event Log)
The operational messages contain information that the device generates during operation and about opera-
tional conditions. Up to 200 operational messages are recorded in chronological order in the device. New
messages are appended at the end of the list. If the memory is used up, then the oldest message is scrolled
out of the list by a new message.
Fault Messages (Buffer: Trip Log)
After a fault on the system, for example, important information about the progression of the fault can be
retrieved, such as the pickup of a protective element or the initiation of a trip signal. The start of the fault is
time stamped with the absolute time of the internal system clock. The progress of the disturbance is output
with a relative time referred to the instant of fault detection, so that the duration of the fault until tripping and
up to reset of the trip command can be ascertained. The resolution of the time information is 1 ms.
Spontaneous Displays on the Device Front
After occurrence of a fault, the most important fault data is output automatically on the device display,
without any further operating actions. It is displayed after a general device pickup in the sequence shown in
the following figure.
[anzeige-spontanmeld-im-display-20070326, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-122 Display of spontaneous messages in the HMI
Retrievable Messages
The messages for the last eight network faults can be retrieved and read out. The definition of a network fault
is such that the time period from fault detection up to final clearing of the disturbance is considered to be one
network fault. If auto-reclosing occurs, then the network fault ends after the last reclosing shot, which means
after a successful reclosing or lockout. Therefore the entire clearing process, including all reclosing shots,
occupies only one trip log buffer. Within a network fault, several fault messages can occur (from the first
pickup of a protective function to the last dropout of a protective function). Without auto-reclosing each fault
event represents a network fault.
In total 600 indications can be recorded. Oldest data are erased for newest data when the buffer is full.
Ground Fault Messages
In devices with sensitive ground fault detection, separate ground fault logs are provided for ground fault
recording. These logs are completed if the ground fault detection is not set to tripping but to Alarm Only
(address 3101 = Alarm Only) or the setting ON with GF log has been selected. With setting ON with
GF log, there is also a trip, apart from the opening of the ground fault log.
Functions
2.23 Auxiliary Functions
278 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
For cos-ϕ / sin-ϕ measurements, a criterion for the opening of the ground fault log is the pickup of the VN>-
element. For “U0/I0-ϕ measurements” the ground fault log is opened as soon as a VN>-element has responded
and the angle condition is fulfilled. (Detailed information is provided in the logic diagrams for ground fault
detection, Section 2.12 Ground Fault Protection 64, 67N(s), 50N(s), 51N(s)). As soon as the pickup drops out,
the fault recording is terminated. The ground fault log is opened as soon as the message 1271
Sens.Gnd
Pickup
(appearing) is issued and terminated upon disappearing of such message.
Up to 45 ground fault messages can be recorded for the last 3 ground faults. If more ground fault messages
are generated, the oldest are deleted consecutively.
General Interrogation
The general interrogation which can be retrieved via DIGSI enables the current status of the SIPROTEC 4 device
to be read out. All messages requiring general interrogation are displayed with their present value.
Spontaneous Messages
The spontaneous messages displayed using DIGSI reflect the present status of incoming information. Each
new incoming message appears immediately, i.e. the user does not have to wait for an update or initiate one.
Information to a Control Center
Stored information can additionally be transferred to a central control and storage device if the relay is
connected to such a device via port B. Transmission is possible via various transmission protocols.
Statistics
The number of trips initiated by the 7SJ80, the number of close commands initiated by the AR and the oper-
ating hours under load are counted.
An additional counter allows the number of hours to be determined in which the circuit breaker is positioned
in the “open” condition. Further statistical data can be gained to optimize the intervals for circuit breaker main-
tenance.
The counter and memory levels are secured against loss of auxiliary voltage.
During the first start of the protection device the statistical values are pre-defined to zero.
Functional Description
Number of Trips
In order to count the number of trips of 7SJ80, the 7SJ80 relay has to be informed of the position of the circuit
breaker auxiliary contacts via binary inputs. Hereby, it is necessary that the internal pulse counter
#of
TRIPs=
is allocated in the matrix to a binary input that is controlled by the circuit breaker OPEN position. The
pulse count value "Number of TRIPs CB" can be found in the "Statistics" group if the option "Measured and
Metered Values Only" was enabled in the configuration matrix.
Number of Automatic Reclosing Commands
The number of reclosing commands initiated by the automatic reclosing function is summed up in separate
counters for the 1st and ≥ 2nd cycle.
Operating Hours
The operating hours under load are also stored (= the current value in at least one phase is greater than the
limit value BkrClosed I MIN set under address 212).
Hours Meter "CB open"
A meter can be realized as a CFC application if it adds up the number of hours in state “Circuit Breaker open”
similarly to the operating hours meter. The universal hours meter is linked to a respective binary input and
counts if the binary input is active. Alternatively, the undershooting of the parameter value 212 BkrClosed
2.23.1.3
2.23.2
2.23.2.1
Functions
2.23 Auxiliary Functions
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 279
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
I MIN may be used as a criterion for starting the meter. The meter can be set or reset. A CFC application
example for such meter is available on the Internet (SIPROTEC Download Area).
Circuit Breaker Maintenance
General
The procedures aiding in CB maintenance allow maintenance intervals of the CB poles to be carried out when
their actual degree of wear makes it necessary. Saving on maintenance and servicing costs is one of the main
benefits this functionality offers.
The universal CB maintenance accumulates the tripping currents of the trips initiated by the protective func-
tions and comprises the four following autonomous subfunctions:
•Summation tripping current (ΣΙ-procedure)
•Summation of tripping powers (ΣΙx-procedure)
•Two-point procedure for calculating the remaining lifetime (2P-procedure)
•Sum of all Squared Fault Current Integral (I2t-procedure);
Measured value acquisition and preparation operates phase-selectively for all four subfunctions. The three
results are each evaluated using a threshold which is specific for each procedure (see Figure 2-123.).
[schema-lsw-171103-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-123 Diagram of CB maintenance procedures
The ΣΙ procedure is always present and active as a basic functionality. However, the other procedures (ΣΙx, 2P
and Ι2t) can be selected via a common configuration parameter.
As the load on the switch depends on the current amplitude and duration of the actual switching action,
including arc deletion, determination of the start and end criteria is of great importance. The procedures ΣΙx,
2P and Ι2t make use of the same criteria for that purpose. The logic of the start and end criterion is illustrated
in Figure 2-124.
2.23.2.2
Functions
2.23 Auxiliary Functions
280 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
The start criterion is fulfilled by an internal protective tripping initiated by the group indication "device TRIP".
Trips initiated via the internal control function are taken into consideration for the circuit breaker maintenance
if the respective command is indicated via the parameter 265 Cmd.via control. An externally initiated trip
command can be taken into consideration if the message
>52 Wear start
is sent simultaneously via a
binary input. The edge of the sent message
>52-a
can also be used as a further criterion as this signals that
the mechanism of the circuit breaker is put in motion in order to separate the contacts.
As soon as the start criterion has been fulfilled, the parameterized opening time of the circuit breaker is
started. The time of commencement of separation of the circuit breaker contacts is thus determined. The end
of the trip procedure, including arc deletion is determined via another given parameter (CB tripping time)
supplied by the manufacturer of the circuit breaker.
In order to prevent an incorrect calculation procedure in case of circuit breaker failure, the current criterion
212 BkrClosed I MIN verifies whether the current actually returned to zero after two additional cycles.
When the phase-selective logic release is fulfilled by the current criterion, the calculation and evaluation
methods of the respective procedures are initiated. After these have been completed, the end criterion of the
circuit breaker maintenance is fulfilled and ready for a new initiation.
Please note that CB maintenance will be blocked if parameter settings are made incorrectly. This condition is
indicated by the message
52 WearSet.fail
,
52WL.blk n PErr
or
52WL.blk I PErr
(see Section
2.1.6.2 Setting Notes, “Power System Data 2”). The latter two indications can only take effect if the 2P-proce-
dure was configured.
Functions
2.23 Auxiliary Functions
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 281
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[logik-lsw-start-endekriterium-170903-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-124 Logic of the start and end criterion
ΣΙ-Procedure
Being a basic function, the ΣΙ-procedure is unaffected by the configuration and does not require any procedur-
especific settings. All tripping currents occurring 1½ periods after a protective trip, are summed up for each
phase. These tripping currents are r.m.s. values of the fundamental harmonic.
The interrupted current in each pole is determined for each trip signal. The interrupted fault current is indi-
cated in the fault messages and is added up with previously stored fault current values in the statistic-coun-
ters. Measured values are indicated in primary terms.
Functions
2.23 Auxiliary Functions
282 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
The ΣΙ method does not feature integrated threshold evaluation. But using CFC it is possible to implement a
threshold, which logically combines and evaluates the three summation currents via an OR operation. Once
the summation current exceeds the threshold, a corresponding message will be triggered.
ΣΙx-Procedure
While the ΣΙ-procedure is always enabled and active, use of the ΣIx-procedure depends on the CB maintenance
configuration. This procedure operates analogously to the ΣΙ-procedure. The differences relate to the involu-
tion of the tripping currents and their reference to the exponentiated rated operating current of the CB. Due to
the reference to Ιr x, the result is an approximation to the number of make-break operations specified by the
CB manufacturer. The displayed values can be interpreted as the number of trips at rated operational current
of the CB. They are displayed in the statistics values without unit and with two decimal places.
The tripping currents used for calculation are a result of the rms values of the fundamental harmonic, which is
recalculated each cycle.
If the start criterion is satisfied (as described in Section „General“), the r.m.s. values, which are relevant after
expiration of the opening time, are checked for each phase as to whether they comply with the current crite-
rion. If one of the values does not satisfy the criterion, its predecessor will be used instead for calculation. If no
r.m.s. value satisfies the criterion up to the predecessor of the starting point, which is marked by the start
criterion, a trip has taken place which only affects the mechanical lifetime of the breaker and is consequently
not detected by this procedure.
If the current criterion grants the logic release after the opening time has elapsed, the recent primary tripping
currents (Ιb) are involuted and related to the exponentiated rated operating current of the CB. These values
are then added to the existing statistic values of the ΣΙx-procedure. Subsequently, threshold comparison is
started using threshold
ΣI^x>
as well as the output of the new related summation tripping current powers. If
one of the new statistic values lies above the threshold, the message
Threshold ΣI^x>
is generated.
2P-Procedure
The application of the two-point procedure for the calculation of the remaining lifespan depends on the CMD
configuration. The data supplied by the CB manufacturer is transformed in such manner that, by means of
measuring the fault currents, a concrete statement can be made with regard to the still possible operating
cycles. The CB manufacturer's double-log operating cycle diagrams form the basis of the measured fault
currents at the time of contact separation. Determination of the fault currents is effected in accordance with
the method as described in the above section of the ΣΙx–procedure.
The three results of the calculated remaining lifetime are represented as statistic value. The results represent
the number of still possible trips, if the tripping takes place when the current reaches the rated operational
current. They are displayed without unit and without decimals.
As with the other procedures, a threshold logically combines the three “remaining lifetime results” via an OR
operation and evaluates them. It forms the “lower threshold”, since the remaining lifetime is decremented
with each trip by the corresponding number of operating cycles. If one of the three phase values drops below
the threshold, a corresponding message will be triggered.
A double-logarithmic diagram provided by the CB manufacturer illustrates the relationship of operating cycles
and tripping current (see example in Figure 2-125). This diagram allows the number of yet possible trips to be
determined (for tripping with equal tripping current). According to the example, approximately 1000 trips can
yet be carried out at a tripping current of 10 kA. The characteristic is determined by two vertices and their
connecting line. Point P1 is determined by the number of permitted operating cycles at rated operating
current Ιr, point P2 by the maximum number of operating cycles at rated fault tripping current Ιsc. The associ-
ated four values can be configured.
Functions
2.23 Auxiliary Functions
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 283
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[lsw-2p-schaltspiel270404-he, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-125 Diagram of operating cycles for the 2P procedure
As Figure 2-125 illustrates a double-log diagram, the straight line between P1 and P2 can be expressed by the
following exponential function:
n = b·Ιbm
where n is the number of operating cycles, b the operating cycles at Ιb = 1A, Ιb the tripping current, and m the
directional coefficient.
The general line equation for the double-logarithmic representation can be derived from the exponential func-
tion and leads to the coefficients b and m.
i
i
NOTE
Since a directional coefficient of m < -4 is technically irrelevant, but could theoretically be the result of
incorrect settings, it is limited to -4. If a coefficient is smaller than -4, the exponential function in the oper-
ating cycles diagram is deactivated. The maximum number of operating cycles with Ιsc (263 OP.CYCLES
Isc) is used instead as the calculation result for the current number of operating cycles, see Figure 2-126.
Functions
2.23 Auxiliary Functions
284 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[2p-richtungskoeffizient-300104-he, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-126 Value limitation of directional coefficient
With the characteristics description, you can calculate the actual remaining lifetime after each tripping.
[fo_7sj_remaining-lifetime _01, 1, en_US]
The index i characterizes the actual tripping. With the ratio of the maximum number of switching cycles (nmax
is n at Ιr) to the actual calculated number of switching cycles, you get the ratio of these concerning the
maximum number of possible switching cycles in case of a tripping with rated operating current (Ιr).
In the following example, the circuit breaker has tripped 100 times with rated operating current, 2 times with
rated short-circuit current, and 3 times with 10 kA.
The number of permissible trippings with rated operating current is calculated as following:
[fo_7sj_remaining-lifetime _03, 1, en_US]
RLT Remaining lifetime
In the example, 9465 more trippings with rated operating current are possible.
If the current criterion described in the Section “General” grants the phase-selective logic release, the present
number of operating cycles is calculated based on the tripping currents determined when the CB operating
time on tripping has elapsed. They are set off against the remaining lifetime allowing the present statistic
Functions
2.23 Auxiliary Functions
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 285
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
values to be displayed and the evaluation to be started using the specified threshold. If one of the new values
lies above the threshold, the message
Thresh.R.Endu.<
is generated.
Three additional phase-selective statistic values are provided to determine the portion of purely mechanical
trips among the results of the remaining lifetime (e.g. for phase A:
mechan.TRIP A=
). They act as counters
which count only the trips whose tripping currents are below the value of the current criterion.
Ι2t-Procedure
During the Ι2t-procedure the squared fault current integral occurring per trip is added up phase-selectively.
The integral is derived from the squared instantaneous values of the currents occurring during arc time of the
circuit breaker. This results in:
T CB arc = (parameter 266 T 52 BREAKTIME) – (parameter 267 T 52 OPENING).
The three sums of the calculated integrals are represented as statistic values referred to the squared device
nominal current (Ιnom2). As with the other procedures, a threshold logically combines the three sums via an OR
operation and evaluates them.
The calculated squared tripping currrent integrals are added to the existing statistic values. Subsequently,
threshold comparison is started using threshold
ΣI^2t>
, and the new statistic values are output. If one of the
values lies above the threshold, the message
Thresh. ΣI^2t>
is generated.
Commissioning
Usually, no measures are required for commissioning. However, should the protection device be exchanged
(e.g. old circuit breaker and a new protection device), the initial values of the respective limit or statistical
values must be determined via the switching statistics of the respective circuit breaker.
Setting Notes
Reading/Setting/Resetting Counters
The SIPROTEC 4 System Description provides a description of how to read out the statistical counters via the
device front panel or DIGSI. Setting or resetting of these statistical counters takes place under the menu item
MESSAGES —> STATISTICS by overwriting the counter values displayed.
Circuit Breaker Maintenance
Under address 172 52 B.WEAR MONIT one of the alternatives ΣΙx procedure, 2P procedure, Ι2t procedure or
Disabled can be set. All parameters relevant to this function are available at parameter block P.System
Data 1 (see Section 2.1.3 Power System Data 1 ).
The following setting values are important input values the subfunctions require in order to operate correctly:
The CB Tripping Time is a characteristic value provided by the manufacturer. It covers the entire tripping
process from the trip command (applying auxiliary power to the trip element of the circuit breaker) up to arc
extinction in all poles. The time is set at address 266 T 52 BREAKTIME.
The CB Operating Time T 52 OPENING is equally a characteristic value of the circuit breaker. It covers the
time span between the trip command (applying auxiliary power to the trip element of the circuit breaker) and
separation of CB contacts in all poles. It is entered at address 267 T 52 OPENING.
The following diagram illustrates the relationship between these CB times.
2.23.2.3
Functions
2.23 Auxiliary Functions
286 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[ls-zeiten-120304-he, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-127 Illustration of the CB times
Current flow monitoring 212 BkrClosed I MIN, which some protective functions rely upon to detect a
closed CB, is used as the current zero criterion. It should be set with respect to the actually used device func-
tions (see also margin heading “Current Flow Monitoring (CB)” in Section 2.1.3.2 Setting Notes.
ΣΙProcedure
Being the basic function of summation current formation, the ΣΙ-procedure is always active and does not
require any additional settings. This is irrespective of the configuration in address 172 52 B.WEAR MONIT.
This method does not offer integrated threshold evaluation. The latter could, however, be implemented using
CFC.
ΣΙx-Procedure
Parameter 172 52 B.WEAR MONIT can be set to activate the ΣΙx procedure. In order to facilitate evaluating
the sum of all tripping current powers, the values are referred to the involuted CB rated operational current.
This value is indicated in the CB data at address 260 Ir-52 in the P.System Data 1 and can be set as
primary value. This reference allows the threshold of the ΣΙx procedure to correspond to the maximum
number of make-break operations. For a circuit breaker, whose contacts have not yet been worn, the
maximum number of make-break operations can be entered directly as threshold. The exponent for the invo-
lution of the rated operational current and of the tripping currents is set at address 264 Ix EXPONENT. To
meet different customer requirements, this exponent 264 Ix EXPONENT can be increased from 1.0 (default
setting = 2.0) to 3.0.
For the procedure to operate correctly, the time response of the circuit breaker must be specified in parame-
ters 266 T 52 BREAKTIME and 267 T 52 OPENING.
The summated values can be interpreted as the number of tripping operations at rated operational current of
the CB. They are displayed in the statistical values without unit and with two decimal places.
2P-Procedure
Parameter 172 52 B.WEAR MONIT can be set to activate the 2P procedure. An operating cycles diagram (see
sample diagram in the functional description of the 2P procedure), provided by the manufacturer, shows the
Functions
2.23 Auxiliary Functions
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 287
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
relationship of make-break operations and tripping current. The two vertices of this characteristic in a double
logarithmic scale are decisive for the setting of addresses 260 to 263:
Point P1 is determined by the number of permitted make-break operations (parameter 261 OP.CYCLES AT
Ir) for rated operational current Ιr (parameter 260 Ir-52)
Point P2 is determined by the maximum number of make-break operations (parameter 263 OP.CYCLES Isc)
for rated fault tripping current Ιsc (parameter 262 Isc-52).
For the procedure to operate correctly, the time response of the circuit breaker must be specified in parame-
ters 266T 52 BREAKTIME and 267T 52 OPENING.
Ι2t-Procedure
The Ι2t-procedure is activated via configuration parameter 172 52 B.WEAR MONIT. The square fault current
integrals are referred to the squared device nominal current. For purposes of determining the arc time, the
device must be informed of the CB tripping time T 52 BREAKTIME as well as the CB opening time T 52
OPENING of the circuit breaker. For recognition of the last zero crossing (arc deletion) of the currents after
tripping, the “Current-zero” Criterion is required.
Information List
No. Information Type of
Informa-
tion
Comments
- #of TRIPs= PMV Number of TRIPs=
409 >BLOCK Op Count SP >BLOCK Op Counter
1020 Op.Hours= VI Counter of operating hours
1021 Σ Ia = VI Accumulation of interrupted current Ph A
1022 Σ Ib = VI Accumulation of interrupted current Ph B
1023 Σ Ic = VI Accumulation of interrupted current Ph C
2896 79 #Close1./3p= VI No. of 1st AR-cycle CLOSE commands,3pole
2898 79 #Close2./3p= VI No. of higher AR-cycle CLOSE commands,3p
16001 ΣI^x A= VI Sum Current Exponentiation Ph A to Ir^x
16002 ΣI^x B= VI Sum Current Exponentiation Ph B to Ir^x
16003 ΣI^x C= VI Sum Current Exponentiation Ph C to Ir^x
16006 Resid.Endu. A= VI Residual Endurance Phase A
16007 Resid.Endu. B= VI Residual Endurance Phase B
16008 Resid.Endu. C= VI Residual Endurance Phase C
16011 mechan.TRIP A= VI Number of mechanical Trips Phase A
16012 mechan.TRIP B= VI Number of mechanical Trips Phase B
16013 mechan.TRIP C= VI Number of mechanical Trips Phase C
16014 ΣI^2t A= VI Sum Squared Current Integral Phase A
16015 ΣI^2t B= VI Sum Squared Current Integral Phase B
16016 ΣI^2t C= VI Sum Squared Current Integral Phase C
Measurement
A series of measured values and the values derived from them are constantly available for call up on site, or
for data transfer.
Applications
•Information on the actual status of the system
•Conversion of secondary values to primary values and percentages
2.23.2.4
2.23.3
Functions
2.23 Auxiliary Functions
288 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Prerequisites
Except for secondary values, the device is able to indicate the primary values and percentages of the measured
values.
A precondition correct display of the primary and percentage values is the complete and correct entry of the
nominal values for the instrument transformers and the protected equipment as well as current and voltage
transformer ratios in the ground paths when configuring the device. The following table shows the formulas
which are the basis for the conversion of secondary values to primary values and percentages.
When using the connection types Vab, Vbc or Vab, Vbc, Vx of the voltage transformers (address 213 VT
Connect. 3ph), the measured values for power P, Q, S, power factor, energy and the derived values, such as
mean values etc. are not available.
Measured values which cannot be calculated due to the selected voltage connection are shown as dots.
Display of Measured Values
Table 2-21 Conversion formulae between secondary values and primary/percentage values
Measured
Values
sekun-
dary
primary %
ΙA, ΙB, ΙC,
Ι1, Ι2
Ιsec.
ΙE = 3 ·Ι0
(calculated)
Ιe sec.
ΙN = measured
value of ΙN-input
ΙN sec.
ΙNs
(ΙNs,
Ι3I0real,
Ι3I0reakctiv)
ΙNs sec.
ΙN2 = measured
value from the
ΙE2 input
ΙN2 sec.
VA, VB, VC,
V0, V1, V2,
Vsyn
VPh-N sec.
VA–B, VB–C, VC–A VPh-Ph sec.
VNVN sec.
VxVx sec.
P, Q, S (P and Q
phase-segre-
gated)
No secondary measured values
Power Factor
(phase-segre-
gated)
cos φ cos φ cos φ · 100 in %
Frequency
Protection
f in Hz f in Hz
2.23.3.1
Functions
2.23 Auxiliary Functions
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 289
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Table 2-22 Legend for the conversion formulae
Parameter Address Parameter Address
CT PRIMARY 204 Ignd-CT PRIM 217
CT SECONDARY 205 Ignd-CT SEC 218
Vnom PRIMARY 202 Vph / Vdelta 206
Vnom SECONDARY 203 FullScaleVolt. 1101
FullScaleCurr. 1102
VXnom PRIMARY 232 Ignd2-CT PRIM. 238
VXnom SECONDARY 233 Ignd2-CT SEC. 239
Depending on the type of device ordered and the device connections, some of the operational measured
values listed below may not be available.
The phase–to–ground voltages are either measured directly, if the voltage inputs are connected phase–to–
ground, or they are calculated from the phase–to–phase voltages VA–B and VB–C and the displacement voltage
VN.
The displacement voltage VN is either measured directly or calculated from the phase-to-ground voltages:
[verlagerungsspannunguen-020315-wlk, 1, en_US]
Please note that value V0 is indicated in the operational measured values.
The ground current ΙN is either measured directly or calculated from the conductor currents.
[erdstrom-020315-wlk, 1, en_US]
Upon delivery, the power and operating values are set in such manner that power in line direction is positive.
Active components in line direction and inductive reactive components in line direction are also positive. The
same applies to the power factor cosϕ. It is occasionally desired to define the power drawn from the line (e.g.
as seen from the consumer) positively. Using parameter 1108 P,Q sign the signs for these components can
be inverted.
The calculation of the operational measured values is also performed during a fault. The values are updated in
intervals of > 0.3 s and < 1 s.
Transfer of Measured Values
Measured values can be transferred via the interfaces to a central control and storage unit.
The measuring range in which these values are transmitted depend on the protocol and, if necessary, addi-
tional settings.
Protocol Transmittable measuring range, format
IEC 60870-5-103 0 to 240 % of the measured value.
IEC 61850 The primary operational measured values are transmitted.
The measured values as well as their unit format are set out in detail in manual PIXIT
7SJ.
The measured values are transmitted in “Float” format. The transmitted measuring
range is not limited and corresponds to the operational measurement.
2.23.3.2
Functions
2.23 Auxiliary Functions
290 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Protocol Transmittable measuring range, format
PROFIBUS, Modbus,
DNP 3.0
DNP3 TCP
PROFINET
The unit format of the measured values on the device side is at first automatically
generated by means of the selected nominal values of current and voltage within the
system data.
The current unit format can be determined in DIGSI or at the device via Menu Opera-
tional Values.
The user can select via DIGSI which operational measured values (primary, secondary
or percentage) must be transmitted.
The measured values are always transmitted as 16-bit values including sign (range
± 32768). The user can define the scaling of the operational measured value to be
transmitted. This will result in the respective transmittable measuring range.
For further details, please refer to the descriptions and protocol profiles.
Information List
No. Information Type of
Informa-
tion
Comments
601 Ia = MV Ia
602 Ib = MV Ib
603 Ic = MV Ic
604 In = MV In
605 I1 = MV I1 (positive sequence)
606 I2 = MV I2 (negative sequence)
621 Va = MV Va
622 Vb = MV Vb
623 Vc = MV Vc
624 Va-b= MV Va-b
625 Vb-c= MV Vb-c
626 Vc-a= MV Vc-a
627 VN = MV VN
629 V1 = MV V1 (positive sequence)
630 V2 = MV V2 (negative sequence)
632 Vsync = MV Vsync (synchronism)
641 P = MV P (active power)
642 Q = MV Q (reactive power)
644 Freq= MV Frequency
645 S = MV S (apparent power)
680 Phi A = MV Angle Va-Ia
681 Phi B = MV Angle Vb-Ib
682 Phi C = MV Angle Vc-Ic
701 INs Real MV Resistive ground current in isol systems
702 INs Reac MV Reactive ground current in isol systems
807 Θ/Θtrip = MV Thermal Overload
830 INs = MV INs Senstive Ground Fault Current
831 3Io = MV 3Io (zero sequence)
832 Vo = MV Vo (zero sequence)
901 PF = MV Power Factor
16031 φ(3Vo,INs) = MV Angle between 3Vo and INsens.
18473 Va-b RMS= MV Va-b RMS(10 minute RMS value)
2.23.3.3
Functions
2.23 Auxiliary Functions
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 291
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
No. Information Type of
Informa-
tion
Comments
18474 Vb-c RMS= MV Vb-c RMS(10 minute RMS value)
18475 Vc-a RMS= MV Vc-a RMS(10 minute RMS value)
30701 Pa = MV Pa (active power, phase A)
30702 Pb = MV Pb (active power, phase B)
30703 Pc = MV Pc (active power, phase C)
30704 Qa = MV Qa (reactive power, phase A)
30705 Qb = MV Qb (reactive power, phase B)
30706 Qc = MV Qc (reactive power, phase C)
30707 PFa = MV Power Factor, phase A
30708 PFb = MV Power Factor, phase B
30709 PFc = MV Power Factor, phase C
30800 VX = MV Voltage VX
30801 Vph-n = MV Voltage phase-neutral
Average Measurements
The long-term averages are calculated and output by the 7SJ80.
Functional Description
Long-Term Averages
The long-term averages of the three phase currents Ιx, the positive sequence components Ι1 for the three
phase currents, and the real power P, reactive power Q, and apparent power S are calculated within a set
period of time and indicated in primary values.
For the long-term averages mentioned above, the length of the time window for averaging and the frequency
with which it is updated can be set.
Setting Notes
Average Calculation
The selection of the time period for measured value averaging is set with parameter 8301 DMD Interval in
the corresponding setting group from A to D under MEASUREMENT. The first number specifies the averaging
time window in minutes while the second number gives the frequency of updates within the time window. 15
Min., 3 Subs, for example, means: Time average is generated for all measured values with a window of 15
minutes. The output is updated every 15/3 = 5 minutes.
With address 8302 DMD Sync.Time, the starting time for the averaging window set under address 8301 is
determined. This setting specifies if the window should start on the hour (On The Hour) or 15 minutes later
(15 After Hour) or 30 minutes / 45 minutes after the hour (30 After Hour oder 45 After Hour).
If the settings for averaging are changed, then the measured values stored in the buffer are deleted, and new
results for the average calculation are only available after the set time period has passed.
2.23.4
2.23.4.1
2.23.4.2
Functions
2.23 Auxiliary Functions
292 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Settings
Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments
8301 DMD Interval 15 Min., 1 Sub
15 Min., 3 Subs
15 Min.,15 Subs
30 Min., 1 Sub
60 Min., 1 Sub
60 Min.,10 Subs
5 Min., 5 Subs
60 Min., 1 Sub Demand Calculation Intervals
8302 DMD Sync.Time On The Hour
15 After Hour
30 After Hour
45 After Hour
On The Hour Demand Synchronization Time
Information List
No. Information Type of
Informa-
tion
Comments
833 I1 dmd= MV I1 (positive sequence) Demand
834 P dmd = MV Active Power Demand
835 Q dmd = MV Reactive Power Demand
836 S dmd = MV Apparent Power Demand
963 Ia dmd= MV I A demand
964 Ib dmd= MV I B demand
965 Ic dmd= MV I C demand
Min/Max Measurement Setup
Minimum and maximum values are calculated by the 7SJ80. Time and date of the last update of the values
can also be read out.
Functional Description
Minimum and Maximum Values
The minimum and maximum values for the three phase currents Ιx, the three phase-to-ground voltages Vx-N,
the three phase-to-phase voltages Vxy, the positive sequence components Ι1 and V1, the displacement voltage
V0, the real power P, reactive power Q, and apparent power S, the frequency; and the power factor cos ϕ are
calculated as primary values (including the date and time they were last updated).
The minimum and maximum values of the long-term averages listed in the previous section are also calcu-
lated.
The minimum and maximum values can be reset at any time via binary inputs or by using the integrated
control panel or the DIGSI software. Additionally, the reset can be carried out cyclically, starting at a preset
point of time.
Setting Notes
Minimum and Maximum Values
The tracking of minimum and maximum values can be reset automatically at a programmable point in time.
To select this feature, address 8311 MinMax cycRESET should be set to YES. The point in time when reset is
to take place (the minute of the day in which reset will take place) is set at address 8312 MiMa RESET TIME.
2.23.4.3
2.23.4.4
2.23.5
2.23.5.1
2.23.5.2
Functions
2.23 Auxiliary Functions
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 293
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
The reset cycle in days is entered at address 8313 MiMa RESETCYCLE, and the beginning date of the cyclical
process, from the time of the setting procedure (in days), is entered at address 8314 MinMaxRES.START.
Settings
Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments
8311 MinMax cycRESET NO
YES
YES Automatic Cyclic Reset Function
8312 MiMa RESET TIME 0 .. 1439 min 0 min MinMax Reset Timer
8313 MiMa RESETCYCLE 1 .. 365 Days 7 Days MinMax Reset Cycle Period
8314 MinMaxRES.START 1 .. 365 Days 1 Days MinMax Start Reset Cycle in
Information List
No. Information Type of
Informa-
tion
Comments
- ResMinMax IntSP_Ev Reset Minimum and Maximum counter
395 >I MinMax Reset SP >I MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
396 >I1 MiMaReset SP >I1 MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
397 >V MiMaReset SP >V MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
398 >VphphMiMaRes SP >Vphph MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
399 >V1 MiMa Reset SP >V1 MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
400 >P MiMa Reset SP >P MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
401 >S MiMa Reset SP >S MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
402 >Q MiMa Reset SP >Q MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
403 >Idmd MiMaReset SP >Idmd MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
404 >Pdmd MiMaReset SP >Pdmd MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
405 >Qdmd MiMaReset SP >Qdmd MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
406 >Sdmd MiMaReset SP >Sdmd MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
407 >Frq MiMa Reset SP >Frq. MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
408 >PF MiMaReset SP >Power Factor MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
412 > Θ MiMa Reset SP >Theta MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
837 IAdmdMin MVT I A Demand Minimum
838 IAdmdMax MVT I A Demand Maximum
839 IBdmdMin MVT I B Demand Minimum
840 IBdmdMax MVT I B Demand Maximum
841 ICdmdMin MVT I C Demand Minimum
842 ICdmdMax MVT I C Demand Maximum
843 I1dmdMin MVT I1 (positive sequence) Demand Minimum
844 I1dmdMax MVT I1 (positive sequence) Demand Maximum
845 PdMin= MVT Active Power Demand Minimum
846 PdMax= MVT Active Power Demand Maximum
847 QdMin= MVT Reactive Power Minimum
848 QdMax= MVT Reactive Power Maximum
849 SdMin= MVT Apparent Power Minimum
850 SdMax= MVT Apparent Power Maximum
851 Ia Min= MVT Ia Min
852 Ia Max= MVT Ia Max
853 Ib Min= MVT Ib Min
2.23.5.3
2.23.5.4
Functions
2.23 Auxiliary Functions
294 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
No. Information Type of
Informa-
tion
Comments
854 Ib Max= MVT Ib Max
855 Ic Min= MVT Ic Min
856 Ic Max= MVT Ic Max
857 I1 Min= MVT I1 (positive sequence) Minimum
858 I1 Max= MVT I1 (positive sequence) Maximum
859 Va-nMin= MVT Va-n Min
860 Va-nMax= MVT Va-n Max
861 Vb-nMin= MVT Vb-n Min
862 Vb-nMax= MVT Vb-n Max
863 Vc-nMin= MVT Vc-n Min
864 Vc-nMax= MVT Vc-n Max
865 Va-bMin= MVT Va-b Min
867 Va-bMax= MVT Va-b Max
868 Vb-cMin= MVT Vb-c Min
869 Vb-cMax= MVT Vb-c Max
870 Vc-aMin= MVT Vc-a Min
871 Vc-aMax= MVT Vc-a Max
872 Vn Min = MVT V neutral Min
873 Vn Max = MVT V neutral Max
874 V1 Min = MVT V1 (positive sequence) Voltage Minimum
875 V1 Max = MVT V1 (positive sequence) Voltage Maximum
876 Pmin= MVT Active Power Minimum
877 Pmax= MVT Active Power Maximum
878 Qmin= MVT Reactive Power Minimum
879 Qmax= MVT Reactive Power Maximum
880 Smin= MVT Apparent Power Minimum
881 Smax= MVT Apparent Power Maximum
882 fmin= MVT Frequency Minimum
883 fmax= MVT Frequency Maximum
884 PF Max= MVT Power Factor Maximum
885 PF Min= MVT Power Factor Minimum
1058 Θ/ΘTrpMax= MVT Overload Meter Max
1059 Θ/ΘTrpMin= MVT Overload Meter Min
Set Points for Measured Values
SIPROTEC devices facilitate the setting of limit values for some measured and metered values. If any of these
limit values is reached, exceeded or fallen below during operation, the device issues an alarm which is indi-
cated in the form of an operational message. This can be allocated to LEDs and/or binary outputs, transferred
via the interfaces and linked in DIGSI CFC. The limit values can be configured via DIGSI CFC and allocated via
the DIGSI device matrix.
2.23.6
Functions
2.23 Auxiliary Functions
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 295
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Applications
•This monitoring program works with multiple measurement repetitions and a lower priority than the
protection functions. Therefore, it may not pick up if measured values are changed spontaneously in the
event of a fault, before a pickup or tripping of the protection function occurs. This monitoring program is
therefore absolutely unsuitable for blocking protection functions.
Setting Notes
Setpoints for Measured Values
Setting is performed in the DIGSI configuration Matrix under Settings, Masking I/O (Configuration Matrix).
Apply the filter "Measured and Metered Values Only" and select the configuration group "Set Points (MV)".
Here you can insert new limit values via the Information Catalog which are subsequently linked to the meas-
ured value to be monitored using CFC.
This view also allows you to change the default settings of the limit values under Properties.
The settings for limit values must be in percent and usually refer to nominal values of the device.
For more details, see the SIPROTEC 4 System Description and the DIGSI CFC Manual.
Set Points for Statistic
Functional Description
For the statistical counters, setpoints may be entered and a message is generated as soon as they are reached.
The message can be allocated to both output relays and LEDs.
Setting Notes
Setpoints for the Statistical Counter
The setting of threshold values for the statistical counters takes place in DIGSI under Messages → Statistics in
the sub-menu Threshold Values for Statistics. Double-click to display the corresponding contents in another
window. By overwriting the previous value the settings can be changed (please refer to the SIPROTEC 4
System Description).
Information List
No. Information Type of
Informa-
tion
Comments
- OpHour> LV Operating hours greater than
272 SP. Op Hours> OUT Set Point Operating Hours
16004 ΣI^x> LV Threshold Sum Current Exponentiation
16005 Threshold ΣI^x> OUT Threshold Sum Curr. Exponent. exceeded
16009 Resid.Endu. < LV Lower Threshold of CB Residual Endurance
16010 Thresh.R.Endu.< OUT Dropped below Threshold CB Res.Endurance
16017 ΣI^2t> LV Threshold Sum Squared Current Integral
16018 Thresh. ΣI^2t> OUT Threshold Sum Squa. Curr. Int. exceeded
Energy Metering
Metered values for active and reactive energy are determined by the device. They can be output via the
display of the device, read out with DIGSI via the operator interface or transmitted to a control center via port
B.
2.23.6.1
2.23.7
2.23.7.1
2.23.7.2
2.23.7.3
2.23.8
Functions
2.23 Auxiliary Functions
296 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Functional Description
Metered Values for Active and Reactive Energy
Metered values of the real power Wp and reactive power (Wq) are acquired in kilowatt, megawatt or gigawatt
hours primary or in kVARh, MVARh or GVARh primary, separately according to the input (+) and output (–), or
capacitive and inductive. The measured-value resolution can be configured. The signs of the measured values
appear as configured in address 1108 P,Q sign (see Section “Display of Measured Values”).
Setting Notes
Setting of parameter for meter resolution
Parameter 8315 MeterResolution allows increasing the resolution of the energy metered values by the
Factor 10 or Factor 100 compared to the Standard setting.
Settings
Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments
8315 MeterResolution Standard
Factor 10
Factor 100
Standard Meter resolution
Information List
No. Information Type of
Informa-
tion
Comments
- Meter res IntSP_Ev Reset meter
888 Wp(puls) PMV Pulsed Energy Wp (active)
889 Wq(puls) PMV Pulsed Energy Wq (reactive)
916 WpΔ= - Increment of active energy
917 WqΔ= - Increment of reactive energy
924 WpForward MVMV Wp Forward
925 WqForward MVMV Wq Forward
928 WpReverse MVMV Wp Reverse
929 WqReverse MVMV Wq Reverse
Commissioning Aids
In test mode or during commissioning, the device information transmitted to a central or storage device can
be influenced. There are tools available for testing the system interface (port B) and the binary inputs and
outputs of the device.
Applications
•Test Mode
•Commissioning
Prerequisites
In order to be able to use the commissioning aids described in the following, the device must be connected to
a control center via port B.
2.23.8.1
2.23.8.2
2.23.8.3
2.23.8.4
2.23.9
Functions
2.23 Auxiliary Functions
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 297
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Functional Description
Influencing Information to the Control Center During Test Mode
Some of the available protocols allow for identifying all messages and measured values transmitted to the
control center with "Test Mode" as the message cause while the device is tested on site. This identification
prevents the message from being incorrectly interpreted as resulting from an actual fault. Moreover, a trans-
mission block can be set during the test so that no messages are transferred to the control center.
This can be implemented via binary inputs, using the interface on the device front and a PC.
The SIPROTEC 4 System Description states in detail how to activate and deactivate test mode and blocked data
transmission.
Testing the Connection to a Control Center
Via the DIGSI device control it can be tested whether messages are transmitted correctly.
A dialog box shows the display texts of all messages which were allocated to the system interface (port B) in
the DIGSI matrix. In another column of the dialog box, a value for the messages to be tested can be defined
(e.g. message ON / message OFF). After having entered password no. 6 (for hardware test menus), the corre-
sponding message is issued and can be read out in the event log of the SIPROTEC 4 device and in the substa-
tion control center.
The procedure is described in detail in Chapter "Mounting and Commissioning".
Checking the Binary Inputs and Outputs
The binary inputs, outputs, and LEDs of a SIPROTEC 4 device can be individually and precisely controlled in
DIGSI. This feature can be used, for example, to verify control wiring from the device to substation equipment
(operational checks), during start-up.
A dialog box shows all binary inputs and outputs as well as LEDs of the device with their present status. The
operating equipment, commands, or messages that are configured (masked) to the hardware components are
also displayed. After having entered password no. 6 (for hardware test menus), it is possible to switch to the
opposite status in another column of the dialog box. Thus, you can energize every single output relay to check
the wiring between protected device and the system without having to create the alarm allocated to it.
The procedure is described in detail in Chapter "Mounting and Commissioning".
Creating Oscillographic Recordings for Tests
During commissioning, energization sequences should be carried out to check the stability of the protection
also during closing operations. Oscillographic event recordings contain the maximum information on the
behavior of the protection.
Along with the capability of storing fault recordings via pickup of the protection function, the 7SJ80 also has
the capability of capturing the same data when commands are given to the device via the service program
DIGSI, the serial interface, or a binary input. For the latter, event
>Trig.Wave.Cap.
must be allocated to a
binary input. Triggering for the oscillographic recording then occurs, for instance, via the binary input when
the protection object is energized.
An oscillographic recording that is triggered externally (that is, without a protective element pickup) are
processed by the device as a normal oscillographic record. For each oscillographic record a fault record is
created which is given its individual number to ensure that assignment can be made properly. However, these
oscillographic recordings are not displayed in the fault log buffer in the display as they are no network fault
events.
The procedure is described in detail in Chapter "Mounting and Commissioning".
2.23.9.1
Functions
2.23 Auxiliary Functions
298 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Breaker Control
A control command function is integrated in the SIPROTEC 4 7SJ80 to coordinate the operation of circuit
breakers and other equipment in the power system.
Control commands can originate from four command sources:
•Local control at the device's operator panel
•Operation using DIGSI
•Remote control via network control center or substation controller (e.g. SICAM)
•Automatic functions (e.g., via binary input)
Switchgear with single and multiple busbars are supported. The number of switchgear devices to be controlled
is limited only by the number of binary inputs and outputs. Interlocking checks ensure high security against
maloperation and a multitude of switchgear types and operating modes are available.
Control Device
Switchgear can also be controlled via the device's operator panel, DIGSI or a connection to the substation
control equipment.
Applications
•Switchgear with single and double busbars
Prerequisites
The number of switchgear devices to be controlled is limited by the
– existing binary inputs
– existing binary outputs.
Functional Description
Operation Using the Device's Operator Panel
For controlling the device, there are two independent colored keys located below the graphic display. If you
are somewhere in the menu system outside the control submenu, you can return to the control mode via one
of these keys.
Then, select the switchgear to be operated with the help of the navigation keys. The switching direction is
determined by operating the I or O pushbutton. The selected switching direction is displayed flashing in the
bottom line of the following security prompt.
Password and security prompts prevent unintended switching operations. With ENTER the entries are
confirmed.
Cancellation is possible at any time before the control command is issued or during switch selection via the
ESC key.
Command end, feedback or any violation of the interlocking conditions are indicated.
For further information on the device operation, please refer to Section 2.25 Notes on Device Operation.
Operation using DIGSI
Switchgear can be controlled via the operator control interface with a PC using the DIGSI software. The proce-
dure to do so is described in the SIPROTEC 4 System Description (Control of Switchgear).
Operation Using the System Interface
Switchgear can be controlled via the serial system interface and a connection to the substation control equip-
ment. For that it is necessary that the required periphery is physically existing in the device as well as in the
2.24
2.24.1
2.24.1.1
Functions
2.24 Breaker Control
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 299
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
substation. Furthermore, certain settings for the serial interface need to be made in the device (see SIPROTEC
4 System Description).
Information List
No. Information Type of
Informa-
tion
Comments
- 52Breaker CF_D12 52 Breaker
- 52Breaker DP 52 Breaker
- Disc.Swit. CF_D2 Disconnect Switch
- Disc.Swit. DP Disconnect Switch
- GndSwit. CF_D2 Ground Switch
- GndSwit. DP Ground Switch
31000 Q0 OpCnt= VI Q0 operationcounter=
31001 Q1 OpCnt= VI Q1 operationcounter=
31008 Q8 OpCnt= VI Q8 operationcounter=
Types of Commands
In conjunction with the power system control several command types can be distinguished for the device:
Functional Description
Commands to the Process
These are all commands that are directly output to the switchgear to change their process state:
•Switching commands for controlling the circuit breakers (not synchronized), disconnectors and ground
electrodes
•Step commands, e.g. raising and lowering transformer LTCs
•Set-point commands with configurable time settings, e.g. to control Petersen coils
Internal / Pseudo Commands
They do not directly operate binary outputs. They serve to initiate internal functions, simulate changes of
state, or to acknowledge changes of state.
•Manual overriding commands to manually update information on process-dependent objects such as
annunciations and switching states, e.g. if the communication with the process is interrupted. Manually
overridden objects are flagged as such in the information status and can be displayed accordingly.
•Tagging commands (for "setting") of the information value of internal objects, for example switching
authority (remote/local), settings group switching, data transmission block and deleting/presetting
metered values.
•Acknowledgment and resetting commands for setting and resetting internal buffers or data states.
•Information status command to set/reset the additional information "information status" of a process
object, such as:
– Input blocking
– Output blocking
Command Sequence
Safety mechanisms in the command sequence ensure that a command can only be released after a thorough
check of preset criteria has been successfully concluded. Standard Interlocking checks are provided for each
2.24.1.2
2.24.2
2.24.2.1
2.24.3
Functions
2.24 Breaker Control
300 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
individual control command. Additionally, user-defined interlocking conditions can be programmed separately
for each command. The actual execution of the command is also monitored afterwards. The overall command
task procedure is described in brief in the following list:
Functional Description
Check Sequence
Please observe the following:
•Command Entry, e.g. using the keypad on the local user interface of the device
– Check Password → Access Rights
– Check Switching Mode (interlocking activated/deactivated) → Selection of Deactivated interlocking
Recognition.
•User configurable interlocking checks
– Switching Authority
– Device Position Check (set vs. actual comparison)
– Interlocking, Zone Controlled (logic using CFC)
– System Interlocking (centrally, using SCADA system or substation controller)
– Double Operation (interlocking against parallel switching operation)
– Protection Blocking (blocking of switching operations by protective functions).
•Fixed Command Checks
– Internal Process Time (software watch dog which checks the time for processing the control action
between initiation of the control and final close of the relay contact)
– Setting Modification in Process (if setting modification is in process, commands are denied or
delayed)
– Operating equipment enabled as output (if an operating equipment component was configured, but
not configured to a binary input, the command is denied)
– Output Block (if an output block has been programmed for the circuit breaker, and is active at the
moment the command is processed, then the command is denied)
– Board Hardware Error
– Command in Progress (only one command can be processed at a time for one operating equipment,
object-related Double Operation Block)
– 1-of-n-check (for schemes with multiple assignments, such as relays contact sharing a common
terminal a check is made if a command is already active for this set of output relays).
Monitoring the Command Execution
The following is monitored:
•Interruption of a command because of a Cancel Command
•Runtime Monitor (feedback message monitoring time)
Interlocking
System interlocking is executed by the user-defined logic (CFC).
Functional Description
Interlocking checks in a SICAM / SIPROTEC 4 system are normally divided in the following groups:
2.24.3.1
2.24.4
2.24.4.1
Functions
2.24 Breaker Control
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 301
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
•System interlocking relies on the system data base in the substation or central control system.
•Bay interlocking relies on the object data base (feedbacks) of the bay unit.
•Cross-bay interlocking via GOOSE messages directly between bay units and protection relays (with
IEC61850: The inter-relay communication with GOOSE is performed via the EN100 module)
The extent of the interlocking checks is determined by the configuration of the relay. To obtain more informa-
tion about GOOSE, please refer to the SIPROTEC 4 System Description.
Switching objects that require system interlocking in a central control system are assigned to a specific param-
eter inside the bay unit (via configuration matrix).
For all commands, operation with interlocking (normal mode) or without interlocking (Interlocking OFF) can
be selected:
•For local commands, by activation of "Normal/Test"-key switch,
•For automatic commands, via command processing. by CFC and deactivated interlocking recognition,
•For local / remote commands, using an additional interlocking disable command, via Profibus.
Interlocked / Non-Interlocked Switching
The configurable command checks in the SIPROTEC 4 devices are also called "standard interlocking". These
checks can be activated via DIGSI (interlocked switching/tagging) or deactivated (non-interlocked).
Deactivated interlock switching means the configured interlocking conditions are not checked in the relay.
Interlocked switching means that all configured interlocking conditions are checked within the command
processing. If a condition is not fulfilled, the command will be rejected by a message with a minus added to it
(e.g. “CO–”), immediately followed by a message.
The following table shows the possible types of commands in a switching device and their corresponding
annunciations. For the device the messages designated with *) are displayed in the event logs, for DIGSI they
appear in spontaneous messages.
Type of Command Command Cause Message
Control issued Switching CO CO +/–
Manual tagging (positive / negative) Manual tagging MT MT+/–
Information state command, input blocking Input blocking ST ST+/– *)
Information state command, output blocking Output blocking ST ST+/– *)
Cancel command Cancel CA CA+/–
The "plus" appearing in the message is a confirmation of the command execution. The command execution
was as expected, in other words positive. The minus sign means a negative confirmation, the command was
rejected. Possible command feedbacks and their causes are dealt with in the SIPROTEC 4 System Description.
The following figure shows operational indications relating to command execution and operation response
information for successful switching of the circuit breaker.
The check of interlocking can be programmed separately for all switching devices and tags that were set with
a tagging command. Other internal commands such as manual entry or abort are not checked, i.e. carried out
independent of the interlocking.
[leistungsschalterbetriebsmeldung-020315-wlk, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-128 Example of an operational annunciation for switching circuit breaker 52 (Q0)
Standard Interlocking (default)
The standard interlockings contain the following fixed programmed tests for each switching device, which can
be individually enabled or disabled using parameters:
Functions
2.24 Breaker Control
302 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
•Device Status Check (set = actual): The switching command is rejected, and an error indication is
displayed if the circuit breaker is already in the set position. (If this check is enabled, then it works
whether interlocking, e.g. zone controlled, is activated or deactivated.) This condition is checked in both
interlocked and non-interlocked status modes.
•System Interlocking: To check the power system interlocking, a local command is transmitted to the
central unit with Switching Authority = LOCAL. A switching device that is subject to system interlocking
cannot be switched by DIGSI.
•Zone Controlled / Bay Interlocking: Logic links in the device which were created via CFC are interrogated
and considered during interlocked switching.
•Blocking by Protection: Switch-ON commands are rejected with interlocked switches, as soon as one of
the protection functions of the unit has opened a fault case. The OPEN-command, by contrast, can
always be executed. Please be aware, activation of thermal overload protection elements or sensitive
ground fault detection can create and maintain a fault condition status, and can therefore block CLOSE
commands.
•Double Operation Block: Parallel switching operations are interlocked against one another; while one
command is processed, a second cannot be carried out.
•Switching Authority LOCAL: A control command from the user interface of the device (command with
command source LOCAL) is only allowed if the Key Switch (by configuration) is set to LOCAL.
•Switching Authority DIGSI: Switching commands that are issued locally or remotely via DIGSI (command
with command source DIGSI) are only allowed if remote control is admissible for the device (by configu-
ration). If a DIGSI-PC communicates with the device, it deposits here its virtual device number (VD). Only
commands with this VD (when Switching Authority = REMOTE) will be accepted by the device. Remote
switching commands will be rejected.
•Switching authority REMOTE: A remote switch command (command with source REMOTE) is only
allowed if remote control is enabled at the device (by configuration).
Functions
2.24 Breaker Control
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 303
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[schutz-standardverriegelungen-090902-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-129 Standard interlockings
The following figure shows the configuration of the interlocking conditions using DIGSI.
Functions
2.24 Breaker Control
304 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[objekteigenschaft-verriegelungsbeding-020313-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-130 DIGSI dialog box for setting the interlocking conditions
On devices with operator panel, the display shows the configured interlocking reasons. They are marked with
letters explained in the following table.
Table 2-23 Command types and corresponding messages
Interlocking Commands Abbrev. Display
Switching Authority L L
System interlocking S A
Zone controlled Z Z
SET = ACTUAL (switch direction check) P P
Protection blocking B B
Control Logic using CFC
For bay interlocking, a release logic can be created using CFC. Via specific release conditions the information
"released" or "bay interlocked" are available (e.g. object "52 Close" and "52 Open" with the data values: ON/
OFF).
Switching Authority
The interlocking condition "Switching Authority" serves for determining the switching authority. It enables the
user to select the authorized command source. For devices with operator panel, the following switching
authority ranges are defined in the following priority sequence:
•LOCAL
•DIGSI
•REMOTE
Functions
2.24 Breaker Control
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 305
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
The "Switching authority" object serves for interlocking or enabling LOCAL control but not REMOTE or DIGSI
commands. With a 7SJ80, the switching authority can be changed between "REMOTE" and "LOCAL" on the
operator panel after having entered the password or by means of CFC also via binary inputs and a function
key.
The "Switching authority DIGSI" is used for interlocking and allows commands to be initiated using DIGSI.
Commands are allowed for both a remote and a local DIGSI connection. When a (local or remote) DIGSI PC
logs on to the device, it enters its Virtual Device Number (VD). The device only accepts commands having that
VD (with switching authority = OFF or REMOTE). When the DIGSI PC logs off, the VD is cancelled.
Commands are checked for their source SC and the device settings, and compared to the information set in
the objects "Switching authority" and "Switching authority DIGSI".
Configuration
Switching authority available y/n (create appropriate object)
Switching authority available DIGSI y/n (create appropriate object)
Specific device (e.g. switching device) Switching authority LOCAL (check for Local status): y/n
Specific device (e.g. switching device) Switching authority REMOTE (check for LOCAL, REMOTE, or
DIGSI commands: y/n
Table 2-24 Interlocking logic
Current
Switching
Authority Status
Switching Command Issued with
SC3)=LOCAL
Command Issued from
SC=LOCAL or REMOTE
Command issued from
SC=DIGSI
LOCAL not
registered
Allowed Interlocked 2) - "switching
authority LOCAL"
Interlocked "DIGSI not
registered"
LOCAL Checked Allowed Interlocked 2) - "switching
authority LOCAL"
Interlocked 2) - "switching
authority LOCAL" „verrie-
gelt, da VORORT–
Steuerung”
REMOTE Not checked Interlocked 1) - "switching
authority REMOTE"
Allowed Interlocked "DIGSI not
registered"
REMOTE Checked Interlocked 1) - "switching
authority DIGSI"
Interlocked 2) - "switching
authority DIGSI"
Allowed
1) also "Allowed" for: ”switching authority LOCAL (check for Local status): is not marked
2) also "Allowed" for: ”Switching authority REMOTE (check for LOCAL, REMOTE, or DIGSI status): is not marked"
3) SC = Source of command
SC = Auto SICAM:
Commands that are initiated internally (command processing in the CFC) are not subject to switching
authority and are therefore always "allowed".
Switching Mode
The switching mode determines whether selected interlocking conditions will be activated or deactivated at
the time of the switching operation.
The following switching modes (local) are defined:
•Local commands (SC = LOCAL)
– interlocked (normal), or
– non-interlocked switching.
With a 7SJ80, the switching mode can be changed between "locked" and "unlocked" on the operator panel
after having entered the password or by means of CFC also via binary inputs and a function key.
The following switching modes (remote) are defined:
Functions
2.24 Breaker Control
306 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
•Remote or DIGSI commands (SC = LOCAL, REMOTE, or DIGSI)
– interlocked, or
– non-interlocked switching. Here, deactivation of interlocking is accomplished via a separate
command.
– For commands from CFC (SC = AUTO SICAM), please observe the notes in the CFC manual (compo-
nent: BOOL to command).
Zone Controlled / Field Interlocking
Zone controlled / field interlocking (e.g. via CFC) includes the verification that predetermined switchgear posi-
tion conditions are satisfied to prevent switching errors (e.g. disconnector vs. ground switch, ground switch
only if no voltage applied) as well as verification of the state of other mechanical interlocking in the switch-
gear bay (e.g. High Voltage compartment doors).
Interlocking conditions can be programmed separately, for each switching device, for device control CLOSE
and/or OPEN.
The enable information with the data "switching device is interlocked (OFF/NV/FLT) or enabled (ON)" can be
set up,
•directly, using a single point or double point indication, key-switch, or internal indication (marking), or
•by means of a control logic via CFC.
When a switching command is initiated, the actual status is scanned cyclically. The assignment is done via
"Release object CLOSE/OPEN".
System Interlocking
Substation Controller (System interlocking) involves switchgear conditions of other bays evaluated by a central
control system.
Double Activation Blockage
Parallel switching operations are interlocked. As soon as the command has arrived all command objects
subject to the interlocking are checked to know whether a command is being processed. While the command
is being executed, interlocking is enabled for other commands.
Blocking by Protection
The pickup of protective elements blocks switching operations. Protective elements are configured, separately
for each switching component, to block specific switching commands sent in CLOSE and TRIP direction.
When enabled, "Block CLOSE commands" blocks CLOSE commands, whereas "Block TRIP commands" blocks
TRIP signals. Switching operations in progress will immediately be aborted by the pickup of a protective
element.
Device Status Check (set = actual)
For switching commands, a check takes place whether the selected switching device is already in the set/
desired position (set/actual comparison). This means, if a circuit breaker is already in the CLOSED position and
an attempt is made to issue a closing command, the command will be refused, with the operating message
"set condition equals actual condition". If the circuit breaker / switchgear device is in the intermediate position,
then this check is not performed.
Bypassing Interlockings
Bypassing configured interlockings at the time of the switching action happens device-internal via interlocking
recognition in the command job or globally via so-called switching modes.
•SC=LOCAL
– The user can switch between the modes “interlocked“ or “non-interlocked“ (bypassed) in the oper-
ator panel after entering the password or using CFC via binary input and function key.
Functions
2.24 Breaker Control
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 307
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
•REMOTE and DIGSI
– Commands issued by SICAM or DIGSI are unlocked via a global switching mode REMOTE. A separate
request must be sent for the unlocking. The unlocking applies only for one switching operation and
for commands caused by the same source.
– Job order: command to object "Switching mode REMOTE", ON
– Job order: switching command to "switching device"
•Command via CFC (automatic command, SC=Auto SICAM):
– Behavior configured in the CFC block ("BOOL to command").
Command Logging
During the processing of the commands, independent of the further message routing and processing,
command and process feedback information are sent to the message processing center. These messages
contain information on the cause. With the corresponding allocation (configuration) these messages are
entered in the event list, thus serving as a report.
Prerequisites
A listing of possible operating messages and their meaning as well as the command types needed for tripping
and closing of the switchgear or for raising and lowering of transformer taps are described in the SIPROTEC 4
System Description.
Functional Description
Acknowledgment of Commands to the Device Front
All messages with the source of command LOCAL are transformed into a corresponding response and shown
in the display of the device.
Acknowledgment of commands to Local / Remote / DIGSI
The acknowledgment of messages with source of command Local/ Remote/DIGSI are sent back to the initiating
point independent of the routing (configuration on the serial digital interface).
The acknowledgment of commands is therefore not executed by a response indication as it is done with the
local command but by ordinary command and feedback information recording.
Monitoring of Feedback Information
The processing of commands monitors the command execution and timing of feedback information for all
commands. At the same time the command is sent, the monitoring time is started (monitoring of the
command execution). This time controls whether the device achieves the required final result within the
monitoring time. The monitoring time is stopped as soon as the feedback information arrives. If no feedback
information arrives, a response Timeout command monitoring time appears and the process is terminated.
Commands and information feedback are also recorded in the event list. Normally the execution of a
command is terminated as soon as the feedback information (FB+) of the relevant switchgear arrives or, in
case of commands without process feedback information, the command output resets and a message is
output.
The "plus" sign appearing in a feedback information confirms that the command was successful. The
command was as expected, in other words positive. The "minus" is a negative confirmation and means that
the command was not executed as expected.
Command Output and Switching Relays
The command types needed for tripping and closing of the switchgear or for raising and lowering of trans-
former taps are described in the configuration section of the SIPROTEC 4 System Description /1/ SIPROTEC 4
System Description.
2.24.5
2.24.5.1
Functions
2.24 Breaker Control
308 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Notes on Device Operation
The operation of the 7SJ80 slightly differs from the other SIPROTEC 4 devices. These differences are described
in the following. General information regarding the operation and configuration of SIPROTEC 4 devices is set
out in the SIPROTEC 4 System Description.
Different operation
Pushbuttons of the Control Panels
Pushbutton Funktion/Bedeutung
Confirming entries and navigating forward in the menus
Navigating to the main menu (where necessary, press repeatedly),
navigating backwards in the menus,
discarding entries
Testing the LEDs
Resetting the LED memory and binary outputs
Function key Fn for displaying the assignment of the function keys. If several
function keys have been assigned, a second page is displayed for the assign-
ment when leafing through, if required.
Combined pushbutton with numeric keys for a faster navigation (e.g. Fn + 1
operational messages)
Navigation to the main menu with Fn in combination with the numeric key 0.
For setting the contrast, keep the pushbutton pressed for about 5 seconds. Set
the contrast in the menu with the scrolling keys (downward: less contrast,
upward: more contrast).
Entry of Negative Signs
Only a few parameters can reach a negative value, i.e. a negative sign can only be entered for these.
If a negative sign is permissible, the prompt -/+ --> v/^ appears in the bottom line when changing the param-
eter. The sign can be determined via the scrolling keys: downward = negative sign, upward = positive sign.
Display
The SIPROTEC 4 System Description applies to devices with a 4-line ASCII display. Apart from that there are
devices with a graphical display and a size of 30 lines. The 7SJ80 uses the outputs of the graphical display, but
with 6 lines. Therefore, the representation might differ from the representations in the System Description.
The basic differences of the device with regard to the representation are the following:
The current selection is indicated by inverse representation (not by the prefix >)
[grundbild-hauptmenue-20070404, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-131 Inverse representation of the current selection
In part, the sixth line is used for representing e.g. the active parameter group.
2.25
2.25.1
Functions
2.25 Notes on Device Operation
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 309
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[grundbild-parameter-20070404, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-132 Representation of the active parameter group (line 6)
Functions
2.25 Notes on Device Operation
310 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Mounting and Commissioning
This chapter is intended for experienced commissioning staff. He must be familiar with the commissioning of
protection and control systems, the management of power systems and the safety rules and regulations.
Hardware adjustments to the power system data might be necessary. The primary tests require the protected
object (line, transformer, etc.) to carry load.
3.1 Mounting and Connections 312
3.2 Checking Connections 328
3.3 Commissioning 332
3.4 Final Preparation of the Device 352
3
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 311
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Mounting and Connections
General
!
WARNING
Warning of improper transport, storage, installation or assembly of the device.
Failure to observe these precautions can result in death, personal injury, or serious material damage.
²Trouble-free and safe use of this device depends on proper transport, storage, installation, and
assembly of the device according to the warnings in this device manual.
²Of particular importance are the general installation and safety regulations for work in a high-voltage
environment (for example, ANSI, IEC, EN, DIN, or other national and international regulations). These
regulations must be observed.
Configuration Information
Prerequisites
For installation and connections the following conditions must be met:
The rated device data have been checked as recommended in the SIPROTEC 4 System Description. It has been
verified that these data comply with the power system data.
General Diagrams
Block diagrams for the terminal assignment of the 7SJ80 are shown in Appendix B Terminal Assignments.
Connection examples for the current and voltage transformer circuits are provided in Appendix C Connection
Examples.
Voltage Connection Examples
Connection examples for voltage transformers are provided in Appendix C Connection Examples. It must be
checked that the configuration of the Power System Data 1 (Section Voltage Connection (Power System),
Page 40) corresponds with the connections.
The normal connection is set at address 213 VT Connect. 3ph = Van, Vbn, Vcn.
When connecting an open delta winding of the voltage transformer set, address 213 VT Connect. 3ph
must be set to Vab, Vbc, VGnd.
For the synchrocheck function, address 213 must be set to Vab, Vbc, VSyn or Vph-g, VSyn.
Another example shows the connection mode 213 = Vab, Vbc, Vx. The voltage connected to the third
transformer Vx is only used by the flexible protection functions.
Moreover, there are examples for the connection modes Vab, Vbc and Vph-g, VSyn.
Binary Inputs and Outputs
The configuration options of the binary in- and outputs, i.e. the procedure for the individual adaptation to the
plant conditions, are described in the SIPROTEC 4 System Description. The connections to the plant are
dependent on this configuration. The presettings of the device are listed in Appendix E Default Settings and
Protocol-dependent Functions. Please also check that the labeling strips on the front panel correspond to the
configured message functions.
Setting Group Change
If binary inputs are used to switch setting groups, please observe the following:
3.1
3.1.1
Mounting and Commissioning
3.1 Mounting and Connections
312 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
•Two binary inputs must be dedicated to the purpose of changing setting groups when four groups are to
be switched. One binary input must be set for
>Set Group Bit0
, the other input for
>Set Group
Bit1
. If either of these input functions is not assigned, then it is considered as not controlled.
•For the control of 2 setting groups one binary input is sufficient, namely
>Set Group Bit0
, since the
non-assigned binary input
>Set Group Bit1
is then regarded as not connected.
•The control signals must be permanently active so that the selected setting group is and remains active.
The following table shows the allocation of the binary inputs to the setting groups A to D and a simplified
connection diagram for the two binary inputs is illustrated in the following figure. The figure illustrates an
example in which both Set Group Bits 0 and 1 are configured to be controlled (actuated) when the associated
binary input is energized (high).
Where:
no = not energized or not connected
yes = energized
Table 3-1 Changing setting groups using binary inputs
Binary Input Active Group
>Param.Wahl1 >Param. Wahl2
no no Group A
yes no Group B
no yes Group C
yes yes Group D
[einstellgruppenumschaltung-ueber-binaere-160502-wlk, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-1 Connection diagram (example) for setting group switching using binary inputs
Trip Circuit Supervision 74TC
It must be noted that two binary inputs or one binary input and one bypass resistor R must be connected in
series. The pick-up threshold of the binary inputs must therefore be substantially below half the rated control
DC voltage.
If one binary input is used, a bypass resistor R must be used (see following figure). The resistor R is inserted
into the circuit of the 52b circuit breaker auxiliary contact to facilitate the detection of a malfunction also
when the 52a circuit breaker auxiliary contact is open and the trip contact has dropped out. The value of this
resistor must be such that in the circuit breaker open condition (therefore 52a is open and 52b is closed), the
circuit breaker trip coil (52TC) is no longer energized and binary input (BI1) is still energized if the command
relay contact is open.
Mounting and Commissioning
3.1 Mounting and Connections
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 313
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[prinzip-ausloesekreisueberwachung-1-binein-150502-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-2 Trip circuit supervision with one binary input
This results in an upper limit for the resistance dimension, Rmax and a lower limit Rmin, from which the optimal
value of the arithmetic mean R should be selected:
[formel-mittelwert-r-260602-kn, 1, en_US]
In order that the minimum voltage for controlling the binary input is ensured, Rmax is derived as:
[formel-rmax-260602-kn, 1, en_US]
So the circuit breaker trip coil does not remain energized in the above case, Rmin is derived as:
[formel-rmin-260602-kn, 1, en_US]
ΙBI (HIGH) Constant current with activated BI ( = 0.4 mA)
VBI min Minimum control voltage for BI (= 19 V at delivery setting for nominal voltages of 24 V/ 48 V;
88 V at delivery setting for nominal voltages of 60 V/ 110 V/ 125 V/ 220 V/ 250 V)
VCTR Control voltage for trip circuit
RCBTC Ohmic resistance of the circuit breaker coil
VCBTC(LOW) Maximum voltage on the circuit breaker coil that does not lead to tripping
If the calculation has the result max < Rmin, the calculation has to be repeated with the next smaller threshold
VBI min. This threshold is determined via the parameters 220 Threshold BI 1 to 226 Threshold BI 7. The
settings Thresh. BI 176V, Thresh. BI 88V, Thresh. BI 19V are possible.
Mounting and Commissioning
3.1 Mounting and Connections
314 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
For the power consumption of the resistance:
[formel-leistungvon-r-260602-kn, 1, en_US]
Example
ΙBI (HIGH) 0.4 mA (SIPROTEC 4 7SJ80)
VBI min 19 V at delivery setting for nominal voltages of 24 V/ 48 V;
88 V at delivery setting for nominal voltages of 60 V/ 110 V/ 125 V/ 220 V/ 250 V
VCTR 110 V (from the system / trip circuit)
RCBTC 500 Ω (from the system / trip circuit)
VCBTC (LOW) 2 V (from the system / trip circuit)
[fo_r-max-bsp, 1, en_US]
[beispiel-rmin-20061211, 1, en_US]
[fo_r-mittelwertbsp, 1, en_US]
[fo_leistung-r, 1, en_US]
Hardware Modifications
Disassembly
Work on the Printed Circuit Boards
i
i
NOTE
Before carrying out the following steps, make sure that the device is not operative.
i
i
NOTE
Apart from the communication modules and the fuse, there are no further components that can be config-
ured or operated by the user inside the device. Any service activities exceeding the installation or exchange
of communication modules must only be carried out by Siemens personnel
For preparing the workplace, a pad suitable for electrostatic sensitive devices (ESD) is required.
Additionally, the following tools are required:
•a screwdriver with a 5 mm to 6 mm (0.20 – 0.24 in) wide blade,
•a Philips screwdriver size 1,
•a 5 mm (0.20 in) socket or nut driver
3.1.2
3.1.2.1
Mounting and Commissioning
3.1 Mounting and Connections
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 315
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
In order to disassemble the device, first remove it from the substation installation. To do so, perform the steps
stated in Sections Panel Flush Mounting, Panel Surface Mounting or Cubicle Mounting in reverse order.
i
i
NOTE
The following must absolutely be observed:
Disconnect the communication connections at the device bottom (ports A and B). If this is not observed,
the communication lines and/or the device might be destroyed.
i
i
NOTE
To use the device, all terminal blocks must be plugged in.
!
CAUTION
Mind electrostatic discharges
Failure to observe these precautions can result in personal injury or material damage.
²Any electrostatic discharges while working at the electronics block are to be avoided. We recommend
ESD protective equipment (grounding strap, conductive grounded shoes, ESD-suitable clothing, etc.).
Alternatively, an electrostatic charge is to be discharged by touching grounded metal parts.
i
i
NOTE
In order to minimize the expenditure for reconnecting the device, remove the completely wired terminal
blocks from the device. Use a screwdriver (DIN 4 x 0.8) to carefully bend the left and right spring clips
outwards. Then carefully pull out the terminal block. When reinstalling the device, carefully insert the
terminal block into the spring clips. Both spring clips must engage clearly audible. (Sections Panel Flush
Mounting, Panel Surface Mounting or Cubicle Mounting).
In order to install or exchange communication modules or to replace the fuse, proceed as follows:
Remove the two covers at the top and bottom. Thus, 1 housing screw each at the top and bottom becomes
accessible. First, only unscrew the bottom housing screw so far that its tip no longer looks out of the thread of
the mounting bracket (the housing screws are captive, they remain in the front cover even when unscrewed).
Unscrew all screws that fasten any existing communication modules in the module cover on the bottom side
of the device. Also unscrew the 4 countersunk screws that fasten the module cover on the bottom side of the
device. Carefully pull the entire module cover out of the device.
Only now completely unscrew the two housing screws at the top and bottom in the cover and carefully
remove the complete electronics block from the housing (Figure 3-3).
i
i
NOTE
If you have not removed the terminal blocks from the rear panel, much more force is required for removing
and reinstalling the electronics block, which might lead to the damaging of the device. Therefore, we abso-
lutely recommend to remove the terminal blocks before removing the electronics block.
Mounting and Commissioning
3.1 Mounting and Connections
316 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[einschub-7sj80-20071107, 1, --_--]
Figure 3-3 Electronics block without housing
Replacing the Fuse
The fuse holder is located at the edge of the basic I/O board close to the power supply connection.
[7sx80-fuse-basic-io-080408, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-4 Placing the fuse
Mounting and Commissioning
3.1 Mounting and Connections
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 317
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Remove the defective fuse. Insert the new fuse with the following technical data into the fuse holder:
5 mm x 20 mm (0.20 * 0.79 in) safety fuse
T characteristic
2.0 A nominal current
250 V nominal voltage
Switching capability 1500 VA/ DC 300 V
Only UL-approved fuses may be used.
This data applies to all device types (24 V/48 V and 60 V – 250 V).
Make sure that the defective fuse has not left any obvious damage on the device. If the fuse trips again after
reconnection of the device, refrain from any further repairs and send the device to Siemens for repair.
The device can now be reassembled again (see Section Reassembly).
Connections of the Current Terminals
Fixing Elements
The fixing elements for the transformer connection are part of the current terminal (housing side). They have
a stress-crack- and corrosion-resistant alloy. The head shape of the terminal screw allows for using a flat
screwdriver (5.0 x 1.0 mm) or a crosstip screwdriver (PZ2). We recommend PZ2.
Cable Lugs and Wire Cross-sections
There are two connection options: the connection of single wires and the connection with a ring lug. Only
copper wires may be used.
We recommend ring lugs with the following dimensions:
[ringkabelschuh-20070710, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-5 Ring lug
For complying with the required insulation clearances, insulated ring lugs have to be used. Otherwise, the
crimp zone has to be insulated with corresponding means (e.g. by pulling a shrink-on sleeve over).
We recommend ring lugs of the PIDG range from Tyco Electronics.
Two ring lugs can be mounted per connection.
3.1.2.2
Mounting and Commissioning
3.1 Mounting and Connections
318 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[stromwandler-anklemmen-20080530, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-6 Current transformer connection
As single wires, solid conductors as well as stranded conductors with conductor sleeves can be used. Up to
two single wires with identical cross-sections can be used per connection.
Alternatively jumpers (Order No. C53207-A406-D193-1) can be used with terminal points in a stacked
arrangement. When using jumpers, only ring lugs are allowed.
When connecting single wires, the following cross-sections are allowed:
Cable cross-section: AWG 14-10 (2.0 mm2 to 5.2 mm2)
Connector sleeve with plastic collar L = 10 mm (0.39 in) or L = 12 mm (0.47 in)
Stripping length:
(when used without conductor sleeve)
15 mm (0.59 in)
Use exclusively solid copper conductors.
Mechanical Requirements
The fixing elements and the connected components are designed for the following mechanical requirements:
Permissible tightening torque at the terminal screw 2.7 Nm (23.9 lb.in)
With solid conducters the allowed
maximum tighting torque is 2 Nm
Permissible traction per connected conductor 80 N based on IEC 60947-1
(VDE 660, Part 100)
Connections of the Voltage Terminals
Fixing Elements
The fixing elements for the voltage transformer connection are part of the voltage terminal (housing side).
They have a stress-crack- and corrosion-resistant alloy. The head shape of the terminal screw allows for using a
flat screwdriver (4.0 mm x 0.8 mm / 0.16 in x 0.031 in) or a crosstip screwdriver (PZ1). PZ1 is recommended.
Cable Lugs and Wire Cross-sections
The connection mode available is the connection as single cable. As single cables, solid conductors as well as
stranded conductors with or without conductor sleeves can be used. We recommend using twin cable end
sleeves when connecting two single cables. We recommend the twin cable end sleeves of the series PN 966
144 from Tyco Electronics.
When connecting single cables, the following cross-sections are allowed:
Cable cross-sections: AWG 20-14 (0.5 mm2 to 2.0 mm2)
Connector sleeve with plastic collar L = 12 mm (0.47 in)
3.1.2.3
Mounting and Commissioning
3.1 Mounting and Connections
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 319
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Stripping length:
(when used without conductor sleeve)
12 mm (0.47 in)
Only copper cables may be used.
With terminal points lying one below the other you may connect single conductors and jumpers (Order No.
C53207-A406-D194-1) together. Please make sure that neighboring jumpers are built in/connected alter-
nately.
Mechanical Requirements
The fixing elements and the connected components are designed for the following mechanical requirements:
Permissible tightening torque at the terminal screw 1.0 Nm (8.85 lb.in)
Permissible traction per connected conductor 50 N based on IEC 60947-1
(VDE 660, Part 100)
Interface Modules
General
The 7SJ80 relay is supplied with preconfigured interfaces according to the ordering version. You do not have
to make any adaptations to the hardware (e.g. plugging in jumpers) yourself, except for the installation or
replacement of communication modules.
The use of the interface modules RS232, RS485 and optical can be defined via the parameter 617 ServiProt
(CM). This parameter is only visible if the 11th digit of the ordering number was selected to be 1 for RS232, 2
for RS485 or 3 for optical.
Installation or Replacement of the Ethernet Interface Module
The following requirement must be fulfilled:
There is no SIPROTEC 4 communication module mounted yet. Otherwise, this has to be removed before
actually installing the Ethernet interface module (see below).
The Ethernet interface module is inserted in the respective slot, most suitably from the open bottom, i.e.
above the back of the battery case. A supporting frame is placed over the modular plug. The narrow spacer lies
at edge of the printed circuit board. The module is attached to the 50-pole plug connector of the CPU module
slightly inclined to the basic I/O board. The supporting plate is slightly pulled outwards in this area. The
module can now be inserted vertically up to the stop. Then, the supporting plate is pressed against in the area
of the locking latch until the upper edge of the printed circuit board of the Ethernet interface module snaps
into the locking latch.
[com-modul-mit-stuetz-20100716, 1, --_--]
Figure 3-7 Ethernet interface with support frame
3.1.2.4
Mounting and Commissioning
3.1 Mounting and Connections
320 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[en100-lc_schraeg-20071107, 1, --_--]
Figure 3-8 Installation of the Ethernet interface
Now, a SIPROTEC 4 communication module can be installed (see Section Installation or Replacement of a
SIPROTEC 4 Communication Module). Otherwise, the device can be reassembled again (see Section Reas-
sembly).
Installation or Replacement of a SIPROTEC 4 Communication Module
The following description assumes the normal case that a SIPROTEC 4 communication module which has not
yet been existing is retrofitted.
If a SIPROTEC 4 communication module has to be removed or replaced, the steps are to be performed in
reverse order.
i
i
NOTE
The installation can only be performed alone or after the installation of the Ethernet module.
The SIPROTEC 4 communication module is inserted via the large window in the plastic supporting plate. The
direction of insertion is not arbitrary. The module is held at its mounting bracket. The opposite end of the
module is inserted with the same orientation in the window opening, under the supporting plate and any
existing extension I/O. The module bracket is turned towards the Ethernet module locking latch at the
supporting plate. Thus, even the longest connection elements of the communication module can be moved in
this space between the lower supporting plate reinforcement and the locking latch in the direction of the
transformer module. The mounting bracket of the module is now drawn up to the stop in the direction of the
lower supporting plate reinforcement. Thus, the 60-pin plug connector on the module and the basic I/O board
are aligned on top of each other. The alignment has to be checked via the opening at the bottom of the rack.
Attach the module's mounting rail from the back side of the basic I/O using 2 M 2.5 screws.
Mounting and Commissioning
3.1 Mounting and Connections
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 321
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[com-modul-20071107, 1, --_--]
Figure 3-9 Installation of a SIPROTEC 4 communication module
The device can now be reassembled again (see Section Reassembly).
Reassembly
The reassembly of the device is performed in the following steps:
Carefully insert the complete electronics block into the housing. Please observe the following:
The connections of the communication modules point at the bottom of the housing. If there is no communica-
tion module, orient yourself to the connections for the current terminal. These connections are located on the
side of the printed circuit board pointing at the device bottom.
Insert the electronics block into the housing, until the supporting part rests against the front edge of the
housing. Press the left housing wall slightly out and insert the electronics block carefully further into the
housing. When the front edge of the housing and the inside of the front plate touch, center the front plate by
carful lateral movements. This makes sure that the front plate encloses/surrounds the housing. The electronics
block can only be inserted centered up to the end stop.
3.1.2.5
Mounting and Commissioning
3.1 Mounting and Connections
322 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[einschub-mit-stuetz-20100716, 1, --_--]
Figure 3-10 Reassembly of Device
Fix the front cover to the housing with the two medium screws at the top and bottom of the front cover. The
two covers can be inserted again either now or after the reinstallation of the device. Now install the device in
accordance with the Sections Panel Flush Mounting, Panel Surface Mounting or Cubicle Mounting.
i
i
NOTE
Insert the current and voltage terminal blocks again and lock them in place!
Installation
General
The 7SJ80 relay has a housing size 1/6. The housing has 2 covers and 4 fixing holes each at the top and
bottom (see Figure 3-11 and Figure 3-12).
3.1.3
3.1.3.1
Mounting and Commissioning
3.1 Mounting and Connections
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 323
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[front-7sj80-mit-abdeckungen-20071107, 1, --_--]
Figure 3-11 Housing with covers
[front-7sj80-ohne-abdeckungen-20071107, 1, --_--]
Figure 3-12 Housing with fixing holes (without covers)
Panel Flush Mounting
The housing (housing size 1/6) has 2 covers and 4 fixing holes.
•Remove the 2 covers at the top and bottom of the front cover. Thus, 4 elongated holes are revealed in
the mounting bracket and can be accessed.
•Insert the device into the panel cut-out and fasten it with four screws. For dimensional drawings, refer to
Section 4.25 Dimensions.
•Mount the 2 covers again.
3.1.3.2
Mounting and Commissioning
3.1 Mounting and Connections
324 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
•Connect a solid low-ohmic protective and operational ground to the grounding terminal of the device.
The cross-section of the cable used must correspond to the maximum connected cross-section but must
be at least 2.5 mm2 (Grounding area > M4, grounding area to be lacquer-free).
•Connections are to be established via the screw terminals on the rear panel of the device in accordance
with the circuit diagram. The details on the connection technique for the communication modules at the
bottom of the device (port A and port B) in accordance with the SIPROTEC 4 System Description and the
details on the connection technique for the current and voltage terminals on the rear of the device in the
Sections “Connections of the Current Terminals” and “Connections of the Voltage Terminals” must be
strictly observed.
[schalttafeleinbau-7sj80-1-6tel-gehaeuse-20070107, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-13 Panel flush mounting of a 7SJ80
Cubicle Mounting
To install the device in a rack or cubicle, two mounting brackets are required. The ordering codes are stated in
Appendix, Section A Ordering Information and Accessories.
The housing (housing size 1/6) has 2 covers and 4 fixing holes.
•Loosely screw the two angle rails into the rack or cubicle with 4 screws each.
•Remove the 2 covers at the top and bottom of the front cover. Thus, 4 elongated holes are revealed in
the mounting bracket and can be accessed.
•Secure the device to the angle rails with 4 screws.
•Mount the 2 covers again.
•Tighten the 8 screws of the the angle rails in the rack or cubicle.
•Connect a solid low-ohmic protective and operational ground to the grounding terminal of the device.
The cross-section of the cable used must correspond to the maximum connected cross-section but must
be at least 2.5 mm2 (Grounding area > M4, grounding area to be lacquer-free).
•Connections are to be established via the screw terminals at the rear panel of the device in accordance
with the circuit diagram. The details on the connection technique for the communication modules on the
bottom of the device (port A and port B) in accordance with the SIPROTEC 4 System Description and the
details on the connection technique for the current and voltage terminals at the rear of the device in the
Sections “Connections of the Current Terminals” and “Connections of the Voltage Terminals” must be
strictly observed.
3.1.3.3
Mounting and Commissioning
3.1 Mounting and Connections
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 325
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[montage-7sj8x-einsechstel-gehaeuse-20070117, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-14 Example installation of a 7SJ80 in a rack or cubicle
Panel Surface Mounting
When ordering the device as surface-mounting case (9th digit of the ordering number= B), the mounting
frame shown below is part of the scope of delivery.
For installation, proceed as follows:
•Drill the holes for the mounting frame into the control panel.
•Fasten the mounting frame with 4 screws to the control panel (the continuously open side of the
mounting frame is intended for the cable harnesses and can point at the top or bottom according to
customer specification).
•Loosen the terminal blocks for the wiring, wire the terminal blocks and then click them in again.
•Connect a solid low-ohmic protective and operational ground to the grounding terminal of the device.
The cross-section of the cable used must correspond to the maximum connected cross-section but must
be at least 2.5 mm2 (Grounding area > M4, grounding area to be lacquer-free).
•Connections are to be established via the screw terminals on the rear panel of the device in accordance
with the circuit diagram. The details on the connection technique for the communication modules at the
bottom of the device (port A and port B) in accordance with the SIPROTEC 4 System Description and the
details on the connection technique for the current and voltage terminals on the rear of the device in the
Sections “Connections of the Current Terminals” and “Connections of the Voltage Terminals” must be
strictly observed.
•Insert the device into the mounting frame (make sure that no cables are jammed).
•Secure the device to the mounting frame with 4 screws. For dimensional drawings, refer to the Technical
Data, Section 4.25 Dimensions.
3.1.3.4
Mounting and Commissioning
3.1 Mounting and Connections
326 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[montagehalterung-20070116, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-15 Mounting rails for panel surface mounting
Mounting and Commissioning
3.1 Mounting and Connections
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 327
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Checking Connections
Checking the Data Connections of the Interfaces
Pin Assignment
The following tables show the pin assignment of the various interfaces. The position of the connections can
be seen in the following figures.
[usb-schnittst-auf-geraetefrontseite-20070111, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-16 USB interface
[ethernet-anschlussbuchsen-101103-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-17 Ethernet connections at the device bottom
[dsub-buchsen-20070111, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-18 Serial interface at the device bottom
USB Interface
The USB interface can be used to establish a connection between the protection device and your PC. For the
communication, the Microsoft Windows USB driver is used which is installed together with DIGSI (as of version
V4.82). The interface is installed as a virtual serial COM port. We recommend the use of standard USB cables
with a maximum length of 5 m/16 ft.
3.2
3.2.1
Mounting and Commissioning
3.2 Checking Connections
328 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Table 3-2 Assignment of the USB socket
Pin-No. 1 2 3 4 Housing
USB VBUS
(unused)
D- D+ GND Shield
Connections at port A
If the interface is used for communication with the device, the data connection is to be checked.
Table 3-3 Assignment of the port A socket
Pin-No. Ethernet interface
1 Tx+
2 Tx-
3 Rx+
4 —
5 —
6 Rx-
7 —
8 —
Connections at port B
When a serial interface of the device is connected to a control center, the data connection must be checked. A
visual check of the assignment of the transmit and receive channels is important. With RS232 and fiber optic
interfaces, each connection is dedicated to one transmission direction. For that reason the data output of one
device must be connected to the data input of the other device and vice versa.
Table 3-4 Belegung der Buchsen Port B
Pin-No. RS232 RS485 Profibus DP, RS485 Modbus RS485 Ethernet
EN 100
IEC 60870–5–103
redundant
DNP3.0 RS485
1 Shield (electrically connected with shield shroud) Tx+ B/B’ (RxD/TxD-P)
2 RxD – – – Tx– A/A’ (RxD/TxD-N)
3 TxD A/A’ (RxD/TxD-N) B/B’ (RxD/TxD-P) A Rx+ –
4 – – CNTR-A (TTL) RTS (TTL level) — –
5 GND C/C’ (GND) C/C’ (GND) GND1 — –
6 – – +5 V ((max. load
<100 mA)
VCC1 Rx– –
7 RTS – 1) – – — –
8 CTS B/B’ (RxD/TxD-P) A/A’ (RxD/TxD-N) B — –
9 – – – – not available not available
1) Pin 7 also carries the RTS signal with RS232 level when operated as RS485 interface. Pin 7 must therefore not be
connected!
With data cables, the connections are designated according to DIN 66020 and ISO 2110:
•TxD = Data output
•RxD = Data input
•RTS = Request to send
•CTS = Clear to send
•GND = Signal/Chassis Ground
Mounting and Commissioning
3.2 Checking Connections
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 329
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
The cable shield is to be grounded at both ends. For extremely EMC-prone environments, the GND may be
connected via a separate individually shielded wire pair to improve immunity to interference.
Fiber-optic Cables
!
WARNING
Laser Radiation! Class 1
²Do not look directly into the fiber-optic elements!
Signals transmitted via optical fibers are unaffected by interference. The fibers guarantee electrical isolation
between the connections. Transmit and receive connections are represented by symbols.
The standard setting of the character idle state for the optical fiber interface is “Light off”. If the character idle
state is to be changed, use the operating program DIGSI as described in the SIPROTEC 4 System Description.
Checking the System Connections
!
WARNING
Warning of dangerous voltages
Non-observance of the following measures can result in death, personal injury or substantial prop-
erty damage.
²Therefore, only qualified people who are familiar with and adhere to the safety procedures and
precautionary measures should perform the inspection steps.
!
CAUTION
Take care when operating the device without a battery on a battery charger.
Non-observance of the following measures can lead to unusually high voltages and consequently,
the destruction of the device.
²Do not operate the device on a battery charger without a connected battery. (For limit values see also
Technical Data, Section 4.1 General Device Data).
If undervoltage protection is configured and enabled in the device and if, at the same time, the current crite-
rion is disabled, the device picks up right after auxiliary voltage has been connected, since no measuring
voltage is available. To make the device configurable, pickup is to be stopped, i.e. the measuring voltage is
connected or voltage protection is blocked. This can be performed by operation.
Before the device is energized for the first time, it should be in the final operating environment for at least 2
hours to equalize the temperature, to minimize humidity and to avoid condensation. Connections are checked
with the device at its final location. The plant must first be switched off and grounded.
Proceed as follows for checking the system connections:
3.2.2
Mounting and Commissioning
3.2 Checking Connections
330 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
•Circuit breakers for the auxiliary power supply and the measuring voltage must be opened.
•Check the continuity of all current and voltage transformer connections against the system and connec-
tion diagrams:
– Are the current transformers grounded properly?
– Are the polarities of the current transformer connections the same?
– Is the phase assignment of the current transformers correct?
– Are the voltage transformers grounded properly?
– Are the polarities of the voltage transformer connections the same and correct?
– Is the phase assignment of the voltage transformers correct?
–Is the polarity for the current input ΙN, ΙNs (if used)?
– Is the polarity for the voltage input V3 correct (if used e.g. for broken delta winding or busbar
voltage)?
•If test switches are used for the secondary testing of the device, their functions must also be checked, in
particular that in the “Check” position the current transformer secondary lines are automatically short-
circuited
•Connect an ammeter in the supply circuit of the power supply. A range of about 2.5 A to 5 A for the
meter is appropriate.
•Switch on m.c.b. for auxiliary voltage (supply protection), check the voltage level and, if applicable, the
polarity of the voltage at the device terminals or at the connection modules.
•The current input should correspond to the power input in neutral position of the device. The measured
steady state current should be insignificant. Transient movement of the ammeter merely indicates the
charging current of capacitors
•Remove the voltage from the power supply by opening the protective switches.
•Disconnect the measuring test equipment; restore the normal power supply connections.
•Apply voltage to the power supply
•Close the protective switches for the voltage transformers.
•Verify that the voltage phase rotation at the device terminals is correct.
•Open the protective switches for the voltage transformers and the power supply.
•Check the trip and close circuits to the power system circuit breakers.
•Verify that the control wiring to and from other devices is correct.
•Check the signaling connections.
•Switch the mcb back on.
Mounting and Commissioning
3.2 Checking Connections
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 331
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Commissioning
!
WARNING
Warning of dangerous voltages when operating an electrical device
Non-observance of the following measures can result in death, personal injury or substantial prop-
erty damage.
²Only qualified people shall work on and around this device. They must be thoroughly familiar with all
warnings and safety notices in this instruction manual as well as with the applicable safety steps,
safety regulations, and precautionary measures.
²Before making any connections, the device must be grounded at the protective conductor terminal.
²Hazardous voltages can exist in all switchgear components connected to the power supply and to
measurement and test circuits.
²Hazardous voltages can be present in the device even after the power supply voltage has been
removed (capacitors can still be charged).
²After switching off the auxiliary voltage, wait a minimum of 10 seconds before reconnecting this
voltage so that steady conditions can be established.
²The limit values given in Technical Data (Chapter 4) must not be exceeded, neither during testing nor
during commissioning.
When testing the device with secondary test equipment, make sure that no other measurement quantities are
connected and that the trip and close circuits to the circuit breakers and other primary switches are discon-
nected from the device.
!
DANGER
Hazardous voltages during interruptions in secondary circuits of current transformers
Non-observance of the following measure will result in death, severe personal injury or substantial
property damage.
²Short-circuit the current transformer secondary circuits before current connections to the device are
opened.
Switching operations have to be carried out during commissioning. A prerequisite for the prescribed tests is
that these switching operations can be executed without danger. They are accordingly not intended for opera-
tional checks.
!
WARNING
Warning of dangers evolving from improper primary tests
Non-observance of the following measures can result in death, personal injury or substantial prop-
erty damage.
²Primary tests are only allowed to be carried out by qualified personnel, who are familiar with the
commissioning of protection systems, the operation of the plant and the safety rules and regulations
(switching, grounding, etc.).
3.3
Mounting and Commissioning
3.3 Commissioning
332 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Test Mode and Transmission Block
Activation and Deactivation
If the device is connected to a central or main computer system via the SCADA interface, then the information
that is transmitted can be influenced. This is only possible with some of the protocols available (see Table
“Protocol- dependent functions” in the Appendix E.6 Protocol-dependent Functions).
If the test mode is switched on, the messages sent by a SIPROTEC 4 device to the main system has an addi-
tional test bit. This bit allows the messages to be recognized as not resulting from actual faults. Furthermore,
it can be determined by activating the transmission block that no annunciations are transmitted via the
system interface during test mode.
The SIPROTEC 4 System Manual describes in detail how to activate and deactivate the test mode and blocked
data transmission. Please note that when DIGSI is being used for device editing, the program must be in the
online operating mode for the test features to be used.
Testing the System Interface (at Port B)
Prefacing Remarks
If the device features a system interface and this is used to communicate with the control center, the DIGSI
device operation can be used to test if messages are transmitted correctly. This test option should however
definitely not be used while the device is in “real” operation.
!
DANGER
Danger evolving from operating the equipment (e.g. circuit breakers, disconnectors) by means of the
test function
Non-observance of the following measure will result in death, severe personal injury or substantial
property damage.
²Equipment used to allow switching such as circuit breakers or disconnectors is to be checked only
during commissioning. Do not under any circumstances check them by means of the test function
during “real” operation by transmitting or receiving messages via the system interface.
i
i
NOTE
After termination of the system interface test the device will reboot. Thereby, all annunciation buffers are
erased. If required, these buffers should be extracted with DIGSI prior to the test.
The interface test is carried out using DIGSI in the Online operating mode:
•Open the Online directory by double-clicking; the operating functions for the device appear.
•Click on Test; the function selection appears in the right half of the screen.
•Double-click Generate Indications in the list view. The Generate Indications dialog box opens (see
following figure).
Structure of the Test Dialog Box
In the column Indication the display texts of all indications are displayed which were allocated to the system
interface in the matrix. In the column SETPOINT Status the user has to define the value for the messages to
be tested. Depending on annunciation type, several input fields are offered (e.g. message
ON
/ message
OFF
).
By clicking on one of the fields you can select the desired value from the pull-down menu.
3.3.1
3.3.2
Mounting and Commissioning
3.3 Commissioning
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 333
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[schnittstelle-testen-110402-wlk, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-19 System interface test with the dialog box: Creating messages - example
Changing the Operating State
When clicking one of the buttons in the column Action for the first time, you will be prompted for the pass-
word no. 6 (for hardware test menus). After correct entry of the password, individual annunciations can be
initiated. To do so, click on the button Send on the corresponding line. The corresponding message is issued
and can be read out either from the event log of the SIPROTEC 4 device or from the substation control system.
As long as the window is open, further tests can be performed.
Test in Message Direction
For all information that is transmitted to the central station, test the options in the list which appears in
SETPOINT Status:
•Make sure that each checking process is carried out carefully without causing any danger (see above and
refer to DANGER!)
•Click on Send in the function to be tested and check whether the transmitted information reaches the
central station and shows the desired reaction. Data which are normally linked via binary inputs (first
character “>”) are likewise indicated to the central power system with this procedure. The function of the
binary inputs itself is tested separately.
Exiting the Test Mode
To end the System Interface Test, click on Close. The device is briefly out of service while the start-up routine
is executed. The dialog box closes.
Test in Command Direction
The information transmitted in command direction must be indicated by the central station. Check whether
the reaction is correct.
Configuring Communication Modules
Required Settings in DIGSI 4
The following applies in general:
3.3.3
Mounting and Commissioning
3.3 Commissioning
334 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
In the case of a first-time installation or replacement of a communication module, the ordering number
(MLFB) does not need to be changed. The ordering number can be retained. Thus, all previously created
parameter sets remain valid for the device.
Changes in the DIGSI Manager
In order that the protection device can access the new communication module, a change has to be made in
the parameter set within the DIGSI Manager.
Select the SIPROTEC device in DIGSI 4 Manager project and choose the menu entry Edit > Object Properties
to open the dialog Properties – SIPROTEC 4 Device (see the following figure).
Select an Interfac for 11. Port B (on back of device bottom) and for 12. Port A (on front of device bottom)
in the properties box Communications modules. For Profibus DP, Modbus or DNP3.0, the entry additional
Protocols, see MLFB Ext L has to be selected.
For port B, click L... and select the type of communication protocol in the dialog Additional information
[sx80-komm-prot-l-071112, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-20 DIGSI 4.3: Profibus DP protocol selection (example)
Mapping File
For Profibus DP, Modbus, DNP3.0 and VDEW Redundant, a matching bus mapping has to be selected.
For the selection of the mapping file please open the SIPROTEC device in DIGSI and choose Settings > Inter-
faces (see Figure 3-21).
The dialog Interface Settings shows under Additional protocols at device the following:
•Display of the selected communication module
•Selection Mapping file, listing all Profibus DP, Modbus, DNP3.0 and VDEW Redundant mapping files
available for the respective device type, with their names and reference to the corresponding bus
mapping document
•Edit field Module-specific settings for changing the bus-specific parameters
Mounting and Commissioning
3.3 Commissioning
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 335
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[auswahl-mapping-071122, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-21 DIGSI 4.3: Selection of a mapping file and setting of bus-specific parameters
i
i
NOTE
If the mapping file assignment for a SIPROTEC device has been changed, this is usually connected with a
change of the allocations of the SIPROTEC objects to the system interface.
After having selected a new mapping file, please check the allocations to "Target system interface" or
"Source system interface" in the DIGSI allocation matrix.
Edit Field "Module-specific settings"
Change only the numbers in the lines not starting with "//" and observe the semicolon at the end of the lines in
the field Module-specific settings.
Further changes in the field might lead to an error message when closing the dialog box Interface settings.
Select the bus mapping corresponding to your requirements. The documentation of the individual bus
mappings is available on the Internet (www.siprotec.com in the download area).
After having selected the bus mapping, the area of the mapping file in which you can make device-specific
settings appears in the window (see Figure 3-22). The type of this setting depends of the protocol used and is
described in the protocol documentation. Please only perform the described changes in the settings window
and confirm your entries with "OK".
Mounting and Commissioning
3.3 Commissioning
336 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[modulspez-071122, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-22 Module-specific settings
Transfer the data to the protection device (see the following figure).
[daten-uebertragen-071122, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-23 Transmitting data
Mounting and Commissioning
3.3 Commissioning
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 337
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Terminal Test
The system interface (EN 100) is preassigned with the default value zero and the module is thus set to DHCP
mode. The IP address can be set in the DIGSI Manager (Object properties... / Communication parameters /
System interface [Ethernet]).
The Ethernet interface is preassigned with the following IP address and can be changed on the device at any
time (DIGSI device processing / Parameters / Interfaces / Ethernet service):
IP address: 192.168.100.10
Network mask: 255.255.255.0
The following restrictions must be observed:
For subnet mask: 255.255.255.0 the IP bandwidth 192.168.64.xx is not available
For subnet mask 255.255.255.0, the IP-Band 192.168.1.xx is not available
For subnet mask: 255.255.0.0 the IP bandwidth 192.168.xx.xx is not available
For subnet mask: 255.0.0.0 the IP band 192.xx.xx.xx is not available.
Checking the Status of Binary Inputs and Outputs
Prefacing Remarks
The binary inputs, outputs, and LEDs of a SIPROTEC 4 device can be individually and precisely controlled in
DIGSI. This feature is used to verify control wiring from the device to plant equipment (operational checks)
during commissioning. This test option should however definitely not be used while the device is in “real”
operation.
!
DANGER
Danger evolving from operating the equipment (e.g. circuit breakers, disconnectors) by means of the
test function
Non-observance of the following measure will result in death, severe personal injury or substantial
property damage.
²Equipment used to allow switching such as circuit breakers or disconnectors is to be checked only
during commissioning. Do not under any circumstances check them by means of the test function
during real operation by transmitting or receiving messages via the system interface.
i
i
NOTE
After finishing the hardware tests, the device will reboot. Thereby, all annunciation buffers are erased. If
required, these buffers should be read out with DIGSI and saved prior to the test.
The hardware test can be carried out using DIGSI in the Online operating mode:
•Open the Online directory by double-clicking; the operating functions for the device appear.
•Click on Test; the function selection appears in the right half of the screen.
•Double-click in the list view on Hardware Test. The dialog box of the same name opens (see the
following figure).
Structure of the Test Dialog Box
The dialog box is classified into three groups: BI for binary inputs, REL for output relays, and LED for lightemit-
ting diodes. On the left of each of these groups is an accordingly labeled button. By double-clicking a button,
information regarding the associated group can be shown or hidden.
3.3.4
Mounting and Commissioning
3.3 Commissioning
338 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
In the column Status the present (physical) state of the hardware component is displayed. Indication is made
by symbols. The physical actual states of the binary inputs and outputs are indicated by an open or closed
switch symbol, the LEDs by a dark or illuminated LED symbol.
The opposite state of each element is displayed in the column Scheduled. The display is made in plain text.
The right-most column indicates the commands or messages that are configured (masked) to the hardware
components.
[ein-ausgabe-testen-110402-wlk, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-24 Test of the binary inputs/outputs — example
Changing the Operating State
To change the status of a hardware component, click on the associated button in the Scheduled column.
Password No. 6 (if activated during configuration) will be requested before the first hardware modification is
allowed. After entry of the correct password a status change will be executed. Further status changes remain
possible while the dialog box is open.
Test of the Output Relays
Each individual output relay can be energized allowing to check the wiring between the output relay of the
7SJ80 and the system, without having to generate the message that is assigned to the relay. As soon as the
first status change for any one of the output relays is initiated, all output relays are separated from the internal
device functions, and can only be operated by the hardware test function. This for example means that a
switching command coming from a protection function or a control command from the operator panel to an
output relay cannot be executed.
Proceed as follows in order to check the output relay:
•Ensure that the switching of the output relay can be executed without danger (see above under
DANGER!).
•Each output relay must be tested via the corresponding Scheduled-cell in the dialog box.
•Finish the testing (see margin title below “Exiting the Test Mode”), so that during further testings no
unwanted switchings are initiated.
Mounting and Commissioning
3.3 Commissioning
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 339
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Test of the Binary Inputs
To test the wiring between the plant and the binary inputs of the 7SJ80 the condition in the plant which
initiates the binary input must be generated and the response of the device checked.
To do so, the dialog box Hardware Test must be opened again to view the physical state of the binary inputs.
The password is not yet required.
Proceed as follows in order to check the binary inputs:
•Activate each of function in the system which causes a binary input to pick up.
•Check the reaction in the Status column of the dialog box. To do so, the dialog box must be updated. The
options may be found below under the margin heading “Updating the Display”.
•Finish the testing (see margin heading below “Exiting the Test Mode”).
If ,however, the effect of a binary input must be checked without carrying out any switching in the plant, it is
possible to trigger individual binary inputs with the hardware test function. As soon as the first state change of
any binary input is triggered and the password No. 6 has been entered, all binary inputs are separated from
the plant and can only be activated via the hardware test function.
Test of the LEDs
The LEDs may be tested in a similar manner to the other input/output components. As soon as the first state
change of any LED has been triggered, all LEDs are separated from the internal device functionality and can
only be controlled via the hardware test function. This means e.g. that no LED is illuminated anymore by a
protection function or by pressing the LED reset button.
Updating the Display
As the Hardware Test dialog opens, the operating states of the hardware components which are current at
this time are read in and displayed.
An update is made:
•for each hardware component, if a command to change the condition is successfully performed,
•for all hardware components if the Update button is clicked,
•for all hardware components with cyclical updating (cycle time is 20 seconds) if the Automatic Update
(20sec) field is marked.
Exiting the Test Mode
To end the hardware test, click on Close. The dialog box is closed. The device becomes unavailable for a brief
start-up period immediately after this. Then all hardware components are returned to the operating conditions
determined by the plant settings.
Tests for Breaker Failure Protection
General
If the device provides a breaker failure protection and if this is used, the integration of this protection function
in the system must be tested under practical conditions.
Due to the variety of application options and the available system configurations, it is not possible to make a
detailed description of the necessary tests. It is important to observe local conditions and protection and
system drawings.
Before starting the circuit breaker tests it is recommended to isolate the circuit breaker of the tested feeder at
both ends, i.e. line isolators and busbar isolators should be open so that the breaker can be operated without
risk.
3.3.5
Mounting and Commissioning
3.3 Commissioning
340 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
!
CAUTION
Also for tests on the local circuit breaker of the feeder a trip command to the surrounding circuit breakers
can be issued for the busbar.
Non–observance of the following measure can result in minor personal injury or property damage.
²Therefore, primarily it is recommended to interrupt the tripping commands to the adjacent (busbar)
breakers, e.g. by interrupting the corresponding pickup voltages.
Before the breaker is finally closed for normal operation, the trip command of the feeder protection routed to
the circuit breaker must be disconnected so that the trip command can only be initiated by the breaker failure
protection.
Although the following lists do not claim to be complete, they may also contain points which are to be ignored
in the current application.
Auxiliary Contacts of the CB
The circuit breaker auxiliary contact(s) form an essential part of the breaker failure protection system in case
they have been connected to the device. Make sure the correct assignment has been checked.
External Initiation Conditions
If the breaker failure protection can be started by external protection devices, the external start conditions
must be checked.
In order for the breaker failure protection to be started, a current must flow at least via the monitored phase.
This may be a secondary injected current.
•Start by trip command of the external protection: binary input functions
>50BF ext SRC
(FNo 1431)
(in spontaneous or fault annunciations).
•After every start, the message
50BF ext Pickup
(FNo 1457) must appear in the spontaneous or fault
annunciations.
•After time expiration TRIP-Timer (address 7005) tripping command of the breaker failure protection.
Switch off test current.
If start is possible without current flow:
•Closing the circuit breaker to be monitored to both sides with the disconnector switches open.
•Start by trip command of the external protection: Binary input functions
>50BF ext SRC
(FNo 1431) (in
spontaneous or fault annunciations).
•After every start, the message
50BF ext Pickup
(FNo 1457) must appear in the spontaneous or fault
annunciations.
•After time expiration TRIP-Timer (address 7005) tripping command of the breaker failure protection.
Open the circuit breaker again.
Busbar Tripping
For testing the distribution of the trip commands in the substation in the case of breaker failures it is impor-
tant to check that the trip commands to the adjacent circuit breakers are correct.
The adjacent circuit breakers are those of all feeders which must be tripped in order to ensure interruption of
the fault current should the local breaker fail. These are therefore the circuit breakers of all feeders which feed
the busbar or busbar section to which the feeder with the fault is connected.
A general detailed test guide cannot be specified because the layout of the adjacent circuit breakers largely
depends on the system topology.
Mounting and Commissioning
3.3 Commissioning
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 341
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
In particular with multiple busbars, the trip distribution logic for the adjacent circuit breakers must be checked.
Here it should be checked for every busbar section that all circuit breakers which are connected to the same
busbar section as the feeder circuit breaker under observation are tripped, and no other breakers.
Termination
All temporary measures taken for testing must be undone, e.g. especially switching states, interrupted trip
commands, changes to setting values or individually switched off protection functions.
Testing User-Defined Functions
CFC Logic
The device has a vast capability for allowing functions to be defined by the user, especially with the CFC logic.
Any special function or logic added to the device must be checked.
Of course, general test procedures cannot be given. Configuration of these functions and the target conditions
must be actually known beforehand and tested. Possible interlocking conditions of switching devices (circuit
breakers, disconnectors, ground switch) are of particular importance. They must be observed and tested.
Current, Voltage, and Phase Rotation Testing
Preliminary Remark
i
i
NOTE
The voltage and phase rotation test is only relevant for devices with voltage transformers.
≥ 10 % of Load Current
The connections of the current and voltage transformers are tested using primary quantities. Secondary load
current of at least 10 % of the nominal current of the device is necessary. The line is energized and will remain
in this state during the measurements.
With proper connections of the measuring circuits, none of the measured-values supervision elements in the
device should pick up. If an element detects a problem, the causes which provoked it may be viewed in the
Event Log. If current or voltage summation errors occur, then check the matching factors.
Messages from the symmetry monitoring could occur because there actually are asymmetrical conditions in
the network. If these asymmetrical conditions are normal service conditions, the corresponding monitoring
functions should be made less sensitive.
Current and Voltage Values
Currents and voltages can be seen in the display field on the front of the device or the operator interface via a
PC. They can be compared to the quantities measured by an independent source, as primary and secondary
quantities.
If the measured values are not plausible, the connection must be checked and corrected after the line has
been isolated and the current transformer circuits have been short-circuited. The measurements must then be
repeated.
Phase Rotation
The phase rotation must correspond to the configured phase rotation, in general a clockwise phase rotation. If
the system has an anti-clockwise phase rotation, this must have been considered when the power system data
was set (address 209 PHASE SEQ.). If the phase rotation is incorrect, the alarm
Fail Ph. Seq.
(FNo 171)
is generated. The measured value phase allocation must be checked and corrected, if required, after the line
has been isolated and current transformers have been short-circuited. The measurement must then be
repeated.
3.3.6
3.3.7
Mounting and Commissioning
3.3 Commissioning
342 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Voltage Transformer Miniature Circuit Breaker (VT mcb)
The VT mcb of the feeder (if used) must be opened. The measured voltages in the operational measured
values appear with a value close to zero (small measured voltages are of no consequence).
Check in the spontaneous annunciations that the VT mcb trip was entered (annunciation
>FAIL:FEEDER VT
“ON” in the spontaneous annunciations). Beforehand it has to be assured that the position of the VT mcb is
connected to the device via a binary input.
Close the VT mcb again: The above messages appear under the spontaneous messages as “OFF”, i.e.
>FAIL:FEEDER VT
“OFF”.
If one of the events does not appear, the connection and allocation of these signals must be checked.
If the
ON
-state and
OFF
–state are swapped, the contact type (H–active or L–active) must be checked and
remedied.
Test for High Impedance Protection
Polarity of Transformers
When the device is used for high-impedance protection, the current at ΙN or ΙNs is equivalent to the fault
current in the protected object. It is essential in this case that all current transformers feeding the resistor
whose current is measured at ΙN(S) have the same polarity. The test currents used for this are through currents.
Each CT must be included in a measurement. The current at ΙN(S) may never exceed half the pickup value of the
single-phase time overcurrent protection.
Testing the Reverse Interlocking Scheme
(only if used)
Testing reverse interlocking is available if at least one of the binary inputs available is configured for this
purpose (e.g. presetting of binary input BI1
>BLOCK 50-2
and
>BLOCK 50N-2
to open circuit system). Tests
can be performed with phase currents or ground current. For ground current the corresponding ground
current settings apply.
Please note that the blocking function can either be configured for the pickup current connected (open circuit
system) or the pickup current missing (closed circuit system). For open circuit system the following tests are to
be proceeded:
The feeder protection relays of all associated feeders must be in operation. At the beginning no auxiliary
voltage is fed to the reverse interlocking system.
A test current higher than the pickup values of 50-2 PICKUP and 50-1 PICKUP or 51 PICKUP is set. As a
result of the missing blocking signal, the protection function trips after (short) time delay 50-2 DELAY.
!
CAUTION
Tests with currents that exceed more than 4 times the nominal device current
cause an overload of the input circuits.
²Perform test only for a short time (see Technical Data, Section 4.1 General Device Data). Afterwards
the device has to cool off !
The direct voltage for reverse interlocking is now switched on to the line. The precedent test is repeated, the
result will be the same.
Subsequently, at each of the protection devices of the feeders, a pickup is simulated. Meanwhile, another fault
is simulated for the protection function of the infeed, as described before. Tripping is performed within time
50-1 DELAY (longer time period) (with definite time overcurrent protection) or according to characteristic
(with inverse time overcurrent protection).
These tests also check the proper functioning of the wiring for reverse interlocking.
3.3.8
3.3.9
Mounting and Commissioning
3.3 Commissioning
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 343
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Direction Check with Load Current
Preliminary Remark
i
i
NOTE
The direction check is only relevant for devices with voltage transformers.
≥ 10 % of Load Current
The correct connection of the current and voltage transformers is tested via the protected line using the load
current. For this purpose, connect the line. The load current the line carries must be at least 0.1 · ΙNom. The
load current should be in-phase or lagging the voltage (resistive or resistive-inductive load). The direction of
the load current must be known. If there is any doubt, network or ring loops should be opened. The line
remains energized during the test.
The direction can be derived directly from the operational measured values. Initially the correlation of the
measured load direction with the actual direction of load flow is checked. In this case the normal situation is
assumed whereby the forward direction (measuring direction) extends from the busbar towards the line
P positive, if active power flows into the line,
P negative, if active power flows towards the busbar,
Q positive, if reactive power flows into the line,
Q negative, if reactive power flows toward the busbar.
[lastscheinleistung-110402-wlk, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-25 Apparent Load Power
All signs of powers may be inverted deliberately. Check whether polarity is inverted in address 1108 P,Q
sign in the P.System Data 2. In that case the signs for active and reactive power are inverse as well.
The power measurement provides an initial indication as to whether the measured values have the correct
polarity. If both the active power and the reactive power have the wrong sign and 1108 P,Q sign is set to
not reversed, the polarity according to address 201 CT Starpoint must be checked and corrected.
However, power measurement itself is not able to detect all connection errors. For this reason, directional
messages should be generated by means of the directional overcurrent protection. Therefore, pickup thresh-
olds must be reduced so that the available load current causes a continuous pickup of the element. The direc-
tion reported in the messages, such as
Phase A forward
or
Phase A reverse
must correspond to the
actual power flow. Be careful that the “Forward” direction of the protective element is in the direction of the
line (or object to be protected). This is not necessarily identical with the direction of the normal the power
flow. For all three phases, the directional messages to the power flow must be reported properly.
If all directions differ from each other, individual phases in current or voltage transformer connections are
interchanged, not connected properly or phase assignment is incorrect. After isolation of the line and short-
circuiting of the current transformers the connections must be checked and corrected. The measurements
must then be repeated.
Finally, switch off the protected power line.
3.3.10
Mounting and Commissioning
3.3 Commissioning
344 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
i
i
NOTE
Reset the pickup values changed for the check to valid values.
Polarity Check for Voltage Input V3
Depending on the application of the voltage measuring input V3 of a 7SJ80, a polarity check may be necessary.
If no measuring voltage is connected to this input, this section is irrelevant.
If input V3 is used for the measurement of the displacement voltage VN (Power System Data 1 address 213
VT Connect. 3ph = Vab, Vbc, VGnd), the polarity is checked together with the current input ΙN/ΙNs (see
further below).
If the input V3 is used for measuring a voltage for synchrocheck (Power System Data 1, address 213 VT
Connect. 3ph = Vab, Vbc, VSyn or Vph-g, VSyn), the following is to be observed:
•The single-phase voltage V2 to be synchronized must be connected to input V3.
•The correct polarity is to be checked as follows using the synchrocheck function:
The device must provide the synchrocheck function which is to be configured in address 161 = 25 Function
1 = SYNCHROCHECK.
The voltage V2 to be synchronized must be set correctly in address 6123 CONNECTIONof V2.
If a transformer is located between the measuring points of the reference voltage V1 and the voltage to be
synchronized V2, its phase rotation must be taken into consideration. For this purpose, a corresponding angle
is entered in address 6122 ANGLE ADJUSTM., in the direction of the busbar seen from the feeder. An
example is shown in Section 2.20 Synchrocheck.
If necessary different transformation ratios of the transformers on the busbar and the feeder may have to be
considered under address Balancing V1/V2.
The synchrocheck function must be activated at address 6101 Synchronizing = ON.
A further aid for checking the connections are the messages 170.2090
25 V2>V1
, 170.2091
25 V2<V1
,
170.2094
25 α2>α1
and 170.2095
25 α2<α1
in the spontaneous messages.
•Circuit breaker is open. The feeder is de-energized. The circuit breakers of both voltage transformer
circuits must be closed.
•For the synchrocheck, the program Direct CO is set to YES (address 6110); the other programs
(addresses 6107 to 6109) are set to NO.
•Via a binary input (170.0043
>25 Sync requ.
) a measurement request is entered. The synchrocheck
must release closing (message 170.0049
25 CloseRelease
). If not, check all relevant parameters
again (synchrocheck configured and enabled correctly, see Sections 2.1.1 Functional Scope and
2.20 Synchrocheck).
•Set address 6110 Direct CO to NO.
•Then the circuit breaker is closed while the line isolator is open (see Figure 3-26). Thus, both voltage
transformers receive the same voltage.
•For the synchrocheck, the program 25 Function 1 is set to SYNCHROCHECK (address 161)
•Via a binary input (170.0043
>25 Sync requ.
) a measurement request is entered. The synchrocheck
must release closing (message 170.0049
25 CloseRelease
).
3.3.11
Mounting and Commissioning
3.3 Commissioning
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 345
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
•If not, first check whether one of the aforesaid messages 170.2090
25 V2>V1
or 170.2091
25 V2<V1
or 170.2094
25 α2>α1
or 170.2095
25 α2<α1
is available in the spontaneous messages.
The message
25 V2>V1
or
25 V2<V1
indicates that the magnitude adaption is incorrect. Check address
6121 Balancing V1/V2 and recalculate the adaptation factor.
The message
25 α2>α1
or
25 α2<α1
indicates that the phase relation of the busbar voltage does not
match the setting under address CONNECTIONof V2 (see Section 2.20 Synchrocheck). When measuring
via a transformer, address 6122 ANGLE ADJUSTM. must also be checked; this must adapt the vector
group. If these are correct, there is probably a reverse polarity of the voltage transformer terminals for
V1.
•For the synchrocheck, the program SYNC V1>V2< is set to YES (address 6108)
•Open the VT mcb of the busbar voltage.
•Via a binary input (170.0043
>25 Sync requ.
) a measurement request is entered. There is no close
release. If there is, the VT mcb for the busbar voltage is not allocated. Check whether this is the required
state, alternatively check the binary input
>FAIL: BUS VT
(6510).
•Close the VT mcb of the busbar voltage again.
•Open the circuit breaker.
•For the synchrocheck, the program SYNC V1<V2>is set to YES (address 6107) and SYNC V1>V2< is set
to NO (address 6108).
•Via a binary input (170.0043
>25 Sync requ.
) a measurement request is entered. The synchrocheck
must release closing (message 170.0049
25 CloseRelease
). Otherwise check all voltage connections
and the corresponding parameters again thoroughly as described in Section2.20 Synchrocheck.
•Open the VT mcb of the feeder voltage.
•Via a binary input (170.0043
>25 Sync requ.
) a measurement request is entered. No close release is
given.
•Close the VT mcb of the busbar voltage again.
Addresses 6107 to 6110 must be restored as they were changed for the test. If the allocation of the LEDs or
signal relays was changed for the test, this must also be restored.
[messspan-synch-kontr-20070716, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-26 Measuring voltages for synchrocheck
Mounting and Commissioning
3.3 Commissioning
346 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Ground Fault Check
Ungrounded Systems
The ground fault check is only necessary if the device is connected to an isolated or resonant-grounded system
and the ground fault detection is applied. The device must thus have been preset during configuration of the
device functions to Sens. Gnd Fault = Enabled (address 131). In all other cases, this section is irrelevant.
Ground fault direction detection only works with devices in which the 15th digit of the is B or C.
If none of this is the case, this section is not relevant.
Determination of the ground fault direction only works in devices that have an B or C in the 15th position of
their MLFB number.
The primary check serves to find out the correct polarity of the transformer connections for the determination
of the ground fault direction.
!
DANGER
Energized equipment of the power system ! Capacitive coupled voltages at disconnected equipment of the
power system !
Non-observance of the following measure will result in death, severe personal injury or substantial
property damage.
²Primary measurements must only be carried out on disconnected and grounded equipment of the
power system !
Using the primary ground fault method a most reliable test result is guaranteed. Therefore please proceed as
follows:
•Isolate the line and ground it on both ends. During the whole testing procedure the line must be open at
the remote end.
•Make a test connection between a single phase and ground. On overhead lines it can be connected
anywhere, however, it must be located behind the current transformers (looking from the busbar of the
feeder to be checked). Cables are grounded on the remote end (sealing end).
•Remove the protective grounding of the line.
•Connect a circuit breaker to the line end that is to be tested.
•Check the direction indication (LED if allocated)
•The faulty phase (FNo 1272 for A or 1273 for B or 1274 for C) and the direction of the line, i.e.
SensGnd
Forward
(FNo 1276) must be indicated in the ground fault protocol.
•The active and reactive components of the ground current are also indicated (
INs Reac
, FNo. 702). The
reactive current
INs Real
, FNo. 701) is the most relevant for isolated systems. If the display shows the
message
SensGnd Reverse
(FNo. 1277), either the current or voltage transformer terminals are
swapped in the neutral path. If message
SensGnd undef.
(FNo 1278) appears, the ground current may
be too low.
•Deenergize and ground the line.
The test is then finished.
Polarity Check for Current Input ΙE
General
If the standard connection of the device is used with current input ΙN connected in the neutral point of the set
of current transformers (see also connection circuit diagram in Appendix C Connection Examples), then the
correct polarity of the ground current path usually occurs automatically.
3.3.12
3.3.13
Mounting and Commissioning
3.3 Commissioning
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 347
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
If, however, current ΙN is derived from a separate summation CT (see e.g. a connection circuit diagram in the
Appendix C Connection Examples), an additional direction check with this current is necessary.
If the device features the sensitive current input for ΙN and if it is used in an isolated or resonant-grounded
system, the polarity check for ΙN was already carried out with the ground fault check according to the previous
section. Then this section is not relevant.
Otherwise the test is done with a disconnected trip circuit and primary load current. It must be noted that
during all simulations that do not exactly correspond with situations that may occur in practice, the non-
symmetry of measured values may cause the measured value monitoring to pick up. This must therefore be
ignored during such tests.
!
DANGER
Hazardous voltages during interruptions in secondary circuits of current transformers
Non-observance of the following measure will result in death, severe personal injury or substantial
property damage.
²Short-circuit the current transformer secondary circuits before current connections to the device are
opened.
Directional Testing for Grounded Systems
The check can either be carried out with function “directional ground fault protection” (address 116) or with
the function “ground fault detection” (address 131), which can be operated as additional fault protection.
In the following the check is described using the “directional ground fault protection” function (address 116)
as an example.
To generate a displacement voltage, the e–n winding of one phase in the voltage transformer set (e.g. A) is
bypassed (see Figure 3-27). If no connection on the e–n windings of the voltage transformer is provided, the
corresponding phase is disconnected on the secondary side (see Figure 3-28). Only the current of the trans-
former which is not provided with voltage in its voltage path is fed into the current path. If the line carries
resistive- inductive load, the protection is subject to the same conditions as exist during a ground fault in line
direction.
The directional ground fault protection must be configured to enabled and activated (address 116 or 131). Its
pickup threshold must be below the load current of the line; if necessary the pickup threshold must be
reduced. The parameters that have been changed, must be noted.
After switching the line on and off again, the direction indication must be checked: In the fault log the
messages
67N picked up
and
Ground forward
must at least be present. If the directional pickup is not
present, either the ground current connection or the displacement voltage connection is incorrect. If the
wrong direction is indicated, either the direction of load flow is from the line toward the busbar or the ground
current path has a swapped polarity. In the latter case, the connection must be rectified after the line has been
isolated and the current transformers short-circuited.
If the pickup message is missing, the measured ground (residual) current or the displacement voltage
emerged may be too small. This can be checked via operational measured values.
Important! If parameters were changed for this test, they must be returned to their original state after
completion of the test !
Mounting and Commissioning
3.3 Commissioning
348 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[polaritaetspruefung-ie-mituen-gemessen, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-27 Polarity testing for ΙN, example with current transformers configured in a Holmgreen-connec-
tion (VTs with broken delta connection -- e-n winding)
[polaritaetspruefung-ie-mituen-berechnet-211002-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-28 Polarity testing for ΙN, example with current transformers configured in a Holmgreen-connec-
tion (VTs Wye-connected)
Mounting and Commissioning
3.3 Commissioning
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 349
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Trip/Close Tests for the Configured Operating Devices
Control by Local Command
If the configured operating devices were not switched sufficiently in the hardware test already described, all
configured switching devices must be switched on and off from the device via the integrated control element.
The feedback information of the circuit breaker position injected via binary inputs is read out at the device and
compared with the actual breaker position.
For devices with graphic display this is easy to do with the control display.
The switching procedure is described in the SIPROTEC 4 System Description. The switching authority must be
set according to the command source used. The switching mode can be selected from interlocked and nonin-
terlocked switching. Please note that non-interlocked switching can be a safety hazard.
Control by Protective Functions
For OPEN-commands sent to the circuit breaker please take into consideration that if the internal or external
automatic reclosure function is used a TRIP-CLOSE test cycle is initiated.
!
DANGER
A test cycle successfully started by the automatic reclosure function can lead to the closing of the
circuit breaker !
Non-observance of the following statement will result in death, severe personal injury or substantial
property damage.
²Be fully aware that OPEN-commands sent to the circuit breaker can result in a trip-close-trip event of
the circuit breaker by an external reclosing device.
Control from a Remote Control Center
If the device is connected to a remote substation via a system interface, the corresponding switching tests
may also be checked from the substation. Please also take into consideration that the switching authority is
set in correspondence with the source of commands used.
Creating Oscillographic Recordings for Tests
General
In order to be able to test the stability of the protection during switchon procedures also, switchon trials can
also be carried out at the end. Oscillographic records obtain the maximum information about the behaviour of
the protection.
Requirements
To be able to trip an oscillographic recording, parameter Osc Fault Rec. must be configured to Enabled in
the Functional Scope. Apart from the capability of storing fault recordings via pickup of the protection func-
tion, the 7SJ80 also has the capability of initiating a measured value recording via the operator program DIGSI,
the serial interface or binary input. In the latter case, the information
>Trig.Wave.Cap.
must be allocated
to a binary input. Triggering for the oscillographic recording then occurs, for instance, via the binary input
when the protection object is energized.
Those that are externally triggered (that is, without a protective element pickup) are processed by the device
as a normal oscillographic record. For each oscillographic record a fault record is created which is given its
individual number to ensure that assignment can be made properly. However, these recordings are not
displayed in the fault indication buffer, as they are not fault events.
3.3.14
3.3.15
Mounting and Commissioning
3.3 Commissioning
350 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Triggering Oscillographic Recording
To trigger test measurement recording with DIGSI, click on Test in the left part of the window. Double click
the entry Test Wave Form in the list of the window.
[digsi-fenster-testmessschrieb-starten-260602-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-29 Start oscillographic recording with DIGSI
Oscillographic recording is started immediately. During recording, a report is given in the left part of the status
bar. Bar segments additionally indicate the progress of the procedure.
The SIGRA or the Comtrade Viewer program is required to view and analyse the oscillographic data.
Mounting and Commissioning
3.3 Commissioning
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 351
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Final Preparation of the Device
Firmly tighten all screws. Tighten all terminal screws, including those that are not used.
!
CAUTION
Inadmissable Tightening Torques
Non–observance of the following measure can result in minor personal injury or property damage.
²The tightening torques must not be exceeded as the threads and terminal chambers may otherwise be
damaged!
The settings should be checked again, if they were changed during the tests. Check if all protection, control
and auxiliary functions to be found with the configuration parameters are set correctly (Section 2.1.1 Func-
tional Scope, Functional Scope) and all desired functions are set to ON. Keep a copy of all setting values on a
PC.
The device-internal clock should be checked and set, if necessary.
The annunciation buffers are deleted under MAIN MENU → Annunciations → Set/Reset, so that future infor-
mation will only apply to actual events and states (see also SIPROTEC 4 System Description). The counters in
the switching statistics should be reset to the values that were existing prior to the testing (see also SIPROTEC
4 System Description).
Reset the counter of the operational measured values (e.g. operation counter, if available) under MAIN MENU
→ Measured Values → Reset (also see SIPROTEC 4 System Description).
Press the ESC key (several times if necessary), to return to the default display. The default display appears in
the display box (e.g. the display of operational measured values).
Clear the LEDs on the front panel of the device by pressing the LED key, so that they show only real events and
states in the future. In this context, also output relays probably memorized are reset. Pressing the LED key also
serves as a test for the LEDs on the front panel because they should all light when the button is pushed. Any
LEDs that are lit after the clearing attempt are displaying actual conditions.
The green “RUN” LED must light up, whereas the red “ERROR” must not light up.
Close the protective switches. If test switches are available, then these must be in the operating position.
The device is now ready for operation.
3.4
Mounting and Commissioning
3.4 Final Preparation of the Device
352 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Technical Data
This chapter provides the technical data of the device SIPROTEC 7SJ80 and its individual functions, including
the limit values that may not be exceeded under any circumstances. The electrical and functional data for the
maximum functional scope are followed by the mechanical specifications with dimensioned drawings.
4.1 General Device Data 354
4.2 Definite-time Overcurrent Protection 363
4.3 Inverse-time Overcurrent Protection 365
4.4 Directional Overcurrent Protection 376
4.5 Inrush Restraint 378
4.6 Dynamic Cold Load Pickup 379
4.7 1-phase Overcurrent Protection 380
4.8 Voltage Protection 381
4.9 Negative Sequence Protection (definite-time characteristic) 383
4.10 Negative Sequence Protection (inverse-time characteristics) 384
4.11 Frequency Protection 81 O/U 390
4.12 Undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection (27/Q) 391
4.13 Thermal Overload Protection 393
4.14 Ground Fault Detection (Sensitive/Insensitive) 395
4.15 Intermittent Ground Fault Protection 401
4.16 Directional intermittent ground fault protection 402
4.17 Automatic Reclosing 403
4.18 Fault Locator 404
4.19 Breaker Failure Protection 50BF 405
4.20 Flexible Protection Functions 406
4.21 Synchrocheck 25 409
4.22 User-defined Functions (CFC) 411
4.23 Auxiliary Functions 416
4.24 Switching Device Control 421
4.25 Dimensions 422
4
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 353
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
General Device Data
Analog Inputs
Current Inputs
Nominal Frequency fNom 50 Hz or 60 Hz (adjustable)
Operating range frequency
(not dependent on the nominal frequency
25 Hz to 70 Hz
Nominal current ΙNom 1 A or 5 A
Ground current, sensitive ΙNs ≤ 1.6· ΙNom linear range 1)
Burden per phase and ground path
- at ΙN = 1 A
- at ΙN = 5 A
- for sensitive ground fault detection at 1 A
- for sensitive ground fault detection at 5 A
≤ 0.05 VA
≤ 0.3 VA
≤ 0.05 VA
≤ 0.3 VA
Load capacity current path
- thermal (rms)
- dynamic (peak value)
500 A for 1 s
150 A for 10 s
20 A continuous
1250 A (half-cycle)
Load capacity input for sensitive ground fault detection ΙNs 1)
- thermal (rms)
- dynamic (peak value)
300 A for 1 s
100 A for 10 s
15 A continuous
750 A (half-cycle)
1) only in models with input for sensitive ground fault detection (see ordering data in the Appendix)
Voltage Inputs
Nominal voltage 34 V – 225 V (adjustable)
for connection of phase-to-ground voltages
34 V – 200 V (adjustable)
for connection of phase-to-phase voltages
Measuring Range 0 V to 200 V
Burden at 100 V approx. 0.005 VA
Overload capacity in the voltage path
– thermal (rms) 230 V continuous
Auxiliary voltage
Direct Voltage
Voltage supply via an integrated converter
Nominal auxiliary DC voltage VAux DC 24 V to 48 V DC 60 V to 250 V
Permissible voltage ranges DC 19 V to 60 V DC 48 V to 300 V
Overvoltage category, IEC 60255-27 III
AC ripple voltage peak to peak, IEC 60255-11 15 % of auxiliary voltage
4.1
4.1.1
4.1.2
Technical Data
4.1 General Device Data
354 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Power input Quiescent Energized
7SJ80 approx. 5 W approx. 12 W
Bridging time for failure/short-circuit, IEC 60255–
11
≥ 50 ms at V ≥ 110 V
≥ 10 ms at V < 110 V
Alternating Voltage
Voltage supply via an integrated converter
Nominal auxiliary AC voltage VAux AC 115 V AC 230 V
Permissible voltage ranges AC 92 V to 132 V AC 184 V to 265 V
Overvoltage category, IEC 60255-27 III
Power input (at AC 115 V/230 V) < 15 VA
Bridging time for failure/short-circuit ≥ 10 ms at V = 115 V/230 V
Binary Inputs and Outputs
Binary Input
Variant Quantity
7SJ801/803 3 (configurable)
7SJ802/804 7 (configurable)
7SJ807/808 11 (configurable)
Nominal direct voltage range 24 V to 250 V
Current input, energized
(independent of the control voltage)
approx. 0.4 mA
Pickup time
Response Time of the binary output after trigger signal via
binary input
approx. 3 ms
approx. 9 ms
Dropout time
Response Time of the binary output after trigger signal via
binary input
approx. 4 ms
approx. 5 ms
Secured switching thresholds (adjustable)
for nominal voltages DC 24 V to 125 V V high > DC 19 V
V low < DC 10 V
for nominal voltages DC 110 V to 250 V V high > DC 88 V
V low < DC 44 V
for nominal voltages DC 220 V and 250 V V high > DC 176 V
V low < DC 88 V
Maximum permissible voltage DC 300 V
Input interference suppression DC 220 V across 220 nF
Output Relays
Signal/command Relay, Alarm Relay
Quantity and data depending on the order variant (allocatable)
Order variant NO contact NO/NC selectable
7SJ801/803/807/808 3 2 (+ 1 life contact not allocatable)
7SJ802/804 6 2 (+ 1 life contact not allocatable)
4.1.3
Technical Data
4.1 General Device Data
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 355
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Switching Capability MAKE 1000 W / 1000 VA
Switching capability BREAK 40 W or 30 VA at L/R ≤ 40 ms
Switching voltage AC and DC 250 V
Admissible current per contact (continuous) 5 A
Permissible current per contact (close and hold) 30 A for 1 s (NO contact)
Interference supporession capacitor at the relay
outputs 2.2 nF, 250 V, ceramic
Frequency Impedance
50 Hz 1.4· 106 Ω ± 20 %
60 Hz 1.2· 106 Ω ± 20 %
Communication Interfaces
User Interface
Terminal Front side, non-isolated, USB type B socket for connecting a
personal computer
Operation from DIGSI V4.82 via USB 2.0 full speed
(PELV)
Operation with DIGSI
Transmission speed up to 12 Mbit/s max.
Bridgeable distance 5 m
Port A
Ethernet electrical for DIGSI or SICAM I/O Unit 7XV5673
Operation with DIGSI
Terminal Front case bottom, mounting location "A", RJ45 socket
100BaseT according to IEEE802.3
LED yellow: 10-/100 MBit/s (on/off)
LED green: connection/no connection (on/off)
Test voltage (PELV) 500 V; 50 Hz
Transmission speed 10/100 MBit/s
Bridgeable distance 20 m
Port B
IEC 60870-5-103 single
RS232/RS485/FO depending on the order
variant
Isolated interface for data transfer to a control center
RS232
Terminal Back case bottom, mounting location "B", 9- pin DSUB socket
Test voltage (PELV) 500 V; 50 Hz
Transmission speed min. 1,200 Bd, max. 115,000 Bd;
factory setting 9,600 Bd
Bridgeable distance 15 m
RS485
Terminal Back case bottom, mounting location "B", 9- pin DSUB socket
Test voltage (PELV) 500 V; 50 Hz
4.1.4
Technical Data
4.1 General Device Data
356 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Transmission speed min. 1,200 Bd, max. 115,000 Bd;
factory setting 9,600 Bd
Bridgeable distance max. 1 km
Fiber optic cable (FO)
FO connector type ST connector
Terminal Back case bottom, mounting location "B"
Optical wavelength λ = 820 nm
Laser Class 1 according to EN 60825-1/-2 When using glass fiber 50 μm/125 μm or glass fiber 62.5 μm/125
μm
Permissible optical signal attenuation max. 8 dB, with glass fiber 62.5/125 μm
Bridgeable distance max. 1.5 km
Character idle state Configurable; factory setting “Light off”
IEC 60870-5-103 redundant, RS485
Isolated interface for data transfer to a control center
Terminal Back case bottom, mounting location "B", RJ45 socket
Test voltage (PELV) 500 V; 50 Hz
Transmission speed min. 2,400 Bd, max. 57,600 Bd;
factory setting 19,200 Bd
Bridgeable distance max. 1 km
Profibus RS485 (DP)
Terminal Back case bottom, mounting location "B”, 9- pin DSUB socket
Test voltage (PELV) 500 V; 50 Hz
Transmission speed Up to 1.5 MBd
Bridgeable distance 1 000 m (3 300 ft) at ≤ 93.75 kBd
500 m (1 600 ft) at ≤ 187.5 kBd
200 m (660 ft) at ≤ 1.5 MBd
Profibus FO (DP)
FO connector type ST connector
Double ring
Terminal Back case bottom, mounting location "B”
Transmission speed up to 1.5 MBd
Recommended: > 500 kBd with normal casing
Optical wavelength λ = 820 nm
Laser Class 1 according to EN 60825-1/-2 When using glass fiber 50/125 μm or glass fiber 62.5/125 μm
Permissible optical signal attenuation max. 8 dB, with glass fiber 62.5/125 μm
Bridgeable distance max. 1.5 km
DNP3.0 /MODBUS RS485
Terminal Back case bottom, mounting location "B”, 9- pin DSUB socket
Test voltage (PELV) 500 V; 50 Hz
Transmission speed up to 19,200 Bd
Bridgeable distance max. 1 km
Technical Data
4.1 General Device Data
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 357
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
DNP3.0 /MODBUS FO
FO connector type ST connector transmitter/receiver
Terminal Back case bottom, mounting location "B”
Transmission speed up to 19,200 Bd
Optical wavelength λ = 820 nm
Laser Class 1 according to EN 60825-1/-2 When using glass fiber 50 μm/125 μm or glass fiber 62.5/125 μm
Permissible optical signal attenuation max. 8 dB, with glass fiber 62.5/125 μm
Bridgeable distance max. 1.5 km
Ethernet electrical (EN 100) for DIGSI, IEC61850, DNP3 TCP, Modbus TCP, IEC60870-5-104, PROFINET,
SICAM I/O Unit 7XV5673
Terminal Back case bottom, mounting location "B”,
2 x RJ45 socket
100BaseT according to IEEE802.3
Test voltage (with regard to the socket)
(PELV)
500 V; 50 Hz
Transmission speed 100 MBit/s
Bridgeable distance 20 m
Ethernet optical (EN 100) for DIGSI, IEC61850, DNP3 TCP, Modbus TCP, IEC60870-5-104, PROFINET,
SICAM I/O Unit 7XV5673
Terminal Back case bottom, mounting location "B”,
Duplex-LC, 100BaseF according to IEEE802.3
Transmission speed 100 MBit/s
Optical wavelength 1300 nm
Bridgeable distance max. 2 km (1.24 mi)
Electrical Tests
Regulations
Standards: IEC 60255
IEEE Std C37.90, see individual functions
VDE 0435
for more standards see also individual functions
Insulation Test
Standards: IEC 60255-27 and IEC 60870-2-1
Voltage test (routine test) of all circuits except
auxiliary voltage, binary inputs and communication
ports
2.5 kV, 50 Hz
Voltage test (routine test) of auxiliary voltage and
binary inputs
DC 3.5 kV
Voltage test (routine test) of isolated communica-
tion ports only (A and B)
500 V, 50 Hz
Impulse voltage test (type test) of all process
circuits (except for communication ports) against
the internal electronics
6 kV (peak value);
1.2 µs/50 µs; 0.5 J;
3 positive and 3 negative impulses at intervals of 1 s
4.1.5
Technical Data
4.1 General Device Data
358 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Impulse voltage test (type test) of all process
circuits against each other (except for communica-
tion ports) and against the PE terminal of class III
5 kV (peak value);
1.2 µs/50 µs; 0.5 J;
3 positive and 3 negative impulses at intervals of 1 s
EMC Tests for Immunity (Type Tests)
Standards: IEC 60255-26, (product standard)
IEC/EN 61000-6-2
VDE 0435
For more standards see also individual
functions
Immunity to damped oscillatory waves
IEC 60255-22-1 IEC 61000-4-18
2.5 kV (Peak); 100 kHz and 1 MHz; τ =
15 ms; 400 Surges per s; Test duration 2 s;
Ri = 200 Ω
Electrostatic discharge, Class IV
EN 61000-6-2, IEC 60255-22-2
8 kV contact discharge; 15 kV air
discharge, both polarities; 150 pF; Ri =
330 Ω, rating criteria B
Radio frequency electromagnetic field, amplitude-modulated,
Class III
EN 61000-6-2, IEC 60255-22-3
10 V/m; 80 MHz to 2.7 GHz 80 % AM;
1 kHz
Fast transient bursts, Class IV
EN 61000-6-2, IEC 60255-22-4
4 kV; 5 ns/50 ns; 5 kHz; 1 min. test length,
rating criteria B
High energy surge voltages (SURGE), Installation Class III, EN
61000-6-2, IEC 60255-22-5
Impulse: 1.2 µs/50 µs, rating criteria B
Auxiliary voltage common mode: 4 kV; 12 Ω; 9 µF
diff. mode: 1 kV; 2 Ω; 18 µF
Measuring inputs,
binary inputs and
relay outputs
common mode: 4 kV; 42 Ω; 0.5 µF
diff. mode: 1 kV; 42 Ω; 0.5 µF
Immunity to Conducted Disturbance by RF fields, injected
Current
EN 61000-6-2, IEC 60255-22-6
10 V; 150 kHz to 80 MHz; 80 % AM; 1 kHz;
27 Mhz and 68 MHz spot freq. Dwell time
> 10 sec.
Power system frequency magnetic field
EN 61000-6-2, IEC 61000-4-8
30 A/m continuous; 300 A/m and 1000
V/m for 3 s;
Radiated Electromagnetic Interference
IEEE Std C37.90.2
20 V/m; 80 MHz to 1 GHz; 80 % AM; 1 kHz
35 V/m pulsed, 50% duty cycle 1 Hz rep.
rate
Power frequency on binary input ports
IEC 60255-26, IEC 61000-4-16
Common mode Zone A and B: 300 Veff
(220 Ω, 0.47 µF)
Differential Mode Zone B: 100 Veff (100 Ω,
0.047 µF)
testet with 3.9 KΩ termination resistor
Ripple on d.c. input power port inmunity test, IEC 61000-4-17 15 % of nominal auxiliary voltage
Gradual shutdown / start-up for d.c. power supply
IEC 60255-26
Shut-down ramp: 60 s
Power off: 5 min.
Start-up ramp: 60 s
EMC Tests for Noise Emission (Type Test)
Standard: EN 61000-6-4 /01.07 + A1
EN 55011 /11.2009 + A1 class A
Technical Data
4.1 General Device Data
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 359
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Radio noise voltage to lines, only auxiliary voltage
IEC/CISPR 16-2-1
150 kHz to 30 MHz Limit Class A
Interference field strength
IEC/CISPR 16-2-3
30 MHz bis 1000 MHz Limit Class A
1 GHz to 6 GHz Limit Class A
Harmonic currents on the network lead at AC 230 V
IEC 61000-3-2
Device is to be assigned Class D (applies only to devices
with > 50 VA power consumption)
Voltage dips, interruptions and fluctuations
IEC 60255-11, IEC 61000-4-29
Tolerate Voltage interruptions < 60 ms for the nominal
auxiliary voltage.
Mechanical Tests
Vibration and Shock Stress during Steady-State Operation
Standards: IEC 60255-21 and IEC 60068
Oscillation
IEC 60255-21-1, Class 2;
IEC 60068-2-6
Sinusoidal
10 Hz to 60 Hz: ±0,075 mm amplitude; 60 Hz bis
150 Hz: 1g acceleration
frequency sweep rate 1 octave/min 20 cycles in 3
orthogonal axes.
Shock
IEC 60255-21-2, Class 1;
IEC 60068-2-27
Semi-sinusoidal
acceleration, duration 11 ms, each 3 shocks in both
directions of the 3 axes
Seismic Vibration
IEC 60255-21-3, Class 2;
IEC 60068-3-3
Sinusoidal
1 Hz to 8 Hz: ±7,5 mm amplitude (horizontal axis)
1 Hz to 8 Hz: ±3,5 mm amplitude (vertical axis)
8 Hz to 35 Hz: 2 g acceleration (horizontal axis)
8 Hz to 35 Hz: 1 g acceleration (vertical axis)
Frequency sweep 1 octave/min
1 cycle in 3 orthogonal axes
Vibration and Shock Stress during Transport
Standards: IEC 60255-21 and IEC 60068
Oscillation
IEC 60255-21-1, Class 2;
IEC 60068-2-6
Sinusoidal
5 Hz to 8 Hz: ±7.5 mm amplitude;
8 Hz to 150 Hz: 2 g acceleration
frequency sweep 1 octave/min
20 cycles in 3 orthogonal axes
Shock
IEC 60255-21-2, Class 1;
IEC 60068-2-27
Semi-sinusoidal
15 g acceleration, duration 11 ms,
each 3 shocks (in both directions of the 3 axes)
Continuous Shock
IEC 60255-21-2, Class 1;
IEC 60068-2-29
Semi-sinusoidal
10 g acceleration, duration 16 ms,
each 1000 shocks (in both directions of the 3 axes)
Climatic Stress Tests
Temperatures
Standards: IEC 60255-1, IEC 60068-2-1/2, IEC 60068-2-78, IEC
60068-2-30
4.1.6
4.1.7
Technical Data
4.1 General Device Data
360 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Type test (in acc. with IEC 60068-2-1 and -2, Test
Bd for 16 h)
–25 °C to +85 °C oder –13 °F to +185 °F
Damp heat, steady state - Test Cab
IEC 60255-1 and IEC 60068-2-78.
40 °C, 93 % RH, 56 days
Damp heat, cyclic - Test Db
IEC 60255-1 and IEC 60068-2-30
25 °C to/down 40 °C in 3 hr., > 93 % RH, dwell time 9 hr.
6 cycles
Permissible temporary operating temperature
(tested for 96 h)
–20 °C to +70 °C oder –4 °F to +158 °F (clearness of the
display may be impaired from +55 °C or +131 °F)
Recommended for permanent operation (in acc.
with IEC 60255-6)
–5 °C to +55 °C or +23 °F to +131 °F
Limit temperatures for storage –25 °C to +55 °C or –13 °F to +131 °F
Limit temperatures for transport –25 °C to +70 °C or –13 °F to +158 °F
Storage and transport with factory packaging
Humidity
Permissible humidity Mean value per year ≤ 75 % relative humidity;
on 56 days of the year up to 93 % relative humidity;
condensation must be avoided!
Siemens recommends that all devices be installed such that they are not exposed to direct sunlight, nor
subject to large fluctuations in temperature that may cause condensation to occur.
Service Conditions
The protective device is designed for use in an industrial environment and an electrical utility environment.
Proper installation procedures should be followed to ensure electromagnetic compatibility (EMC).
In addition, the following is recommended:
•All contacts and relays that operate in the same cubicle, cabinet, or relay panel as the numerical protec-
tive device should, as a rule, be equipped with suitable surge suppression components.
•For substations with operating voltages of 100 kV and above, all external cables should be shielded with
a conductive shield grounded at both ends. For substations with lower operating voltages, no special
measures are normally required.
•Do not withdraw or insert individual modules or boards while the protective device is energized. In with-
drawn condition, some components are electrostatically endangered; during handling the ESD stand-
ards (for Electrostatic Sensitive Devices) must be observed. They are not endangered when inserted into
the case.
Constructive Design
Case 7XP20
Dimensions see dimensional drawings, Section 4.25 Dimensions
Device Case Size Weight
7SJ80**-*B for panel surface mounting 1/64.5 kg (9.9 lb)
7SJ80**-*E for panel flush mounting 1/64 kg (8.8 lb)
Protection type acc. to IEC 60529
For equipment in the surface-mounting case IP 50
For equipment in flush mounting case Front IP 51
Rear IP 50
4.1.8
4.1.9
Technical Data
4.1 General Device Data
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 361
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
For operator protection IP 2x for current terminal
IP 2x for voltage terminal
Degree of pollution, IEC 60255-27 2
UL certification conditions
Output Relays DC 24 V 5 A General Purpose
DC 48 V 0,8 A General Purpose
DC 240 V 0,1 A General Purpose
AC 240 V 5 A General Purpose
AC 120 V 1/3 hp
AC 250 V 1/2 hp
B300, R300
Voltage Inputs Input voltage range 300 V
Battery Servicing of the circuitry involving the batteries and replacement of the lithium
batteries shall be done by a trained technician.
Replace Battery with VARTA or Panasonic Cat. Nos. CR 1/2 AA or BR 1/2 AA only. Use
of another Battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. See manual for safety
instructions.
Caution: The battery used in this device may present a fire or chemical burn hazard
if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble, heat above 100 °C (212 °F) or incin-
erate.
Dispose of used battery promptly. Keep away from children.
Climatic Stress Tests Surrounding air temperature tsurr: max. 70 °C (158 °F), normal opera-
tion
Design Field Wires of Control Circuits shall be separated from other circuits with respect to
the end use requirements!
Type 1 if mounted into a door or front cover of an enclosure.
4.1.10
Technical Data
4.1 General Device Data
362 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Definite-time Overcurrent Protection
Operating Modes
Three-phase Standard
Two-phase Phases A and C
Measuring Method
All elements First harmonic, rms value (true rms)
50-3, 50N-3 Instantaneous values
Setting Ranges / Increments
Pickup current 50–1, 50–2 (phases) for ΙNom = 1 A 0.10 A to 35.00 A or ∞ (disabled) Increments 0.01 A
for ΙNom = 5 A 0.50 A to 175.00 A or ∞ (disabled)
Pickup current 50–3 (phases) for ΙNom = 1 A 1.0 A to 35.00 A or ∞ (disabled)
for ΙNom = 5 A 5.0 A to 175.00 A or ∞ (disabled)
Pickup Current 50N–1, 50N–2
(ground)
for ΙNom = 1 A 0.05 A to 35.00 A or ∞ (disabled) Increments 0.01 A
for ΙNom = 5 A 0.25 A to 175.00 A or ∞ (disabled)
Pickup Current 50N–3 (ground) for ΙNom = 1 A 0.25 A to 35.00 A or ∞ (disabled)
for ΙNom = 5 A 1.25 A to 175.00 A or ∞ (disabled)
Time delays T 0.00 s to 60.00 s or ∞ (disabled) Increments 0.01 s
Dropout time delays 50 T DROP-OUT,
50N T DROP-OUT
0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments 0.01 s
Times
Pickup times (without inrush restraint, with restraint + 1 period)
First harmonic, rms value
for 2 x setting value
- for 10 x setting value
Instantaneous value
- for 2 x setting value
- for 10 x setting value
approx. 30 ms
approx. 20 ms
approx. 16 ms
approx. 16 ms
Dropout Times
First harmonic, rms value
Instantaneous value
approx. 30 ms
approx. 40 ms
Dropout Ratio
Dropout ratio for
- first harmonic, rms value
- instantaneous value
approx. 0.95 for Ι/ΙNom ≥ 0.3
approx. 0.90 for Ι/ΙNom ≥ 0.3
Tolerances
Pickup times for ΙNom = 1 A 3 % of setting value or 15 mA
for ΙNom = 5 A 3 % of setting value or 75 mA
Time delays T 1 % or 10 ms
4.2
Technical Data
4.2 Definite-time Overcurrent Protection
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 363
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Influencing Variables for Pickup and Dropout
Auxiliary DC voltage in range 0.8 ≤ VAux/VAuxNom ≤ 1,15 1 %
Temperature in range –5 °C (23 °F) ≤ Θamb ≤ 55 °C (131 °F) 0.5 %/10 K
Frequency in the range of 25 Hz to 70 Hz
Frequency in the range of 0.95 ≤ f/fNom ≤ 1.05 (fNom = 50 Hz or 60 Hz) 1 %
Frequency outside range 0.95 ≤ f/fNom ≤ 1.05 Increased tolerances
Harmonics
- up to 10 % 3rd harmonic
- up to 10 % 5th harmonic
at instantaneous value of 50-3/50N-3 elements
1 %
1 %
Increased tolerances
Transient overreaction for τ > 100 ms (with full displacement) <5 %
Technical Data
4.2 Definite-time Overcurrent Protection
364 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Inverse-time Overcurrent Protection
Operating Modes
Three-phase Standard
Two-phase Phases A and C
voltage-independent,
voltage-controlled,
voltage-dependent
Measuring Method
All elements First harmonic, rms value (true rms)
Setting Ranges / Increments
Pickup current 51 (phases)
(Phasen)
for ΙN = 1 A 0.10 A to 4.00 A Increments
0.01 A
for ΙN = 5 A 0.50 A to 20.00 A
Pickup current 51N ground for ΙN = 1 A 0.05 A to 4.00 A Increments
0.01 A
for ΙN = 5 A 0.25 A to 20.00 A
Time multiplier T for 51, 51N for IEC-Kennlinien 0.05 s to 3.20 s or ∞ (disabled) Increments
0.01 s
Time multiplier D for 51, 51N for ANSI-Kennli-
nien
0.50 s to 15.00 s or ∞ (disabled) Increments
0.01 s
Undervoltage threshold 51V V< for for release
of 51
10.0 V to 125.0 V Increments 0.1V
Trip Time Curves acc. to IEC
Acc. to IEC 60255-151 or BS 142, Section 3.5.2 (see also Figure 4-1 and Figure 4-2)
The tripping times for Ι/Ιp ≥ 20 are identical with those for Ι/Ιp = 20
For zero sequence current, read 3Ι0p instead of Ιp and T3Ι0p instead of Tp
for ground fault, read ΙEp instead of Ιp and TΙEp instead of Tp
Pickup threshold approx. 1.10 · Ιp
4.3
Technical Data
4.3 Inverse-time Overcurrent Protection
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 365
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Dropout Time Characteristics with Disk Emulation acc. to IEC
Acc. to IEC 60255-151 or BS 142, Section 3.5.2 (see also Figure 4-1 and Figure 4-2)
The dropout time curves apply to (Ι/Ιp) ≤ 0.90
For zero sequence current, read 3Ι0p instead of Ιp and T3Ι0p instead of Tp;
for ground fault, read ΙEp instead of Ιp and TΙEp instead of Tp
Dropout Setting
IEC without Disk Emulation approx. 1.05 · setting value Ιp for Ιp/ΙN ≥ 0.3, this corresponds to
approx. 0.95 · pickup value
Reset of the Integration Timer
IEC with Disk Emulation approx. 0.90 · setting value Ιp
Tolerances
Pickup/dropout
thresholdsΙp, ΙEp
for ΙNom = 1 A 3 % of setting value or 15 mA
for ΙNom = 5 A 3 % of setting value or 75 mA
Trip time for 2 ≤ Ι/Ιp ≤ 20 5 % of reference (calculated) value + 2 % current tolerance, or
30 ms
Dropout time for Ι/Ιp ≤ 0.90 5 % of reference (calculated) value + 2 % current tolerance, or
30 ms
Influencing Variables for Pickup and Dropout
Auxiliary DC voltage in range 0.8 ≤ VAux/VAuxNom ≤ 1,15 1 %
Temperature in range –5 °C (23 °F) ≤ Θamb ≤ 55 °C (131 °F) 0.5 %/10 K
Frequency in the range of 25 Hz to 70 Hz
Frequency in the range of 0.95 ≤ f/fNom ≤ 1.05 (fNom = 50 Hz or 60 Hz) 1 %
Frequency outside range 0.95 ≤ f/fNom ≤ 1.05 Increased tolerances
Technical Data
4.3 Inverse-time Overcurrent Protection
366 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Harmonics
- up to 10 % 3rd harmonic
- up to 10 % 5th harmonic
at instantaneous value of 50-3/50N-3 elements
1 %
1 %
Increased tolerances
Transient overreaction for τ > 100 ms (with full displacement) <5 %
[ausloese-rueckfall-kennli-amz-iec-norm-stark-170502-wlk, 1, en_US]
Figure 4-1 Dropout time and trip time curves of the inverse time overcurrent protection, acc. to IEC
Technical Data
4.3 Inverse-time Overcurrent Protection
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 367
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[ausl-rueckfall-kennl-amz-iec-extrem-langzeit-170502-wlk, 1, en_US]
Figure 4-2 Dropout time and trip time curves of the inverse time overcurrent protection, acc. to IEC
Technical Data
4.3 Inverse-time Overcurrent Protection
368 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Trip Time Curves acc. to ANSI
Acc. to ANSI/IEEE (see also Figure 4-3 bis Figure 4-6)
The tripping times for Ι/Ιp ≥ 20 are identical with those for Ι/Ιp = 20
For zero sequence current read 3Ι0p instead of Ιp and T3Ι0p instead of Tp;
for ground fault read ΙEp instead of Ιp and TΙEp instead of Tp
Pickup threshold ca. 1.10 · Ιp
Dropout Time Characteristics with Disk Emulation acc. to ANSI/IEEE
Acc. to ANSI/IEEE (see also Figure 4-3 bis Figure 4-6)
Technical Data
4.3 Inverse-time Overcurrent Protection
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 369
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
The dropout time curves apply to (Ι/Ιp) ≤ 0.90
For zero sequence current read 3Ι0p instead of Ιp and T3Ι0p instead of Tp;
for ground fault read ΙEp instead of Ιp and TΙEp instead of Tp
Dropout Setting
ANSI without Disk Emulation approx. 1.05 · setting value Ιp for Ιp/ΙN ≥ 0.3; corresponds to approx.
0.95 · pickup value
Reset of the Integration Timer
ANSI with Disk Emulation approx. 0.90 · setting value Ιp
Tolerances
Pickup and Dropout
Thresholds Ιp, ΙEp
for ΙNom = 1 A 3 % of setting value or 15 mA
for ΙNom = 5 A 3 % of setting value or 75 mA
Trip Time for 2 ≤ Ι/Ιp ≤ 20 5 % of reference (calculated) value + 2 % current tolerance, or 30
ms
Dropout Time for Ι/Ιp ≤ 0.90 5 % of reference (calculated) value + 2 % current tolerance, or 30
ms
Influencing Variables for Pickup and Dropout
Auxiliary DC voltage in range 0.8 ≤ VAux/VAuxNom ≤ 1,15 1 %
Technical Data
4.3 Inverse-time Overcurrent Protection
370 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Temperature in range –5 °C (23 °F) ≤ Θamb ≤ 55 °C (131 °F) 0.5 %/10 K
Frequency in the range of 25 Hz to 70 Hz
Frequency in the range of 0.95 ≤ f/fNom ≤ 1.05 (fNom = 50 Hz or 60 Hz) 1 %
Frequency outside range 0.95 ≤ f/fNom ≤ 1.05 Increased tolerances
Harmonics
- up to 10 % 3rd harmonic
- up to 10 % 5th harmonic
at instantaneous value of 50-3/50N-3 elements
1 %
1 %
Increased tolerances
Transient overreaction for τ > 100 ms (with full displacement) <5 %
Technical Data
4.3 Inverse-time Overcurrent Protection
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 371
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[ausl-rueckfallkennl-amz-ansi-inv-short-170502-wlk, 1, en_US]
Figure 4-3 Dropout time and trip time curves of the inverse time overcurrent protection, acc. to ANSI/IEEE
Technical Data
4.3 Inverse-time Overcurrent Protection
372 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[ausl-rueckfallkennl-amz-ansi-lang-maessig-170502-wlk, 1, en_US]
Figure 4-4 Dropout time and trip time curves of the inverse time overcurrent protection, acc. to ANSI/IEEE
Technical Data
4.3 Inverse-time Overcurrent Protection
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 373
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[ausloese-rueckfallkennl-ansi-amz-stark-extrem-170502-wlk, 1, en_US]
Figure 4-5 Dropout time and trip time curves of the inverse time overcurrent protection, acc. to ANSI/IEEE
Technical Data
4.3 Inverse-time Overcurrent Protection
374 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[ausloese-rueckfall-amz-ansi-gleichmaessig-170502-wlk, 1, en_US]
Figure 4-6 Dropout time and trip time curves of the inverse time overcurrent protection, acc. to ANSI/IEEE
Technical Data
4.3 Inverse-time Overcurrent Protection
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 375
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Directional Overcurrent Protection
Time Overcurrent Elements
The same specifications and characteristics apply as for non-directional time overcurrent protection (see
previous Sections).
Determination of Direction
Moreover, the following data apply to direction determination:
For Phase Faults
Polarization With cross-polarized voltages;
with voltage memory 2 s
Forward Range Vref,rot ± 86°
Rotation of the reference voltage Vref,rot –180° to +180°
Increments 1°
Dropout difference 3°
Directional sensitivity Unlimited for single and two phase faults
For three phase faults, dynamically unlimited, steady-
state
approx. 7V phase-to-phase
For Ground Faults
Polarization with zero sequence quantities 3V0, 3Ι0
Forward Range Vref,rot ± 86°
Rotation of the reference voltage Vref,ot –180° to +180°
Increments 1°
Dropout difference 3°
Directional Sensitivity VN ≈ 2.5 V displacement voltage, measured
3V0 ≈ 5 V displacement voltage, calculated
Polarization with negative sequence quantities 3V2, 3Ι2
Forward Range Vref,rot ± 86°
Rotation of the reference voltage Vref,rot –180° to +180°
Increments 1°
Dropout difference 3°
Directional Sensitivity 3V2 ≈ 5 V negative sequence voltage
3Ι2 ≈ 45 mA negative sequence current with ΙNom = 1 A
3Ι2 ≈ 225 mA negative sequence current with ΙNom =
5 A
Times
Pickup times (without inrush restraint, with restraint + 1 period)
50-1, 50-2, 50-3, 50N-1, 50N-2, 50N-3
- for 2 x setting value
- for 10 x setting value
approx. 45 ms
approx. 40 ms
4.4
Technical Data
4.4 Directional Overcurrent Protection
376 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Dropout Times
50-1, 50-2, 50-3, 50N-1, 50N-2, 50N-3 approx. 40 ms
Tolerances
Angle faults for phase and ground faults ±1° electrical
Influencing Variables
Frequency Influence
– With no memory voltage approx 1° in range 25 Hz to 50 Hz
Technical Data
4.4 Directional Overcurrent Protection
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 377
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Inrush Restraint
Controlled Elements
Time Overcurrent Elements 50-1, 50N-1, 51, 51N, 67-1, 67N-1
Setting Ranges / Increments
Stabilization factor Ι2f/Ι10 % to 45 % Increments 1 %
Functional Limits
Lower Function Limit Phases for ΙNom = 1 A at least one phase current (50 Hz and 100 Hz) ≥ 50 mA
for ΙNom = 5 A at least one phase current (50 Hz and 100 Hz) ≥ 125 mA
Lower Function Limit ground for ΙNom = 1 A Ground current (50 Hz and 100 Hz) ≥ 50 mA
for ΙNom = 5 A Ground current (50 Hz and 100 Hz) ≥ 125 mA
Upper Function Limit,
configurable
for ΙNom = 1 A 0.30 A to 25.00 A Increments 0.01 A
for ΙNom = 5 A 1.50 A to 125.00 A Increments 0.01 A
Crossblock
Crossblock ΙA, ΙB, ΙCON/OFF
4.5
Technical Data
4.5 Inrush Restraint
378 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Dynamic Cold Load Pickup
Timed Changeover of Settings
Controlled functions Directional and non-directional time overcurrent protection (separated
acc. to phases and ground)
Initiation criteria Current Criteria "BkrClosed I MIN"
Interrogation of the circuit breaker position
Automatic reclosing function ready
3 time elements
Time control 3 time elements
(TCB Open., TActive, TStop)
Current control Current threshold "BkrClosed I MIN" (reset on current falling below
threshold: monitoring with timer)
Setting Ranges / Increments
Current Control for ΙN = 1 A 0.04 A to 1.00 A Increments
0.01 A
for ΙN = 5 A 0.20 A to 5.00 A
Time Until Changeover To Dynamic Settings TCB Open 0 s to 21600 s (= 6 h) Increments 1 s
Period Dynamic Settings are Effective After a Reclo-
sure TActive
1 s to 21600 s (= 6 h) Increments 1 s
Fast Reset Time TStop 1 s to 600 s (= 10 min) or ∞ (fast
reset inactive)
Increments 1 s
Dynamic Settings of Pickup Currents and Time
Delays or Time Multipliers
Adjustable within the same ranges and with the same
increments as the directional and non-directional time
overcurrent protection
4.6
Technical Data
4.6 Dynamic Cold Load Pickup
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 379
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
1-phase Overcurrent Protection
Current Elements
High-set current elements
50-2
for ΙNom = 1 A 0.001 A to 1.6 A or ∞ (element disabled) Increments 0.001 A
for ΙNom = 5 A 0.005 A to 8 A or ∞ (element disabled)
T50-2 0.00 s to 60.00 s or ∞ (no trip) Increments 0.01 s
Definite time current
element 50-1
for ΙNom = 1 A 0.001 A to 1.6 A or ∞ (element disabled) Increments 0.001 A
for ΙNom = 5 A 0.005 A to 8 A or ∞ (element disabled)
T50-1 0.00 s to 60.00 s or ∞ (no trip) Increments 0.01 s
Operating Times
Pickup/Dropout Times
Frequency Pickup Time 50 Hz 60 Hz
minimum 14 ms 13 ms
maximum ≤ 35 ms ≤ 35 ms
Dropout time approx. 25 ms 22 ms
Dropout Ratios
Current Elements approx 0.95 for Ι/ΙNom ≥ 0.5
Tolerances
Currents 5 % of setting value or 1 mA
Times 1 % of setting value or 10 ms
Influencing Variables for Pickup Values
Auxiliary DC voltage in range 0.8 ≤ VAux/VAuxNom ≤ 1.15 1 %
Temperature in range –5 °C (23 °F) ≤ Θamb ≤ 55 °C (131 °F) 0.5 %/10 K
Frequency in the range of 25 Hz to 70 Hz
Frequency in the range of 0.95 ≤ f/fNom ≤ 1.05 (fNom = 50 Hz or 60 Hz) 1 %
Frequency outside range 0.95 ≤ f/fNom ≤ 1.05 Increased tolerances
Harmonics
- up to 10 % 3rd harmonic
- up to 10 % 5th harmonic
1 %
1 %
4.7
Technical Data
4.7 1-phase Overcurrent Protection
380 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Voltage Protection
Setting Ranges / Increments
Undervoltages 27-1, 27-2
Measured quantity used
with three-phase connection
- Positive sequence system of voltages
- Smallest phase-to-phase voltages
- Smallest phase-to-ground voltage
Measured quantity used with single-phase
connection
Single-phase phase-to-ground or phase-to-phase voltage
Connection of phase-to-ground voltages
- Bewertung Leiter-ground voltages
- Evaluation of phase-to-phase voltages
- Evaluation of positive-sequence system
10 V to 120 V
10 V to 210 V
10 V to 210 V
Increment 1 V
Increment 1 V
Increment 1 V
Connection of phase-to-phase voltages 10 V to 120 V Increment 1 V
Connection: single-phase 10 V to 120 V Increment 1 V
Dropout ratio r for 27-1, 27-21) 1.01 to 3.00 Increment 0.01
Dropout threshold for
(r · 27-1) or (r · 27-2)
max.130 V for phase-to-phase voltage
max. 225 V for phase-to-ground voltage
Minimum hysteresis 0.6 V
Time delays 27-1 DELAY, 27-2 DELAY 0.00 s to 100.00 s oder ∞
(disabled)
Increment 0.01 s
Current criterion BkrClosed I
MIN
for ΙN = 1 A 0.04 A to 1.00 A Increment 0.01 A
for ΙN = 5 A 0.20 A to 5.00 A
Overvoltages 59-1, 59-2
Measured quantity used
with three-phase connection
- Positive sequence system of the voltages
- Negative sequence system of the voltages
- Largest phase-to-phase voltage
- Largest phase-to-ground voltage
Measured quantity used
with single-phase connection
Connected single-phase phase-togroundvoltage or
phase-to-phase voltage
Connection of phase-to-ground voltages
- Evaluation of phase-to-ground voltages
- Evaluation of phase-to-phase voltages
- Evaluation of positive-sequence system
- Evaluation of negative-sequence system
20 V to 150 V
20 V to 260 V
20 V to 150 V
2 V to 150 V
Increment 1 V
Increment 1 V
Increment 1 V
Increment 1 V
Connection of phase-to-phase voltages
- Evaluation of phase-to-phase voltages
- Evaluation of positive-sequence system
- Evaluation of negative-sequence system
20 V to 150 V
20 V to 150 V
2 V to 150 V
Increment 1 V
Increment 1 V
Increment 1 V
Connection: single-phase 20 V to 150 V Increment 1 V
Dropout ratio r for 59-1, 59-21) 0.90 to 0.99 Increment 0.01 V
Dropout threshold for
(r · 59-1) or (r · 59-2)
max. 150 V for phase-to-phase voltage
max. 260 V for phase-to-ground voltage
Minimum hysteresis 0.6 V
Time delays 59-1 DELAY, 59-2 DELAY 0.00 s to 100.00 s or ∞ (disa-
bled)
Increment 0.01 s
4.8
Technical Data
4.8 Voltage Protection
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 381
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
1) r = Vdropout/Vpickup
Times
Pickup Times
Undervoltage 27-1, 27-2, 27-1 V1, 27-2 V1
- Overvoltage 59-1, 59-2
- Overvoltage 59-1 V1, 59-2 V1, 59-1 V2 , 59-2 V2
approx. 50 ms
approx. 50 ms
approx. 60 ms
Dropout Times
- Undervoltage 27-1, 27-2, 27-1 V1, 27-2 V1
- Overvoltage 59-1, 59-2
- Overvoltage 59-1 V1, 59-2 V1, 59-1 V2 , 59-2 V2
approx. 50 ms
approx. 50 ms
approx. 60 ms
Tolerances
Pickup Voltage Limits 3 % of setting value or 1 V
Delay times T 1 % of setting value or. 10 ms
Influencing Variables
Auxiliary DC voltage in range 0.8 ≤ VAux/VAuxNom ≤ 1,15 1 %
Temperature in range –5 °C (23 °F) ≤ Θamb ≤ 55 °C (131 °F) 0.5 %/10 K
Frequency in the range of 25 Hz to 70 Hz
Frequency in the range of 0.95 ≤ f/fNom ≤ 1.05 (fNom = 50 Hz or 60 Hz) 1 %
Frequency outside range 0.95 ≤ f/fNom ≤ 1.05 Increased tolerances
Harmonics
- up to 10 % 3rd harmonic
- up to 10 % 5th harmonic
1 %
1 %
Technical Data
4.8 Voltage Protection
382 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Negative Sequence Protection (definite-time characteristic)
Setting Ranges / Increments
Unbalanced load tripping element
46-1.46-2
for ΙN = 1 A 0.05 A to 3.00 A or ∞ (disabled) Increments 0.01 A
for ΙN = 5 A 0.25 A to 15.00 A or ∞ (disabled)
Delay Times 46-1, 46-2 0.00 s to 60.00 s or ∞ (disabled) Increments 0.01 s
Dropout Delay Times 46 T DROP-OUT 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments 0.01 s
Functional Limit
Functional Limit for ΙNom = 1 A all phase currents ≤ 10 A
for ΙNom = 5 A all phase currents ≤ 50 A
for ΙNom = 1 A one phase current ≥ 0.1 A
for ΙNom = 5 A one phase current ≥ 0.5 A
Times
Pickup Times
Dropout Times
approx. 35 ms
approx. 35 ms
Dropout Ratio
Characteristic 46-1, 46-2 approx. 0.95 for Ι2/ΙNom ≥ 0,3
Tolerances
Pickup values 46-1,
46-2
ΙNom = 1 A 3 % of setting value or 10 mA
ΙNom = 5 A 3 % of setting value or 50 mA
Time Delays 5 % of reference (calculated) value + 2 % current tolerance, or 30 ms
Influencing Variables for Pickup Values
Auxiliary DC voltage in range 0.8 ≤ VAux/VAuxNom ≤ 1,15 1 %
Temperature in range –5 °C (23 °F) ≤ Θamb ≤ 55 °C (131 °F) 0.5 %/10 K
Frequency in the range of 25 Hz to 70 Hz
Frequency in the range of 0.95 ≤ f/fNom ≤ 1.05 (fNom = 50 Hz or 60 Hz) 1 %
Frequency outside range 0.95 ≤ f/fNom ≤ 1.05 Increased tolerances
Harmonics
- up to 10 % 3rd harmonic
- up to 10 % 5th harmonic
1 %
1 %
Transient overreaction for τ > 100 ms (with full displacement) <5 %
4.9
Technical Data
4.9 Negative Sequence Protection (definite-time characteristic)
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 383
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Negative Sequence Protection (inverse-time characteristics)
Setting Ranges / Increments
Pickup value 46-TOC (Ι2p) for ΙNom = 1 A 0.05 A to 2.00 A Increments 0.01 A
for ΙNom = 5 A 0.25 A to 10.00 A
Time Multiplier TI2p (IEC) 0.05 s to 3.20 s or ∞ (disabled) Increments 0.01 s
Time Multiplier DI2p (ANSI) 0.50 s to 15.00 s or ∞ (disabled) Increments 0.01 s
Functional Limit
Functional Limit for ΙNom = 1 A all phase currents ≤ 10 A
for ΙNom = 5 A all phase currents ≤ 50 A
Trip Time Curves acc. to IEC
See also Figure 4-7
The trip times for Ι2/Ι2p ≥ 20 are identical to those for Ι2/Ι2p = 20
Pickup Threshold approx. 1.10· Ι2p
4.10
Technical Data
4.10 Negative Sequence Protection (inverse-time characteristics)
384 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Trip Time Curves acc. to ANSI
It can be selected one of the represented trip time characteristic curves in Figure 4-8 and Figure 4-9 each on
the right side of the figure.
The trip times for Ι2/Ι2p ≥ 20 are identical to those for Ι2/Ι2p = 20
Pickup Threshold approx. 1.10· Ι2p
Toleranzen
Pickup thresholdΙ2p ΙNom = 1 A 3 % of setting value or 15 mA
ΙNom = 5 A 3 % of setting value or 75 mA
Time for 2 ≤ Ι/Ι2p ≤ 20 5 % of reference (calculated) value + 2 % current tolerance, or 30 ms
Dropout Time Curves with Disk Emulation acc. to ANSI
Representation of the possible dropout time curves, see Figure 4-8 and Figure 4-9 each on the left side of the
figure
Technical Data
4.10 Negative Sequence Protection (inverse-time characteristics)
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 385
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
The dropout time constants apply to (Ι2/Ι2p) ≤ 0.90
Dropout Value
IEC and ANSI (without Disk Emulation) approx. 1.05 Ι2p, setting value, which is approx. 0.95 · pickup
threshold Ι2
ANSI with Disk Emulation approx. 0.90 Ι2p setting value
Tolerances
Dropout value Ι2p ΙNom = 1 A 3 % of setting value or 15 mA
ΙNom = 5 A 3 % of setting value or 75 mA
Time for 2 ≤ Ι/Ι2p ≤ 0.90 5 % of reference (calculated) value + 2 % current tolerance, or 30 ms
Influencing Variables for Pickup Values
Auxiliary DC voltage in range 0.8 ≤ VAux/VAuxNom ≤ 1,15 1 %
Temperature in range –5 °C (23 °F) ≤ Θamb ≤ 55 °C (131 °F) 0.5 %/10 K
Frequency in the range of 25 Hz to 70 Hz
Frequency in the range of 0.95 ≤ f/fNom ≤ 1.05 (fNom = 50 Hz or 60 Hz) 1 %
Frequency outside range 0.95 ≤ f/fNom ≤ 1.05 Increased tolerances
Harmonics
- up to 10 % 3rd harmonic
- up to 10 % 5th harmonic
1 %
1 %
Transient overreaction for τ > 100 ms (with full displacement) <5 %
Technical Data
4.10 Negative Sequence Protection (inverse-time characteristics)
386 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[ausloese-iec-schieflast-inv-stark-extr-170502-wlk, 1, en_US]
Figure 4-7 Trip time characteristics of the inverse time negative sequence element 46-TOC, acc. to IEC
Technical Data
4.10 Negative Sequence Protection (inverse-time characteristics)
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 387
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[ausloese-rueckfall-ansi-schieflast-inv-mod-170502-wlk, 1, en_US]
Figure 4-8 Dropout time and trip time characteristics of the inverse time unbalanced load stage, acc. to
ANSI
Technical Data
4.10 Negative Sequence Protection (inverse-time characteristics)
388 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[ausl-rueckfall-schieflast-ansi-stark-extrem-170502-wlk, 1, en_US]
Figure 4-9 Dropout time and trip time characteristics of the inverse time unbalanced load stage, acc. to
ANSI
Technical Data
4.10 Negative Sequence Protection (inverse-time characteristics)
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 389
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Frequency Protection 81 O/U
Setting Ranges / Increments
Setting Ranges / Increments 4; each can be set to f> or f<
Pickup values f> or f< for fNom = 50 Hz 40.00 Hz to 60.00 Hz Increments 0.01 Hz
Pickup values f> or f< for fNom = 60 Hz 50.00 Hz to 70.00 Hz Increments 0.01 Hz
Dropout threshold
= |pickup threshold - dropout threshold|
0.02 Hz to 1.00 Hz Increments 0.01 Hz
Time delays T 0.00 s to 100.00 s or ∞ (disabled) Increments 0.01 s
Undervoltage blocking
with three-phase connection:
Positive sequence component V1
with single-phase connection ("Vphn, Vsyn"):
single-phase Phase-to-ground voltage
10 V to 150 V Increments 1 V
Times
Pickup times f>, f< approx. 100 ms at fNom = 50 Hz
approx. 80 ms at fNom = 60 Hz
Dropout times f>, f< approx. 100 ms at fNom = 50 Hz
approx. 80 ms at fNom = 60 Hz
Dropout Difference
Δf = Ι pickup value - dropout value Ι0.02 Hz to 1 Hz
Dropout Ratio
Dropout Ratio for Undervoltage Blocking approx. 1.05
Tolerances
Pickup frequencies 81/O or 81U
Undervoltage blocking
Time delays 81/O or 81/U
≤ 5 mHz Tolerance (at V = VNom, fNom - 0.5 Hz < f < fNom + 0.5 Hz)
< 15 mHz Tolerance (at V = VNom, fNom - 5 Hz < f < fN - 0.5 Hz)
< 15 mHz Tolerance (at V = VNom, fNom + 0.5 Hz < f < fNom + 5 Hz)
3 % of setting value or 1 V
1 % of setting value or 10 ms
Influencing Variables
Power supply direct voltage in range 0.8 ≤ VPS/VPSNom ≤ 1.15 1 %
Temperature in range 23 °F (-5 °C) ≤ Θamb ≤ 131 °F (55 °C) 0,5 %/10 K
Harmonics
- up to 10 % 3rd harmonic
- up to 10 % 5th harmonic
1 %
1 %
4.11
Technical Data
4.11 Frequency Protection 81 O/U
390 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection (27/Q)
Measured Values / Modes of Operation
3-phase Ι1, V, Q,
Measuring method for Ι, V Fundamental wave
Pickup when Exceeding threshold value or
falling below threshold value
Setting Ranges / Increments
Pickup thresholds:
Current Ι1for ΙNom = 1 A 0.02 to 0.20 A Increments 0.01 A
for ΙNom = 5 A 0.10 to 1.00 A
Voltage V 10.0 to 210.00 V Increments 0.1 V
Power Q for ΙNom = 1 A 1.0 to 100 VAR Increments 0.01 VAR
for ΙNom = 5 A 5.0 to 500 VAR
Tripping delay time 0.00 to 60.00 s Increments 0.01 s
Release delay time 0.00 to 3600.00 s Increments 0.01 s
Dropout delay 0.00 to 60.00 s Increments 0.01 s
Function Limits
Power measurement 3-phase for ΙNom = 1 A Positive sequence system current > 0.03 A
for ΙNom = 5 A Positive sequence system current > 0.15 A
Times
Pickup times:
QU protection
typical
maximum (small signals and thresholds)
approx. 120 ms
approx. 350 ms
Binary input approx. 20 ms
Dropout times:
QU protection
typical
maximum
< 50 ms
< 350 ms
Binary input < 10 ms
Tolerances
Pickup thresholds:
Current for ΙNom = 1 A 1% of set value or 10 mA at ΙNom ≥ 0.03 A
2% of set value or 20 mA bei ΙNom < 0.03 A
for ΙNom = 5 A 1% of set value or 50 mA at ΙNom ≥ 0.25 A
2% of set value or 100 mA at ΙNom <0.25 A
Current (symmetrical compo-
nents)
for ΙNom = 1 A 2% of set value or 20 mA
for ΙNom = 5 A 2% of set value or 100 mA
Voltage 1% of set value or 0.1 V
4.12
Technical Data
4.12 Undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection (27/Q)
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 391
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Voltage (symmetrical components) 2% of set value or 0.2 V
Power 1% of set value or 0.3 VAR
Times 1% of set value or 10 ms
Influencing Variables for Pickup Values
Auxiliary direct voltage in the range from 0.8 ≤ VPS/VPSNom ≤ 1.15 1 %
Temperature in the range from 23.00 °F (-5 °C) ≤ Θamb ≤ 131.00 °F (55 °C) 0.5 %/10 K
Frequency in the range from 25 Hz to 70 Hz 1 %
Harmonics
- up to 10 % 3rd harmonic
- up to 10 % 5th harmonic
1 %
1 %
Technical Data
4.12 Undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection (27/Q)
392 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Thermal Overload Protection
Setting ranges / increments
Factor k according to IEC 60255-8 0.10 to 4.00 Increments 0.01
Time constant τth 1.0 min to 999.9 min Increments 0.1 min
Current alarm element ΙAlarm for ΙNom =
1 A
0.10 A to 4.00 A Increments 0.01 A
for ΙNom =
5 A
0.50 A to 20.00 A
Extension with machine at rest kτ factor 1.0 to 10.0 relative to the time
constant for the machine
running
Increments 0.1
Dropout time (emergency start) TEmergency 10 s to 15000 s Increments 1 s
Trip Characteristic
Formula for primary values:
Trip Characteristic curve for Ι / (k ⋅ ΙNom) ≤8
with
t Trip time in minutes
τth Heating-up time constant
ΙnActual load current
Ιpre Preload current
k Setting factor per IEC 60255-8
ΙNom Nominal current for the protected object
Dropout Ratios
Θ/ΘTrip
Θ/ΘAlarm
Ι/ΙAlarm
Drops out with ΘAlarm
approx. 0.99
approx. 0.97
Tolerances
Referring to k · ΙNom
Referring to Trip Time
2 % or 10 mA for ΙNom = 1 A, or 50 mA für ΙNom = 5 A,
2 % class according to IEC 60255-8
3 % or 1 s for Ι/(k ·ΙNom) > 1,25;
3 % class according to IEC 60255-8
Influencing Variables Referring to k · ΙNom
Auxiliary DC voltage in range 0.8 ≤ VAux/VAuxNom ≤ 1,15 1 %
Temperature in range –5 °C (23 °F) ≤ Θamb ≤ 55 °C (131 °F) 0.5 %/10 K
4.13
Technical Data
4.13 Thermal Overload Protection
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 393
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Frequency in the range of 25 Hz to 70 Hz
Frequency in the range of 0.95 ≤ f/fNom ≤ 1.05 (fNom = 50 Hz or 60 Hz) 1 %
Frequency outside range 0.95 ≤ f/fNom ≤ 1.05 Increased tolerances
[ausloesekennlinie-ueberlast-1111203-he, 1, en_US]
Figure 4-10 Trip time curves for the thermal overload protection (49)
Technical Data
4.13 Thermal Overload Protection
394 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Ground Fault Detection (Sensitive/Insensitive)
Displacement Voltage Pickup for All Types of Ground Faults
Displacement voltage, measured V0> 1.8 V to 200.0 V or Increments
0.1 V
Displacement voltage, calculated 3V0> 10.0 V to 225.0 V Increments
0.1 V
Pickup delay T-DELAY Pickup 0 s to 320.00 s or ∞ Increments
0.01 s
Additional tripping delay
64-1 DELAY
0.10 s to 40000.00 s or ∞ (disabled) Increments
0.01 s
Operating time approx. 50 ms
Dropout value 0.95 or (pickup value – 0.6 V)
Measurement tolerance
V0> (measured)
3V0> (calculated)
3 % of setting value or 0.3 V
3 % of setting value or 3 V
Operating time tolerances 1 % of setting value or 10 ms
Phase Detection for Ground Faults on an Ungrounded System
Measuring Principle Voltage measurement (phase-ground)
VPHASE MIN (Ground Fault Phase) 10 V to 100 V Increments 1 V
VPHASE MAX (Healthy Phase) 10 V to 100 V Increments 1 V
Measurement Tolerance acc. to VDE 0435, Part
303
3 % of setting value or 1 V
Ground Fault Pickup for All Types of Ground Faults (Definite Time Characteristic)
Pickup current 50Ns-2 PICKUP, 50Ns-1 PICKUP
for sensitive 1 A transformer
for sensitive 5 A transformer
for normal 1 A transformer
for normal 5 A transformer
0.001 A to 1.600 A
0.005 A to 8.000 A
0.05 A to 35.00 A
0.25 A to 175.00 A
Increments 0.001 A
Increments 0.005 A
Increments 0.01 A
Increments 0.05 A
Time delay50Ns-2 DELAY, 50Ns-1 DELAY 0.00 s to 320.00 s or ∞
(disabled)
Increments 0.01 s
Dropout time delay 50Ns T DROP-OUT 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments 0.01 s
Operating time ≤ 50 ms (non-directional)
≤ 50 ms (directional)
Dropout ratio approx. 0.95 for ΙNs > 50 mA
Measurement tolerance
sensitive for ΙNom = 1 A 3 % of setting value or 1 mA
ΙNom = 5 A 3 % of setting value or 5 mA
for setting values < 10 mA ca. 20 %
non-sensitive for ΙNom = 1 A 3 % of setting value or 15 mA
for ΙNom = 5 A 3 % of setting value or 75 mA
Operating time tolerance 1 % of setting value or 10 ms
4.14
Technical Data
4.14 Ground Fault Detection (Sensitive/Insensitive)
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 395
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Ground Fault Pickup for All Types of Ground Faults (Inverse Time Characteristic)
User-defined characteristic (defined by a maximum of 20 value pairs of current and time delay in direction
measurement method "cos phi and sin phi")
Pickup current 51Ns
for sensitive 1 A transformer
for sensitive 5 A transformer
for normal 1 A transformer
for normal 5 A transformer
0.001 A to 1.400 A
0.005 A to 7.000 A
0.05 A to 4.00 A
0.25 A to 20.00 A
Increments 0.001 A
Increments 0.005 A
Increments 0.01 A
Increments 0.05 A
Time multiplier T51Ns 0.10 s to 4.00 s or ∞ (disabled) Increments 0.01 s
Pickup threshold approx. 1.10 · Ι51Ns
Dropout ratio approx. 1.05 · Ι51Ns for Ι51Ns > 50 mA
Measurement tolerance
sensitive for ΙNom = 1 A 3 % of setting value or 1 mA
for ΙNom = 5 A 3 % of setting value or 5 mA
for setting values < 10 mA ca. 20 %
non-sensitive for ΙNom = 1 A 3 % of setting value or 15 mA
for ΙNom = 5 A 3 % of setting value or 75 mA
Operating time tolerance in linear range 7 % of reference (calculated) value for
2 ≤ Ι/Ι51Ns ≤ 20 + 2 % current tolerance, or 70 ms
Influencing Variables
Auxiliary DC voltage in range 0.8 ≤ VAux/VAuxNom ≤ 1.15 1 %
Temperature in range –5 °C (23 °F) ≤ Θamb ≤ 55 °C (131 °F) 0.5 %/10 K
Frequency in the range of 25 Hz to 70 Hz
Frequency in the range of 0.95 ≤ f/fNom ≤ 1.05 (fNom = 50 Hz or 60 Hz) 1 %
Frequency outside range 0.95 ≤ f/fNom ≤ 1.05 Increased tolerances
Harmonics
- up to 10 % 3rd harmonic
- up to 10 % 5th harmonic
1 %
1 %
Note: When using the sensitive transformer, the linear range of the measuring input for sensitive ground
fault detection is from 0.001 A to 1.6 A or 0.005 A to 8.0 A, depending on parameter 205 CT SECONDARY.
The function is however still preserved for larger currents.
Direction Determination for all Types of Ground Fault with cos ϕ / sin ϕ Measurement
Direction measurement - ΙN and VN measured
- 3Ι0 and 3V0 calculated
Measuring principle Active/reactive power measurement
Measuring release RELEASE DIRECT.
(current component perpendicular (90º) to directional limit
line)
for sensitive 1 A transformer
for sensitive 5 A transformer
for normal 1 A transformer
for normal 5-A transformer
0.001 A to 1.600 A
0.005 A to 8.000 A
0.05 A to 35.00 A
0.25 A to 175.00 A
Increments 0.001 A
Increments 0.005 A
Increments 0.01 A
Increments 0.05 A
Dropout ratio approx. 0.80
Measurement method cos φ and sin φ
Technical Data
4.14 Ground Fault Detection (Sensitive/Insensitive)
396 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Directional limit line PHI CORRECTION -45.0° to +45.0° Increments 0.1°
Dropout delay RESET DELAY 1 s to 60 s Increments 1 s
Limitation of the directional areas using α1 and α2 1° to 15° Increments 1°
Angle tolerance 3°
Direction Determination for all Types of Ground Fault with V0 ϕ / I0 ϕ Measurement
Direction measurement - ΙN and VN measured
- 3Ι0 and 3V0 calculated
Measuring principle V0 / Ι0 phase angle measurement
50Ns-1 element
Minimum voltage 50Ns-1 Vmin
V0 measured
3V0 calculated
0.4 V to 50 V
10 V to 90 V
Increments 0.1 V
Increments 1 V
Phase angle 50Ns-1 Phi - 180° tos 180° Increments 1°
Delta phase angle 50Ns-1 DeltaPhi 0° bis 180° Increments 1°
50Ns-2 element
Minimum voltage 50Ns-2 Vmin
V0 measured
3V0 calculated
0.4 V to 50 V
10 V to 90 V
Increments 0.1 V
Increments 1 V
Phase angle 50Ns-2 Phi - 180° to 180° Increments 1°
Delta phase angle 50Ns-2 DeltaPhi 0° to 180° Increments 1°
Angle tolerance 3°
Angle tolerance
Angle correction for cable converter in two operating points F1/I1 and F2/I2:
Angle correction F1, F2
(for resonant-grounded system)
0.0° to 5.0° Increments 0.1°
Current values Ι1, Ι for angle correction
for sensitive 1 A transformer
for sensitive 5 A transformer
for normal 1 A transformer
for normal 5 A transformer
0.001 A to 1.600 A
0.005 A to 8.000 A
0.05 A to 36.00 A
0.25 A to 175.00 A
Increments 0.001 A
Increments 0.005 A
Increments 0.01 A
Increments 0.05 A
Measurement tolerance
sensitive for ΙNom = 1 A 3 % of setting value or 1 mA
for ΙNom = 5 A 3 % of setting value or 5 mA
for setting values < 10 mA ca. 20 %
non-sensitive for ΙNom = 1 A 3 % of setting value or 15 mA
for ΙNom = 5 A 3 % of setting value or 75 mA
Note: Due to the high sensitivity, the linear range of the measuring input ΙN with integrated sensitive input
transformer is from 0.001 · ΙNom to 1.6 · ΙNom. For currents greater than 1.6 · ΙNom, correct direction determina-
tion can no longer be guaranteed.
EPTR Setting Ranges / Increments
Pickup current for ΙN = 1 A 0.001 A to 2.400 A Incre-
ments0.001 A
for ΙN = 5 A 0.005 A to 7.000 A
Technical Data
4.14 Ground Fault Detection (Sensitive/Insensitive)
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 397
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Current at Maximum Time Delay for ΙN = 1 A 0.001 A to 2.400 A Incre-
ments0.001 A
for ΙN = 5 A 0.005 A to 7.000 A
Current at Minimum Time Delay for ΙN = 1 A 0.003 A to 4.000 A Incre-
ments0.001 A
for ΙN = 5 A 0.015 A to 20.000 A
Current at Knee Point for ΙN = 1 A 0.003 A to 4.000 A Incre-
ments0.001 A
for ΙN = 5 A 0.015 A to 20.000 A
Time delay at Knee Point 0.20 s to 100.00 s Incre-
ments0.01 s
Minimum Time Delay 0.10 s to 30.00 s Incre-
ments0.01 s
Maximum Time Delay 0.50 s to 300.00 s Incre-
ments0.01 s
Delay Time T of the whole function -0.50 s to 30.00 s Incre-
ments0.01 s
TNP Setting Ranges / Increments
Pickup current 0.05 A to 4.00 A Increments
0.01 A
Current at Maximum Time Delay 0.05 A to 4.00 A Increments
0.01 A
Current at Minimum Time Delay 0.05 A to 20.00 A Increments
0.01 A
Current at Knee Point 0.05 A to 17.00 A Increments
0.01 A
Time delay at Knee Point 0.20 s to 100.00 s Increments
0.01 s
Minimum Time Delay 0.10 s to 30.00 s Increments
0.01 s
Maximum Time Delay 0.50 s to 300.00 s Increments
0.01 s
Delay Time T of the whole function -0.50 s to 30.00 s Increments
0.01 s
Technical Data
4.14 Ground Fault Detection (Sensitive/Insensitive)
398 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
EPTR/TNP Tripping Time Characteristic
[7SJ80_knickpkt-kennlinie, 1, en_US]
Figure 4-11 Tripping Time Characteristic Curves of the Inverse-Time Ground-Fault Protection with Loga-
rithmic-Inverse Knee-Point Characteristic Curve, Example EPTR
EPTR Trip Time characteristics
for a primary short circuit current between:
0.5 A; 6 A t = 88.1 x (Ir)-2/3
Maximum Tolerance t+ = 105.7 x (Ir)-2/3
Maximum Tolerance t- = 70.5 x (Ir)-2/3
6 A; 80 A t = 160 x (Ir)-1
Maximum Tolerance t+ = 203.7 x (Ir)-1.034
Maximum Tolerance t- = 118.3 x (Ir)-0.956
80 A; 200 A t = 160 x (Ir)-1
Maximum Tolerance t+ = 175.8 x (Ir)-1.000
Maximum Tolerance t- = 143.9 x (Ir)-1.000
200 A; 300 A t = 0.80
Maximum Tolerance t+ = 0.88
Maximum Tolerance t- = 0.72
300 A; 1000 A t = 0.80
Maximum Tolerance t+ = 0.58 x (Ir)-0.073
Maximum Tolerance t- = 1.26 x (Ir)-0.098
Technical Data
4.14 Ground Fault Detection (Sensitive/Insensitive)
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 399
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
EPTR/TNP Times
Pickup Time Approx. 35 ms
Dropout time Approx. 45 ms
EPTR/TNP Dropout Setting
Dropout Setting Approx. 0.95 for Ιp/ΙN > 0.005
EPTR/TNP Tolerance
Pickup/dropout thresholds ΙpΙNom = 1 A 3 % of setting value or 1 mA
ΙNom = 5 A 3 % of setting value or 5 mA
Technical Data
4.14 Ground Fault Detection (Sensitive/Insensitive)
400 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Intermittent Ground Fault Protection
Intermittent Ground Fault Protection
Pickup Threshold
with ΙNfor ΙNom = 1 A
for ΙNom = 5 A
0.05 A to 35.00 A
0.25 A to 175.00 A
Increments 0.01 A
Increments 0.01 A
with 3Ι0 for ΙNom = 1 A
for ΙNom = 5 A
0.05 A to 35.00 A
0.25 A to 175.00 A
Increments 0.01 A
Increments 0.01 A
with ΙNs for ΙNom = 1 A
for ΙNom = 5 A
0.005 A to 1.500 A
0.025 A to 7.500 A
Increments 0.001 A
Increments 0.001 A
Pickup extension time Tv0.00 s to 10.00 s Increments 0.01 s
Ground Fault Accumulation Time Tsum 0.00 s to 100.00 s Increments 0.01 s
Reset Time for Accumulation Tres 1 s to 600 s Increments 1 s
Number of Pickups for Intermittent Ground Fault 2 to 10 Increments 1
Times
Pickup Times
– Current = 1.25 x Pickup Value
– for ≥ 2 · Pickup Value
Dropout Time (without extension time)
approx. 30 ms
approx. 22 ms
approx. 22 ms
Tolerances
Pickup threshold Ιie> for ΙNom = 1 A 3 % of setting value or 10 mA
for ΙNom = 5 A 3 % of setting value or 50 mA
Times TV, Tsum, Tres 1 % of setting value or 10 ms
Influencing Variables
Power supply direct voltage in range 0.8 ≤ VPS/VPSNim ≤ 1.15 <1 %
Temperature in range 23.00 °F (-5 °C) ≤ Θamb ≤ 131.00 °F (55 °C) <0.5 %/ K
Frequency in range 25 Hz to 70 Hz <5 % relating to the set time
4.15
Technical Data
4.15 Intermittent Ground Fault Protection
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 401
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Directional intermittent ground fault protection
Setting Ranges / Increments
Pickup threshold Vgnd> / 3V0> 2.0 V .. 100.0 V Increments 1 V
Monitoring time after pickup detected 0.04 s ... 10.00 s Increments 0.01 s
Pulse no. for detecting the interm. E/F 2 ... 50 Increments 1
Dropout ratio
Dropout ratio Vgnd> / 3V0> 0,95 or (pickup value - 0,6 V)
Tolerances
Measurement tolerance Vgnd> / 3V0> 3 % of setting value
Times 1 % of setting value or 10 ms
Influencing Variables
Power supply direct voltage in range 0.8 ≤ VPS/VPSNom ≤ 1.15 <1 %
Temperature in range 23.00 °F (-5 °C) ≤ Θamb ≤ 131.00 °F (55 °C) <0,5 %/ K
4.16
Technical Data
4.16 Directional intermittent ground fault protection
402 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Automatic Reclosing
Number of Reclosures 0 to 9 (separated for phase and ground)
Cycles 1 to 4 can be adjusted individually
The following Protective Functions initiate the AR
79 (no 79 start / 79 start / 79 blocked)
50-3, 50-2, 50-1, 51, 67-3, 67-2, 67-1, 67-TOC
50N-3, 50N-2, 50N-1, 51N, 67N-3, 67N-2, 67N-1, 67- TOC
TOCsensitive ground fault detection, unbalanced load,
binary input
Blocking of 79 by Pick up of protective elements for which 79 blocking is set
(see above)
3-phase pickup (optional)3-polige Anregung (wahlweise)
Binary input
last trip command after the reclosing cycle is complete
(unsuccessful reclosure)
Trip command from the breaker failure
Opening the circuit breaker without 79
External CLOSE Command
Breaker failure monitoring
Dead Time TDead
(separate for phase and ground and individual for
cycles 1 to 4)
0.01 s to 320.00 s Increments 0.01 s
Extension of Dead Time using binary input with time monitoring
Blocking Duration for Manual-CLOSE Detec-
tionTBLK Manual Close
0.50 s to 320.00 s oder ∞ Increments 0.01 s
Blocking Duration after reclosuree TBlocking Time 0.50 s to 320.00 s Increments 0.01 s
Blocking Duration after Dynamic Blocking TBLK DYN 0.01 s to 320.00 s Increments 0.01 s
Start Signal Monitoring Time TStart Mnitor 0.01 s to 320.00 s oder ∞ Increments 0.01 s
Circuit Breaker Monitoring Time TCB Monitor 0.10 s to 320.00 s Increments 0.01 s
Maximum Dead Time Extension TDead Exten 0.50 s to 320.00 s oder ∞ Increments 0.01 s
Start delay of dead time using binary input with time monitoring
Max. start delay of dead time
TDead Delay
0,0 s to 1800,0 s oder ∞ Increments 1,0 s
Operating time TOperate 0,01 s to 320,00 s oder ∞ Increments 0,01 s
The following protection functions can be influ-
enced by the automatic reclosing function indi-
vidually for the cycles 1 to 4 (setting value T=T/
instantaneous T=0/ blocked T=infinite):
50-3, 50-2, 50-1, 51, 67-3, 67-2, 67-1, 67-TOC
50N-3, 50N-2, 50N-1, 51N, 67N-3, 67N-2, 67N-1, 67- TOC
Additional Functions Lockout (Final Trip)
Circuit breaker monitoring using breaker auxiliary
contacts
Synchronous closing (optionally with integrated or
external synchrocheck, )
4.17
Technical Data
4.17 Automatic Reclosing
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 403
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Fault Locator
Units of Distance Measurement in Ω primary and secondary
in km or miles line
length or in % of line length1)
Trigger trip command,
Dropout of an Element, or
External command via binary input
Reactance Setting (secondary) for ΙNom = 1 A 0.0050 to 9.5000 Ω/km Increments
0.0001
0.0050 to 15.0000 Ω/Meile Increments
0.0001
for ΙNom = 5 A 0.0010 to 1.9000 Ω/km Increments
0.0001
0.0010 to 3.0000 Ω/Meile Increments
0.0001
For the remaining parameters refer to the Power System Data 2.
When configuring mixed lines, the reactance value must be set for each line section (A1 to A3).
Measurement Tolerance acc. to VDE 0435, Part 303 for
Sinusoidal Measurement Quantities
2,0 % fault location (without intermediate infeed)
30° ≤ φK ≤ 90° and VK/VNom ≥ 0.1 and ΙK/ΙNom ≥ 1.0
1) Homogeneous lines or correctly configured line sections are assumed when the fault distance is given in km,
miles or %.
4.18
Technical Data
4.18 Fault Locator
404 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Breaker Failure Protection 50BF
Setting Ranges / Increments
Pickup threshold 50-1 BF for ΙNom = 1 A 0.05 A to 20.00 A Increments 0.01 A
for ΙNom = 5 A 0.25 A to 100.00 A Increments 0.01 A
Pickup threshold 50N-1 BF for ΙNom = 1 A 0.05 A to 20.00 A Increments 0.01 A
for ΙNom = 5 A 0.25 A to 100.00 A Increments 0.01 A
Delay time 50 BF Trip timer 0.06 s to 60.00 s or ∞ Increments 0.01 s
Delay time 50 BF-2 Delay 0.06 s to 60.00 s or ∞ Increments 0.01 s
Times
Pickup times
- for internal start
- for external start
Included in time delay
Included in time delay
Dropout time approx. 25 ms1)
Dropout ratio 0.95 (minimal hysteresis between pickup and tripping ≥ 32.5 mA)
1) A further delay for the current may be caused by compensation in the secondary CT circuit.
Tolerances
Pickup threshold 50-1 BF, 50N-1 BF for ΙNom = 1 A 3 % of setting value or 15 mA
for ΙNom = 5 A 3 % of setting value or 75 mA
Time delay 50 BF trip timer 1 % or 20 ms
Influencing Variables for Pickup Values
Auxiliary DC voltage in range 0.8 ≤ VAux/VAuxNom ≤ 1,15 1 %
Temperature in range –5 °C (23 °F) ≤ Θamb ≤ 55 °C (131 °F) 0.5 %/10 K
Frequency in the range of 25 Hz to 70 Hz
Frequency in the range of 0.95 ≤ f/fNom ≤ 1.05 (fNom = 50 Hz or 60 Hz) 1 %
Frequency outside range 0.95 ≤ f/fNom ≤ 1.05 Increased tolerances
Harmonics
- up to 10 % 3rd harmonic
- up to 10 % 5th harmonic
1 %
1 %
4.19
Technical Data
4.19 Breaker Failure Protection 50BF
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 405
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Flexible Protection Functions
Measured Values / Modes of Operation
Three-phase Ι, 3Ι0, Ι1, Ι2, Ι2/Ι1, V, 3V0, V1, V2, dV/dt, P
forward, P reverse, Q forward, Q reverse, cosφ
Single-phase Ι, ΙN, ΙNN,ΙN2, V, VN,Vx, P forward, P reverse, Q
forward, Q reverse, cosφ
Without fixed phase reference f, df/dt, binary input
Measurement method for Ι, V Fundamental,
r.m.s. value (true RMS),
positive sequence system,
negative sequence system,
zero sequence system
Pickup on exceeding threshold value or
falling below threshold value
Setting Ranges / Increments
Pickup thresholds:
Current Ι, Ι1, Ι2, 3Ι0, ΙNfor ΙNom = 1 A 0.05 A to 40.00 A Increments 0.01 A
for ΙNom = 5 A 0.25 A to 200.00 A
Relationship Ι2/Ι115 % to 100 % Increments 1%
Sensitive ground currentΙNs 0.001 A to 1.500 A Increments 0.001 A
Voltage V, V1, V2, 3V02.0 V to 260.0 V Increments 0.1 V
Displacement voltage V02.0 V to 200.0 V Increments 0.1 V
Power P, Q for ΙN = 1 A 2.0 W to 10000 W Increments 0.1 W
for ΙN = 5 A 10 W to 50000 W
Power facto cosφ -0.99 to +0.99 Increments 0.01
Frequency for fNom = 50 Hz
for fNom = 60 Hz
40.0 Hz to 60.0 Hz
50.0 Hz to 70.0 Hz
Increments 0.01 Hz
Increments 0.01 Hz
Frequency change df/dt 0.10 Hz/s to 20.00 Hz/s Increments 0.01 Hz/s
Voltage change dV/dt 4 V/s to 100 V/s Increments 1 V/s
Dropout ratio > element 1.01 to 3.00 Increments 0.01
Dropout ratio < element 0.70 to 0.99 Increments 0.01
Dropout difference f 0.02 Hz to 1.00 Hz Increments 0.01 Hz
Pickup delay (standard) 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments 0.01 s
Pickup delay for Ι2/Ι10.00 s to 28,800.00 s Increments 0.01 s
Command delay time 0.00 s to 3,600.00 s Increments 0.01 s
Dropout delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments 0.01 s
Fixed Dropout Difference
Dropout difference df/dt 0.1 Hz/s
Dropout difference dV/dt 3 V/s
4.20
Technical Data
4.20 Flexible Protection Functions
406 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Function Limits
Power measurement three-phase for ΙNom = 1 A Positive sequence system current > 0.03 A
for ΙNom = 5 A Positive sequence system current > 0.15 A
Power measurement single-phase for ΙNom = 1 A Phase current > 0.03 A
for ΙNom = 5 A Phase current > 0.15 A
Relationship Ι2/Ι1 measurement for ΙNom = 1 A Positive or negative sequence system current > 0.1 A
for ΙNom = 5 A Positive or negative sequence system current > 0.5 A
Times
Pickup times:
Current, voltage (phase quantities)
for 2 times the setting value
for 10 times the setting value
approx. 30 ms
approx. 20 ms
Current, voltage (symmetrical components)
for 2 times the setting value
for 10 times the setting value
approx. 40 ms
approx. 30 ms
Power
typical
maximum (small signals and threshold values)
approx. 120 ms
approx. 350 ms
Power factor 300 to 600 ms
Frequency approx. 100 ms
Frequency change for 1.25 times the setting value approx. 220 ms
Voltage change dV/dt for 2 times the setting value approx. 220 ms
Binary input approx. 20 ms
Dropout times:
Current, voltage (phase quantities) < 20 ms
Current, voltage (symmetrical components) < 30 ms
Power
typical
maximum
< 50 ms
< 350 ms
Power factor < 300 ms
Frequency < 100 ms
Frequency change < 200 ms
Voltage change < 200 ms
Binary input < 10 ms
Tolerances
Pickup thresholds:
Current for ΙNom = 1 A 3% of setting value or 15 mA
for ΙNom = 5 A 3% of setting value or 75 mA
Current (symmetrical components) for ΙNom = 1 A 4% of setting value or 20 mA
for ΙNom = 5 A 4% of setting value or 100 mA
Current (Ι2/Ι1)4% of setting value
Voltage 3% of setting value or 0,2 V
Voltage (symmetrical components) 4% of setting value or 0,2 V
Technical Data
4.20 Flexible Protection Functions
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 407
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Voltage change dV/dt 5 % of setting value or 2 V/s
Power for ΙNom = 1 A 3% of setting value or 0,5 W
for ΙNom = 5 A 3% of setting value or 2,5 W
Power factor 3°
Frequency 15 mHz
Frequency change 5% of setting value or 0,05 Hz/s
Times 1% of setting value or 10 ms
Influencing Variables for Pickup Values
Auxiliary DC voltage in range 0.8 ≤ VAux/VAuxNom ≤ 1,15 1 %
Temperature in range –5 °C (23 °F) ≤ Θamb ≤ 55 °C (131 °F) 0.5 %/10 K
Frequency in the range of 25 Hz to 70 Hz
Frequency in the range of 0.95 ≤ f/fNom ≤ 1.05 (fNom = 50 Hz or 60 Hz) 1 %
Frequency outside range 0.95 ≤ f/fNom ≤ 1.05 Increased tolerances
Harmonics
- up to 10 % 3rd harmonic
- up to 10 % 5th harmonic
1 %
1 %
Technical Data
4.20 Flexible Protection Functions
408 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Synchrocheck 25
Modes of Operation
- Synchrocheck
Additional Release Conditions
- Live bus / dead line,
- Dead bus / live line,
- Dead bus and dead line
- Bypassing
Voltages
Maximum operating voltage Vmax 20 V to 140 V (phase-to-phase) Increments 1 V
Minimum operating voltage Vmin 20 V to 125 V (phase-to-phase) Increments 1 V
V< for dead line
V> for live line
1 V to 60 V (phase-to-phase)
20 V to 140 V (phase-to-phase)
Increments 1 V
Increments 1 V
Primary transformer rated voltage V2N 0.10 kV to 800.00 kV Increments 0.01 kV
Tolerances 2 % of pickup value or 2 V
Dropout Ratios approx. 0.9 (V>) or 1.1 (V<)
Permissible Difference
Voltages differences V2>V1; V2<V1
Tolerance
0.5 V to 50.0 V (phase-tophase)
1 V
Increments 0.1 V
Frequency Difference f2>f1; f2<f1
Tolerance
0.01 Hz to 2.00 Hz
20 mHz
Increments 0.01 Hz
Angle Difference α2 > α1; α2 < α1 2° to 80° Increments 1°
Tolerance 2°
Max. angle error 5° for Δf ≤ 1 Hz
10° for Δf >1 Hz
Matching
Vector group matching via angle 0° to 360° Increments 1°
Different voltage transformer V1/V2 0.50 to 2.00 Increments 0.01
Times
Minimum Measuring Time approx. 80 ms
Maximum duration TSYN DURATION 0.01 s to 1200.00 s
or ∞ (disabled)
Increments 0.01 s
Monitoring Time TSUP VOLTAGE 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments 0.01 s
Tolerance of all times 1 % of setting value or 10 ms
Measured Values of the Synchronism and Voltage Check
Reference voltage V1
- Range
- Tolerance 1)
in kV primary, in V secondary or in % VNom
10 % to 120 % of VNom
≤ 1 % of measured value, or 0,5 % VNom
4.21
Technical Data
4.21 Synchrocheck 25
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 409
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Voltage to be synchronized V2
- Range
- Tolerance 1)
in kV primary, in V secondary or in % VNom
10 % to 120 % of VNom
≤ 1 % of measured value, or 0,5 % VNom
Frequency of the voltage V1
- Range
- Tolerance 1)
f1 in Hz
fNom ± 5 Hz
20 mHz
Frequency of the voltage V2
- Range
- Tolerance 1)
f2 in Hz
fNom ± 5 Hz
20 mHz
Voltage difference V2-V1
- Range
- Tolerance 1)
in kV primary, in V secondary or in % VN
10 % bis 120 % of VN
≤ 1 % of measured value, or 0,5 % VN
Frequency difference f2-f1
- Range
- Tolerance 1)
in mHz
fNom ± 5 Hz
20 mHz
Angle difference λ2-λ1
- Range
- Tolerance 1)
in °
0 to 180°
0,5°
1) at nominal frequency
Technical Data
4.21 Synchrocheck 25
410 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
User-defined Functions (CFC)
Function Blocks and Their Possible Assignments to Task Levels
Function block Explanation Task level
MW_
BEARB
PLC1_
BEARB
PLC_
BEARB
SFS_
BEARB
ABSVALUE Magnitude Calculation X — — —
ADD Addition X X X X
ALARM Alarm X X X X
AND AND - Gate X X X X
BLINK Blink block X X X X
BOOL_TO_CO Boolean to Control (conversion) — X X —
BOOL_TO_DI Boolean to Double Point (conver-
sion)
— X X X
BOOL_TO_IC Bool to Internal SI, Conversion — X X X
BUILD_DI Create Double Point Annunciation — X X X
CMD_CANCEL Cancel command X X X X
CMD_CHAIN Switching Sequence — X X —
CMD_INF Command Information — — — X
COMPARE Metered value comparison X X X X
CONNECT Connection — X X X
COUNTER Counter X X X X
DI_GET_STATUS Decode status of double-point indi-
cation
X X X X
DI_SET_STATUS Generate double-point indication
with status
X X X X
D_FF D- Flipflop — X X X
D_FF_MEMO Status Memory for Restart X X X X
DI_TO_BOOL Double Point to Boolean (conver-
sion)
— X X X
DINT_TO_REAL Adaptor X X X X
DIST_DECODE Convert double-point indication
with status into four single-point
indications with status
X X X X
DIV Division X X X X
DM_DECODE Decode Double Point X X X X
DYN_OR Dynamic OR X X X X
INT_TO_REAL Conversion X X X X
IO_UNIT SICAM I/O Unit X X
LIVE_ZERO Live-zero, non-linear Curve X — — —
LONG_TIMER Timer (max.1193h) X X X X
LOOP Feedback Loop X X — X
LOWER_SETPOINT Lower Limit X — — —
MUL Multiplication X X X X
MV_GET_STATUS Decode status of a value X X X X
MV_SET_STATUS Set status of a value X X X X
NAND NAND - Gate X X X X
NEG Negator X X X X
NOR NOR - Gate X X X X
4.22
Technical Data
4.22 User-defined Functions (CFC)
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 411
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Function block Explanation Task level
MW_
BEARB
PLC1_
BEARB
PLC_
BEARB
SFS_
BEARB
OR OR - Gate X X X X
REAL_TO_DINT Adaptor X X X X
REAL_TO_INT Conversion X X X X
REAL_TO_UINT Conversion X X X X
RISE_DETECT Edge detector X X X X
RS_FF RS- Flipflop — X X X
RS_FF_MEMO RS- Flipflop with status memory — X X X
SQUARE_ROOT Root Extractor X X X X
SR_FF SR- Flipflop — X X X
SR_FF_MEMO SR- Flipflop with status memory — X X X
ST_AND AND gate with status X X X X
ST_NOT Inverter with status X X X X
ST_OR OR gate with status X X X X
SUB Substraction X X X X
TIMER Timer — X X —
TIMER_SHORT Simple timer — X X —
UINT_TO_REAL Conversion X X X X
UPPER_SETPOINT Upper Limit X — — —
X_OR XOR - Gate X X X X
ZERO_POINT Zero Supression X — — —
Device-specific CFC Blocks
Table 4-1 ASWITCH – This block is used to switch between two REAL inputs (RMS values)
Name Type Description Default function
Input SWITCH BOOL Analog value selection FALSE
IN1 REAL Analog value 0.0
IN2 REAL Analog value 0.0
Output OUT REAL Selected analog value
Task levels: Recommendation: Into task levels PLC1_BEARB and PLC_BEARB, because
these levels are directly triggered.
Note: If you use thi block in the task levels MW_BEARB and SFS_BEARB, a
change of the SWITCH signal is only recognized if the signal lasts longer
than the processing cycle of the task level.
Behavior of inputs and outputs:
General Limits
Description Limit Comment
Maximum number of all CFC charts
considering all task levels
32 If the limit is exceeded, the device rejects the parameter
set with an error message, restores the last valid param-
eter set and restarts using that parameter set.
Technical Data
4.22 User-defined Functions (CFC)
412 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Description Limit Comment
Maximum number of all CFC charts
considering one task level
16 When the limit is exceeded, an error message is output by
the device. Consequently, the device starts monitoring.
The red ERROR-LED lights up.
Maximum number of all CFC inputs
considering all charts
400 When the limit is exceeded, an error message is output by
the device. Consequently, the device starts monitoring.
The red ERROR-LED lights up.
Maximum number of reset-resistant
flipflops
D_FF_MEMO
350 When the limit is exceeded, an error message is output by
the device. Consequently, the device starts monitoring.
The red ERROR-LED lights up.
Device-Specific Limits
Description Limit Comment
Maximum number of synchronous
changes of chart inputs per task level
165 When the limit is exceeded, an error message is output by
the device. Consequently, the device starts monitoring.
The red ERROR-LED lights up.
Maximum number of chart outputs per
task level
150
Additional Limits
Additional limits 1) for the following CFC blocks:
Task Level Maximum Number of Modules in the Task Levels
TIMER2) 3) TIMER_SHORT2) 3)
MW_BEARB — —
PLC1_BEARB 15 30
PLC_BEARB
SFS_BEARB — —
1) When the limit is exceeded, an error message is iisued by the device. Consequently, the device starts moni-
toring. The red ERROR-LED lights up.
2) The following condition applies for the maximum number of timers: (2 · number of TIMER + number of
TIMER_SHORT) < 30. TIMER and TIMER_SHORT hence share the available timer resources within the frame of
this inequation. The limit does not apply to the LONG_TIMER.
3) The time values for the blocks TIMER and TIMER_SHORT must not be selected shorter than the time resolu-
tion of the device of 10 ms, as then, the blocks will not then start with the starting pulse.
Maximum Number of TICKS in the Task Levels
Task level Limit in TICKS 1)
MW_BEARB (measured value processing) 10000
PLC1_BEARB (slow PLC processing) 12000
PLC_BEARB (fast PLC processing) 600
SFS_BEARB (interlocking) 10000
1) When the sum of TICKS of all blocks exceeds the limits mentioned before, an error message is output in the
CFC.
Processing Times in TICKS for the Individual Elements
Individual element Number of TICKS
Block, basic requirement 5
Each input from the 3rd additional input on for generic modules 1
Combination with input signal border 6
Combination with output signal border 7
Technical Data
4.22 User-defined Functions (CFC)
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 413
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Individual element Number of TICKS
Additionally for each chart 1
Arithmetic ABS_VALUE 5
ADD 26
SUB 26
MUL 26
DIV 54
SQUARE_ROOT 83
Base logic AND 5
CONNECT 4
DYN_OR 6
NAND 5
NEG 4
NOR 5
OR 5
RISE_DETECT 4
X_OR 5
Information status SI_GET_STATUS 5
CV_GET_STATUS 5
DI_GET_STATUS 5
MV_GET_STATUS 5
SI_SET_STATUS 5
DI_SET_STATUS 5
MV_SET_STATUS 5
ST_AND 5
ST_OR 5
ST_NOT 5
Memory D_FF 5
D_FF_MEMO 6
RS_FF 4
RS_FF_MEMO 4
SR_FF 4
SR_FF_MEMO 4
Control commands BOOL_TO_CO 5
BOOL_TO_IC 5
CMD_INF 4
CMD_INF_EXE 4
CMD_CHAIN 34
CMD_CANCEL 3
LOOP 8
Type converter BOOL_TO_DI 5
BUILD_DI 5
DI_TO_BOOL 5
DM_DECODE 8
DINT_TO_REAL 5
DIST_DECODE 8
UINT_TO_REAL 5
REAL_TO_DINT 10
Technical Data
4.22 User-defined Functions (CFC)
414 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Individual element Number of TICKS
REAL_TO_UINT 10
Comparison COMPARE 12
LOWER_SETPOINT 5
UPPER_SETPOINT 5
LIVE_ZERO 5
ZERO_POINT 5
Metered value (counter) COUNTER 6
Time and clock pulse TIMER 5
TIMER_LONG 5
TIMER_SHORT 8
ALARM 21
BLINK 11
Other IO_UNIT 17
Routable in Matrix
In addition to the defined preassignments, indications and measured values can be freely routed to buffers,
preconfigurations can be removed.
Technical Data
4.22 User-defined Functions (CFC)
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 415
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Auxiliary Functions
Operational Measured Values
Currents
ΙA; ΙB; ΙC
Positive sequence component Ι1
Negative sequence component Ι2
ΙNor 3Ι0
in A (kA) primary and in A secondary or in % ΙNom
Range
Tolerance 1)
10 % to 150 % ΙNom
1.5 % of measured value or 1 % ΙNom
and between 151 % and 200 % INom 3 % of measured value
Voltages (phase-to-ground)
VA-N, VB-N, VC-N
Voltages (phase-to-phase)
VA-B, VB-C, VC-A, VSYN
VN, Vph-N, Vx or V0
Positive sequence component V1
Negative sequence component V2
in kV primary, in V secondary or in % VNom
Range
Tolerance 1)
10 % to 120 % of VNom
1.5 % of measured value or 0.5 % VNom
S, apparent power in kVAr (MVAR or GVAR) primary and in % SNom
Range
Tolerance 1)
0 % to 120 % SNom
1.5 % of SNom
for V/VNom and Ι/ΙNom = 50 to 120 %
P, Active power with sign, total and phase-segregated in kW (MW or GW)
primary and in % SNom
Range
Tolerance 1)
0 % to 120 % SNom
2 % of SNom
for V/VNom and Ι/ΙNom = 50 to 120 % and | cos φ | = 0.707 to 1
with SNom =√3 · VNom · ΙNom
Q, reactive power with sign, total and phase-segregated in kVAr (MVAr or GVAr)
primary and in % SNom
Range
Tolerance 1)
0 % to 120 % SNom
2 % of SNom
for V/VNom and Ι/ΙNom = 50 to 120 % und | sin φ | = 0.707 to 1
with SNom = √3· VNom · ΙNom
cos φ, power factor total and phase-segregated
Range
Tolerance 1)
–1 to +1
2 % for | cos φ | ≥ 0.707
Frequencies f in Hz
Range
Tolerance 1)
fNom ± 5 Hz
20 mHz
Temperature overload protection
Θ /ΘTrip
in %
4.23
Technical Data
4.23 Auxiliary Functions
416 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Range
Tolerance 1)
0 % to 400 %
5 % class accuracy acc. to IEC 60255-8
Synchrocheck function 25 see Section (Synchrocheck)
Currents of sensitive ground fault detection
(total, real, and reactive current)
ΙNs, ΙNsreal; ΙNsreactive
in A (kA) primary and in mA secondary
Range
Tolerance 1)
0 mA to 1600 mA or
0 A to 8 A for INom = 5 A
3 % of measured value or 1 mA
Phase angle between zero sequence voltage
and sensitive ground current φ (3V0, ΙNs)
in °
Range
Tolerance 1)
- 180° to + 180°
± 1°
1) at nominal frequency
2) Displaying of cos ϕ as of Ι/ΙNom and V/VNom greater than 10%
Long-Term Mean Values
Time Window 5, 15, 30 or 60 minutes
Frequency of Updates adjustable
Long-Term Averages
of Currents
of Real Power
of Reactive Power
of Apparent Power
ΙAdmd; ΙBdmd; ΙCdmd; Ι1dmd in A (kA)
Pdmd in W (kW, MW)
Qdmd in VAr (kVAr, MVAr)
Sdmd in VAr (kVAr, MVAr)
Min./Max. Memory
Storage of Measured Values with date and time
Reset automatic Time of day adjustable (in minutes, 0 to 1439 min) Time
frame and starting time adjustable (in days, 1 to 365 days,
and ∞)
Manual Reset Using binary input
Using keypad
Via communication
Min/Max Values for Current ΙA; ΙB; ΙC;
Ι1 (positive sequence component)
Min/Max Values for Voltages VA-N; VB-N; VC-N;
V1 (positive sequence component);
VA-B; VB-C; VC-A
Min/Max Values for Power S, P; Q, cos φ; frequency
Min/Max Values for Overload Protection Θ/ΘtRIP
Min/Max Values for Mean Values ΙAdmd; ΙBdmd; ΙCdmd;
Ι1dmd (positive sequence component);
Sdmd; Pdmd; Qdmd
Technical Data
4.23 Auxiliary Functions
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 417
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Fuse Failure Monitor
Setting range of the displacement voltage 3V0
above which voltage failure is detected
10 - 100 V
Setting range of the ground current above which
no voltage failure is assumed
0.1 - 1 A for ΙBdmd = 1 A
0.5 - 5A for ΙBdmd = 5A
Setting range of the pickup threshold Ι> above
which no voltage failure is assumed
0.1 - 35 A for ΙBdmd = 1 A
0.5 - 175 A for ΙBdmd = 5A
Measuring voltage monitoring depends on the MLFB and configuration with measured
and calculated values VN and ΙN
Broken-wire Monitoring of Voltage Transformer Circuits
suited for single-, two- or three-pole broken-wire detection of voltage transformer circuits;
only for connection of phase-ground voltages
Local Measured Value Monitoring
Current asymmetry Ιmax/Ιmin > symmetry factor, for Ι > Ιlimit
Voltage asymmetry Vmax/Vmin > symmetry factor, for V > Vlimit
Current sum | iA + iB + iC + kI · iE | > limit value, with
Current phase sequence Clockwise (ABC) / counter-clockwise (ACB)
Voltage phase sequence Clockwise (ABC) / counter-clockwise (ACB)
Fault Logging
Recording of indications of the last 8 power system faults
Recording of indications of the last 3 power system ground faults
Time Allocation
Resolution for Event Log (Operational Annunciations) 1 ms
Resolution for Trip Log (Fault Annunciations) 1 ms
Maximum Time Deviation (Internal Clock) 0.01 %
Battery Lithium battery 3 V/1 Ah, Typ CR 1/2 AA
Message “Battery Fault” for insufficient battery charge
Fault Recording
maximum of 8 fault records saved; memory maintained by buffer battery in the case of auxiliary voltage
failure
Recording time 5 s per fault record, in total up to 18 s at 50 Hz
(max. 15 s at 60 Hz)
Intervals at 50 Hz
Intervals at 60 Hz
1 instantaneous value each per 1.0 ms
1 instantaneous value each per 0.83 ms
Energy Counter
Meter Values for Energy
Wp, Wq (real and reactive energy)
in kWh (MWh or GWh) or in kVARh (MVARh or GVARh)
Technical Data
4.23 Auxiliary Functions
418 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Range
Tolerance 1)
28 Bit or 0 to 2 68 435 455 decimal for IEC 60870-5-103 (VDEW
protocol)
31 Bit or 0 to 2 147 483 647 for other protocols (other than
VDEW)
≤ 2 % for Ι > 0.1 ΙN, V > 0.1 VN and
| cos φ | ≥ 0.707
1) at nominal frequency
Switching Statistics
Saved Number of Trips up to 9 digits
Number of Automatic Reclosing Commands
(segregated according to 1st and ≥ 2nd cycle)
up to 9 digits
Accumulated Interrupted Current (segregated
according to pole)
up to 4 digits
Operating Hours Counter
Display Range Up to 7 digits
Criterion Overshoot of an adjustable current threshold (element
50-1, BkrClosed I MIN)
Circuit Breaker Maintenance
Calculation methods on true r.m.s value basis: ΣΙ, ΣΙx, 2P;
on instantaneous value basis: Ι2t
Acquisition/conditioning of measured values phase-selective
Evaluation one threshold per subfunction
Number of saved statistic values up to 13 digits
Trip Circuit Supervision
With one or two binary inputs
Commissioning Aids
- Phase rotation field check
- Operational measured values
- Circuit breaker test by means of control function
- Creation of a test measurement report
- Creation of messages
Clock
Time synchronization Binary input
Communication
Modes of operation for time tracking
No. Mode of operation Explanations
1 Internal Internal synchronization using RTC (presetting)
2 IEC 60870-5-103 External synchronization using port B (IEC 60870-5-103)
3 Pulse via binary input External synchronization with pulse via binary input
4 Fieldbus (DNP (serial or DNP3 TCP),
Modbus, IEC 60870-5-103 redundant)
External synchronization using field bus
Technical Data
4.23 Auxiliary Functions
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 419
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
5 SNTP (IEC 61850, DNP3 TCP,
PROFINET IO)
External synchronization using port B (IEC 61850)
- SNTP (no IEC61850) External synchronization via port A
Parameterization via device; notes under 2.1.2.2 Setting
Notes
Setting Group Change Option of the Functional Settings
Number of Available Setting Groups 4 (parameter group A, B, C and D)
Switchover Performed using the keypad
DIGSI using the front PC port
Protocol using port B
Binary Input
IEC 61850 GOOSE (inter-relay communication)
The GOOSE communication service of IEC 61850 is qualified for switchgear interlocking The runtime of
GOOSE messages with the protection relay picked up depends on the number of connected IEC 61850
clients.
As from version V4.6 of the devices, applications with protective functions have to be checked with regard
to their required runtime. In individual cases, the manufacturer has to be consulted with regard to the
requirements to ensure that the application functions safely.
Technical Data
4.23 Auxiliary Functions
420 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Switching Device Control
Number of Controlled Switching Devices Depends on the number of binary inputs and outputs
available
Interlocking Freely programmable interlocking
Messages Single command / double command
Control Commands Single command / double command
Switching Command to Circuit Breaker 1-, 1½ - and 2-pole
Programmable Logic Controller PLC logic, graphic input tool
Local Control Control via menu control
assignment of function keys
Remote Control Using Communication Interfaces
Using a substation automation and control system (e.g.
SICAM)
Using DIGSI (e.g. via Modem)
4.24
Technical Data
4.24 Switching Device Control
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 421
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Dimensions
Panel Flush and Cubicle Mounting (Housing Size 1/6)
[abmess-sechstel-gehaeuse-7sx80-060606, 1, en_US]
Figure 4-12 Dimensional drawing of a 7SJ80 for panel flush or cubicle mounting (housing size 1/6)
Note: A set of mounting brackets (consisting of upper and lower mounting rail) (order no. C73165-A63-
D200-1) is required for cubicle mounting. When using the Ethernet interface, it may be necessary
to rework the lower mounting rail.
Provide for sufficient space at the device bottom side or below the device to accommodate the
cables of the communication modules.
4.25
4.25.1
Technical Data
4.25 Dimensions
422 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Panel Surface Mounting (Housing Size 1/6)
[abmess-sechstel-gehaeuse-aufbau-7sx80-060606, 1, en_US]
Figure 4-13 Dimensional drawing of a 7SJ80 for panel surface mounting (housing size 1/6)
Bottom view
[ansicht-unten-sechstel-gehaeuse-7sx80-070914, 1, en_US]
Figure 4-14 Bottom view of a 7SJ80 (housing size 1/6)
4.25.2
4.25.3
Technical Data
4.25 Dimensions
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 423
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Varistor
[varistor-20071105, 1, en_US]
Figure 4-15 Dimensional drawing of the varistor for voltage limiting in high-impedance differential protec-
tion
4.25.4
Technical Data
4.25 Dimensions
424 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Ordering Information 7SJ80
Multifunctional
protection device
with control
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Zusatz
7 S J 8 0 – – F +
Number of binary inputs and outputs Pos. 6
Housing 1/6 19” 4 x Ι, 3 BI, 5 BO (2 changeover contacts), 1 life status contact 1
Housing 1/6 19” 4 x Ι, 7 BI, 8 BO (2 changeover contacts), 1 life status contact 2
Housing 1/6 19” 4 x Ι, 3x V, 3 BI, 5 BO (2 changeover contacts), 1 life status contact 3
Housing 1/6 19” 4 x Ι, 3 x V, 7 BI, 8 BO (2 changeover contacts), 1 life status contact 4
Housing 1/6 19” 4 x Ι, 11 BI, 5 BO (2 changeover contacts), 1 life status contact 7
Housing 1/6 19” 4 x Ι, 3 x V, 11 BI, 5 BO (2 changeover contacts), 1 life status contact 8
Measuring inputs (4 x Ι)Pos. 7
Ιph = 1 A, Ιe = 1 A / 5 A 1
Ιph = 1 A, Ιns (sensitive) = 0.001 A to 1.6 A / 0.005 A to 8 A 2
Auxiliary voltage (power supply, pilot voltage) Pos. 8
DC 24 V/ 48 V 1
DC 60 V / 110 V / 125 V / 220 V / 250 V, AC 115 V, AC 230 V 5
Construction Pos. 9
Surface-mounting case, screw-type terminals B
Flush mounting case, screw-type terminals E
Region-specific default settings / function versions and language default settings Pos. 10
Region DE, IEC, language German (language can be changed, standard front panel A
Region world, IEC/ANSI, language English (language can be changed), standard front panel B
Region US, ANSI, language US-English (language can be changed), US front panel C
Region FR, IEC/ANSI, language French (language can be changed), standard front panel D
Region world, IEC/ANSI, language Spanish (language can be changed), standard front panel E
Region world, IEC/ANSI, language Italian (language can be changed), standard front panel F
Region RUS, IEC/ANSI, language Russian (language can be changed), standard front panel G
Region CHN, IEC/ANSI, language Chinese (language can not be changed), standard front panel Chinese K
Port B (bottom side of device, rear) Pos. 11
not equipped 0
IEC60870-5-103 or DIGSI4/Modem, electrical RS232 1
IEC60870-5-103 or DIGSI4/Modem, electrical RS485 2
IEC60870-5-103 or DIGSI4/Modem, optical 820nm, ST connector 3
For further interface options see Additional Information in the following 9
Additional information for additional ports (bottom side of device, rear, port B) Supple-
mentary
Profibus DP Slave, electrical RS485 + L 0 A
Profibus DP Slave, 820 nm, optical double ring, ST connector + L 0 B
Modbus, electrical RS485 + L 0 D
Modbus, optical 820 nm, ST connector + L 0 E
DNP3.0, electrical RS485 + L 0 G
DNP3.0, optical 820 nm, ST connector + L 0 H
A.1
Ordering Information and Accessories
A.1 Ordering Information 7SJ80
426 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Additional information for additional ports (bottom side of device, rear, port B) Supple-
mentary
IEC 60870-5-103 Protocol, redundant, electrical RS485, RJ45 connector + L 0 P
IEC 61850, 100Mbit Ethernet electrical, double, RJ45 connector + L 0 R
IEC 61850 100 Mbit Ethernet optical, double, LC connector + L 0 S
DNP3 TCP, 100 Mbit Ethernet electrical, double, RJ45 connector + L 2 R
DNP3 TCP, 100 Mbit Ethernet optical, double, LC connector + L 2 S
PROFINET 100Mbit Ethernet electrical, double, RJ45 connector + L 3 R
PROFINET 100 Mbit Ethernet optical, double, LC connector + L 3 S
IEC 60870-5-104 and IEC 61850, 100Mbit Ethernet, electrical, double, RJ45 connector + L 4 R
IEC 60870-5-104 and IEC 61850, 100Mbit Ethernet, optical, double, LC connector + L 4 S
MODBUS TCP and IEC 61850, 100Mbit Ethernet, electrical, double, RJ45 connector + L 5 R
MODBUS TCP and IEC 61850, 100Mbit Ethernet, optical, double, LC connector + L 5 S
Converter Order number Use
SIEMENS OLM1) 6GK1502–2CB10 for single ring
SIEMENS OLM1) 6GK1502–3CB10 for double ring
1) The converter requires an operating voltage of 24 VDC. If the available operating voltage is > 24 VDC the
additional power supply 7XV5810–0BA00 is required.
Port A (bottom side of device, front) Pos. 12
not equipped 0
with Ethernet interface (DIGSI interface, I/O unit connection, not IEC61850), RJ45 connector 6
Measurement / Fault Recording Pos. 13
With fault recording 1
With fault recording, average values, min/max values 3
Ordering Information and Accessories
A.1 Ordering Information 7SJ80
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 427
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Functions Pos. 15
Name ANSI-No. Description A
Basic function
(included in all versions)3)
— Control
50/51 Time overcurrent protection phase 50-1, 50-2, 50-3, 51
50N/51N Time overcurrent protection ground 50N-1, 50N-2,
50N-3, 51N
50N(s)/
51N(s)
Ground fault protection/ ground short-circuit protection
50Ns-1, 50Ns-2, 51Ns1)
— Intermittent ground fault protection
87N High-impedance ground fault differential protection
(87N (REF) only available with sensitive ground current
input (position 7 = 2)
49 Thermal overload protection
74TC Trip circuit supervision
46 Negative sequence overcurrent protection
50BF Breaker failure protection 50BF
37 Undercurrent surveillance
86 Lock out
— Cold-load pickup
Monitoring functions
Circuit breaker control
Flexible protection functions (parameters from current)
Inrush restraint
Basic design 4)
+ ground fault direction detection
+ voltage protection
+ frequency protection
51V Voltage-controlled inverse-time overcurrent protection B
67N Directional ground fault protection
67N-1, 67N-2, 67N-3, 67N-TOC
67N(s) Directional ground fault protection/ground short circuit
protection
67Ns-1, 67Ns-2, 67Ns-TOC 1)
64/59N Displacement voltage
27/59 Undervoltage / overvoltage
81 U/O Underfrequency / overfrequency, f< ,f>
47 Phase sequence
32/55/81R/
27R/59R
Flexible protection functions
(parameters from current and voltage):
Voltage protection, power protection,
power factor protection, frequency change protection
and
voltage change protection
Ordering Information and Accessories
A.1 Ordering Information 7SJ80
428 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Functions Pos. 15
Basic design 4)
+ ground fault direction detection
+ direction determination for phase
+ voltage protection
+ frequency protection
51V Voltage-controlled inverse-time overcurrent protection C
67 Direction determination for overcurrent phases
67-1, 67- 2, 67-3, 67-TOC
67N Directional ground fault protection
67N-1, 67N-2, 67N-3, 67N-TOC
67N(s) Directional ground fault protection/ground short circuit
protection
67Ns-1, 67Ns-2, 67Ns-TOC 1)
64/59N Displacement voltage
27/59 Undervoltage / overvoltage
81 U/O Underfrequency / overfrequency, f< ,f>
47 Phase sequence
32/55/81R/
27R/59R
Flexible protection functions
(parameters from current and voltage):
Voltage protection, power protection,
power factor protection, frequency change protection
and
voltage change protection
Basic design 4)
+ ground fault direction detection
+ direction determination for phase
+ voltage protection
+ frequency protection
+ QU protection
+ directional intermittent ground fault
protection
51V Voltage-controlled inverse-time overcurrent protection F
67 Direction determination for overcurrent phases
67-1, 67- 2, 67-3, 67-TOC
67N Directional ground fault protection
67N-1, 67N-2, 67N-3, 67N-TOC
67N(s) Directional ground fault protection/ground short circuit
protection
67Ns-1, 67Ns-2, 67Ns-TOC 1)
67Ns Directional intermittent ground fault protection 2)
64/59N Displacement voltage
27/59 Undervoltage / overvoltage
81 U/O Underfrequency / overfrequency, f< ,f>
— Undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection
(Q>/U<)
47 Phase sequence
32/55/81R/
27R/59R
Flexible protection functions
(parameters from current and voltage):
Voltage protection, power protection,
power factor protection, frequency change protection
and
voltage change protection
Ordering Information and Accessories
A.1 Ordering Information 7SJ80
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 429
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Functions Pos. 15
Basic design 5)
+ direction determination for phase
+ voltage protection
+ frequency protection
+ synchrocheck
51V Voltage-controlled inverse-time overcurrent protection Q
67 Direction determination for overcurrent phases
67-1, 67- 2, 67-3, 67-TOC
27/59 Undervoltage / overvoltage
81 U/O Underfrequency / overfrequency, f< ,f>
47 Phase sequence
25 Synchronism check
81R/27R/5
9R
Flexible protection functions
(parameters from current and voltage):
Voltage protection, power protection,
power factor protection, frequency change protection
and
voltage change protection
1) depending on the ground current input at position 7, the function works either as ground fault protection (sensitive
input) or as ground short circuit protection (normal Ie input)
2) only with sensitive input, Position 7=2
3) only deliverable with position 6 = 1, 2 or 7
4) only deliverable with position 6 = 3, 4 (3 x V) or 8
5) only deliverable with position 6 = 3, 4 (3 x V) or 8 and position 16 = 0 or 1
Automatic reclosing function 79AR / Fault locator 21FL Pos. 16
No 79, no fault locator 0
79 With 79 1
21FL With fault locator 1) 2
79, 21FL With AR, with fault locator 1) 3
1) only deliverable with position 6 = 1, 2 or 7
Conformal Coating Supplementary
for 7SJ801, 7SJ803 +Z Y 15
for 7SJ802, 7SJ804, 7SJ807, 7SJ808 +Z Y 16
Ordering Information and Accessories
A.1 Ordering Information 7SJ80
430 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Accessories
Exchangeable interface modules
Name Order number
RS232 C53207-A351-D641-1
RS485 C53207-A351-D642-1
FO 820 nm C53207-A351-D643-1
Profibus DP RS485 C53207-A351-D611-1
Profibus DP double ring C53207-A351-D613-1
Modbus RS 485 C53207-A351-D621-1
Modbus 820 nm C53207-A351-D623-1
DNP 3.0 RS 485 C53207-A351-D631-1
DNP 3.0 820 nm C53207-A351-D633-1
Ethernet electrical (EN 100) C53207-A351-D675-2
Ethernet optical (EN 100), 4 ST connectors C53207-A351-D678-1
Ethernet electrical (EN 100, PROFINET IO) C53207-A351-D688-1
Ethernet optical (EN 100, PROFINET IO) C53207-A351-D689-1
Ethernet electrical (EN 100, DNP3 TCP ) C53207-A351-D684-1
Ethernet optical (EN 100, DNP3 TCP), multimode C53207-A351-D686-1
Ethernet optical (EN100, DNP3 TCP), single mode, 24 km C53207-A351-D690-1
Ethernet electrical (EN 100, IEC 60870-5-104 ) C53207-A351-D692-1
Ethernet optical (EN 100, IEC 60870-5-104 ) C53207-A351-D693-1
Ethernet electrical (EN 100, Modbus TCP ) C53207-A351-D696-1
Ethernet optical (EN 100, Modbus TCP ) C53207-A351-D697-1
IEC 60870–5–103 protocoll, redundant, RS485 C53207-A351-D644-1
Ethernet port electrical at port A C53207-A351-D151-1
RS485 FO converter
RS485 FO converter Order No.
820 nm, FC–Connector 7XV5650-0AA00
820 nm, with ST-Connector 7XV5650-0BA00
Mounting Rail for 19"-Racks
Name Order Number
Mounting Rail Set C73165-A63-D200-1
Surface mounting console (converts flush mounting variants into surface mounting variant)
Surface mounting console C53207-A356-D850-1
Battery
Lithium battery 3 V/1 Ah, type CR 1/2 AA Order No.
VARTA 6127 101 301
Panasonic BR-1/2AA
Terminals
Terminals Voltage terminal block C or block E C53207-A406-D181-1
A.2
Ordering Information and Accessories
A.2 Accessories
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 431
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Voltage terminal block D (inverse print) C53207-A406-D182-1
Current terminal block 4xI C53207-A406-D185-1
Current terminal block 3xI,1xINs (sensitive) C53207-A406-D186-1
Current terminal short circuit links, 3 pieces C53207-A406-D193-1
Voltage terminal short circuit links, 6 pieces C53207-A406-D194-1
Varistor
Voltage-limiting resistor for high-impedance differential protection
Name Order number
125 Veff, 600 A, 1S/S256 W73028-V3125-A1
240 Veff, 600 A, 1S/S1088 W73028-V3300-A2
Ordering Information and Accessories
A.2 Accessories
432 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
7SJ80 — Housing for panel flush mounting and cubicle installation
and for panel surface mounting
7SJ801*
[kl-uebers-7sx80-1, 1, en_US]
Figure B-1 Block diagram 7SJ801*
B.1
Terminal Assignments
B.1 7SJ80 — Housing for panel flush mounting and cubicle installation and for panel surface mounting
434 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
7SJ802*
[kl-uebers-7sx80-2, 1, en_US]
Figure B-2 Block diagram 7SJ802*
Terminal Assignments
B.1 7SJ80 — Housing for panel flush mounting and cubicle installation and for panel surface mounting
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 435
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
7SJ803*
[kl-uebers-7sx80-3, 1, en_US]
Figure B-3 Block diagram 7SJ803*
Terminal Assignments
B.1 7SJ80 — Housing for panel flush mounting and cubicle installation and for panel surface mounting
436 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
7SJ804*
[kl-uebers-7sx80-4, 1, en_US]
Figure B-4 Block diagram 7SJ804*
Terminal Assignments
B.1 7SJ80 — Housing for panel flush mounting and cubicle installation and for panel surface mounting
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 437
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
7SJ807*
[kl-uebers-7sx80-7, 1, en_US]
Figure B-5 Block diagram 7SJ807*
*) The shield of the connecting cable is connected directly to the shield cover
Terminal Assignments
B.1 7SJ80 — Housing for panel flush mounting and cubicle installation and for panel surface mounting
438 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
7SJ808*
[kl-uebers-7sx80-8, 1, en_US]
Figure B-6 Block diagram 7SJ808*
*) The shield of the connecting cable is connected directly to the shield cover.
Terminal Assignments
B.1 7SJ80 — Housing for panel flush mounting and cubicle installation and for panel surface mounting
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 439
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
440 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Connection Examples for Current and Voltage Transformers
[anschl-3-stromwdl-sternpunktstrom-060606, 1, en_US]
Figure C-1 Current transformer connections to three current transformers and neutral rpoint current
(ground current) (Holmgreen connection) – appropriate for all networks
[anschl-2-stromwdl-060606, 1, en_US]
Figure C-2 Current transformer connections to two current transformers – only for isolated or resonant-
grounded networks
[anschl-3-stromwdl-summenstromw-060606, 1, en_US]
Figure C-3 Current transformer connections to three current transformers, ground current from addi-
tional summation current transformer – preferably for effectively or low-resistance grounded
networks
C.1
Connection Examples
C.1 Connection Examples for Current and Voltage Transformers
442 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Important: Grounding of the cable shield must be effected at the cable side
The switchover of the current polarity (address 201) also reverses the polarity of the current input IN!
[anschl-2-stromwdl-kabelumbauw-060606, 1, en_US]
Figure C-4 Current transformer connections to two current transformers - additional cable-type current
transformer for sensitive ground fault detection - only for isolated or resonant-grounded
networks
Important: Grounding of the cable shield must be effected at the cable side
The switchover of the current polarity (address 201) also reverses the polarity of the current input IN!
[anschl-3-stromwdl-kabelumbauw-060606, 1, en_US]
Figure C-5 Current transformer connections to three current transformers - ground current from addi-
tional cable-type current transformer for sensitive ground fault detection
Important: Grounding of the cable shield must be effected at the cable side
The switchover of the current polarity (address 201) also reverses the polarity of the current input INs!
Connection Examples
C.1 Connection Examples for Current and Voltage Transformers
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 443
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[anschl-3-stromwdl-3-spannungsw-060606, 1, en_US]
Figure C-6 Transformer connections to three current transformers and three voltage transformers (phase-
to-ground voltages), normal circuit layout – appropriate for all networks
Connection Examples
C.1 Connection Examples for Current and Voltage Transformers
444 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[anschl-3-stromwdl-2-spannung-e-n-wickl-060606, 1, en_US]
Figure C-7 Transformer connections to three current transformers, two voltage transformers (phase-
tophase voltages) and broken delta winding (da-dn) – appropriate for all networks
Connection Examples
C.1 Connection Examples for Current and Voltage Transformers
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 445
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[anschl-2-stromwdl-v-schaltung-060606, 1, en_US]
Figure C-8 Current transformer connections to two current transformers and as open-delta connection
the voltage transformer – for isolated or resonant-grounded networks when no directional
ground protection is needed
[anschl-3-stromwdl-sternp-v-schaltung-060606, 1, en_US]
Figure C-9 Current transformer connections to three current transformers, two voltage transformers in
open-deltaconnection, only for isolated or resonant-grounded networks; no directional ground
protection since displacement voltage cannot be calculated
Note: If the system has only 2 voltage transformers (open-delta connection), the device, too, should be
connected in open-delta connection and the unused voltage input should be short-circuited.
Connection Examples
C.1 Connection Examples for Current and Voltage Transformers
446 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[anschl-3-stromwdl-kabelumbauw-e-n-wickl-060606, 1, en_US]
Figure C-10 Transformer connections to three current transformers, cable-type current transformer and
broken delta winding, maximum precision for sensitive ground fault detection
Important! Grounding of the cable shield must be effected at the cable side
For busbar-side grounding of the current transformers, the current polarity of the device is changed via
address 0201. This also reverses the polarity of the current input IN/INs. When using a cable-type current
transformer, the connection of k and I at F8 and F7 must be exchanged.
[stromwdl-2phasenstrwdl-1erdstrwdl-080211, 1, en_US]
Figure C-11 Current transformer connections to two phase-current transformers and a ground-current
transformer; the ground current is taken via the highly sensitive and sensitive ground input.
Connection Examples
C.1 Connection Examples for Current and Voltage Transformers
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 447
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Important! Grounding of the cable shield must be effected at the cable side
For busbar-side grounding of the current transformers, the current polarity of the device is changed via
address 0201. This also reverses the polarity of the current input IN/INs. When using a cable-type current
transformer, the connection of k and I at F8 and F7 must be exchanged.
[7sj80-mess-2erdstroeme-20070301, 1, en_US]
Figure C-12 Current transformer connections to two phase currents and two ground currents; IN/INs –
ground current of the line, IN2 – ground current of the transformer starpoint
Important! Grounding of the cable shield must be effected at the cable side
For busbar-side grounding of the current transformers, the current polarity of the device is changed via
address 0201. This also reverses the polarity of the current input IN/INs. When using a cable-type current
transformer, the connection of k and I at F8 and F7 must be exchanged.
Connection Examples
C.1 Connection Examples for Current and Voltage Transformers
448 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[hochimpedanz-trafowgeerdet-060606, 1, en_US]
Figure C-13 High-impedance differential protection for a grounded transformer winding (the illustration
shows the partial connection for high-impedance differential protection)
[anschl-u1e-u2e-u3e-abgang-20070129, 1, en_US]
Figure C-14 Example for the connection type "VAN, VBN, VCN" with voltage connection on the feeder side
[anschl-u12-u23-ue-20070129, 1, en_US]
Figure C-15 Voltage transformer connections to two voltage transformers (phase-to-phase voltages) and
broken delta winding (da-dn) – appropriate for all networks
Connection Examples
C.1 Connection Examples for Current and Voltage Transformers
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 449
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[anschl-u1e-u2e-u3e-ss-20070129, 1, en_US]
Figure C-16 Example for connection type "VAN, VBN, VCN" busbar-side voltage connection
[anschl-uph-usyn-20070129, 1, en_US]
Figure C-17 Example for connection type "Vph-n, Vsyn"
The connection can be established at any one of the three phases. The phase must be the same for Vph-n
and Vsyn.
Connection Examples
C.1 Connection Examples for Current and Voltage Transformers
450 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[anschl-u12-u23-ux-20070129, 1, en_US]
Figure C-18 Example for connection type "VAB, VBC, Vx"
[anschl-u12-u23-20070129, 1, en_US]
Figure C-19 Example for connection type "VAB, VBC"
Connection Examples
C.1 Connection Examples for Current and Voltage Transformers
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 451
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[anschl-u12-u23-v-schalt-20070129, 1, en_US]
Figure C-20 Example for connection type "VAB, VBC" with phase voltage connection as open-delta connec-
tion
[anschl-u12-u23-usyn-20070129, 1, en_US]
Figure C-21 Example for connection type "VAB, VBC, VSYN"
Connection Examples
C.1 Connection Examples for Current and Voltage Transformers
452 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[anschl-u12-u23-usyn-v-schalt-20070129, 1, en_US]
Figure C-22 Example for connection type "VAB, VBC, VSYN" with phase voltage connection as open-delta
connection
Connection Examples
C.1 Connection Examples for Current and Voltage Transformers
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 453
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Connection Examples for SICAM I/O Units
[sicam-io-unit-01-20120731-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure C-23 Connection of 2 SICAM I/O units to port A via Y cable (up to 2 SICAM I/O units connectable)
1 Y cable 7KE6000–8GD00–0BA2
2 RJ45 cable
C.2
Connection Examples
C.2 Connection Examples for SICAM I/O Units
454 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Current Transformer Requirements
The requirements for phase current transformers are usually determined by the overcurrent time protection,
particularly by the high-current element settings. Besides, there is a minimum requirement based on experi-
ence.
The recommendations are given according to the standard IEC 60044-1.
The standards IEC 60044-6, BS 3938 and ANSI/IEEE C 57.13 are referred to for converting the requirement into
the knee-point voltage and other transformer classes.
D.1 Accuracy limiting factors 456
D.2 Class conversion 457
D.3 Cable core balance current transformer 458
D
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 455
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Accuracy limiting factors
Betriebs- und Nennüberstromziffer
Required minimum effective accuracy limiting
factor
but at least 20
mit
n' Minimum effective accuracy limiting factor
Ι>>Anr Primary pickup value of the high-current
element
ΙpN Primary nominal transformer current
Resulting rated accuracy limiting factor
with
KALF Rated accuracy limiting factor
RBC Connected burden resistance (device and
cables)
RBN Nominal burden resistance
RCt Transformer internal burden resistance
Calculation example according to IEC 60044–1
ΙsNom = 1 A
KALF = 20
RBC = 0.6 Ω (device and cables)
RCt = 3 Ω
RBN = 5 Ω (5 VA)
KALF set to 10,
so that: 5P10, 5 VA
mit
ΙsNom = secondary transformer nominal current
D.1
Current Transformer Requirements
D.1 Accuracy limiting factors
456 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Class conversion
Table D-1 Conversion into other classes
British Standard BS 3938
ANSI/IEEE C 57.13, Klasse C
ΙsNom = 5 A (typical value)
IEC 60044-6 (transient response),
class TPS
Classes TPX, TPY, TPZ
K≈ 1
KSSC≈ KALF
Calaculation see Section above with: KSSC ≈ KALF
TP depending on power system and specified closing sequence
with
withkKnee-point voltage
RCt Internal burden resistance
RBN Nominal burden resistance
ΙsN Secondary nominal transformer current
KALF Rated accuracy limiting factor
Us.t.max Sec. terminal voltage at 20 ΙpNom
Ual Sec. magnetization limit voltage
K Dimensioning factor
KSSC Factor symmetr. Rated fault current
TPPrimary time constant
D.2
Current Transformer Requirements
D.2 Class conversion
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 457
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Cable core balance current transformer
General
The requirements to the cable core balance current transformer are determined by the function “sensitive
ground fault detection”.
The recommendations are given according to the standards IEC 60044-1 and IEC61869-2.
Requirements to the cable core balance current transformer according to IEC 60044-1 and IEC61869-2
Transformation ratio, typical
It may be necessary to select a different transformation ratio to
suit the specific power system and thus the corresponding
amount of the maximum ground fault current.
60 / 1
Accuracy limiting factor FS = 10
Power 1 to 4 times the connected burden (device
input plus infeeds)
Notes concerning the power:
The burden of the sensitive ground-current input is very low (0.05 VA or 0.1 VA). Thus, an underburden of
more than factor 4 is probable. In this case, clarify the suitability of the class accuracy concerning an impor-
tant underburden with the transformer manufacturer. If necessary, request the accuracy for the range from 0
VA to the rated burden. This specification is then outside the standard, but in practice, it is possible in most
cases.
(Relevant standard: IEC 61869-2, Chapter 5.6.201.4 Extended burden range. There, the range 1 VA to rated
burden is specified for rated burdens smaller than 15 VA.)
Class accuracy
Table D-2 Minimum required class accuracy depending on neutral grounding and function operating
principle
Starpoint isolated compensated high-resistance grounded
Function directional Class 1 Class 1 Class 1
Function non-directional Class 3 Class 1 Class 3
Note that the class accuracy according to IEC 61869-2 below 5% Irated (< 50 mA secondary) is not defined in
general. For very sensitive directional measurements, Siemens recommends the classes 0.5S or 0.1S that
define the class accuracy via an extended current range (up to 1% Irated) (see chapter 5.6.201.5, IEC 61869-2).
Another possibility is to correct the phase-angle error of the transformer on the device, if this error is known
(see function description Sensitive ground-fault detection).
D.3
Current Transformer Requirements
D.3 Cable core balance current transformer
458 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Default Settings and Protocol-dependent Functions
When the device leaves the factory, a large number of LED indications, binary inputs and outputs as well as
function keys are already preset. They are summarized in the following table.
E.1 LEDs 460
E.2 Binary Input 462
E.3 Binary Output 463
E.4 Function Keys 464
E.5 Default Display 465
E.6 Protocol-dependent Functions 468
E
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 459
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
LEDs
Table E-1 7SJ801*
LEDs Default function Function No. Description
LED1 Relay TRIP 511 Relay GENERAL TRIP command
LED2 50/51 Ph A PU 1762 50/51 Phase A picked up
LED3 50/51 Ph B PU 1763 50/51 Phase B picked up
LED4 50/51 Ph C PU 1764 50/51 Phase C picked up
LED5 50N/51NPickedup 1765 50N/51N picked up
LED6 Failure Σ I 162 Failure: Current Summation
Fail I balance 163 Failure: Current Balance
Fail Ph. Seq. I 175 Failure: Phase Sequence Current
LED7 Not configured 1 No Function configured
LED8 Brk OPENED Breaker OPENED
Table E-2 7SJ802*
LEDs Default function Function No. Description
LED1 Relay TRIP 511 Relay GENERAL TRIP command
LED2 50/51 Ph A PU 1762 50/51 Phase A picked up
LED3 50/51 Ph B PU 1763 50/51 Phase B picked up
LED4 50/51 Ph C PU 1764 50/51 Phase C picked up
LED5 50N/51NPickedup 1765 50N/51N picked up
LED6 Failure Σ I 162 Failure: Current Summation
Fail I balance 163 Failure: Current Balance
Fail Ph. Seq. I 175 Failure: Phase Sequence Current
LED7 Not configured 1 No Function configured
LED8 Brk OPENED Breaker OPENED
Table E-3 7SJ803*
LEDs Default function Function No. Description
LED1 Relay TRIP 511 Relay GENERAL TRIP command
LED2 50/51 Ph A PU 1762 50/51 Phase A picked up
67 A picked up 2692 67/67-TOC Phase A picked up
LED3 50/51 Ph B PU 1763 50/51 Phase B picked up
67 B picked up 2693 67/67-TOC Phase B picked up
LED4 50/51 Ph C PU 1764 50/51 Phase C picked up
67 C picked up 2694 67/67-TOC Phase C picked up
LED5 50N/51NPickedup 1765 50N/51N picked up
LED6 Failure Σ I 162 Failure: Current Summation
Fail I balance 163 Failure: Current Balance
Fail V balance 167 Failure: Voltage Balance
Fail Ph. Seq. I 175 Failure: Phase Sequence Current
Fail Ph. Seq. V 176 Failure: Phase Sequence Voltage
VT brk. wire 253 Failure VT circuit: broken wire
LED7 Not configured 1 No Function configured
LED8 Brk OPENED Breaker OPENED
E.1
Default Settings and Protocol-dependent Functions
E.1 LEDs
460 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Table E-4 7SJ804*
LEDs Default function Function No. Description
LED1 Relay TRIP 511 Relay GENERAL TRIP command
LED2 50/51 Ph A PU 1762 50/51 Phase A picked up
67 A picked up 2692 67/67-TOC Phase A picked up
LED3 50/51 Ph B PU 1763 50/51 Phase B picked up
67 B picked up 2693 67/67-TOC Phase B picked up
LED4 50/51 Ph C PU 1764 50/51 Phase C picked up
67 C picked up 2694 67/67-TOC Phase C picked up
LED5 50N/51NPickedup 1765 50N/51N picked up
67N picked up 2695 67N/67N-TOC picked up
LED6 Failure Σ I 162 Failure: Current Summation
Fail I balance 163 Failure: Current Balance
Fail V balance 167 Failure: Voltage Balance
Fail Ph. Seq. I 175 Failure: Phase Sequence Current
Fail Ph. Seq. V 176 Failure: Phase Sequence Voltage
VT brk. wire 253 Failure VT circuit: broken wire
LED7 Not configured 1 No Function configured
LED8 Brk OPENED Breaker OPENED
Default Settings and Protocol-dependent Functions
E.1 LEDs
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 461
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Binary Input
Table E-5 Binary input presettings for all devices and ordering variants
Binary Input Default function Function No. Description
BI1 >BLOCK 50-2 1721 >BLOCK 50-2
>BLOCK 50N-2 1724 >BLOCK 50N-2
BI2 >52-b 4602 >52-b contact (OPEN, if bkr is closed)
52Breaker 52 Breaker
BI3 >52-a 4601 >52-a contact (OPEN, if bkr is open)
52Breaker 52 Breaker
Table E-6 Further binary input presettings for 7SJ802* or 7SJ804*
Binary Input Default function Function No. Description
BI4 not pre-assigned - -
BI5 not pre-assigned - -
BI6 not pre-assigned - -
BI7 not pre-assigned - -
Table E-7 Further binary input presettings for 7SJ807* or 7SJ808*
Binary Input Default function Function No. Description
BI4 not pre-assigned - -
BI5 not pre-assigned - -
BI6 not pre-assigned - -
BI7 not pre-assigned - -
BI8 not pre-assigned - -
BI9 not pre-assigned - -
BI10 not pre-assigned - -
BI11 not pre-assigned - -
E.2
Default Settings and Protocol-dependent Functions
E.2 Binary Input
462 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Binary Output
Table E-8 Output Relay Presettings for All Devices and Ordering Variants
Binary Output Default function Function No. Description
BO1 Relay TRIP 511 Relay GENERAL TRIP command
52Breaker 52 Breaker
BO2 52Breaker 52 Breaker
79 Close 2851 79 - Close command
BO3 52Breaker 52 Breaker
79 Close 2851 79 - Close command
BO4 Failure Σ I 162 Failure: Current Summation
Fail I balance 163 Failure: Current Balance
Fail V balance 167 Failure: Voltage Balance
Fail Ph. Seq. I 175 Failure: Phase Sequence Current
Fail Ph. Seq. V 176 Failure: Phase Sequence Voltage
VT brk. wire 253 Failure VT circuit: broken wire
BO5 Relay PICKUP 501 Relay PICKUP
Table E-9 Further Output Relay Presettings for 7SJ802* or 7SJ804*
Binary Output Default function Function No. Description
BO6 not pre-assigned - -
BO7 not pre-assigned - -
BO8 not pre-assigned - -
E.3
Default Settings and Protocol-dependent Functions
E.3 Binary Output
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 463
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Function Keys
Table E-10 Applies to All Devices and Ordered Variants
Function Keys Default function
F1 Display of the operational indications
F2 Display of the primary operational measured values
F3 Display of the last fault log buffer
F4 not pre-assigned
F5 not pre-assigned
F6 not pre-assigned
F7 not pre-assigned
F8 not pre-assigned
F9 not pre-assigned
E.4
Default Settings and Protocol-dependent Functions
E.4 Function Keys
464 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Default Display
A number of pre-defined measured value pages are available depending on the device type. The start page of
the default display appearing after startup of the device can be selected in the device data via parameter 640
Start image DD auswählen.
for the 6-line Display of 7SJ80
[grundbild6zei-mit-u-ohne-erw-mw-20070116, 1, en_US]
Figure E-1 Default display of the 7SJ80 for models with V without extended measured values
E.5
Default Settings and Protocol-dependent Functions
E.5 Default Display
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 465
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
With the V0/IO ϕ measurement, the measured ground current IN2 is displayed under N and the ground current
IN or INs under Ns.
[grundbild6zei-mit-u-und-erw-mw-20070116, 1, en_US]
Figure E-2 Default display of the 7SJ80 for models with V with extended measured values
Default Settings and Protocol-dependent Functions
E.5 Default Display
466 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
[grundbild6zei-ohne-u-ohne-erw-mw-20070116, 1, en_US]
Figure E-3 Default display of the 7SJ80 for models without V and extended measured values
[grundbild6zei-ohne-u-und-erw-mw-20070116, 1, en_US]
Figure E-4 Default display of the 7SJ80 for models without V with extended measured values
Spontaneous Fault Display
After a fault has occurred, the most important fault data are automatically displayed after general device
pickup in the order shown in the picture below.
[anzeige-spontanmeldungen-im-display-des-geraetes-260602-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure E-5 Representation of spontaneous messages on the device display
Default Settings and Protocol-dependent Functions
E.5 Default Display
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 467
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Protocol-dependent Functions
Protocol → IEC
60870-5-1
03, single
IEC
60870-5-1
03, redun-
dant
IEC
60870-5-104
Ethernet (EN
100)
IEC 61850
Ethernet (EN
100)
PROFINET
Ethernet
(EN100)
Profibus
DP
DNP 3 TCP
Ethernet
(EN100)
DNP3.0
Modbus
ASCII/RTU
Function ↓
Operational
measured values
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Metered values Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Fault recording Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes No
Remote protec-
tion setting
No Yes No Yes No No No No
User-defined
indications and
switching
objects
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Time synchroni-
zation
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Messages with
time stamp
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Commissioning aids
Data transmis-
sion stop
Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No
Creating test
messages
Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No
Physical mode Asynchro-
nous
Asynchro-
nous
Synchronous Asynchro-
nous
Asynchro-
nous
Transmission
mode
cyclically/
event
cyclically/
event
cyclically cyclically/
event
cyclically cyclically cyclically/
event
cyclically/
event(DNP)
cycli-
cally(Modbus)
Baudrate 1 200 to
115 000
2 400 to
57 600
up to 100
MBaud
up to 100
MBaud
up to 100
MBaud
up to 1.5
MBaud
(Lichtwel-
lenleiter)
6 MBaud
(RS485)
up to 100
MBaud
9600 to
57600(DNP)
300 to
57600(Modbu
s)
Baud rate RS232
RS485
optical
fiber
RS485 Ethernet TP Ethernet TP
Ethernet
optical fiber
Ethernet
TP
RS485
optical
fiber
(double
ring)
Ethernet
TP
Ethernet
optical
fiber
RS485
optical fiber
E.6
Default Settings and Protocol-dependent Functions
E.6 Protocol-dependent Functions
468 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Functional Scope
Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments
103 Grp Chge OPTION Disabled
Enabled
Disabled Setting Group Change Option
104 OSC. FAULT REC. Disabled
Enabled
Enabled Oscillographic Fault Records
112 Charac. Phase Disabled
Definite Time
TOC IEC
TOC ANSI
Definite Time 50/51
113 Charac. Ground Disabled
Definite Time
TOC IEC
TOC ANSI
Definite Time 50N/51N
115 67/67-TOC Disabled
Definite Time
TOC IEC
TOC ANSI
Definite Time 67, 67-TOC
116 67N/67N-TOC Disabled
Definite Time
TOC IEC
TOC ANSI
Definite Time 67N, 67N-TOC
117 Coldload Pickup Disabled
Enabled
Disabled Cold Load Pickup
122 InrushRestraint Disabled
Enabled
Disabled 2nd Harmonic Inrush Restraint
127 50 1Ph Disabled
Enabled
Disabled 50 1Ph
130 S.Gnd.F.Dir.Ch cos φ / sin φ
V0/I0 φ mea.
cos φ / sin φ (sens.) Ground fault dir. character-
istic
131 Sens. Gnd Fault Disabled
Definite Time
User Defined PU
Disabled (sensitive) Ground fault
133 INTERM.EF Disabled
with Ignd
with 3I0
with Ignd,sens.
Disabled Intermittent earth fault protection
134 Dir. Interm. EF Disabled
Enabled
Disabled Dir. Intermittent earth fault
protection
135 E Flt(ext) Disabled
EPTR
Trans. Neutral
Disabled Earth Fault(extend)
140 46 Disabled
TOC ANSI
TOC IEC
Definite Time
Disabled 46 Negative Sequence Protection
142 49 Disabled
No ambient temp
No ambient temp 49 Thermal Overload Protection
F.1
Functions, Settings, Information
F.1 Functional Scope
470 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments
150 27/59 Disabled
Enabled
Disabled 27, 59 Under/Overvoltage Protec-
tion
154 81 O/U Disabled
Enabled
Disabled 81 Over/Underfrequency Protec-
tion
155 27/Q-Protection Disabled
Enabled
Disabled 27 / Q dir. con. Protection
161 25 Function 1 Disabled
SYNCHROCHECK
Disabled 25 Function group 1
170 50BF Disabled
Enabled
enabled w/ 3I0>
Disabled 50BF Breaker Failure Protection
171 79 Auto Recl. Disabled
Enabled
Disabled 79 Auto-Reclose Function
172 52 B.WEAR MONIT Disabled
Ix-Method
2P-Method
I2t-Method
Disabled 52 Breaker Wear Monitoring
180 Fault Locator Disabled
Enabled
Disabled Fault Locator
181 L-sections FL 1 Section
2 Sections
3 Sections
1 Section Line sections for fault locator
182 74 Trip Ct Supv Disabled
2 Binary Inputs
1 Binary Input
Disabled 74TC Trip Circuit Supervision
617 ServiProt (CM) Disabled
T103
DIGSI
T103 Port B usage
- FLEXIBLE FKT. 1...20 Flexible Funktion 01
Flexible Funktion 02
Flexible Funktion 03
Flexible Funktion 04
Flexible Funktion 05
Flexible Funktion 06
Flexible Funktion 07
Flexible Funktion 08
Flexible Funktion 09
Flexible Funktion 10
Flexible Funktion 11
Flexible Funktion 12
Flexible Funktion 13
Flexible Funktion 14
Flexible Funktion 15
Flexible Funktion 16
Flexible Funktion 17
Flexible Funktion 18
Flexible Funktion 19
Flexible Funktion 20
Bitte auswählen Flexible Funktionen 1...20
Functions, Settings, Information
F.1 Functional Scope
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 471
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Settings
Addresses which have an appended “A” can only be changed with DIGSI, under “Additional Settings”.
The table indicates region-specific default settings. Column C (configuration) indicates the corresponding
secondary nominal current of the current transformer.
Addr. Parameter Function C Setting Options Default Setting Comments
0 FLEXIBLE FUNC. Flx OFF
ON
Alarm Only
OFF Flexible Function
0 OPERRAT. MODE Flx 3-phase
1-phase
no reference
3-phase Mode of Operation
0 BLK f out of r Flx YES
NO
YES Block while Freq. is out of
range
0 MEAS. QUANTITY Flx Please select
Current
Voltage
P forward
P reverse
Q forward
Q reverse
Power factor
dV/dt rising
dV/dt falling
Frequency
df/dt rising
df/dt falling
Binray Input
Please select Selection of Measured
Quantity
0 MEAS. METHOD Flx Fundamental
True RMS
Positive seq.
Negative seq.
Zero sequence
Ratio I2/I1
Fundamental Selection of Measure-
ment Method
0 PICKUP WITH Flx Exceeding
Dropping below
Exceeding Pickup with
0 CURRENT Flx Ia
Ib
Ic
In
In sensitive
In2
Ia Current
F.2
Functions, Settings, Information
F.2 Settings
472 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Addr. Parameter Function C Setting Options Default Setting Comments
0 VOLTAGE Flx Please select
Va-n
Vb-n
Vc-n
Va-b
Vb-c
Vc-a
Vn
Vx
Please select Voltage
0 POWER Flx Ia Va-n
Ib Vb-n
Ic Vc-n
Ia Va-n Power
0 VOLTAGE SYSTEM Flx Phase-Phase
Phase-Ground
Phase-Phase Voltage System
0 P.U. THRESHOLD Flx 0.05 .. 40.00 A 2.00 A Pickup Threshold
0 P.U. THRESHOLD Flx 1A 0.05 .. 40.00 A 2.00 A Pickup Threshold
5A 0.25 .. 200.00 A 10.00 A
0 P.U. THRESHOLD Flx 1A 0.001 .. 1.500 A 0.100 A Pickup Threshold
5A 0.005 .. 7.500 A 0.500 A
0 P.U. THRESHOLD Flx 2.0 .. 260.0 V 110.0 V Pickup Threshold
0 P.U. THRESHOLD Flx 2.0 .. 200.0 V 110.0 V Pickup Threshold
0 P.U. THRESHOLD Flx 40.00 .. 60.00 Hz 51.00 Hz Pickup Threshold
0 P.U. THRESHOLD Flx 50.00 .. 70.00 Hz 61.00 Hz Pickup Threshold
0 P.U. THRESHOLD Flx 0.10 .. 20.00 Hz/s 5.00 Hz/s Pickup Threshold
0 P.U. THRESHOLD Flx 1A 2.0 .. 10000.0 W 200.0 W Pickup Threshold
5A 10.0 .. 50000.0 W 1000.0 W
0 P.U. THRESHOLD Flx 1A 2.0 .. 10000.0 VAR 200.0 VAR Pickup Threshold
5A 10.0 .. 50000.0 VAR 1000.0 VAR
0 P.U. THRESHOLD Flx -0.99 .. 0.99 0.50 Pickup Threshold
0 P.U. THRESHOLD Flx 15 .. 100 % 20 % Pickup Threshold
0 P.U. THRESHOLD Flx 4 .. 100 V/s 60 V/s Pickup Threshold
0 P.U. THRESHOLD Flx 2.0 .. 260.0 V 110.0 V Pickup Threshold
0 T TRIP DELAY Flx 0.00 .. 3600.00 sec 1.00 sec Trip Time Delay
0A T PICKUP DELAY Flx 0.00 .. 60.00 sec 0.00 sec Pickup Time Delay
0 T PICKUP DELAY Flx 0.00 ..
28800.00 sec
0.00 sec Pickup Time Delay
0A T DROPOUT DELAY Flx 0.00 .. 60.00 sec 0.00 sec Dropout Time Delay
0A BLK.by Vol.Loss Flx NO
YES
YES Block in case of Meas.-
Voltage Loss
0A DROPOUT RATIO Flx 0.70 .. 0.99 0.95 Dropout Ratio
0A DROPOUT RATIO Flx 1.01 .. 3.00 1.05 Dropout Ratio
0 DO differential Flx 0.02 .. 1.00 Hz 0.03 Hz Dropout differential
201 CT Starpoint P.System Data
1
towards Line
towards Busbar
towards Line CT Starpoint
202 Vnom PRIMARY P.System Data
1
0.10 .. 800.00 kV 20.00 kV Rated Primary Voltage
203 Vnom SECONDARY P.System Data
1
34 .. 225 V 100 V Rated Secondary Voltage
(L-L)
Functions, Settings, Information
F.2 Settings
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 473
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Addr. Parameter Function C Setting Options Default Setting Comments
204 CT PRIMARY P.System Data
1
10 .. 50000 A 400 A CT Rated Primary Current
205 CT SECONDARY P.System Data
1
1A
5A
1A CT Rated Secondary
Current
206A Vph / Vdelta P.System Data
1
1.00 .. 3.00 1.73 Matching ratio Phase-VT
To Open-Delta-VT
207 Vol. Symmetry P.System Data
1
NO
YES
NO Assumption voltage
symmetry
209 PHASE SEQ. P.System Data
1
A B C
A C B
A B C Phase Sequence
210A TMin TRIP CMD P.System Data
1
0.01 .. 32.00 sec 0.15 sec Minimum TRIP Command
Duration
211A TMax CLOSE CMD P.System Data
1
0.01 .. 32.00 sec 1.00 sec Maximum Close
Command Duration
212 BkrClosed I MIN P.System Data
1
1A 0.04 .. 1.00 A 0.04 A Closed Breaker Min.
Current Threshold
5A 0.20 .. 5.00 A 0.20 A
213 VT Connect. 3ph P.System Data
1
Van, Vbn, Vcn
Vab, Vbc, VGnd
Vab, Vbc, VSyn
Vab, Vbc
Vph-g, VSyn
Vab, Vbc, Vx
Van, Vbn, Vcn VT Connection, three-
phase
214 Rated Frequency P.System Data
1
50 Hz
60 Hz
50 Hz Rated Frequency
215 Distance Unit P.System Data
1
km
Miles
km Distance measurement
unit
217 Ignd-CT PRIM P.System Data
1
1 .. 50000 A 60 A Ignd-CT rated primary
current
218 Ignd-CT SEC P.System Data
1
1A
5A
1A Ignd-CT rated secondary
current
220 Threshold BI 1 P.System Data
1
Thresh. BI 176V
Thresh. BI 88V
Thresh. BI 19V
Thresh. BI 176V Threshold for Binary Input
1
221 Threshold BI 2 P.System Data
1
Thresh. BI 176V
Thresh. BI 88V
Thresh. BI 19V
Thresh. BI 176V Threshold for Binary Input
2
222 Threshold BI 3 P.System Data
1
Thresh. BI 176V
Thresh. BI 88V
Thresh. BI 19V
Thresh. BI 176V Threshold for Binary Input
3
223 Threshold BI 4 P.System Data
1
Thresh. BI 176V
Thresh. BI 88V
Thresh. BI 19V
Thresh. BI 176V Threshold for Binary Input
4
224 Threshold BI 5 P.System Data
1
Thresh. BI 176V
Thresh. BI 88V
Thresh. BI 19V
Thresh. BI 176V Threshold for Binary Input
5
225 Threshold BI 6 P.System Data
1
Thresh. BI 176V
Thresh. BI 88V
Thresh. BI 19V
Thresh. BI 176V Threshold for Binary Input
6
Functions, Settings, Information
F.2 Settings
474 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Addr. Parameter Function C Setting Options Default Setting Comments
226 Threshold BI 7 P.System Data
1
Thresh. BI 176V
Thresh. BI 88V
Thresh. BI 19V
Thresh. BI 176V Threshold for Binary Input
7
227 Threshold BI 8 P.System Data
1
Thresh. BI 176V
Thresh. BI 88V
Thresh. BI 19V
Thresh. BI 176V Threshold for Binary Input
8
228 Threshold BI 9 P.System Data
1
Thresh. BI 176V
Thresh. BI 88V
Thresh. BI 19V
Thresh. BI 176V Threshold for Binary Input
9
229 Threshold BI 10 P.System Data
1
Thresh. BI 176V
Thresh. BI 88V
Thresh. BI 19V
Thresh. BI 176V Threshold for Binary Input
10
230 Threshold BI 11 P.System Data
1
Thresh. BI 176V
Thresh. BI 88V
Thresh. BI 19V
Thresh. BI 176V Threshold for Binary Input
11
232 VXnom PRIMARY P.System Data
1
0.10 .. 800.00 kV 20.00 kV Rated Primary Voltage X
233 VXnom SECON-
DARY
P.System Data
1
100 .. 225 V 100 V Rated Secondary Voltage
X
235A ATEX100 P.System Data
1
NO
YES
YES Storage of th. Replicas
w/o Power Supply
238 Ignd2-CT PRIM. P.System Data
1
1 .. 50000 A 400 A Ignd2-CT rated primary c.
(conn. to I2)
239 Ignd2-CT SEC. P.System Data
1
1A
5A
1A Ignd2-CT rated secondary
current (I2)
250A 50/51 2-ph prot P.System Data
1
OFF
ON
OFF 50, 51 Time Overcurrent
with 2ph. prot.
251A CT Connect. P.System Data
1
A, B, C, (Gnd)
A,G2,C,G; G->B
A,G2,C,G; G2->B
A, B, C, (Gnd) CT Connection
252 Ph LPCT pol. P.System Data
1
not reversed
reversed
not reversed Phase LPCT orientation /
polarity
260 Ir-52 P.System Data
1
10 .. 50000 A 125 A Rated Normal Current (52
Breaker)
261 OP.CYCLES AT Ir P.System Data
1
100 .. 1000000 10000 Switching Cycles at Rated
Normal Current
262 Isc-52 P.System Data
1
10 .. 100000 A 25000 A Rated Short-Circuit
Breaking Current
263 OP.CYCLES Isc P.System Data
1
1 .. 1000 50 Switch. Cycles at Rated
Short-Cir. Curr.
264 Ix EXPONENT P.System Data
1
1.0 .. 3.0 2.0 Exponent for the Ix-
Method
265 Cmd.via control P.System Data
1
(Einstellmöglich-
keiten anwendung-
sabhängig)
none 52 B.Wear: Open Cmd.
via Control Device
266 T 52 BREAKTIME P.System Data
1
1 .. 600 ms 80 ms Breaktime (52 Breaker)
267 T 52 OPENING P.System Data
1
1 .. 500 ms 65 ms Opening Time (52
Breaker)
Functions, Settings, Information
F.2 Settings
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 475
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Addr. Parameter Function C Setting Options Default Setting Comments
280 Holmgr. for Σi P.System Data
1
NO
YES
NO Holmgreen-conn. (for fast
sum-i-monit.)
302 CHANGE Change Group Group A
Group B
Group C
Group D
Binary Input
Protocol
Group A Change to Another
Setting Group
310 Iph-PRIM ref. P.System Data
1
10 .. 50000 A 400 A Primary refer. phase
current for prot.
311 Iph-LPCT PRIM P.System Data
1
1 .. 5000 A 400 A Rated primary phase
current LPCT
312 Ignd-PRIM ref. P.System Data
1
1 .. 50000 A 60 A Primary refer. ground
current for prot.
313 Ignd-LPCT PRIM P.System Data
1
0.01 .. 5000.00 A 2.00 A Rated primary ground
current LPCT
314 Vph-LPCT SEC P.System Data
1
10.0 .. 1000.0 mV 225.0 mV Rated secondary phase
voltage LPCT
315 Vgnd-LPCT SEC P.System Data
1
10.0 .. 1000.0 mV 225.0 mV Rated secondary ground
voltage LPCT
320A Corr.factor IL1 P.System Data
1
0.9000 .. 1.1000 1.0000 Correction factor for
magnitude IL1
321A Corr.factor IL2 P.System Data
1
0.9000 .. 1.1000 1.0000 Correction factor for
magnitude IL2
322A Corr.factor IL3 P.System Data
1
0.9000 .. 1.1000 1.0000 Correction factor for
magnitude IL3
323A Corr.factor IE P.System Data
1
0.9000 .. 1.1000 1.0000 Correction factor for
magnitude IE
324A Corr.factor IEE P.System Data
1
0.9000 .. 1.1000 1.0000 Correction factor for
magnitude IEE
330 V-LPVT SEC P.System Data
1
3.00 .. 17.00 V 3.25 V rated secondary voltage
LPVT
332A V-LPVT PHA P.System Data
1
-10.00 .. 10.00 ° 0.00 ° phase angle LPVT
401 WAVEFORM-
TRIGGER
Osc. Fault Rec. Save w. Pickup
Save w. TRIP
Start w. TRIP
Save w. Pickup Waveform Capture
402 WAVEFORM DATA Osc. Fault Rec. Fault event
Pow.Sys.Flt.
Fault event Scope of Waveform Data
403 MAX. LENGTH Osc. Fault Rec. 0.30 .. 5.00 sec 2.00 sec Max. length of a Wave-
form Capture Record
404 PRE. TRIG. TIME Osc. Fault Rec. 0.05 .. 0.50 sec 0.25 sec Captured Waveform Prior
to Trigger
405 POST REC. TIME Osc. Fault Rec. 0.05 .. 0.50 sec 0.10 sec Captured Waveform after
Event
406 BinIn CAPT.TIME Osc. Fault Rec. 0.10 .. 5.00 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec Capture Time via Binary
Input
610 FltDisp.LED/LCD Device, General Target on PU
Target on TRIP
Target on PU Fault Display on LED / LCD
Functions, Settings, Information
F.2 Settings
476 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Addr. Parameter Function C Setting Options Default Setting Comments
611 Spont. FltDisp. Device, General YES
NO
NO Spontaneous display of
flt.annunciations
613A Gnd O/Cprot. w. P.System Data
1
Ignd (measured)
3I0 (calcul.)
Ignd (measured) Ground Overcurrent
protection with
614A OP. QUANTITY 59 P.System Data
1
Vphph
Vph-n
V1
V2
Vphph Opera. Quantity for 59
Overvolt. Prot.
615A OP. QUANTITY 27 P.System Data
1
V1
Vphph
Vph-n
V1 Opera. Quantity for 27
Undervolt. Prot.
616 STATIC GEN. P.System Data
1
YES
NO
NO Static or non self-exc.
Asyn. Generator
640 Start image DD Device, General image 1
image 2
image 3
image 4
image 5
image 6
image 1 Start image Default
Display
651 ParEN100(LC)blk Device, General OFF
ON
OFF DIGSI-config. over EN100
(LC) blocked
660 IP adr[0](Prim) Device, General 0 .. 255 0 IP address [0] (NTP-
Primary)
661 IP adr[1](Prim) Device, General 0 .. 255 0 IP address [1] (NTP-
Primary)
662 IP adr[2](Prim) Device, General 0 .. 255 0 IP address [2] (NTP-
Primary)
663 IP adr[3](Prim) Device, General 0 .. 255 0 IP address [3] (NTP-
Primary)
664 IP adr[0] (Sec) Device, General 0 .. 255 0 IP address [0] (NTP-
Sekundary)
665 IP adr[1] (Sec) Device, General 0 .. 255 0 IP address [1] (NTP-
Sekundary)
666 IP adr[2] (Sec) Device, General 0 .. 255 0 IP address [2] (NTP-
Sekundary)
667 IP adr[3] (Sec) Device, General 0 .. 255 0 IP address [3] (NTP-
Sekundary)
668 Client activ Device, General OFF
ON
OFF Client activ
669 Daylight Set Device, General OFF
ON
OFF Daylight Set
670 Offset TZ/min Device, General -1440 .. 1440 min 60 min Offset for time zone in
minutes
671 Offset DayT/min Device, General -1440 .. 1440 min 60 min Offset for daylight in
minutes
672 W2S month Device, General 1 .. 12 3 month of time set winter
to summer
673 W2S week Device, General 1 .. 5 5 week of time set winter
to summer
Functions, Settings, Information
F.2 Settings
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 477
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Addr. Parameter Function C Setting Options Default Setting Comments
674 W2S day Device, General Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
Sunday
Sunday day of time set winter to
summer
675 W2S hour Device, General 1 .. 24 2 hour of time set winter to
summer
676 S2W month Device, General 1 .. 12 10 month of time set
summer to winter
677 S2W week Device, General 1 .. 5 5 week of time set summer
to winter
678 S2W day Device, General Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
Sunday
Sunday day of time set summer
to winter
679 S2W hour Device, General 1 .. 24 3 hour of time set summer
to winter
700 GOOSE-Stop Device, General YES
NO
NO GOOSE-Stop
1101 FullScaleVolt. P.System Data
2
0.10 .. 800.00 kV 20.00 kV Measurem:FullScale-
Voltage(Equipm.rating)
1102 FullScaleCurr. P.System Data
2
10 .. 50000 A 400 A Measurem:FullScaleCur-
rent(Equipm.rating)
1103 RE/RL P.System Data
2
-0.33 .. 7.00 1.00 Zero seq. compensating
factor RE/RL
1104 XE/XL P.System Data
2
-0.33 .. 7.00 1.00 Zero seq. compensating
factor XE/XL
1105 x' P.System Data
2
1A 0.0050 ..
15.0000 Ω/mi
0.2420 Ω/mi feeder reactance per
mile: x'
5A 0.0010 ..
3.0000 Ω/mi
0.0484 Ω/mi
1106 x' P.System Data
2
1A 0.0050 ..
9.5000 Ω/km
0.1500 Ω/km feeder reactance per km:
x'
5A 0.0010 ..
1.9000 Ω/km
0.0300 Ω/km
1107 I MOTOR START P.System Data
2
1A 0.40 .. 10.00 A 2.50 A Motor Start Current
(Block 49, Start 48)
5A 2.00 .. 50.00 A 12.50 A
1108 P,Q sign P.System Data
2
not reversed
reversed
not reversed P,Q operational measured
values sign
1109 Line angle P.System Data
2
10 .. 89 ° 85 ° Line angle
1110 Line length P.System Data
2
0.1 .. 1000.0 km 100.0 km Line length in kilometer
1111 Line length P.System Data
2
0.1 .. 650.0 Miles 62.1 Miles Line length in miles
Functions, Settings, Information
F.2 Settings
478 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Addr. Parameter Function C Setting Options Default Setting Comments
1201 FCT 50/51 50/51 Overcur. ON
OFF
ON 50, 51 Phase Time Over-
current
1202 50-2 PICKUP 50/51 Overcur. 1A 0.10 .. 35.00 A; ∞ 4.00 A 50-2 Pickup
5A 0.50 .. 175.00 A; ∞ 20.00 A
1203 50-2 DELAY 50/51 Overcur. 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.00 sec 50-2 Time Delay
1204 50-1 PICKUP 50/51 Overcur. 1A 0.10 .. 35.00 A; ∞ 1.00 A 50-1 Pickup
5A 0.50 .. 175.00 A; ∞ 5.00 A
1205 50-1 DELAY 50/51 Overcur. 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec 50-1 Time Delay
1207 51 PICKUP 50/51 Overcur. 1A 0.10 .. 4.00 A 1.00 A 51 Pickup
5A 0.50 .. 20.00 A 5.00 A
1208 51 TIME DIAL 50/51 Overcur. 0.05 .. 3.20 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec 51 Time Dial
1209 51 TIME DIAL 50/51 Overcur. 0.50 .. 15.00 ; ∞ 5.00 51 Time Dial
1210 51 Drop-out 50/51 Overcur. Instantaneous
Disk Emulation
Disk Emulation Drop-out characteristic
1211 51 IEC CURVE 50/51 Overcur. Normal Inverse
Very Inverse
Extremely Inv.
Long Inverse
Normal Inverse IEC Curve
1212 51 ANSI CURVE 50/51 Overcur. Very Inverse
Inverse
Short Inverse
Long Inverse
Moderately Inv.
Extremely Inv.
Definite Inv.
Very Inverse ANSI Curve
1213A MANUAL CLOSE 50/51 Overcur. 50-3 instant.
50-2 instant.
50 -1 instant.
51 instant.
Inactive
50-2 instant. Manual Close Mode
1214A 50-2 active 50/51 Overcur. Always
with 79 active
Always 50-2 active
1215A 50 T DROP-OUT 50/51 Overcur. 0.00 .. 60.00 sec 0.00 sec 50 Drop-Out Time Delay
1216A 50-3 active 50/51 Overcur. Always
with 79 active
Always 50-3 active
1217 50-3 PICKUP 50/51 Overcur. 1A 1.00 .. 35.00 A; ∞ ∞ A 50-3 Pickup
5A 5.00 .. 175.00 A; ∞ ∞ A
1218 50-3 DELAY 50/51 Overcur. 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.00 sec 50-3 Time Delay
1219A 50-3 measurem. 50/51 Overcur. Fundamental
True RMS
Instantaneous
Fundamental 50-3 measurement of
1220A 50-2 measurem. 50/51 Overcur. Fundamental
True RMS
Fundamental 50-2 measurement of
1221A 50-1 measurem. 50/51 Overcur. Fundamental
True RMS
Fundamental 50-1 measurement of
1222A 51 measurem. 50/51 Overcur. Fundamental
True RMS
Fundamental 51 measurement of
Functions, Settings, Information
F.2 Settings
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 479
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Addr. Parameter Function C Setting Options Default Setting Comments
1223 VOLT. INFLUENCE 50/51 Overcur. NO
Volt. controll.
Volt. restraint
NO 51V Voltage Influence
1224 51V V< 50/51 Overcur. 10.0 .. 125.0 V 75.0 V 51V V< Threshold for
Release Ip
1301 FCT 50N/51N 50/51 Overcur. ON
OFF
ON 50N, 51N Ground Time
Overcurrent
1302 50N-2 PICKUP 50/51 Overcur. 1A 0.05 .. 35.00 A; ∞ 0.50 A 50N-2 Pickup
5A 0.25 .. 175.00 A; ∞ 2.50 A
1303 50N-2 DELAY 50/51 Overcur. 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.10 sec 50N-2 Time Delay
1304 50N-1 PICKUP 50/51 Overcur. 1A 0.05 .. 35.00 A; ∞ 0.20 A 50N-1 Pickup
5A 0.25 .. 175.00 A; ∞ 1.00 A
1305 50N-1 DELAY 50/51 Overcur. 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec 50N-1 Time Delay
1307 51N PICKUP 50/51 Overcur. 1A 0.05 .. 4.00 A 0.20 A 51N Pickup
5A 0.25 .. 20.00 A 1.00 A
1308 51N TIME DIAL 50/51 Overcur. 0.05 .. 3.20 sec; ∞ 0.20 sec 51N Time Dial
1309 51N TIME DIAL 50/51 Overcur. 0.50 .. 15.00 ; ∞ 5.00 51N Time Dial
1310 51N Drop-out 50/51 Overcur. Instantaneous
Disk Emulation
Disk Emulation Drop-Out Characteristic
1311 51N IEC CURVE 50/51 Overcur. Normal Inverse
Very Inverse
Extremely Inv.
Long Inverse
Normal Inverse IEC Curve
1312 51N ANSI CURVE 50/51 Overcur. Very Inverse
Inverse
Short Inverse
Long Inverse
Moderately Inv.
Extremely Inv.
Definite Inv.
Very Inverse ANSI Curve
1313A MANUAL CLOSE 50/51 Overcur. 50N-3 instant.
50N-2 instant.
50N-1 instant.
51N instant.
Inactive
50N-2 instant. Manual Close Mode
1314A 50N-2 active 50/51 Overcur. Always
With 79 Active
Always 50N-2 active
1315A 50N T DROP-OUT 50/51 Overcur. 0.00 .. 60.00 sec 0.00 sec 50N Drop-Out Time Delay
1316A 50N-3 active 50/51 Overcur. Always
with 79 active
Always 50N-3 active
1317 50N-3 PICKUP 50/51 Overcur. 0.25 .. 35.00 A; ∞ ∞ A 50N-3 Pickup
1318 50N-3 DELAY 50/51 Overcur. 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.05 sec 50N-3 Time Delay
1319A 50N-3 measurem. 50/51 Overcur. Fundamental
True RMS
Instantaneous
Fundamental 50N-3 measurement of
1320A 50N-2 measurem. 50/51 Overcur. Fundamental
True RMS
Fundamental 50N-2 measurement of
Functions, Settings, Information
F.2 Settings
480 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Addr. Parameter Function C Setting Options Default Setting Comments
1321A 50N-1 measurem. 50/51 Overcur. Fundamental
True RMS
Fundamental 50N-1 measurement of
1322A 51N measurem. 50/51 Overcur. Fundamental
True RMS
Fundamental 51N measurement of
1501 FCT 67/67-TOC 67 Direct. O/C OFF
ON
OFF 67, 67-TOC Phase Time
Overcurrent
1502 67-2 PICKUP 67 Direct. O/C 1A 0.10 .. 35.00 A; ∞ 2.00 A 67-2 Pickup
5A 0.50 .. 175.00 A; ∞ 10.00 A
1503 67-2 DELAY 67 Direct. O/C 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.10 sec 67-2 Time Delay
1504 67-1 PICKUP 67 Direct. O/C 1A 0.10 .. 35.00 A; ∞ 1.00 A 67-1 Pickup
5A 0.50 .. 175.00 A; ∞ 5.00 A
1505 67-1 DELAY 67 Direct. O/C 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec 67-1Time Delay
1507 67-TOC PICKUP 67 Direct. O/C 1A 0.10 .. 4.00 A 1.00 A 67-TOC Pickup
5A 0.50 .. 20.00 A 5.00 A
1508 67 TIME DIAL 67 Direct. O/C 0.05 .. 3.20 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec 67-TOC Time Dial
1509 67 TIME DIAL 67 Direct. O/C 0.50 .. 15.00 ; ∞ 5.00 67-TOC Time Dial
1510 67-TOC Drop-out 67 Direct. O/C Instantaneous
Disk Emulation
Disk Emulation Drop-Out Characteristic
1511 67- IEC CURVE 67 Direct. O/C Normal Inverse
Very Inverse
Extremely Inv.
Long Inverse
Normal Inverse IEC Curve
1512 67- ANSI CURVE 67 Direct. O/C Very Inverse
Inverse
Short Inverse
Long Inverse
Moderately Inv.
Extremely Inv.
Definite Inv.
Very Inverse ANSI Curve
1513A MANUAL CLOSE 67 Direct. O/C 67-3 instant.
67-2 instant.
67-1 instant.
67-TOC instant.
Inactive
67-2 instant. Manual Close Mode
1514A 67-2 active 67 Direct. O/C with 79 active
always
always 67-2 active
1518A 67 T DROP-OUT 67 Direct. O/C 0.00 .. 60.00 sec 0.00 sec 67 Drop-Out Time Delay
1519A ROTATION ANGLE 67 Direct. O/C -180 .. 180 ° 45 ° Rotation Angle of Refer-
ence Voltage
1520A 67-2 MEASUREM. 67 Direct. O/C Fundamental
True RMS
Fundamental 67-2 measurement of
1521A 67-1 MEASUREM. 67 Direct. O/C Fundamental
True RMS
Fundamental 67-1 measurement of
1522A 67-TOC MEASUR. 67 Direct. O/C Fundamental
True RMS
Fundamental 67-TOC measurement of
1523 67-2 Direction 67 Direct. O/C Forward
Reverse
Non-Directional
Forward 67-2 Direction
Functions, Settings, Information
F.2 Settings
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 481
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Addr. Parameter Function C Setting Options Default Setting Comments
1524 67-1 Direction 67 Direct. O/C Forward
Reverse
Non-Directional
Forward 67-1 Direction
1525 67-TOC Direct. 67 Direct. O/C Forward
Reverse
Non-Directional
Forward 67-TOC Direction
1526 67-3 Direction 67 Direct. O/C Forward
Reverse
Non-Directional
Forward 67-3 Direction
1527A 67-3 MEASUREM. 67 Direct. O/C Fundamental
True RMS
Fundamental 67-3 measurement of
1528 67-3 PICKUP 67 Direct. O/C 1A 1.00 .. 35.00 A; ∞ ∞ A 67-3 Pickup
5A 5.00 .. 175.00 A; ∞ ∞ A
1529 67-3 DELAY 67 Direct. O/C 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.00 sec 67-3 Time Delay
1530 67 67 Direct. O/C 1.00 .. 20.00 I/Ip; ∞
0.01 .. 999.00 TD
67
1531 MofPU Res T/Tp 67 Direct. O/C 0.05 .. 0.95 I/Ip; ∞
0.01 .. 999.00 TD
Multiple of Pickup <->
T/Tp
1532A 67-3 active 67 Direct. O/C always
with 79 active
always 67-3 active
1601 FCT 67N/67N-TOC 67 Direct. O/C OFF
ON
OFF 67N, 67N-TOC Ground
Time Overcurrent
1602 67N-2 PICKUP 67 Direct. O/C 1A 0.05 .. 35.00 A; ∞ 0.50 A 67N-2 Pickup
5A 0.25 .. 175.00 A; ∞ 2.50 A
1603 67N-2 DELAY 67 Direct. O/C 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.10 sec 67N-2 Time Delay
1604 67N-1 PICKUP 67 Direct. O/C 1A 0.05 .. 35.00 A; ∞ 0.20 A 67N-1 Pickup
5A 0.25 .. 175.00 A; ∞ 1.00 A
1605 67N-1 DELAY 67 Direct. O/C 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec 67N-1 Time Delay
1607 67N-TOC PICKUP 67 Direct. O/C 1A 0.05 .. 4.00 A 0.20 A 67N-TOC Pickup
5A 0.25 .. 20.00 A 1.00 A
1608 67N-TOC T-DIAL 67 Direct. O/C 0.05 .. 3.20 sec; ∞ 0.20 sec 67N-TOC Time Dial
1609 67N-TOC T-DIAL 67 Direct. O/C 0.50 .. 15.00 ; ∞ 5.00 67N-TOC Time Dial
1610 67N-TOC DropOut 67 Direct. O/C Instantaneous
Disk Emulation
Disk Emulation Drop-Out Characteristic
1611 67N-TOC IEC 67 Direct. O/C Normal Inverse
Very Inverse
Extremely Inv.
Long Inverse
Normal Inverse IEC Curve
1612 67N-TOC ANSI 67 Direct. O/C Very Inverse
Inverse
Short Inverse
Long Inverse
Moderately Inv.
Extremely Inv.
Definite Inv.
Very Inverse ANSI Curve
Functions, Settings, Information
F.2 Settings
482 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Addr. Parameter Function C Setting Options Default Setting Comments
1613A MANUAL CLOSE 67 Direct. O/C 67N-3 instant.
67N-2 instant.
67N-1 instant.
67N-TOC instant
Inactive
67N-2 instant. Manual Close Mode
1614A 67N-2 active 67 Direct. O/C always
with 79 active
always 67N-2 active
1617 67N POLARIZAT. 67 Direct. O/C with VN and IN
with V2 and I2
with VN and IN Ground Polarization
1618A 67N T DROP-OUT 67 Direct. O/C 0.00 .. 60.00 sec 0.00 sec 67N Drop-Out Time Delay
1619A ROTATION ANGLE 67 Direct. O/C -180 .. 180 ° -45 ° Rotation Angle of Refer-
ence Voltage
1620A 67N-2 MEASUREM. 67 Direct. O/C Fundamental
True RMS
Fundamental 67N-2 measurement of
1621A 67N-1 MEASUREM. 67 Direct. O/C Fundamental
True RMS
Fundamental 67N-1 measurement of
1622A 67N-TOC MEASUR. 67 Direct. O/C Fundamental
True RMS
Fundamental 67N-TOC measurement
of
1623 67N-2 Direction 67 Direct. O/C Forward
Reverse
Non-Directional
Forward 67N-2 Direction
1624 67N-1 Direction 67 Direct. O/C Forward
Reverse
Non-Directional
Forward 67N-1 Direction
1625 67N-TOC Direct. 67 Direct. O/C Forward
Reverse
Non-Directional
Forward 67N-TOC Direction
1626 67N-3 Direction 67 Direct. O/C Forward
Reverse
Non-Directional
Forward 67N-3 Direction
1627A 67N-3 MEASUREM. 67 Direct. O/C Fundamental
True RMS
Fundamental 67N-3 measurement of
1628 67N-3 PICKUP 67 Direct. O/C 0.50 .. 35.00 A; ∞ ∞ A 67N-3 Pickup
1629 67N-3 DELAY 67 Direct. O/C 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.00 sec 67N-3 Time Delay
1630 M.of PU TD 67 Direct. O/C 1.00 .. 20.00 I/Ip; ∞
0.01 .. 999.00 TD
Multiples of PU Time-Dial
1631 I/IEp Rf T/TEp 67 Direct. O/C 0.05 .. 0.95 I/Ip; ∞
0.01 .. 999.00 TD
67N TOC
1632A 67N-3 active 67 Direct. O/C always
with 79 active
always 67N-3 active
1701 COLDLOAD PICKUP ColdLoadPickup OFF
ON
OFF Cold-Load-Pickup Func-
tion
1702 Start Condition ColdLoadPickup No Current
Breaker Contact
79 ready
No Current Start Condition
1703 CB Open Time ColdLoadPickup 0 .. 21600 sec 3600 sec Circuit Breaker OPEN
Time
1704 Active Time ColdLoadPickup 0 .. 21600 sec 3600 sec Active Time
Functions, Settings, Information
F.2 Settings
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 483
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Addr. Parameter Function C Setting Options Default Setting Comments
1705 Stop Time ColdLoadPickup 1 .. 600 sec; ∞ 600 sec Stop Time
1801 50c-2 PICKUP ColdLoadPickup 1A 0.10 .. 35.00 A; ∞ 10.00 A 50c-2 Pickup
5A 0.50 .. 175.00 A; ∞ 50.00 A
1802 50c-2 DELAY ColdLoadPickup 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.00 sec 50c-2 Time Delay
1803 50c-1 PICKUP ColdLoadPickup 1A 0.10 .. 35.00 A; ∞ 2.00 A 50c-1 Pickup
5A 0.50 .. 175.00 A; ∞ 10.00 A
1804 50c-1 DELAY ColdLoadPickup 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.30 sec 50c-1 Time Delay
1805 51c PICKUP ColdLoadPickup 1A 0.10 .. 4.00 A 1.50 A 51c Pickup
5A 0.50 .. 20.00 A 7.50 A
1806 51c TIME DIAL ColdLoadPickup 0.05 .. 3.20 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec 51c Time dial
1807 51c TIME DIAL ColdLoadPickup 0.50 .. 15.00 ; ∞ 5.00 51c Time dial
1808 50c-3 PICKUP ColdLoadPickup 1A 1.00 .. 35.00 A; ∞ ∞ A 50c-3 Pickup
5A 5.00 .. 175.00 A; ∞ ∞ A
1809 50c-3 DELAY ColdLoadPickup 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.00 sec 50c-3 Time Delay
1901 50Nc-2 PICKUP ColdLoadPickup 1A 0.05 .. 35.00 A; ∞ 7.00 A 50Nc-2 Pickup
5A 0.25 .. 175.00 A; ∞ 35.00 A
1902 50Nc-2 DELAY ColdLoadPickup 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.00 sec 50Nc-2 Time Delay
1903 50Nc-1 PICKUP ColdLoadPickup 1A 0.05 .. 35.00 A; ∞ 1.50 A 50Nc-1 Pickup
5A 0.25 .. 175.00 A; ∞ 7.50 A
1904 50Nc-1 DELAY ColdLoadPickup 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.30 sec 50Nc-1 Time Delay
1905 51Nc PICKUP ColdLoadPickup 1A 0.05 .. 4.00 A 1.00 A 51Nc Pickup
5A 0.25 .. 20.00 A 5.00 A
1906 51Nc T-DIAL ColdLoadPickup 0.05 .. 3.20 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec 51Nc Time Dial
1907 51Nc T-DIAL ColdLoadPickup 0.50 .. 15.00 ; ∞ 5.00 51Nc Time Dial
1908 50Nc-3 PICKUP ColdLoadPickup 0.05 .. 35.00 A; ∞ ∞ A 50Nc-3 Pickup
1909 50Nc-3 DELAY ColdLoadPickup 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.00 sec 50Nc-3 Time Delay
2001 67c-2 PICKUP ColdLoadPickup 1A 0.10 .. 35.00 A; ∞ 10.00 A 67c-2 Pickup
5A 0.50 .. 175.00 A; ∞ 50.00 A
2002 67c-2 DELAY ColdLoadPickup 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.00 sec 67c-2 Time Delay
2003 67c-1 PICKUP ColdLoadPickup 1A 0.10 .. 35.00 A; ∞ 2.00 A 67c-1 Pickup
5A 0.50 .. 175.00 A; ∞ 10.00 A
2004 67c-1 DELAY ColdLoadPickup 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.30 sec 67c-1 Time Delay
2005 67c-TOC PICKUP ColdLoadPickup 1A 0.10 .. 4.00 A 1.50 A 67c Pickup
5A 0.50 .. 20.00 A 7.50 A
2006 67c-TOC T-DIAL ColdLoadPickup 0.05 .. 3.20 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec 67c Time Dial
2007 67c-TOC T-DIAL ColdLoadPickup 0.50 .. 15.00 ; ∞ 5.00 67c Time Dial
2008 67c-3 PICKUP ColdLoadPickup 1A 1.00 .. 35.00 A; ∞ ∞ A 67c-3 Pickup
5A 5.00 .. 175.00 A; ∞ ∞ A
2009 67c-3 DELAY ColdLoadPickup 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.00 sec 67c-3 Time Delay
2101 67Nc-2 PICKUP ColdLoadPickup 1A 0.05 .. 35.00 A; ∞ 7.00 A 67Nc-2 Pickup
5A 0.25 .. 175.00 A; ∞ 35.00 A
2102 67Nc-2 DELAY ColdLoadPickup 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.00 sec 67Nc-2 Time Delay
2103 67Nc-1 PICKUP ColdLoadPickup 1A 0.05 .. 35.00 A; ∞ 1.50 A 67Nc-1 Pickup
5A 0.25 .. 175.00 A; ∞ 7.50 A
2104 67Nc-1 DELAY ColdLoadPickup 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.30 sec 67Nc-1 Time Delay
2105 67Nc-TOC PICKUP ColdLoadPickup 1A 0.05 .. 4.00 A 1.00 A 67Nc-TOC Pickup
5A 0.25 .. 20.00 A 5.00 A
Functions, Settings, Information
F.2 Settings
484 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Addr. Parameter Function C Setting Options Default Setting Comments
2106 67Nc-TOC T-DIAL ColdLoadPickup 0.05 .. 3.20 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec 67Nc-TOC Time Dial
2107 67Nc-TOC T-DIAL ColdLoadPickup 0.50 .. 15.00 ; ∞ 5.00 67Nc-TOC Time Dial
2108 67Nc-3 PICKUP ColdLoadPickup 0.25 .. 35.00 A; ∞ ∞ A 67Nc-3 Pickup
2109 67Nc-3 DELAY ColdLoadPickup 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.00 sec 67Nc-3 Time Delay
2201 INRUSH REST. 50/51 Overcur. OFF
ON
OFF Inrush Restraint
2202 2nd HARMONIC 50/51 Overcur. 10 .. 45 % 15 % 2nd. harmonic in % of
fundamental
2203 CROSS BLOCK 50/51 Overcur. NO
YES
NO Cross Block
2204 CROSS BLK TIMER 50/51 Overcur. 0.00 .. 180.00 sec 0.00 sec Cross Block Time
2205 I Max 50/51 Overcur. 1A 0.30 .. 25.00 A 7.50 A Maximum Current for
Inrush Restraint
5A 1.50 .. 125.00 A 37.50 A
2701 50 1Ph 50 1Ph OFF
ON
OFF 50 1Ph
2703 50 1Ph-2 PICKUP 50 1Ph 1A 0.001 .. 1.600 A; ∞ 0.300 A 50 1Ph-2 Pickup
5A 0.005 .. 8.000 A; ∞ 1.500 A
2704 50 1Ph-2 DELAY 50 1Ph 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.10 sec 50 1Ph-2 Time Delay
2706 50 1Ph-1 PICKUP 50 1Ph 1A 0.001 .. 1.600 A; ∞ 0.100 A 50 1Ph-1 Pickup
5A 0.005 .. 8.000 A; ∞ 0.500 A
2707 50 1Ph-1 DELAY 50 1Ph 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec 50 1Ph-1 Time Delay
3101 Sens. Gnd Fault Sens. Gnd Fault OFF
ON
ON with GF log
Alarm Only
OFF (Sensitive) Ground Fault
3102 CT Err. I1 Sens. Gnd Fault 1A 0.001 .. 1.600 A 0.050 A Current I1 for CT Angle
Error
5A 0.005 .. 8.000 A 0.250 A
3102 CT Err. I1 Sens. Gnd Fault 1A 0.05 .. 35.00 A 1.00 A Current I1 for CT Angle
Error
5A 0.25 .. 175.00 A 5.00 A
3103 CT Err. F1 Sens. Gnd Fault 0.0 .. 5.0 ° 0.0 ° CT Angle Error at I1
3104 CT Err. I2 Sens. Gnd Fault 1A 0.001 .. 1.600 A 1.000 A Current I2 for CT Angle
Error
5A 0.005 .. 8.000 A 5.000 A
3104 CT Err. I2 Sens. Gnd Fault 1A 0.05 .. 35.00 A 10.00 A Current I2 for CT Angle
Error
5A 0.25 .. 175.00 A 50.00 A
3105 CT Err. F2 Sens. Gnd Fault 0.0 .. 5.0 ° 0.0 ° CT Angle Error at I2
3106 VPH MIN Sens. Gnd Fault 10 .. 100 V 40 V L-Gnd Voltage of Faulted
Phase Vph Min
3107 VPH MAX Sens. Gnd Fault 10 .. 100 V 75 V L-Gnd Voltage of
Unfaulted Phase Vph Max
3109 64-1 VGND Sens. Gnd Fault 1.8 .. 200.0 V; ∞ 40.0 V 64-1 Ground Displace-
ment Voltage
3110 64-1 VGND Sens. Gnd Fault 10.0 .. 225.0 V; ∞ 70.0 V 64-1 Ground Displace-
ment Voltage
3111 T-DELAY Pickup Sens. Gnd Fault 0.04 .. 320.00 sec;
∞
1.00 sec Time-DELAY Pickup
3112 64-1 DELAY Sens. Gnd Fault 0.10 ..
40000.00 sec; ∞
10.00 sec 64-1 Time Delay
Functions, Settings, Information
F.2 Settings
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 485
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Addr. Parameter Function C Setting Options Default Setting Comments
3113 50Ns-2 PICKUP Sens. Gnd Fault 1A 0.001 .. 1.600 A 0.300 A 50Ns-2 Pickup
5A 0.005 .. 8.000 A 1.500 A
3113 50Ns-2 PICKUP Sens. Gnd Fault 1A 0.05 .. 35.00 A 10.00 A 50Ns-2 Pickup
5A 0.25 .. 175.00 A 50.00 A
3114 50Ns-2 DELAY Sens. Gnd Fault 0.00 .. 320.00 sec;
∞
1.00 sec 50Ns-2 Time Delay
3115 67Ns-2 DIRECT Sens. Gnd Fault Forward
Reverse
Non-Directional
Forward 67Ns-2 Direction
3117 50Ns-1 PICKUP Sens. Gnd Fault 1A 0.001 .. 1.600 A 0.100 A 50Ns-1 Pickup
5A 0.005 .. 8.000 A 0.500 A
3117 50Ns-1 PICKUP Sens. Gnd Fault 1A 0.05 .. 35.00 A 2.00 A 50Ns-1 Pickup
5A 0.25 .. 175.00 A 10.00 A
3118 50Ns-1 DELAY Sens. Gnd Fault 0.00 .. 320.00 sec;
∞
2.00 sec 50Ns-1 Time delay
3119 51Ns PICKUP Sens. Gnd Fault 1A 0.001 .. 1.400 A 0.100 A 51Ns Pickup
5A 0.005 .. 7.000 A 0.500 A
3119 51Ns PICKUP Sens. Gnd Fault 1A 0.05 .. 4.00 A 1.00 A 51Ns Pickup
5A 0.25 .. 20.00 A 5.00 A
3120 51NsTIME DIAL Sens. Gnd Fault 0.10 .. 4.00 sec; ∞ 1.00 sec 51Ns Time Dial
3121A 50Ns T DROP-OUT Sens. Gnd Fault 0.00 .. 60.00 sec 0.00 sec 50Ns Drop-Out Time
Delay
3122 67Ns-1 DIRECT. Sens. Gnd Fault Forward
Reverse
Non-Directional
Forward 67Ns-1 Direction
3123 RELEASE DIRECT. Sens. Gnd Fault 1A 0.001 .. 1.200 A 0.010 A Release directional
element
5A 0.005 .. 6.000 A 0.050 A
3123 RELEASE DIRECT. Sens. Gnd Fault 1A 0.05 .. 30.00 A 0.50 A Release directional
element
5A 0.25 .. 150.00 A 2.50 A
3124 PHI CORRECTION Sens. Gnd Fault -45.0 .. 45.0 ° 0.0 ° Correction Angle for Dir.
Determination
3125 MEAS. METHOD Sens. Gnd Fault COS φ
SIN φ
COS φ Measurement method for
Direction
3126 RESET DELAY Sens. Gnd Fault 0 .. 60 sec 1 sec Reset Delay
3130 PU CRITERIA Sens. Gnd Fault Vgnd OR INs
Vgnd AND INs
Vgnd OR INs Sensitive Ground Fault
PICKUP criteria
3131 M.of PU TD Sens. Gnd Fault 1.00 ..
20.00 MofPU; ∞
0.01 .. 999.00 TD
Multiples of PU Time-Dial
3150 50Ns-2 Vmin Sens. Gnd Fault 0.4 .. 50.0 V 2.0 V 50Ns-2 minimum voltage
3150 50Ns-2 Vmin Sens. Gnd Fault 10.0 .. 90.0 V 10.0 V 50Ns-2 minimum voltage
3151 50Ns-2 Phi Sens. Gnd Fault -180.0 .. 180.0 ° -90.0 ° 50Ns-2 angle phi
3152 50Ns-2 DeltaPhi Sens. Gnd Fault 0.0 .. 180.0 ° 30.0 ° 50Ns-2 angle delta phi
3153 50Ns-1 Vmin Sens. Gnd Fault 0.4 .. 50.0 V 6.0 V 50Ns-1 minimum voltage
3153 50Ns-1 Vmin Sens. Gnd Fault 10.0 .. 90.0 V 15.0 V 50Ns-1 minimum voltage
3154 50Ns-1 Phi Sens. Gnd Fault -180.0 .. 180.0 ° -160.0 ° 50Ns-1 angle phi
3155 50Ns-1 DeltaPhi Sens. Gnd Fault 0.0 .. 180.0 ° 100.0 ° 50Ns-1 angle delta phi
Functions, Settings, Information
F.2 Settings
486 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Addr. Parameter Function C Setting Options Default Setting Comments
3160 α1 red.dir.area Sens. Gnd Fault 1 .. 15 ° 2 ° Alpha1 (reduction direc-
tional area)
3161 α2 red.dir.area Sens. Gnd Fault 1 .. 15 ° 2 ° Alpha2 (reduction direc-
tional area)
3301 INTERM.EF Intermit. EF OFF
ON
OFF Intermittent earth fault
protection
3302 Iie> Intermit. EF 1A 0.05 .. 35.00 A 1.00 A Pick-up value of interm.
E/F stage
5A 0.25 .. 175.00 A 5.00 A
3302 Iie> Intermit. EF 1A 0.05 .. 35.00 A 1.00 A Pick-up value of interm.
E/F stage
5A 0.25 .. 175.00 A 5.00 A
3302 Iie> Intermit. EF 0.005 .. 1.500 A 1.000 A Pick-up value of interm.
E/F stage
3303 T-det.ext. Intermit. EF 0.00 .. 10.00 sec 0.10 sec Detection extension time
3304 T-sum det. Intermit. EF 0.00 .. 100.00 sec 20.00 sec Sum of detection times
3305 T-reset Intermit. EF 1 .. 600 sec 300 sec Reset time
3306 Nos.det. Intermit. EF 2 .. 10 3 No. of det. for start of int.
E/F prot
3401 Dir. Interm. EF Dir. Interm. EF OFF
ON
ON with GF log
Alarm Only
OFF Dir. Intermittent earth
fault protection
3402 Direction Dir. Interm. EF Forward
Reverse
Forward Direction to be protected
3403 No. of pulses Dir. Interm. EF 2 .. 50 5 Pulse no. for detecting
the interm. E/F
3404 Monitoring time Dir. Interm. EF 0.04 .. 10.00 sec 2.00 sec Monitoring time after
pickup detected
3405 Vgnd> / 3V0> Dir. Interm. EF 2.0 .. 100.0 V 20.0 V Vgnd> measured / 3V0>
calculated
3406 Pickup Dir. Interm. EF with Vgnd/3V0>
with oper. dir.
with Vgnd/3V0> Pickup of the function
3501 EPTR E Flt(ext) OFF
ON
OFF EPTR
3502 Trans. Neutral E Flt(ext) OFF
ON
OFF Transformer Neutral
protection(TNP)
3503 Pickup current E Flt(ext) 1A 0.001 .. 1.400 A 0.008 A Pickup current
5A 0.005 .. 7.000 A 0.040 A
3504 Pickup current E Flt(ext) 0.05 .. 4.00 A 0.12 A Pickup current
3505 EPTR I Tmax E Flt(ext) 1A 0.001 .. 1.400 A 0.008 A Current at Maximum
Time Delay
5A 0.005 .. 7.000 A 0.040 A
3506 TNP I Tmax E Flt(ext) 0.05 .. 4.00 A 0.12 A Current at Maximum
Time Delay
3507 EPTR I Tmin E Flt(ext) 1A 0.003 .. 4.000 A 3.333 A Current at Minimum Time
Delay
5A 0.015 .. 20.000 A 16.665 A
3508 TNP I Tmin E Flt(ext) 0.05 .. 20.00 A 1.00 A Current at Minimum Time
Delay
3509 EPTR I Tknee E Flt(ext) 1A 0.003 .. 1.400 A 0.100 A Current at Knee Point
5A 0.015 .. 7.000 A 0.500 A
3510 TNP I Tknee E Flt(ext) 0.05 .. 17.00 A 0.20 A Current at Knee Point
Functions, Settings, Information
F.2 Settings
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 487
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Addr. Parameter Function C Setting Options Default Setting Comments
3511 T knee E Flt(ext)
E Flt(ext)
0.20 .. 100.00 sec 26.70 sec Time Delay at Knee Point
3512 T min E Flt(ext)
E Flt(ext)
0.10 .. 30.00 sec 0.80 sec Minimum Time Delay
3513 T max E Flt(ext)
E Flt(ext)
0.50 .. 300.00 sec 139.90 sec Maximum Time Delay
3514 TRANSLATION T E Flt(ext)
E Flt(ext)
-0.50 .. 30.00 sec 0.00 sec Delay time T of the whole
function
4001 FCT 46 46 Negative
Seq
OFF
ON
OFF 46 Negative Sequence
Protection
4002 46-1 PICKUP 46 Negative
Seq
1A 0.05 .. 3.00 A 0.10 A 46-1 Pickup
5A 0.25 .. 15.00 A 0.50 A
4003 46-1 DELAY 46 Negative
Seq
0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 1.50 sec 46-1 Time Delay
4004 46-2 PICKUP 46 Negative
Seq
1A 0.05 .. 3.00 A 0.50 A 46-2 Pickup
5A 0.25 .. 15.00 A 2.50 A
4005 46-2 DELAY 46 Negative
Seq
0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 1.50 sec 46-2 Time Delay
4006 46 IEC CURVE 46 Negative
Seq
Normal Inverse
Very Inverse
Extremely Inv.
Extremely Inv. IEC Curve
4007 46 ANSI CURVE 46 Negative
Seq
Extremely Inv.
Inverse
Moderately Inv.
Very Inverse
Extremely Inv. ANSI Curve
4008 46-TOC PICKUP 46 Negative
Seq
1A 0.05 .. 2.00 A 0.90 A 46-TOC Pickup
5A 0.25 .. 10.00 A 4.50 A
4009 46-TOC TIMEDIAL 46 Negative
Seq
0.50 .. 15.00 ; ∞ 5.00 46-TOC Time Dial
4010 46-TOC TIMEDIAL 46 Negative
Seq
0.05 .. 3.20 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec 46-TOC Time Dial
4011 46-TOC RESET 46 Negative
Seq
Instantaneous
Disk Emulation
Instantaneous 46-TOC Drop Out
4012A 46 T DROP-OUT 46 Negative
Seq
0.00 .. 60.00 sec 0.00 sec 46 Drop-Out Time Delay
4201 FCT 49 49 Th.Overload OFF
ON
Alarm Only
OFF 49 Thermal overload
protection
4202 49 K-FACTOR 49 Th.Overload 0.10 .. 4.00 1.10 49 K-Factor
4203 TIME CONSTANT 49 Th.Overload 1.0 .. 999.9 min 100.0 min Time Constant
4204 49 Θ ALARM 49 Th.Overload 50 .. 100 % 90 % 49 Thermal Alarm Stage
4205 I ALARM 49 Th.Overload 1A 0.10 .. 4.00 A 1.00 A Current Overload Alarm
Setpoint
5A 0.50 .. 20.00 A 5.00 A
4207A Kτ-FACTOR 49 Th.Overload 1.0 .. 10.0 1.0 Kt-FACTOR when motor
stops
4208A T EMERGENCY 49 Th.Overload 10 .. 15000 sec 100 sec Emergency time
Functions, Settings, Information
F.2 Settings
488 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Addr. Parameter Function C Setting Options Default Setting Comments
5001 FCT 59 27/59 O/U Volt. OFF
ON
Alarm Only
OFF 59 Overvoltage Protec-
tion
5002 59-1 PICKUP 27/59 O/U Volt. 20 .. 260 V 110 V 59-1 Pickup
5003 59-1 PICKUP 27/59 O/U Volt. 20 .. 150 V 110 V 59-1 Pickup
5004 59-1 DELAY 27/59 O/U Volt. 0.00 .. 100.00 sec;
∞
0.50 sec 59-1 Time Delay
5005 59-2 PICKUP 27/59 O/U Volt. 20 .. 260 V 120 V 59-2 Pickup
5006 59-2 PICKUP 27/59 O/U Volt. 20 .. 150 V 120 V 59-2 Pickup
5007 59-2 DELAY 27/59 O/U Volt. 0.00 .. 100.00 sec;
∞
0.50 sec 59-2 Time Delay
5015 59-1 PICKUP V2 27/59 O/U Volt. 2 .. 150 V 30 V 59-1 Pickup V2
5016 59-2 PICKUP V2 27/59 O/U Volt. 2 .. 150 V 50 V 59-2 Pickup V2
5017A 59-1 DOUT RATIO 27/59 O/U Volt. 0.90 .. 0.99 0.95 59-1 Dropout Ratio
5018A 59-2 DOUT RATIO 27/59 O/U Volt. 0.90 .. 0.99 0.95 59-2 Dropout Ratio
5019 59-1 PICKUP V1 27/59 O/U Volt. 20 .. 150 V 110 V 59-1 Pickup V1
5020 59-2 PICKUP V1 27/59 O/U Volt. 20 .. 150 V 120 V 59-2 Pickup V1
5101 FCT 27 27/59 O/U Volt. OFF
ON
Alarm Only
OFF 27 Undervoltage Protec-
tion
5102 27-1 PICKUP 27/59 O/U Volt. 10 .. 210 V 75 V 27-1 Pickup
5103 27-1 PICKUP 27/59 O/U Volt. 10 .. 120 V 45 V 27-1 Pickup
5106 27-1 DELAY 27/59 O/U Volt. 0.00 .. 100.00 sec;
∞
1.50 sec 27-1 Time Delay
5110 27-2 PICKUP 27/59 O/U Volt. 10 .. 210 V 70 V 27-2 Pickup
5111 27-2 PICKUP 27/59 O/U Volt. 10 .. 120 V 40 V 27-2 Pickup
5112 27-2 DELAY 27/59 O/U Volt. 0.00 .. 100.00 sec;
∞
0.50 sec 27-2 Time Delay
5113A 27-1 DOUT RATIO 27/59 O/U Volt. 1.01 .. 3.00 1.20 27-1 Dropout Ratio
5114A 27-2 DOUT RATIO 27/59 O/U Volt. 1.01 .. 3.00 1.20 27-2 Dropout Ratio
5120A CURRENT SUPERV. 27/59 O/U Volt. OFF
ON
ON Current Supervision
5201 VT BROKEN WIRE Meas-
urem.Superv
ON
OFF
OFF VT broken wire supervi-
sion
5202 Σ V> Meas-
urem.Superv
1.0 .. 100.0 V 8.0 V Threshold voltage sum
5203 Vph-ph max< Meas-
urem.Superv
1.0 .. 100.0 V 16.0 V Maximum phase to phase
voltage
5204 Vph-ph min< Meas-
urem.Superv
1.0 .. 100.0 V 16.0 V Minimum phase to phase
voltage
5205 Vph-ph max-min> Meas-
urem.Superv
10.0 .. 200.0 V 16.0 V Symmetry phase to phase
voltages
5206 I min> Meas-
urem.Superv
1A 0.04 .. 1.00 A 0.04 A Minimum line current
5A 0.20 .. 5.00 A 0.20 A
5208 T DELAY ALARM Meas-
urem.Superv
0.00 .. 32.00 sec 1.25 sec Alarm delay time
5301 FUSE FAIL MON. Meas-
urem.Superv
OFF
Solid grounded
Coil.gnd./isol.
OFF Fuse Fail Monitor
Functions, Settings, Information
F.2 Settings
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 489
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Addr. Parameter Function C Setting Options Default Setting Comments
5302 FUSE FAIL 3Vo Meas-
urem.Superv
10 .. 100 V 30 V Zero Sequence Voltage
5303 FUSE FAIL RESID Meas-
urem.Superv
1A 0.10 .. 1.00 A 0.10 A Residual Current
5A 0.50 .. 5.00 A 0.50 A
5308A FFM Idiff (3ph) Meas-
urem.Superv
1A 0.05 .. 1.00 A 0.10 A Differential Current
Threshold (3phase)
5A 0.25 .. 5.00 A 0.50 A
5310 BLOCK PROT. Meas-
urem.Superv
NO
YES
YES Block protection by FFM
5401 FCT 81 O/U 81 O/U Freq. OFF
ON
OFF 81 Over/Under Frequency
Protection
5402 Vmin 81 O/U Freq. 10 .. 150 V 65 V Minimum required
voltage for operation
5402 Vmin 81 O/U Freq. 20 .. 150 V 35 V Minimum required
voltage for operation
5403 81-1 PICKUP 81 O/U Freq. 40.00 .. 60.00 Hz 49.50 Hz 81-1 Pickup
5404 81-1 PICKUP 81 O/U Freq. 50.00 .. 70.00 Hz 59.50 Hz 81-1 Pickup
5405 81-1 DELAY 81 O/U Freq. 0.00 .. 100.00 sec;
∞
60.00 sec 81-1 Time Delay
5406 81-2 PICKUP 81 O/U Freq. 40.00 .. 60.00 Hz 49.00 Hz 81-2 Pickup
5407 81-2 PICKUP 81 O/U Freq. 50.00 .. 70.00 Hz 59.00 Hz 81-2 Pickup
5408 81-2 DELAY 81 O/U Freq. 0.00 .. 100.00 sec;
∞
30.00 sec 81-2 Time Delay
5409 81-3 PICKUP 81 O/U Freq. 40.00 .. 60.00 Hz 47.50 Hz 81-3 Pickup
5410 81-3 PICKUP 81 O/U Freq. 50.00 .. 70.00 Hz 57.50 Hz 81-3 Pickup
5411 81-3 DELAY 81 O/U Freq. 0.00 .. 100.00 sec;
∞
3.00 sec 81-3 Time delay
5412 81-4 PICKUP 81 O/U Freq. 40.00 .. 60.00 Hz 51.00 Hz 81-4 Pickup
5413 81-4 PICKUP 81 O/U Freq. 50.00 .. 70.00 Hz 61.00 Hz 81-4 Pickup
5414 81-4 DELAY 81 O/U Freq. 0.00 .. 100.00 sec;
∞
30.00 sec 81-4 Time delay
5415A DO differential 81 O/U Freq. 0.02 .. 1.00 Hz 0.02 Hz Dropout differential
5421 FCT 81-1 O/U 81 O/U Freq. OFF
ON f>
ON f<
OFF 81-1 Over/Under
Frequency Protection
5422 FCT 81-2 O/U 81 O/U Freq. OFF
ON f>
ON f<
OFF 81-2 Over/Under
Frequency Protection
5423 FCT 81-3 O/U 81 O/U Freq. OFF
ON f>
ON f<
OFF 81-3 Over/Under
Frequency Protection
5424 FCT 81-4 O/U 81 O/U Freq. OFF
ON f>
ON f<
OFF 81-4 Over/Under
Frequency Protection
5501 27/Q-Protection 27/Q OFF
ON
OFF 27 / Q dir. con. Protection
5502 I-Release 27/Q 1A 0.02 .. 0.20 A; 0 0.10 A Current-Rel. for Trip and
Reclose
5A 0.10 .. 1.00 A; 0 0.50 A
5503 Inrush blk 27/Q NO
YES
NO blocking with inrush
Functions, Settings, Information
F.2 Settings
490 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Addr. Parameter Function C Setting Options Default Setting Comments
5504 27/Q Direction 27/Q Forward
Reverse
Forward Direction of 27/Q
5511 Q> Pickup 27/Q 1A 1.70 ..
10000.00 VAR
8.70 VAR Reactive power threshold
for pickup
5A 8.50 ..
50000.00 VAR
43.50 VAR
5512 U< Pickup 27/Q 10.00 .. 210.00 V 85.00 V Undervoltage threshold
for pickup
5513 Delay Gen. CB 27/Q 0.00 .. 60.00 sec 0.50 sec Trip time delay generator
CB
5514 Delay Grid CB 27/Q 0.00 .. 60.00 sec 1.50 sec Trip time delay grid CB
5521 Recl. release 27/Q OFF
ON
OFF Reclosure release
5522 U> Reclose 27/Q 10.00 .. 210.00 V 95.00 V Voltage threshold for
reclosure rel.
5523 T Reclose 27/Q 0.00 .. 3600.00 sec 0.00 sec Reclosure Delay Time
5524 Pos. f-diff 27/Q 0.01 .. 5.00 Hz 0.05 Hz Pos. f-diff threshold for
reclosure rel.
5525 Neg. f-diff 27/Q -5.00 .. -0.01 Hz -2.50 Hz Neg. f-diff threshold for
reclosure rel.
5526A Incl. 27/Q Trip 27/Q NO
YES
NO Include 27/Q Trip for
reclosure rel.
6001 S1: RE/RL P.System Data
2
-0.33 .. 7.00 1.00 S1: Zero seq. compen-
sating factor RE/RL
6002 S1: XE/XL P.System Data
2
-0.33 .. 7.00 1.00 S1: Zero seq. compen-
sating factor XE/XL
6003 S1: x' P.System Data
2
1A 0.0050 ..
15.0000 Ω/mi
0.2420 Ω/mi S1: feeder reactance per
mile: x'
5A 0.0010 ..
3.0000 Ω/mi
0.0484 Ω/mi
6004 S1: x' P.System Data
2
1A 0.0050 ..
9.5000 Ω/km
0.1500 Ω/km S1: feeder reactance per
km: x'
5A 0.0010 ..
1.9000 Ω/km
0.0300 Ω/km
6005 S1: Line angle P.System Data
2
10 .. 89 ° 85 ° S1: Line angle
6006 S1: Line length P.System Data
2
0.1 .. 650.0 Miles 62.1 Miles S1: Line length in miles
6007 S1: Line length P.System Data
2
0.1 .. 1000.0 km 100.0 km S1: Line length in kilo-
meter
6011 S2: RE/RL P.System Data
2
-0.33 .. 7.00 1.00 S2: Zero seq. compen-
sating factor RE/RL
6012 S2: XE/XL P.System Data
2
-0.33 .. 7.00 1.00 S2: Zero seq. compen-
sating factor XE/XL
6013 S2: x' P.System Data
2
1A 0.0050 ..
15.0000 Ω/mi
0.2420 Ω/mi S2: feeder reactance per
mile: x'
5A 0.0010 ..
3.0000 Ω/mi
0.0484 Ω/mi
Functions, Settings, Information
F.2 Settings
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 491
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Addr. Parameter Function C Setting Options Default Setting Comments
6014 S2: x' P.System Data
2
1A 0.0050 ..
9.5000 Ω/km
0.1500 Ω/km S2: feeder reactance per
km: x'
5A 0.0010 ..
1.9000 Ω/km
0.0300 Ω/km
6015 S2: Line angle P.System Data
2
10 .. 89 ° 85 ° S2: Line angle
6016 S2: Line length P.System Data
2
0.1 .. 650.0 Miles 62.1 Miles S2: Line length in miles
6017 S2: Line length P.System Data
2
0.1 .. 1000.0 km 100.0 km S2: Line length in kilo-
meter
6021 S3: RE/RL P.System Data
2
-0.33 .. 7.00 1.00 S3: Zero seq. compen-
sating factor RE/RL
6022 S3: XE/XL P.System Data
2
-0.33 .. 7.00 1.00 S3: Zero seq. compen-
sating factor XE/XL
6023 S3: x' P.System Data
2
1A 0.0050 ..
15.0000 Ω/mi
0.2420 Ω/mi S3: feeder reactance per
mile: x'
5A 0.0010 ..
3.0000 Ω/mi
0.0484 Ω/mi
6024 S3: x' P.System Data
2
1A 0.0050 ..
9.5000 Ω/km
0.1500 Ω/km S3: feeder reactance per
km: x'
5A 0.0010 ..
1.9000 Ω/km
0.0300 Ω/km
6025 S3: Line angle P.System Data
2
10 .. 89 ° 85 ° S3: Line angle
6026 S3: Line length P.System Data
2
0.1 .. 650.0 Miles 62.1 Miles S3: Line length in miles
6027 S3: Line length P.System Data
2
0.1 .. 1000.0 km 100.0 km S3: Line length in kilo-
meter
6101 Synchronizing SYNC function
1
ON
OFF
OFF Synchronizing Function
6102 SyncCB SYNC function
1
(Einstellmöglich-
keiten anwendung-
sabhängig)
none Synchronizable circuit
breaker
6103 Vmin SYNC function
1
20 .. 125 V 90 V Minimum voltage limit:
Vmin
6104 Vmax SYNC function
1
20 .. 140 V 110 V Maximum voltage limit:
Vmax
6105 V< SYNC function
1
1 .. 60 V 5 V Threshold V1, V2 without
voltage
6106 V> SYNC function
1
20 .. 140 V 80 V Threshold V1, V2 with
voltage
6107 SYNC V1<V2> SYNC function
1
YES
NO
NO ON-Command at V1< and
V2>
6108 SYNC V1>V2< SYNC function
1
YES
NO
NO ON-Command at V1> and
V2<
6109 SYNC V1<V2< SYNC function
1
YES
NO
NO ON-Command at V1< and
V2<
6110A Direct CO SYNC function
1
YES
NO
NO Direct ON-Command
6111A TSUP VOLTAGE SYNC function
1
0.00 .. 60.00 sec 0.10 sec Supervision time of
V1>;V2> or V1<;V2<
Functions, Settings, Information
F.2 Settings
492 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Addr. Parameter Function C Setting Options Default Setting Comments
6112 T-SYN. DURATION SYNC function
1
0.01 .. 1200.00 sec;
∞
30.00 sec Maximum duration of
Synchronization
6113A 25 Synchron SYNC function
1
YES
NO
YES Switching at synchronous
condition
6121 Balancing V1/V2 SYNC function
1
0.50 .. 2.00 1.00 Balancing factor V1/V2
6122A ANGLE ADJUSTM. SYNC function
1
0 .. 360 ° 0 ° Angle adjustment (trans-
former)
6123 CONNECTIONof V2 SYNC function
1
A-B
B-C
C-A
A-B Connection of V2
6125 VT Vn2, primary SYNC function
1
0.10 .. 800.00 kV 20.00 kV VT nominal voltage V2,
primary
6150 dV SYNCHK V2>V1 SYNC function
1
0.5 .. 50.0 V 5.0 V Maximum voltage differ-
ence V2>V1
6151 dV SYNCHK V2<V1 SYNC function
1
0.5 .. 50.0 V 5.0 V Maximum voltage differ-
ence V2<V1
6152 df SYNCHK f2>f1 SYNC function
1
0.01 .. 2.00 Hz 0.10 Hz Maximum frequency
difference f2>f1
6153 df SYNCHK f2<f1 SYNC function
1
0.01 .. 2.00 Hz 0.10 Hz Maximum frequency
difference f2<f1
6154 dα SYNCHK α2>α1 SYNC function
1
2 .. 80 ° 10 ° Maximum angle differ-
ence alpha2>alpha1
6155 dα SYNCHK α2<α1 SYNC function
1
2 .. 80 ° 10 ° Maximum angle differ-
ence alpha2<alpha1
7001 FCT 50BF 50BF BkrFailure OFF
ON
OFF 50BF Breaker Failure
Protection
7004 Chk BRK CONTACT 50BF BkrFailure OFF
ON
OFF Check Breaker contacts
7005 TRIP-Timer 50BF BkrFailure 0.06 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.25 sec TRIP-Timer
7006 50BF PICKUP 50BF BkrFailure 1A 0.05 .. 20.00 A 0.10 A 50BF Pickup current
threshold
5A 0.25 .. 100.00 A 0.50 A
7007 50BF PICKUP IE> 50BF BkrFailure 1A 0.05 .. 20.00 A 0.10 A 50BF Pickup earth current
threshold
5A 0.25 .. 100.00 A 0.50 A
7008 50BF-2 Delay 50BF BkrFailure 0.06 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec Delay of 2nd stage for
busbar trip
7101 FCT 79 79M Auto Recl. OFF
ON
OFF 79 Auto-Reclose Function
7103 BLOCK MC Dur. 79M Auto Recl. 0.50 .. 320.00 sec;
0
1.00 sec AR blocking duration after
manual close
7105 TIME RESTRAINT 79M Auto Recl. 0.50 .. 320.00 sec 3.00 sec 79 Auto Reclosing reset
time
7108 SAFETY 79 ready 79M Auto Recl. 0.01 .. 320.00 sec 0.50 sec Safety Time until 79 is
ready
7113 CHECK CB? 79M Auto Recl. No check
Chk each cycle
No check Check circuit breaker
before AR?
7114 T-Start MONITOR 79M Auto Recl. 0.01 .. 320.00 sec;
∞
0.50 sec AR start-signal monitoring
time
7115 CB TIME OUT 79M Auto Recl. 0.10 .. 320.00 sec 3.00 sec Circuit Breaker (CB)
Supervision Time
Functions, Settings, Information
F.2 Settings
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 493
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Addr. Parameter Function C Setting Options Default Setting Comments
7116 Max. DEAD EXT. 79M Auto Recl. 0.50 .. 1800.00 sec;
∞
100.00 sec Maximum dead time
extension
7117 T-ACTION 79M Auto Recl. 0.01 .. 320.00 sec;
∞
∞ sec Action time
7118 T DEAD DELAY 79M Auto Recl. 0.0 .. 1800.0 sec; ∞ 1.0 sec Maximum Time Delay of
Dead-Time Start
7127 DEADTIME 1: PH 79M Auto Recl. 0.01 .. 320.00 sec 0.50 sec Dead Time 1: Phase Fault
7128 DEADTIME 1: G 79M Auto Recl. 0.01 .. 320.00 sec 0.50 sec Dead Time 1: Ground
Fault
7129 DEADTIME 2: PH 79M Auto Recl. 0.01 .. 320.00 sec 0.50 sec Dead Time 2: Phase Fault
7130 DEADTIME 2: G 79M Auto Recl. 0.01 .. 320.00 sec 0.50 sec Dead Time 2: Ground
Fault
7131 DEADTIME 3: PH 79M Auto Recl. 0.01 .. 320.00 sec 0.50 sec Dead Time 3: Phase Fault
7132 DEADTIME 3: G 79M Auto Recl. 0.01 .. 320.00 sec 0.50 sec Dead Time 3: Ground
Fault
7133 DEADTIME 4: PH 79M Auto Recl. 0.01 .. 320.00 sec 0.50 sec Dead Time 4: Phase Fault
7134 DEADTIME 4: G 79M Auto Recl. 0.01 .. 320.00 sec 0.50 sec Dead Time 4: Ground
Fault
7135 # OF RECL. GND 79M Auto Recl. 0 .. 9 1 Number of Reclosing
Cycles Ground
7136 # OF RECL. PH 79M Auto Recl. 0 .. 9 1 Number of Reclosing
Cycles Phase
7137 Cmd.via control 79M Auto Recl. (Einstellmöglich-
keiten anwendung-
sabhängig)
none Close command via
control device
7138 Internal SYNC 79M Auto Recl. (Einstellmöglich-
keiten anwendung-
sabhängig)
none Internal 25 synchronisa-
tion
7139 External SYNC 79M Auto Recl. YES
NO
NO External 25 synchronisa-
tion
7140 ZONE SEQ.COORD. 79M Auto Recl. OFF
ON
OFF ZSC - Zone sequence
coordination
7150 50-1 79M Auto Recl. No influence
Starts 79
Stops 79
No influence 50-1
7151 50N-1 79M Auto Recl. No influence
Starts 79
Stops 79
No influence 50N-1
7152 50-2 79M Auto Recl. No influence
Starts 79
Stops 79
No influence 50-2
7153 50N-2 79M Auto Recl. No influence
Starts 79
Stops 79
No influence 50N-2
7154 51 79M Auto Recl. No influence
Starts 79
Stops 79
No influence 51
7155 51N 79M Auto Recl. No influence
Starts 79
Stops 79
No influence 51N
Functions, Settings, Information
F.2 Settings
494 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Addr. Parameter Function C Setting Options Default Setting Comments
7156 67-1 79M Auto Recl. No influence
Starts 79
Stops 79
No influence 67-1
7157 67N-1 79M Auto Recl. No influence
Starts 79
Stops 79
No influence 67N-1
7158 67-2 79M Auto Recl. No influence
Starts 79
Stops 79
No influence 67-2
7159 67N-2 79M Auto Recl. No influence
Starts 79
Stops 79
No influence 67N-2
7160 67 TOC 79M Auto Recl. No influence
Starts 79
Stops 79
No influence 67 TOC
7161 67N TOC 79M Auto Recl. No influence
Starts 79
Stops 79
No influence 67N TOC
7162 sens Ground Flt 79M Auto Recl. No influence
Starts 79
Stops 79
No influence (Sensitive) Ground Fault
7163 46 79M Auto Recl. No influence
Starts 79
Stops 79
No influence 46
7164 BINARY INPUT 79M Auto Recl. No influence
Starts 79
Stops 79
No influence Binary Input
7165 3Pol.PICKUP BLK 79M Auto Recl. YES
NO
NO 3 Pole Pickup blocks 79
7166 50-3 79M Auto Recl. No influence
Starts 79
Stops 79
No influence 50-3
7167 50N-3 79M Auto Recl. No influence
Starts 79
Stops 79
No influence 50N-3
7168 67-3 79M Auto Recl. No influence
Starts 79
Stops 79
No influence 67-3
7169 67N-3 79M Auto Recl. No influence
Starts 79
Stops 79
No influence 67N-3
7200 bef.1.Cy:50-1 79M Auto Recl. Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 1. Cycle: 50-1
7201 bef.1.Cy:50N-1 79M Auto Recl. Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 1. Cycle: 50N-1
Functions, Settings, Information
F.2 Settings
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 495
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Addr. Parameter Function C Setting Options Default Setting Comments
7202 bef.1.Cy:50-2 79M Auto Recl. Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 1. Cycle: 50-2
7203 bef.1.Cy:50N-2 79M Auto Recl. Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 1. Cycle: 50N-2
7204 bef.1.Cy:51 79M Auto Recl. Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 1. Cycle: 51
7205 bef.1.Cy:51N 79M Auto Recl. Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 1. Cycle: 51N
7206 bef.1.Cy:67-1 79M Auto Recl. Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 1. Cycle: 67-1
7207 bef.1.Cy:67N-1 79M Auto Recl. Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 1. Cycle: 67N-1
7208 bef.1.Cy:67-2 79M Auto Recl. Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 1. Cycle: 67-2
7209 bef.1.Cy:67N-2 79M Auto Recl. Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 1. Cycle: 67N-2
7210 bef.1.Cy:67 TOC 79M Auto Recl. Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 1. Cycle: 67 TOC
7211 bef.1.Cy:67NTOC 79M Auto Recl. Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 1. Cycle: 67N TOC
7212 bef.2.Cy:50-1 79M Auto Recl. Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 2. Cycle: 50-1
7213 bef.2.Cy:50N-1 79M Auto Recl. Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 2. Cycle: 50N-1
7214 bef.2.Cy:50-2 79M Auto Recl. Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 2. Cycle: 50-2
7215 bef.2.Cy:50N-2 79M Auto Recl. Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 2. Cycle: 50N-2
7216 bef.2.Cy:51 79M Auto Recl. Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 2. Cycle: 51
7217 bef.2.Cy:51N 79M Auto Recl. Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 2. Cycle: 51N
Functions, Settings, Information
F.2 Settings
496 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Addr. Parameter Function C Setting Options Default Setting Comments
7218 bef.2.Cy:67-1 79M Auto Recl. Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 2. Cycle: 67-1
7219 bef.2.Cy:67N-1 79M Auto Recl. Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 2. Cycle: 67N-1
7220 bef.2.Cy:67-2 79M Auto Recl. Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 2. Cycle: 67-2
7221 bef.2.Cy:67N-2 79M Auto Recl. Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 2. Cycle: 67N-2
7222 bef.2.Cy:67 TOC 79M Auto Recl. Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 2. Cycle: 67 TOC
7223 bef.2.Cy:67NTOC 79M Auto Recl. Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 2. Cycle: 67N TOC
7224 bef.3.Cy:50-1 79M Auto Recl. Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 3. Cycle: 50-1
7225 bef.3.Cy:50N-1 79M Auto Recl. Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 3. Cycle: 50N-1
7226 bef.3.Cy:50-2 79M Auto Recl. Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 3. Cycle: 50-2
7227 bef.3.Cy:50N-2 79M Auto Recl. Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 3. Cycle: 50N-2
7228 bef.3.Cy:51 79M Auto Recl. Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 3. Cycle: 51
7229 bef.3.Cy:51N 79M Auto Recl. Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 3. Cycle: 51N
7230 bef.3.Cy:67-1 79M Auto Recl. Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 3. Cycle: 67-1
7231 bef.3.Cy:67N-1 79M Auto Recl. Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 3. Cycle: 67N-1
7232 bef.3.Cy:67-2 79M Auto Recl. Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 3. Cycle: 67-2
7233 bef.3.Cy:67N-2 79M Auto Recl. Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 3. Cycle: 67N-2
Functions, Settings, Information
F.2 Settings
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 497
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Addr. Parameter Function C Setting Options Default Setting Comments
7234 bef.3.Cy:67 TOC 79M Auto Recl. Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 3. Cycle: 67 TOC
7235 bef.3.Cy:67NTOC 79M Auto Recl. Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 3. Cycle: 67N TOC
7236 bef.4.Cy:50-1 79M Auto Recl. Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 4. Cycle: 50-1
7237 bef.4.Cy:50N-1 79M Auto Recl. Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 4. Cycle: 50N-1
7238 bef.4.Cy:50-2 79M Auto Recl. Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 4. Cycle: 50-2
7239 bef.4.Cy:50N-2 79M Auto Recl. Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 4. Cycle: 50N-2
7240 bef.4.Cy:51 79M Auto Recl. Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 4. Cycle: 51
7241 bef.4.Cy:51N 79M Auto Recl. Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 4. Cycle: 51N
7242 bef.4.Cy:67-1 79M Auto Recl. Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 4. Cycle: 67-1
7243 bef.4.Cy:67N-1 79M Auto Recl. Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 4. Cycle: 67N-1
7244 bef.4.Cy:67-2 79M Auto Recl. Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 4. Cycle: 67-2
7245 bef.4.Cy:67N-2 79M Auto Recl. Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 4. Cycle: 67N-2
7246 bef.4.Cy:67 TOC 79M Auto Recl. Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 4. Cycle: 67 TOC
7247 bef.4.Cy:67NTOC 79M Auto Recl. Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 4. Cycle: 67N TOC
7248 bef.1.Cy:50-3 79M Auto Recl. Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 1. Cycle: 50-3
7249 bef.1.Cy:50N-3 79M Auto Recl. Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 1. Cycle: 50N-3
Functions, Settings, Information
F.2 Settings
498 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Addr. Parameter Function C Setting Options Default Setting Comments
7250 bef.2.Cy:50-3 79M Auto Recl. Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 2. Cycle: 50-3
7251 bef.2.Cy:50N-3 79M Auto Recl. Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 2. Cycle: 50N-3
7252 bef.3.Cy:50-3 79M Auto Recl. Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 3. Cycle: 50-3
7253 bef.3.Cy:50N-3 79M Auto Recl. Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 3. Cycle: 50N-3
7254 bef.4.Cy:50-3 79M Auto Recl. Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 4. Cycle: 50-3
7255 bef.4.Cy:50N-3 79M Auto Recl. Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 4. Cycle: 50N-3
7256 bef.1.Cy:67-3 79M Auto Recl. Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 1. Cycle: 67-3
7257 bef.1.Cy:67N-3 79M Auto Recl. Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 1. Cycle: IE>>>
directional
7258 bef.2.Cy:67-3 79M Auto Recl. Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 2. Cycle: 67-3
7259 bef.2.Cy:67N-3 79M Auto Recl. Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 2. Cycle: IE>>>
directional
7260 bef.3.Cy:67-3 79M Auto Recl. Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 3. Cycle: 67-3
7261 bef.3.Cy:67N-3 79M Auto Recl. Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 3. Cycle: IE>>>
directional
7262 bef.4.Cy:67-3 79M Auto Recl. Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 4. Cycle: 67-3
7263 bef.4.Cy:67N-3 79M Auto Recl. Set value T=T
instant. T=0
blocked T=∞
Set value T=T before 4. Cycle: 67N-3
8001 START Fault Locator Pickup
TRIP
Pickup Start fault locator with
8101 MEASURE. SUPERV Meas-
urem.Superv
OFF
ON
ON Measurement Supervision
8102 BALANCE V-LIMIT Meas-
urem.Superv
10 .. 100 V 50 V Voltage Threshold for
Balance Monitoring
Functions, Settings, Information
F.2 Settings
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 499
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Addr. Parameter Function C Setting Options Default Setting Comments
8103 BAL. FACTOR V Meas-
urem.Superv
0.58 .. 0.90 0.75 Balance Factor for
Voltage Monitor
8104 BALANCE I LIMIT Meas-
urem.Superv
1A 0.10 .. 1.00 A 0.50 A Current Threshold for
Balance Monitoring
5A 0.50 .. 5.00 A 2.50 A
8105 BAL. FACTOR I Meas-
urem.Superv
0.10 .. 0.90 0.50 Balance Factor for Current
Monitor
8106 Σ I THRESHOLD Meas-
urem.Superv
1A 0.05 .. 2.00 A; ∞ 0.10 A Summated Current Moni-
toring Threshold
5A 0.25 .. 10.00 A; ∞ 0.50 A
8107 Σ I FACTOR Meas-
urem.Superv
0.00 .. 0.95 0.10 Summated Current Moni-
toring Factor
8109 FAST Σ i MONIT Meas-
urem.Superv
OFF
ON
ON Fast Summated Current
Monitoring
8110A T BAL. V LIMIT Meas-
urem.Superv
0 .. 100 sec 5 sec T Balance Factor for
Voltage Monitor
8111A T BAL. I LIMIT Meas-
urem.Superv
0 .. 100 sec 5 sec T Current Balance
Monitor
8201 FCT 74TC 74TC TripCirc. ON
OFF
ON 74TC TRIP Circuit Supervi-
sion
8202 Alarm Delay 74TC TripCirc. 1 .. 30 sec 2 sec Delay Time for alarm
8301 DMD Interval Demand meter 15 Min., 1 Sub
15 Min., 3 Subs
15 Min.,15 Subs
30 Min., 1 Sub
60 Min., 1 Sub
60 Min.,10 Subs
5 Min., 5 Subs
60 Min., 1 Sub Demand Calculation Inter-
vals
8302 DMD Sync.Time Demand meter On The Hour
15 After Hour
30 After Hour
45 After Hour
On The Hour Demand Synchronization
Time
8311 MinMax cycRESET Min/Max meter NO
YES
YES Automatic Cyclic Reset
Function
8312 MiMa RESET TIME Min/Max meter 0 .. 1439 min 0 min MinMax Reset Timer
8313 MiMa RESETCYCLE Min/Max meter 1 .. 365 Days 7 Days MinMax Reset Cycle
Period
8314 MinMaxRES.START Min/Max meter 1 .. 365 Days 1 Days MinMax Start Reset Cycle
in
8315 MeterResolution Energy Standard
Factor 10
Factor 100
Standard Meter resolution
Functions, Settings, Information
F.2 Settings
500 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Information List
Indications for IEC 60 870-5-103 are always reported ON / OFF if they are subject to general interrogation for
IEC 60 870-5-103. If not, they are reported only as ON.
New user-defined indications or such newly allocated to IEC 60 870-5-103 are set to ON / OFF and subjected
to general interrogation if the information type is not a spontaneous event (“.._Ev”“). Further information on
indications can be found in detail in the SIPROTEC 4 System Description, Order No. E50417-H1176-C151.
In columns “Event Log”, “Trip Log” and “Ground Fault Log” the following applies:
UPPER CASE NOTATION “ON/OFF”: definitely set, not allocatable
lower case notation “on/off”: preset, allocatable
*: not preset, allocatable
<blank>: neither preset nor allocatable
In the column “Marked in Oscill. Record” the following applies:
UPPER CASE NOTATION “M”: definitely set, not allocatable
lower case notation “m”: preset, allocatable
*: not preset, allocatable
<blank>: neither preset nor allocatable
No. Description Function Typ
e of
Info
rma
tion
Log Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103
Event Log ON/OFF
Trip (Fault) Log ON/OFF
Ground Fault Log ON/OFF
Marked in Oscill. Record
LED
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
information number
Data Unit
General Interrogation
- >Back Light on (>Light
on)
Device,
General
SP On
Of
f
* * LED BI BO
- Reset LED (Reset LED) Device,
General
IntS
P
On * * LED BO 16
0
19 1 No
- Stop data transmission
(DataStop)
Device,
General
IntS
P
On
Of
f
* * LED BO 16
0
20 1 Yes
- Test mode (Test mode) Device,
General
IntS
P
On
Of
f
* * LED BO 16
0
21 1 Yes
- Feeder GROUNDED
(Feeder gnd)
Device,
General
IntS
P
* * * LED BO
- Breaker OPENED (Brk
OPENED)
Device,
General
IntS
P
* * * LED BO
- Hardware Test Mode
(HWTestMod)
Device,
General
IntS
P
On
Of
f
* * LED BO
- Clock Synchronization
(SynchClock)
Device,
General
IntS
P_E
v
* * *
- Disturbance CFC
(Distur.CFC)
Device,
General
OUT On
Of
f
* LED BO
F.3
Functions, Settings, Information
F.3 Information List
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 501
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
No. Description Function Typ
e of
Info
rma
tion
Log Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103
Event Log ON/OFF
Trip (Fault) Log ON/OFF
Ground Fault Log ON/OFF
Marked in Oscill. Record
LED
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
information number
Data Unit
General Interrogation
- Fault Recording Start
(FltRecSta)
Osc. Fault
Rec.
IntS
P
On
Of
f
* m LED BO
- Setting Group A is active
(P-GrpA act)
Change
Group
IntS
P
On
Of
f
* * LED BO 16
0
23 1 Yes
- Setting Group B is active
(P-GrpB act)
Change
Group
IntS
P
On
Of
f
* * LED BO 16
0
24 1 Yes
- Setting Group C is active
(P-GrpC act)
Change
Group
IntS
P
On
Of
f
* * LED BO 16
0
25 1 Yes
- Setting Group D is active
(P-GrpD act)
Change
Group
IntS
P
On
Of
f
* * LED BO 16
0
26 1 Yes
- Controlmode REMOTE
(ModeREMOTE)
Cntrl
Authority
IntS
P
On
Of
f
* LED BO
- Control Authority (Cntrl
Auth)
Cntrl
Authority
IntS
P
On
Of
f
* LED BO 10
1
85 1 Yes
- Controlmode LOCAL
(ModeLOCAL)
Cntrl
Authority
IntS
P
On
Of
f
* LED BO 10
1
86 1 Yes
- 52 Breaker (52Breaker) Control
Device
CF_
D12
On
Of
f
LED BO 24
0
16
0
20
- 52 Breaker (52Breaker) Control
Device
DP On
Of
f
BI CB 24
0
16
0
1 Yes
- Disconnect Switch
(Disc.Swit.)
Control
Device
CF_
D2
On
Of
f
LED BO 24
0
16
1
20
- Disconnect Switch
(Disc.Swit.)
Control
Device
DP On
Of
f
BI CB 24
0
16
1
1 Yes
- Ground Switch
(GndSwit.)
Control
Device
CF_
D2
On
Of
f
LED BO 24
0
16
4
20
- Ground Switch
(GndSwit.)
Control
Device
DP On
Of
f
BI CB 24
0
16
4
1 Yes
- >CB ready Spring is
charged (>CB ready)
Process
Data
SP * * * LED BI BO CB
Functions, Settings, Information
F.3 Information List
502 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
No. Description Function Typ
e of
Info
rma
tion
Log Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103
Event Log ON/OFF
Trip (Fault) Log ON/OFF
Ground Fault Log ON/OFF
Marked in Oscill. Record
LED
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
information number
Data Unit
General Interrogation
- >Door closed (>Door-
Close)
Process
Data
SP * * * LED BI BO CB
- >Cabinet door open
(>Door open)
Process
Data
SP On
Of
f
* * LED BI BO CB 10
1
1 1 Yes
- >CB waiting for Spring
charged (>CB wait)
Process
Data
SP On
Of
f
* * LED BI BO CB 10
1
2 1 Yes
- >No Voltage (Fuse blown)
(>No Volt.)
Process
Data
SP On
Of
f
* * LED BI BO CB 16
0
38 1 Yes
- >Error Motor Voltage
(>Err Mot V)
Process
Data
SP On
Of
f
* * LED BI BO CB 24
0
18
1
1 Yes
- >Error Control Voltage
(>ErrCntrlV)
Process
Data
SP On
Of
f
* * LED BI BO CB 24
0
18
2
1 Yes
- >SF6-Loss (>SF6-Loss) Process
Data
SP On
Of
f
* * LED BI BO CB 24
0
18
3
1 Yes
- >Error Meter (>Err Meter) Process
Data
SP On
Of
f
* * LED BI BO CB 24
0
18
4
1 Yes
- >Transformer Tempera-
ture (>Tx Temp.)
Process
Data
SP On
Of
f
* * LED BI BO CB 24
0
18
5
1 Yes
- >Transformer Danger
(>Tx Danger)
Process
Data
SP On
Of
f
* * LED BI BO CB 24
0
18
6
1 Yes
- Reset Minimum and
Maximum counter
(ResMinMax)
Min/Max
meter
IntS
P_E
v
O
N
- Reset meter (Meter res) Energy IntS
P_E
v
O
N
BI
- Error Systeminterface
(SysIntErr.)
Protocol IntS
P
On
Of
f
* * LED BO
- DCP identify (DCP ident) Protocol IntS
P
* * * LED BO
Functions, Settings, Information
F.3 Information List
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 503
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
No. Description Function Typ
e of
Info
rma
tion
Log Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103
Event Log ON/OFF
Trip (Fault) Log ON/OFF
Ground Fault Log ON/OFF
Marked in Oscill. Record
LED
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
information number
Data Unit
General Interrogation
- Threshold Value 1
(ThreshVal1)
Thresh.-
Switch
IntS
P
On
Of
f
LED FK
TO
NL
IN
E
BO CB
1 No Function configured
(Not configured)
Device,
General
SP * *
2 Function Not Available
(Non Existent)
Device,
General
SP * *
3 >Synchronize Internal
Real Time Clock (>Time
Synch)
Device,
General
SP_
Ev
* * LED BI BO 13
5
48 1 Yes
4 >Trigger Waveform
Capture
(>Trig.Wave.Cap.)
Osc. Fault
Rec.
SP * * m LED BI BO 13
5
49 1 Yes
5 >Reset LED (>Reset LED) Device,
General
SP * * * LED BI BO 13
5
50 1 Yes
7 >Setting Group Select Bit
0 (>Set Group Bit0)
Change
Group
SP * * * LED BI BO 13
5
51 1 Yes
8 >Setting Group Select Bit
1 (>Set Group Bit1)
Change
Group
SP * * * LED BI BO 13
5
52 1 Yes
009.01
00
Failure EN100 Modul
(Failure Modul)
EN100-
Modul 1
IntS
P
On
Of
f
* * LED BO
009.01
01
Failure EN100 Link
Channel 1 (Ch1) (Fail
Ch1)
EN100-
Modul 1
IntS
P
On
Of
f
* * LED BO
009.01
02
Failure EN100 Link
Channel 2 (Ch2) (Fail
Ch2)
EN100-
Modul 1
IntS
P
On
Of
f
* * LED BO
15 >Test mode (>Test mode) Device,
General
SP * * * LED BI BO 13
5
53 1 Yes
16 >Stop data transmission
(>DataStop)
Device,
General
SP * * * LED BI BO 13
5
54 1 Yes
51 Device is Operational and
Protecting (Device OK)
Device,
General
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO 13
5
81 1 Yes
52 At Least 1 Protection
Funct. is Active (ProtAc-
tive)
Device,
General
IntS
P
On
Of
f
* * LED BO 16
0
18 1 Yes
55 Reset Device (Reset
Device)
Device,
General
OUT On * * 16
0
4 1 No
56 Initial Start of Device
(Initial Start)
Device,
General
OUT On * * LED BO 16
0
5 1 No
Functions, Settings, Information
F.3 Information List
504 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
No. Description Function Typ
e of
Info
rma
tion
Log Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103
Event Log ON/OFF
Trip (Fault) Log ON/OFF
Ground Fault Log ON/OFF
Marked in Oscill. Record
LED
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
information number
Data Unit
General Interrogation
67 Resume (Resume) Device,
General
OUT On * * LED BO
68 Clock Synchronization
Error (Clock SyncError)
Device,
General
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO
69 Daylight Saving Time
(DayLightSavTime)
Device,
General
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO
70 Setting calculation is
running (Settings Calc.)
Device,
General
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO 16
0
22 1 Yes
71 Settings Check (Settings
Check)
Device,
General
OUT * * * LED BO
72 Level-2 change (Level-2
change)
Device,
General
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO
73 Local setting change
(Local change)
Device,
General
OUT * * *
110 Event lost (Event Lost) Device,
General
OUT
_Ev
On * LED BO 13
5
13
0
1 No
113 Flag Lost (Flag Lost) Device,
General
OUT On * m LED BO 13
5
13
6
1 Yes
125 Chatter ON (Chatter ON) Device,
General
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO 13
5
14
5
1 Yes
126 Protection ON/OFF (via
system port) (ProtON/
OFF)
P.System
Data 2
IntS
P
On
Of
f
* * LED BO
127 79 ON/OFF (via system
port) (79 ON/OFF)
79M Auto
Recl.
IntS
P
On
Of
f
* * LED BO
140 Error with a summary
alarm (Error Sum Alarm)
Device,
General
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO 16
0
47 1 Yes
160 Alarm Summary Event
(Alarm Sum Event)
Device,
General
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO 16
0
46 1 Yes
161 Failure: General Current
Supervision (Fail I
Superv.)
Meas-
urem.Super
v
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO 16
0
32 1 Yes
162 Failure: Current Summa-
tion (Failure Σ I)
Meas-
urem.Super
v
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO 13
5
18
2
1 Yes
Functions, Settings, Information
F.3 Information List
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 505
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
No. Description Function Typ
e of
Info
rma
tion
Log Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103
Event Log ON/OFF
Trip (Fault) Log ON/OFF
Ground Fault Log ON/OFF
Marked in Oscill. Record
LED
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
information number
Data Unit
General Interrogation
163 Failure: Current Balance
(Fail I balance)
Meas-
urem.Super
v
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO 13
5
18
3
1 Yes
167 Failure: Voltage Balance
(Fail V balance)
Meas-
urem.Super
v
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO 13
5
18
6
1 Yes
169 VT Fuse Failure (alarm
>10s) (VT FuseFail>10s)
Meas-
urem.Super
v
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO 13
5
18
8
1 Yes
170 VT Fuse Failure (alarm
instantaneous) (VT Fuse-
Fail)
Meas-
urem.Super
v
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO
170.00
01
>25-group 1 activate
(>25-1 act)
SYNC func-
tion 1
SP On
Of
f
* LED BI
170.00
43
>25 Synchronization
request (>25 Sync requ.)
SYNC func-
tion 1
SP On
Of
f
* LED BI
170.00
49
25 Sync. Release of
CLOSE Command (25
CloseRelease)
SYNC func-
tion 1
OUT On
Of
f
* LED BO 41 20
1
1 Yes
170.00
50
25 Synchronization Error
(25 Sync. Error)
SYNC func-
tion 1
OUT On
Of
f
* LED BO 41 20
2
1 Yes
170.00
51
25-group 1 is BLOCKED
(25-1 BLOCK)
SYNC func-
tion 1
OUT On
Of
f
* LED BO 41 20
4
1 Yes
170.20
07
25 Sync. Measuring
request of Control (25
Measu. req.)
SYNC func-
tion 1
SP On
Of
f
* LED
170.20
08
>BLOCK 25-group 1 (>BLK
25-1)
SYNC func-
tion 1
SP On
Of
f
* LED BI
170.20
09
>25 Direct Command
output (>25direct CO)
SYNC func-
tion 1
SP On
Of
f
* LED BI
170.20
11
>25 Start of synchroniza-
tion (>25 Start)
SYNC func-
tion 1
SP On
Of
f
* LED BI
170.20
12
>25 Stop of synchroniza-
tion (>25 Stop)
SYNC func-
tion 1
SP On
Of
f
* LED BI
Functions, Settings, Information
F.3 Information List
506 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
No. Description Function Typ
e of
Info
rma
tion
Log Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103
Event Log ON/OFF
Trip (Fault) Log ON/OFF
Ground Fault Log ON/OFF
Marked in Oscill. Record
LED
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
information number
Data Unit
General Interrogation
170.20
13
>25 Switch to V1> and
V2< (>25 V1>V2<)
SYNC func-
tion 1
SP On
Of
f
* LED BI
170.20
14
>25 Switch to V1< and
V2> (>25 V1<V2>)
SYNC func-
tion 1
SP On
Of
f
* LED BI
170.20
15
>25 Switch to V1< and
V2< (>25 V1<V2<)
SYNC func-
tion 1
SP On
Of
f
* LED BI
170.20
16
>25 Switch to Sync (>25
synchr.)
SYNC func-
tion 1
SP On
Of
f
* LED BI
170.20
22
25-group 1: measure-
ment in progress (25-1
meas.)
SYNC func-
tion 1
OUT On
Of
f
* LED BO 41 20
3
1 Yes
170.20
25
25 Monitoring time
exceeded (25 MonTi-
meExc)
SYNC func-
tion 1
OUT On
Of
f
* LED BO 41 20
5
1 Yes
170.20
26
25 Synchronization condi-
tions okay (25 Synchron)
SYNC func-
tion 1
OUT On
Of
f
* LED BO 41 20
6
1 Yes
170.20
27
25 Condition V1>V2<
fulfilled (25 V1> V2<)
SYNC func-
tion 1
OUT On
Of
f
* LED BO
170.20
28
25 Condition V1<V2>
fulfilled (25 V1< V2>)
SYNC func-
tion 1
OUT On
Of
f
* LED BO
170.20
29
25 Condition V1<V2<
fulfilled (25 V1< V2<)
SYNC func-
tion 1
OUT On
Of
f
* LED BO
170.20
30
25 Voltage difference
(Vdiff) okay (25 Vdiff ok)
SYNC func-
tion 1
OUT On
Of
f
* LED BO 41 20
7
1 Yes
170.20
31
25 Frequency difference
(fdiff) okay (25 fdiff ok)
SYNC func-
tion 1
OUT On
Of
f
* LED BO 41 20
8
1 Yes
170.20
32
25 Angle difference
(alphadiff) okay (25 αdiff
ok)
SYNC func-
tion 1
OUT On
Of
f
* LED BO 41 20
9
1 Yes
170.20
33
25 Frequency f1 > fmax
permissible (25 f1>>)
SYNC func-
tion 1
OUT On
Of
f
* LED BO
Functions, Settings, Information
F.3 Information List
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 507
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
No. Description Function Typ
e of
Info
rma
tion
Log Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103
Event Log ON/OFF
Trip (Fault) Log ON/OFF
Ground Fault Log ON/OFF
Marked in Oscill. Record
LED
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
information number
Data Unit
General Interrogation
170.20
34
25 Frequency f1 < fmin
permissible (25 f1<<)
SYNC func-
tion 1
OUT On
Of
f
* LED BO
170.20
35
25 Frequency f2 > fmax
permissible (25 f2>>)
SYNC func-
tion 1
OUT On
Of
f
* LED BO
170.20
36
25 Frequency f2 < fmin
permissible (25 f2<<)
SYNC func-
tion 1
OUT On
Of
f
* LED BO
170.20
37
25 Voltage V1 > Vmax
permissible (25 V1>>)
SYNC func-
tion 1
OUT On
Of
f
* LED BO
170.20
38
25 Voltage V1 < Vmin
permissible (25 V1<<)
SYNC func-
tion 1
OUT On
Of
f
* LED BO
170.20
39
25 Voltage V2 > Vmax
permissible (25 V2>>)
SYNC func-
tion 1
OUT On
Of
f
* LED BO
170.20
40
25 Voltage V2 < Vmin
permissible (25 V2<<)
SYNC func-
tion 1
OUT On
Of
f
* LED BO
170.20
90
25 Vdiff too large
(V2>V1) (25 V2>V1)
SYNC func-
tion 1
OUT On
Of
f
* LED BO
170.20
91
25 Vdiff too large
(V2<V1) (25 V2<V1)
SYNC func-
tion 1
OUT On
Of
f
* LED BO
170.20
92
25 fdiff too large (f2>f1)
(25 f2>f1)
SYNC func-
tion 1
OUT On
Of
f
* LED BO
170.20
93
25 fdiff too large (f2<f1)
(25 f2<f1)
SYNC func-
tion 1
OUT On
Of
f
* LED BO
170.20
94
25 alphadiff too large
(a2>a1) (25 α2>α1)
SYNC func-
tion 1
OUT On
Of
f
* LED BO
170.20
95
25 alphadiff too large
(a2<a1) (25 α2<α1)
SYNC func-
tion 1
OUT On
Of
f
* LED BO
170.20
96
25 Multiple selection of
func-groups (25 FG-Error)
SYNC func-
tion 1
OUT On
Of
f
LED BO
Functions, Settings, Information
F.3 Information List
508 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
No. Description Function Typ
e of
Info
rma
tion
Log Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103
Event Log ON/OFF
Trip (Fault) Log ON/OFF
Ground Fault Log ON/OFF
Marked in Oscill. Record
LED
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
information number
Data Unit
General Interrogation
170.20
97
25 Setting error (25 Set-
Error)
SYNC func-
tion 1
OUT On
Of
f
LED BO
170.21
01
Sync-group 1 is switched
OFF (25-1 OFF)
SYNC func-
tion 1
OUT On
Of
f
* LED BO 41 36 1 Yes
170.21
02
>BLOCK 25 CLOSE
command (>BLK 25
CLOSE)
SYNC func-
tion 1
SP On
Of
f
* LED BI
170.21
03
25 CLOSE command is
BLOCKED (25 CLOSE BLK)
SYNC func-
tion 1
OUT On
Of
f
* LED BO 41 37 1 Yes
171 Failure: Phase Sequence
(Fail Ph. Seq.)
Meas-
urem.Super
v
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO 16
0
35 1 Yes
175 Failure: Phase Sequence
Current (Fail Ph. Seq. I)
Meas-
urem.Super
v
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO 13
5
19
1
1 Yes
176 Failure: Phase Sequence
Voltage (Fail Ph. Seq. V)
Meas-
urem.Super
v
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO 13
5
19
2
1 Yes
177 Failure: Battery empty
(Fail Battery)
Device,
General
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO
178 I/O-Board Error (I/O-Board
error)
Device,
General
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO
181 Error: A/D converter (Error
A/D-conv.)
Device,
General
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO
191 Error: Offset (Error Offset) Device,
General
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO
193 Alarm: NO calibration
data available (Alarm NO
calibr)
Device,
General
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO
194 Error: Neutral CT different
from MLFB (Error
neutralCT)
Device,
General
OUT On
Of
f
*
197 Measurement Supervision
is switched OFF (MeasSup
OFF)
Meas-
urem.Super
v
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO 13
5
19
7
1 Yes
203 Waveform data deleted
(Wave. deleted)
Osc. Fault
Rec.
OUT
_Ev
On * LED BO 13
5
20
3
1 No
Functions, Settings, Information
F.3 Information List
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 509
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
No. Description Function Typ
e of
Info
rma
tion
Log Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103
Event Log ON/OFF
Trip (Fault) Log ON/OFF
Ground Fault Log ON/OFF
Marked in Oscill. Record
LED
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
information number
Data Unit
General Interrogation
232 LPCT phase Current
Transf. mismatching (CT
ph mismatch)
Device,
General
OUT On
Of
f
* LED BO
233 LPCT ground Current
Transf. mismatching (CT
gnd mismatch)
Device,
General
OUT On
Of
f
* LED BO
234.21
00
27, 59 blocked via opera-
tion (27, 59 blk)
27/59 O/U
Volt.
IntS
P
On
Of
f
* * LED BO
235.21
10
>BLOCK Function $00
(>BLOCK $00)
Flx SP On
Of
f
On
Off
* * LED BI FK
TO
NL
IN
E
BO
235.21
11
>Function $00 instanta-
neous TRIP (>$00
instant.)
Flx SP On
Of
f
On
Off
* * LED BI FK
TO
NL
IN
E
BO
235.21
12
>Function $00 Direct TRIP
(>$00 Dir.TRIP)
Flx SP On
Of
f
On
Off
* * LED BI FK
TO
NL
IN
E
BO
235.21
13
>Function $00 BLOCK
TRIP Time Delay (>$00
BLK.TDly)
Flx SP On
Of
f
On
Off
* * LED BI FK
TO
NL
IN
E
BO
235.21
14
>Function $00 BLOCK
TRIP (>$00 BLK.TRIP)
Flx SP On
Of
f
On
Off
* * LED BI FK
TO
NL
IN
E
BO
235.21
15
>Function $00 BLOCK
TRIP Phase A (>$00
BL.TripA)
Flx SP On
Of
f
On
Off
* * LED BI FK
TO
NL
IN
E
BO
235.21
16
>Function $00 BLOCK
TRIP Phase B (>$00
BL.TripB)
Flx SP On
Of
f
On
Off
* * LED BI FK
TO
NL
IN
E
BO
Functions, Settings, Information
F.3 Information List
510 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
No. Description Function Typ
e of
Info
rma
tion
Log Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103
Event Log ON/OFF
Trip (Fault) Log ON/OFF
Ground Fault Log ON/OFF
Marked in Oscill. Record
LED
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
information number
Data Unit
General Interrogation
235.21
17
>Function $00 BLOCK
TRIP Phase C (>$00
BL.TripC)
Flx SP On
Of
f
On
Off
* * LED BI FK
TO
NL
IN
E
BO
235.21
18
Function $00 is BLOCKED
($00 BLOCKED)
Flx OUT On
Of
f
On
Off
* * LED BO
235.21
19
Function $00 is switched
OFF ($00 OFF)
Flx OUT On
Of
f
* * * LED BO
235.21
20
Function $00 is ACTIVE
($00 ACTIVE)
Flx OUT On
Of
f
* * * LED BO
235.21
21
Function $00 picked up
($00 picked up)
Flx OUT On
Of
f
On
Off
* * LED BO
235.21
22
Function $00 Pickup
Phase A ($00 pickup A)
Flx OUT On
Of
f
On
Off
* * LED BO
235.21
23
Function $00 Pickup
Phase B ($00 pickup B)
Flx OUT On
Of
f
On
Off
* * LED BO
235.21
24
Function $00 Pickup
Phase C ($00 pickup C)
Flx OUT On
Of
f
On
Off
* * LED BO
235.21
25
Function $00 TRIP Delay
Time Out ($00 Time Out)
Flx OUT On
Of
f
On
Off
* * LED BO
235.21
26
Function $00 TRIP ($00
TRIP)
Flx OUT On
Of
f
On * * LED BO
235.21
28
Function $00 has invalid
settings ($00 inval.set)
Flx OUT On
Of
f
On
Off
* * LED BO
236.21
27
BLOCK Flexible Function
(BLK. Flex.Fct.)
Device,
General
IntS
P
On
Of
f
* * * LED BO
253 Failure VT circuit: broken
wire (VT brk. wire)
Meas-
urem.Super
v
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO
255 Failure VT circuit (Fail VT
circuit)
Meas-
urem.Super
v
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO
Functions, Settings, Information
F.3 Information List
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 511
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
No. Description Function Typ
e of
Info
rma
tion
Log Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103
Event Log ON/OFF
Trip (Fault) Log ON/OFF
Ground Fault Log ON/OFF
Marked in Oscill. Record
LED
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
information number
Data Unit
General Interrogation
256 Failure VT circuit: 1 pole
broken wire (VT b.w. 1
pole)
Meas-
urem.Super
v
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO
257 Failure VT circuit: 2 pole
broken wire (VT b.w. 2
pole)
Meas-
urem.Super
v
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO
258 Failure VT circuit: 3 pole
broken wire (VT b.w. 3
pole)
Meas-
urem.Super
v
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO
272 Set Point Operating Hours
(SP. Op Hours>)
SetPoint(Sta
t)
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO 13
5
22
9
1 Yes
301 Power System fault
(Pow.Sys.Flt.)
Device,
General
OUT On
Of
f
On
Off
13
5
23
1
2 Yes
302 Fault Event (Fault Event) Device,
General
OUT * On 13
5
23
2
2 Yes
303 sensitive Ground fault
(sens Gnd flt)
Device,
General
OUT ON
OF
F
320 Warn: Limit of Memory
Data exceeded (Warn
Mem. Data)
Device,
General
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO
321 Warn: Limit of Memory
Parameter exceeded
(Warn Mem. Para.)
Device,
General
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO
322 Warn: Limit of Memory
Operation exceeded
(Warn Mem. Oper.)
Device,
General
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO
323 Warn: Limit of Memory
New exceeded (Warn
Mem. New)
Device,
General
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO
335 >GOOSE-Stop (>GOOSE-
Stop)
Device,
General
SP On
Of
f
* LED BI FK
TO
NL
IN
E
BO
356 >Manual close signal
(>Manual Close)
P.System
Data 2
SP * * * LED BI BO 15
0
6 1 Yes
395 >I MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
(>I MinMax Reset)
Min/Max
meter
SP On * * LED BI BO
396 >I1 MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
(>I1 MiMaReset)
Min/Max
meter
SP On * * LED BI BO
Functions, Settings, Information
F.3 Information List
512 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
No. Description Function Typ
e of
Info
rma
tion
Log Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103
Event Log ON/OFF
Trip (Fault) Log ON/OFF
Ground Fault Log ON/OFF
Marked in Oscill. Record
LED
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
information number
Data Unit
General Interrogation
397 >V MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
(>V MiMaReset)
Min/Max
meter
SP On * * LED BI BO
398 >Vphph MIN/MAX Buffer
Reset (>VphphMiMaRes)
Min/Max
meter
SP On * * LED BI BO
399 >V1 MIN/MAX Buffer
Reset (>V1 MiMa Reset)
Min/Max
meter
SP On * * LED BI BO
400 >P MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
(>P MiMa Reset)
Min/Max
meter
SP On * * LED BI BO
401 >S MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
(>S MiMa Reset)
Min/Max
meter
SP On * * LED BI BO
402 >Q MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
(>Q MiMa Reset)
Min/Max
meter
SP On * * LED BI BO
403 >Idmd MIN/MAX Buffer
Reset (>Idmd MiMaReset)
Min/Max
meter
SP On * * LED BI BO
404 >Pdmd MIN/MAX Buffer
Reset (>Pdmd MiMaR-
eset)
Min/Max
meter
SP On * * LED BI BO
405 >Qdmd MIN/MAX Buffer
Reset (>Qdmd MiMaR-
eset)
Min/Max
meter
SP On * * LED BI BO
406 >Sdmd MIN/MAX Buffer
Reset (>Sdmd MiMaR-
eset)
Min/Max
meter
SP On * * LED BI BO
407 >Frq. MIN/MAX Buffer
Reset (>Frq MiMa Reset)
Min/Max
meter
SP On * * LED BI BO
408 >Power Factor MIN/MAX
Buffer Reset (>PF MiMaR-
eset)
Min/Max
meter
SP On * * LED BI BO
409 >BLOCK Op Counter
(>BLOCK Op Count)
Statistics SP On
Of
f
* LED BI BO
412 >Theta MIN/MAX Buffer
Reset (> Θ MiMa Reset)
Min/Max
meter
SP On * * LED BI BO
466.40
10
Trip via control command
(Cmd Trip)
P.System
Data 2
IntS
P
On
Of
f
On * LED BO
501 Relay PICKUP (Relay
PICKUP)
P.System
Data 2
OUT ON m LED BO 15
0
15
1
2 Yes
502 Relay Drop Out (Relay
Drop Out)
Device,
General
SP * *
510 General CLOSE of relay
(Relay CLOSE)
Device,
General
SP * *
Functions, Settings, Information
F.3 Information List
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 513
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
No. Description Function Typ
e of
Info
rma
tion
Log Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103
Event Log ON/OFF
Trip (Fault) Log ON/OFF
Ground Fault Log ON/OFF
Marked in Oscill. Record
LED
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
information number
Data Unit
General Interrogation
511 Relay GENERAL TRIP
command (Relay TRIP)
P.System
Data 2
OUT ON m LED BO 15
0
16
1
2 Yes
533 Primary fault current Ia (Ia
=)
P.System
Data 2
VI ON
OFF
15
0
17
7
4 No
534 Primary fault current Ib
(Ib =)
P.System
Data 2
VI ON
OFF
15
0
17
8
4 No
535 Primary fault current Ic (Ic
=)
P.System
Data 2
VI ON
OFF
15
0
17
9
4 No
545 Time from Pickup to drop
out (PU Time)
Device,
General
VI
546 Time from Pickup to TRIP
(TRIP Time)
Device,
General
VI
561 Manual close signal
detected
(Man.Clos.Detect)
P.System
Data 2
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO
916 Increment of active
energy (WpΔ=)
Energy -
917 Increment of reactive
energy (WqΔ=)
Energy -
1020 Counter of operating
hours (Op.Hours=)
Statistics VI
1021 Accumulation of inter-
rupted current Ph A (Σ Ia
=)
Statistics VI
1022 Accumulation of inter-
rupted current Ph B (Σ Ib
=)
Statistics VI
1023 Accumulation of inter-
rupted current Ph C (Σ Ic
=)
Statistics VI
1106 >Start Fault Locator
(>Start Flt. Loc)
Fault
Locator
SP On * * LED BI BO 15
1
6 1 Yes
1114 Flt Locator: primary
RESISTANCE (Rpri =)
Fault
Locator
VI ON
OFF
15
1
14 4 No
1115 Flt Locator: primary REAC-
TANCE (Xpri =)
Fault
Locator
VI ON
OFF
15
1
15 4 No
1117 Flt Locator: secondary
RESISTANCE (Rsec =)
Fault
Locator
VI ON
OFF
15
1
17 4 No
1118 Flt Locator: secondary
REACTANCE (Xsec =)
Fault
Locator
VI ON
OFF
15
1
18 4 No
1119 Flt Locator: Distance to
fault (dist =)
Fault
Locator
VI ON
OFF
15
1
19 4 No
Functions, Settings, Information
F.3 Information List
514 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
No. Description Function Typ
e of
Info
rma
tion
Log Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103
Event Log ON/OFF
Trip (Fault) Log ON/OFF
Ground Fault Log ON/OFF
Marked in Oscill. Record
LED
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
information number
Data Unit
General Interrogation
1120 Flt Locator: Distance [%]
to fault (d[%] =)
Fault
Locator
VI ON
OFF
15
1
20 4 No
1122 Flt Locator: Distance to
fault (dist =)
Fault
Locator
VI ON
OFF
15
1
22 4 No
1123 Fault Locator Loop AG (FL
Loop AG)
Fault
Locator
OUT * On * LED BO
1124 Fault Locator Loop BG (FL
Loop BG)
Fault
Locator
OUT * On * LED BO
1125 Fault Locator Loop CG (FL
Loop CG)
Fault
Locator
OUT * On * LED BO
1126 Fault Locator Loop AB (FL
Loop AB)
Fault
Locator
OUT * On * LED BO
1127 Fault Locator Loop BC (FL
Loop BC)
Fault
Locator
OUT * On * LED BO
1128 Fault Locator Loop CA (FL
Loop CA)
Fault
Locator
OUT * On * LED BO
1132 Fault location invalid
(Flt.Loc.invalid)
Fault
Locator
OUT * On * LED BO
1201 >BLOCK 64 (>BLOCK 64) Sens. Gnd
Fault
SP On
Of
f
* * LED BI BO 15
1
10
1
1 Yes
1202 >BLOCK 50Ns-2 (>BLOCK
50Ns-2)
Sens. Gnd
Fault
SP On
Of
f
* * LED BI BO 15
1
10
2
1 Yes
1203 >BLOCK 50Ns-1 (>BLOCK
50Ns-1)
Sens. Gnd
Fault
SP On
Of
f
* * LED BI BO 15
1
10
3
1 Yes
1204 >BLOCK 51Ns (>BLOCK
51Ns)
Sens. Gnd
Fault
SP On
Of
f
* * LED BI BO 15
1
10
4
1 Yes
1207 >BLOCK 50Ns/67Ns (>BLK
50Ns/67Ns)
Sens. Gnd
Fault
SP On
Of
f
* * LED BI BO 15
1
10
7
1 Yes
1211 50Ns/67Ns is OFF (50Ns/
67Ns OFF)
Sens. Gnd
Fault
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO 15
1
11
1
1 Yes
1212 50Ns/67Ns is ACTIVE
(50Ns/67Ns ACT)
Sens. Gnd
Fault
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO 15
1
11
2
1 Yes
1215 64 displacement voltage
pick up (64 Pickup)
Sens. Gnd
Fault
OUT * On
Off
* LED BO 15
1
11
5
2 Yes
1217 64 displacement voltage
element TRIP (64 TRIP)
Sens. Gnd
Fault
OUT * On m LED BO 15
1
11
7
2 Yes
Functions, Settings, Information
F.3 Information List
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 515
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
No. Description Function Typ
e of
Info
rma
tion
Log Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103
Event Log ON/OFF
Trip (Fault) Log ON/OFF
Ground Fault Log ON/OFF
Marked in Oscill. Record
LED
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
information number
Data Unit
General Interrogation
1221 50Ns-2 Pickup (50Ns-2
Pickup)
Sens. Gnd
Fault
OUT * On
Off
* LED BO 15
1
12
1
2 Yes
1223 50Ns-2 TRIP (50Ns-2 TRIP) Sens. Gnd
Fault
OUT * On m LED BO 15
1
12
3
2 Yes
1224 50Ns-1 Pickup (50Ns-1
Pickup)
Sens. Gnd
Fault
OUT * On
Off
* LED BO 15
1
12
4
2 Yes
1226 50Ns-1 TRIP (50Ns-1 TRIP) Sens. Gnd
Fault
OUT * On m LED BO 15
1
12
6
2 Yes
1227 51Ns picked up (51Ns
Pickup)
Sens. Gnd
Fault
OUT * On
Off
* LED BO 15
1
12
7
2 Yes
1229 51Ns TRIP (51Ns TRIP) Sens. Gnd
Fault
OUT * On m LED BO 15
1
12
9
2 Yes
1230 Sensitive ground fault
detection BLOCKED (Sens.
Gnd block)
Sens. Gnd
Fault
OUT On
Of
f
On
Off
* LED BO 15
1
13
0
1 Yes
1264 Corr. Resistive Earth
current (IEEa =)
Sens. Gnd
Fault
VI ON
OF
F
1265 Corr. Reactive Earth
current (IEEr =)
Sens. Gnd
Fault
VI ON
OF
F
1266 Earth current, absolute
Value (IEE =)
Sens. Gnd
Fault
VI ON
OF
F
1267 Displacement Voltage
VGND, 3Vo (VGND, 3Vo)
Sens. Gnd
Fault
VI ON
OF
F
1271 Sensitive Ground fault
pick up (Sens.Gnd Pickup)
Sens. Gnd
Fault
OUT * * LED BO 15
1
17
1
1 Yes
1272 Sensitive Ground fault
picked up in Ph A (Sens.
Gnd Ph A)
Sens. Gnd
Fault
OUT On
Of
f
On On
Off
* LED BO 16
0
48 1 Yes
1273 Sensitive Ground fault
picked up in Ph B (Sens.
Gnd Ph B)
Sens. Gnd
Fault
OUT On
Of
f
On On
Off
* LED BO 16
0
49 1 Yes
1274 Sensitive Ground fault
picked up in Ph C (Sens.
Gnd Ph C)
Sens. Gnd
Fault
OUT On
Of
f
On On
Off
* LED BO 16
0
50 1 Yes
1276 Sensitive Gnd fault in
forward direction
(SensGnd Forward)
Sens. Gnd
Fault
OUT On
Of
f
On On
Off
* LED BO 16
0
51 1 Yes
1277 Sensitive Gnd fault in
reverse direction
(SensGnd Reverse)
Sens. Gnd
Fault
OUT On
Of
f
On On
Off
* LED BO 16
0
52 1 Yes
Functions, Settings, Information
F.3 Information List
516 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
No. Description Function Typ
e of
Info
rma
tion
Log Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103
Event Log ON/OFF
Trip (Fault) Log ON/OFF
Ground Fault Log ON/OFF
Marked in Oscill. Record
LED
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
information number
Data Unit
General Interrogation
1278 Sensitive Gnd fault direc-
tion undefined (SensGnd
undef.)
Sens. Gnd
Fault
OUT On
Of
f
On On
Off
* LED BO 15
1
17
8
1 Yes
1403 >BLOCK 50BF (>BLOCK
50BF)
50BF BkrFai-
lure
SP On
Of
f
* * LED BI BO 16
6
10
3
1 Yes
1404 >50BF Activate 3I0>
threshold (>50BFactiv.
3I0>)
50BF BkrFai-
lure
SP On
Of
f
* * LED BI BO
1431 >50BF initiated externally
(>50BF ext SRC)
50BF BkrFai-
lure
SP On
Of
f
* * LED BI BO 16
6
10
4
1 Yes
1451 50BF is switched OFF
(50BF OFF)
50BF BkrFai-
lure
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO 16
6
15
1
1 Yes
1452 50BF is BLOCKED (50BF
BLOCK)
50BF BkrFai-
lure
OUT On
Of
f
On
Off
* LED BO 16
6
15
2
1 Yes
1453 50BF is ACTIVE (50BF
ACTIVE)
50BF BkrFai-
lure
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO 16
6
15
3
1 Yes
1456 50BF (internal) PICKUP
(50BF int Pickup)
50BF BkrFai-
lure
OUT * On
Off
* LED BO 16
6
15
6
2 Yes
1457 50BF (external) PICKUP
(50BF ext Pickup)
50BF BkrFai-
lure
OUT * On
Off
* LED BO 16
6
15
7
2 Yes
1471 50BF TRIP (50BF TRIP) 50BF BkrFai-
lure
OUT * On m LED BO 16
0
85 2 No
1480 50BF (internal) TRIP
(50BF int TRIP)
50BF BkrFai-
lure
OUT * On * LED BO 16
6
18
0
2 Yes
1481 50BF (external) TRIP
(50BF ext TRIP)
50BF BkrFai-
lure
OUT * On * LED BO 16
6
18
1
2 Yes
1494 50BF TRIP 2 (50BF TRIP 2) 50BF BkrFai-
lure
OUT * On * LED BO
1503 >BLOCK 49 Overload
Protection (>BLOCK 49
O/L)
49 Th.Over-
load
SP * * * LED BI BO 16
7
3 1 Yes
1507 >Emergency start of
motors (>EmergencyS-
tart)
49 Th.Over-
load
SP On
Of
f
* * LED BI BO 16
7
7 1 Yes
1511 49 Overload Protection is
OFF (49 O / L OFF)
49 Th.Over-
load
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO 16
7
11 1 Yes
Functions, Settings, Information
F.3 Information List
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 517
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
No. Description Function Typ
e of
Info
rma
tion
Log Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103
Event Log ON/OFF
Trip (Fault) Log ON/OFF
Ground Fault Log ON/OFF
Marked in Oscill. Record
LED
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
information number
Data Unit
General Interrogation
1512 49 Overload Protection is
BLOCKED (49 O/L BLOCK)
49 Th.Over-
load
OUT On
Of
f
On
Off
* LED BO 16
7
12 1 Yes
1513 49 Overload Protection is
ACTIVE (49 O/L ACTIVE)
49 Th.Over-
load
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO 16
7
13 1 Yes
1515 49 Overload Current
Alarm (I alarm) (49 O/L I
Alarm)
49 Th.Over-
load
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO 16
7
15 1 Yes
1516 49 Overload Alarm! Near
Thermal Trip (49 O/L Θ
Alarm)
49 Th.Over-
load
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO 16
7
16 1 Yes
1517 49 Winding Overload (49
Winding O/L)
49 Th.Over-
load
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO 16
7
17 1 Yes
1521 49 Thermal Overload TRIP
(49 Th O/L TRIP)
49 Th.Over-
load
OUT * On m LED BO 16
7
21 2 Yes
1580 >49 Reset of Thermal
Overload Image (>RES 49
Image)
49 Th.Over-
load
SP On
Of
f
* * LED BI BO
1581 49 Thermal Overload
Image reset (49 Image
res.)
49 Th.Over-
load
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO
1704 >BLOCK 50/51 (>BLK
50/51)
50/51
Overcur.
SP * * * LED BI BO
1714 >BLOCK 50N/51N (>BLK
50N/51N)
50/51
Overcur.
SP * * * LED BI BO
1718 >BLOCK 50-3 (>BLOCK
50-3)
50/51
Overcur.
SP * * * LED BI BO 60 14
4
1 Yes
1719 >BLOCK 50N-3 (>BLOCK
50N-3)
50/51
Overcur.
SP * * * LED BI BO 60 14
5
1 Yes
1721 >BLOCK 50-2 (>BLOCK
50-2)
50/51
Overcur.
SP * * * LED BI BO 60 1 1 Yes
1722 >BLOCK 50-1 (>BLOCK
50-1)
50/51
Overcur.
SP * * * LED BI BO 60 2 1 Yes
1723 >BLOCK 51 (>BLOCK 51) 50/51
Overcur.
SP * * * LED BI BO 60 3 1 Yes
1724 >BLOCK 50N-2 (>BLOCK
50N-2)
50/51
Overcur.
SP * * * LED BI BO 60 4 1 Yes
1725 >BLOCK 50N-1 (>BLOCK
50N-1)
50/51
Overcur.
SP * * * LED BI BO 60 5 1 Yes
1726 >BLOCK 51N (>BLOCK
51N)
50/51
Overcur.
SP * * * LED BI BO 60 6 1 Yes
Functions, Settings, Information
F.3 Information List
518 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
No. Description Function Typ
e of
Info
rma
tion
Log Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103
Event Log ON/OFF
Trip (Fault) Log ON/OFF
Ground Fault Log ON/OFF
Marked in Oscill. Record
LED
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
information number
Data Unit
General Interrogation
1730 >BLOCK Cold-Load-Pickup
(>BLOCK CLP)
ColdLoad-
Pickup
SP * * * LED BI BO
1731 >BLOCK Cold-Load-Pickup
stop timer (>BLK CLP
stpTim)
ColdLoad-
Pickup
SP On
Of
f
* * LED BI BO 60 24
3
1 Yes
1732 >ACTIVATE Cold-Load-
Pickup (>ACTIVATE CLP)
ColdLoad-
Pickup
SP On
Of
f
* * LED BI BO
1751 50/51 O/C switched OFF
(50/51 PH OFF)
50/51
Overcur.
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO 60 21 1 Yes
1752 50/51 O/C is BLOCKED
(50/51 PH BLK)
50/51
Overcur.
OUT On
Of
f
On
Off
* LED BO 60 22 1 Yes
1753 50/51 O/C is ACTIVE
(50/51 PH ACT)
50/51
Overcur.
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO 60 23 1 Yes
1756 50N/51N is OFF (50N/51N
OFF)
50/51
Overcur.
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO 60 26 1 Yes
1757 50N/51N is BLOCKED
(50N/51N BLK)
50/51
Overcur.
OUT On
Of
f
On
Off
* LED BO 60 27 1 Yes
1758 50N/51N is ACTIVE
(50N/51N ACT)
50/51
Overcur.
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO 60 28 1 Yes
1761 50(N)/51(N) O/C PICKUP
(50(N)/51(N) PU)
50/51
Overcur.
OUT * On
Off
m LED BO 16
0
84 2 Yes
1762 50/51 Phase A picked up
(50/51 Ph A PU)
50/51
Overcur.
OUT * On
Off
m LED BO 16
0
64 2 Yes
1763 50/51 Phase B picked up
(50/51 Ph B PU)
50/51
Overcur.
OUT * On
Off
m LED BO 16
0
65 2 Yes
1764 50/51 Phase C picked up
(50/51 Ph C PU)
50/51
Overcur.
OUT * On
Off
m LED BO 16
0
66 2 Yes
1765 50N/51N picked up (50N/
51NPickedup)
50/51
Overcur.
OUT * On
Off
m LED BO 16
0
67 2 Yes
1767 50-3 picked up (50-3
picked up)
50/51
Overcur.
OUT * On
Off
* LED BO 60 14
6
2 Yes
1768 50N-3 picked up (50N-3
picked up)
50/51
Overcur.
OUT * On
Off
* LED BO 60 14
7
2 Yes
1769 50-3 TRIP (50-3 TRIP) 50/51
Overcur.
OUT * On * LED BO 60 14
8
2 Yes
1770 50N-3 TRIP (50N-3 TRIP) 50/51
Overcur.
OUT * On * LED BO 60 14
9
2 Yes
Functions, Settings, Information
F.3 Information List
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 519
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
No. Description Function Typ
e of
Info
rma
tion
Log Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103
Event Log ON/OFF
Trip (Fault) Log ON/OFF
Ground Fault Log ON/OFF
Marked in Oscill. Record
LED
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
information number
Data Unit
General Interrogation
1787 50-3 TimeOut (50-3
TimeOut)
50/51
Overcur.
OUT * * * LED BO 60 16
7
2 Yes
1788 50N-3 TimeOut (50N-3
TimeOut)
50/51
Overcur.
OUT * * * LED BO 60 16
8
2 Yes
1791 50(N)/51(N) TRIP (50(N)/
51(N)TRIP)
50/51
Overcur.
OUT * On m LED BO 16
0
68 2 No
1800 50-2 picked up (50-2
picked up)
50/51
Overcur.
OUT * On
Off
* LED BO 60 75 2 Yes
1804 50-2 Time Out (50-2
TimeOut)
50/51
Overcur.
OUT * * * LED BO 60 49 2 Yes
1805 50-2 TRIP (50-2 TRIP) 50/51
Overcur.
OUT * On m LED BO 16
0
91 2 No
1810 50-1 picked up (50-1
picked up)
50/51
Overcur.
OUT * On
Off
* LED BO 60 76 2 Yes
1814 50-1 Time Out (50-1
TimeOut)
50/51
Overcur.
OUT * * * LED BO 60 53 2 Yes
1815 50-1 TRIP (50-1 TRIP) 50/51
Overcur.
OUT * On m LED BO 16
0
90 2 No
1820 51 picked up (51 picked
up)
50/51
Overcur.
OUT * On
Off
* LED BO 60 77 2 Yes
1824 51 Time Out (51 Time
Out)
50/51
Overcur.
OUT * * * LED BO 60 57 2 Yes
1825 51 TRIP (51 TRIP) 50/51
Overcur.
OUT * On m LED BO 60 58 2 Yes
1831 50N-2 picked up (50N-2
picked up)
50/51
Overcur.
OUT * On
Off
* LED BO 60 59 2 Yes
1832 50N-2 Time Out (50N-2
TimeOut)
50/51
Overcur.
OUT * * * LED BO 60 60 2 Yes
1833 50N-2 TRIP (50N-2 TRIP) 50/51
Overcur.
OUT * On m LED BO 16
0
93 2 No
1834 50N-1 picked up (50N-1
picked up)
50/51
Overcur.
OUT * On
Off
* LED BO 60 62 2 Yes
1835 50N-1 Time Out (50N-1
TimeOut)
50/51
Overcur.
OUT * * * LED BO 60 63 2 Yes
1836 50N-1 TRIP (50N-1 TRIP) 50/51
Overcur.
OUT * On m LED BO 16
0
92 2 No
1837 51N picked up (51N
picked up)
50/51
Overcur.
OUT * On
Off
* LED BO 60 64 2 Yes
1838 51N Time Out (51N
TimeOut)
50/51
Overcur.
OUT * * * LED BO 60 65 2 Yes
1839 51N TRIP (51N TRIP) 50/51
Overcur.
OUT * On m LED BO 60 66 2 Yes
Functions, Settings, Information
F.3 Information List
520 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
No. Description Function Typ
e of
Info
rma
tion
Log Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103
Event Log ON/OFF
Trip (Fault) Log ON/OFF
Ground Fault Log ON/OFF
Marked in Oscill. Record
LED
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
information number
Data Unit
General Interrogation
1840 Phase A inrush detection
(PhA InrushDet)
50/51
Overcur.
OUT * On
Off
* LED BO 60 10
1
2 Yes
1841 Phase B inrush detection
(PhB InrushDet)
50/51
Overcur.
OUT * On
Off
* LED BO 60 10
2
2 Yes
1842 Phase C inrush detection
(PhC InrushDet)
50/51
Overcur.
OUT * On
Off
* LED BO 60 10
3
2 Yes
1843 Cross blk: PhX blocked
PhY (INRUSH X-BLK)
50/51
Overcur.
OUT * On
Off
* LED BO 60 10
4
2 Yes
1851 50-1 BLOCKED (50-1
BLOCKED)
50/51
Overcur.
OUT On
Of
f
On
Off
* LED BO 60 10
5
1 Yes
1852 50-2 BLOCKED (50-2
BLOCKED)
50/51
Overcur.
OUT On
Of
f
On
Off
* LED BO 60 10
6
1 Yes
1853 50N-1 BLOCKED (50N-1
BLOCKED)
50/51
Overcur.
OUT On
Of
f
On
Off
* LED BO 60 10
7
1 Yes
1854 50N-2 BLOCKED (50N-2
BLOCKED)
50/51
Overcur.
OUT On
Of
f
On
Off
* LED BO 60 10
8
1 Yes
1855 51 BLOCKED (51
BLOCKED)
50/51
Overcur.
OUT On
Of
f
On
Off
* LED BO 60 10
9
1 Yes
1856 51N BLOCKED (51N
BLOCKED)
50/51
Overcur.
OUT On
Of
f
On
Off
* LED BO 60 11
0
1 Yes
1866 51 Disk emulation Pickup
(51 Disk Pickup)
50/51
Overcur.
OUT * * * LED BO
1867 51N Disk emulation
picked up (51N Disk
Pickup)
50/51
Overcur.
OUT * * * LED BO
1994 Cold-Load-Pickup
switched OFF (CLP OFF)
ColdLoad-
Pickup
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO 60 24
4
1 Yes
1995 Cold-Load-Pickup is
BLOCKED (CLP BLOCKED)
ColdLoad-
Pickup
OUT On
Of
f
On
Off
* LED BO 60 24
5
1 Yes
1996 Cold-Load-Pickup is
RUNNING (CLP running)
ColdLoad-
Pickup
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO 60 24
6
1 Yes
1997 Dynamic settings are
ACTIVE (Dyn set. ACTIVE)
ColdLoad-
Pickup
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO 60 24
7
1 Yes
Functions, Settings, Information
F.3 Information List
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 521
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
No. Description Function Typ
e of
Info
rma
tion
Log Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103
Event Log ON/OFF
Trip (Fault) Log ON/OFF
Ground Fault Log ON/OFF
Marked in Oscill. Record
LED
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
information number
Data Unit
General Interrogation
2603 67N-3 TRIP (67N-3 TRIP) 67 Direct.
O/C
OUT * On * LED BO
2604 >BLOCK 67/67-TOC (>BLK
67/67-TOC)
67 Direct.
O/C
SP * * * LED BI BO
2605 67N-3 is BLOCKED (67N-3
BLOCKED)
67 Direct.
O/C
OUT On
Of
f
On
Off
* LED BO
2606 67-3 is BLOCKED (67-3
BLOCKED)
67 Direct.
O/C
OUT On
Of
f
On
Off
* LED BO
2614 >BLOCK 67N/67N-TOC
(>BLK 67N/67NTOC)
67 Direct.
O/C
SP * * * LED BI BO
2615 >BLOCK 67-2 (>BLOCK
67-2)
67 Direct.
O/C
SP * * * LED BI BO 63 73 1 Yes
2616 >BLOCK 67N-2 (>BLOCK
67N-2)
67 Direct.
O/C
SP * * * LED BI BO 63 74 1 Yes
2617 >BLOCK 67-3 (>BLOCK
67-3)
67 Direct.
O/C
SP * * * LED BI BO
2618 >BLOCK 67N-3 (>BLOCK
67N-3)
67 Direct.
O/C
SP * * * LED BI BO
2621 >BLOCK 67-1 (>BLOCK
67-1)
67 Direct.
O/C
SP * * * LED BI BO 63 1 1 Yes
2622 >BLOCK 67-TOC (>BLOCK
67-TOC)
67 Direct.
O/C
SP * * * LED BI BO 63 2 1 Yes
2623 >BLOCK 67N-1 (>BLOCK
67N-1)
67 Direct.
O/C
SP * * * LED BI BO 63 3 1 Yes
2624 >BLOCK 67N-TOC
(>BLOCK 67N-TOC)
67 Direct.
O/C
SP * * * LED BI BO 63 4 1 Yes
2628 Phase A forward (Phase A
forward)
67 Direct.
O/C
OUT On * * LED BO 63 81 1 Yes
2629 Phase B forward (Phase B
forward)
67 Direct.
O/C
OUT On * * LED BO 63 82 1 Yes
2630 Phase C forward (Phase C
forward)
67 Direct.
O/C
OUT On * * LED BO 63 83 1 Yes
2632 Phase A reverse (Phase A
reverse)
67 Direct.
O/C
OUT On * * LED BO 63 84 1 Yes
2633 Phase B reverse (Phase B
reverse)
67 Direct.
O/C
OUT On * * LED BO 63 85 1 Yes
2634 Phase C reverse (Phase C
reverse)
67 Direct.
O/C
OUT On * * LED BO 63 86 1 Yes
2635 Ground forward (Ground
forward)
67 Direct.
O/C
OUT On * * LED BO 63 87 1 Yes
Functions, Settings, Information
F.3 Information List
522 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
No. Description Function Typ
e of
Info
rma
tion
Log Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103
Event Log ON/OFF
Trip (Fault) Log ON/OFF
Ground Fault Log ON/OFF
Marked in Oscill. Record
LED
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
information number
Data Unit
General Interrogation
2636 Ground reverse (Ground
reverse)
67 Direct.
O/C
OUT On * * LED BO 63 88 1 Yes
2637 67-1 is BLOCKED (67-1
BLOCKED)
67 Direct.
O/C
OUT On
Of
f
On
Off
* LED BO 63 91 1 Yes
2642 67-2 picked up (67-2
picked up)
67 Direct.
O/C
OUT * On
Off
* LED BO 63 67 2 Yes
2646 67N-2 picked up (67N-2
picked up)
67 Direct.
O/C
OUT * On
Off
* LED BO 63 62 2 Yes
2647 67-2 Time Out (67-2 Time
Out)
67 Direct.
O/C
OUT * * * LED BO 63 71 2 Yes
2648 67N-2 Time Out (67N-2
Time Out)
67 Direct.
O/C
OUT * * * LED BO 63 63 2 Yes
2649 67-2 TRIP (67-2 TRIP) 67 Direct.
O/C
OUT * On m LED BO 63 72 2 Yes
2651 67/67-TOC switched OFF
(67/67-TOC OFF)
67 Direct.
O/C
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO 63 10 1 Yes
2652 67/67-TOC is BLOCKED
(67 BLOCKED)
67 Direct.
O/C
OUT On
Of
f
On
Off
* LED BO 63 11 1 Yes
2653 67/67-TOC is ACTIVE (67
ACTIVE)
67 Direct.
O/C
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO 63 12 1 Yes
2655 67-2 is BLOCKED (67-2
BLOCKED)
67 Direct.
O/C
OUT On
Of
f
On
Off
* LED BO 63 92 1 Yes
2656 67N/67N-TOC switched
OFF (67N OFF)
67 Direct.
O/C
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO 63 13 1 Yes
2657 67N/67N-TOC is BLOCKED
(67N BLOCKED)
67 Direct.
O/C
OUT On
Of
f
On
Off
* LED BO 63 14 1 Yes
2658 67N/67N-TOC is ACTIVE
(67N ACTIVE)
67 Direct.
O/C
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO 63 15 1 Yes
2659 67N-1 is BLOCKED (67N-1
BLOCKED)
67 Direct.
O/C
OUT On
Of
f
On
Off
* LED BO 63 93 1 Yes
2660 67-1 picked up (67-1
picked up)
67 Direct.
O/C
OUT * On
Off
* LED BO 63 20 2 Yes
2664 67-1 Time Out (67-1 Time
Out)
67 Direct.
O/C
OUT * * * LED BO 63 24 2 Yes
Functions, Settings, Information
F.3 Information List
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 523
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
No. Description Function Typ
e of
Info
rma
tion
Log Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103
Event Log ON/OFF
Trip (Fault) Log ON/OFF
Ground Fault Log ON/OFF
Marked in Oscill. Record
LED
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
information number
Data Unit
General Interrogation
2665 67-1 TRIP (67-1 TRIP) 67 Direct.
O/C
OUT * On m LED BO 63 25 2 Yes
2668 67N-2 is BLOCKED (67N-2
BLOCKED)
67 Direct.
O/C
OUT On
Of
f
On
Off
* LED BO 63 94 1 Yes
2669 67-TOC is BLOCKED (67-
TOC BLOCKED)
67 Direct.
O/C
OUT On
Of
f
On
Off
* LED BO 63 95 1 Yes
2670 67-TOC picked up (67-
TOC pickedup)
67 Direct.
O/C
OUT * On
Off
* LED BO 63 30 2 Yes
2674 67-TOC Time Out (67-
TOC Time Out)
67 Direct.
O/C
OUT * * * LED BO 63 34 2 Yes
2675 67-TOC TRIP (67-TOC
TRIP)
67 Direct.
O/C
OUT * On m LED BO 63 35 2 Yes
2676 67-TOC disk emulation is
ACTIVE (67-TOC DiskPU)
67 Direct.
O/C
OUT * * * LED BO
2677 67N-TOC is BLOCKED
(67N-TOC BLOCKED)
67 Direct.
O/C
OUT On
Of
f
On
Off
* LED BO 63 96 1 Yes
2678 67-3 TRIP (67-3 TRIP) 67 Direct.
O/C
OUT * On * LED BO
2679 67N-2 TRIP (67N-2 TRIP) 67 Direct.
O/C
OUT * On m LED BO 63 64 2 Yes
2681 67N-1 picked up (67N-1
picked up)
67 Direct.
O/C
OUT * On
Off
* LED BO 63 41 2 Yes
2682 67N-1 Time Out (67N-1
Time Out)
67 Direct.
O/C
OUT * * * LED BO 63 42 2 Yes
2683 67N-1 TRIP (67N-1 TRIP) 67 Direct.
O/C
OUT * On m LED BO 63 43 2 Yes
2684 67N-TOC picked up (67N-
TOCPickedup)
67 Direct.
O/C
OUT * On
Off
* LED BO 63 44 2 Yes
2685 67N-TOC Time Out (67N-
TOC TimeOut)
67 Direct.
O/C
OUT * * * LED BO 63 45 2 Yes
2686 67N-TOC TRIP (67N-TOC
TRIP)
67 Direct.
O/C
OUT * On m LED BO 63 46 2 Yes
2687 67N-TOC disk emulation
is ACTIVE (67N-TOC Disk
PU)
67 Direct.
O/C
OUT * * * LED BO
2691 67/67N picked up
(67/67N pickedup)
67 Direct.
O/C
OUT * On
Off
m LED BO 63 50 2 Yes
2692 67/67-TOC Phase A
picked up (67 A picked
up)
67 Direct.
O/C
OUT * On
Off
* LED BO 63 51 2 Yes
Functions, Settings, Information
F.3 Information List
524 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
No. Description Function Typ
e of
Info
rma
tion
Log Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103
Event Log ON/OFF
Trip (Fault) Log ON/OFF
Ground Fault Log ON/OFF
Marked in Oscill. Record
LED
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
information number
Data Unit
General Interrogation
2693 67/67-TOC Phase B picked
up (67 B picked up)
67 Direct.
O/C
OUT * On
Off
* LED BO 63 52 2 Yes
2694 67/67-TOC Phase C picked
up (67 C picked up)
67 Direct.
O/C
OUT * On
Off
* LED BO 63 53 2 Yes
2695 67N/67N-TOC picked up
(67N picked up)
67 Direct.
O/C
OUT * On
Off
* LED BO 63 54 2 Yes
2696 67/67N TRIP (67/67N
TRIP)
67 Direct.
O/C
OUT * On m LED BO 63 55 2 Yes
2697 67-3 picked up (67-3
picked up)
67 Direct.
O/C
OUT * On
Off
* LED BO
2698 67N-3 picked up (67N-3
picked up)
67 Direct.
O/C
OUT * On
Off
* LED BO
2699 67-3 Time Out (67-3 Time
Out)
67 Direct.
O/C
OUT * * * LED BO
2700 67N-3 Time Out (67N-3
Time Out)
67 Direct.
O/C
OUT * * * LED BO
2701 >79 ON (>79 ON) 79M Auto
Recl.
SP On
Of
f
* * LED BI BO 40 1 1 Yes
2702 >79 OFF (>79 OFF) 79M Auto
Recl.
SP On
Of
f
* * LED BI BO 40 2 1 Yes
2703 >BLOCK 79 (>BLOCK 79) 79M Auto
Recl.
SP On
Of
f
* * LED BI BO 40 3 1 Yes
2711 >79 External start of
internal A/R (>79 Start)
79M Auto
Recl.
SP * On
Off
* LED BI BO
2715 >Start 79 Ground
program (>Start 79 Gnd)
79M Auto
Recl.
SP * On * LED BI BO 40 15 2 Yes
2716 >Start 79 Phase program
(>Start 79 Ph)
79M Auto
Recl.
SP * On * LED BI BO 40 16 2 Yes
2720 >Enable 50/67-(N)-2
(override 79 blk) (>Enable
ANSI#-2)
P.System
Data 2
SP On
Of
f
* * LED BI BO 40 20 1 Yes
2722 >Switch zone sequence
coordination ON (>ZSC
ON)
79M Auto
Recl.
SP On
Of
f
* * LED BI BO
2723 >Switch zone sequence
coordination OFF (>ZSC
OFF)
79M Auto
Recl.
SP On
Of
f
* * LED BI BO
2730 >Circuit breaker READY
for reclosing (>CB Ready)
79M Auto
Recl.
SP On
Of
f
* * LED BI BO 40 30 1 Yes
Functions, Settings, Information
F.3 Information List
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 525
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
No. Description Function Typ
e of
Info
rma
tion
Log Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103
Event Log ON/OFF
Trip (Fault) Log ON/OFF
Ground Fault Log ON/OFF
Marked in Oscill. Record
LED
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
information number
Data Unit
General Interrogation
2731 >79: Sync. release from
ext. sync.-check
(>Sync.release)
79M Auto
Recl.
SP * On * LED BI BO
2753 79: Max. Dead Time Start
Delay expired (79 DT
delay ex.)
79M Auto
Recl.
OUT On * * LED BO
2754 >79: Dead Time Start
Delay (>79 DT St.Delay)
79M Auto
Recl.
SP On
Of
f
* * LED BI BO
2781 79 Auto recloser is
switched OFF (79 OFF)
79M Auto
Recl.
OUT On * * LED BO 40 81 1 Yes
2782 79 Auto recloser is
switched ON (79 ON)
79M Auto
Recl.
IntS
P
On
Of
f
* * LED BO 16
0
16 1 Yes
2784 79 Auto recloser is NOT
ready (79 is NOT ready)
79M Auto
Recl.
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO 16
0
13
0
1 Yes
2785 79 - Auto-reclose is
dynamically BLOCKED (79
DynBlock)
79M Auto
Recl.
OUT On
Of
f
On * LED BO 40 85 1 Yes
2788 79: CB ready monitoring
window expired (79 T-
CBreadyExp)
79M Auto
Recl.
OUT On * * LED BO
2801 79 - in progress (79 in
progress)
79M Auto
Recl.
OUT * On * LED BO 40 10
1
2 Yes
2808 79: CB open with no trip
(79 BLK: CB open)
79M Auto
Recl.
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO
2809 79: Start-signal moni-
toring time expired (79 T-
Start Exp)
79M Auto
Recl.
OUT On * * LED BO
2810 79: Maximum dead time
expired (79 TdeadMax
Exp)
79M Auto
Recl.
OUT On * * LED BO
2823 79: no starter configured
(79 no starter)
79M Auto
Recl.
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO
2824 79: no cycle configured
(79 no cycle)
79M Auto
Recl.
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO
2827 79: blocking due to trip
(79 BLK by trip)
79M Auto
Recl.
OUT On * * LED BO
Functions, Settings, Information
F.3 Information List
526 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
No. Description Function Typ
e of
Info
rma
tion
Log Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103
Event Log ON/OFF
Trip (Fault) Log ON/OFF
Ground Fault Log ON/OFF
Marked in Oscill. Record
LED
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
information number
Data Unit
General Interrogation
2828 79: blocking due to 3-
phase pickup (79 BLK:3ph
p.u.)
79M Auto
Recl.
OUT On * * LED BO
2829 79: action time expired
before trip (79 Tact
expired)
79M Auto
Recl.
OUT On * * LED BO
2830 79: max. no. of cycles
exceeded (79 Max. No.
Cyc)
79M Auto
Recl.
OUT On * * LED BO
2844 79 1st cycle running (79
1stCyc. run.)
79M Auto
Recl.
OUT * On * LED BO
2845 79 2nd cycle running (79
2ndCyc. run.)
79M Auto
Recl.
OUT * On * LED BO
2846 79 3rd cycle running (79
3rdCyc. run.)
79M Auto
Recl.
OUT * On * LED BO
2847 79 4th or higher cycle
running (79 4thCyc. run.)
79M Auto
Recl.
OUT * On * LED BO
2851 79 - Close command (79
Close)
79M Auto
Recl.
OUT * On m LED BO 16
0
12
8
2 No
2862 79 - cycle successful (79
Successful)
79M Auto
Recl.
OUT On On * LED BO 40 16
2
1 Yes
2863 79 - Lockout (79 Lockout) 79M Auto
Recl.
OUT On On * LED BO 40 16
3
2 Yes
2865 79: Synchro-check
request (79
Sync.Request)
79M Auto
Recl.
OUT * On * LED BO
2878 79-A/R single phase
reclosing sequence (79 L-
N Sequence)
79M Auto
Recl.
OUT * On * LED BO 40 18
0
2 Yes
2879 79-A/R multi-phase
reclosing sequence (79 L-
L Sequence)
79M Auto
Recl.
OUT * On * LED BO 40 18
1
2 Yes
2883 Zone Sequencing is active
(ZSC active)
79M Auto
Recl.
OUT On
Of
f
On * LED BO
2884 Zone sequence coordina-
tion switched ON (ZSC
ON)
79M Auto
Recl.
OUT On * * LED BO
2885 Zone sequence coordina-
tion switched OFF (ZSC
OFF)
79M Auto
Recl.
OUT On * * LED BO
2889 79 1st cycle zone exten-
sion release (79 1.CycZo-
neRel)
79M Auto
Recl.
OUT * * * LED BO
Functions, Settings, Information
F.3 Information List
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 527
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
No. Description Function Typ
e of
Info
rma
tion
Log Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103
Event Log ON/OFF
Trip (Fault) Log ON/OFF
Ground Fault Log ON/OFF
Marked in Oscill. Record
LED
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
information number
Data Unit
General Interrogation
2890 79 2nd cycle zone exten-
sion release (79 2.CycZo-
neRel)
79M Auto
Recl.
OUT * * * LED BO
2891 79 3rd cycle zone exten-
sion release (79 3.CycZo-
neRel)
79M Auto
Recl.
OUT * * * LED BO
2892 79 4th cycle zone exten-
sion release (79 4.CycZo-
neRel)
79M Auto
Recl.
OUT * * * LED BO
2896 No. of 1st AR-cycle CLOSE
commands,3pole (79
#Close1./3p=)
Statistics VI
2898 No. of higher AR-cycle
CLOSE commands,3p (79
#Close2./3p=)
Statistics VI
2899 79: Close request to
Control Function (79
CloseRequest)
79M Auto
Recl.
OUT * On * LED BO
4601 >52-a contact (OPEN, if
bkr is open) (>52-a)
P.System
Data 2
SP On
Of
f
* * LED BI BO
4602 >52-b contact (OPEN, if
bkr is closed) (>52-b)
P.System
Data 2
SP On
Of
f
* * LED BI BO
5143 >BLOCK 46 (>BLOCK 46) 46 Negative
Seq
SP * * * LED BI BO 70 12
6
1 Yes
5145 >Reverse Phase Rotation
(>Reverse Rot.)
P.System
Data 1
SP On
Of
f
* * LED BI BO
5147 Phase rotation ABC (Rota-
tion ABC)
P.System
Data 1
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO 70 12
8
1 Yes
5148 Phase rotation ACB (Rota-
tion ACB)
P.System
Data 1
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO 70 12
9
1 Yes
5151 46 switched OFF (46 OFF) 46 Negative
Seq
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO 70 13
1
1 Yes
5152 46 is BLOCKED (46
BLOCKED)
46 Negative
Seq
OUT On
Of
f
On
Off
* LED BO 70 13
2
1 Yes
5153 46 is ACTIVE (46 ACTIVE) 46 Negative
Seq
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO 70 13
3
1 Yes
Functions, Settings, Information
F.3 Information List
528 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
No. Description Function Typ
e of
Info
rma
tion
Log Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103
Event Log ON/OFF
Trip (Fault) Log ON/OFF
Ground Fault Log ON/OFF
Marked in Oscill. Record
LED
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
information number
Data Unit
General Interrogation
5159 46-2 picked up (46-2
picked up)
46 Negative
Seq
OUT * On
Off
* LED BO 70 13
8
2 Yes
5165 46-1 picked up (46-1
picked up)
46 Negative
Seq
OUT * On
Off
* LED BO 70 15
0
2 Yes
5166 46-TOC picked up (46-
TOC pickedup)
46 Negative
Seq
OUT * On
Off
* LED BO 70 14
1
2 Yes
5170 46 TRIP (46 TRIP) 46 Negative
Seq
OUT * On m LED BO 70 14
9
2 Yes
5171 46 Disk emulation picked
up (46 Dsk pickedup)
46 Negative
Seq
OUT * * * LED BO
5203 >BLOCK 81O/U (>BLOCK
81O/U)
81 O/U
Freq.
SP On
Of
f
* * LED BI BO 70 17
6
1 Yes
5206 >BLOCK 81-1 (>BLOCK
81-1)
81 O/U
Freq.
SP On
Of
f
* * LED BI BO 70 17
7
1 Yes
5207 >BLOCK 81-2 (>BLOCK
81-2)
81 O/U
Freq.
SP On
Of
f
* * LED BI BO 70 17
8
1 Yes
5208 >BLOCK 81-3 (>BLOCK
81-3)
81 O/U
Freq.
SP On
Of
f
* * LED BI BO 70 17
9
1 Yes
5209 >BLOCK 81-4 (>BLOCK
81-4)
81 O/U
Freq.
SP On
Of
f
* * LED BI BO 70 18
0
1 Yes
5211 81 OFF (81 OFF) 81 O/U
Freq.
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO 70 18
1
1 Yes
5212 81 BLOCKED (81
BLOCKED)
81 O/U
Freq.
OUT On
Of
f
On
Off
* LED BO 70 18
2
1 Yes
5213 81 ACTIVE (81 ACTIVE) 81 O/U
Freq.
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO 70 18
3
1 Yes
5214 81 Under Voltage Block
(81 Under V Blk)
81 O/U
Freq.
OUT On
Of
f
On
Off
* LED BO 70 18
4
1 Yes
5232 81-1 picked up (81-1
picked up)
81 O/U
Freq.
OUT * On
Off
* LED BO 70 23
0
2 Yes
5233 81-2 picked up (81-2
picked up)
81 O/U
Freq.
OUT * On
Off
* LED BO 70 23
1
2 Yes
5234 81-3 picked up (81-3
picked up)
81 O/U
Freq.
OUT * On
Off
* LED BO 70 23
2
2 Yes
Functions, Settings, Information
F.3 Information List
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 529
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
No. Description Function Typ
e of
Info
rma
tion
Log Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103
Event Log ON/OFF
Trip (Fault) Log ON/OFF
Ground Fault Log ON/OFF
Marked in Oscill. Record
LED
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
information number
Data Unit
General Interrogation
5235 81-4 picked up (81-4
picked up)
81 O/U
Freq.
OUT * On
Off
* LED BO 70 23
3
2 Yes
5236 81-1 TRIP (81-1 TRIP) 81 O/U
Freq.
OUT * On m LED BO 70 23
4
2 Yes
5237 81-2 TRIP (81-2 TRIP) 81 O/U
Freq.
OUT * On m LED BO 70 23
5
2 Yes
5238 81-3 TRIP (81-3 TRIP) 81 O/U
Freq.
OUT * On m LED BO 70 23
6
2 Yes
5239 81-4 TRIP (81-4 TRIP) 81 O/U
Freq.
OUT * On m LED BO 70 23
7
2 Yes
5951 >BLOCK 50 1Ph (>BLK 50
1Ph)
50 1Ph SP * * * LED BI BO
5952 >BLOCK 50 1Ph-1 (>BLK
50 1Ph-1)
50 1Ph SP * * * LED BI BO
5953 >BLOCK 50 1Ph-2 (>BLK
50 1Ph-2)
50 1Ph SP * * * LED BI BO
5961 50 1Ph is OFF (50 1Ph
OFF)
50 1Ph OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO
5962 50 1Ph is BLOCKED (50
1Ph BLOCKED)
50 1Ph OUT On
Of
f
On
Off
* LED BO
5963 50 1Ph is ACTIVE (50 1Ph
ACTIVE)
50 1Ph OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO
5966 50 1Ph-1 is BLOCKED (50
1Ph-1 BLK)
50 1Ph OUT On
Of
f
On
Off
* LED BO
5967 50 1Ph-2 is BLOCKED (50
1Ph-2 BLK)
50 1Ph OUT On
Of
f
On
Off
* LED BO
5971 50 1Ph picked up (50 1Ph
Pickup)
50 1Ph OUT * On
Off
* LED BO
5972 50 1Ph TRIP (50 1Ph TRIP) 50 1Ph OUT * On * LED BO
5974 50 1Ph-1 picked up (50
1Ph-1 PU)
50 1Ph OUT * On
Off
* LED BO
5975 50 1Ph-1 TRIP (50 1Ph-1
TRIP)
50 1Ph OUT * On * LED BO
5977 50 1Ph-2 picked up (50
1Ph-2 PU)
50 1Ph OUT * On
Off
* LED BO
5979 50 1Ph-2 TRIP (50 1Ph-2
TRIP)
50 1Ph OUT * On * LED BO
Functions, Settings, Information
F.3 Information List
530 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
No. Description Function Typ
e of
Info
rma
tion
Log Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103
Event Log ON/OFF
Trip (Fault) Log ON/OFF
Ground Fault Log ON/OFF
Marked in Oscill. Record
LED
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
information number
Data Unit
General Interrogation
5980 50 1Ph: I at pick up (50
1Ph I:)
50 1Ph VI * On
Off
6401 >QV-Protection Blocked
(>27/Q Block)
27/Q SP * * * LED BI BO 74 20
1
1 Yes
6411 27/Q -Protection off (27/Q
OFF)
27/Q OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO 74 21
1
1 Yes
6412 27/Q -Protection blocked
(27/Q block)
27/Q OUT On
Of
f
On
Off
* LED BO 74 21
2
1 Yes
6413 27/Q -Protection active
(27/Q ACT)
27/Q OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO 74 21
3
1 Yes
6421 27/Q -Protection Gen TRIP
(27/Q Gen TRIP)
27/Q OUT * On
Off
* LED BO 74 22
1
2 Yes
6422 27/Q -Protection Grid TRIP
(27/Q Grid TRIP)
27/Q OUT * On
Off
* LED BO 74 22
2
2 Yes
6423 27/Q-Protection PICKUP
(27/Q PICKUP)
27/Q OUT * On
Off
* LED BO 74 22
3
2 No
6424 Reclosure release (Reclo-
sure rel.)
27/Q OUT * On
Off
* LED BO 74 22
4
2 Yes
6425 27/Q pickup blocked by
Inrush (27/Q blk.b.Inr.)
27/Q OUT On
Of
f
On
Off
* LED BO 74 22
5
2 Yes
6503 >BLOCK 27 undervoltage
protection (>BLOCK 27)
27/59 O/U
Volt.
SP * * * LED BI BO 74 3 1 Yes
6505 >27-Switch current super-
vision ON (>27 I
SUPRVSN)
27/59 O/U
Volt.
SP On
Of
f
* * LED BI BO 74 5 1 Yes
6506 >BLOCK 27-1 Under-
voltage protection
(>BLOCK 27-1)
27/59 O/U
Volt.
SP On
Of
f
* * LED BI BO 74 6 1 Yes
6508 >BLOCK 27-2 Under-
voltage protection
(>BLOCK 27-2)
27/59 O/U
Volt.
SP On
Of
f
* * LED BI BO 74 8 1 Yes
6509 >Failure: Feeder VT
(>FAIL:FEEDER VT)
Meas-
urem.Super
v
SP On
Of
f
* * LED BI BO 74 9 1 Yes
6510 >Failure: Busbar VT
(>FAIL: BUS VT)
Meas-
urem.Super
v
SP On
Of
f
* * LED BI BO 74 10 1 Yes
6513 >BLOCK 59 overvoltage
protection (>BLOCK 59)
27/59 O/U
Volt.
SP * * * LED BI BO 74 13 1 Yes
Functions, Settings, Information
F.3 Information List
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 531
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
No. Description Function Typ
e of
Info
rma
tion
Log Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103
Event Log ON/OFF
Trip (Fault) Log ON/OFF
Ground Fault Log ON/OFF
Marked in Oscill. Record
LED
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
information number
Data Unit
General Interrogation
6530 27 Undervoltage protec-
tion switched OFF (27
OFF)
27/59 O/U
Volt.
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO 74 30 1 Yes
6531 27 Undervoltage protec-
tion is BLOCKED (27
BLOCKED)
27/59 O/U
Volt.
OUT On
Of
f
On
Off
* LED BO 74 31 1 Yes
6532 27 Undervoltage protec-
tion is ACTIVE (27
ACTIVE)
27/59 O/U
Volt.
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO 74 32 1 Yes
6533 27-1 Undervoltage picked
up (27-1 picked up)
27/59 O/U
Volt.
OUT * On
Off
* LED BO 74 33 2 Yes
6534 27-1 Undervoltage
PICKUP w/curr. superv
(27-1 PU CS)
27/59 O/U
Volt.
OUT * On
Off
* LED BO 74 34 2 Yes
6537 27-2 Undervoltage picked
up (27-2 picked up)
27/59 O/U
Volt.
OUT * On
Off
* LED BO 74 37 2 Yes
6538 27-2 Undervoltage
PICKUP w/curr. superv
(27-2 PU CS)
27/59 O/U
Volt.
OUT * On
Off
* LED BO 74 38 2 Yes
6539 27-1 Undervoltage TRIP
(27-1 TRIP)
27/59 O/U
Volt.
OUT * On m LED BO 74 39 2 Yes
6540 27-2 Undervoltage TRIP
(27-2 TRIP)
27/59 O/U
Volt.
OUT * On * LED BO 74 40 2 Yes
6565 59-Overvoltage protec-
tion switched OFF (59
OFF)
27/59 O/U
Volt.
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO 74 65 1 Yes
6566 59-Overvoltage protec-
tion is BLOCKED (59
BLOCKED)
27/59 O/U
Volt.
OUT On
Of
f
On
Off
* LED BO 74 66 1 Yes
6567 59-Overvoltage protec-
tion is ACTIVE (59
ACTIVE)
27/59 O/U
Volt.
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO 74 67 1 Yes
6568 59-1 Overvoltage V>
picked up (59-1 picked
up)
27/59 O/U
Volt.
OUT * On
Off
* LED BO 74 68 2 Yes
6570 59-1 Overvoltage V> TRIP
(59-1 TRIP)
27/59 O/U
Volt.
OUT * On m LED BO 74 70 2 Yes
6571 59-2 Overvoltage V>>
picked up (59-2 picked
up)
27/59 O/U
Volt.
OUT * On
Off
* LED BO
6573 59-2 Overvoltage V>>
TRIP (59-2 TRIP)
27/59 O/U
Volt.
OUT * On * LED BO
6851 >BLOCK 74TC (>BLOCK
74TC)
74TC Trip-
Circ.
SP * * * LED BI BO
Functions, Settings, Information
F.3 Information List
532 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
No. Description Function Typ
e of
Info
rma
tion
Log Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103
Event Log ON/OFF
Trip (Fault) Log ON/OFF
Ground Fault Log ON/OFF
Marked in Oscill. Record
LED
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
information number
Data Unit
General Interrogation
6852 >74TC Trip circuit superv.:
trip relay (>74TC trip rel.)
74TC Trip-
Circ.
SP On
Of
f
* * LED BI BO 17
0
51 1 Yes
6853 >74TC Trip circuit superv.:
bkr relay (>74TC brk rel.)
74TC Trip-
Circ.
SP On
Of
f
* * LED BI BO 17
0
52 1 Yes
6861 74TC Trip circuit supervi-
sion OFF (74TC OFF)
74TC Trip-
Circ.
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO 17
0
53 1 Yes
6862 74TC Trip circuit supervi-
sion is BLOCKED (74TC
BLOCKED)
74TC Trip-
Circ.
OUT On
Of
f
On
Off
* LED BO 15
3
16 1 Yes
6863 74TC Trip circuit supervi-
sion is ACTIVE (74TC
ACTIVE)
74TC Trip-
Circ.
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO 15
3
17 1 Yes
6864 74TC blocked. Bin. input
is not set (74TC ProgFail)
74TC Trip-
Circ.
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO 17
0
54 1 Yes
6865 74TC Failure Trip Circuit
(74TC Trip cir.)
74TC Trip-
Circ.
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO 17
0
55 1 Yes
6903 >block interm. E/F prot.
(>IEF block)
Intermit. EF SP * * * LED BI BO 15
2
1 1 Yes
6921 Interm. E/F prot. is
switched off (IEF OFF)
Intermit. EF OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO 15
2
10 1 Yes
6922 Interm. E/F prot. is
blocked (IEF blocked)
Intermit. EF OUT On
Of
f
On
Off
* LED BO 15
2
11 1 Yes
6923 Interm. E/F prot. is active
(IEF enabled)
Intermit. EF OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO 15
2
12 1 Yes
6924 Interm. E/F detection
stage Iie> (IIE Fault det)
Intermit. EF OUT * * * LED BO
6925 Interm. E/F stab detection
(IIE stab.Flt)
Intermit. EF OUT * * * LED BO
6926 Interm.E/F det.stage Iie>
f.Flt. ev.Prot (IIE Flt.det
FE)
Intermit. EF OUT * On * 15
2
13 2 No
6927 Interm. E/F detected
(Intermitt.EF)
Intermit. EF OUT * On
Off
* LED BO 15
2
14 2 Yes
6928 Counter of det. times
elapsed (IEF Tsum exp.)
Intermit. EF OUT * On * LED BO 15
2
15 2 No
Functions, Settings, Information
F.3 Information List
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 533
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
No. Description Function Typ
e of
Info
rma
tion
Log Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103
Event Log ON/OFF
Trip (Fault) Log ON/OFF
Ground Fault Log ON/OFF
Marked in Oscill. Record
LED
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
information number
Data Unit
General Interrogation
6929 Interm. E/F: reset time
running (IEF Tres run.)
Intermit. EF OUT * On
Off
* LED BO 15
2
16 2 Yes
6930 Interm. E/F: trip (IEF Trip) Intermit. EF OUT * On * LED BO 15
2
17 2 No
6931 Max RMS current value of
fault = (Iie/In=)
Intermit. EF VI ON
OFF
* 15
2
18 4 No
6932 No. of detections by stage
Iie>= (Nos.IIE=)
Intermit. EF VI ON
OFF
* 15
2
19 4 No
6951 >Block directional interm.
E/F prot. (>dIEF block)
Dir. Interm.
EF
SP On
Of
f
* * * LED BI BO
6961 Dir. Interm. E/F prot. is
switched off (dIEF OFF)
Dir. Interm.
EF
OUT On
Of
f
* * * LED BO
6962 Dir. Interm. E/F prot. is
blocked (dIEF blocked)
Dir. Interm.
EF
OUT On
Of
f
* * * LED BI BO
6963 Dir. Interm. E/F prot. is
active (dIEF active)
Dir. Interm.
EF
OUT On
Of
f
* * * LED BI BO
6972 dIEF: pick up (dIEF pick
up)
Dir. Interm.
EF
OUT * On
Off
On
Off
* LED BO
6973 dIEF: Trip (dIEF TRIP) Dir. Interm.
EF
OUT * On On
Off
* LED BO
6974 dIEF: No. of detected
forward pulses =
(No.forward=)
Dir. Interm.
EF
VI * On
Off
On
Off
6975 dIEF: No. of detected
reverse pulses =
(No.reverse=)
Dir. Interm.
EF
VI * On
Off
On
Off
6976 dIEF: No. of detected
undefined pulses =
(No.undef.=)
Dir. Interm.
EF
VI * On
Off
On
Off
6979 dIEF: Alarm (dIEF ALARM) Dir. Interm.
EF
OUT * On
Off
On
Off
* LED BO
7551 50-1 InRush picked up
(50-1 InRushPU)
50/51
Overcur.
OUT * On
Off
* LED BO 60 80 2 Yes
7552 50N-1 InRush picked up
(50N-1 InRushPU)
50/51
Overcur.
OUT * On
Off
* LED BO 60 81 2 Yes
7553 51 InRush picked up (51
InRushPU)
50/51
Overcur.
OUT * On
Off
* LED BO 60 82 2 Yes
7554 51N InRush picked up
(51N InRushPU)
50/51
Overcur.
OUT * On
Off
* LED BO 60 83 2 Yes
Functions, Settings, Information
F.3 Information List
534 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
No. Description Function Typ
e of
Info
rma
tion
Log Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103
Event Log ON/OFF
Trip (Fault) Log ON/OFF
Ground Fault Log ON/OFF
Marked in Oscill. Record
LED
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
information number
Data Unit
General Interrogation
7556 InRush OFF (InRush OFF) 50/51
Overcur.
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO 60 92 1 Yes
7557 InRush BLOCKED (InRush
BLK)
50/51
Overcur.
OUT On
Of
f
On
Off
* LED BO 60 93 1 Yes
7558 InRush Ground detected
(InRush Gnd Det)
50/51
Overcur.
OUT * On
Off
* LED BO 60 94 2 Yes
7559 67-1 InRush picked up
(67-1 InRushPU)
50/51
Overcur.
OUT * On
Off
* LED BO 60 84 2 Yes
7560 67N-1 InRush picked up
(67N-1 InRushPU)
50/51
Overcur.
OUT * On
Off
* LED BO 60 85 2 Yes
7561 67-TOC InRush picked up
(67-TOC InRushPU)
50/51
Overcur.
OUT * On
Off
* LED BO 60 86 2 Yes
7562 67N-TOC InRush picked
up (67N-TOCInRushPU)
50/51
Overcur.
OUT * On
Off
* LED BO 60 87 2 Yes
7563 >BLOCK InRush (>BLOCK
InRush)
50/51
Overcur.
SP * * * LED BI BO
7564 Ground InRush picked up
(Gnd InRush PU)
50/51
Overcur.
OUT * On
Off
* LED BO 60 88 2 Yes
7565 Phase A InRush picked up
(Ia InRush PU)
50/51
Overcur.
OUT * On
Off
* LED BO 60 89 2 Yes
7566 Phase B InRush picked up
(Ib InRush PU)
50/51
Overcur.
OUT * On
Off
* LED BO 60 90 2 Yes
7567 Phase C InRush picked up
(Ic InRush PU)
50/51
Overcur.
OUT * On
Off
* LED BO 60 91 2 Yes
10034 50-3 BLOCKED (50-3
BLOCKED)
50/51
Overcur.
OUT On
Of
f
On
Off
* LED BO 60 16
9
1 Yes
10035 50N-3 BLOCKED (50N-3
BLOCKED)
50/51
Overcur.
OUT On
Of
f
On
Off
* LED BO 60 17
0
1 Yes
10080 Error Extension I/O (Error
Ext I/O)
Device,
General
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO
10081 Error Ethernet (Error
Ethernet)
Device,
General
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO
10082 Error Current Terminal
(Error Terminal)
Device,
General
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO
10083 Error Basic I/O (Error Basic
I/O)
Device,
General
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO
Functions, Settings, Information
F.3 Information List
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 535
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
No. Description Function Typ
e of
Info
rma
tion
Log Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103
Event Log ON/OFF
Trip (Fault) Log ON/OFF
Ground Fault Log ON/OFF
Marked in Oscill. Record
LED
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
information number
Data Unit
General Interrogation
16001 Sum Current Exponentia-
tion Ph A to Ir^x (ΣI^x A=)
Statistics VI
16002 Sum Current Exponentia-
tion Ph B to Ir^x (ΣI^x B=)
Statistics VI
16003 Sum Current Exponentia-
tion Ph C to Ir^x (ΣI^x C=)
Statistics VI
16005 Threshold Sum Curr.
Exponent. exceeded
(Threshold ΣI^x>)
SetPoint(Sta
t)
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO
16006 Residual Endurance Phase
A (Resid.Endu. A=)
Statistics VI
16007 Residual Endurance Phase
B (Resid.Endu. B=)
Statistics VI
16008 Residual Endurance Phase
C (Resid.Endu. C=)
Statistics VI
16010 Dropped below Threshold
CB Res.Endurance
(Thresh.R.Endu.<)
SetPoint(Sta
t)
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO
16011 Number of mechanical
Trips Phase A
(mechan.TRIP A=)
Statistics VI
16012 Number of mechanical
Trips Phase B
(mechan.TRIP B=)
Statistics VI
16013 Number of mechanical
Trips Phase C
(mechan.TRIP C=)
Statistics VI
16014 Sum Squared Current
Integral Phase A (ΣI^2t
A=)
Statistics VI
16015 Sum Squared Current
Integral Phase B (ΣI^2t
B=)
Statistics VI
16016 Sum Squared Current
Integral Phase C (ΣI^2t
C=)
Statistics VI
16018 Threshold Sum Squa.
Curr. Int. exceeded
(Thresh. ΣI^2t>)
SetPoint(Sta
t)
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO
16019 >52 Breaker Wear Start
Criteria (>52 Wear start)
P.System
Data 2
SP On
Of
f
* * LED BI BO
Functions, Settings, Information
F.3 Information List
536 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
No. Description Function Typ
e of
Info
rma
tion
Log Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103
Event Log ON/OFF
Trip (Fault) Log ON/OFF
Ground Fault Log ON/OFF
Marked in Oscill. Record
LED
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
information number
Data Unit
General Interrogation
16020 52 Wear blocked by Time
Setting Failure (52
WearSet.fail)
P.System
Data 2
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO
16027 52 Breaker Wear Logic blk
Ir-CB>=Isc-CB (52WL.blk I
PErr)
P.System
Data 2
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO
16028 52 Breaker W.Log.blk
SwCyc.Isc>=SwCyc.Ir
(52WL.blk n PErr)
P.System
Data 2
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO
16029 Sens.gnd.flt. 51Ns
BLOCKED Setting Error
(51Ns BLK PaErr)
Sens. Gnd
Fault
OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO
16030 Angle between 3Vo and
INsens. (φ(3Vo,INs) =)
Sens. Gnd
Fault
VI ON
OF
F
18901 >BLOCK Earth fault
(extend) (>BLK E Flt(ext))
E Flt(ext) SP On
Of
f
* * LED BI BO
18902 >BLOCK EPTR (>BLOCK
EPTR)
E Flt(ext) SP On
Of
f
* * LED BI BO
18903 >BLOCK Transformer
Neutral (TNP) (>BLOCK
TNP)
E Flt(ext) SP On
Of
f
* * LED BI BO
18904 Earth fault (extend) is
OFF (E Flt(ext) OFF)
E Flt(ext) OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BI BO
18905 Earth fault (extend) is
ACTIVE (E Flt(ext) ACT)
E Flt(ext) OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BI BO
18906 EPTR is OFF (EPTR OFF) E Flt(ext) OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO
18907 EPTR is ACTIVE (EPTR ACT) E Flt(ext) OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO
18908 Transformer Neutral(TNP)
is OFF (TNP OFF)
E Flt(ext) OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO
18909 Transformer Neutral(TNP)
is ACTIVE (TNP ACT)
E Flt(ext) OUT On
Of
f
* * LED BO
18910 EPTR picked up (EPTR
picked up)
E Flt(ext) OUT * On
Off
* LED BO
Functions, Settings, Information
F.3 Information List
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 537
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
No. Description Function Typ
e of
Info
rma
tion
Log Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103
Event Log ON/OFF
Trip (Fault) Log ON/OFF
Ground Fault Log ON/OFF
Marked in Oscill. Record
LED
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
information number
Data Unit
General Interrogation
18911 EPTR TRIP (EPTR TRIP) E Flt(ext) OUT * On m LED BO
18912 Transformer Neutral
(TNP) picked up (TNP
picked up)
E Flt(ext) OUT * On
Off
* LED BO
18913 Transformer Neutral
(TNP) TRIP (TNP TRIP)
E Flt(ext) OUT * On m LED BO
18914 Earth fault (extend)
picked up (E Flt(ext) PU)
E Flt(ext) OUT * On
Off
m LED BO
18915 Earth fault (extend) TRIP
(E Flt(ext) Trip)
E Flt(ext) OUT * On m LED BO
18916 Earth fault (extend) is
BLOCKED (E Flt(ext) BLK)
E Flt(ext) OUT On
Of
f
On
Off
* LED BO
18917 EPTR is BLOCKED (EPTR
BLOCKED)
E Flt(ext) OUT On
Of
f
On
Off
* * LED BO
18918 Transformer Neutral(TNP)
is BLOCKED (TNP
BLOCKED)
E Flt(ext) OUT On
Of
f
On
Off
* * LED BO
18919 Earth fault (extend)
BLOCK Setting Error (EF
BLK PaErr)
E Flt(ext) OUT On
Of
f
* * * LED BO
30053 Fault recording is running
(Fault rec. run.)
Osc. Fault
Rec.
OUT * * * LED BO
31000 Q0 operationcounter=
(Q0 OpCnt=)
Control
Device
VI *
31001 Q1 operationcounter=
(Q1 OpCnt=)
Control
Device
VI *
31008 Q8 operationcounter=
(Q8 OpCnt=)
Control
Device
VI *
Functions, Settings, Information
F.3 Information List
538 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Group Alarms
No. Description Function No. Description
140 Error Sum Alarm 177
178
10080
10081
10082
10083
191
193
Fail Battery
I/O-Board error
Error Ext I/O
Error Ethernet
Error Terminal
Error Basic I/O
Error Offset
Alarm NO calibr
160 Alarm Sum Event 162
163
167
175
176
I Failure Σ I
Fail I balance
Fail V balance
Fail Ph. Seq. I
Fail Ph. Seq. V
161 Fail I Superv. 162
163
I Failure Σ I
Fail I balance
171 Fail Ph. Seq. 175
176
Fail Ph. Seq. I
Fail Ph. Seq. V
501 Relay PICKUP 1517
5159
5165
5166
5971
5974
5977
1761
2691
1224
1221
1215
6423
49 Winding O/L
46-2 picked up
46-1 picked up
46-TOC pickedup
50 1Ph Pickup
50 1Ph-1 PU
50 1Ph-2 PU
50(N)/51(N) PU
67/67N pickedup
50Ns-1 Pickup
50Ns-2 Pickup
64 Pickup
27/Q PICKUP
F.4
Functions, Settings, Information
F.4 Group Alarms
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 539
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
No. Description Function No. Description
511 Relay TRIP 235.2126
1217
1223
1226
1229
5236
5237
5238
5239
6930
6973
5170
6539
6540
6570
6573
1471
1494
5972
1521
1791
2696
$00 TRIP
64 TRIP
50Ns-2 TRIP
50Ns-1 TRIP
51Ns TRIP
81-1 TRIP
81-2 TRIP
81-3 TRIP
81-4 TRIP
IEF Trip
dIEF TRIP
46 TRIP
27-1 TRIP
27-2 TRIP
59-1 TRIP
59-2 TRIP
50BF TRIP
50BF TRIP 2
50 1Ph TRIP
49 Th O/L TRIP
50(N)/51(N)TRIP
67/67N TRIP
Functions, Settings, Information
F.4 Group Alarms
540 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Measured Values
No. Description Function IEC 60870-5-103 Configurable in
Matrix
Type
information number
Compatibility
Data Unit
Position
CFC
Control Display
Default Display
- Number of TRIPs= (#of TRIPs=) Statistics - - - - - CFC
- Operating hours greater than
(OpHour>)
SetPoint(Stat) - - - - - CFC
170.20
50
V1 = (V1 =) SYNC function
1
130 1 No 9 1 CFC
170.20
51
f1 = (f1 =) SYNC function
1
130 1 No 9 4 CFC
170.20
52
V2 = (V2 =) SYNC function
1
130 1 No 9 3 CFC
170.20
53
f2 = (f2 =) SYNC function
1
130 1 No 9 7 CFC
170.20
54
dV = (dV =) SYNC function
1
130 1 No 9 2 CFC
170.20
55
df = (df =) SYNC function
1
130 1 No 9 5 CFC
170.20
56
dalpha = (dα =) SYNC function
1
130 1 No 9 6 CFC
601 Ia (Ia =) Measurement 134 157 No 9 1 CFC
602 Ib (Ib =) Measurement 160 145 Yes 3 1 CFC
134 157 No 9 2
603 Ic (Ic =) Measurement 134 157 No 9 3 CFC
604 In (In =) Measurement 134 157 No 9 4 CFC
605 I1 (positive sequence) (I1 =) Measurement - - - - - CFC
606 I2 (negative sequence) (I2 =) Measurement - - - - - CFC
621 Va (Va =) Measurement 134 157 No 9 6 CFC
622 Vb (Vb =) Measurement 134 157 No 9 7 CFC
623 Vc (Vc =) Measurement 134 157 No 9 8 CFC
624 Va-b (Va-b=) Measurement 160 145 Yes 3 2 CFC
134 157 No 9 9
625 Vb-c (Vb-c=) Measurement 134 157 No 9 10 CFC
626 Vc-a (Vc-a=) Measurement 134 157 No 9 11 CFC
627 VN (VN =) Measurement 134 118 No 9 1 CFC
629 V1 (positive sequence) (V1 =) Measurement - - - - - CFC
630 V2 (negative sequence) (V2 =) Measurement - - - - - CFC
632 Vsync (synchronism) (Vsync =) Measurement - - - - - CFC
641 P (active power) (P =) Measurement 134 157 No 9 12 CFC
642 Q (reactive power) (Q =) Measurement 134 157 No 9 13 CFC
644 Frequency (Freq=) Measurement 134 157 No 9 5 CFC
645 S (apparent power) (S =) Measurement - - - - - CFC
F.5
Functions, Settings, Information
F.5 Measured Values
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 541
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
No. Description Function IEC 60870-5-103 Configurable in
Matrix
Type
information number
Compatibility
Data Unit
Position
CFC
Control Display
Default Display
680 Angle Va-Ia (Phi A =) Measurement - - - - - CFC
681 Angle Vb-Ib (Phi B =) Measurement - - - - - CFC
682 Angle Vc-Ic (Phi C =) Measurement - - - - - CFC
701 Resistive ground current in isol
systems (INs Real)
Measurement 134 157 No 9 15 CFC
702 Reactive ground current in isol
systems (INs Reac)
Measurement 134 157 No 9 16 CFC
807 Thermal Overload (Θ/Θtrip =) Measurement - - - - - CFC
830 INs Senstive Ground Fault Current
(INs =)
Measurement 134 158 No 9 1 CFC
831 3Io (zero sequence) (3Io =) Measurement - - - - - CFC
832 Vo (zero sequence) (Vo =) Measurement 134 118 No 9 2 CFC
833 I1 (positive sequence) Demand (I1
dmd=)
Demand meter - - - - - -
834 Active Power Demand (P dmd =) Demand meter - - - - - -
835 Reactive Power Demand (Q dmd
=)
Demand meter - - - - - -
836 Apparent Power Demand (S dmd
=)
Demand meter - - - - - -
837 I A Demand Minimum (IAdmdMin) Min/Max meter - - - - - -
838 I A Demand Maximum
(IAdmdMax)
Min/Max meter - - - - - -
839 I B Demand Minimum (IBdmdMin) Min/Max meter - - - - - -
840 I B Demand Maximum
(IBdmdMax)
Min/Max meter - - - - - -
841 I C Demand Minimum (ICdmdMin) Min/Max meter - - - - - -
842 I C Demand Maximum
(ICdmdMax)
Min/Max meter - - - - - -
843 I1 (positive sequence) Demand
Minimum (I1dmdMin)
Min/Max meter - - - - - -
844 I1 (positive sequence) Demand
Maximum (I1dmdMax)
Min/Max meter - - - - - -
845 Active Power Demand Minimum
(PdMin=)
Min/Max meter - - - - - -
846 Active Power Demand Maximum
(PdMax=)
Min/Max meter - - - - - -
847 Reactive Power Minimum
(QdMin=)
Min/Max meter - - - - - -
848 Reactive Power Maximum
(QdMax=)
Min/Max meter - - - - - -
849 Apparent Power Minimum
(SdMin=)
Min/Max meter - - - - - -
Functions, Settings, Information
F.5 Measured Values
542 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
No. Description Function IEC 60870-5-103 Configurable in
Matrix
Type
information number
Compatibility
Data Unit
Position
CFC
Control Display
Default Display
850 Apparent Power Maximum
(SdMax=)
Min/Max meter - - - - - -
851 Ia Min (Ia Min=) Min/Max meter - - - - - -
852 Ia Max (Ia Max=) Min/Max meter - - - - - -
853 Ib Min (Ib Min=) Min/Max meter - - - - - -
854 Ib Max (Ib Max=) Min/Max meter - - - - - -
855 Ic Min (Ic Min=) Min/Max meter - - - - - -
856 Ic Max (Ic Max=) Min/Max meter - - - - - -
857 I1 (positive sequence) Minimum
(I1 Min=)
Min/Max meter - - - - - -
858 I1 (positive sequence) Maximum
(I1 Max=)
Min/Max meter - - - - - -
859 Va-n Min (Va-nMin=) Min/Max meter - - - - - -
860 Va-n Max (Va-nMax=) Min/Max meter - - - - - -
861 Vb-n Min (Vb-nMin=) Min/Max meter - - - - - -
862 Vb-n Max (Vb-nMax=) Min/Max meter - - - - - -
863 Vc-n Min (Vc-nMin=) Min/Max meter - - - - - -
864 Vc-n Max (Vc-nMax=) Min/Max meter - - - - - -
865 Va-b Min (Va-bMin=) Min/Max meter - - - - - -
867 Va-b Max (Va-bMax=) Min/Max meter - - - - - -
868 Vb-c Min (Vb-cMin=) Min/Max meter - - - - - -
869 Vb-c Max (Vb-cMax=) Min/Max meter - - - - - -
870 Vc-a Min (Vc-aMin=) Min/Max meter - - - - - -
871 Vc-a Max (Vc-aMax=) Min/Max meter - - - - - -
872 V neutral Min (Vn Min =) Min/Max meter - - - - - -
873 V neutral Max (Vn Max =) Min/Max meter - - - - - -
874 V1 (positive sequence) Voltage
Minimum (V1 Min =)
Min/Max meter - - - - - -
875 V1 (positive sequence) Voltage
Maximum (V1 Max =)
Min/Max meter - - - - - -
876 Active Power Minimum (Pmin=) Min/Max meter - - - - - -
877 Active Power Maximum (Pmax=) Min/Max meter - - - - - -
878 Reactive Power Minimum (Qmin=) Min/Max meter - - - - - -
879 Reactive Power Maximum
(Qmax=)
Min/Max meter - - - - - -
880 Apparent Power Minimum
(Smin=)
Min/Max meter - - - - - -
881 Apparent Power Maximum
(Smax=)
Min/Max meter - - - - - -
882 Frequency Minimum (fmin=) Min/Max meter - - - - - -
883 Frequency Maximum (fmax=) Min/Max meter - - - - - -
Functions, Settings, Information
F.5 Measured Values
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 543
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
No. Description Function IEC 60870-5-103 Configurable in
Matrix
Type
information number
Compatibility
Data Unit
Position
CFC
Control Display
Default Display
884 Power Factor Maximum (PF Max=) Min/Max meter - - - - - -
885 Power Factor Minimum (PF Min=) Min/Max meter - - - - - -
888 Pulsed Energy Wp (active)
(Wp(puls))
Energy 133 55 No 205 - CFC
889 Pulsed Energy Wq (reactive)
(Wq(puls))
Energy 133 56 No 205 - CFC
901 Power Factor (PF =) Measurement 134 157 No 9 14 CFC
924 Wp Forward (WpForward) Energy 133 51 No 205 - CFC
925 Wq Forward (WqForward) Energy 133 52 No 205 - CFC
928 Wp Reverse (WpReverse) Energy 133 53 No 205 - CFC
929 Wq Reverse (WqReverse) Energy 133 54 No 205 - CFC
963 I A demand (Ia dmd=) Demand meter - - - - - CFC
964 I B demand (Ib dmd=) Demand meter - - - - - CFC
965 I C demand (Ic dmd=) Demand meter - - - - - CFC
1058 Overload Meter Max (Θ/
ΘTrpMax=)
Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC
1059 Overload Meter Min (Θ/ΘTrpMin=) Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC
16004 Threshold Sum Current Exponen-
tiation (ΣI^x>)
SetPoint(Stat) - - - - - CFC
16009 Lower Threshold of CB Residual
Endurance (Resid.Endu. <)
SetPoint(Stat) - - - - - CFC
16017 Threshold Sum Squared Current
Integral (ΣI^2t>)
SetPoint(Stat) - - - - - CFC
16031 Angle between 3Vo and INsens.
(φ(3Vo,INs) =)
Measurement - - - - - CFC
18473 Va-b RMS(10 minute RMS value)
(Va-b RMS=)
Measurement - - - - - CFC
18474 Vb-c RMS(10 minute RMS value)
(Vb-c RMS=)
Measurement - - - - - CFC
18475 Vc-a RMS(10 minute RMS value)
(Vc-a RMS=)
Measurement - - - - - CFC
30701 Pa (active power, phase A) (Pa =) Measurement - - - - - CFC
30702 Pb (active power, phase B) (Pb =) Measurement - - - - - CFC
30703 Pc (active power, phase C) (Pc =) Measurement - - - - - CFC
30704 Qa (reactive power, phase A) (Qa
=)
Measurement - - - - - CFC
30705 Qb (reactive power, phase B) (Qb
=)
Measurement - - - - - CFC
30706 Qc (reactive power, phase C) (Qc
=)
Measurement - - - - - CFC
30707 Power Factor, phase A (PFa =) Measurement - - - - - CFC
30708 Power Factor, phase B (PFb =) Measurement - - - - - CFC
Functions, Settings, Information
F.5 Measured Values
544 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
No. Description Function IEC 60870-5-103 Configurable in
Matrix
Type
information number
Compatibility
Data Unit
Position
CFC
Control Display
Default Display
30709 Power Factor, phase C (PFc =) Measurement - - - - - CFC
30800 Voltage VX (VX =) Measurement - - - - - CFC
30801 Voltage phase-neutral (Vph-n =) Measurement - - - - - CFC
Functions, Settings, Information
F.5 Measured Values
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 545
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
546 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Literature
/1/ SIPROTEC 4 System Description
E50417-H1176-C151-B6
/2/ SIPROTEC DIGSI, Start UP
E50417-G1176-C152-A3
/3/ DIGSI CFC, Manual
E50417-H1176-C098-B2
/4/ SIPROTEC SIGRA 4, Manual
E50417-H1176-C070-A7
/5/ Additional description for the protection of explosion-protected motors of protection type increased safety “e”
C53000–B1174–C170
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 547
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
548 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Glossary
Bay controllers
Bay controllers are devices with control and monitoring functions without protective functions.
Bit pattern indication
Bit pattern indication is a processing function by means of which items of digital process information applying
across several inputs can be detected together in parallel and processed further. The bit pattern length can be
specified as 1, 2, 3 or 4 bytes.
BP_xx
→ Bit pattern indication (Bitstring Of x Bit), x designates the length in bits (8, 16, 24 or 32 bits).
Buffer battery
The buffer battery ensures that specified data areas, flags, timers and counters are retained retentively.
C_xx
Command without feedback
CF_xx
Command with feedback
CFC
Continuous Function Chart. CFC is a graphical editor with which a program can be created and configured by
using ready-made blocks.
CFC blocks
Blocks are parts of the user program delimited by their function, their structure or their purpose.
Chatter ON
A rapidly intermittent input (for example, due to a relay contact fault) is switched off after a configurable
monitoring time and can thus not generate any further signal changes. The function prevents overloading of
the system when a fault arises.
Combination devices
Combination devices are bay devices with protection functions and a control display.
Combination matrix
From DIGSI V4.6 onward, up to 32 compatible SIPROTEC 4 devices can communicate with one another in an
Inter Relay Communication combination (IRC combination). Which device exchanges which information is
defined with the help of the combination matrix.
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 549
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Communication branch
A communications branch corresponds to the configuration of 1 to n users that communicate by means of a
common bus.
Communication reference CR
The communication reference describes the type and version of a station in communication by PROFIBUS.
Component view
In addition to a topological view, SIMATIC Manager offers you a component view. The component view does
not offer any overview of the hierarchy of a project. It does, however, provide an overview of all the SIPROTEC
4 devices within a project.
COMTRADE
Common Format for Transient Data Exchange, format for fault records.
Container
If an object can contain other objects, it is called a container. The object Folder is an example of such a
container.
Control Display
The display which is displayed on devices with a large (graphic) display after you have pressed the control key
is called the control display. It contains the switchgear that can be controlled in the feeder with status display.
It is used to perform switching operations. Defining this display is part of the configuration.
Data pane
The right-hand area of the project window displays the contents of the area selected in the → navigation
window, for example indications, measured values, etc. of the information lists or the function selection for
the device configuration.
DCF77
The extremely precise official time is determined in Germany by the "Physikalisch-Technische-Bundesanstalt
PTB" in Braunschweig. The atomic clock station of the PTB transmits this time via the long-wave time-signal
transmitter in Mainflingen near Frankfurt/Main. The emitted time signal can be received within a radius of
approx. 1,500 km from Frankfurt/Main.
Device container
In the Component View, all SIPROTEC 4 devices are assigned to an object of type Device container. This object
is a special object of DIGSI Manager. However, since there is no component view in DIGSI Manager, this object
only becomes visible in conjunction with STEP 7.
Double command
Double commands are process outputs which indicate 4 process states at 2 outputs: 2 defined (for example
ON/OFF) and 2 undefined states (for example intermediate positions)
Double-point indication
Double-point indications are items of process information which indicate 4 process states at 2 inputs: 2
defined (for example ON/OFF) and 2 undefined states (for example intermediate positions).
DP
→ Double-point indication
Glossary
550 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
DP_I
→ Double point indication, intermediate position 00
Drag and drop
Copying, moving and linking function, used at graphics user interfaces. Objects are selected with the mouse,
held and moved from one data area to another.
Earth
The conductive earth whose electric potential can be set equal to zero at every point. In the area of earth elec-
trodes the earth can have a potential deviating from zero. The term "Earth reference plane" is often used for
this state.
Earth (verb)
This term means that a conductive part is connected via an earthing system to the → earth.
Earthing
Earthing is the total of all means and measures used for earthing.
Electromagnetic compatibility
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) is the ability of an electrical apparatus to function fault-free in a specified
environment without influencing the environment unduly.
EMC
→ Electromagnetic compatibility
ESD protection
ESD protection is the total of all the means and measures used to protect electrostatic sensitive devices.
EVA
Limiting value, user-defined
ExBPxx
External bit pattern indication via an ETHERNET connection, device-specific → Bit pattern indication
ExC
External command without feedback via an ETHERNET connection, device-specific
ExCF
Command with feedback via an ETHERNET connection, device-specific
ExDP
External double point indication via an ETHERNET connection, device-specific → Double point indication
ExDP_I
External double point indication via an ETHERNET connection, intermediate position 00, device-specific →
Double point indication
ExMV
External metered value via an ETHERNET connection, device-specific
Glossary
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 551
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
ExSI
External single point indication via an ETHERNET connection, device-specific → Single point indication
ExSI_F
External single point indication via an ETHERNET connection, Spontaneous event, device-specific → Fleeting
indication, → Single point indication
Field devices
Generic term for all devices assigned to the field level: Protection devices, combination devices, bay control-
lers.
Fleeting Indication
Fleeting indications are single-point indications present for a very short time, in which only the coming of the
process signal is logged and further processed time-correctly.
FMS communication branch
Within an FMS communication branch, the users communicate on the basis of the PROFIBUS FMS protocol via
a PROFIBUS FMS network.
Folder
This object type is used to create the hierarchical structure of a project.
General interrogation (GI)
During the system start-up the state of all the process inputs, of the status and of the fault image is sampled.
This information is used to update the system-end process image. The current process state can also be
sampled after a data loss by means of a GI.
GOOSE message
GOOSE messages (Generic Object Oriented Substation Event) according to IEC 61850 are data packets which
are transferred event-controlled via the Ethernet communication system. They serve for direct information
exchange among the relays. This mechanism implements cross-communication between bay units.
GPS
Global Positioning System. Satellites with atomic clocks on board orbit the earth twice a day on different paths
in approx. 20,000 km. They transmit signals which also contain the GPS universal time. The GPS receiver
determines its own position from the signals received. From its position it can derive the delay time of a satel-
lite signal and thus correct the transmitted GPS universal time.
Hierarchy level
Within a structure with higher-level and lower-level objects a hierarchy level is a container of equivalent
objects.
HV field description
The HV project description file contains details of fields which exist in a ModPara-project. The actual field infor-
mation of each field is stored in a HV field description file. Within the HV project description file, each field is
allocated such a HV field description file by a reference to the file name.
HV project description
All the data is exported once the configuration and parameterization of PCUs and sub-modules using ModPara
has been completed. This data is split up into several files. One file contains details about the fundamental
project structure. This also includes, for example, information detailing which fields exist in this project. This
file is called a HV project description file.
Glossary
552 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
ID
Internal double point indication → Double point indication
ID_S
Internal double point indication, intermediate position 00 → Double point indication
IEC
International Electrotechnical Commission, international standardization body
IEC61850
International communication standard for communication in substations. The objective of this standard is the
interoperability of devices from different manufacturers on the station bus. An Ethernet network is used for
data transfer.
IEC address
Within an IEC bus a unique IEC address has to be assigned to each SIPROTEC 4 device. A total of 254 IEC
addresses are available for each IEC bus.
IEC communication branch
Within an IEC communication branch the users communicate on the basis of the IEC60-870-5-103 protocol via
an IEC bus.
Initialization string
An initialization string comprises a range of modem-specific commands. These are transmitted to the modem
within the framework of modem initialization. The commands can, for example, force specific settings for the
modem.
Inter relay communication
→ IRC combination
IntSP
Internal single point indication → Single point indication
IntSP_Ev
Internal indication Spontaneous event → Fleeting indication, → Single point indication
IRC combination
Inter Relay Communication, IRC, is used for directly exchanging process information between SIPROTEC 4
devices. You require an object of type IRC combination to configure an inter relay communication. Each user
of the combination and all the necessary communication parameters are defined in this object. The type and
scope of the information exchanged between the users is also stored in this object.
IRIG B
Time signal code of the Inter-Range Instrumentation Group
ISO 9001
The ISO 9000 ff range of standards defines measures used to assure the quality of a product from the develop-
ment stage to the manufacturing stage.
Glossary
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 553
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
LFO-Filter
(Low-Frequency-Oscillation) Filter for low frequency oscillations
Link address
The link address gives the address of a V3/V2 device.
List view
The right window section of the project window displays the names and icons of objects which represent the
contents of a container selected in the tree view. Because they are displayed in the form of a list, this area is
called the list view.
LPS
Line Post Sensor
LV
Limiting value
Master
Masters may send data to other users and request data from other users. DIGSI operates as a master.
Metered value
Metered values are a processing function with which the total number of discrete similar events (counting
pulses) is determined for a period, usually as an integrated value. In power supply companies the electrical
work is usually recorded as a metered value (energy purchase/supply, energy transportation).
MLFB
MLFB is the abbreviation for "MaschinenLesbare FabrikateBezeichnung" (machine-readable product designa-
tion). This is the equivalent of an order number. The type and version of a SIPROTEC 4 device is coded in the
order number.
Modem connection
This object type contains information on both partners of a modem connection, the local modem and the
remote modem.
Modem profile
A modem profile consists of the name of the profile, a modem driver and may also comprise several initializa-
tion commands and a user address. You can create several modem profiles for one physical modem. To do so
you need to link various initialization commands or user addresses to a modem driver and its properties and
save them under different names.
Modems
Modem profiles for a modem connection are stored in this object type.
MV
Measured value
MVMV
Metered value which is formed from the measured value
Glossary
554 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
MVT
Measured value with time
MVU
Measured value, user-defined
Navigation pane
The left pane of the project window displays the names and symbols of all containers of a project in the form
of a folder tree.
Object
Each element of a project structure is called an object in DIGSI.
Object properties
Each object has properties. These might be general properties that are common to several objects. An object
can also have specific properties.
Off-line
In offline mode a connection to a SIPROTEC 4 device is not required. You work with data which are stored in
files.
On-line
When working in online mode, there is a physical connection to a SIPROTEC 4 device. This connection can be
implemented as a direct connection, as a modem connection or as a PROFIBUS FMS connection.
OUT
Output Indication
OUT_Ev
Output indication Spontaneous event→ Fleeting indication
Parameterization
Comprehensive term for all setting work on the device. The parameterization is done with DIGSI or sometimes
also directly on the device.
Parameter set
The parameter set is the set of all parameters that can be set for a SIPROTEC 4 device.
Phone book
User addresses for a modem connection are saved in this object type.
PMV
Pulse metered value
Process bus
Devices with a process bus interface allow direct communication with SICAM HV modules. The process bus
interface is equipped with an Ethernet module.
Glossary
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 555
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
PROFIBUS
PROcess FIeld BUS, the German process and field bus standard, as specified in the standard EN 50170, Volume
2, PROFIBUS. It defines the functional, electrical, and mechanical properties for a bit-serial field bus.
PROFIBUS address
Within a PROFIBUS network a unique PROFIBUS address has to be assigned to each SIPROTEC 4 device. A total
of 254 PROFIBUS addresses are available for each PROFIBUS network.
Project
Content-wise, a project is the image of a real power supply system. Graphically, a project is represented as a
number of objects which are integrated in a hierarchical structure. Physically, a project consists of a number of
directories and files containing project data.
Protection devices
All devices with a protective function and no control display.
Reorganizing
Frequent addition and deletion of objects results in memory areas that can no longer be used. By reorganizing
projects, you can release these memory areas again. However, a cleanup also reassigns the VD addresses. The
consequence is that all SIPROTEC 4 devices have to be reinitialized.
RIO file
Relay data Interchange format by Omicron.
RSxxx-interface
Serial interfaces RS232, RS422/485
Service interface
Rear serial interface on the devices for connecting DIGSI (for example, via modem).
SICAM PAS (Power Automation System)
Substation control system: The range of possible configurations spans from integrated standalone systems
(SICAM PAS and M&C with SICAM PAS CC on one computer) to separate hardware for SICAM PAS and SICAM
PAS CC to distributed systems with multiple SICAM Station Units. The software is a modular system with basic
and optional packages. SICAM PAS is a purely distributed system: the process interface is implemented by the
use of bay units / remote terminal units.
SICAM Station Unit
The SICAM Station Unit with its special hardware (no fan, no rotating parts) and its Windows XP Embedded
operating system is the basis for SICAM PAS.
SICAM WinCC
The SICAM WinCC operator control and monitoring system displays the state of your network graphically, visu-
alizes alarms, interrupts and indications, archives the network data, offers the possibility of intervening
manually in the process and manages the system rights of the individual employee.
Single command
Single commands are process outputs which indicate 2 process states (for example, ON/OFF) at one output.
Glossary
556 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Single point indication
Single indications are items of process information which indicate 2 process states (for example, ON/OFF) at
one output.
SIPROTEC
The registered trademark SIPROTEC is used for devices implemented on system base V4.
SIPROTEC 4 device
This object type represents a real SIPROTEC 4 device with all the setting values and process data it contains.
SIPROTEC 4 Variant
This object type represents a variant of an object of type SIPROTEC 4 device. The device data of this variant
may well differ from the device data of the original object. However, all variants derived from the original
object have the same VD address as the original object. For this reason they always correspond to the same
real SIPROTEC 4 device as the original object. Objects of type SIPROTEC 4 variant have a variety of uses, such
as documenting different operating states when entering parameter settings of a SIPROTEC 4 device.
Slave
A slave may only exchange data with a master after being prompted to do so by the master. SIPROTEC 4
devices operate as slaves.
SP
→ Single point indication
SP_W
→ Single point indication Spontaneous event → Fleeting indication, → Single point indication
System interface
Rear serial interface on the devices for connecting to a substation controller via IEC or PROFIBUS.
TI
Transformer Tap Indication
Time stamp
Time stamp is the assignment of the real time to a process event.
Topological view
DIGSI Manager always displays a project in the topological view. This shows the hierarchical structure of a
project with all available objects.
Transformer Tap Indication
Transformer tap indication is a processing function on the DI by means of which the tap of the transformer tap
changer can be detected together in parallel and processed further.
Tree view
The left pane of the project window displays the names and symbols of all containers of a project in the form
of a folder tree. This area is called the tree view.
Ungrounded
Without any electrical connection to → ground.
Glossary
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 557
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
User address
A user address comprises the name of the user, the national code, the area code and the user-specific phone
number.
Users
From DIGSI V4.6 onward , up to 32 compatible SIPROTEC 4 devices can communicate with one another in an
Inter Relay Communication combination. The individual participating devices are called users.
VD
A VD (Virtual Device) includes all communication objects and their properties and states that are used by a
communication user through services. A VD can be a physical device, a module of a device or a software
module.
VD address
The VD address is assigned automatically by DIGSI Manager. It exists only once in the entire project and thus
serves to identify unambiguously a real SIPROTEC 4 device. The VD address assigned by DIGSI Manager must
be transferred to the SIPROTEC 4 device in order to allow communication with DIGSI Device Editor.
VFD
A VFD (Virtual Field Device) includes all communication objects and their properties and states that are used
by a communication user through services.
VI
VI stands for Value Indication.
Glossary
558 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Index
1,2,3 ...
406
67, 67N -Blocking via FFM 89
A
Action Time 212
Alternating Voltage 355
Analog Inputs 354
ATEX100 148
Automatic Reclosing 209, 403
Auxiliary voltage 354
B
Binary Inputs 355
Binary Outputs 355
Block diagram 434
Blocking Time 213
Breaker Failure Protection 235
Breaker Failure Protection 50BF 405
Broken Wire Monitoring 162
Buffer Battery 154
Busbar protection 115, 120
C
Change Setting Group 312
Changing Setting Groups 49
Checking the System Connections 330
Checking: Breaker Failure Protection 340
Checking: Direction 344
Checking: Phase Rotation 342
Checking: Polarity at Current Input I 347
Checking: Status of Binary Inputs and Outputs 338
Checking: Switching the Configured Operating
Devices 350
Checking: User-Defined Functions 342
Checking: Voltage Transformer Miniature Circuit Breaker
(VT mcb) 343
Circuit Breaker Maintenance 419
Circuit Breaker Monitoring 215
Circuit Breaker Status Detection 215
Climatic Stress Tests 360
Clock 419
Commissioning Aids 419
Communication Interfaces 356
Constructive Design 361
Controlling Protection Elements 216
Cross Blocking 68
CTs
knee-point voltage 113
Current Criterion 123
Current Inputs 354
Current sum monitoring. 154
Current Symmetry Monitoring 157
Current transformers 118
D
Dead Time Start Delay 212
Definite-time Overcurrent Protection 363
Determination of Direction 90
Direct Voltage 354
Direction Check with Load Current 344
Directional intermittent ground fault protection 204,
402
Directional Overcurrent Protection 82, 88, 376
Dynamic Blocking 214
Dynamic Cold Load Pickup 106, 379
E
Earth fault 120
Electrical Tests 358
EMC Tests for Immunity (Type Tests) 359
EMC Tests for Noise Emission (Type Test) 359
EN100-Module
Interface Selection 55
Energy Counter 418
F
Fault Location Determination 232
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 559
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
Fault Locator 232, 404
double ground faults 232
Fault Logging 418
Fault Messages
Seting notes 34
Fault Recording 418
Fault Records 47
Fiber-optic Cables 330
Final Preparation of the Device 352
Frequency protection 138
Frequency Protection 81 O/U 390
Function Blocks 411
G
General Device Pickup 275
General Tripping 275
Ground fault 114, 114
measurements cos ϕ 175
Ground Fault Check 347
Ground fault detection
Direction determination for cos-ϕ/ sin-ϕ 189
Logic with cos-φ/ sin-φ 175
Ground Fault Detection
Current Elements with cos-φ/ sin-φ 173
Current Elements with U0/I0–φ 179
Determination of Direction with cos-φ/ sin-φ 173
Logic with U0/I0 φ 180
Trip delay with U0/I0 φ 190
Tripping Area with U0/I0–φ 179
voltage element with cos-φ/ sin-φ 172
Voltage Element with U0/I0-φ 178
Ground Fault Detection (Sensitive/Insensitive) 395
H
Hardware Monitoring 154
High-impedance Protection 116
Srensitivity 118
Stability 117
Hours Meter "CB open" 279
Humidity 361
I
Inrush Restraint 68, 90, 378
Insulation Test 358
Interlocked 302
Intermittent Ground Fault Protection 198, 401
Inverse Time Overcurrent 62
Inverse-time Overcurrent Protection 365
L
Limits CFC blocks 412
Limits User-defined Functions 412
Line sections 232, 233
Local Measured Value Monitoring 418
Long-Term Mean Values 417
M
Malfunction Responses 170
Mechanical Tests 360
Mesurement Monitoring 154
Min./Max. Memory 417
Monitoring of the Circuit Breaker Auxiliary Contacts 237
Monitoring of the Current Flow 236
N
Negative Sequence Protection 132
Negative Sequence Protection (definite-time character-
istic) 383
Negative Sequence Protection (inverse-time characteris-
tics) 384
Non-Interlocked Switching 302
O
Offset Monitoring 156
Operating Hours Counter 419
Operational Measured Values 416
Ordering Information 426
Output Relays Binary Outputs 355
Overcurrent Protection 56
1-phase 380
pickup value 116, 120
Rated data of a CT 116
time delay 120
trip time delay 116
Overcurrent Protection 1-phase
Current Elements 380
Overcurrent Protection Ground Current
Frequency 380
Overcurrent Protection Single-phase
Frequency 380
Overfrequency 138
Overload Protection 147
Overvoltage Protection 59 123
Index
560 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
P
Phase Rotation 274
Phase Sequence Monitoring 158
Pickup Logic 275
Polarity Check for Current Input I 347
Port A 356
Port B 356
R
Reclosing Programs 212
Regulations 358
Reverse Interlocking 71
Rush stabilisation 90
S
Saved Number of Trips 419
Schalthoheit 305
Schaltmodus 306
Selection of Default Display
Start page 34
Sensitive Ground Fault Protection 172
Service Conditions 361
Setting Group Change 312
Setting Group Change Option of the Functional
Settings 420
Setting Groups Changing 49
Software Monitoring 156
Standard Interlocking 302
Static Blocking 213
Switchgear Control 299
Switching Device Control 421
Synchrocheck 25 409
T
Tank leakage protection 115
Tank Leakage Protection 120
sensitivity 120
time delay 120
Temperatures 360
Terminal Assignments 434
Terminating the Trip Signal 275
Test fault record 350
Testing: System Interface 333
Thermal Overload Protection 393
Thermal Replica 147
Time Allocation 418
Time synchronization 419
Transformer
Saturation voltage 114
Triggering Oscillographic Recording 351
Trip Circuit Supervision 166, 419
Trip tests with circuit breaker 350
Trip/Close Tests for the Configured Operating
Devices 350
Tripping Logic 275
Two-phase Overcurrent Protection 70
U
Überstromzeitschutz einphasig
Dropout Ratios 380
Underfrequency 138
Undervoltage Consideration 65
Undervoltage Protection 27 124
Undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection (27/
Q) 391
User Interface 356
User-defined Functions (CFC) 411
V
Vibration and Shock Stress during Steady-State Opera-
tion 360
Vibration and Shock Stress during Transport 360
voltage controlled 65
Voltage Inputs 354
Voltage limit 115
Voltage Protection 381
voltage restraint 65
Voltage supply 354
Voltage Symmetry monitoring 157
W
Watchdog 156
Index
SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual 561
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
562 SIPROTEC 4, 7SJ80, Manual
E50417-G1140-C343-A8, Edition 12.2017
